ilrfc'^

-^

^,,.,..^.
|>tCrv.

N2.^ '^
,

^uiH (^^^7 /--^

z^o
'"^

fr?^

Digitized by tine Internet Arcliive

in

2007

witii

funding from

IVIicrosoft

Corporation

Iittp://www.arcliive.org/details/comparativegramm01boppuoft

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR
OF THE

SANSKRIT, ZEND,

GREEK, LATIN, LITHUANIAN, GOTHIC, GERMAN,

AND SCLAVONIC LANGUAGES.

BT

PROFESSOR

F.

BOPP.

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN

BY

EDWARD

B.

EASTVVICK,

F.R.S., F.S.A.

VOL.

I.

FOURTH EDITION.

WILLIAMS AND NORGATE:

14,

HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON:

AND
20,

SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.

1885.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

the ado{)tion of the

Work
of
it

as a Lecture

by
It

the extensive use which

Book RawHnson and

at Oxford,

and

other

eminent

scholars have

made

in tlieir researches.

remains to be added, that wliile the Notes and Preface

Professor Wilson, the former Editor, have been re-

made by
tained,
defects,
I

must be myself held responsible

for the errors

and

whatever they

may

be, of the present edition.

EDWARD
Hailbybury Collrgk,
Febrvary, 1864

B.

EASTWICK.

PREFACE
TO THB

FIRST EDITION.

HE

Study of Comparative Philology has of late years been

cultivated in

Germany,

especially,

with remarkable ability

and proportionate success.

of Grimm, Pott, Bopp, and other distinguished Scholars, have given a new
laboui-s
tliis

The

character to
stituted
for

department of literature;
A-ague

and have sub-

the

conjectures
coincidences,

suggested

by

external

and

often

accidental

elementary

principles,

based upon the prevailing analogies of articulate sounds and the

grammatical structure of language.

But although the

fact

that a material advance has

is

been

made

in

the

study of Comparative Philology

particulars

generally

known, and some of the

Literature,
full

have been communi-

cated to the English public through a few works on Classical

or in

the

pages

of

jjeriodical

criticism

yet the

extent of the progress which has been effected,

it

and the steps by which

fectly

has been attained, are impercountry.

appreciated

in
is

tliis

The

study

of

the

Gemian language
sued;

yet far from

being extensively pur-

and the

results

which the German Philologers have

developed, and the

reasonings

which have

led

to

them,

being accessible to those only

writers,

are

withheld
to

who can consult the original from many individuals of education

the
affinities

and learning
are objects

whom

of cultivated

speech
of the

of interest

and

inquiry.

Translations

works, in which the

infonnation

they would

gla'.ll^

seek

U
for, is

PREFACE.
conveyed, are necessary to bring within their reach

the materials that have

been accumulated
the
illustration

by German

in-

dustry and

erudition,

for

of the history of

human
was
of a

speech.

Influenced by these cojisiueialiuis. Lord

Fkancis Egerton
translation

some
of

time

since

induced to propose the

work which

occupies a prominent place in the litera-

ture

Comparative

Philology

on

the

Continent

the
In
has

Vergleichende Grammatik of Professor

this

Bopp

of Berlin.

work

new and remarkable

elaborately

class

of affinities

been systematically and

as his standard

investigated.

Taking

the Sanskrit language. Professor

it

Bopp
witli

has

traced the analogies which associate with

and

each

other the Zend, Greek,

vonic

Latin, Gothic,

German, and Sclathought

to

tongues

and

whatever

may
near

be

of

some

of his arguments, he

may

be considered
a

have estabUshed

beyond

reasonable

question

relationship

between
of

the languages
centuries,

of nations

separated

by the

intervention

and the distance of half the globe, by differences

of physical formation

and

social

institutions,

between
no

the

forms

of

speech

current

among

the

dark-complexioned
of ancient and
suspicion

natives of India and the fair-skinned races

modem Europe; a
existed
fifty

relationship

of

which
been

years ago, and which has

satisfactorily

established

only within a recent period, during which the

Sanskrit language has been carefully studied, and the principles of alphabetical

and syllabic modulation upon which

its

grammatical changes are founded, have been appHed to

kijidred forms ot speech

its

by the Philologers of Germany.

As

the Vergleichende
to

Grammatik of Professor Bopp

some
detail,

is

especially dedicated

a
in

comprehensive comparison of lanthe principles of the

guages, and
Sanskrit
as

exhibits,

the ground-work
it

and connecting bond of the

as likely to
offer

comparison,

was regarded

most

in-

terest to the Philologers of this country, and to be one of

PKEFAC?E.
the most

m
Engllsli

acceptable of

its

class

to

students:

it

was

therefore selected as the

subject of translation.

The

execution of the
siderations

work was, however, opposed bj two conextent of the original, and the copiousness

the

of the illustrations derived from the languages of the East,

the

Sanskrit and the Zend.

A
;

complete translation de-

manded more time than was compatible with Lord F.

Egerton's other occupations

miliarity

and as he professed not a

he

fa-

with

Oriental

Literature,

was reluctant
to

to

render himself responsible for the correctness with M'hich

the orientalisms
Tliis
difficulty
itself

of

the

text

required
rather

be represented.
as

was,

perhaps,

over-rated,
is

the

Grammar
and
the

supplies all the

knowledge that
Sanskrit

needed,

examples

drawn from the

and

Zend

speak for

themselves as intelligiblj as those derived from

In order, however, that the publication
this account,

Gothic and Sclavonic

might not be prevented by any embarrassment on

I offered

my

services in revising this portion of the

satisfaction

work

and have hence the

humbly,
to the

of contributing, however

execution of a task which I consider likely to

give a beneficial impulse to the study of Comparative Philology

in

Great Britain.

The

difficulty

arising

from the extent of the original

its

work, and the consequent labour and time requisite for

translation,

was of a more serious

description.

This,

how-

ever, has

been overcome by the ready co-operation of a

gentleman,
to

who adds a competent knowledge

of

German
Havinii

eminent acquirements as an Oriental Scholar.

mastered several of the

spoken dialects of Western India,

and made himself acquainted with the sacred language of

the

Parsees duiing

the period

of his service under

the
part
to

Presidency of Bombay, Lieutenant

East wick devoted

of a furlough, rendered, necessary by failing health,

residence
in

Germany, where he
him

acquired the additional

the transla-

qualifications enabling

to take a share in

a2

IT
of
the

PREFACE.
\^ergleichen(le
all

tion

Grammatlk.

He

has

accord-

ingly translated

those portions of the ComparatiYe

Gramthe

mar, the

rendering

of which was

incompatible with

leisure of the

Noble Lord with

whom

the design originated,

who has borne a share in its execution, and who has taken warm and liberal interest in its completion. The Vergleicheride Grammatik, originally published in
Parts,

separate

has

not

yet

reached

its

termination.

In

his first plan the author comprised the affinities of Sanskrit,

Zend, Greek, Latin, Gothic, and

its

Teutonic descendants.

To

these,

after the conclusion

of the First Part, he added

the Sclavonic.

He

has since extended his researches to the

analogies of the

Celtic

and the Malay-Polynesian

with
his

dialects,

but has not yet incorporated the results

general

Grammar.
ficient

The
the
it is

subjects already treated of are

quite suf-

for

establishment of the principles of the com-

parison,

and

not proposed to follow him in his subse-

quent

investigations.

The
the

first

portions

of

the

present

Grammar
changes,

comprise
the

doctrine

of

euphonic
of

alphabeticiil

comparative
the

inflexions

Substantives

and

Adjectives, and

affinities

of the Cardinal

and

Ordinal

Numerals.

The succeeding

Parts contain the comparative

the

formation and origin of the Pronouns and the Verbs:

latter subject is yet unfinished.

The
is

part of the translation the

now

offered

to

the public the

stops

with the chapter on

completed,

Numerals,

but

remainder

and

will

be

published without delay.

With
German,
no8S
o

respect to the translation, I

to

may

venture to affirm,
acquaintance with
great
scrupuloiis-

although pretending
that
it

very

slender

has

been
it

made with
fidelity

and care, and that

has required no ordinary pains

render in English, with

difficult

and perspicuity, the not

unfrequently

and obscure

style of the original.

H.
Oetoler, 1845.

11.

Wir^ON.

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

I CONTEMPLATE
in this

work
tlje

a description of the comparatitle

tive organization of the

languages enumerated in the

features

page, comprehending

all

of their relationship,

and an inquiry

into their physical

and mechanical laws, and

untouched, the secret

the origin of the forms which distinguish their grammatical

relations.

One
ideas.

point alone

shall leave

of the roots, or the foundation of the nomenclature of the

primary
root
i

shall
"

not investigate, for example,

";

why

the

signifies

" go

and not " stand

why

the

combina-

tion of sounds
I

stha or sfa signifies

this,

"stand" and not "go."

follow out
as
it

shall

attempt, apart from

its

to

were

the language in

stages of being

and march of develop-

ment; yet

in such

a manner that those who are predeter-

mined not to recognise, as explained, that which they maintain to

be inexplicable,

may

perhaps find

less to offend

them

in

tliis

work than

the avowal of such a general plan might

lead

them

to expect.

In the majority of cases the primary

it,

signification, and,
tical

with

the primary source of the

gramma-

forms, spontaneously present themselves to observation

in

consequence of the extension of our horizon of language,

sisters

and of the confronting of

of the same lingual stock

separated for ages, but bearing indubitable features of their

fUmily connection.
tu)igues a

In the treatment, indeed, of our European

could not
fail

new epoch

to

open upon us in the

discovery of another region in the world of language, namely

the Sanskrit,* of which

it

has been demonstrated, that, in

its

* Samkrita

signifies

guage, " cZasc "; and

race."
It is

"adorned, completed, perfect "; in respect to lanis thus adapted to denote the entire family or
the elements sam,

compounded of

" with," and

krita

(nom.

kritag. krita, kritani)^

"made," with

the insertion of a euphonic a

($). 18. yo.)-

VI

PREFACE.
it

grammatical constitution,

stands in the most intimate relation

;

to the Greek, the Latin, the Germanic, &c.

so that

it

has

afforded, for the first time, a firm foundation for the

com-

prehension of the grammatical connection between the two

langiiages
called the Classical, as well as of the relation of
to

these

two

the

German, the Lithuanian, and Sclavonic.

to us

Who

could have dreamed a century ago that a language

would be brought
accompany,
in
all

from the far East, which should

of form

pan
the

passu, nay, sometimes surpass, the Greek

those perfections

which have been

of

hitlierto

considered

exclusive

property

the

latter,
strife

and

be

adapted

throughout to adjust the perennial

between

the Greek dialects,

of

by enabling us
ancient

to

determine where each

oldest forms ?

them has preserved the purest and the

The
to

relations

of the

Indian

languages to

their

European kindred
every one
:

are, in part, so palpable as to

be obvious

who

casts a glance at

them, even from a dis-

tance

in part,

however, so concealed, so deeply implicated in

the most secret passages of the organization of the language,

that
to

we

are compelled to consider every language subjected

it,

a comparison with

as also the language

itself,

from new

stations of observation,

and

to

employ the highest powers of

grammars.
nature,

grammatical science and method in order to recognise and

illustrate the original unity of the different

The
and,

Semitic

languages

are

of

more

compact
they had

putting out of sight lexicographical and syntactical features,

extremely meagre in contrivance

little

to

pai-t

with, and of necessity have handed

down

to succeeding ages

what they were

endowed with
(.

at

starting.

The

triconthis

sonantal fabric of their roots

107.),

which distinguishes

race from others, was already of itself sufficient to designate the

parentage of every individual of the family.

The

family bond,

on the other hand, which embraces the Lido-Europcan race

of languages,
is

not indeed less universal, but, in most of

its

bearings, of a quality infinitely

more

refined.

The members

of

tliis

race inherited, from the period of their earliest youth.

PREFACE.
endowments of exceeding
(.

tfi

richness, and, with

the

capability

108.), the methods, also, of a system of unlimited

comand

position

and agglutination.

Possessing much, they were able

to retain their local life
;

to bear the loss of

much, and yet

by multipUed
versions

losses,

alterations, suppressions of sounds, con-

and displacements, the members

are

of the
to

common
to the

family
It is

become
a
fact,

scarcely

recognisable

each other.

at least

that the relation of the

Greek

Latin, the most

obvious

and palpable, though never quite

to

overlooked, has been,

stood
;

down

our time, grossly misunder-

and that the

is

Roman
family,

tongue, which, in a grammatical

point of \'iow,

associated with
is

nothmg but

itself,

or with

what

is

of

its

own

even now usually regarded as

fact, it

a mixed language, because, in

contains

much which

sounds heterogeneous to the Greek, although the elements

from which these forms arose are not foreign to the Greek

and other

sister

languages,

to demonstrate in

my

as I have endeavoured partly " System of Conjugation."*

The
of

close relationship

between the Classical and Germanic

lists

languages has, with the exception of mere comparative

words,
copious
indeed,

but

destitute

of

principle

and

critical

judgment, remamed, down to the period of the appear-

ance of the Asiatic intermediary, almost entirely unobserved,

although the acquaintance of philologists with the Gothic dates

now from a century and a half; and that language is so in its Grammar and so clear in its affinities, that had
earlier submitted to a rigorous

perfect
it

been

and systematic process of compervading relation

parison and anatomical investigation, the

this treatise

a. M. 1816. A translation of my English revision of " Analytical Comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin and Teutonic Languages," in the "Annals of Oriental Literature," London

Frankfort
(

18-20.)

by Dr. Pacht,

is

to

be found in the second and third number of the

second annual issue of Seebode's

gogical science.

Griram's masterly German

I

new Record of Philology and PsedaGrammar was unfortunatelyGerman

dialects.

unknown make use

to

me when

wrote the English revision, and I could then

only of Hickes and Fukla for the old

Till

PREFACE.
and, with
it,

of

itself,

of the entire

Germanic

stock, to

the

Greek and Roman, would

unveiled, tracked through

necessarily
all its

have long since been

variations,

and by

this

time

been understood and recogiiised by every philologer.*

For

what

is

more important, or can be more earnestly desired by

the cultivator of the classical languages, than their comparison

with our mother tongue in her oldest and most perfect form

Since the Sanskrit has appeared above our horizon, that element

can no longer be excluded from a really profound investigation

of any province of language related to
it;

fact,

however,

which sometimes escapes the notice of the most approved

and circumspect labourers

* Rask has been the
first to

in

this

department, f

We

need

supply a comprehensive view of the close

Classical Languages, in his

relationship between the

Germanic and the

meritorious prize treatise

"On
It

the Thracian Tribe of Languages,"

com-

pleted in 1814 and published in 1818, from which Vater gives an extract
in his

Comparative Tables.

cannot be alleged as a reproach against

him

that he did not profit

by the Asiatic intermediary not then extenitself the

sively

sensibly, as

known ; we

but his deficiency in this respect shews

see throughout that he

more
with

was

in a condition to use it

intelligence.

Under

that deficiency, however, he almost everywhere

halts halfway

towards the truth.

We

have to thank him for the

suggestion of the law of displacement of consonants, considered and fundamentally developed by

Vater, ^.12.).

more acutely
and see

Grimm

(. 87.,

We

refer the reader to the very

weighty judgment of W. von.

Hum-

boldt on the indispensable necessity of the Sanskrit for the history and

philosophy of language (Indische Bibl.

also,

1.

133).

We may

here borrow,

from Grimm's preface

to

the

second edition of his admirable

(I.

Grammar, some words which

tlie

are worthy of consideration

vt)

**

Aa
ail

too exalted position of the Latin and

Greek

serves

not for

questions in (ierinnn (Jrumniar, where

deeier sound, so

some words are of simpler and

however, according to A.
perfect Indian

W.

Schlegel's excellent rein these casee, 8upj)ly

to be
i)ro-

mark, the

far

more

Grammar may,

the requisite corrections.

The

dialect

which history demonstrates

the oldest and least corrupted must, in the end, present the

most

found rules for the general exposition ol'the race, and thus lead us on to
the reformation, without the entire subversion of the rules hitherto
discovered, of the

more

recoijt

modes of speech."

PREFACE.

IX

not fear that that practical and profound research in idrAque

lingua, which
suffer
for
is

of most

im^wrtance to the pliilologer can

too
real light to

prejudice

the variety

by extension over vanishes when the

false
also,-

many

languages
is

identity

recogis

nised

and explained, and the

It
is

of discrepancy
learn

excluded.

one

thing,
i.e.

language,

another to teach one,

organization.

to

describe
confine

its

mechanism and

The

learner

may

himself within the

naiTowest limits, and forbear to look beyond the language

to

be studied

the teacher's glance, on the contraiy,

must pass

beyond the confined hmits of one or

mfuse

two members of a family,

order, and organic mutual

and he must summon around liim the repi'esentatives of the

entire race, in order to
life,

dependency

into the

mass of the languages spread before him.

To

attempt this appears to

me

the main requirement of the

present period,

and past centuries have been accumidating

materials for the task.

The Zend Grammar could only be recovered by

unknown
and
is

the process

of a severe regidar etymology, calculated to bring back the

to the

known, the much

to the little

for this re-

markable language, which in

many
to

respects reaches beyond,

its

an improvement on, the Sanskrit, and makes

attainable,

theory

more
tlie

would appear

be no longer

intelli<^ible to

disciples of Zoroaster.

Rask, who had the opportunity to

d-

satisfy
p.

himself on this head, says expressly (V.

its

Haoren,
I

33) that

forgotten lore has yet to be rediscovered.

am

also able, I believe, to

demonstrate that the

PeHvi

ti-ans-

lator (tom. II. pp.

476,et seq.) of the Zend Vocabulary, edited

entii-ely failed in

by Anquetil, has frequently and

the grammatical sense of the

conveying
translates.

Zend words which he

;

The work abounds with

relation of Anquetil's
sions
is

singular mistakes

and the distorted

French

translation to the

Zend expresiji

usually to be ascribed to the mistakes

the Pehlvi
the oblique
:

interpretations of the
cases,

Zend
to

original.

Almost
as

all

by

degi-ees,
too, ai-e

come

take rank

nominatives

the

numbers,

sometimes mistaken.

Fui-ther,

we fiud forms

PREFACE.
of cases produced

by the

Pelilvi translator as verbal persons,

and next these

also

confounded with each other, or translated

Anquetil makes, as far as
to the
I

by

abstract nouns.*

know, no

* I give the

Zend expressions according

system of representation

explained in ^.30., annexing the original characters, which are exhibited

in

type for the

first

time in this book, and which were lately cut at the

order of the Royal Society of Literature by R. Gotzig, according to the

exemplar of the lithographed M.S. of M. Burnouf.

words exactly according
")7/iwi',"

I give the Pehlvi

to Anquetil

(II.

435):

^c&auCa) ahmdhem,

P.

rouman

(cf. p.

502, roman, "nos'"), A.

.

"jV

"moij"

m^jq^m
A. '^bon"

ahubya,

''bonis"

(with dual termination,

aeti, " Ai,"

215), P. avaeh,

'^excellent;"

k5^;oaj

"," P. varman, " w," A. "lui;"

P. djanounad,

^CfeV^uU
est;"

anhem, "I was," or

anheus,

also

"I am,"

"he

is,"

A. "il

Mi>c^^

"mundi"

F.akhe, A. '^lemonde;" ^vyyvj;OAAt

''ii"

avaesJianm, ''horum" P.varmouschan,

A. "eux;" j^jaj/ajj baraiti,

^^fert" P. dadrouneschm, "the carrying" {esckne, in Pehlvi, forms abstract

substantives),

A. "iZ porte," 'HI execute" ^^pm'terf avj^j

bis,

"twice,"

P. dou, "two," A. ''deux;" berStebio

^^^j^aj/aJj

baratihyo, ''ferenti-

bus?" (unquestionably a plural dative and ablative), P. dadrouneschne, " the

carrj^ing," A. "porter;"

i^^

tS, ''tui,"
"P.

P. tou, "tu," A. "toi;"

aj^jw^

tdcha, " eaque," (neut. .231),

zakedj,

A."ce;" ^^Xi^Jato, "the

smitten" (cf. Sansk. hatas from Aan), P. rnaitouned, "he smites," A. "/ frappe ;" rK>j<iiM^ Jf^^oi^ " te smote," P. maitouneschiie, " the smiting,"

A.

''

frapper ;"

A>/ovsi(

zahthra, ''per genitorem" P. zarhounad, " gistri,

gnit" A. 'HI engendre" ^7^jj

^^/i^ojj strim, ''feminam" P.
''

''femina" V.vakad, A. ''femeUe

''

;"

vahad, A.

femeUe " 9"^^50>W

itdrahm,

steUaruin," P. setaran, A. "fcs itoiles;" jax)^axs4A)Oo fra-ddtdi, "to

the given," or " ebpecially given," P. feraz dcheschne {noinen actionis),

A. ''dormer abondamment ;" ^v>4>AjC3;t3AJ gaUhanaiim^ ''viundorum"

P.

guehan

(cf. ^jL.*.),

A.

"Zie

rnonde ;" asas^^^juj^ gdtumcha, "locumnars, " of the

que" P. gdh,

A. " lieu ;"

Myxs3

man," P. guebna hamat

dott,

advak, A. " un

homme ;"
;"

aj7a5> nara,
iAjg j/jAuy

" two men," P. guebna hamat

A. " deux hommes

v>}

ndirikanahm, "Jeminaiiim," P. nai'

Hk hamat
rumque"

sS,

A. " trois

(ou plusieurs)

fcmmes ;"

^vjj,ii7(3

thiyannij

" trium" P. sevin, A. "troisieme;" AJ^^cCxilp

vahmemcha, "prcEcla-

P. nSaeschnS, " adoratio" A. " je fais rieaeich ;" jAuCAjlp vah-

mdi, "prcechiro" P. neaeschj kojunn, " adorationem Jaclo" A. "je benis

et

PREFACE.

Xi
to

remark on the age of the Vocabulary

he ascribes
to another,

which

I advert; while
is

in

which the Pehlvi

interpreted

tlirough the Persian, an antiquity of four centuries.

The

etfais nSaesch." I do not insist on translating the adjective A5CA}(p

by " prceclan/s," but

nothino: else

valma vahmen and vahmdi are than the accusative and dative of the base vahma; and that
I

am

certain of this, that

^auCa)9 vahmdi could be the

sible tor a

first

person of a verb

is

not to be thought pos-

moment. Anquetil, however, in the interlinear version of the beginning of the V. S. attempted by him, gives two other evident datives compounded with the particle
ajpa cha,

"and," as the

first

person singular of the

present, viz. a5^jax3/o|>a5>ji\?(S^ csnaothrdi-cha, AJcJA5AJi^AJ^AJj3AJuA

J'raia'stoyae-cha (see. 164.J,

by '^placere cupio"

''votafacio.
I

One

*ees

then, from the

example here adduced, the number of which

could with

ease greatly increase, that the Pehlvi Translator of the said Vocabulary
has,

no more than Anquetil, any grammatical acquaintance with the Zend

it

language, and that both regarded

rather in the light of an idiom, poor

in inflexions; so that,as in the Pehlvi

and Modern Persian, the grammatical

to

power of the members of a sentence would be

their position than

be gathered rather from

from their terminations.

And

Anquetil expressly

says

(II. 415.):

"

La

construction dans la langue Zende, semblable. en cela

aiLX autrcs idiomes de T Orient, est astreinte

a peu de
la

regies

(/).

La forPersan,
let
tlic

mation des

terns des Verbes

y
it,

est

a peu pres

memc que dans

le

plus trainante cependant, parce gu'elle est accompagnee de toutes

voyelles
{.').

How

stands

then, with the Sanskrit translation of

Jzeschne made from the Pehlvi more than three centuries before that of
Acquetil.

This question

will,

without doubt, be very soon answered by

M.

E. Burnouf,

who

has already supplied, and admirably illustrated

(Nouv. Journ.

Asiat., T. III. p. 321),

its

two passages from the work

the V. S.

in

very interesting extract from

Commentary on

These pas-

sages are, however, too short to permit of our grounding on

them over-

bold influences as to the whole

moreover, their contents are of such a

nature that the inflexionless Pehlvi language could follow the Zend original almost verbatim.

The one passage

(? cf.

signifies,

"

I call

upon,

magS.,

nify the excellent pure spell,

strict,

and the excellent man, the pure and the

Sansk. upamdna, "similarity;" and V.
It
is,

strong like

Dami

p. 4*23,

ddmois drujo) Izet."

however, very surprising, and of evil

genitive

omen, that Neriosengh, or his Pehlvi predecessor, takes the feminine dahmayds as a plural genitive, since this expression is evidently, as Burnouf rightly remarks, only an epithet of dfntois. I abstain from
speaking of the dubious expression ddmois ujjamanahe, and content

mySfcll'

XII

PREFACE.
in question

one

cannot therefore be ascribed

to

any very

late

period.

The

necessity, indeed, of interpretation for the

felt

Zend
It

must have been

much

sooner than for the Pehlvi, which

tribes.
its

remained much longer current among the Parsee

was

therefore an admirable problem which had for

solution

the bringing to light, in India, and, so to say, under the very

eve of the Sanskrit, a

sister languaore,
;

no longer understood,

and obscured by the rubbish of ages

doubt will be.
tliis
liis

a problem of which the

beyond

solution indeed has not hitherto been fully obtained, but

The

first

contribution to the knowledge of

language which can be relied on

treatise

that of Rask namely,

Zend Language
high honour
able

"

On

the age and authenticity of the

and the Zend-Avesta," published in 1826, and made generally

accessible

by V.

d.

Hagen's

translation, deserves

as a first attempt.

The Zend has

to

thank

this

man

(whose premature death

natural appearance which
of the value of
its

we
it

deeply deplore) for the more

has dei'ived from his rectification

written characters.

Of

three words of

different declensions

he gives us the singular

inflections,

though

with some sensible deficiencies, and those, too, just in the places

where the Zend forms are of most

interest,

and where are some

which display that independence of the Sanskrit which Rask

claims, perhaps in too high a degree, for the

Zend

a language

we

are, however, unwilling to receive as a mere dialect of

the Sanskrit, and to which

we

are compelled to ascribe an

independent existence, resembling that of the Latin as comj)arcd with the

Greek, or the Old Northern with the Gothic.

the reader to

For the

rest, I refer

my
the
also

review of Rask's and

Bohlen's treatises on the

Criticism for

Zend

in

Annual of
to

Scientific

December 1831,

as

an

cai'lier

work

(March 1831) on the able labours of E. Burnouf in

self
81

this

newly

with having pointed out the poBsibility of another viewoftho C(W-

ruction, different

from that whiirh has been very profoundly

diaciisn*^

Tho second pftswi,-^ by Burnouf, and which is based on Nyvioscngh. sij.r<iifie8, " 1 call upon and maf;nify the stars, the moon, tbi' ijuii, lUc
eternal, sclf-crvatcd lightb!

PREFACE.
ojxjned field.

Xlll

My

observations, derived from the original texts

Paris,

edited by

Bumouf in
Grammar

and by Olshausen

in

Hamburgh,
all

already extend themselves, in these pubhcations, over

of the Zend
;

parts
for

and nothing therefore has remained

me

here, but further to establish, to complete, and to adjust the

particulars in such a

manner

that the reader

may

be conducted

on a

coui'se parallel with that of the

known

languages, with the

greatest facility towards an acquaintance with the newly-disco-

vered

sister

tongue.

In order to obviate the

difficulty

and the

labour which attend the introduction of the learner to the Zend

and Sanskrit

difficulty

sufficient to deter

many, and

to harass

anyone

have appended

to the original characters the

pronun-

ciation, laid

down on
is

a consistent method, or in places where, for

is

reasons of space, one character alone

given,

it is

the

Roman.

This method

also perhaps the best for the gradual introduc-

tion of the reader to the

knowledge of the
it

original characters.

As
their

in this

work the languages

i. e.

embraces are treated for

own
I

sakes,

as objects
at giving

and not means of knowledge,

a ph^-siology of them than an
it

and as

aim rather

inti'oduction to their practical use,

has been in

my

power
to

to

omit

many

particulars

which
;

contribute

nothing

the

character of the

whole

and

have gained thereby more

space for the discussion of matters more important, and more

intimately incorporated with the vital spuit of
tlie

languaore.

By

this process,

and by the
view
I

strict

observance of a method w hich

brings under one

all

points

mutually dependent and

myself, succeeded in

mutually explanatory,

have, as

I flatter

assembling under one group, and in a reasonable space, the

leading incidents of
dialects of

many richly-endowed languages

or grand

an extinct original stock.

Special care has been

bestowed tliroughout on the German.

sable to one
at applying to

This care was indispen-

who, following Grimm's admirable work, aimed

it

the correction and adjustment that had becouK'!

tlie

necessai-y in his theory of relations,

discovery of new

affinities,

or the more precise definition of those discovered, and to catch,

with greater truth, at every step of granmiatic;d progress, the

XJV

PREFACE,
sisterhoorl.
affi-

monitory voices of the Asiatic as well as the European

It

was necessary,
;

also, to set aside

many
i i

false

appearances of

nity
its

as, for

example, to deprive the

in the Lithuanian geri of

supposed connection with the

of Gothic, Greek, and Latin

p.

forms, such as g6dai, ayadot, honi (see

251, Note

f,

and comof lupis

pare

Grimm L

827. 11); and to disconnect the Latin

/$

ts

(Jupihus)

from the Greek

in

of Kvkoi^ (KvKot-cri).

As
of

concerns

the method followed

treating

the

subject

Germanic

grammar,

it

is

that of deducing all

from the Gothic as the

guiding star of the German, and explaining the latter simultaneously with the older languages and the Lithuanian.
of each lecture on the cases, a tabular view
obtained, in
is

At the close

given of the results

,

which every thing naturally depends on the most

be put forward capriciously,

accurate distinction of the terminations from the base, which

ought not, as usually happens,

so that a portion of the base

to
is

drawn

into the inflection,

useless,

by

which the division becomes not merely

as

but injurious,
is

productive of positive

error.

Where
164, the
cf.
.

there

no
:

real

termination none should be appended for appearance sake

for example,

thus,

we

give,

148,

p.

nominatives x^P'^*
137.

terra, giba, &c., as without inflection

The

division

gib- a

would lead us

to adopt the erroneous notion that

it is

is

tho

termination, whereas

only the abbreviation of the o (from tho

old d,

69.) of the theme.*

In certain instances

it is

extraordi-

* The simple

maxim

laid

dovm

elsewhere by me, and deducible only

is

from the Sanskrit, that the Gothic 6

tends
influence over the whole

the long of a, and thereby

when
6,

shortened nothing but a, as the latter lengthened can only become

its

ex-

explains, for

grammar and construction of words, and example, how from dags, "day " (theme DAG A), may be de-

rived, without change of vowel, days

tion
is

{DOG A),

"daily "; for this deriva-

absolutely the

fiom

riijata,

when in Sanskrit rdjata, " argentcua," comes "^argentum," on which more hereafter. Generally speaking,
same
as
is

and with few exceptions, the Indian system of vowels, pure from consonantal

and other altering influences,

dation of the

of extraordinary importance for the eluciit

German grammar: on

principally rests

my own my

theory of
I

vowel change, which

dittirs materially

from that of Grimm, and whicli

explain by ujcchanical Liws, with some modifications of

earlier defini-

tions

PREFACE.
narilj difficult in languages not
hit

XV
to

now thoroughly understood

on the right
from
true.

divisions,
I

and

to distinguish apparent terminato conceal these difficul-

tions
ties

have never attempted

to

from the reader, but always

remove them from

its

his path.

The High German,

especially in

oldest period (from the

eighth to the eleventh century), I have only mentioned in the

general description of forms

importance.

when

it
it

contributes something of
in its tliree

The

juxta-position of

main periods

with the Gothic, grammatically explained at the close of each

chapter,
is sufficient,

with a reference also to the treatise on

facilitate

sounds intended to prepare and

after the

my

whole Grammar,

model of

my

Sanskrit

Grammar.
are

Wherever, in
they
the

addition,

explanatory

remarks
part will

necessary,

are

given.

The second

thus

begin with

comthen

parative view of the

Germanic

declensions,

and

1 shall

proceed to the adjectives, in order to describe their formations

of gender and degrees of comparison
;

from these

to the pronoims.

As

the peculiarities of inflection of the latter

must have,

for

the most part, already been discussed in the doctrine of the

xuiiversal formation of the cases,

inasmuch as they are

inti-

mately connected and mutually

illustrative,

what

will

remaui to

be said on their behalf will claim the

less space,

and the main

compass of the second division will remain for the verb.

the formation and comparison of words
it

To

is

my

intention to

devote a separate work, which

of
its

may be considered

as a completion

antecedent

In this latter the particles, conjunctions,

will find their place, being, I consider,

and original prepositions,

partly offshoots of pronominal roots, and partly naked roots of

tions,

while with

Grimm

it

has a d^'namic signification.

comparison

with the Greek and Latin vocalism, without a steady reference to the
Sanskrit,
is,

in

my

opinion, for the

is

German more

confusing than enlig'htits

ening, as the Gothic

least

generally more original in

vocal system, and at

latter spends its

more consistent than the Greek and Latin, which

whole

w^ealth of vowels, although not without pervading rules, in

merely

responding to a solitary Indian a {spptinnu for septamaa^ qualuor for

c/uUvdr-us TfVffa^-ej, momordi f r mamarda).

XVi
this class of

FBEFACE.
words,* and
wliicli will, therefore,

be treated in
It Is

this

point of view

among
in

the pronominal

adjectives.f

likely that a

chasm

our literature, very prejudicial

filled

to inquiries

of this kind,
press,

may

be shortly

up by a work ready

for the

general philology, the Old

for by all friends of German and High German Treasury of Graff'. What we may expect from a work founded on a comprehensive

and earnestly looked

examination of the
foreign, as well as

MS.

treasures

of libraries

national

and

on a correction of printed materials,

may be
" The

gathered from a survey of the amount contributed to knowledge

in a specimen of the work, small, but happily selected,

Old High German

Prepositions."

* I refer the reader preliminarily to my two last treatises (Berlin, Ferd. Diimmler) " On Certain Demonstrative Bases, and their connection with
various Prepositions and Conjunctions," and "

On

the Influence of Pro-

nouns on the Formation of Words." Compare, also, C. Gottl, Schmidt's excellent tract " Quaest, Gramm. de Praepositionibus GrsBcis," and tho
review of the same, distinguished by acute observations, by A. Benary,
in the Berlin

Annual (May 1830).

If

we

take the adverbs of place in

their relation to the prepositions

find in close connection

and a near relation does exist we shall

the Affinity of the Adverbs of Place to

with the subject a remarkable treatise of the

minister

W.

von Humboldt,

"On

the Prepositions in certain Languages.'

rules

The Zend has many grammatical

discoveries,

which were established without these

and have since

a satisfaction

been demonstrated by evidence of facts.

Among them it was

tome
in the

to find a word, used in Sanskrit only as a preposition {ava,

"from,")
find

Zend a

perfect

and declinable pronoun (.172.).

in Sanscrit
is

Next we
its

sa-cha, '^isque,"
AJftJAJfeV

which

only a pronoun, in

Zend shape

ha-cha

(^.

53.), often

used as a preposition
itself,

to signify

"out of"

tlie

particle

mm

cha, *'and," loses

like the cognate que in absque, in

the general signification.

" Remark.
older a
is

What in
o,

G8. is said of the rise of the

m or o out of the
and

so far to be corrected according to

is

my

later conviction, that

to the liquids;

nothing but a retroactive influence

the u and the
in

to

be ascribed

forms ViVc

pliiitet?m {mo), plintyu, are to

be exempted

from the influence of the antecedent consonants."

t The arrangement thus announced,

be seen, considerable modification.

as intended, has undergone, as will

Editor.
F.

BOPP.

Berlim, 1833.

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Sanskrit
writinor

distinguishes the

long from their cordistinguish the long

responding short vowels by particular characters, slightly

differing

from these

latter in form.

We

vowels, and the diphthongs

t

and

^
a,

o,

which spring from

and u united with an antecedent

first,

by a circumflex.

The
to
all

simple vowels are,

languages, a,
liar to
i,

the three, original and

;

common
r, r,

u,

short and long

I

secondly, a vowel

pecu-

the Sanskrit, which

r.

distinguish
is

by

and

it

long

sound by

The

short r (^)

pronounced
i,

like the con-

sonant r with a scarcely-distinguishable

texts is usually written ri;

and in European
is

the long r

("^

scarcely to
i.

be distinguished from the union of an r with a long

Both

vowels appear to

me

to be of later origin

and r presents
rarer occurr,

itself generally as a

shortening of the syllable ar by supr

pression of the
rence.

a.

The long
it

(^)

is

of

much

In declension

stands only for a lengthening of the

where, according to the laws of the formation of cases, a short

vowel at the end of the

inflective base

must be lengthened;

and in the conjugation and formation of words, those roots to

which grammarians assign a terminating

substitute for this
after labials,
"gjH ur.

^
ar,

almost always
ir,

unoriginal vowel

^^

ir, or,

The

last

simple vowel of the Sanskrit

[G. Ed.
p. 2.]

writing belongs

more
:

to the
it is

grammarians
;3

than to the language

nunciation,

in character, as well as in proZ

an union of an

with

r (t^), or,

when

lengthened, with "^ r (^).

We

require no representative
it.

for this vowel, and shall not further advert to

2.

Sanskiit possesses two kinds of diphthongs.

In the one,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

i

a short a united with a following

to the French ai\ and

becomes

v.

(equivalent

with u becomes

6 (equivalent to
is

the French au)\ so that neither of the united elements

heard, but both melt into a third sound.

In the second kind,

ai,
;

a long d with a

following

^
In

becomes ^
waise,
syllable,

and with

w,

au, as in the

German words
fix

baum

so that the

two elements form indeed one

oi-der,

but are both audible.

however, to

the observation

on the greater

weight of the a in this diphthong, we write di for ^, and du

for

^.

That
is

in

and
last

o a short, in

di

and

du,

a long a

bound

up, I infer

from

this,

that where, in order

to avoid a hiatus, the

element of a diphthong merges

into its corresponding semi-vowel, out of

and

d pro-

ceed the sounds

of

^S(X(

ay and ^f^ av (with short

proceed dy and
dvIf,

a),

but out

^
t,

di and

'^ du

according to

the rules of combination, a concluding ^t

or
a,

"^

u, gi

short

into

with an ^ i, w of a following word, be contracted, like the 6, but not into $ di and ^ S and ^t du,
d,

this, in
its

my view, is

to be

understood as
initial

if

the long

a,

before

combination with the

itself.

vowel of the following word,

less surprise us, as the

had shortened

This should the

long a before a dissimilar vowel of an appended inflexion or

a suffix entirely disappears;
and,
for

example,

dadd

makes neither ^^H(^ daddus, nor ^^^ dadds, but ^5^ dadus. The opinion I have already expressed on
with 7F^
uis

[G. Ed. p. 3.]

this
;

point

have since found confirmed

in

by the Zend
su}<port, also,

in

which jaw di always stands

di,

the place
du.

of the Sanskrit

and

gui

do or

>juli

du

for

^
or

In

of

my

theory, appears

the

fact, that

a conbe-

cluding a (short or long) with a following

^"^ 6,

comes ^

di and

^ du

of
^

which
and
6

it is

to be understood, that

the short a contained in

merges with the antecedent

i

a into a long

a,

which then, with the

6,

of the diphthong

^,

di, and with the u of I^WW mamditat, from nr vnn^

becomes

becomes du.
is to

For example,
be understood

mama Hat,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

as
if

the diphthong
A,

F
6,i.

united

its first

element a with the

its

preceding a into

and with

this,

further united

last

element
3.

(0

into

[Compare

$ 688, p. 917.]

Among
o)

the simple vowels the old Indian alphabet

is

deficient in the designation of the

(e

Greek epsilon and omici*on

and

whose sounds,

if

they existed when the Sanskrit was

livins:

languasfe, yet coald only have evolved themselves,

subsequently to the fixing of its written character, out of the

short a; for an alphabet which lends itself to the subtlest

gradations of sound would assuredly not have neglected the

difference between a,
e^

and

o, if

the sounds had been forth-

coming.*

It is

important here to observe, that in the oldest

Germanic

dialect,

namely, the Gothic, the sounds and charac-

ters of the short e and o are also wanting,

a,
i,

and that either

or u corresponds, in that dialect, to our

German

short

e-

For example, /aZfAa, "ich falte,*" "I fold ;" giba, "ich gebe," "I give." In the Zend the Sanskrit ^ a remains usually aj a,
or has changed
rules, into ^
e.

itself,

according to certain

[G. Ed. p. 4.]

Thus, for example, before a concluding

g e;

we always find
pvthra-he with

compare the accusative ^^<3>a)

;

juthre-tyi

"filium" with trjt p/im-7n

^s^^^
o,

and

its

genitive

H5Aj7(j>a)

putra-sya.

In Greek the Sanskrit

^a

becomes

d,

e,

or

without presenting any certain rules for the

choice on each occasion between these three vowels; but the

prevailing practice
is,

that in the terminations

of nominal

Greek o answers to the Indian ^ a, except in the vocatives, where an e is substituted. In the Latin, besides
bases the
a, e,

and

6,

u also

is

employed, in the terminations of nouns

fii'st

of the second declension and of the

in

person plural, as also

some adverbial suffixes, to replace the Sanskrit ^ a 4. As in the Greek the short Sanskrit a is oftener replaced
e

by

or o than by a short
;

a,

so the long WT d

is

oftener re-

* Giioim, Vol. i. p. 51)4 with whom I entirely concur in this matter; having locg abaudoued a contrary opinion, which I maintained in 1819 in the Ani;als of Oriental Literature.

b2

4
presented by
;;

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

or
to

than by a long alpha

and though in the

Doric the long a has maintained

itself in places

where the
becomes
termi-

ordinary dialect employs an

for
o) is
;

>;,

no similar trace of the long d

I place,"

to be found,

^Tfi? dadhdmi, "

;

TtdrjfMt

^ifiT daddmi, " I give," ^iSwfit

irrJT

the

dual

nation
to
is

tdm answers to

rrjv,

and only in the imperative

Twv

on the other hand, the

wi/.

^T^T

dm
a
1^

of the genitive plural

if

always represented by

Never,
r}

we except pecu-

liarities of dialect,

does either

or

stand for the Indian

i

diphthongs
a long d
for
:

or

^,

formed by

or an
ei

^ u
or

following

for the

first,

the

Greek

substitutes

ot

(because

a,

and

also for a, e and o are the substitutes),

and for
elfxi
;

the

last, ev

or ov.

Thus,

^fjT Smi, " I go,"

Tri-nTotg',

becomes

xrw^ pates, "thou mayest

oiBa
this
;

fall,""

^
or
o,

veda, " I

know,"

jft

go,

mas. fem. " a bullock or

i

heifer,"" ^ov-q.
e

From
and
6
it

dropping of the
5.]

or

in the Indian diphthongs

[G. Ed. p.

may happen
divri,*

that a,

e,

answer

to these

diphthongs
e<aTepof
;

thus, FoFjTT^ ikataras, "

one of two," becomes

^^

"brother-in-law," Latin, levir {nom. ^^J

devd, accus.

^^^

devar-am), becomes ^a:^p (from daf-qp, Bai-

f^p)

t^^

deva-s, "

God," edj

and the o in ^o6g,

/Sot

stands
f,

for ^ov-6s, l3ov-i, the u of

which must have passed into

and

certainly did so at

first,

as is proved

by the transition
long

into the
gd-i.

Latin
5.

bovis, bovi,

and the Indian

"nf^

gavi (^locative) from

e,

In Latin

we sometimes

find the

which, however,

may

be shortened by the influence of the following conso-

nant, arising

mentioned word

from the mixture of a and i, as in the aboveUvir, and in the subjunctive amSmus ; cf.

ihmliH kdmayima,
6. If

from hdmaya-ima.
I

we

inquire after the greater or less relative weight

of the

vowels of different quality,

have discovered, by

is

European texts it and the absence of any sign for the vowel sound it seems advisable, therefore, to is calculated to cause embarrassment expreds "% by ri. Editor.
original has devr^ but, as observed in p. ], in

The

usual to write ri for

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

various but sure appearances, which
in
I shall

further illustrate

my

treatise

on Forms, that in Sanskrit

a and

^ d are
t
;

graver than the corresponding quantity of the vowel

this discovery is of the

and

utmost importance for every Treatise

It

on special as well as comparative Grammar.

leads us, in

particular, to important discoveries with respect to the Ger-

manic modification of vowels. In Latin, also, the i may be considered as lighter than a, and generally takes the place of the latter when a root with an origrinal a would otherwise be
burthened with a reduplication of sound. Hence, for example,
abjicio for ahjacio, tetigi for fetagi, I

am

compelled by this
i

view to retract an earlier conjecture, that the have

in
also to relieve myself

in tetigi

was
{.

produced by a virtue of assimilation in the termination

from

my former theory, that

the e

words

like inermis, imberbis, instead of

[G. Ed. p. 6.]

inarmis, imbarbis, springs

from a retrospective power of

i,

assimilation in the following

fication of the

after the fashion of the

p. 80),

modi-

vowel in

German (Grimm,

and must

place

it

in the

same

class with the e in such

forms as abjectus

and tubken.

a double alteration,

The Latin radical a, for instance, is subject to when the root is burthened with ante:

cedent syllables or words

e if

it

becomes

i in

open

syllables, but

the vowel

is

pressed upon by a following consonant un-

attended by a vowel.

Hence we have

tubicen, abjectus, in

contrast to tubicinis, abjicio; and ineJinis, imberbis, Tiot inirmis, imbirbis

:

insepidxis.
first

on the contrary, inimicus, insipidus, not inemicus, In connection with this stands the transition of the

or f econd declension into the third.

for
o,

As us is

the masculine
;

form

we ought
i.

to say intrmus, imberbus

but inermis,
les

imberbis,

and other such forms, owe their origin to the

er

weight of the
it

With the displacement

of the accent,
;

where

occurs, this change of the vowel has nothing to do

but the

removal of the accent and the weakening of the vowel are

nearly related, and are both occasioned by the composition.
In the Lithuanian

we

find similar

appearances

as. for

ex-

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

is

ample, 2>owas, "lord," at the end of compoumis,

into ponis, as rotponis, " councillor,"
p. 1805,
7.

weakened
(See

Germ,

rathsherr.''''

Note

*).

Sanskrit

Grammar
is

gives no certain indication of the

relative weight of the

vowels.

The w

u with regard to the other original a vowel too decided and full of character to
relief of its
all,

allow^ of its

being exchanged in this language, in

It is

weight, for any other letter.

the most obstinate of

and admits of no exclusion from a terminating

cases where a and
[G. Ed. p.
7.]
*

syllable, in

admit suppression.

Nor

will it retire

from a reduplicated

syllable in cases
i.

where

a allows

itself to

be weakened down to
a,

Thus

in Latin

we

have pupKgi, tutudi; while

duced to
*

in cases of repetition, is re-

or e

{tetigi, fefelli,

&c.)
:

In the Gothic, also, the

u may boast

of its pertinacity

it

remains firm as the

i it

ter-

minating vowel of nominal bases where a and

have under-

gone suppression, and in no single case has

guished or transmuted.
will not yield at last to

been extin-

No
;

power, however, exists which

time

and thus

in the

High German,

whose oldest records are nearly four centuries younger than

Ulphilas, the

has, in

many
i.

cases,

given way, or become in

declension similar to
8. If, in

(See also 490, 684.)

the matter of the relative dignity of the vowels,

we

cast a glance at another race of languages,

we

find in
its

Arabic

the u taking precedence in nobility, as having

place in the

nominative, while the declension

of the terminating vowel
;

is

governed by the change

itself to

i,

on the contrary, shews

its

be the weakest vowel, by having

place in the genitive, the

most dependent case of the Arabic, and one which cannot be separated from the governing word. /, also, is continually
used incases where the grammatical relation a preposition.
is

expressed by
tlie

Compare,

also, in

the plural, the una of

nominative with the termination ina of the oblique cases.

stands between the strong u and the weaker i;
the threefold change of vowels has
its

and under

place in the accusative.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

which admits of more freedom than the genitive.
of vowels,
in the

7
In the

oblique eases, however, of nouns, and in the two-fold change

it

stands opposed to the u of the nominative, and

dependent subjunctive of the verb to the u of the

at the close of

independent indicative.
9.

Between the vowels and the consonants, or

list

the

of vowels, are

commonly placed two

of,

signs, the

sounds
8.]

of which are rather to be considered as ap-

[G. Ed. p

pendages to, or modifications

the preceding vowels, than as

independent sounds, and take,

also,

no place in the alphabet of

the Native Grammarians, inasmuch as they are considered

neither as consonants nor vowels, but rather as complements

to the latter.

The
;"

first,

which we distinguish by
is,

n, is

called
[

Anusicdra, " echo

and

in fact, a thick nasal echo,

of a

which

think

is

best represented

by the nasal n at the end

is

French

syllable.

The weakness
it i

of its expression

discernible in the

fact that

does not, like a consonant, impede the euphonic

influence of an

or w on a following
It

s,

(see Sanskrit

Gram-

mar, R.

101^).
TT r),

has

its

place before semi-vowels (^ y,

h;

T
it

r,

cU

/,

sibilants,

and

and we might thence term

of consonants, and assign
its

the nasal of the two last

lists

alphabetical place between them.

concluding ^ m,
passes into

fol-

lowed by a consonant of the said two

with the French

lists,

Anu-

swara; for example, Am\H tasydm, "in this," becomes

tasydn,

w^
n

nasal pronunciation of the n, if such

" in the night,"

a word as ^t%1 rdtrdu,

nection with the
also
TT
8

come

after.

In con-

of a verbal termination, a radical t^

;

passes into

Anuswara

as, ^fifT hansi,

" thou killest,"

from

han^

Great confusion, however, has arisen from

the nasal

the circumstance that the Indian copyists allow themselves to

express the unaltered concluding n m^Bs well as

alterations, and, in the

all

middle of words, each of the six nasal

I

sounds (the proper Anuswara included), by Anuswara.*

have

* The practice is not unauthorized by rule. A final ^ is convertible to Anuswara before any consonant (Pan. 8. 3. 23 ) and a media T or J? is
;

convertible

8
endeavoured, in

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

my Grammar, to remedy this confusion in the

simple theory of Anus wara.

of Sanskrit

My predecessors in the treatment

distinction

Grammar make no

between the real

it,

and the supposititious Anuswara.

[G. Ed.
p. 9.]

Colebrooke gives
n,

in

general, the pronunciation of

and

calls it

"a shortening of the nasal consonants at the end of a

the concluding
q-

syllable,"

\vhich leads to the error, that each of the nasal characters, even
n,

may

be abbreviated

into Anuswara.

Forster expresses it by the n in the English word plinth; Carey and Yates by the English combination ng; Wilkins by m. All substitute it for the concluding jt^ of grammatical

terminations

and as they give rules

for the transition of the

Anuswara into i? or tt ,the necessary consequence occurs, that we must write abhavan or abhavang/' I was ;" dantan or dantang,
*

a tooth

;"

not abhavam, dantam.

Colebrooke, on the

other hand, expressing a Sanskrit inscription in Roman letters

(Asiatic Transactions, Vol. VI[.) gives the proper termination m,

and before

t,

by a euphonic rule, n; but he maintains

the original

m
;

before sibilants and half vowels where

Anu-

swara

is

due

as vidwishAin srimad, for f^f?r^T vidwish&n.

On
the

the other hand, F. von Schlegel and

Frank write

n, for

value of Anuswara, in the place of m in several grammatical

terminations.

The

first,

for example, gives danan, "a gift," for

for aliam, "I."

ddnam; the second, ahan

gives rightly

A.

W. von

Schlegel

instead of a spurious or representative

Anu-

swara at the end of words; andmakes,forexample,the

termination in
turn,

infinitive

not in tun or tung. He, nevertheless, on this

important point of grammar, retains the erroneous opinion,

that the

Anuswara

is

a variable nasal, which, before vowels,

must

of necessity pass into

while the direct converse

convertible to

is

m (Preface to the Bhag.Gita, p. xv.); the fact, that the concluding m is

nasal. (lb. 8. 3. 24.)

final

is

Anuswara before any consonant except a semi-vowel or a Such are the rules. In practice, the mutation of the constant that of the medial nasal is more variable, and in ge:

neral the change occurs before the semi-vowels and sibilants.

EdiUi.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

the variable nasal, which, under certain conditions, passes into the proper

Anuswara

but before vowels

is

necessarily re[G. Ed.p. loj

jt^

tained, both in writing and pronunciation.

That Vou Sehlegel also

still

continues the original

m at the

end of words as an euphonic alteration of the dead sound of

Anuswara appears from his mode of printing Sanskrit text, in which he makes no division between a concluding jt m and while he does the commencing vowel of the following word make a division after ^ n, and thereby shews that he admits
;

a division after terminating letters which remain unaffected

by the influence of the

write

letters

which

follow.

If,

however, we

m^

-ei

ci^lri

tan ahravit, " he said to them,"

we must
not

also write
riWd'^flii^

inl^

^^rtlT^ tdm abravit,

"he

said to her;"

tdmabravit, for the

^ of ITW

fain is

original,

and not,
conjec-

as Von Sehlegel thinks, begotten out of Anuswara.

The

ture of C.Lassen (Ind. Bibl. Book

is to

III. p. 39),

that the Anuswara

be understood, not as an after sound (Nachlaut), not as an

itself

echo (NachhaU), but as a sound which regulates

by that

which follows

on laut*

as were the term Naddaut, with the accent appears to me highly improbable. Schlegel's nasalis
it

vwtabilis \you\d indeed bejustified by this view, and the imputa-

tion of error

removed from the Indian Grammarians, to whom

knowledge of the value of the Sanskrit
to

we

willingly concede a

signs of sound, and

whom we are unwilling

censure for de-

signating a half sound as mutable, in a language whose termi-

it.

* This seems intended for an explanation, for Lassen bas nothing like I have not found an etymological explanation of the term in any

grammatical commentary; but it may be doubted if the explanation of the text, or that given by Lassen, be correct. Anuswara may indeed be termed sequens sonus ; but by that is to be understood the final or closing
sound of a
final

syllable.

Any

other nasal
is

may be

used as the

initial letter

of

a syllable; but the nasal Anuswara

It is

exclusively an
it

''after" sound, or

not even capable of blending, as

were, with a following

It
is

vowel, like a final n or m, as in tan- or tdmabravit.

representative of either of the other nasals

the legitimate

when

those are absolutely

terminal,

10

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

nating sounds are almost always governed by the following

words.
It is

true the half sound owes its being to the muta-

bility of a concluding

m,but

is

not mutable

itself,

since

it

never

has an independent existence of its

own at the end of any word:

syllable, as

in the middle, however, of a radical

^5^

dans,

f?^ him,

it is

susceptible of expulsion, but not of alteration.

[G. Ed. p. 11.]

That the Indian Grammarinns, however,

and not the
li

consider the
letter in

as the original but

like
'^tt^

mutable
hhijdin,

grammatical terminations,

am, im

&c., appears

from the

ftict

that they always write these

terminations, where they give

nasal,

them
If
it

separate, with the labial

and not with Anuswara.

be objected that this

is

of

no importance, as dependent on the caprice of the editor or copyist, we can adduce as a decisive proof of the just
views of the Indian Grammarians in this respect, that when they range the declensions of words in the order of their terminating
in
letters,

the Pronouns

^^^

idam, and fsfm

which they consider the

as primitive, are treated

nasal m, and

Mm, when

the turn
ir5nT

comes of the
" quiet,"

labial

together with
lam.

prasdm,

from the root

which
is

^^

(Laghu-

Kaumudi,
10.

p. 46.)

The deadened

nasal,

expressed in the Lithuanian

it
;

by particular signs over the vowel which

to be identical

follows, appears

with the Sanskrit Anuswara

n.

and we write
it

it

in the

same manner with

At the end

of words

stands

for the remainder of an ancient m, in the accusative sinofular for

example

and the deadening of n before

into n presents

terminal, and in pronunciation retains their respective sounds, according

to the initial

relation tothesemi-vowpls
to
I

consonant of the following word. Again, with regard to its and sibilants, it may be regarded as appropriate

them merely in as far as neither of the other nasals is so considered. Anuswara may be termed a subsidiary or supplemental sound, being prefixed with most propriety to those letters which, not being classed
n this sense

under either of the

nasals severally

five scries of sounds, have no rightful claim to the comprehended within each respective series Editor.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

11

a remarkable accordance with the Sanskrit rule of euphony

before

mentioned.

From
kill,"
T

lavpsin-u,

"I praise," therefore

as in Sanskrit
^*^inf*T

comes

laupsihsu, " I shall

I

praise

;"

hansydint, "

shall

from the root

f^

han.

In

the

Prakrit, not only the

m, but the

n, at

the end of words,

has always fallen into Anuswara, without regard to the following letters
tala, p. 70,

Thus we read
T^^, which
is

in Chezy's edition of the

Sakun-

certainly to be

pronounced, not
[G. Ed. p. 12.]

bhaavanu but bhaaxan, for

TT^

bhagavan;

cF^ Icudhan, for oSTpT hutham.*

11.

The second
is

of the signs before

mentioned
It

is

named

Visarga, which signifies abandonment.

ing,

expresses a breath-

which
and T

never primitive, but only appears at the end

the

of words

in
r.

character of an euphonic alteration of

Tliese

two

letters

{s,

r)

are very mutable

at the end of words, and are changed into Visarga before

pause or the deadened

classes
(^.

letters

of the guttural

and
it

labial

12.).

We

write this sign H to distinguish

from

the true
12.

^ h The proper consonants are

classed in the

Sansknt

alphabet according to the organs used in their pronunciation;

and form,

in this division, five classes.

sixth is

formed by
and the
or hard

the semi-vowels,

and a seventh by the

sibilants

h.

In the

first five

ranks of these consonants the single

letters are so arranged, that the first are the surd

consonants, the thin {tenues), and their aspirates

next, the

sonant or

soft,

the medials, and their aspirates, each class

its nasal.

being completed by

The

nasals belong, like the

;

vowels and semi-vowels, to the sonants

surd or hard.

the sibilants to the

Every thin and every medial letter has its corresponding aspirate. The aspirates are pronounced, like their

No

native scholar would read these as bhaavah or kudha/'i, as the

Jf

text afBrms, but bha-avam, kudham, agreeably to the final

represented

by Anuswara.

Editor.

12

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

;

respective non-aspirates, with a clearly audible h

thus, for

example,

-^i^

ih,

not like the English th; T^ph, not

or ^;

and

hh,
it

not like the Greek %.*

is

In an etymological point

of view

important to observe that the aspirates of

are easily exchanged
hhri,

different organs
thus, TT hhar,

with each other

^ dhar,{^
"

dhri, \. 1.) "to bear," "to

'^jto

hold," are perhaps originally identical.

[G. Ed. p. 13.]

dhuma-s,

smoke,"

is,

in Latin, fumu-s.

In Greek,
V?T dhan,

6dvu>, as well as ^ei/co, is related to

han,

from

"to

kill."

The Gothic

thliuhan

is

the Germa.n Jliehen, Old

High German vliuhan13. The first class is that

letters of
is
A-,

of the gutturals, and includes the

gh,

;? hh,

r[^

g,

X{^

n.

The

nasal of this class

pronounced

like the

German n

before gutturals, as in the

w^ords
tural.

sinJcen, enge,

so as to prepare for the

it

following gut-

In the middle of words

;

is

only found before

gutturals

and, at the end, supplies the place oi J{^m

when
it

the following word begins with a guttural.f

We

write
is

without the distinctive sign, as

its

guttural nature

easily

recognised by the following consonant.

The
find
"

aspirates of

this class are not of frequent use, either at the

beginning or
i^ ^^^ place
;"

end of words.
of

In some Greek words

ovvx-o,
;"

we

lih

compare ow^,

with nakha,

a nail

Kov^rj,

Kovxos, with sankha, " shell

xa/vco, x"-^^> ^'^^^

khan, " to

The

original here adds

" We designate the aspirate by a comma,

a

as f, d\ b'."

The use of such

mark

likely to cause occasional -perplexity

is, however, unsightly, and appears and doubt. It seems therefore pre-

icrable to adhere to the usual

mode of expressing

the aspirated letters,

as dh, bh, and the like. It

is

only necessary to remember that th and

ph

are the letters

and

with an aspiration, and not the th and

f of the
nasals of

English alj)habet
t
tlie

Editor.

careful examination will perhaps

shew that the several

letter;
it

Sanskrit alphabet are mere modifications of one sound, according to

the

manner

in

which that

is

affected

by a succeeding

modifications prevail equally in most languages, although

and that the has not been

Editor.

thought necessary to provide them with distinct symbols.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

dig."
*'

13

As regards

the sonant aspirates, the

depixrf),

gh of gJiarma,

heat" (in Greek

;

has passed into the aspiration of

another organ

^ni laghu^ " light/ has laid aside the guti,

tural in the Latin leHs, and, in virtue of the

changed the

u into
leicht,

V.

The guttural has kept

light,

the English

and the

German Old High German lihti.

its

place in the

14.

The second
T^

class is that of the palatals

and includes

the sounds ch andy, with their aspirates and nasal.

We write
it.

ch, "3 chh,

J,* K. jh,*

n.

This class

is

an offshoot

from the preceding, and

It is only

to

be considered as a softening of

found before vowels and weak consonants (semi-

Towels and nasals); and before strong consonants, and at the

end of a word, generally retires into the

it

class

from which

springs.

Thus, for example, the base

[G. Ed. p. 14.]

^[T^ vdch, "speech," flected nominative,

"voice"
;

(cf.

vox), makes, in the unin-

^t^ v6k

in the instrumental
vukshu.

and locative

plurals, TlfJ'iT^^ vdg-bhis,

^"^

In the cognate lan-

guages we have

to look for, in the place of the letters of this

;

class, first, gutturals

next, labials,

on account of their mutual

as,

affinity

thirdly, the

sounds of

t,

according to pronunis

ciation, the first

element of the palatals

pachAmi, "
"'reiTUi

or d; fourthly,

sibilants, as beings the last

element in the
I cook," (inf.

letters of this class.

Compare

^-^uPh

paktum, part. pass.

;

pakta), with coquo,

(TreTTTw, Trerra), Trecrao))

^wr

chatitr,

"four," nom. HHTC^^ chatwdras, with quatuor, TeTTupeg, reaa-apeg,

Gothic fdvor, Lithuanian ketturi;

tj^

panchan, "five"

(nom. accus. pancha), with quinque,

Lithuanian penki;
irTiT

Ttevre, iteinre,

Gothic fmf,
rex,

TTSHT

rdjan^

"king," with
rdj,

regis;

rdjata,

nom. rdjatam^ "silver" (from

;

"to shine"),

with argentunif apyvpog

^itji

jdnu, " knee," with genu, '^ovv.

With regard to the aspirates of this class, the chh,a.s an initial letter in some words, answers to sc, o"k; f^^^m chhind* The original has g &nd g
are
;

but the appropriate symbols

in

English

j and

its aspirate.

14
was,
"

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

we
cleave,"
fi5Tf?I
;

to the Latin scindo

aKtd.

"SfniT

answers chhinadmi, ''I cleave, chhdyd, " shadow," to the Greek

As
to the

the terminating letter of a root chh answers, in

WS
and
the

prachh, " to ask," to the Gothic h in frah, "I or he asked,"

German and
is

latter,

as I suspect,

Latin g in frage, rogo, in case that a modification oi progo. The nasal

distinctive sign, as
it

of this class, for which

we require no

only

precedes palatals, deviates but slightly

from the souud

of the guttural n, and is pronounced nearly like nj.

15.

The

third class

is called

that of the Unguals or cerebrals,

t,

and embraces a peculiar kind of sounds of

[G. Ed. p. 15.]

together with

its

nasal

a kind not original, but which has

class of
t

developed
tinguish

itself

from the ordinary

sounds.

We dis?,

them by a point under the

letter, thus,

th,-

c?,

dh, ^^ n.

In the Prakrit this class has obtained great

t.
''

supremacy, and has frequently supplanted the ordinary

We
it

there find, for example,

;"

>Tt|

bhodu, for h^tt bhavatu,

let

be

and

"q^JT

])adhama, for TrW prathama, " the

tj^^

first."
tj

With regard to the nasal, the substitution of

nearly universal.

for

is

The Indian Grammarians approach the Prakrit nearer than the Sanskrit, when at the beginning of The practice, also, roots they use the same substitution. using Anuswara for which we have condemned (^. 9.), of ? m, at the end of words, is more Prakrit than Sanskrit.

At

the beginning of words these letters are seldom found in

Sanskrit, but they are found as terminations to a certain

number

of roots

for example, ^j^

at, "

to go."

They are

pronounced by bending back the tongue against the roof of the mouth, by which a hollow sound is expressed, as if from
the head.*

The
its

nasal of this class has sometimes overstepped

the limits of

usual laws

it is

found before vowels, which

* Here, also, it may be doubled il" similar modifications of the dental sounds are not discoverable in languages which do not express them by

separate syinboh..

The

of the Italian tutto

is

the Sanskrit Z.

Editor.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

is

15
;

not the case with the nasals of the preceding classes

at the bejjinniao' of words.

yet

never
16.

The

fourth class embraces the dentals, or the sounds

to

which properly answer

with the

the

common d and
W^
t,

t,

together
fA,

common
n.

n,

which belongs to them,

d,

V
in

dh,

Of

the aspirates of this organ,

we have

to re-

mark, that

^ th,m

an etymological respect, never

no instance of which we are aware is represented in Greek by 0, but always like the natural t, by t. On the other

at least

hand,

presents

V dh does correspond to 6, which also sometimes re^ d. Thus the imperative ending fv dhi, in Greek
di
;

becomes
f/a<//<dm?,

re

madhu, " honev," " wine,"

?.f^x^ dukitar

is fiedv

FUtP^

"I

place," t/^/x/;
1.),

[G. Ed. p. 16.]

-grr

(^^

duhitri,

"daughter," dvyarrjp;
;

dudr,

f.

and

dwdra, neut. (nom. dwdram), "door," dvpa

diewas, "God," Qeog.

dSva, Lithuau.

With regard

to the
'^r

hard aspirate, com-

pare the terminations re and tov with

tha and ^ra thas, the

former in the

plural, the second in the dual of the present

and future;
oa-reov

cmyo-o)

with
asthi,

miPH sthdsi/dmi, "I shall stand";

in the Latin, rota

with

'wfw

"bone";

with
t,

r^I ?'atha,

"carriage"; and in the Gothic, the ending

;

in for

the second person singular of the preterite, with tha

example,

vais-t, "

thou knewest," with

WW

vet-tha.
is

From
nearly

the beginning of words in the Sanskrit this aspirate

excluded.
17.

The interchange old and

other instances,
is

is

well known.

Upon

it,

among

$dKpv, SaKpuixa.

founded the relation of lacnjma to In Sanskrit, also, an apparently original

^ d often corresponds to the I of cognate European languages; for example, ^^ dip, "to light," dipa, "lamp,"

becomes

AajuTro),

Aa/iTra?;

diha,

"body," Gothic

leik.

On

this relation also rests, as

If,

have shewn elsewhere, the

elf,

relation of our

Gothic

lif,

in

zwolf,

Gothic ttalf, to

^^nr^ dasan, ^cKa.

As

also the second consonant has under-

gone

alteration, and has

migrated from the gutturals into the

16
labials;

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

and
as,

moreover, the number "ten," taken alone,

is,

in Gothic, taihun, in

German

zehn, its origin

Zi^a,

from

lif

was

deeply concealed; and even the Lithuanian

which accom-

panics the simple numbers in their compounded forms from

eleven to twenty, remained long under

result.

my

notice without

The

fact,

however, that one and the same word may,

in the course of time, assume various forms for various objects,

proved, as

it is,

by numberless examples, requires no further

support.

[G. Ed. p. 17.]

With respect

to the affinity of A/koj

in rjXiKog, &c., and of the Gothic leiks in hvHeiks, " like to

whom?"
to lished
this

to

^dma, Prakrit f^Tf disa, "like," I refer the reader

the Pronoun and
;

my Treatise on

its

influence (Berlin, pub-

by Diimmler)

analogy of \/<o?,

and only remark, in addition, that by leiks, I was first led to that of lif to SeKa

while the Lithuanian Ukaliadnot yet attracted

18.
>T

my observation,
tfijjh,

The
T^

labial class

comes next, namely, t^^,

b,

bh,

m. The hard aspirate

ph

is

among

the rarer letters;

the most usual words in which it occurs are, tRqS pAa?a, " fruit," -^tf phena, " foam," and the forms which come

from the root -ra

sonant aspirate
>T

phull,

" to burst,

blow, bloom."

The

most frequent of the aspirates. In the Greek and Latin, ^ and / are the letters which most frequently correspond to this
bh belongs, together with
dh, to the

w
>T

bh, especially at the

bhri,

beginning of words; for example,

;

" to

bear," fero, <pepoi

bhu,

*'

to be," fu-i, <pv-(a.

>T

bh

is

also often represented

by b

in Latin, especially in

the middle of words.

becomes b in certain compounds which rank as simple words with a derivable

of fero
suffix, as
be?',

The /

brum, brium, in words like sahiber, candelabrum,

manubrium.

Thus the /

of

fu appears

as b in the

forms

amabam, amabo, which I have recognised as compounds, and which will be hereafter explained. The dative and ablative
termination plural
nasal of this class,

ww
J?

bliyas,

m,

is subject,

becomes bus in Latin. The at the end of a word, to

several alterations, and only remains fast before a pause, a

CHABACTEBS AND SOUNDS.

vowel, or letters of
its

17
itself

own

class

it

otherwise governs
letters,

according to the nature of the following

in this

and

may

pass,

manner, into any of the four preceding [G. weakens itself into the softened nasal sound
if

nasals,

and

Ed.

p. 18.]

of the proper Auuswara,

followed by a semi- vowel, a sibilant,

or ?
nasal.

h,

M
It is,

has also a

full

right to the

name

of a mutable

however, not beseeming, when,

accuracy, we

in editions of find ,

though text otherwise conspicuous for piotected in its original condition by a pause, or by tlie
following letters, written as Anuswara.
19.

The semi-vowels

follow next:

t(

y,x

r,'P^ I,'^ v.

We

distinguish y by the sound of our German J, or the Englisli y in the word year. As the Latin in English has the sound
_;'

of a softened y, so in Prakrit

and

in Greek,

upon

this

y often passes into 'i^ J , exchange of sound rests the relation

tt

of ^evyvvf^l, ^vyog, &o. to the root

Tir yuj,

" to bind,''

and that

of the verbs in a^u) to the Indian verbs in '??^fH aydmi ; for

is fls,

but the sound dsch

is

not to be looked for in the Greek.

" young," to the

The

relation of the Persian ^^^yr ja^'dn,

Sanskiit
place.

Theme By v we
v.

^^^^^

yuvan,

Lat

juvenis,

belongs to this

here designate the sound of the

German
t^-.

to

and English

After consonants, as l^J^ ticdm,

"thee,"

this letter takes the

pronunciation of the English

The
;

occasional hardening: of the v into a guttural deserves mention

here

thus, in Latin, vic-si

I

(vixi),

victum, spring

from

viv

and

in facio
" I

recognise the Sanski-it causal >TRTnfH bhdv-oyd-mi,

to be,"

make

from the root bhu.

is practically

The connection

bc-

iween fac-tus andjio

in the

demonstrated.

Refer back,

Old and Modern Greek,

to the occasional

hardening

of the

Digamma

into

(cf.

C. G.

Schmidt in the Berlin

'^

Jahrbuch,

I83i, p. 613.).

The

voice cannot dwell on

v or

and these two letters are therefore, as languages, excluded from the end of words

^ y

in the Semitic
[G. Ed, p. 19.]
its

therefore the word

tive,

f^

d'v, "

Heaven." forms

nomina.

which ought to be dio (divs being forbidden, see

94.\

18-

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

from
of a

^ dyS.
is

Nominal bases
subject to
s.

in

y do not

exist.

x.r aX the
is

end

word

many
is

alterations,

and

interchanges,

able with

In places where the concluding

retained,

by favour
s
;

of the following letter,

becomes

is

and, on

the other hand, remains unaltered in places where

s be-

comes T r, namely, before vowels and sonant consonants. 20. The semi- vowels, by reason of their tractable and fluent nature, are easily interchanged. For instance, in the more
recent Sanskrit works
also, find in

often stands for

t r*
I

We
^
v.

often,

the cognate European languages

is

for

On

this

interchange

founded the relation of the Latin

laud(fi)-s-\-

suffix lent

{e.g. opulens),

and of the Gothic

(see . 116.). in

Are/au(/v, " quantus," svalauds,

"tantus," mmaluuds, "just so

. 119.),

much,"
in

to the Sanskiit ^fT vant (in the strong case,

like
V7ir?T

words

dhanavant, "endowed with wealth,"

"

irn^

tdvant, " so

much," tjt^ ydvant,

is

how
I

much.""

On

the cliange between v and r

lation of the

founded, as
"

believe, the re(sing, pirn,

Old High German pir-u-mes,

;

we are"

U^fi? bhav-d-mi), to ?^"RH bhav-d-mas

as also that of scrir-

-u-mh, "
to

we
(.

shriek," to

hear"
[G. Ed.

109.); as also that of triusu, "I fall,"

^^^rww^ srdv-ayd-mas, " we make from the

p. 20.]

root trus, to the Sanskrit anr

dhwum,

" to

fall ;"

and of the Cretan rpe "thee" from

/ is

rfe, to the Sanskrit

ttod.

The semi-vowel

also

exchanged with the nasals

thus,

v^^

anya-&, " the other,"

becomes

cdius in Latin,

and

It is scarcely correct to

say " often," as the instances are rare

nor

are they restricted to recent works.

Menu

has uslika for asrika.

Ed.
it is

Grimm

(iii.

p.

46) assumes an adjective lauds, "great;" which, as

least is concerned, miglit be dispensed with, as

far as the

Gothic at

of the greatest antiquity as a suffix, and does not appear alone as an

adjective, even in the oldest periods.

X Dh, according to
old a,
nasal.

$. 16.,

the

Greek ^\ and
t.

to the

9^,

according

to . 87., corresponds the old

High German

Tiie u of trus, from the

r,

may

be produced by the influence of the

or of the dropped

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

^PiTTTr

19

antara-s,

"the

other," alter;

vad,

"to speak,"

answers to the Gothic

"called together":
(.

lath-on, "called," "invited," ga-lathon,

im dhma, "to
also, balbus

blow," answers to
/Saft/Sa/vo).

fiare.

109.)
21.

Compare,
last class

with

The

embraces the

sibilants

and

h:

T([^

s,

\sh,

and ? h. The first sibilant is spoken with a slight aspiIt belongs to ration, and usually written by the English sh*
T(
s,

thp palatal class, and thence supplies the place of the third or

proper

when a hard
"^TJit

palatal

ch or "^ chh follows

for

instance, TTTST
charati, "

rdmas

charati, instead of TT*nT

^xf^ rdmas

Ramas
X:
;

goes."

In

its

origin,

^s

appears to have
find k

sprung from

and in Greek and Latin we

and

c regu-

larly corresponding to the Sanskrit

s.

The Gothic
;

substi-

tutes k in pursuance of the law of change of sound

but the

Lithuanian stands the nearest

to this letter,

to the

Sanskrit with reference

and has in

its

stead a sibilant

compound
kvu)i>,

sz,

pro-

nounced

like sh.

Compare

decern, 5e/ca.

Gothic taihun, Lithuan. Gothic

deszimtis,

with ^51^ das'in (nom.

;"

dasa); cants,

hunds, Lithuaji. sxuo (gen. izuns), with

gen. 5I*nT sunas, kvvo^), " dog
^r?r
5a#cpt;,

^^ swan (nom. ngr iu-d,

Incnina, aszara,
f.

with

a&ru

n.

"tear;"

eqitus {

= ecvits),

Lith. aszica

f.

"mare,"
f.

with

^S(^ a'swa

(nom.

ISC^S^ aswas),

" horse ;"

azaka

with

^W{

srlkha "

bough."

The

Lith. szweiita-s, " holy,"

(. 50.).

answers
not

to the

Zend aj^^^2>j3

spenia

At the end of a word,

and in the middle before strong consonants,

cluding
usually
it

i is

al-

lowed, although admitted as an euphonic substitute for a conTT

before an initial hard palatal.

Otherwise
[G. Ed.
p.

gi s

falls

back into the sound from which

21.]

appears to have originated, namely, k. In some roots, however, 5^ s passes into z i ; for instance, ^^ dris', " seeing," and f^iii', "a man of the third caste," form, in the uninflected nominative,

ejr

dri'-,,

fwz

vit.

The second

sibilant,

sh,

is

pronounced

like

our

sch,

or sh in English, and

More usually

the sh

is

reservnl for the cerebral sibilant.

Editor.

C 2

20

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

class.

belongs to the lingual

It often
tt s
;

steps,

according to

certain rules into the place of

"^ k,
Tff

thus, for instance, after

;

never follows, but only ^ sh

and the
TJ

|, x,

in

Greek

and Latin, are regularly represented by

Jcsh.

Compare

^f^m

dakshina, with dex-ter, ^e^to^, Lithuanian deszine, " the

right hand."

Of

the vowels,

i,

u,

and W, short or long, are

averse from Vs, to which a and d alone are inclined. After the
first-named vowels,

passes into ^ sh

for instance, TTrftf^

tandshi, instead of inftftT tanosi (extendh).

is

As an

initial,

"q

sh

extremely rare: the Indian grammarians, however, write

the roots which, under certain circumstances, change ^.? into

a

sh,

from the
t^
/i

first

with

a.

r(^

sh.

A word

which really be-

gins with

six" to which the Lith. szeszi, a f plural nominative, answers most nearly, while other cognate languages indicate an original ordinary s. At the end of a
word, and in the middle before other strong consonants, such

is -^t^ shash, "

as

most roots passes into nf k, but with some into z t the number six, mentioned above, becomes, in the uninflected nominative, ^7 shat

(,

th,

ti

sh is not permitted, but in

:

22.

The

third sibilant is the ordinary s of all languages, but

"which, at the
sition,

end of Sanskrit words, holds a very insecure pois

and by certain rules

sh,

subjected to transmutation into

(. 11.),

r,

ah or K Visarga
th.

and

and only re-

mains unaltered before t and

Kjfif

We write, for example, ^^

^xfif sunus charafi
(it),

sunus

tarati, "

the son passes over," but Kxfn t^\ tarati

[G. Ed.

p. 22.]

sunuh',
(est).

^T^T

W^

vf^fn sunur hhavati

This sensitiveness against a con-

cluding

can only have arisen in the later period of the language, after its division as in the cognate languages the
lET

concluding

remains unaltered, or where

it

has been changed

for r does not return into its original form.

Thus, in the

decree against Timotheus (Maittaire,

stands for
y:

Ttfxoaeop 6 MiXy'^crtop

383-4.) p

everywhere

Ttapayivojxevop

Kvfialve'

rai rap ccKoap tcov lecov, &c.*

Tiie Sanskrit could not

endure

Cf. Ilartung, p. 100.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

r before
t.

21

The Latin

protects the s usually at the end of

it,

words

but in the classical period generally sacrifices

when

between two vowels, to the

r; for instance, genus, generis, for

genesis; a contrast to forms found in

Varro and Festus, such

which the
s

as plusima, fijerJesum,

meliosem,

mnjosibus, in

evinces
(see
.

its

original existence in the history of the language

127,).

The

accusative

form arbosem, recorded by

is

Frstus, is
fis I

more

startling, for

here r
is

tlie

original form,

if,

can hardly doubt, arbor, arbus,

related to the

word of

such frequent occurrence in the Zend-Avesta,

"tree."

aj7a5/> urvara,

Tins expression

is

not wanting in the Sanskrit,

(g^TT urvard.;) but

land," and
23.

it signifies,

according to Wilson, "

fruitful

" land'' in general.

to the le ters

^ h belongs

which, in Sanskrit, are never

admitted at the end of words, nor in the middle before strong

consonants.

In these places
A:,

it

passes,

by certain rules, into

5^

7 f

ir

d, oF

or

JT

g.
:

In Greek

we

often find

in the place

of the Sanskrit ? h
" snow," "
xidmi,

compare

^et/xwi',

hiems, with

f^
Iteri,

Aiwa,

rime
;

;"

xalpoi with

^xqifir hrish;*"

[G. Ed.

p. 23.]

gaudeo

yi)v

with
;"

^^

hansa, " goose

%0es,

with

?rTT hyas, "

yesterday
k, c,

o-)(ps

with

T?

vah,

" to transport."

We

also find

for

h: compare

KapSi'a, cor,

Gothic

hairlo,

with

hrid (n.

^^

hridaya), " heart."

We

sometimes, but

rarely, find the spiritus asper substituted for h; for instance,

atpeui, ^TTffH

hardmi, "

take away."
;

The Lithuanian

ex-

hibits

sometimes

sz for h

for instance, asz, " I," for

aham, szirdis f. " heart," for This letter stands hrid. sometimes in Sanskrit for a mutilation of other aspirated
consonants, of which

^^

the aspiration alone has

been supdhi,

pressed

thus, instead of the imperative

;

ending f^

we

generally find hi
ff
hi,

on which account the grammarians accept

the original ending, and assume that
for

and not fv

dhi, as

hi passes into dhi,

euphonic reasons, after consonants.

is

The

root tt^ grab,

" to take,"

written in the Vedas

to the

grabh, and answers thus

more nearly

German

greifen,

and the Persian

yiri/tan.

22

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

We

give here a general view of the Sanscrit characters,

with their respective values.

VOWELS.

a,

^aj d,

I,

I,

"^ u,

"gt

it,

ri,

ri.

ANUSWARA AND VISARGA.

n,

ah'.

CONSONANTS.

Gutturals
Palatals

oF

/fc,

"W kh,
"^ chh,

^ g,
l{ j,
"S

'^

gh,

t
3BJ

n.

"^ ch,

m^jli,
"S

^ n.
n.
f

Linguals
Dentals
Labials

(,

th,

d, J,
6,
I,

dh,
cZ/*,

lit,

"^th,

n.

^ p,
xr y,

x^ph,

^
'i^

bh,

^ m.

Semi- Vowels
Sibilants and Aspirates,
[G. Ed.
p. 24.3

r,

"^ v.

^ s,

sh,

tk s,

h.

The vowel characters given above are

;

found only at the beginning of words

and in the middle or

:

end of a word are supplied in the following manner

left is

^a

is

unexpressed, but

is

contained in every consonant which

(\)

not distinguished by a sign of rest

ou

or connected with
itself,

another vowel, absence of the

is

thus read ka; and k by

cF.

or the

a, is

expressed by
of these

^
;

t,

are expressed

by
ofi^

f,

and the

first

two
it

is

placed before, the second

for instance, faS
c^
,

after, the
ki.

consonant to which
'5 M,

relates

ki,

For

^ w,^ ri, ^rl, the signs o,

;

e, t

are placed

under their consonants

?f

as,

if

Im,

ku, tb hri, is hn.

For
;

and

^ dU
:

*^

and
6

"^

are placed over their consonants

as,

h^,

% kdi
is

which

^ du are written by omission of the ^, here only a fulcrum ^ The conhdu.

and
;

as,

ho,

ofit

sonants without vowels, instead of appearing in their entire

shapes, and with the sign of rest, are usually written so that
their distinctive sign is connected with the following conso-

nant; for instance, for

ti,

^,

tj,

we have
;

>,

j,

i;

and thus
have
sT

maUyn
and for

is

written jqw, not

T!^^

for

^ we

^ + n we

have w.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

25.

23

The Sanskrit

letters are divided into

hard or surd, and

soft or sonant.

Surd
and in

are, all the tenues,

fact,

with their correspond-

ing aspirates
the
first

according to the order given above,

first five

two

letters in

each of the

rows, also the tln-ee

sibilants.

Soft are, the medials, with their aspirates, the

all

the nasals, senai-vowels, and

vowels.

^ Another division also

appears to us convenient

that of the consonants into strong

;

and weak; in which the nasals and semi- vowels come under
the denomination of weak
that of the strong:.

the remaining consonants under

exercise

The weak consonants and vowels

and
[G. Ed.

no

influence, as initial letters of inflections

suflBxes. in
p. '25.1

the formation of words, on the terminating

letters of a root;

while they themselves are compelled to

accommodate themselves to a following strong consonant. 26. With regard to the vowels, it is of consequence
direct the observation to

to

two

affections of them, of frequent

;

occurrence in the development of forms of Sanskrit

the one
is

of which

called

Guna, or virtue

the other Vriddhi, increase

augmentation.

My

predecessors in grammatical inquiry

have given no information as to the essence, but have only

expounded the
only in
that
I

effects of these

vowel alterations

and

it

was

my critical

labours upon

Grimm's German Grammar*

law by which Guna

came upon the

trace of the true nature and distinctive

qualities of these aflfections, as also of the

is

usually produced and governed, and at the

same time

of

its

hitherto undetected existence in the

Greek and Germanic,

and, most conspicuously, in the Gothic.

My

views in

this

particular have since derived remarkable confirmation

from

the Zend, with relation to which I refer to

1 flatter

. 2.,

in which, as

myself,

have dealt successfully with an apparent

explanation.

contradiction to

my

Guna consists
:

in prefixing

short

a,

and Vriddhi in prefixing a long one

in both,

how-

ever, the a melts into a

diphthong with the primitive vowf I,

Berlin Journal, Feb. 1827, p. 264.

24

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

^
i,

according to certain euphonic laws.

namely, and
into

^,

melt

with the

^a

of

Guna

into

^;

7 it, ^u,

6.

These

diphthongs, however, dissolve again before vowels into ^n? ay

and ^r^ av; Guna,

e
[G. Ed.
;

^JT ar;
p. 26.]

ri and '%p become, in virtue of the action of by that of Vriddhi, '^TR dr. As in Greek the

short Sanskrit a

is

frequently replaced by
/

so we

find the

Guna
As

here,

when a

radical

or u

is
^f

prolonged
" to go,"

by

prefixing an

e.

in the Sanskrit the root

i,

forms, by the

Guna

modification, ufk emi (from a-imi), " I

go," in contrast to imaSf "

have

eifjit

in contrast to

we go ;" As the tfxev.

thus in Greek also

we

root '^v biidh, in several

tenses in the three numbers, rises, in virtue of Guna, into

>Ttv6dc?A

(from baudh), for instance,

TTtVlftr

bddlidmi, "I

know;"

so in the

Greek* the root ^vy

(e<})vyoi'),

in the present be-

comes

ipevyoi.

In the Gothic, in the strong form of

Grimm's

8th and 9th conjugations, the radical vowel, strengthened by

a in the singular of the preterite, stands in the same contrast to the

i

and u of the

plural, as is the case in the corre-

sponding tense of the Sanskrit.

contrast to bmjum, "

Compare
^vftT

haug,

"I

bent," in

we

bent," with the Sanskrit form of the

bublidja,

same

signification,

singular

plural

^>Tfin?

bubhvjima, of the root >ni^ bhuj;

contrast with vifum, "

compare

vait, " I

know," in

we know," with

the Sanskrit forms of

va'ida),

the

same

signification,

veda (from

f^f^

vidima,

from the root iw^ vid, ing Gothic and Greek

"

know," which, like the correspondemploys the terminations of the

root,

preterite with a present signification.

27.

We

have, however, the Sanskrit

Guna
I

in yet another
lately dis-

form

in the

Gothic

form which

have but

covered, but of which the historical

connection with the

I

Sanskrit modification appears to

me

not the less certain.

once thought that

had accounted in a different manner for

I

the relation existing between biuya, "

bend," and

its

root

Regarding Greek

ot

as

Guna

of

i,

see
f),

491.

and as to

Gana

in

Old

Sclavonic and Lithuanian, see . 2o5.b)

741., 746.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

bug,

25

and

conceived myself bound to ascribe generally, in the

i

present tense, to the prevalent

influence.
It

of terminations a retro-active

now, however, seems to

me

indisputable that

Grimm's 8th and 9th conjugations of the

first class

[G.Ed.

p.

27.3

correspond to

my first Sanskrit conjugation (r. 326.);

weakened

so that the
to
I,

Guna

a of the special tenses has been

while the monosyllabic preterite maintains the

;

Guna

vowel in the more important shape of a

11th,

just as in the 10th,

and 12th conjugations, according to Grimm's division,

a,

the radical
is,

which has remained in the preterite singuhir, and other tenses, weakened
to
i
;

in the present

so that, for

instance, a/,
ad, " to eat
;"

" 1" and

"he

eat,"

corresponds to the root 155

ita

but in the present,

stands in place of the

form ^rf^ admi, " I eat.'** 28. The Zend possesses, besides the Sanskrit Guna, which has remained everywhere where it stands in Sanskrit, a
vowel application peculiar to
in
Aj a,

itself,

which likewise consists

and which was first observed by M. E. Burnouf.-j* The vowels which admit this addition in the interior, but
not at the end of words, are,
2dly, the
first,

the short j U
4* d.

>

u,

o;

Guna diphthongs

;o ^

and

The two

latter
;o i

are the most usually befriended by this addition, and

fctkes it in all cases

where the opportunity

cha, " and," is

occurs, both as

an

initial letter,

and even at the end of words wherever the

dependent particle xi^

appended to
dthre,

it

hence,

for example, ^7jM^na'(re,

"homing' ^^(^jm

"ignC; but

M^A>M/Ai^ naraScha, " hominique,''^ M^jOM^CsMi dihraecha, " igvi-

que"

Also where an

stands in two consecutive syllables, an

is

placed before each.

Hence, for instance, ^'^jajas^ajaj

aStn^ibyd,

from ^ri^H

elehhyas.

The only

case in which, ex-

It would be difficult to adduce a better instance of the phonetic deficiencies of our English alphabet than this sentence, in

which

am

forced

to translate the presint

and past tenses of essen by the same characters.

What

foreign student could guess or

remember

that the one

is

pronounced

eet, tlie

other ett ?

The

preterite

"ate"

ia obsolete.

Trarulator.

t N. Jouru.

Asiat., T. III. p. 3-27.

26

CHARACTERS AND SOUND?.

rs e

cepting at the actual end of the word,

the preceding
aj a, is A5

remains without
of

when

it is

produced by the influence

say,

a y^
not

j^,

out of

a or

jua d.

We

indeed, ^^^^j/oaj^mj

[G. Ed. p. 28]

yaSibij6, "

qnihus" from ^|^ yebhyas; but

jj^.m;oaj^^jiu dyafsi,

but

|^jj;ti^^AM dyfs^, " I glorify,"

lost,

from

the Sanskrit root, which has been

for the verb

^ yw,
find, for
aj

from which comes tj^ yams,

" glory."

Yet we

j^n?^
before

yhi, " if"

(cf.

tif^ yadi),

sometimes, though perha})S

erroneously, also JCJ^asjC^ yaezi.

4*

The

addition of the

d is just as unlimited, but the occasion is far less

frequent.
^^tWfi^ djas ;

Examples of

it

are, 'W^-'^ a6z6, " strength,''

from
ac-

(<^Ajy^7^^ kerenaot,

"he made," from

cs kri,

cording to the
*'

fifth class, for ^rssrstif

akrindt; r^\xi)^ mrnot

he spoke," from

^irtiT abrot,

which would be the regular

form, instead of
also
find ^^xi^^

^TW^ftTT abravit

(Gramm.

Crit.

r. 352.).

We

mrao n, " I

spoke," for ^"StT

abrdm, which

would be the form used were, in the Sanskrit adjunct

tenses, as in the Greek, a
suffix

of the

first

person.

mere nasal, and not am, the The vowels j i and > w are
aj

much more
question
:

sparing in their attraction of the

it

now

in

they refuse

always at the beginning of words,

;

and in the middle before two consonants

and

if

transferred
ter-

from the end of a word

to its middle,

by an adventitious
example,
AjyAJf(3J9
;

mination or word, they do not acquire the capacity of being

wedded

to

an

as

a.

We

say, for
;

^j^j imem,
mithwava,
gairibyd,
also, acas

"this" (accus.),

not ^'^^Jm aimem

" a pair," not AsyAJoxfujAJ^ maithwana

<^iAiJ/jAjm

" montibus,^^ not ^AijJA57jA5 gairaibyd.

The

>

cording to set rules, very frequently abstains from the

for instance,

a/

^jw^

iirun6,

{anim(E^ not ^)>xi/> uraunu, from

fniiriinn,

fM?> urvun; on the contrary, Ajy>7/Aj^

"young,"

fiom

TT^iiT

taruna.
4>

Where, however, the Sanskrit

an
as

T u

is

a is placed before it, as well and in this case at the beginning as before two consonants
(. 32.),
;

replaced by

stands in this respect in the same category as a> ^ iuid [G. Ed. p. 6. Compare ^^aj7 rauch, " light " with
29.J

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

27
with

^^

ruch

^'^xi^^xi^hxiM saochanfahm (Jucerdium)

Aj^;33i>Aj axxta^

^IviirilM

suchyatdm ;

" he spoke," with "5^ ukfa,

v'hich I

form, by theon.*, after the analogy of

Crit.
r.

wf^n

akshipia

(Gram.
29.

339.),

leaving out the

augment
i,

In the Vriddhi modification, the vowels ^ i, ^ with the preceding ^t d into ^ di ; "5 w, "3! it, into

melt

^ du;

^ W, ^
effect

ri,

into ^TT dr.

e

The simple vowel

a,

as also the

diphthongs ^

and
as

by Guna

produce the same o, which would by Vriddhi for a + o, like d+ a, makes d;

a+i, liked + 4 makes di; a+d. like d+d, makes du are capable of only one higher modification, and resers'e this one
for cases

where grammatical laws demand the highest

step,

namely, Vriddhi, and remain in the cases of

convenient here to give a connected

Guna

unaltered,
It

unless extraordinary grounds of exception occur.

may be

summary of

the results

produced by

Guna and

Vriddhi.

Primitive Vowels,

^
^T

a,

"^

d,

Guna
Vriddhi
d,

\ ^ e,

i,

%i,

m,
d,

"31

;/,

^fi
^TN ar, ^Kdr*

^4,
^d'f,

d,

...

Jl di,

^idw, ^idu,

Primitive Vowels, ^r?,

^4,

'k

dU

^6,
...

^ diu
...

Guna
Vriddhi
30.

^T
^TT

ar, dr,

ai,

...

^ du,
left,

We now

proceed to the exposition of the Zend writing,

which, like the Semitic, proceeds from right to

and

towards the comprehension of which Rask has contributed

valuable corrections, which give the language an appearance

more natural and more

it

in consonance with the Sanskrit than

assumed in the hands of former commentators, Anquetil's

pronunciation having admitted

especially in the vowels.

much

that

was heterogeneoue,

We
first,

follow the order of the Sanskrit

* According to original Grammars the

Vriddhi, d,
ai,

Guna

letters are a,

e,

o; the

au ; the two

a and

d, being severally substituted for

the vowel sounds of ri,

as ar, ai, dr, dl.

Editor

W,

in combination

with the semi-vowels r and

/,

2^

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

alphabet in giving the corresponding value of each letter in

[G. Ed. p. 30.]

the Zend.

The Sanskrit
;

short
is

^ a has two,
which An-

or rather three, representatives

quetil pronounces as a or limits to a.
e,

the

first

aj,

but Rask, certainly with truth,

The second

is g,

which Rask pronounces

like

the short

a-

of the Danish, or like the short

German

a,

as in
apren.

Hande, or as a in cane in English, and

I

e in the

French

consider this g as the shortest vowel, and write it e. We often find it inserted between two consonants which form a

double consonant in the Sanskrit

for instance, j^m^7m^j>sa

dadaresa
or "
I

(pret. redupl.), for the Sanskrit

;"

^^ dadarso,
we
e is
r.

"he"
also

saw

^^vaj^I^aj^

dademahi (V.
dadmasi.

S. p. 102), "

give,"

for the

Veda form

^^^

This shortest

always appended to an originally terminating

" creator,"

Thus, for in-

stance, j7aj^^aj anion, " between," j7aj^au^ dAtare, " giver,"

g7Ajfe>>

hvare, " sun," stand for the corresponding

^TtfT.

Sanskrit forms WiJIT antar,

It
is

ddtar, w^i swar, " heaven."

final

worthy also of remark, that always before a

^ m,

and generally before a

final y n,
n.

and frequently before

an intermediate vowelless

the older

^a

becomes

e.

Compare, for instance,

^g^Caxj) puthre-m, " filium'''' with

thr

putra-m; J'^^^ anh-en, "they were," with

^|f(*f dsan, rjcrav;

^^^^^tv

hent-em,

'the existing one," with Wim^sant-am,

This retro-active influence of the

jyrcB-sentem, ah- sent em.

nasal reminds us of the shortening

power of the Latin

ter-

mination

m;

as, for instance, stem, st^mus (Sanskrit fiT?TT*T

tishthhj-am, f^kmishthima).
31. Anquetil entirely refuses to
letter differing but little

admit into
f
e

his alphabet a

from the
like a

above discussed, but

c,

yet distindt from

it

by

rule in practice, namely,

which

Rask teaches us
this

to

pronounce

long Danish

<b.

We find

this letter usually in

connection with a following > u, and vowel appears to admit, with the excep[G. Ed. p. 31.]

tion of the long au A,

no vowel but

this c before

it.

We

write

this c e without the diacritic sign,

inasmuch as we represent

the

ro,

like the Sanskrit ^,

by

^.

Eu

>c corresponds

ctymo-

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

logically to the Sanskrit

29
by

6,

or diphthong formed

^a

aud "^u; thus,

for example, the

nominal bases in

u,

which

in the Sanskrit genitive,

by the influence of Guna, Ke. by the

prefixing of a short a,

make

6-s,

form, in Zend, Mi><^

paseus with

eus.

Compare, for instance, j^5>9J3a}5> from pasu, "pecus." And yet the Sanskrit 6 does not universally become eu in Zend, but often remains as it is, and
tj^JTO pasos,

specially in cases

where

it

arises out of the termination as,

by the

solution of the s into u.

According

to its pronuncia-

tion, >c eu

would appear
(d) is written

to be a diphthong,

and

to

form

but one syllable, as in our

German words

heute, Leute, &c.

The long a
32. Short

jku.

and long

are

represented, as are long and

i,

short

u,

by

special characters, j
i

i,

>

u,

however, gives to the short

the pronunciation

^ u: Anquetil, e, and to the

short u (>) that of o; while, according to Rask, only dj is pronounced as short o.* This short o frequently holds the

etymological place of the Sanskrit

to

any other Sanskrit vowel.

^ u, and never corresponds du, in For the diphthong

particular,

we have

generally the Zend

guj

do

we

yet

find,

sometimes, also >au du;

for instance, jto>Juj gdus, " bosi" is

more frequent than ao^m gdos, for the Sanscrit ^t^gdus. 33. The Sanskrit diphthong i, formed out of a + ?, is represented by
rs,

which, especially as a terminating letter,

is
S.

also written h5,

and which we, as in Sanskrit, represent by

We

must

here, however, observe, that the Sanskrit

;t

^^

is

not

always preserved as
placed by j^
6i,

^ in

the Zend, but

is

sometimes re[G. Ed.

which appears to prevail particularly after

especially at the end of
i;

a preceding ^^

y,

p. 32.]

words.

The Vriddhi diphthong

jjuu

di (out of d

+ i)

is

always

represented by

di;

6,

either

by

the equivalent

for ^ 6;

which we often
ists

find

o substituted

by the neglect of copyaccording to

or by the above-mentioned
a terminating Mi
* But see
.

>c eu, which,

rule, before

replaces the Indian

447. Note.

30

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

is

so that a termination in ms^ os*

unheard of in the Zend,

of d

For

tlie

Vriddhi diplithong

^ du (out
is

+ u) we
di,

geive-

rally find do, for

which there
du.
It

a special character gw

more
>JU5

rarely

>juu

would appear that jam

ad,

and the j^ 6i which replaces a> ^, should be pronounced as diphthongs, i.e. as monosyllables.
du,
34.

Anuswara and Visarga do not

specified in 61. as

exist in Zend, unless

we

admit the nasal

answering to the sound

of the Sanskrit Anuswara.

We

proceed meanwhile, for the

present, to the proper consonants.

The

first

letter of the

Sanskrit guttural class has divided

itself into

two characters
(3^
;

bearing reference to different functions,

the
first,

and

of which

which we represent by

k,

only appears before vowels

and v; the other, which we write c, precedes especially Compare, for instance, \^ kS, consonants, excepting v.
Au^ kd, J^A}^ kat, (quis, qucB, quid), r^^/^^Aifev hakeret, " once,"

j^j^?M^

karo'di, "

he made," aj^ kva, " where," with

sakrit, cR^fiT karoti,

o^t kd,

oFT kd, foiPiT kirn,

TETsFrT

and "^kwa: on the

with ftif^

other hand,
j^CS^jfeV hidi,

M/(sxsMi(S^ csathra,

" king,'' with "Sf^ kshatra

S. p. 198),
sikti

"

pouring out" (V.

(from ftf^
<3^

sicli).

In what manner the pronunciation of this

^

c differs

from that of the

it is

k can indeed hardly be desofter,

fined with certainty:

probably

weaker than that

of the

Q k,

which

latter is fenced in

by no strong consonants.

Rask

selects for

it

the character

q,

without observing that this

letter prefers

only to precede consonants, and in this position

[G. Ed.

p.

33]

always corresponds to the Sanskrit

d^ as

k.

Burnouf considers
tuklimalt^.

an aspirate, and writes v^was^cS^aj^

He

writes,

Rask

treats as

an aspirate, with
I

on the other hand, the letter jo, which Buruouf has not yet given q.
which, according to Burnoufs just

his reason,
(>i

which

think, however, I can guess, namely, that

r,

c is

found before

* M^i^ OS, according to Burnouf, occurs occasionally as the termination

of the genitive singular of the u-^ascs for the
v.fj.

more common AM>eeus;

j^^ixsfjM^ bdzaos, ''brachii."

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

HI

remark, generally confers an aspirate upon a preceding consonant. I consider this reason, however, as insufficient and
;

think that (^ c stands before

r,

because, as

we have

before

remarked,

all

consonants, v excepted, only admit before

is

them
<^.

that modification of the k found which

It

expressed by

lar agency, to

would be impossible for ? r, and the other convey aspiration to the preceding hard gut-

letters of simi-

tural if

kh be not extant in Zend

dig,""

so that, for instance,

the root ^vr khan, " to

are,
(S^.

sounds

yAj^
?3^

kan in Zend.
kh
is

There

however, some words in which

represented by

From
;

TS^khara, "ass,"
find, also,

we

find

carem

and we
c
;

the

the accusative ^c7m3^ kh of life sakhi, " friend,"

replaced by

the accusative, for instance,

It

srq sakhdynm
a

transformed into ^jaucSSajw hacdim.

question whether
a
jt

may therefore remain

kh;

or

c3^ c,

in respect of their sounds,

have
is

the better riofht to be referred to

certain, that o^ k before

but this

much

vowels and before

^ u is

only repre<S^
;

sented by

5 in

Zend

before other consonants only by

which

latter

we

shall, till

better advised, continue to render

by

c.

35.

Anquetil ascribes to
;

<S^

the value of ^, and to both

the pronunciation kh

while Rask considers the latter alone,

by reason of the aspiration stroke which he recognises, as

aspirated,

and compares

it

to the Spanish x

and the Arabic

[G. Ed. p. 34.] ^, and our German ch. Burnouf renders that Sanskrit by the syllable ; and observes c. (1. p. 343) {^ (J
'S"

sua becomes qa in Zend, namely,

in

^n sicapna,
and in

" sleep,''

written, according to Burnouf, qafna, " his."

^ sua
W8T

{suus),

We

are inclined to add to these examples, ajw^iUj^

suasd,

khanha, (nom.) accus. ^c/fev^^o khanhrem, from

"sister" (soror); W^(Tm suasdram{sororern); and ^i^/m^ khareno, " splendour," as related to ^T. suar, " heaven," and trt
sur,

"to shine."

We must, however, at the same time, remark,

^o kh,

that

su-

does not universally become

and

that

^ sua
hva.

in particular, in an isolated position and with a possessive

signification,

much

oftener appears in the shape of

mw

32

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

or that of MAi>y hava.

We

render

^o

by

kh, au'I support

our

view of its aspiration more on the

it

fact, that in

modern Persian

corresponds frequently to ^, our ch, than on the circumstance that Rnsk has marked it as aspirated. This modern
Persian
.;.

is

pronounced, indeed, at present, without aspiraItalian c before

a, o,

tion, like

an

u; but

its

value in Arabic,

and the choice of

this letter, so

powerfully aspirated in the

Arabic to designate a special guttural sound, in true Persian

words, seems to indicate an intrinsic stronger or milder aspiration.

As
it

^ kh is

derived from the Sanskrit

cB

^ awa,

it

was

not applied to replace the without

nient to

before letters,
It

which would

produce an aspiration.

may

also be here conve-

remember that either m or Persian ^ when the latter replaces

[G. Ed.
is
p.

r (j) accompanies the

at the

beginning of a

35]

word the Sanskrit

^ sw.

It is true that
it

j v

no longer sounded before long vowels, but

its

must

original ly

have had

influence on the pronunciation, and cannot have

been introduced into writing entirely without object, and for

the

mere employment

of the copyist.

Compare

Ijc.-

khudd,

"God," with swofiatta, "self-given ;" for which, in Zend, we have, under a more regular participial form (see Gramin.
Crit.
r. 608),

^^

m^au^m^ khaddta*; which

Anquetil, or his
of,

Parsi teacher, always understands in the sense

"given

through God," deceived, probably, by the resemblance of

sound to \ij^ khudd ; while Neriosengh properly translates

^

it

by yntl^ swayandatfa. The Persian Jc- khudd is, however, as Burnouf correctly assumes, actually related to the Zend
As^AM^A)^ khaddta, so as to have
its

name
it

based in the idea,

srvabhu, " self-

"created by

itself,"

while in

its

form

has been mutilated of

one

syllable.

In Sanskrit

existent,"

and also the

we find both i^>T more common t5R?

sn-ayambhit, as

appellations of
often

Brahma and Vishnu. That, however, as has been maintained, our word "God" is really related to
word comes from the root dhA, " to
.

* This
give," see

place," not

from dC, "

to

637.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

I

33

Jtf.

khudd, and that its primal signification has thus been disstill

covered through the Zend, we are forced

will

to doubt.

We

here only

call to

mind

that the

Germanic forms,
Persian.

especially

in the older dialects, in general

approximate much more to

the Sanskrit than to the

modern

^
thus

sw, in par-

ticular, in the Gothic, either

*/ (. 20.).

remains unaltered, or becomes

The pronominal

syllable

^ siva

exhibits itelf in
;"

the Gothic as a pronominal adverb, sva

(so) "

and

witli

an instrumental form, sve {vne) "how."

stantive sves

The neuter sub-

(Theme

svesa)

in Sanskrit the neuter

^
:

meAus Eigenthum, "property," as swa. I know of no certain form in

which a Germanic g or k corresponds to a Sanskrit sw or a Persian ^ left. To return, however, to the [G. Ed. p. 36.]
Persian

khu

= '^
;

siv

compare

(^^kfls.-

khuftan, " to sleep,"

with ^q^ swap

^^y-

kh(ic)db, " sleep,''

^^SiS^ kh{w)dndaru

" to sing," with

^^

with ^^TT sudpa ; suan, " to sound j"

_^^^
{^^J"
before
the

kli{w)dhar, " sister," with

^TH

sivasri,

Gothic svistar;

khur-shid, " sun,"

" heaven.''
r,

in

Zend ^^xi^ hvare, with ;5iT swar, some words ^kh corresponds to a Sanskrit k wliich position the Zend loves an aspiration in
In
;

modern Persian, however, a vowel intrudes between the guttural and the r; thus, ^^Jok]^ khirdm-idan, " to proceed with pomp," corresponds to the Sanskrit "gw kram, " to go,"
"to step;" and
equivalent root
Sanskrit
(Sanskiit
36.

^Jo^

khindan,

" to

buy," to the Sanskrit

aspirated

The Persian ^ kh answers to the krt ^^kh, in the word ji- khar, "ass"
its

^x

khara).

The

guttural n, and

aspirate
-^

"q,

are represented by

^ g and ogh.

The Sanskrit

gh has, however, sometimes

dismissed the aspiration in Zend; at least aj9j7aj garema, " heat" (depfjLTj and Wdrme), answers to the Sanskrit tt^

gharma

on the other hand, the xijoghna in

A5ypAj^(3'g7^(? verejt

thraghna, "victorious," corresponds to the Sanskrit

ghna at

the end of compounds; for instance, in ^rK a/rM-5r/na, " enemy

slayer."

The Zend

xi^')(3<^<^ verethraghna properly sjgni-

; ;

34
fies,

rHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

like the

word

so often used in the

same sense

/A>(A>7<3^/g(,i

and proves a connection between the Zendish and Indian mythologies, which, however,
in

verethra-zart, " killer of Viitra,"

consequence of the obscuration of meanings in Zend, and

the oblivion of the old Myths,

now only

exists in affinities of
titles

speech.

" Killer of Vritra " is

one of the most usual

Iiidra,

of

honour of the prince of the lesser gods, or

his slaughter of the

who, from

daemon Vritra, of the race of the Dathis

[G. Ed.

p.

37.]

nawas, bears

name.
.

We
37.

shall discuss the nasals apart in

60.

Of the
cA
(

Sanskrit palatals the

Zend has only

the tenuis

and the media, namely jj. j ( = "!): the aspirates are wanting, which is not surprising, as they are of

namely ^

=^

),

rare occurrence in the Sanskrit.

ples
:

The

following are exam-

j^jaj7a5^ charaUi,

"

he goes," Sanskiit ^ifir charnti

^^i^xs adjd, " strength," Sansk,

|>/AUGxf(jAj^c7(oi/twar^,

" four" (nom. plur. masc.) Sansk. ^irciKM

;

chuiwdras, ^RTTt citatwdrd

^I^

djas',

^t^

dj6.

It is,

however, to be observed,

that,

wiiile the Sanskrit ch

remains, by rule, unaltered in Zend, the

sonant J

is

often replaced

by other

letters

and

first,

by j

2:

for instance, Aj^Au^ zdta, "born," Sansk. 'smT^a^a ; secondly,

by b
38.

sli

for instance,

>y^)o

shenu, " knee," Sansk. irr^jdnu.

t,

The

modification of the sounds of

peculiar to the
is

Sanskrit, contained in the third

row of consonants,

wanting

in the Zend.

We

pass, therefore, to the ordinary

sounds of

that letter, the dentals.

These

are,

(w), (^ th

('^),^ d

(^) Q^ili (v), together with a

of which

/ (/),

peculiar to the Zend,

like the guttural

more

hereafter.
(^),

The ^tis

which and

we
Qxf

represent by k

in this

respect, that its

position is
r

almost limited to one preceding vowels.

w, and sometimes before ^^
y,

Before 7

in order to gratify the

affection of the latter for

an

aspirate, the aspirated

th

steps in.

Thus, for instance, ^^of^c^tlnvanm signifies "thee,*'

is

while the nominative

AAJ^ tava
;

written

^^^

turn,

and the genitive

and the word 9m^jm

dtar, " fire,"

nom. acAj^au

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

dtars,

35
r,

makes, after rejection of the a which preceded

wjrnt,"
>A}7(3jku

kj/wam

dihri, "

dthrat, " ab

igner &c.

If,

however,
n,

the

be protected by a preceding consonant, excepting

is

the succeeding semi-vowel

thereby de-

[G. Ed.
find, for

p. 38.]

p rived of
A>7(jojjAJ9

its

retro-active power.

We

instance,

vastra, not as/ojjxjIj vasthra, "garment,'* "vest;" but we have As/Ca^^ manthra, " speech," not Aj/p-^^ mantra,

from the root

ning

yAj^

man.

At the end

of a word, and,

which

rarely occurs, before strong consonants,

also,

(. 25.) at the begin-

and middle of a word, the Sanskiit

letter,

<

("ff

) is

re-

presented by a special

namely, by

r,

which we, with

t

Burnouf, write

t,

but formerly wrote with a simple

is

undotted

below, because no change

possible with

^ or

(a.

Rask

represents
tion.
I

it

by

ih,

because he recognises the sign of aspira-

am

unable, however, to assent to the universal

validity of this sign of Rask's,

aspirate, as in Sanskrit,
also

and

incline to rejecting the

from the end of words.

is

We
jo

should
as well

remember
;

that the diphthong i

written

as

the

last,

which prevails at the end of words, with

a stroke similar to that which distinguishes our i from ^.

Before consonants, for instance, in the word ^'i^^-'^^'^ tkuesho, the sounding of th would be more precarious than
that of
lant
t,

in case this ih did not

I

somewhat partake of a
i
is,
r,

sibi-

sound.

think, however, that

has merely a

feebler pronunciation than

f,

breathing of
p.re

as, in Sanskrit, s
(.

and and

so to say, the last

at the
rT

end of words,

diluted to Visarga
is,

11.);

and as

t,

in Prakrit,

and

also in Greek,
39. __^ is

at the end of words, altogether suppressed.

,

the ordinary d ^

and q^ according

to Rask's

just remarK, its aspirate dh.

This represents the Sanskrit

fM.

dh, for instance, in

the imperative ending

(o^

The

Zend, moreover, favours

dntn, " given," but

dh for__^ d in the middle of

woids between two vowels.

We

find, for instance, aj^au^

^;^(li{

j^au^ Ai^ dudhdm'u Sanskiit

daddmU
p. 39.
]

"I give"; and aj^au,2,^j^a3^ mazda-dhdia,

[G. Ed.

o2

36
" given

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

by Ormusd," " created "
;
;

J(o^^*o yMhit "

if,"

San-

skrit ^f^ yadi

40.

xsi^m^

pMha,
9

"foot," Sansk. VJ^ pdda.

letters

The

labial class
this

embraces the

p, ^ f,_i h,

and the nasal of

q)

organ

m, of which more hereafter.

p answers to the Sanskrit tl p, and is transformed into / by the retro-active aspirative power of a following 7 r,
s,

Mi

and
TTjOo)
<2)a5

whence, for instance, the preposition

ij

pra

(pro,

becomes, in Zend, ajoA fra;

op, " water " {aqua,

and the primitive

a(pp6g
6fs,
),

words

and perhaps

5>J^J5

Arerep, "

body," form in the nominative, j^^Mi

av^^7^^

kerefs

on the other hand, in the accusative,

9gQ>/'g^

^jqJau

dphn,

^8^?^85 A-erey;em, or

kehrpem.

In regard to the

power which resides in n of aspirating ap, compare >yA>^ < /77U, "burning," from the root q)aj^ <ap, with the derivative

from the same root

j^oj/o^^ajqJau^au
p.

dlapayeiti,

"

he

shines" (See Vendidad Sade,

csafna,

333),

and the plural mj^mmsS^

i^Mi?M':ij^JM(Si

" nights," with the ablative singular

p. 33o), in
is

csupardt (Vendidad Sade,

which, even in the root,

observable, as the

the interchange between n and r

same

takes place in the Sanskrit between ^f^i

ahar, "day."
i.e.

ahan and

^T
q)

(Gramm.
itself,

Crit. r. 228. annot.)

Originally

standing for

and not proceeding from the

to

by the influence described In some instances known

skrit
>T

/is of very rare occurrence.

me
it

corresponds to the San-

6^,

which, however, for the most part, in the Zend

In AnquetiPs Vocabulary
tfif*?

has rejected the aspiration.

find ndfo,
*'

we

navel," which in Sanskrit is written

iidbhi;

and

in the fern, accus. plural, of frequent occurrence in the

Zend-Avesta, ja?^7^^^>> hufedhris, we recognise the Sanskrit

wr^

subhadra

"

very fortunate," " very excellent,*

also a title of Vishnu.

41.

We come now
p. 40.]

to the semi-vowels,

and must,

in

order

to follow the order of the Sanskrit alphabet, discuss y in the

[O. Ed.

next place, by which we express the sound

Italian jy the English consonantal y.

of the

German and

This

; ;

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

semi-vowel
is

37
by y^ or

written at the beginning of words

j^, and in the middle by the duplication of the u ^^, as in the Old High German we find w expressed. This semi-vowel,

and the vowels which correspond to

into the preceding syllable

it,

and ^

i,

introduce

menon,
in
its

first

an j i; an interesting phenoobserved by Burnouf (1. c. pp. 340, 341), and which

principle is connected with the

(. 73.).

German vowel

modifi-

cation

We

are obliged to ascribe a similar influence

aj ^

also to the

diphthong

where

it

stands at the end of a

word.
sing,

Frequent occasion for

this presents itself in the dat.

and the third

;t>Z5Asy

pers. pres. of the

middle verb.

For

in-

stance,

naire, " homini,^^ for

;t)/A5y

nare, is frequent;

but

Aj^;oAj/Ajy naraecha,

" hominique,^''

is

an exception.

The
i,

vowels after which, by the attractive power of the letters

mentioned, an j
as to which

is

placed, are

a,

sud,

>

u,

u,

rJ,

we must
i,

also observe, that

u,

in the case of a
:

succeeding

is

lengthened.

Examples are
;

xi^y(2^^
"

'^"^"

dhya

(r|

madhya)

" middle "

xs^y^Mi nairyn,

man'
;

j^jAJAii bavaiti, " he is"; j^jau^^aj^ dadhditiy " he gives"

j^jr3ii.M^Mi<;pMi dtdpayeiti,

"he shines";

j^j^j'^/^^ kerenditi,

"he makes"*;
fourth,"

J^^^m
^^ttt

stu'idhi,

"praise," instead of
;

j^^jj
" the
*

studhU from the root >^ja

ku (^)

aj^^^^j^^o tuirya,

from

chatur,

with the

'^

cha suppressed
aj7>;aj

Ai^^7j>iyjM dhuirya,

an adjective, derived from

ahura.

With regard
it

to the influence of ^^ j
i

does not

mix up an

y we must observe, that with a vowel immediately pre-

ceding, but only with one separated

from

it

by one conson,

nant

for if there be two, unless the first be

the retro-

active

power of
aisti,

not j^Mjxs

thus .j^jjaj astit y, i, or t, is neutralized stands for " he is " on the other hand we
; ;

have j^^jA>Aii bava'mli, Sansk. H^rfriT bhavanti, " they are/"* Several other consonants also resist simply [G. Ed. p. 41.]
this

power

of attraction

thus

we have

>^i\^M^ dakhyu, not

Or more immediately from

the Sanskrit ordinal in turyya or 7[^^^

iurtya, " fourth." rfi7or.

3^

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

province"
;

>i^lojA3^ daikhyu, " land/' "

and the
or Jtp
In the

of the obtain

personal

terminations j^ mi and j^v

hi,

shi,

no influence over the preceding

syllable.

same manand in the

xi a,

ner, in the first person plural, jwaj^ mahi, not jwjas^ maihi,

corresponds to the
genitive
a-hS,

Veda termination ^f^ mast

of the stems, or inflective

bases, in

^^waj

not ^wjas aih^, stands for ^s^ a-aya.

42. ^^ y sometimes also exerts that disturbing influence on a following a5 a or Mi d, which is equivalent to the insertion of a vowel, or of i, and consequently effects their

transmutation
*

into

;o

^*
is

thus

the

bases of nouns in
It is

The expression

of the text

"iiufsert

umlautenden Einfluss."

liardly possible to render into

English without circumlocution certain

terms wliich the philologers of German}^ have invented and adopted to

exfjress the various modifications of the

Indo-Germanic vowel ; such

as,

Ablaut, Auflnut, Jnlaut, Umlaut.

Whether

these terms have in them-

selves the virtue of suggesting to a Teutonic ear the particular modification

of the vowel to which they are respectively applied

if to

may be doubted ; but

of the case,

the student and the teacher they answer the purpose of a memoria
is

technica, tlieir use

fully justified

by the necessity

and the

practice of a language which possesses a singular and inexhaustible

power

of progress and adaptation to exigencies.

that the uncouthness of such

In our language,
as

it

seems to ns

compounds

Upsound, Offsonnd, and Into be derived

sound, could hardly be compensated

their use
;

by any advantage
them

from

and we therefore purpose, in the course of

this

work, where any

of these terms occur in the original, to retain

in their

German

shape.

Of

these terras. Ablaut and

Umlaut are those which

is,

chiefly, if not alone

are used by our author.

Inlaut

we

believe,

merely the Sanskiit Guna.

The meaning

of the

two former, and

their distinction

from each other,

may
lent

best be explained

by the following
p. 10.
'*

extract from our author's excel-

work the Vocalismus,

I

"

designate," he says,
is

vowel, which

distinguished from the

influence

produced by

tlie

by the term Ablaut, a change of the root Umlaut by the fact that it is not of the vowel of the termination ; for Umlaut is

a mere affection, disturbance {Triibung) of the primary sound, througli

which that sound becomes more homogeneous with the vowel of the termination; while in the Ablaut, without any recognised external cause, it

makes room

for another, and, in general, totally different

'

sound

as in

Gothic, nima,

take

'

nam,

'I took.'

say, without

any recognised external

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

AJ/o
yo.

39
of

form, in the genitive,

j^feyA^^MJ

y^-hi, instead
Jf

j^WAj^H) ya-/,i;

and, with the verb, the old Sanskrit

ya

or TU yd of the fourth and tenth classes, in the present

singular becomes rsy^ ye.

Compare
didpaydmi,

j9;o^^ajq)juj^au 6i6.-

paySmi, jwAJi^AjaJjuu^juj dldpayeui, j^jA3i^AJ2)Au^AX5 dldpayiili,

with the Sanski-it

^lifiqitlfn

WTHT^ltrftr dfdpnyasi,

^I rimqfcT dldpayati.

In the

last syllable, aj^^

ya before 9 m,
therefore,
tui-

according

to

rule,

becomes

^ t;

and after the same

analogy, 9aj vam becromes ^^ uin.

for instance, 9^Z)^^ tuinm, " lertiam

We

find,

" cjuartumr

from Aj^jrJ^^

rya; and

^^Ti;pj^(^ thrishum.

partem^ ^^t^i>^(^M^
llirishva,
is

chat brush um,

" fpiartam

partem^"

from ajj^j/0

A5i:^>7c3A5^ chathrushva.

This appearance

to be thus

understood, that the antecedent semi-vowel, after the suppression of the a, passes into its corresponding vowel, which,

however, according to the rule of

. 64.,

must be a long
aj

one.

The

^^ y*, after

its

influence has
;

transformed

a into

;o e, is

often itself suppressed

" I shewed,"
])ecause
I

thus

we

find ^nJAsjSAJAj^j*

frddaem^m,
temal cause
;

from m^^l^H prddesayam, which

I

think

can shew that the Ablaut also

is

produced

by the particular quality and condition of the termination.

however,

Whether,

we

seek for the radical vowel in the present or the preterite, the

change

is

equally one quite different from that of the Indian

it is

Gana

or

Vriddhi, and in this respect, that

a positive cliange

wlule in Sanskrit

the root vowel

is

not in fact changed, but only receives an increment, and

that increment always one and the same, with

self,

which

it

diplithongizes it-

as in Greek,
is

and v with

f,

Xetn-a, (fjevya.

In respect of signification,

likewise, there

a difference between the Indian

,

Guna and
it

Vriddhi and

Gernianic Ablaut

for the Ablaut has acquired for itself a significatory

if,

power
to rest

for

grammatical purposes, even

:

as

conjecture,

did not origi-

nally possess such

the contrast between the present and the past seems

is

upon

it,

and there are indications that the latter

express* d

by

this

change.

In Sanskrit,

Guna and Vriddhi

inflections

present no indication of this sig-

nificatory power, but,

tions,

merely in the character of diphthongizing modifica-

accompany those

which do bisrnify grammatical

relations."

Further illustrations of these latter remarks are to be found in the

Note

4,

which Professor B

ipp has

appended to the above passage of the

Vocalismns. - Trans.

Cf. p. 963,

N01&

40

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

class,

according to the rule of the tenth

would be formed

from

f^

dis.

The genitive termination

^ sya
the

appears

everywhere reduced into j^w hS. The semi-vowels ^^ y and V are generally suppressed after preceding conso[G, Ed.
p. 42.]

nants*
gives up

and
w.

thus, also,

imperative

ending
43.

^ swa

its

y is sometimes, for euphony, interposed between two vowels (Gram. Crit. rr. 271. 310. 311.);
In Sanskrit,

but this does not uniformly occur.

tion of

In Zend, the interposi;t)

y between

>

u,

u,

and a following

S,

amount to a law. Thus the Sanskrit "3^ (from "^and ??, Gram. Crit. r. 55.), becomes,
rnruy^
(^. 63.)
;

bruv^,

seems to " I say ^

after the

in Zend, j^^^^/^9

and the neuter form

tv

^ dui, "two,"
form
30.)
(.

vocalization of the
44.
/
r,

into u, takes the

vo^:>>^ duyS.

We

have already remarked

with respect to

that at the end of a

for

word an

c e is

always appended to

it;

instance,

^9m^m^

ddtare,

"Creator,"
;

j/A5fev

hvare, "Sun,"

instead

of 7aj^am^ ddtar

"Giver"; /mw hvar.

In the middle of a word, where an

is

not introduced

according to sonant
is

48.,

the union of 7 r with a following con;

mostly avoided
is

so,
:

indeed, that to the originally

vowelless r an e
dadaresa, from

appended

thence, for instance, ajjjjAj^aj^

;

transposed, in

^|t dadarsa, " vidi,'''' " vkHf^ or the r is the same manner as is usual in the Sanskrit for
Crit. r. 34^.)

the avoidance of the union of t r with two followins: consonants.

(Gram.

Hence, for instance, aja57^au

dthrava, "priests" (nominative), accus. 9j/a>aj/oau dthra-

vanem, from the theme /aj?aj^au dtorvnn, which in the weak

cases
(. 129.)
(.

contracts itself into )>7>(aMi ulhurun or )>?>M<^Mi

28.)

dthaurun.
syllabic

To

this, also,

pertains the fact that poly2kj

stems (or uninflected bases) in

ar, at

the

beinto

ginning of compounded forms, transpose

AJ? ra ;

this syllable

and thus aj^Gam

dthra,

" fire,"

stands instead of

liu

see 7-^1.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

/ajOjuu

41
[G. Ed.
p. 43-3

dthar*

The combinations

^^7 ry,

?> urv, are only permitted

where a vowel

follows,

and the

combination M&^xiars only as a termination, and in the middle

of a

word before ^

for instance,

i^^^h^^ tuiryn, " the

jm9>

fourth";

Aj^^^Ailp vairya,

"strong";
;

urvan,

"soul"

Aj/>Aj' haurva, "

whole"

(?)

jio^aj^au atars, " fire"

;

(nomina;

tive)

Mi^Mi nars, "of a

man"
" four

aj^j^o^aj^ harsta,

"ploughed"

but

jto>7<3Aj^ chaihrus,

times," for jtvsAwAj^ chathurs,

rs.
I

since here no a precedes the

45.
It is

worthy of remark, that in the Zend the

r,

is

want-

ing, as in

Chinese the

while, nevertheless,

it

exists in the

modern

Persian, and shews itself in words which are not of

Semitic origin.

in the Zend, 9, , and

The Sanskrit ^ v has three representatives od*. The two first are so far distin-

guished from each other in their use, that 9 corresponds to the

Sanskrit
of words
t-

only at the beginning, and only in the middle

for instance, ^a3a>(p

va^m,

" we,""

= ^^^

vaynm,

AsA5^ tava (tui)

= 'in tava.

This distinction, as Rask justly

oxf,

assumes,

is

only graphic.

which

I,

with Burnouf, ren-

der by w, most frequently occurs after

<3th, so that

never
find

accompanies an antecedent 6 M.

On the other hand we

much

oftener than

cjd*after

the aspirated medials of this class.

Perhaps the law here obtains that the (^dh, which, according to . 39., stands for_^ c? (5) ,is only followed by , while
an original (^dh, corresponding
appears in conjunction with
(sxf.

to a

Sanskrit ^ dh, only Thus ^q^sj dadhvdo,

.uj^ r/d
j",

"having created," "given," from the root

to the Sanskrit nora.
;

answers

^fT^ dadivan while the accusative, of frequent occurrence in theVendidad, ^<^iMi^i^Madhuanem, seems to be identical with the Sanski-it ^ qT V<n adhwdnom,
t;

" viam.^

(Vend. Olsh.

p. 18.)

After other consonants than

* By Stlimme, the author here evidently means the crude derivative words which serve as Stems or Bases to inflected words, or those in combination with inflectional terminations; thus dthra for dthar, forma

dthravu, dthravanem, not dtJiarva, dthartanam, kc.

Editor.
637.

t The root corresponds to the Sanskrit dhd, see

42
<3 f/i

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS

and Q^dh, and ^^
p. 44.]

oxTm?

appears not to be admitted, but only

qjcT

on the other hand,

i

w much

prevails between two is

or J

y,

in which

position
in tlie

[G. Ed.

Thus we read
jtvsjaicO^

v is not allowed. Vendidad (Olsh. p. 23),

and
jcvsjoxOaj^

the nominatives

driwis, " beggar,"" (?)

daiwis, "a, worshipper of Daeva."

jtojaxOAj^ daiwiH

however,
to

as derived from

dn^a through

the suffix j

i,

seems

me
is it

dubious, and I prefer the variation MiJ^^^^ daivis.

Or

between i and
instance
plural
;

also that oxf

w only
*'

can be allowed

Another

is,

^AicOA5 aiivyo,

aquisr as dative and ablative

an interesting form which long remained a mystery

to me, but which I

am now in condition to explain.

ap, "

It

springs

from the root

q)aj

water" in such a manner, that after

wj^r

suppression of the p,* the Sanskrit termination

hhyas,
hy6,

which elsewhere, in the Zend, appears only as \^Al

has weakened
itself to "^^ioxfici/d, and,
i

according to

. 41.,

has

introduced an j
>?

into the base.

itself in

Another instance in which

hh has weakened

the

Zend

into a semi- vowel,

and obtained the form

(mTio in virtue of its position

between
for
It

two

J Ts, is the

very

common
is

preposition

joj^Oaj, aiwi,

which, however, jUJAs aihi

sometimes substituted.
>?

may
v.

be appropriate here to remark that

hh appears in the

Zend, in other company, in the enfeebled shape of

We

find,

namely, the base "^W

iJjha,

" both," not only in the

AJ<i>A5

shape

Aii>

uba, but also in that of

I

aova

(.

28.),

the
S.

neuter dual form of which

p. 88.,

think

recognise in the Vend.

where j^^o^jqJjj kji^J^aj ^jmmj^ anieshi speniS, can hardly signify any thing

^^m
else

aovS

yamd

than " ambos

f venerans Amschaspanlos'' (non conniventes Sanctos, see Nalus, vv. 25, 26.) Anquetil interprets (T. 3, p. 472.) ovS, by "tons
deux.''*

We
r,

have

still

another position to mention, in which

[G. Ed.

p. 45.]

the

semi-vowel

ojf iv

appears, namely,

before 9

in

which connection the softer

is

more appro-

* Compare, in

this respect,

^m

abhra, " cloud," for

w^^

ab-bhra,

"\vater.bearing,''and the Zend A5^c/cjAM<i-iereto,nom." water- bearer."

t Biirrioufreadscwi
{i.e.

"over") and makesi/usne, signify "reverence."

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

priate than the harder
is

43
this case

the feminine
believe

juLj7axr>j3

The only example of r. murd, " sword," "dagger,"'

in

which

we As

we

recognise the Sanskrit

^suMra, "shining,"*
with Buruouf,
is

to the pronunciation of the ad* w, I think,

it

that

accords with the Enjjlish

iv,

which also

akin to the

Sanskrit

v after consonants.
ad"

Rask reverses the powers,

pronouncing the Zend

as the English f,

and the

letters

9 and
46. I

as the English w.

have not detected in the v and

unless the

traction similar to that

w a power of atwhich belongs to the 5^ y, as determ

as7>aj haurva, "all,^

scribed in

. 41.,

which

often occurs, as well as a>j3^ lispa, is derived

from the

Sanskrit TC% sarwa, "all."

have, however, already else-

where ascribed

to the corresponding
;

vowel

>

u a power of

attraction, howbeit sparingly exerted

in virtue of which,

for instance, the base

)Xi/M^Mi aiarvan, " priests,'' in the

that
yjot?

weak

cases (see

129.), after

can has contracted

itself into y> un,

by the

influence of this u, also converts the

a of the preceding syllable into u; hence, for instance, in

the dative, *^;>/>a5^jiu ataurune for K?y>/Aj^juj atarune.
Sanski'it

The

in^
p. 46.]

taruna,

"young,"

is,

in Zend, A>y>7>^ turiina vasu, "thing,'' "riches,"

u,

or

Mp9>M^ tauruna

(. 28.);

and

[G. Ed.

has,

by the influence of the concluding

first

converted
47.

itself into

>^\l^ v6hu.
to

Burnouf wus the

remark on the

fact,

pecu-

liar to the

Zend, that the semi- vowels are fond of

;

nicating an aspiration to a preceding consonant

(. 40.)

commuand we

and

find ourselves

have ascribed a similar influence to jt^ s and t n, compelled to assign the same also to the
sutcrafun, appears in Olshausen, n. 13, with
(. 40.)

* The accusative ^^/Qxf>M

the variation ^v>}j^> jj su/ranm.

Then ne often

find the instrii-

meutal AJi^/ad>JJ suvnrya, for which, however,

suicraya, \i

imtrya be not derivable from a

we miLSt read AJ^^^3d> JJ Theme ^WVjj iutcri, after

r.

the analogy of 44ft^O sundari, from

^T^ sundwa. (Graram. Crit.

270.)

44
labial nasal,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS

by which,
for instance, the feminine participle
itself to ^co>>99-^ii,ia5'/'wiM.s7a.

^Tw^ Jagmushi
The

has changed
is

dental medial

free

from

this influence, for

we

find

A5^ dva, "two," Mi(S^>9^ drucs,

*a demon,"' (accus. 9ji>^ drujem,) not Mi(S^>')(^^dhrucs, ^<^iy}p(^dhrvjem. The guttural

is,

medial

however, exposed to this influence, as in the

abovementioned instance of jmjhmushi.

other hand, adduced, in
. 3S.,

We

have, on

tlie

a limitation of this appearance.

is less

The
the
/

aspirating virtue of the ^^ y

r

potent than that of

and
t\

(mT

w, and

we

find

often preceded by the unhitya,

aspirated

for

instance,

in

Aj^^^q^a

"the second,"

Xi^i^j'^<3 thritya,

"the

third'':

on the other hand, we have

mntyu.
above rule stands the pheno-

>^^(3g/g9 merethyu, " death," Sansk. irm

48. In connection with the

menon,
a

that before

r,

when followed by any consonant not

/aj^

sibilant,

an h

is

usually placed; for instance as^waj^

mahrka, "death," from the root

^jqJ/w^^ keJirpem,
jiw^g^g^
kerefs)
;

or

^^'^^'^^^

kerepem, "the

mar (w mn,) "to die' body" (nom.

AJ^g7g(p vereka,

A5yo'j9 vehrka, or
also,

" wolf,"

(^oR viika.)

The semi-vowel y

which only appears be-

fore vowels, sometimes attracts an

tliivahya,

thus, As^^wAJwio
j^tji

"through

thee," corresponds to the Sanskrit

AJ^^tVAJM^cS^

iwayd; and the word

[G. Ed.
p. 47.]

csahya (nom. ^^^^wajaccx^

csahyd adduced by Rask, stands for Aj^iA5.H;(3:^

csi,

csaya and comes from the root ^Mi(S^

49.

" to rule," (f^j kshi.)

We come now

to the sibilants.

The

first,

a palatal,

pronounced in Sanskrit with a gentle aspiration, ^, which we express by s in Sanskrit, and t in Zend, is written m in
the latter.
able.
Its

exact pronunciation
as&igns
it

is

scarcely

ascertains.

Anquetil

that of the ordinary

It

in

general occurs in those positions in which the Sanskrit in

corresponding words has

'

its ^r s

thus,

for instance,

dam,

ten," saia, " hundred," pasu, " beast," are

common
itself

to both

languages.

In this respect in Sanskrit

;

has spread

wider in

Zend than

that

before

several

consonants,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

namely, ^
after
t,

45

^ k,

and

the middle of words

aj a,

in the
an

y n, as well at

the beginning as in

latter

place,

however, only

au d,

and

-jjj

it

corresponds to the Sanskrit

Compare ^ij^juj^jj stdrd, "the stars," with <HKM^ sfdras; j^^ms^m kdomi, "I praise," with wifij sfdumi; j^mm asti, "he is," with ^fw asti; ^'^^jjas " aj^^asjjj skanda^ ahnnm, ossium" with -^aflJil asihi
dental or ordinary s
Jf.
;

" shoulder,"

(?)

with ^F*i skandha

juiyjj

snd, " to purify,"

with ^n snd^ "to bathe."

We

might infer from

this cirs,

cumstance that

s J3

was pronounced as a simple

yet

it

may have
sh,

to

do with a dialectical preference for the sound

as happens with the

German

s in

the Suabian dialect,

t

and pretty universally at the beginning of words before and

p.

It is further to

be remarked, that
"4

s J3

occurs also
for this pre-

at the end of words after

an.

The occasion

sents itself in the

50.

nom.

sing. masc. of bases in

^^

nt
o)

The semi-vowel
;

is

regularly hardened into

jiua)jj

after ja s

hence, for instance,

ajqJjj^

spd, " canis^

[G. Ed.

^jyju3a)j3
p. 48.]
"gT

spdnem
A5a)a3Aj

" canem,"

vispa,

" all,"

aspa, " horse," corresponding to the Sanskrit

sud.

TBTfTT sicdnam,
is

fV^ visiva, ^S^ asica.

in

aj^^^c)j3 spenta,

"

holy,"

not corresponded to by a Sanskrit t?RT ^rcnnfo, which must

use,

have originally been

szavta-s indicates.
ition is easy to the

and which the Lithuanian

From
Greek

the

Zend

ajq)j3xj
is

aspa^ the trans-

itttto^,

which

less obvious in the

case of the Indian asua.

51.

supplies

For the Sanskrit lingual two letters, j^ and j^.

pronounced
like the
;

sibilant

^^

sh,

the

Zend

The
s,

fii-st,

according to

Rask,

is

ordinary

and

tlierefore like the

Sanskrit dental

and marks
it

this

while j^ has the sound of "^ = shi ^ by a stroke of aspiration. We therefore write
that these

sh.*

Rask observes
;

two

letters are often inter-

changed in MSS.
* It is

which he accounts for by the circumstance

anj mark.

in this Translation given sh without

Sh

denotes the

Sanak.

'^.

46
that M5
is

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

used in the Pehlevi for
sh,

and that the ParsJ

copyists have been long better acquainted with the Pehlevi

than the Zend.

Mi almost everywhere corresponding to

We find, also, in the Codex edited by Burnouf, i^ sh. We recognise,

however, from the text edited by Olshausen of a part of the

Vendidad, and the variations appended, that although in etymological respects m5 as well as
skrit
1?

ctj

corresponds to the Sanis

;

sh,
(.

the principal position of Mi

25.)

before strong con-

sonants

and at the end of words

a position of

much

importance in the Zend, and which requires attention in the

cases of other
classes

of letters.
qc,
t,

In this respect Mi rethe gutturals

among and among the

sembles,
[G. Ed.
p.

the dentals,

among

c,

nasals principally

n.

At the end

of

words, indeed, Mi s corresponds to the Sanskrit

49.]

s,

but yet

only, after such letters as, in the middle of

a word, would, according to Rule 10 1(*) of

my Sanskrit Gram<S^

mar, change an original

other than a and
d,

s into i^

sh

namely, after vowels

c

and

after the consonants

and

r.

Hence, for instance, the nominative

ji\3>J3AjQ>

MiJ^J>s<:^ paitis,

"Lord,"
drucs,

pasus, "beast," Mi/M^^^^ Mars, "fire,"

Mi(S^'>2^

" daemon,"
jj-^^Aii

from the theme

\i>2^ druj.

On

the other hand,

In the
s

baruns, "bearing,"
MiAiMi<S^ csvas,
it

from ^o^aj^ barant*

word

" six," it is true

a terminating Mi

stands after a; but

does not here replace a Sanskrit

shash.

t( g,

but the original

of Mi s for
"^

^ sh of "^^

sh before strong consonants,

As evidence of the use we may adduce

aj^^j ista
(i.e. tcrros),

the very usual

superlative suffix

corresponding to the Sanskrit ^?

are
aj^j^o^aj^

ishtha.

Other examples
krishta.

karsta,

" ploughed,"

for

c^'g

In the

word
oj s,

xsjXi^^xiMi

sayana "camp,"'' Mi stands irregularly for

which

latter

was to be anticipated from the

(cf. sait^,
.

San-

skrit

^nR

sayana

54.)

In the

fem. numeral

retain here the original

in use.
50 t

t,

since tlie

theme of the word does not

for nd
i.

appear

must otherwise have been changed

CHAEACTERS AND SOUNDS.

\>7j,SM^j^ t'lsard,

47

"three*" (Olsh. p. 26),

the >o might seem

questionable, for the Sanskrit form

cordinor to
. 53.,

is frfya tisras,

and
is

l?

ac-

becomes

w
sh

h.

The

^,

however,

here

in a position (after

i)

in
^^

which the Sanskrit favours the

;

conversion of

?r

s into

and on this rests the Zend

does not, however, stand as
. 52., is

form

'i'^-w-H?-}^

tisard.

That

it

V^-^'ftO-*^ tisharo,

as

we might expect from

certainly
as

not to be ascribed

to the original existence of

a,

for

4'^wjioJ^ tisard stands for ^7av?j^ ihrd,

52.
taj

stands for the Sanskrit

^ sh

be-

[G. Ed. p. 50 ]

fore vowels and the semi-vowels ^^ y and

9"'itOA?Aj^;oAj
liiml

compare
aj^^i^aj^

aelaeshanm and a5j^;oaj^ajxj ait'thhva, with

eteshdm, " horunh'

and ^F^

ei^shu,

*'

in

his^-^

nuishya,

"man," with T^^ manushya.

<S^

Yet
;

i*y

sh does not

unite itself with an antecedent

but for the Sanskiit

text,

ksh

we

find almost

everywhere in Olshausen's
cs;

and

without variation,
csnihra,

j^^

hence, for instance, >i)<^>iMi(^

kshatrai

"king," Sanskiit

t^

"a

man

of the war-

like or royal caste."

A5^4'-'^yey5^
it,

Tlie

word of frequent occurrence,

cshnadma, and the third person connected with

j^jA?i^Aj9'iAj;cy(3^ cshnadmayeiti,
reject,
is

we must, on a double
at p. 33, since

ground,
J^9

and prefer the variation given

s here

prolonged, as well by the preceding c as by

It
is,

the following n.

however, worthv of remark, that the

the guttural,
dalshina,

Sanskrit

fish

in

many Zend words abandons

sh.

and

appears as j^

For

instance,

^^jTff

" deiter^

becomes

Ajyji^yAs^

dashina (Lithuan. deszine, "the

jj^oaj

right hand""), and ^[f^ akshi, "eye,'' becomes

oshi,

which, however, seems only to occur at the end of possessive

compounds (Bahuvrihi).
53.
fev

is

never, in etymological respects, the repre"^ h,

sentative of the Sanskrit

si!

but of the pure and dental

7,

ilant

s.

Before vowels, semi-vowels, and

invariably becomes
,

in Zend,

this

letter

possibly because
n,

sw
to

( 35.) takes the

shape

^c kh;

while before

and such con[G. Ed.

sonants as cannot unite with a preceding

h, (. 49.) it is
p. 51.J

be looked for in the shape of

i.

The

48
roots

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

which begin with sp and sph have not yet been by me in the Zend but I am convinced that
;

detected

^T^

spri's,

for instance, " to touch," could not begin othersp.

wise in Zend than with <dM

ZEND.
JttJW

Compare, for instance

SANSKRIT.

hd, "they,"

m
^H
^^^^
fnfiff

sd.

A5^Q>A} hapta, " seven,"

sapta.
^'^^P^asi.

iK'g/g^AJW hakereU
jfeVAj

"once,"

ahi, "

thou art,"
" to this,"

.jJiu^^A)

ahmdi, ^?j^w hvare, " suii,"

A5' hva, " his,"

'Sl^

astndi.

^^

swar, " heaven/'

swa.

The word
as

aj>>^j' hizva, "

tongue," from fif^jihwa, deserves

if

mention, because the sibilant quality of the

is

treated

s,

and replaced hj
I

(. 58.).

54.

do not remember to have met with an instance of

the Sanskrit

the combination 9w hr;

word t{T^
it,

sahasra,

"thousand," which might give occasion for

has rejected

the sibilant in the last syllable, and taken the shape xil^fM^i

haznnra.
^r^oii

If,

in

the

word

aj^jiv5>'

huska, " dry,"

s,

Sansk.

susjika,

replaces the Sansk.

we must remember

that the Latin siccus indicates a Sansk.

larly

s,

been use c regu-

answers

to

^
s,

.v.

In

many
is

instances of Sanskrit roots

beginning with

the corresponding

grounded on the change which

[G. Ed.
p. 62.]

Zend form may be effected on an initial ?r.s by

(Gram. Crit
r.

the influence of certain prepositions.

80.)

Thus

believe

have clearly ascertained

the existence of the Sanskrit participle

fected," in the

f^

siddlia, "

per-

term of frequent occurrence in the Vendidad

after the

^j^.MjAj^ shdistem;
" deceased,"
(p. 29)

analogy of m^mj7j
.

iristot

from

(3j7j iritli

(see

99.)

Olshausen

notifies

as variations

of ^g^ojjjjuo^o
shdisfim,

shdisiem

^^^mjjmm
shdisHm,

sdistem,

^^^J^Jauj^

^^^Vi^-iJ^iCp

and

^^^ew^-w^l^ shdistem.
sents a difficulty
;

In

all

these forms, the long a pre.

for,

according to
shaidh;

28.,

f^

shidh would
suffix ta,

give the form

(o^as^i)

and

this,

with the

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS

A5^jjjA5ia) shalsta, in

49

the nom. and accus. neut. ^f^ojJJAut^

(vol.
If.

shdi&thn.

What

Anquetil
existe

p.

279) translates. Juste

juge du monde qui

par

voire puissance, vous qui etes la

purete mhne, quelle est la premiere chose qui plaise a cette terre
{que nous kabitons), et la rende favorable, runs in the original
(Olsh., p. 29,

Bumouf,

p. 137),

-ja3^j3aj 9"g4/A5n?AStt

^m^ms^

Ddtare gaSthananm astvaitinanm ashdum! kva paoirim anhcto

"Creator mundorum existentium, pure! primum hujus terrcE perfectum (.bonum?") 55. The nominative pronominal base sya (Graram. Crit. r. 26S), in the Veda dialect, is under the influence of and we see in Rosen's specimen, p. 6, the preceding word

zemo shdistem?

ubi (quid)

this pronoun,

when

it

follows the particle

u,

converted

into vfshya, after the analogy of rule lOl" of

I have detected a similar
for

my Grammar.
;

phenomenon
"
ei,"

in the
is

Zend pronouns

we

find

ajw

he, " fjusi'^

(cf. "k

which

founded on a

lost Sanskrit

i d
it

me, " mei,"" " mihi,"^ and

if,''

<^,

"iut\'^

"

iibi "),

when

follows j^;o>*o yezi, "

taking the form

for instance^
find

roMi gi

(more correctly, perhaps,

:

ro^ip shS);

at p. 37 of Olshausen

while on the

same page we
[G. Ed.

;c' Aj^.>^n3>*o yezicha hi,

(und iienn ihm,)

p. 63.]

"and
read

if

to him.''
if,

In the following page

we

find a similar

phenomenon,
it

as I can hardly doubt,

^j^

shdo (thus I

with the variation), corresponds to the Sansknt

^#ajd("i//e," "iZ&i"): aso^^m^ "^C^ gu^lJO "^ 9-^ J3 '^*Y/ M^^/M^M, Noit zi im z&o shdo yd (text, guu^ ydo) daregha
akarsia (text, Aj^en^^J^As adarsta),
lies
'*

For not

this earth

which

long unploughed/'

56).

An w

h standing between a or d and a following

;

vowel
this

is usually preceded by a guttural nasal (9 n) appendage seems indispensable I remember, at

and
least,
o,
A,

no exception
or
e.

in cases wl)ere the following

vowel

is

We
of the

find,

for

instance, Ajfevju/^^Ajj^) usazayanha,

"thou wast born"; while in the active the personal ending

jw

hi

present admits no nasal

and we

find, for

50

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

"

instance, j^vaj ahi,

thou art,"

jj^ajaocS^avi bacsahi,

" tliou

givest," not jw^uu anhi,

56*).

j^^Mi(^>^ bacsanhi. The termination as, which in Sanskrit only before sonaii t
25.)

consonants (.

and ^a, dissolves

its Tf

into

"^ u,

and contracts

the latter together with the preceding a into

6 (compare the

French au, from

al)

this ancient termination as appears in

Zend, as also in Prakrit and Pali, always under the shape of 6

On

the other hand, the termination

all

ds,

which in Sanskrit
s,

before

sonant letters entirely abandons the

in

Zend
o (for

has never allowed the concluding sibilant entirely to expire,

but everywhere preserves

[G. Ed.
p. 54,]

its I

fusion in the shape of

u)

and
I

consider myself thereby strongly

supported in a conjecture

enounced before

my acquaintance
It

with Zend,* that in Sanskrit the suppression of a terminating

s

after d had preceded the vocalization of this s into u.

is

remarkable that where, in Zend, as above observed, an

precedes the
s

h which springs out of the

the enclitic particle
jj s,
s,

of the
aj^ cha,

syllable ds, or where, before

the

above mentioned
substantial

is

changed into

together with

these
into
a
d>

representatives of the

its

evaporation

o is also retained,

and the

sibilant thus appears in

double form, albeit torpid and evanescent.

To

illustrate

this

by some examples, the Sanskrit

Zend the form
s
;

jtt^

" mds, " luna

an uninflected nominative,
receives in

for the s belongs to the root

^9

mdo, in which o represents

the Sanskrit

jtt^ mds-cha, " lunaque," gives us aj^^^km^

mdoscha, and ^T^n mdsam, " lunam,"^ ^f^^S^^ mdonhem ; so that in the two last examples the Sanskrit sibilant is represented by a vowel and a consonant.
"

The analogy
;

of mdonhem,
for example, for

lunam,"

is

followed in

all

similar instances

for ^rra dsa "fuit,^^

dsdm, "

we find a)>^^ donha, and earum^^ 9^a5<^^ donhahm'\.

^nriR

Observations, rule

78 of the Lalia edition of Sanskrit

Grammar,
the

t Burnouf

is

of a different opinion as to the matter in question, for in

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

67. &>,

51
<

Two
z,

sibilants

remain to be mentioned, namely,

and

of which the former

was probably pronounced

[G. Ed.

like the
p, 55.]

French

and

may

therefore be replaced

by that
Sanskrit
to the

letter.

Etymological ly this letter answers to the

^h

for the

most

part,

which never corresponds

Zend

h.

Compare, for example,

ZEND.

SAIfSKRIT.

^r^

aham,

"I,**

^^

hasta, " hand,"

^SJ-" ^^-^'^ aj^jjav zasia.

V^
^nT

sahasra, " thousand," AjTjmf^AJW haznnra.

hanti, "

he strikes,"

j^^jxif

zainti.

" <lf Hi vahati,

he

carries,'^

j^jaj^a>9 vazaitL

" bears,"

f^

hi,

" for,"

jj

zi.

iiJd^Jihivd, JT^H

"tongue,"

aj>>^j' hizva, (.

5a)

mahaf, " great,"^

S^-w^

mazo (from mazas,

mazanhem.)

ace. 9c3ttrjA>9
58.

Sometimes _^ z appears
is

also in the place of the San-

skrit "Sfj;

so that the sibilant portion of this letter, pro-

nounced dsch,
pressed (see
.

alone represented, and the

d sound sup-

53.)-

Thus ^My^
;

to the Sanskrit "TStyaj

yaz, " to adore," answers ajj^'^a)^ zaosha, " to please," sprino-s

from the Sanskrit root '^jush, "to please or gratify." Thirdly, the Zend z represents also the Sanskrit xr g, which is easily accounted for by the relationship between g and j.

The Indian

g6, (accus.

gam,) bos and ferrch has, in Zend,

itself in

as also in Greek, clothed

two forms

the

first

the Nouveau Journ. Asiatique, torn. iii. p. 342, speaking of the relation of mdohho to manaitho, withoat noticing the analogies which occur in cases

of repetition, mdosh-cha,

''

lunaque," urvdraosh-cha, " arboresque,' he says,

" In mdcngho, there

place the Sanskrit
*,

is

perhaps this difference, that the ngh does not re-

for this letter has already

become o

in consequence

of a change of frequent occurrence which

we hare

lately noticed.

e2

62

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Greek
or

signification has maintained itself in Zend, but in

has given
jk\)>ju5^

way

to the labial

and

fiovs

and

.ucguj^ gdos,

gdus,
p. 56.]

correspond to the

Sanskrit

nom.
is

jfhr gdus.

[G. Ed.

For the

sigriification

" earth " the

Greek
z.

has preserved the guttural, which in Zend

replaced by

The nom.
''^tVi^gdus ;

^j zdo

supposes

an Indian form ttw

gds, for

in the accusative,

^'^^zahm agrees,

in respect
7^1/.

of inflection, as closely as possible with ttth

59.
)o

gdm and

is

of less frequent use, and was probably proit zh.

nounced like the French _/; we write

that as the French j in

It is

observable,

many words

corresponds to the Latin

semi-vowel ,;, and derives from

it its

own developement,
yuyam,
"

so

also sometimes, in Zend, b zh has

skrit
xi

arisen out of the San-

y.

Thus, for instance,

"^tht

you,"

(vos),

Sometimes, also, >a zh has becomes ^fJo_j>>*o yuzhem. sprung from the sound of the English^', and corresponds to
the Sanskrit
i^

j,

as in

>yg)o

zhenu, Sanskrit '^[V^jdnu, " knee."

Finally, it stands as a terminating letter in

some
i

prefixes, in
;

the place

of the Sanskrit
nizhbaraiti,

dental

after

and u

thus,

JCO-5Aj^Jojy

"he

carries

out";

^j^(3^^eb>^

duzh-uctem, "ill spoken":

on the other hand, ^^^as^ju^

which we have

dus-matem, "
60.

ill

thought."
still

We

have
till

to elucidate the nasals,

postponed

now, because for them a knowledge of the

is

system of the other sounds

of
all

indispensable.

We

must

first

mention a difference from the Sanskrit, that in Zend

its particular nasal
;

every organ has not

but that here, in

respect of n, two main distinctions are established, and that these mainly depend on the circumstance whether n precedes

a vowel or a consonant.

In this
its

manner

and

are so

contrasted, that the first finds

place chiefly before whole

j

and half vowels, and also

[G. Ed. p. 57.]
find, for instance,

at the

end of words

the latter only

in the middle of strong consonants.

We
on the

^^i^^^xi/Ms^^M^hnnkdray^mi, "I glorify";

Ai^^Ai(d pancha, *'five";

^g^^AJi^^y^j hushyantcm

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Other hand, xstnA (nom.) "
barayen,

53

man";

t^jt^jnoit, " not"; yg^^Aj/Aii

xii^jxi

"they might bear";

anya,

"the other."
difference

Concerning the difference between y and not recognised in European alphabets it

^ a
is

probable that

,jM,

being always fenced in by strong consonants, must have

had a duller and more suppressed sound than the freer y and by reason of this weak and undecided character of its pronunciation, would appear to have applied itself more
easily to every organ of the following letter.
61.
Still

feebler
to

and more undecided than ^, perhaps

an equivalent

the Indian Anuswara,

-,

we

conjecture to

which is always involved with aj a, and which seems from its form to have been a fusion of
have been the nasal
AJ

and

y.

We

find

this letter,

which we write an,

first,

before sibilants, before

h, like

the Anuswara, and before

the aspirates

and \f\ for instance, M'^^^mmsCS^ csayanSf ; AjyAU^Asi^w^ zanhyamdna, a part of the middle future of the root yAJ< zaru " to beget," but, as it seems to me, with a passive signifi(3 //}

"regnansi'^ accus. ^^^^xi^^Mx^<Si csayantem

cation {"qui

nascetur,''^

Vend.

S. pp. 28
yA>9

and
;

103.);

ju^Ca'-gi^

mahthra, " speech," from the root

man

>ya"jj^yan/ViM,

"mouth," probably from the Sanskrit ni ^'aj>, "to pray," Secondly, before a . 40., and with the nasal inserted.
terminating 9 m and y w. the Sanskrit termination

We
'^rnr

have here to observe that

dm

is

always changed to

^'^aiim in Zend; for intance,

Sanskrit W^^p^^ndaddm
;

^"^i^xi^

dadhanm, "I gave,"

[G. Ed.

g yjyAj ^ojgja)

pddhanahm, "pedmn,^
terp. 58.]

Sans, rn^j^nti^pdddndm

and that the

mination of the third person plural,

not pass into
62.
e,

WH

an, provided the a

do

always appears as a double nasal

nasal, which,

y^

aniu*

For the

according to

. 56., is

placed as

an euphonic addition before the

s,

the

h, which springs from Zend has two characters, j and jS, to both which

* The termination aim from dn belongs

subjunctive.

to the potential, precative,

and

64

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Anquetil assigns the sound ng.* We write them n, in order to avoid giving the appearance of a </ preceded by a guttural n to this guttural,

which

is

only a nasal precursor of

the following

w h.

As

to the difference in the use of these

two

letters, ^

comes

always follows a and do ; jS, on the contrary, after i and e, for which the occasion is rare. For

instance, in the relative plural nom. hswji^a*^*^} yenhS, "qui,'"' and in the fem. pron. genitives, as ^oyjSjM ainhdo, " hujus,^^ which often occurs, but as often without j i, and with ^ n.

guki^^ anhdo. What phonetic difference existed between ^ and jS we cannot venture to pronounce. Anijuetil as we have seen, assigns the same pronunciation to each; while Rask

compares
its

j^

with the Sanskrit palatal s^

n,

and

illustrates

sound by that of the Spanish and Portuguese

63.

n.

The
it

labial nasal ^

does not differ from the Sanit

skiit

jt:

must, however, be remarked, that

6.

sometimes

takes the place of

At
;

least the root j|^6m, " speak,'' in

Zend becomes ^7^ mru

mradt, " he

as ^^aj7^ mrndm, " I spoke," >4*xj/9

spoke "
"

in

a similar

manner

is

the Indian
;

^ mukha,

mouth," related to the Latin bucca

and not

[G. Ed. p. 59.] much otherwise the Latin mare to the Sanskrit mix. vdri, " water." I consider, also, mullus related to ^t(^ bahula, the
64.

Greek

iroKv^,

and the Gothic ^/m.

concluding

operates in a double
.

manner on
a to f e

a preceding vowel.
and, on the

It

weakens (see

30.) the aj

other hand, lengthens the vowels

^^(;pjj<i<i>

and u;
tanum,
In

thus, for instance,

" the

paiti'm,

"the Lord,"

^_)>yA5^

body," from the bases j^jajq) paiti, >yA5^ tanu.

tliis

contradiction to

rule

we

find

the vocative of frequent

occurrence,
>x\i

^>jm^m ashdum,
is

" pure."

Here,

however,

du, as a diphthong, answers to the Sanskrit

^ du, the

last

element of which

not capable of further lengthening

Bumouf also

writes the

first

of these ng.

have done the same in

my

reviews in th& Journal of Lit. Crit.

'

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

The
form
in

55
of the

question
;

is

contraction

theme

yAjAJi^A5 ashavan

with an irregular

conversion of the

concluding
65.

n into ^ m.

We

give here a complete

summary
au d

of the

Zend

characters.

Simple Vowels

aj a,

e,

c e
6i
;

i,

41;

>

tififo,

^u

Diphthongs
Gutturals
:

m,
it

jo S,

J^

jam di;

<^ 6,
i'), <Si

^do,

>am du.

(before vowels and

^jo

c (principally

before consonants),

kh (from

;g^ sw, before vowels

and i^y);
Palatals
:

^g, p

gh.

ch, jj^/
t

Dentals

(before vowels

and

^^ y), f

(before con-

sonants and at the end of words),

^ th

(before whole

and semi-vowels),^
Labials: <ip,
nasals,

d,

Q^dL

^/

(the latter before vowels, semi- vowels,

s),

and ao
:

_i

&.

Senu- vowels

j^,
(the

;*o, ^^

y (the two
7,

[G. Ed.

p. 60.]

first initial,

the last medial),

first initial,

o r (the last only after

/)' 9>

the last medial), mT w.

Sibilants

and h:
z,

French J), ^
Nasals
:

m s, ^ h.

t:;p

sh,

m^

s,

Jo

rA (or like the

n (before vowels, semi-vowels, and at the end

-gj

of words), ,w n (before strong consonants),

fore sibilants,

an (be-

h, (sih,

*/, 9 m,

and

n),

^ n (between
r
),

a or

do,

and

h,

and between a and

w A),

j^

(between j

or

jo i,

and

^ m.

Remark
^Mi
66.

also the

Compounds ew*
treating

for w'aj ah,

and

^en^ for

St.

We

refrain from

specially

of the Greek,

Latin,

and Lithuanian systems of sounds, but must here

devote a closer consideration to the Germanic.

a,

The Gothic

which, according to

Grimm,

is

always short, answers

E.g. Aj/jutr^AJW hazanra, "a thousand.

66

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

;

completely to the Sanskrit a

and the sounds of the Greek

and o are wanting, in their character of degeneration

from
a has

a,

in

Gothic as well as in Sanskrit.

The

ancient

not,

however, always been retained in Gothic;

syllables, as well as in
i,

but

in radical

terminations, has often

;

been weakened to
also,

or has undergone suppression

liquid, has

often,

by the influence of a following

been con-

verted into u.

Compare, for instance,

sibun,

'*

seven," with

^rSR saptan; taihun, "ten," with

67.

^^

damn.

We

believe ourselves authorized to lay

down

as a
s

law, that
is

a in polysyllabic words before a terminating

i,

everywhere weakened into

th generally

or suppressed
i.

but before

a terminating

appears as

concluding

^a
it

in the Gothic either remains unaltered, or disappears:

never becomes
68.

i.

In the Old High

p. 61.]

German
to

the Gothic a either remains

[G. Ed.

unaltered, or

is

weakened

to
o.

e,

or is changed

by the influence of a liquid

this,

w = perhaps

According to
is

the relation of the unorganic e to the Gothic a

that of the Gothic
i

the

same as
Gothic

(. 66.)

to

^a/

compare, for

instance, in the genitive of the bases in a

vulfi-s,

W^"^ vnka-sya,
(. 66.),

Old High German

wolfe-s.

In the dative plural

wolfu-m stands to vulfa-m in the same relation as above

sibun to saptan.

The precedence
cceco,

of a liquid has also, in Old

this

High German, sometimes converted

pare plinte-mu{mo),
after the

a into m or o com;

with the Gothic blindamma.

Also

Germany

a semi-vowel to

y, which in Sanskrit (xr y) belongs as the same class as r, the Old High German

or

seems
plural

to prefer

to a; thence
sing.,

plintju,

without^ &\so plinlu,

ace. voc.

"caeca,"" as
;

a fem. nom.

and neuter nom.

of the
first

plinta " cacam."

I

The u
I

person present, as
tlie

kipu, "

give," Gothic yiba,

ascribe to

influence of

the dropped personal letter m.

Respecting the degenera-

tion of the original a sound to u

compare

also

66.
ki

In
(our

the Old

High German
ye)

inseparable
ija,

preposition

German

Gothic

Sanskrit

sa or

w^

sam,

we

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

57

have an example in which the Gothic-Sanskrit a has be-

come
69,

i.

For the Sanskrit

d,

the Gothic, which has no

(. 4.),

long

a,

almost always substitutes 6

and

this

o,

in cases

of abbreviation, falls back into the short

in

a.

Thus, for instance,

Grimm's

first

fem. declension of the strong form, the

nom. and accus.

(. 118.).

sing, d is softened to a,

whence

giba, gibo-s

Generally in the Gothic polysyllabic forms, the

is

concluding WT 4

shortened to a

and where d stands

at the termination, an originally succeeding consonant has

been dropped
for

for instance, in the gen. plur. fem. S stands

^H dm.

Sometimes,
'/,

also, in

the Grothic, S corresponds

to the Sanskrit

as in the gen. pliir. masc.

and neuter.
[G. Ed.

In

the Old

High German the Gothic

6,

6 either

p. 62.]

remains

as in the gen. plur., or divides itself into

;

two

short vowels
ua, or uo
;

and, according to differences of origin, into oOf

of which, in the Middle

while in the

High German, uo prevails Modern High German the two divided vowels
u.

For the Gothic i = ^[\d, the Old, Middle, and Modern High German have preserved the old d,
are contracted into
except in the gen. plural,
70.

For ^

and ^

the Gothic has

as

Grimm
is

has sufficiently shewn,

i,

is

and ci; which everywhere

latter,

to

be

considered as long

and also in Old and Middle High

German

so represented.

We, together with Grimm,

as

in the case of the other vowels, designate its prolongation

by a circumflex.
appears mostly as

In the
ei
;

Modern High German the long

compare, for instance, mein with the

Gothic genitive meina, and the Old and Middle High Ger-

man

min.

Sometimes a short
leiks,

is

substituted, as in lichy

answering to the Gothic

pounds.
lay

"like," at the
" nos,''

end of comveis,

On
stress,

the long
as
It is

i,

in wir,

Gothic

we can
usually,

no

we match

the dat. sing, mir also with the

Gothic mis.

scarcely worth remarking that

i

we

in writing, designate the elongation of the

and other vowels

by the addition of an

h.

68
71.

CHAEACTERS AND SOUNDS.

While the original ^ a has undergone many alteraGermanic languages, and has produced botli
have been able to detect no other alterations in
i

tions in the
e i

and

w, I

and

than that

is

as often suppressed as o

but

it

never

happens, unless some rare exceptions have escaped me, that

i

is

replaced by a heavier vowel a or .*

We may

lay

[G. Ed.

way

in

it down as a rule, that final i p. 63.] German everywhere, as it has generally

has given
in Latip

Compare.
SANSKRIT.
iir<

obere:.
Ttepi,

LATIN.

GOTHIC.
fair. (. 82.)

pari,

per.

imfi: upari,
^figr asti,
^rf^ff

vnep,
eCTi,
evTi,

super.
est,

ufar.
ist
sind.

santi,

sunt,

72. Where a concluding i occurs in Gothic and Old High German it is always a mutilation of the German j (or y) toge-

ther with the following vowel

so that j, after the suppresitself.

sion of this vowel, has vocalized

Gothic accus. hari,

" exercitum," is

a mutilation of haryaA

Thus the uninflected The

.

Sanskrit would require harya-m; and the Zend, after

42.,

meeting the Germanic half way, hart-m.

cluding
s also,

Before a con;

in the Gothic, ^i is usually suppressed

is,

and

the Gothic terminating syllable

of as,
.

is

mostly a weakening

High German, and still more in Middle and Modern High German, the Gothic i has often degene67.

In Old

rated into
is

which, where

it

occurs in the accented syllable,

expressed in

Grimm by e.

We retain

this character.

We
%

have also to observe of the Gothic, that, in the old text,

* The Sanskrit
*'

ruler "

and the European languages have adhered

Crit. r. 178,

f^il pitri, " father," probably stands for VM^ pdtri^ to the true original.

(Gramm.

Annot.)
in order to
.

t In the text harja ; but

with the Sanscrit T^y, vide
versally pronounced
translation.
//,

shew more exactly the connection

;

68.

1.

12.

and as the j

is

simply and uni-

the

German j

will be represented

by y

in this

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

at the

59

beginning of a syllable

is

distinguished by two dots

above, which
73.
y,

Grimm
Zend

retains.

As
i

in

(. 41.),

by the attractive force of

;

?,

i,

or

an

is

introduced into the antecedent syllable

so also, in

Old High German, the corresponding sounds have obtained [G. Ed. p. 64.] an assimilating power; and frequently an converted into e, without any syllable is preceding a of the

power of prevention on the part of either a single or double consonant. Thus, for instance, we find from ant, " branch,''
the plural
vallUf
esti; fall,"

from

anst, "grace," the plural emti;

and from
vell'it.

"I

the second and third persons

vellis,

This law, however, has not prevaded the Old High

universally
erpi
;
:

German
not

we

find,

for

instance,

arpl,

" hereditas*'

znhari, " lacrymce" not zaheri.

74. In the

Middle High German, the

i,

e,

which springs

from the older

of modification
limitations,

has both retained and extended the power

and assimilation; inasmuch as, with few (Grimm, p. 332,) not only every a by its retrospective action becomes e, but generally, also, d, u, and o are modified into le, u, and o; 6 into as, and no into ue. Thus the plural gesfe, drcete^ brilche, k'dche, leene, gruese,

from

gasf, drAt, bruch, koch, Ion, gruoz.

On

the other hand,

in the Old
i

High German, the

e
;

which has degenerated from

or a obtains no such power

and we

find in the genitive

singular of the above words,

gaste-s, drate-s,

&c.,

because

the Old High

German

has already, in the declension of the

i

masculine

class,

reduced to e the

belonging to the

class,

and which in Gothic remains unaltered.

75.

The

produced in Old and Middle High

is

by German,

the modification of a,
in cases

retained in the

German Modern High

is

where the trace of the original vowel

;

either extinguished or scarcely felt

netzen, nennen, brennen
;

as,

Ende, Engel,

sefzen,

Goth, audi, aggilus, satyan, natyan,

iiamnyan, brannyan.
is distinctly

Where, however, the original vowel

a,

opposed to the change, we place

short or

60
[G. Ed.
p. 65.]

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

^oug,
;

from short or long a and in the same from o, au from au for instance, Brdnde, PfrVe, Dunste, Fliige, Koche, Tone, Bdume, from Brand,
relation,

w from

u, 6

P/dl, &c.
76.

For

g-tt,

"31

w,

the Gothic has

u,

which is generally short.

Among
we

the few examples cited by

Grimm,

p. 41, of

long

u,

particularize the comparative sutizd, the essential part of

which corresponds to the Sansk. "^^swddu, "sweet," (j^JJ-f), and in which the long u may stand as a compensation for
the absence of the w(v), which becomes vocalized. In Old

High

German
trust,"

it

seems

to

me that puam,
which

"to dwell," and truen, "to

correspond to the Sanskrit roots w bhu, "tobe."" ^dhrii

fast"

" to

stand

from

comes

ira dhruva, " fast,"

"constant" "certain" (Gramm. Crit.

r. 51.)

with the Guna

is

form of which
cf.

(. 26.)

the Goth, bauan, trauan,

connected

vrfgrra

bhav-itum, "to be," nf^iifH dhrav-itum, "to stand

The Middle High German continues the Gothic Old High German u, but the Modern High German substitutes au, whence bauen, trauen, Taube (Gothic dubo).
fast,"

As out of the Sanskrit T u, in Zend, the sound of a short ^* has developed itself (. 32.), thus, also, the Gothic u shews itself, in the more recent dialects, ofteuer in the
77.

form of

than in

its

own.

Thus have the Verbs

pret.,

in the

Old and Middle High German (Grimm's 9th conjug.) preserved a radical u in the plur. of the

but replaced

it

Compare, for instance, hugum, by o in the passive part. " we bend,'* bugans, bent," with Old High German pukumSs, pokan^r, Middle High German bv^en, bogen. The example
*'

adduced shews,

also, the

softening of the old u to

e,

in un-

accented syllabes, in Middle

High German

as in

Modern
all

High German

so that this unaccented e

a,
i,

may
it

represent
as a

original vowels

and we

may

lay

down

rule,

that all long and short vowels in the last syllable of poly* Cf.

447. Note.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

syllabic words, are either

61
to a

worn away or softened down

[G- kd.

mute
78.

e.

For the diphthongs ^ e (a+i) and

p. 6B.j

Wt

d {a

u), the Gothic

has ai and au, which are also

monosyllabic, and were perhaps pronounced like

and

d.
;

Compare havaima," cedificemus" with >T^ 6/jav^a,

sunau-s, "of a son," with its equivalent W?ft^ snd-s.

***tmMs

AMiere

these Gothic diphthongs aiand au have maintained themselves

unaltered in value, they then appear, in writing, as i and

6*

which must be considered as contractions of a

as in the Latin amemus,

--

and a + u; and as in
is

from ama'imus

(. 5.);

the almost solitary case of Ms, the long o of which

result of a contraction of a

the

+ u, whose
element
a,

latter

element appears
{hovis,

again before vowels in the independent shape of v

bovem),

while

the

first

in

its

degeneration,

appears as o

(. 3.).

Compare,
GOTHIC.

SAXSKRrr.

OLD HIGH GERMAN.

^JT charema
'^TIT

(eamus),
(eatis),

faraima,
faraitJu

varSmis.

charHa

varH.

TTwra tebhyas (his),

79.

ikaim
all

dSm.

In like manner, in

subjunctives, and in the pro-

nominal declension in which the adjective bases in a take

part,
i

an Old High German

corresponds to the Sanskrit

[G. Ed. p. 67.] The Middle High and Gothic au ;f G.'rman has shortened this e, as standing in an unaccented

terminating syllable (varen,

varet).

Besides

this,

the Middle

High German
If,

has, in

common

with the Old High German,

however, the Gothic diphthongs in question were not pronounced

like their etymological equivalents

ceives,

^S

and

o, hut, as

Grimm

con-

such case the High

du : in approximate to the Vriddhi- change (. 26.) ^ at and German e, 6, as opposed to the Gothic ai, au, are not

merely continuations of these Gothic diphthongs: but the pronunciation

assigned
first

by the Sanskrit

to the union of a

with

or u,

must have been

introduced into the Germanic, under certain conditions, in the eighth

century.

62

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

i

preserved the diphthong

where

it

stood in radical syllables

u, r

under the protection of a following

or h
{ch),

(out of the older

letters

s),

even in cases where one of these

had been
v or
o.

dropped, or where u had vocalized itself into

(Grimm,

pp. 90. 343).

Compare,
OLD

GOTHIC.
aiv,

HIGH GERMAN,
hvin.
sn^o.

MIDDLE HIGH GEBMAN.

" cBvumr
"nix,'"'

snaivs,

snS.

mais, "magis^"'
laisyan, "docere,"'^
laihv, " commodavUf^

mir,
liran.

m^
Ureru
Uch.

m
mer
(jnehr),
lieh,

In the

Modern High German

for
instance,

this i is partly preserved,

partly replaced;

Schne {Sclmee),
p. 983.).

SSle (Gothic saivala); but ich

80.

gedieh.

(Grimm,

As

the i for the Gothic

ai,

so the 6 for au, in the

is

Old and
consonants

Middle High German,

;

favoured by certain

and those which favour the 6 are the more

numerous.

They

consist of the dentals

.
;

according to the

Sanskrit division,

16.)

/,

d, z, together

with their nasal

;

and

sibilant (n, s)

further, the semi-vowel r

and

h,

which,

as a termination in Middle

Grimm,

pp. 94. 345).

High German, becomes ch ( See The roots, which in the Gothic

a,

admit the Guna modification of the radical u by

the preterite singular, oppose to the Gothic
au, in

in

Middle

and Old High German, a double form

namely, 6 under the

. 34.,
6.

condition above mentioned, and next ou,

[G. Ed.
p. 68.]

in the absence

of the letter which protects

z6h,

For instance.
(traxi,

Old High German

traxit)

Middle High German zoch

Gothic tauh, Sanskrit

bouc,

5^^ duddha

(mulxi,

mulsi,) ;

but pouc,
hu-bh6ja.

fexi,

jlexvt,

Gothic hauy,

Sanskrit

^>?^

The Modern High German

like the
6,

exhibits the Gothic

diphthong au, either,

Middle and Old High Geror

man,
to

as

and

in

a more extended degree, and subject

.

the modification of

75;

next,

shortened to

o,

, ;

CHARACTBES AND SOUNDS.

63

the particulars of which will be explained under the verb

or, thirdly, as

au

for instance, daupya, " I baptize," hlaujm,

run";
81.

or, fourthly, as eu, . 83.

Ulfilas, in

As

proper names, represents both e and ou

o
;

by

ai,

and likewise

and av by au
as,

{Paitrus,

Galeilain,

apaustaulus, Paulas

and

in the next place, not every

is

Gothic

ai

and au

in the cognate dialects

represented in like

manner, but in some cases the Gothic

ai is replaced in

Old
77.)

High German by a simple

but in the others,

or

e,

and au by or

by ei, and these Grimm deduces from therefore ou or au by d (. 84.) and au one facts a double value of the diphthongs ai
ai is replaced
;

by

^,

or

( .

85.)

with the accent on the last element

the accent on the a
plicit
{ai, au).

{ai, au),

another with

We

cannot, however, give im-

belief to this deduction of the acute author of the

German system
value in
all

of sounds, and prefer assuming an equal

cases of the Gothic ai and au,

although

we

might support Grimm's view by the

fact, that,

in Sanskrit,

never replace his ai and au; but everywhere, ^, wt d, where occasion occurs, do replace di and du. We think, howis

ever, that the difference

rather phonetic than etymological.

it

As concerns
counted
for,

the ai and au in proper names,

may

be ac-

inasmuch as the Gothic was

[G. Ed.

p. 69.]

deficient in equivalents for these non-primitive vowels,

which
Ulfilas

have degenerated from the original

a.

Could

have looked back into the early ages of his language, and

have recognised the original idenity of e and o with his

a,

he would perhaps have used the latter as their substitutes.

From
au,

his point of sight,

however, he embraced the

ai

and

probably because these mixed diphthongs passed with

as weaker than the long e and
It is
6,

him
at

ejusdem generis,

(^nd).
is felt

important here to observe, that in Greek also

as

weaker than

tj

and o, as

is

proved by the

fact

that at does not attract the accent towards itself {Timronai

not

TUTTTo/Liar.

The

expression of the

Greek

at

and av by

64

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

the Gothic ai and au requires the less justification, because

even

if ai

was pronounced

like

S,

and au
or u.

like

6,

yet
still

the written character presents these diphthongs as a

perceptible fusion of a with a following
82.
i

As
ai

to the other statement, namely, that not every

Gothic

and au produces the same

effect in the

younger
Sanskrit,

dialects, nor has the

it

same foundation in the older might be sufficient to observe upon one feature
but require
it to
;

of dialect

peculiar to the Gothic, that h and r do not content themselves with a pure preceding
i,

be affected

by Guna

26.)

thus, ai for
i

i,

and au for u

while other

dialects exhibit

the

and u before h and r in the same

form as before every other consonant.

Gothic to their Sanskrit equivalents,
GOTHIC
saihs, "six,"

The

relation of the

SANSKRIT.

"^

shash,

taihun, " ten,"

^^

damn,
swasura,
dahshind,
1.),

faihu, " cattle,"

svaihra " father-in-law,*'
taihsvo,

^ pam,
hrid (from hard%.

"'BTnc

"dextera,"

?[f^?!n

p S 7

hairtd, "heart,"

^^

bairan, "to bear,"

distairan,

^T^Tf^

hhartum,
dar-i-tum,

"to tear,"

^^^

2
is

stairnd, "star,"

ITTO tdrd,
i

not so to be understood as though an

had been

placiul
to

after the old a, but that,

i

by the softening down of the a

(. 66.),

the forms

sihs, tihun,

had been produced; out of

arising from h and r

which, afterwards, the

Guna power

had produced

saihs, taihun, bairan.

however, remained at the earlier

The High German has, for Old High Gerstage

;

man

sehs, (

Anglo-Saxon, " six,") and

t'ehan

or tehun, &c., rest

upon an

earlier Gothic sihs, tihun.

Thus, tohtar rests on an

dauhtar, Sanskrit

earlier Gothic duhtar, for the

^ffri^ duhitar, (^f^duhitrij

Guna form

. 1.)

"daughter.""

Where

the

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Sanskrit
is,

65

Ha has

preserved
to
i,

itself

in the Gothic unaltered, that

is
it

not weakened

the occasion
ai,

absent for the deis

velopment of the diphthong

h and
r

since

not the a before

i

which demands a subsequent addition, but the

;

which demands a precedent one

with ^1^ ashtdu.*
83.

compare

ahtau, " eight,**

The

alterations

tc

which the simple vowels have

Gothic to the
dialects to

been subjected appear again in the simple elements of the

diphthongs, as well in the relation of the
Sanskrit, as in that of

the younger Germanic

the Gothic.

Thus the a element

i

of the diphthong

^6

shews

itself often in

the Gothic, and in certain places in a

( .

regular manner, as

27.)

and in the same places the

a contained in F ^ (a + i) becomes i, which, with the second element of the diphthong, generates a long i (written as e^, The Gothic iu has either retained that form in Old . 70.).

High German, or has altered sometimes one, sometimes both [G. Ed. p. 71.] of its constituents. Thus have arisen ?o, eo.
There
is

a greater distance to be passed in Otfrid's theory of

iu,

the substitution of ia for

which cannot

fail

to surprise, as

we know that a simple u never becoms a.f High German iu has either remained unaltered,
changed to
ie,

In Middle

or has been

which

is as old as

the latest Old

man, as

it

is

found in Notker.
ie

In

High GerModern High German

is

the substitution of

for the old

iu,

that which princi-

* Ahtau^ashtau

is

perhaps the only case in which the Gothic au cor-

responds to the Sanskrit Vriddhi diphthong

^ au; on
is

the other hand,

au

often answers to
is

^t

d=i{a-iru).

+ There

yet another ia in Old High German, namely, that which

Grimm

(p. 103J

very acutely represents as the result of a contraction, and

formerly dissyllabic, to which, therefore, there

tliong in

no counterpart diphheld," Gothic liaihald.

Gothic

The most important

preterites,

case will be discussed under the

hialt,

head of the verb, in

such as

"

After this analogy _^or, "four," (according to Otfrid), arose out of the

Godiic fidmrr, in this way, that, after the extrusion of the de, the 6 pa^ised
into
its

corRspouding short vowel

Grimm,
m

p. 198.

66

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

pally prevails, in which, however, the e is only visibly retained,

ich biete

for phonetically

it is

absorbed by the

i.

Compare
Besides
still

with the Gothic biuda, giesse with giuta.

this

form,

we

also find eu in place of the old iu or

older au, in cases, namely, where e can be accounted for as

the result of a no longer perceptible modification (Grimm,

p. 523,
.

75.);

compare Leute with the Gothic

lawleis,

Old High

German liuti,

"people"; Heu, "hay," with Goth, havi, "grass."

Usually, however, the Gothic has already acquired an iu in

place of this eu, and the original au (which becomes av before vowels
) is

to be sought in the Sanskrit

for instance,

NeunCy "nine," Old High

German

niuni,

Gothic niuneiSf

Sanskrit rn^T navan (as theme); neu, "new," Old High Ger*

man
This

niwi (indeclinable), Gothic

e,

nivi-s,

Sanskrit ^^^^ nava-s.

for,

however,

is

difficult to

account
it

in as far as

it is
i

connected with the Umlaut, because

corresponds to an
this

in

Middle and Old High German

answering to an
i

and

vowel, of itself
is

or y in the following syllable,

capable of

no
iu,

alteration through their

power

of attraction.

Long u
is

for

equivalent to a transposition of the diphthong,

found iu

lugen,

"to

lie,"

trugen, "to deceive,"

Middle High German

liugen, triugen.

[G. Ed. p. 72.]

84.

Where

the a element of the Sanskrit

6 retains its existence in the Gothic,

6,

making au the

equi-

valent of

the Middle

High German, and a

.

part of the Old

High German

authorities,

have ou in the place of am,

80,

although, as has been remarked in

of certain consonants 6 prevails.
pouc. Middle

under the influence

Compare Old High German

baug, "JtexL'
relation to
o in /3oGf

High German bouc, with the Gothic preterite The o of the High German ou has the same the corresponding Gothic a in au, as the Greek
'H a,

bears to the Sanskrit

which undergoes a
gd.
Is.)

fusion with

word aft Old High German authorities (Gl. Hrab. Ker. have au for the ou of the later (Grimm, p. 99); and

^ u

in

the

^6

of the cognate

The

oldest

as,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

under the conditions specified in
this tells in
.

67
rf,

80.,

they also exhibit

favour of Grrimm's assumption, that au in the

Gothic and oldest High

German was pronounced

like

like

our

German
a+
tars
u).

au,

and thus not

the Sanskrit
ai,

6 (out of
letr

In this case, in the Gothic

also,

both the

must have been sounded, and

this

diphthong must be

only an etymological, and not a phonetic equivalent of the

Sanskrit

^ ^.
diphthong
ai the

85. In the Gothic

a alone

is

susceptible

of alteration, and appears in

e,

High German

softened

down

to

in the cases in

which the

^,

contracted from ai

(. 78.),
ei,

does

not occur.
nunciation,

In

Modern Hi^h German, however, ai. Compare

OLD HIGH GERMAN.
heizu,

in pro-

GOTHIC.
haita, " voco,^

MIDDLE HIGH GERMAIT.

heixe,

MODERX
HIGH GERMAX,
heisse.

skaida, " separo"

86. (1.)

skeiduf

scheide,

scheide.

Let us now consider the consonants, preserving the

[G. Ed.
p.

Indian arrangement, and thus examining

the gutturals
tenuis
first.

73.]

Of

these, the Gothic has

;

merely the
for in-

and the medial

{k, g)

and

Ulfilas, in

imitation of the
;

Greek, places the latter as a nasal before gutturals

stance, drigkan,
*

tongue"

"to drink"; briggan, "to bring"; tuggd^ yuggs, " young" gnggs, " a going" (subst.). For
;

the

compound kv the old writing has a special character, which we, like Grimm, render by qv, altliough q does not
;

appear elsewhere, and v also combines with g so that qv {=kv) plainly bears the same relation to gv that k bears to gr;

compare siyqvun,
sing."

" to sink,"

with siggvan,

" to

read," " to
t- ;

H also, in

Gothic, willingly combines with

and

for this combination, also, the original text has

a special
often

character; compare saihvan, leikvan, with our sehen, leihen.

In respect to h by

itself

we have

to

observe that

it

appears in relations in which the dentals place their tk and

the labials their /, so that in this case
it

takes the place of

r2

^
kh,

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

which
is

wanting in the Gothic.

In this

manner

is

aih related to aigum, "

to gebum.

and gaf Probably the pronunciation of the Gothic h was

we have,"

as bauth to biiJum,

not in
1

all
s,

positions the same, but in terminations, and before

and

if

not generally before consonants, corresponded to

ch as an aspirate of the k:
A:

our

ch.

The High German has

for this tenuis, however, either

dialects, the

or c stands in the older

use of which, in Middle

High German,

is

so dis-

tinguished, that c stands as a terminating letter, and in the

middle of words before

f,

and ch also stands

for a double k.

(Grimm,
the

p. 422.)
(SS

This distinction reminds us of the use of

it,

Zend

c in contrast to ^

as also of the /

Hn

con-

trast to
(2.)

^ t (. 34. 38.) The palatals and Unguals are wanting

p. 74.]

in Gothic, as
t,

in

Greek and Latin;

[G. Ed.

the dentals are, in Gothic,

th,

d,

together with their nasal n.

For

th the

Gothic

alphabet z {=ts)

has a special character.

fills

In the High
t,

German

the place of the aspiration of the

so

that the breathing is replaced by the sibiiation.

By

the side

of this z in the Old

High German,

the old Gothic th also

maintains

There are two species of z, which, in Middle High German, do not agree with each other. In
its

existence.*

the one,
is

has the preponderance, in the other,

zs,

s;

and
zss,

this latter

written by Isidor

and

its

reduplication
tz.

while the

reduplication of the former he writes

In the

Modem
the

High German the second

sibilant,

species has only

retained

but in writing

is

distinguished, though not uni-

versally,

from

proper.

Etymological ly, both species of

the Old and Middle High

German
t.

fall

under the same

with their nasal

head, and correspond to the Gothic

(3.)

The

labials are, in Gothic, p, f, b,

Our Modem High German

organic, and to be rejected.

th

is,

according to

Grimm

(p. 525), in-

"

It is,

neither in pronunciation nor origin,

properly aspirated, and nothing but a mere tenuis,"

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS

m.
does
.

69"

The High German

all,

supplies this organ, as the Sanskrit

25.)

with a double aspiration, a surd i/=\p!i) (see and a sonant, which is written v, and comes nearer to

the Sanskrit

bfu

In

Modern High German we perceive

;

no longer any phonetic difference between / and v but in Middle Hiffh German v shews itself in this manner softer
than /, in that,
into /,
first,

at the

end of words

it

is

transformed

on the same

principle

by which, in such a position,

the medials are converted into tenues; for instance, wolf not
wolv, but genitive wolves; second, that in the middle before

surd consonants

it

becomes

/,

hence zwehe becomes

zvcelfle,

funve becomes
and
f,

funfle, funfzic.

in Middle

At High German, seem of equal

is

the beginning of wt)rds

signification,
p. 75.]

and their use in the MSS.

in Old

precarious,

[G. Ed.
It is

but V preponderates (Grimm, pp. 339. 400).

the

same

High German

yet Notker uses

as the original

primarily existing breathing-sound, and v as the softer or

sonant aspiration, and therefore employs the latter in cases

where the preceding word concludes with one of those

Trhich otherwise
(.

letters,

93.) soften

down a

tenuis to
vnier,

its

medial
vater,

(Grimm, pp.

135, 136);

for instance,

demo
all

den

but not des vater but des fater.

So far the rule

cases

is

less

stringent (observes Grimn'), that in

for
y,

but the converse does not hold.

authorities

/ may stand Many Old High

r,

German
and write

abandon altogether the initiatory

/ for it
by

constantly, namely, Kero, Otfrid, Tatian.

The

aspiration of the

is

sometimes, in Old High German,

also rendered

p/j, but,

in general, only at the beginning of

;

words of foreign origin, phortoj phenniny

in the middle,

and at the end occasionally, in true Germanic forms, such

as w'erphan, w^rph, imrphumes, in Tatian; limphnn in Otfrid

and Tatian.

According to Grimm, ph, in

/.

many

cases, has

had the mere sound of

monumental inscriptions, however, which usually employ/, the ph of many words

had indisputably the sound of pf;
for example, if Otfrid

" In

70

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

we are not
to

writes ku2)har, " cuprum" scepheri, " Creator,"

assume that these words were pronounced kufar, sceferi^ In Middle High German the initial |j/i of foreign (p. 132).
p. 326).

words of the Old High German has become pf (Grimm, In the middle and at the end we find pf, first, always
here" in which case

after m, kampf, " pugna^ tampf, " vapor" krempfen, " contra-

is

an euphonic appendage to/, in order

Secondly, in compounds with the

to facilitate a union with m.

inseparable prefix
aside
its
t,

erd,

which, before the labial aspirates, lays

or, as

seems to me the sounder supposition, converts

Hence, for
instance, enp-finden, later

that letter, by assimilation, into the labial tenuis.

[G. Ed. p. 76.]

and more harmo-

nious emp-finden, for ent-finden.

less, it

Standing alone, neverthevinden, but v does not

appears, in Middle

High German,

combine with
is

p, for after the surd

(. 25.)

the surd aspirate

necessary (see

Grimm,

p.

398).

Thirdly, after short vowels

the labial aspirates are apt to be preceded by their tenues, as

well in the middle as at the end of words
:

just as in Sanskrit

(Gramm.

Crit. r.

88.) the palatal surd aspirate between a short

is
is

and another vowel or semi-vowel

and, for instance,
"interrogate''
"ij^rfir

preceded by
said for

its

tenuis

prichchhati

v^;!li( prichhati.

from the root VTS prachh. Middle High German forms view the
klopfen, kripfen, kapfen

In this light I
kopf, kropf, tropfe,

(Grimm,

p, 398).

In the same words

we sometimes

find ff, as kaffen, schuffen.

Here,

also,

p
i^

has

assimilated itself to the following/; for/ even though

it

be

the aspirate of p,
that
is,

is

not pronounced like the Sanskrit

;

ph,

like

with a clearly perceptible h

but the sounds

and h are compounded into a third simple sound lying

is

between the two, which

as in Greek
possible.
(4.)

therefore capable of reduplication,

6,

unites itself with

while ph

+ th

would be im-

by^'

= y),

The Sanskrit semi-vowels are represented in Gothic r,l, v, the same in High German only in Old
;

High German Manuscripts

the sound of the Indo-Gothic v

CHARACTERS AND
(our w)
is

SOUNTDS.
uu, in
i.

71
Middle High
agree with

most usually represented by

is

German
man.

by vv:j (or y) in both

written

We

Grimm in using^* (or y)

After an
initial

and

w for all periods of the High Gertlie

is

consonant in Old High German,

expressed by u
;

semi- vowel

in

most authorities

for in-

stance, zuelif, " twelve," Gothic tvalif.

As

in the Sanskrit

and

Zend

the semi-vowels
i

responding vowels

y and t> often arise out of the cor[G. Ed. p. 77.] and u, so also in the
from the
usually,

Germanic;

for instance, Gothic sxiniv-^j "/iliorum,"

base sunu, with u affected by

Guna {iu,

. 27.).

More

however, in the Germanic, the converse occurs, namely,

that y and
i-,

at terminations
. 73.),

and before consonants, have and have only retained their

forms
thivis in

become
for

vocalised (see

original form before terminations beginning with a vowel;

if,

for instance, thius,

" servant,"

the

genitive,

we know, from

the history of the word, that this

V has not sprung from the u of the nominative, but that

thins is a mutilation

of thivas

(.

116.);

so that after the

lapse of the a the preceding semi-vowel hiis

become a whole
like the

one.

In like

manner

is
(.

ihiviy

" maid-servant," a mutila-

tion of the base thivyo

accusative, probably

120.),

whose nominative,

was

thivya, for which,

however, in the

accusative, Jifter the v

substituted.
(5.)

had become vocalized, thiuya was

Of

the Sanskrit sibilants, the

Germanic has only

the

last,

namely, the pure dental

peculiar,
z,

f
at

s.

Out
in

of this,
use,

howthe

ever,

springs another,

least

to

Gothic, which is written

and had probably a

softer pro-

nunciation than

s.

This z

is

most usually found between two

s,

vowels, as an euphonic alteration of

but sometimes also

(/, r,

between a vowel and

t',

/,

or n

and between liquids

also before

n)

and a vowel, y or
"ashes";

n, in

some words
thus

finally,

before the guttural

medial, in the single instance, azgd,

everywhere

before

sonants,

and

it

must
while

therefore itself be considered as a sonant sibilant

(. 25.),

72
8 is the surd.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

It is

remarkable, in a grammatical point of

s

view,

tliat

a concluding

before the enclitic particles

a,

ei

and

^, and before the passive addition

passes into z

hence, for
"quos,"'''

instance, thizei "cujus,^

from

this " hujus,''

thanzei
'*

from
*'

thans " Ao5," vileizuh " visne"

from

vileis

vis" haitaza
earlier

vocaris" from haitis " vocas" or rather from

[G. Ed.
p. 78.]

its

form

haitas.

The

root slip, " to sleep," forms,

by a reduplication, in the

preterite, saizUp, " I or he slep^

Other examples are,izt;,"vo6is," "vos,"razn "house," talzyan^ " to teach," marzyan, " to provoke," fairzna, " heel." The

High German loves between two vowels

over
all

the softening of into

(see
.

r,

especially

22.); but this change has not

established itself as pervading law, and does not extend

parts of the
final s

Grammar.

For

instance, in

Old High

German, the
vowel

of several roots has changed itself into

r before the preterite terminations which

;

commence with a

on the other hand,

it

has remained unaltered in the

uninflected first and third pers. sing, indicative, and also

For example, from the " comes liusu, I lose," Ida, root lus, I or he lost," lurumis " we lost." While in these cases the termination takes under its protection, yet the s of the nominative singular,
'*

before the vowels of the present.

where

it

has not been altogether dropped,

is

everywhere

softened

down

to r

and, on the other hand, the concluding

of the genitive has,

down

to

our time, remained unaltered,

and thus an organic difference has arisen between two cases originally distinguished by a similar sufiix. For instance,
OLD
GOTHIC.

MODERN
HIGH GERMAN.
hiinde-r.
hlinde-s.

HIGH GERMAN.

Nominative
Genitive
87.
.

hUnd*-s,
blindi-s,

plintS-r,

plinfe-s,

The Germanic tongues

exhibit,

in

respect of con-

sonants, a remarkable law of displacement, which has been

first

recognised and developed with great ability by

this law, the Gothic,

Grimm.
dialects^

According to

and the other

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

73

with the exception of the High German, in relation to the

Greek, Latin, and, with certain limits, also

to the Sanskrit

[G. Ed.

p.

79.]

and Zend, substitute aspirates for the original

tenues, h for k, th for

d,

for h,
6,

for

t, and / for p; tenues for medials, t for and k for g; finally, medials for aspirates, g for 5^ The High German bears the same and 6 for/.

regular relation to the Gothic as the latter to the Greek, and

substitutes its aspirates for the Gothic tenues

and Greek

medials
rates
;

its

tenues for the Gothic medials and Greek aspi-

tenues.

its medials for the Gothic aspirates and Greek Yet the Gothic labial and guttural medial exhibits itself unaltered in most of the Old High German authorities, as in the Middle and Modern High German for instance,

and

Grothic biuga, "fectoi*

Old High German biuga and piuka.

Middle High German biuge. Modern High German biege. For the Gothic/, the Old High German substitutes v, especially as

first letter (. 86. 3.).

German

{ts) replaces an aspirate.

k,

aspiration of the

and either
in

High The Gothic has no replaces the Greek k by the

In the
t

sounds, z in

simple aspiration

h,

which case
or
it

it

sometimes coincides
the level of the

with the Sanskrit

falls to

High

German, and,
g instead of

in the

middle or end of words, usually gives

k, the High German adhering, as regards the beginning of words, to the Gothic practice, and participating with that dialect in the use of the h. We si\e here Grimm's

'

table, illustrating the

law of these substitutions,

p. 584.

Greek
Gothic

Old High German,

B F T D Th K G Ch P B Th T D K G B{V) F P D Z T G Ch K

P F

74
[G. Ed.
p. 80-1

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

EXAMPLES.*
OLD
GREEK.
LATIN.

SANSKRIT.

GOTHIC.

mCH

GERM.

^TT^^ pdda-s,
^f4t\^

TTOvs, 7ro5-of, pes, pedis,

TTefXTre,

folus.

vuoz.
vinf.
vol.

panchan.

quinquey
plenus,
pater,

fif^f
fulls.

puma.

irXeog,
Ttarrjp,

ft? pifri,
"^^ft upari.

fadrein^ vatar.
ufar,
.
.

inrep.

super.

ubar.

KavvajSts,

cannabis.

hanaf.

^
>9

T^ bhanj,
bliuj.

/rang ere,
frui, fructus,
frater,

hrikan.
brilkdn.

prechan.
pr'&ch&n.

m^ hhr&tri
*| &/i W,

brdthar,
baira.

pruoder.
piru.

^ep(a.
6<ppvs,
Ace^oAj;,

fero.

bhru.

prawa.
haubith,

K^TTq5

kapdla, m. n.

caput,
.

houpit.

RT tiuam (nom.),
fT^r^

TV,

thu,

du.
den.
dri.

/am

(ace),

rov.

is-tum,
tres,
alter.

thana,
threis,

^aTI^^ trat/as (n. pi.) , TpeTf,

Wire antara,

erepos.

arUhar,

andar.

i*ilH^danta-m(acc.), 6SovT-a,
"Si

dentem.
duo.
dextra,

thuntu-s. Zand.
tvai.

dwau

(n. c?m),

Svo,

zu^nS.

^W!n dakshind,
^^ Mc?a,
Sf^iJ duhitri,

ae|/a.
vSoop,

taihsvd.
vats.

zesawa.

unda.
.

wazar.
tohtar.
tar.

Bvydrrip,

dauhtar,
daur.

rn

"ITTT

cZwdr,

Bvpa,
fxedv,

fores,
m

W^ madhu,
JyH^swan,

m'eto.

PIjp

KVUiV,

canis.
cor.

hunths.
hairtd,

hund.
herzcu

^<^ hridaya.
aksha.

KapSia,
OKO^,

;_! VHiSj

oculus,

augd.

ouga.
zahar.
vihu.

^r^asru.
\

$aKpVf

lacrima.

iagr m..
faihu.

^^ pa^u,

pecus,

* The Sanskrit words here stand, where the termination

is

not separated

from the
(theme)
;

base, or the case not indicated, in their crude or

simple form

of the verb,

we

give only the bare root.

t Parenta."

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

OLD
SAirSKIUT.

7$

651BK.

GOTHIC.

HTGB GERM.

tg^ swasura, ^R^ dasan,

"W^Jnd,
infT!

eKupoj,

socer,

svaihra.
iaihun.

suehur.

BcKa,
yvtj/ui,

decern,

zehan.
chan.

gnosco,

kan.
kuni.

jdti*

Tevoj,

genus,
genu,

chunu
chniu.
mihil.

Yow,

kniu.
mikils,

H^H mahatt

fxeyocKos,

magnus,
ansevt
heri,

'^

hansOf

XV^'
Xdes,
Xei^d},

gans.
gistra.
laigd,

kans.
k'estar.

?ni hyas.

f^

lih.

lingo, left

ISkdm.

88.

The Lithuanian has

the

consonants without
its defi-

displacement in their old situations, only, from

ciency in aspirates,
substituting

simple

tenues

for

the

Sanskrit aspirated tenues, and medials for the aspirated

medials.

Compare,
UTBOAmAir.

rafa-Sf

"wheel,"

TTT^ ratha-s, "waggon.**

>?filllfH
^JTff

busu, " I would be,*

ka-s, "

bhavishydmi,

who,"
I give,'^

ka-s.

dumi, "

^[^ daddmu
"master,"

[G. Ed.

p. 82.]

pats, "husband,**

vfjm

pati-s

penki, " five,"

trys,

tt^T^ panchan.

"three,"

"^p^ tray as (n.

pi.

m.)
pi.

keturi, " four,"

ketwirtas, "the fourth,**

^Hl<^ ^nr^ chaturtha-s.

^nWT sdkhd.

chatwdras (n.

m.)

szakd,

f.

"

bough,"

Irregular deviations occur, as might be expected, in individual cases.

Thus, for instance, naga-s, "nail" (of the

foot or finger), not naka-s,

ntikhas.

The Zend
in

stands, as
all

answers to the Sanskrit Tfrfl we have before remarked,

in the

same rank,

essential respects, as the Sanskrit,

born.*

Fromjattf " to be

:73

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

As, however, according to
.

Greek, and Latin.

47., certain

consonants convey an aspiration to the letter which precedes

them, this

may

occasion an accidental coincidence between

the Zend and

like

the Gothic; and

in the

manner and

both languages may, in same words, depart from the ori-

ginal tenuis.
GOTHIC.

Compare,
.

SEND.
j7(3 thri,
j\>Qf^(3

SANSKRIT.

thir (theme), " three,'^

fi

tri.

thus, " to thee,"

thwdi,

^ twL*
T(

yra, (inseparable prep.)

friyd, "
I
'*

xi^\ fra,

pra
(theme).

love,"

j^Awy^o^AU dfrindmi,-\ iftWff^ pnndmu

ahva +,

river,''
p. 83.]

m^jm
pronounce

dfs

WI ap

[G. Ed.

this coincidence

between the

Gothic and the Zend aspirates accidental, because the causes

of
it

are distinct; as, on the one side, the Gothic accords no

aspirating influence to the letters v and r (trudaf trauan, trim-

pan,

ivai),

and, in the examples given above, ih and

/ stand,

only because, according to rule, Gothic aspirates are to be

expected in the place of original tenues;

side, the

on the other

Zend everywhere

the letters
is

named in . 47. unknown to the Gothic

where do not exhibit an influence, which

retains the original tenues,

so that, quite according to order,

in by far the majority of forms which admit of comparison, either Gothic aspirates are

met with

in the place of

Zend Zend

tenues, or, according to another appointment of the Ger-

manic law of
medials.
*

substitution, Gothic tenues in that of

Compare,
occurs as an uninflected genitive in Rosen's Veda-Specimen^
like the mntilatcd

Tw&
''

p.

2t>,

and may,
I 1.

U, be

also used as a datire.

bless," from the Sanskrit root pri, "to love,'' united with the

prep.
X

Ahva.

The Sanskrit-Zend expression

signifies

" water "

and the

Gothic form developes itself through the

transition, of frequent occurrence,

of j7 to k^ for which the law of substitution requlreo h (see also aqua).

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

GOTHIC.

7t

SSMD.

(hu, " thou,"

^^^
*'

turn.
pi.

Jidvdr, (ind.)
fimf,

four," ^^aumTc^as^ chathwdrd (n.

AiAJ^Aja)
Vy^^ic"^
9j/a>^x)ja}q)

mj

pancha.
perenS (n. m.)

fulls, " full,"

fadTein, " parents,''

faths,
**

paitar-em (patreni).

master,''

j^vjj^jajq) pniti-s.
j^)>j}a53)

faihu, " beast,"

faryifh, "

pasu-a.
charaiti.

he wanders," j^jas^aj^

foiu-s, " foot,"

Aj(2iU2> p4c?/ja (. 39.)

fraihith,
tf/ttr,

"he

asks,"

j^jajoj ^7ga) peresaiii.

j^jajq)> upairt, (. 41.)

"

over,"

" from," af, thai, " these,"

ajua) opa-

jc^ iL

hva$, "
tvai,
'*

who,"
two,"

^^
AJ^

M
c?ra.

[G. Ed.

p.

84.1

iaihun, " ten,"

taiJ.svd,

asjja)^ c/ia.

" right hand," aj^jj^aj^ dashina, "duxter.^^

In the Sanskrit and Zend the sonant aspirates, not the

surd, as in Greek,

(^ h too

is

sonant, see
:

25.)

correspond,

according to rule, to the Gothic medials

as,

iiowever, in the
6.

Zend the 6^
Compare,
GOTHIC.

is

not found,

_i b

answers to the Gothic

ZBND.

SANSKRIT.
f^T>TfS bibharti.

" bair'ith,

he carries," j^jas^^
^joj^axj^
Aii>

haraiti,

hruthar, "brother,"
hat, "

6rclf nr*m (acc.)>Tnrcw

6/irdiarom (ace.)
(n. ac. v.

both,"
*"

uba,

"^^ ubhdu

du.)

brukan,

to use,"

^
rwi

bhuj, " to eat."

bi (prep.)

jiai ofci.^axiJAjaiM-i.^fi? abfii.

midya, " middling," ms^co^xjQ mnidhya, (o^^ajj bandh, bindan, " bind,"

madhya,

T^ bnndh.
by

89. Violations of the law of displacement of sounds, both

persistence in the

same

original sound, or the substitution of

irregular sounds, are frequent in the middle and at the end of

T$
words.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

Thus, in the Old High

German

vatar, the

of the

Greek

irar^p remains; in the Gothic /arfrein, " parentes,''''

th.

substituted irregularly for

Tlie

d is same phenomenon occurs

olpenta,
;

in the cases of the Old

High German

and the Gothic

thus, also, the
t

ulbandus, contrasted with the t of eAe^avr-

of ^TIT chatur, "

quaiuor,''^
;

has become d

in

the

Gothic

Jidvdr instead of th

but in

High German has

entirely dis-

appeared.

The p

of the Sanskrit root

^^ swap, (Latin
slepa,

snpio,) " sleep,"

has been preserved in the Gothic

the Old

and

High German sMfu stands in the Gothic category, but the Sanskrit root is more faithfully preserved in the Old High German in in-suepyu {sopio, see
[G. Ed.
p. 85.]

.86.4.)
90.

Nor have

the inflexions or grammatical appendages

to the

everywhere submitted*
in

law of displacement, but have,

faithful to the

many

instances, either

remained

primary

sound, or have, at
scribed

least, rejected

the particular change prehas, in the

by

87.

Thus the Old High German

third person, as well singular as plural, retained the original

t
;

compare
first

hap^t, " he has,"

hap^t, " they have," with habet,

habent:
the
it,

the Gothic, on the contrary, says habaith, haband;

in accordance with the law, the last in violation of

for habanth.

Thus, also, in the part,

pres., the

of the old

languages has become, under the influence of the preceding

n,

not th but d

the

of the part, pass., however,

th,

is

changed

before the s of the nom. into

It

but before vowel terminaas-

would be better

to regard the

phenomenon here discussed by

;

Burning

as the proper character of the third person in Gothic

and

viewing the Old High

German

as the regular substitute for

also {hair-a-du),

it.

The

lias

been retained in the Gothic passive

bairith
is

and the active

form

derivable from bairid, in that the Gothic prefers the aspiTlie

rates to the mediols at the end of a vt^ord.

part, pass., the suffix of

same

is

the case with the

which

is,

in Gothic, da^ whence, in

Old Higli Ger-

man,

in

consequence of the second law for the permutation of sounds,

;

comes ta
ruption.

so that the old form recurs again, re-introduced by a fresli cor-

CHABACTBBS AND SOUNDS.

tions,

T9
same prin
vowel

by an anomalous by which the

process, into d\ after the

ciple

th of the third person before the

is

increment of the passive

softened to

so that da", in-

stead of tha, corresponds to the

to

Greek

to, of ervTrrer-o,

and
in

the Sanskrit

it

ta,

of ^>?^TT abhavata.

The Old High

tlie

German, on the other hand, has preserved

both participles
:

original

happier, hapSier, Gothic habands, genitive

habandins ; habaiths, gen. habaidis.

91. Special

notice

is

due to the

fact, that in

the middle

of words under the protection of a preceding consonant,

the old

consonant
it

often

remains without displacement,

sometimes because
ters, alterations

chimes in well with the preceding sound,

let-

sometimes because, through regard for the preceding

have been admitted other than those which

the usual practice as to displacement would lead us to expect.

Mute consonants
nounced
like

(. 23.),

among

which, in

[G. Ed.
it is

p. 86.]

the Germanic, the h must be reckoned, where

to be prot.

our

ch, protect

a succeeding original
odo,"''

Thus,

^^

ashtdu, "eight,'' oktw, "

is

in Goth, ahiau, in

Old

High German
"night,"
vv^,

ahto

HFR naktam (adverbial

is

accusative),
nahts.

wKTos, "noi," "noctis"

in Gothic

Old High German nahL The liquids, on the other hand, like the vowels, which they approach nearest of all consonants, affect a d or th after themselves. From these euphonic
causes, for instance, the feminine sufl&x
fir ti

in Sanskrit, in

Greek

(r/f,

as

-notrjaig,

which designates abstract substantives,

ti,

appears in Gothic in three forms,

ginal form
ti

di,

and

tlii.

The

ori-

shews

itself after/, into

resolve themselves, and also after s

anst{i)s
(.

which p and b mostly and h for instance,

;

117.),

"grace," from the root an, Old High Ger-

man

unnan,

" to

be gracious," with the insertion of an

euphonies:

fralust{i)s, " loss,"

(from

lus, pres. liusa): Tnahti()s,

"strength," (from magan): fra-gifl(i)s" betrothment," (from

gib, gaf), a-hofragUjis,

perhaps erroneously, as 6 has

of da*

little

Ds 18 an abbreviation

= G. rat Sansk,

tS,'aee . 466.

80
affinity

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

with
t
:

tja-skaff{i)s,

" creation," (from skap-an).

The
acfiis.

form

di finds its place after vowels, but is able,

suffix falls

where the

vowel of the

away,

i. e.

in the

nom. and

sing., to convert

into th, because th can,

is

more

easily than d,

dispense with a following vowel, and

a favourite letter at

the end of words and before consonants, though d also is tolerated in such a position. Hence the root bud, " to bid,"
(

pres. biuda,

27.) forms, in the uninflected condition of the

pret., bauth, in

the plur. bud-um

and the nominal

base,

mana-se-di, "world,"

(according to Grimm's well-founded

interpretation, " seed, not seat, of man,") forms in the

nom.

and accus. mana-seths, mana-sUh, or mana-sMs, mana-sM;

but in the dat. mana-sidai not -skhai.
after liquids the suffix is usually thi,
dental, however,

On

the other hand,

n, di
:

and after

the

once chosen, remains afterwards in every

vowel or before vowels; for instance,
dat. gabaurthai) gafaurds, "gathering" (from far-yan, " to go "), gen. gafaurdais:

position, either without a

gabaurths, "birth,"

[G. Ed.

p. 87.]

gakunths, "esteem," gen. gakunthais; gamunds,

;

"memory,"
is

gen. gamundais gaqvumths, " meeting," dat. gaqvumthai, dat.

plur.

gaqvumthim.

From

the union with m,

excluded.

On

the whole, however, the law here discussed accords re-

markably with a similar phenomenon in modern Persian, where the original t of grammatical terminations and suffixes
is

maintained only after mute consonants, but after vowels

liquids is

and

changed into d

hence, for instance, gir/f-tun,

have,'^ pukh-turiy

"to take," bas-tan,

"to bind," ddsh-tan, " to

"to cook": on the other hand, dd-dan, "to give," bur-dan, "to
bear," Am-dan, "to come."
release the
I
ti,

do not, therefore, hesitate to

all

Germanic
t,

suffix

and

other suffixes originally

commencing with

from the general law of substitution of

t

sounds, and to assign the lot of this

of the preceding letter.
of our suffix
originally
ti,

entirely to the controul

in the case

The Old High German,

t,

as in that of other suffixes

and terminations
t

commencing with

accords to the original

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

far

81

much
s,

more extensive prevalence, than does the Gothic; inasas it retains that letter, not only when protected by
and/, but also after vowels and liquids

hj

euphonic
into
d.

/ is

inserted

and

after
I

an

the

is

only after

changed
"jourschvld,

Hence, for instance,

ans-t,

"grace," hlou/t, "course,**

''

mah-t, "

might" sfW, "seed,"

kipurt,

birth"

rar-/,
scul-t,

ney," mun-t, " protection," ki-wal-t, " force,"

"guilt,"
92.

chumfU " arrival." The law of substitution shews the greatest

I

perti-

nacity at the beginning of words, and

have found

it

every-

where observed
and Latin.

in the relation of the

Gothic to the Greek

roots which are

On

the other hand, in

some

either deficient or disfigured in the

Old European languages,

Germanic and the Sanskrit, [G. Ed. p. 88-1 same footing with the Gothic stands on the
but which are
to the

common

the Sanskrit, especially in respect of initial medials.

Thus,
;

T^^ bandh,
grah,

" to bind,'^ is also

band in Gothic, not pand IT?

" to take,"
" seize," is grip

in the

Vedas

xr>T

grabh,
.

(pres. greipa

with Guna,

27.)

im yam,
" street
;"

" to go," correspond

not krip;* to tu gd and gagga, " I go," and ga-ivd,

in

^
in

dah, " to burn,"

is,

Old High German, dahI

an

{Saio}),

"to burn," "to light."

can detect, however,

to Sanskrit

no instance
93(a).

which Gothic tenu.s

com spond

as initial letters.

We

return

now

to the Sanskrit, in order, with relato notice

tion to the

most essential laws of sound,

;

one ad-

verted to in our theory of single letters

where

it

was said

of several concurrent consonants that they were tolerated

neither at the end of words, nor in the middle before strong

consonants, and
tions.
It is

how

their places

were supplied in such situabut medials, only

if

besides to be observec', that, properly, teuues

;

alone can terminate a Sanskrit word before sonants, (. 25,)

may

ieither

be retained,

they origi-

nally terminate an inflective base, or take the place of a tenuis

* The Latin prehendo is probably related to the Sanskrit root ^j^ grah^ through the usual mterchange bt'twieii gutlurals and labials.

82
or an aspirate,
sentence.
*

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS

if

these happen to precede sonants

select

in

As examples, we

ffo

harit,

{viriJis),

green," ^i^H^d vida-vid, "skilled in the Veda,''

\nT?5>7

dhann-

lubfi,
. 94.,

"acquiring wealth."

These words

are,

according to

asti harit, asti

without a nominative sign. " he is green," ^f^ ^f%TT

;

We find,
^ftfr
asti
;

also,

^f^ ^tw
\R^t^
^[^^2
asti,

asti vedd-vit, ^rftcT

dhana-lap

on the other hand, iff^

harid
also,

^fw vedavid
[G, Ed. p. 89

asti,

\R^m

^% dhana-lab

^Trl H^f?T

harid bhavati, &c.

]

With this Sanskrit law the Middle Hi";h German is very nearly in accordance, which

indeed tolerates aspirates at the end of words, contrary to the

custom of the Sanskrit, only with a conversion of the sonant

V into the surd /, see
.

86.

3.;

but, like the Sanskrit,

and

independent of the law of displacement explained in

. 8".,

supplies the place of medials at the end of words regularly

by tenues.
vibes, of

As, for example, in the genitives tayes, eides,

sing.,

which the nom. and accus.

wip.

deprived of the
base,

inflexion

and the terminating vowel of the

i.) eif,

tnke the
;

forms

tac, (. 86.

So also as to the verb

for

instance, the roots irug, lad, grab, form, in the uninflected

1st

and 3d pers. sing,

pret., truoc, luot, (jruop, plur, truogev,

luoden, gruoben.

Where, on the other hand, the tenuis or

is radical,

aspirate (v excepted)

there no alteration of sound

occurs in declension or in conjugation.

For instance,

wort,

gen. wortes, not wordes, as in Sansk. ^^w dadat, "the giver,"

gen. gen.

^^w

dadatas, not
vidas,

f^^\

from the base f^7

strict
it,

^^^dadadas, but f^vit, "knowing," In Old High vid.

observance of this law.
Isidor is

German

different authorities of the language are at variance

with respect to the

in accordance with

insomuch that he converts d at the

end into
dages.

and g into c; for instance, wort, wordes; dac, The Gothic excludes only the labial medials from
t,

terminations,
aspirates.

but replaces them, not by tetmes, but by

gnf, " I gave," in contrast to gSbum,

Hence

and

the accusatives

hla/f, lauf, thiuf,

opposed to the nominativts

hhdbs, laubs, thiubs, gen. hlaibis, &c.

The guttural and dental

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

medials
(</,

83

d) are tolerated by the Gothic in terminations;

yet even in these, in individual cases, a preference appeal's

for the terminating aspirates.
offered,"
hn'iiad-n

Compare
(.67.)

bauth, " I or he

with

budum,

"we

offered,"
haitith

from the root bud;

"nominal;
aik,

"nominafur" with

" I have,"
[G. Ed.

"he

has," with aigum, "

we

have."

p. 90.]

93(^), In a sense also

opposed to that of the

above-mentioned Sanskrit law, we

find, in

Old High German,

yet only in Notker, an euphonic relation between terminating

and

initial letters

of two words which

come together. (Grimm,

pp. 130, 13S, 181).

essential consonant,

As
fit

in Sanskrit the tenuis appears as an

for the conclusion of a sentence, but

exchangeable, under the influence of a word following in a

sentence, for the medials
as a true initial
:

so with Notker the tenuis ranks

stands therefore at the begfinnins: of a

sentence,

and

after

strong consonants

but after vowels

is

and the weakest consonants the

medial.
ier dag,

liquid

turned into a

Thus, for instance, ik pin, "I am," but ih ne bin;

"the
day,*"

but

tes

tages; mil kote,

"with God," but

minan
94.

got, "

my

God."

Two

consonants are no longer, in the existing con-

dition of the Sanskrit, tolerated at the

end of a word, but

the latter of the two

is

rejected.

This emasculation, which

to the division of the

must date from an epoch subsequent

language, as this law
is

not recognised either by the

Zend

or by any of the European branches of the family, has

had, in

many respects, a disadvantageous operation on the Grammar, and has mutilated many forms of antiquity required by theory. In the High German we may view, as in some degree connected with this phenomenon, the circumstance that roots with double liquids
of inflexions) reject the latter of the pair.

//,

mm,

nn,

rr

in forms which are indeclinable (and before the consonants

In the case, also,

of tenninations in double h or
for instance,

t, one is rejected. Hence, from siihhu (pungo) nr-priltu (sfringu), the 1st

and 3d

pers.

pret

stah, ar-prat.

In Middle

High German,

G 2

84

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

rejected;
for instance,

in declensions in ck,ff, the last is

hoc, gen. bockes;
grif, griffes
:

tz loses

the

for instance,

schaz, schatzes.
95.

Between a
t

final vr

ceeding

sound

as
is is
tT,

[G. Ed. p. 91.J n and a suepalatals also must be which the

reckoned, for

ch

equivalent to tsh

in the Sanskrit an
9.,

euphonic sibilant
following
t
;
;

interposed, from the operation of the

and

by

this sibilant, is converted, .

into

Anuswara
s-tatra),
*'

for instance, ^T^?J^

they were there."

cumstance, that, in
the
t

W^ abhavam tatra, {abhavanWith this coincides the cirHigh German, between a radical n and
s,

of an

affix,

an
"

in certain cases, is inserted

for in-

stance,

from the root ann, "to favour," comes, in Old High

an-s-f,

German,
" ardour *'

thou favourest," on-s-ta or onda, "

I fa-

voured," an-s-t,
;

"favour";
is

from prann
"

comes

prun-s-f,

from chan

derived chun-s-t,

knowledge," our

German Kunst,
g'dnnen,
tlie

in which, as in

Brunst and Gunst, (from

probably formed from the ann before noticed, and

s has stood fast. The Gothic phenomenon nowhere, perhaps, but in an-s-ts and allhrun-s-ts 'holocaustum.' In Old High German we

preposite ^(e),) the euphonic

exhibits this

find

still

an

inserted after
(or-s-fa, I

r,

in the root iarr

(Cf. .616.

hence,

tar-s-t,

thou darest,"

dared."

2d Note:)

96. In Sanskrit the interposed euphonic s has extended

itself further

only

among

the prefixed prepositions, which

generally enter into most intimate and facile connection with

the following root.

In this manner the euphonic

s steps in

between the prepositions sam, W^ava, vftpari, irfiT prnti, and certain words which begin with ejr h. With this the Latin s between ab or oh and c, q, and p, remarkably accords*,
[G. Ed. p. 92.]
tion,

which

s,

ab retains even in an isolated posi-

when

the above-mentioned letters follow.

To

this

we
*

also refer the cosmittere of Festus, instead of commillcre

We

scarcely think

it

necessary to defend ourselves for dividing, with

Voasius, ob-solcsco, rather than with Schneider (p. 571) obs-olesco.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

(Schneider, p. 475), unless an original smitto, for miito,

S5
is

involved in this compound.

nation for connection with
letters as

In the Greek, j
t, 6,

shews an

incli-

and

/u,

and precedes these

In compounds like

an euphonic

link, especially after short vowels, in

cases which require no special mention.

aaK-Tia\og I reckon the

j,

in opposition to the

theory, as belonging to the base of the first

common member (. 128.).

We

have yet to consider a case of the interpolation of an

labial,

euphonic

which

is

common
places

to the Old Latin and Ger-

manic, and serves to facilitate the union of the labial nasal

with a dental.
/

The Latin

p between m and

a following

or s; the Gothic and Old

High German/ between

Old High

and

t.

Thus, sumpsi^ prompsi, dempsi, sumptus, promptus, demptus

Gothic andanum-f-fs, " acceptance "

chum-f-t, "arrival."
tion of

German
<t,

In
)8

Greek we
/x,

find also the interpolav,

tr

an euphonic

after

of a 5 after
/z,

oldk B after

in order to facilitate the union of

(jxecrrjixfipia, /ze/zjQAera/,

v,

and

with p and
p.

avdpo^,

i/j.d(Td\t]

see Buttman,

80)

while the

Modern Persian

places an euphonic

d between

the vowel of a prefixed preposition and that of the following

word, as be-d-u, " to him."

97.

The Greek

affords

few specimens of variability

at the

end of words, excepting from peculiarities of

substitution of p for
in old inscriptions,
y.

dialect, as the

The

alteration of the v in the article

avv, ev,

and in the prefixes

and
to

-naKiv.
.

seems analogous to the changes whith, according

the terminating

18.,

^ m,
v

in Sanskrit, undergoes in all cases,

[G. Ed.
p.

with reference to the letter which follows.

93]

The concluding
from
^l,

in

Greek

is

also generally a derivative

letter,

and corresponds to
Zend, and Latin.
;

this

which the Greek

from

never admits as a termination in analogous forms of the

Sanskrit,

frequently springs
p.ev

final

thus,

for

instance,

(Doric
personal

/zej)

and the

dual
i?Tl^

rov

answer

to

the Sanskrit
tas.

terminations

mas, >em thas,

I

which

have found this explanation, have given elsewhere, of the origin of the v from j
I

im

86

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

subsequently confirmed by the Prakrit, in which, in like

manner, the concluding

of the instrumental termination

plural ftro bhis has passed into the dull

n ( Anuswara,

9.),

and f^ hin

is

said for bhis.

An

operation, which has a pre-

judicial effect

on many Greek terminations, and disturbs the

t

relation to cognate languages, is the suppression of the

sound at the end of words, where, in Sanskrit, Zend, and

Latin
it is
it

plays an essential part.

In respect of the vowels,

in

also

worthy of notice, that

Sanskrit, but not in

Zend, at the meeting

of vowel terminations
is

and com-

mencements, a hiatus

guarded against, either by the

fusion of the two vowels, or, in cases where the vowel has

a cognate semi-vowel at
into this
latter,

its

command, by

its

transition

provided the vowel following be unlike.

''est

and ^wu For the sake of clearness, and ^niH asty ay am, "est /ur." because the junction of two vowels might too often give
find, for

We

instance, ^T^'t^JT astidam,

hoc,"

the appearance of two or

more words

to one, I write in

my

most recent text ^i^ '^, in order, by an apostrophe which I employ as a sign of fusion, to indicate that the
vowel which appears wanting in the
in

dam
in

is

contained

the

final
still

vowel of the preceding word.

better

We
to

might,

perhaps,
[G. Ed.
its final

write

"S^

'^,

order directly

p. 94.]

at the close of the first

word

shew

that

vowel has arisen out of a contraction, and that the

it.*

following word participates in

98.

We

have now to consider the alterations in the

i.e.

middle

of words,

those

of the

final

letters

of the

roots and nominal bases before grammatical endings, and

we

find,

with respect to these, most

in

life,

strength,

and
is

consciousness
*

the

Sanskrit

and
original

this

language

We cannot guide ourselves here by the

were only a

MSS.,

as these exhibit

no separation of words, and

interruption, as though they

entire vi-rses are written together without

series of senseless syllables,

and

not words of indi'pondint place and meaning.

As we must depart from

tie

Indian practice, the more complete the more rational

separation.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

8i

placed on the highest point of antiquity, insomuch as the

signification of
felt,

every radical portion

it

is

still

so strongly
for the

that

wliile
of-

admits of moderate
it

changes,

avoiding
elisions,

harshness,

never,

if

we

except some vowel

obliterated,

permits the radical sense to be

or

rendered irrecognisable by concessions too great, or transYet does the Sanskrit, more than any itions too daring.
of
its

kindred, afford a field

for the conflict of unsociable

is

consonants, a conflict, however, which

honourably and

strenuously maintained.
(.

The Vowels and weak consonants,

suffixes exert

25.) of

grammatical endings and

no in-

fluence over preceding consonants; but strong consonants,

if

surd

(.

25.),

require a tenuis, and if sonant a medial,

before them.

Thus,

T{^t

and

yj ih
;

allow only of ^/r, not

^
^

Ifh,
(Z,

TX

g,
;

V gh preceding them
kh,
xr

only

W
</i,

t,

not

^
;

tli,

V dh
eS
A:,

while on the other hand,

v
TT

dh allows only
t,
"^I^

it g,

not

^
Tj

gh

only

^ d,

not
it.

c/A

only

b,

not

p,

TS.p/j,

bh to precede

The

[G. Ed. p. 95 ]

roots and the nominal bases have to regulate their final letters

by

this

law

and the occasion frequently presents

itself,

since, in

comparison with the cognate languages, a far greater

proportion of the roots connect the personal terminations

immediately with the root

nations there are
bhytim, ftnr
bliis,

and

also

among

the case termi-

vinr

many which begin with consonants (wn^ To cite instances, the bhyas, ^ su).
forms ^fa admU
" I eat "
;

root

ad, " to eat,"

but not

^S^fis adsi (for s is surd),

nor

m^A
:

ad-ti,

^^

ad-tlia,

but

^ifm

^f^ at-ti, Wf^ at-tha imperative, ^f^ ad-dhi, " eat."

cA-si,

on the other hand, in the

forms, in the locative plural,

The base iR pad, " foot," Vj^ pat-su, not Tf^ pad-su; on

the other hand,

*r^

mahat, " great," forms, in the instru-

mental plural, Wffk^ mahad-bliis not K^dftnT mahat-bhis. 99. The Greek and Latin, as they have come down to

us,

have either altogether evaded

this conflict

of c*onsonants,
first

or exhibit, in most eases, with regard to the

of any
it,

two contiguous consonants, a disposition

to surrender

or

88
at least

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

an
iiidifFerence to its assistance

towards the signiit

fication of the

word, since they either abandon

it,

altogether,
its

or violently alter

i.e.

convey

it

beyond the limits of

afford

proper organ.

These two languages

fewer occasions

for harsh unions of consonants

than the Sanskrit, princi-

pally because, with the exception of 'E2 and *IA in Greek,

and ES,
iS-jjLev,

FER, FEL, ED,

in Latin, as ea-ri, ea-^iev,

ecr-Te,

Ha-re, est, estis, fer-t, fer-tis, vul-t, vul-tis,

its

no

root,

termi-

nated by a consonant, joins on

personal terminations, or

any of them, without the aid of a connecting vowel.

Greek

perf. pass,

alterations,

The makes an exception, and requires euphonic which, in part, come within the natural limits

recognised by the Sanskrit, and, in part, overstep them.

[Q. Ed.
p. 96.]

The
.

gutturals and labials remain on

tiie

ancient footing, and before a and r observe the Sanskrit law

of sound cited in
TT-T,

98.;

according to which
k, y,
'x^,

k-(t[^), k-t, ir-cr,

tt, /3,

are applied to roots ending in

<t

or

0, because

the surd
it
;

or t suffers neither medials nor aspirates before

hence reTpnt-aai, TeTpnr-Tai, from TPIB, TervK-aai, tetvk-

rai,

from TYX.

The Greek, however, diverges from

/u

the

Sanskrit in

this, that

does not leave the consonant which

itself,

precedes

it

unaltered, but assimilates labials to

and con-

verts the guttural, tenuis

and aspirate into medials.

For

TeTvix-jxai, TeTpifx-fxat, ireitXey-ixat, Tervy-ixai,

we

should, on
TreirXeKfar,

Sanskrit principles, write

fiai, TeTvx'lJ-oii'

(. 98.)TeTVTT-fi.at, rerpijS-iJLai,

The

sounds carry concession too

and

abandon the Sanskrit, or original principle, as regards the

gutturals
;

inasmuch as
t,

T before a and
fjL

5, d, and ^ (5cr), instead of passing into are extinguished before a, and before t and
iriTtei-tyat,

become

<r

(7re7re/o"-Ta/,

TreTreia-fxai, "neTtei^-p-ai.

instead of

TteTreiT-Tai, TteTreiT-aat, TteTieid-jxai,

or

The Greek

declension affords occasion for the alteration of consonants

only through the

$
;

of the nominative and the dative plural

termination in ai

and here the same principle holds good as

in the case of the verb, and in the formation of words:

(J

Mand

become; as in Sanskrit, k (^=K-f), and b aud ph become p.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

The
t

89

sounds, on the other hand, contrary to the Sanskrit, and

in accordance

with the enfeebled condition, in this respect,

of the

Greek, vanish entirely.

We

find

Tiov-g

for

ttot-s-,

nov-a'i for TtoT-ai,

which

latter naturally

and

originally

must

have stood for

iroJ-o-, itod-at,

100. In Latin the principal occasion for the alteration of

consonants presents
the
t

itself

before the

of the perfect and

of the supine, or other verbal substantive or adjective

(participles) beginning

with

t;

and

it is

in
98.,

[G. Ed.

p. 97.]

accordance with the Sanskrit law cited

and the original

condition of the language, that the sonant guttural passes,

before
{rexi),

and

t,

into c^the sonant labial into p, as in rec-si

scripsi,

rectum from reg,

scriptum from
h,

scrib.

It is also
(.

in accordance with the Sanskrit that

as a sonant
c

25.)
t
;

and incompatible with a

tenuis,

becomes

before

and

compare

vec-sit {vcxit),

with the word of like signification

^RT^TT
{mulai

a-vdk-shtt.

If of the

two

final

consonants of a

root the last vanishes

before the s of the perfect tense

sparsi

from mule and mulg,

from sparg),
base,

this accords

with the Sanskrit law of sounds, by which, of two terminating consonants of a nominal
before consonants of the
the
last

vanishes

case terminations.

ought to

become

before

s;

and then the form, so theoretically

c/awc?,

created, claut-sit

from

would accord with the Sanskrit

forms, such as ^ffWtTT a-tdvt-sit, " he tormented," from H^

hid.

Instead,
;

however, of
so,

this,

the

d allows

itself

to

be

extinguished

however,
is

that, in

compensation, a short
or,

vowel of the root

less frequent, the
cessi

made

long,

as dl-vl-si;

which
s,

is

d assimilates
roots in

itself to
/,

the following

as

from

ced.

With

which are rarer, assimi-

lation usually takes place, as con-cus-si

from

cut

on the
mitt.

other hand, im-si, not mis-si, for

7nit-si,

from mit or

B, w, and

r also afford instances of assimilation

in jus-si,

pres-si, ges-si, us-si*

third resource, for the avoidance

Compared

\^^th the Sanskrit, in

which gn^

tish signifies

"burn";

the sibilant must liere pass for the original form.

90

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

of an union, very natural, but not endurable in this weak-

ened state of the language,

latter of these

is,

is

the suppression of the

is also
;

two

letters,

which

compensated by
thus,* sedi

the lengthening of a short radical vowel

[G. Ed.
p. 98.]

from
that

sed, ridi

from

vid..

I believe, at least,
I

these forms are not derivable from seduit vidui, and

class
lei/,

them with forms

fn(ji, for fuc-si,

Vike fodi

from J od,
car, &c.

legi,

for lee-si^

from

from fur/.

To these probably

also belong cavi,

fuiiffdvi, for pavi, vdvi,

from

cavui, &c. is hardly

I

conceivable

cavi could

never have had such an origin.

conjecture forms such as cau-si,fau-si, after the analogy of

cautum, fautum
con-nic-si.
(.

or moc-si (moxi), after the analogy of

vic-si,

19.)

Possibly a moc-si form might derive prolatter is

bability

from the adverb mox, since the

cito
is

probably

derived from mov, as

from another root of motion.

as a hardening

The
and
it is

c of fuc-si, struc-sif {fluxi, 8cc.) Jluxmn, str actum, must,

in the

same manner, be considered

remembered,
that, in

of v;

Sijlu-vo, stru-vo,

be presupposed, with regard to which

Sanskrit also, uv often der.

to be

velopes itself out of

u before vowels (Gram. Crit.

50.");

on which
Thus,

principle, out of flu, stru, before vowels,

we might
sfriic.
t

obtain fluv, struv, and thence before consonants Jluc,

also, fructus out of fniv-or for fru-or.

In cases of
.v

preceded by consonants, the suppression of

is

tiie

rule,

and
verti,

ar-si

for ard-i

an exception.
ar-si

Prandi, frendi, pandi,

&c., are in contrast to

and other forms,

like

mulsi above mentioned, in their preserving the radical letter

in preference to the auxiliary verb; and

this

they accord in
s

with the Sanskrit rule of sound, by which the

atdut-sam,
is

of

^iifiwfl^

^^^

akshaip-sam, &c., for the avoidance

of hardness,

suppressed before strong consonants, and

we
sta.

find, for instance, "snflw atdut-ta, instead of ^T^rtcT atdut-

The
the

perfects scidi, fidi,

are

rendered

doubtful

by

their
to

short vowel,
reduplicated
* Cf.
^.

and

in

their origin
first

probably belong
syllable

preterites, their
for the

having

547.,

and

whole

^. cf. .

647. 57G. 679.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

perished in
respects,
tlie

91
[G. Ed. p. 99.]

lapse of time

in other

y?'c//,

sctdi, correspond to tufudi,pupugi, not to speak

of

tefigi,

the

of

which

latter is not original.

employed in the formation of words and beginning with t, for the representation of which the
101.

The

suflSxes

supine

may

stand, deserve special consideration, in regard

to the relations of
t

sound generated by the

conflict

between

and the preceding consonant

According to the original

t

law observed in the Sanskrit, a radical

unaltered before
turn,

ought to remain
t',

and d should pass into

as,

>t^^

bheltum, " to cleave,'" from fk^ bhid.

According to the deget

nerated practice of the Greek, a radical d or

before

would become

s.

Of

this second gradation

we

find a

rem&c.

nant in comes-ius, comes-tura, analogous to

es-t,

es-tis,

from pdo
ther, in
fix;

we

find,

however, no comes-tum, c&mes-for, but

in their place comesum, comesnr.

We
t

might question whe-

comesum, the

belonged to the root or to the sufor the

tus

whether the d of
f.

ed,

of turn, had been changed

radicality of

into

The form com-es

it

might argue the

the s; but

is

hard to suppose that the language should

esus,

have jumped at once from estus to

between which two

an

essus probably intervened, analogous to cessum, Jlssum,

t

quassum, &c., while the

to the preceding
s.

of turn,

tus,

&c., assimilated itself

Out

of essum has arisen esum,

first
it
;

by the
first,

suppression of an

s,

probably the

for

where of a pair

of consonants the one is removed,

(eZ/i/
.

is

generally the

from

Icr/x/,

"no-at

from

ttoJ-ct/,)

possibly because, as in

100.,

an auxiliary verb

is

abandoned in preference to a

letter of the

main

verb.

After that the language had, through

such forms as e-sum, cd-sum, divi-sum, ^s-siim, quassum,

habituated itself to an
/,

s in suffixes

properly beginning with a

might
its

easily insinuate itself into

forms where
a

it

did not
p.

owe

origin to assimilation.
;

Cs

(i) is

[G. Ed.

100.1

favourite combination

hence, fic-sum, vec-sum, &c. for Jic-

tum, nec-tum.

The

liquids,

excepted, evince special incli-

92

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

s,

nation for a succeeding

most of

all

the r

hence, ier-snm,

mer-sum, cur-sum, par-sum, ver-sum, in contrast to par-turn,

tor-turn
:

there are also cases in which

r,

by a conversion
us-tum,

into

s,

accommodates

itself to

f,

as

in ges-fum,

ios-tum*

This answers to the Sanskrit obligatory convert

;

sion of a concluding r into s before an initial

IflTJi

as,

^ir^

m^

bhrdtas tdraya

mdm,
t

" brother save me," instead of

^IR. bhrdtar : on the other hand, in the middle of words r

remains unaltered before

turn,

hence, for instance,

v^n

bhar-

not

>rer

bhastum," to bear."

exhibits in the Latin

;

the forms fal-sum, pul-sum, vul-sum^ in contrast to cul-tum

n exhibits ten-turn, can-turn, opposed to man-sum. The other forms in n-sum, except cen-sum, have been mulcted of a
radical d, as ton-sum, pen-sum.

102. In the
for

Germanic languages,

alone gives occasion

an euphonic conversion of a preceding radical consonant;

,

for instance, in the 2d pers. sing, of the strong preterit

where, however, the

only in a few
fication

in the Old

High German
In the

is

retain el
signi-

verbs,

which associate a present

with the form of the preterite.

weak pret,

terites, also,

which spring from these verbs, the auxiliary

where

it

remains unaltered, generates the same euphonij

relations.

We find
th, d,

in these

forms the Germanic on the sam

it

footing as the Greek, in this respect, that

t

converts radical

sounds

(/,

and in Old and Middle High German z

t

also) before

a superadded

into

s.

Hence, for instance, in

(^abscidisti),

[G. Ed.

p. 101.]

Gothic maimais-t

for maimait-t,

fai-fals-t (pJicavisti), for

fai-fall h-f,

ana-baus-t {imperasti), for

weis-f,

ana-baud-t.

In Old and Middle

High German
in
I

" thou

knowest," for weiz-t.

root
vif,

The Gothic,

forming out of the

in the

weak

preterite, vis-sa ("

knew

"),

instead of

* The obvious

relationship of torreo with Ttpa-ofuu, and jrq trish from

*.

fT^ tursh, argues the derivation of the latter r from

Upon

that of Jiro

from

"grr

A, see

97.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

vista,

93

from

viita,

resembles, in respect of assimilation, the

in
. 101.,

Latin forms mentioned

tum, from quat-tum.

such as quas-sum for guas-

The Old High German, however, which

from muuz makes not muos-say but
case
different in

also adopts wis-sa, but

rrMo-sfi,

corresponds, in the latter case, to such Latin forms,

as ca-sum, clau-sum.

The

is

Old High Ger-

man

with those verbs of the

first

weak conjugation, which,

of the
t

having their syllables made long generally through two

terminating consonants in the preterite, apply the
auxiliary verb directly to the root.
into s does not occur, but
/,

Here
d,

the transition of

z,

and even

remain unaltered
t

and only when another consonant precedes them

extinguished, z on the contrary remains
;

and d are

for instance, leit-ta,

"duxi," ki-neiz4a,

"afflixi," ar-6d-fOf " vastavi," ualz-tOf

;

" voLvi," liuh-ta, " luxi," for linht-ia

hul-ta, " placavi,"

is

for

huld-ta.

Of double consonants one only

h.
;

retained, and of cA

or cch only

other consonantal combinations remain, how-

ever, undisturbed, as ran-ta, " cijcurri," for rann-ta; wanh-ta,

" vacillavi," for uanch-ta

dah-ia, " texi," for dacch-ta.

The

Middle High German follows essentially the same principles,

only a simple radical
t

gives

way

before the auxiliary verb,

and thus

lei-te is

opposed to the Old High

the other hand, in roots in Id and rd the d

German leit-ta; on may be maintained,

and the t of the auxiliary be surrendered

unless we admit a division of

a softened
t.

as dulde, " toleravi"

and consider the d as
(.

dul-de,

The change
law b

of

into c

98.) is natural,

but

not universal; for instance, anc-te, "arctavi," for an g-te ; but

against
this

remains

unaltered.

[G. Ed.
t*,

p. 102.]

Before the formative suffixes beginning with

both in Gothic

and High German, guttural and

labial tenues

and medials are

changed into their aspirates, although the tenuis accord with a following t. Thus, for instance, in Gothic, vah-fvo,
* With the exception of the High German passive
form, which, in the adjunstion of
the pret. above described
its f to

part, of the

weaker

the root, follows the analogy of

94
"watch,"
mah-t(ji)s,
;

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

from vak;
" might,"
sauh-i(i)s,

"sickness,"
ga-skrif-t(i)s,

from

suk

from

mag

" creation,"

from skap fragif-i{i)s, " betrothment," from gib, softened from gab; Old High German suJit, maid, ki-skaft, " creature,"
kift,

" gift."
(s),

The
as
is

dentals replace the aspirate th by the the case in Gothic before the pers. cha-

sibilant

racter

of the preterite, as th cannot be

combined with

t.

The formation
this

of words, however, affords few examples of

this

kind

under

Gothic mats,

" food,"

head comes our mast, related to the and mati/an, " to eat." In Gothic, the
springs from the
t

s of hloatreis, " worshipper,"

of hldtan,
hevt

"to worship":
(heitan,

heist,

"leaven," comes probably from

ii.

"to bite,"

Grimm,
it

in

this respect, with the

The Zend accords, Germanic*, but still more with

p. 208).
its
t
;

the Greek, in that

converts

sounds into
for instance,
;

jj s,

not

only before ^
ini,ta,

t,

but also before 9

m^mj7j

" bound,'*
in

from the root o jo ir'tth aj^ jjasj basta, from (S^^au bandh, with the nasal excluded as Modern Persian &jLo bastah, from Joo band; aj^jj/oaj
;

" dead,"

aesma, " wood," from

103.

^i*i

idhma.

It is

a violation of one of the most natural laws of

sound, that, in Gothic, the medial g does not universally

pass into k or h
[G, Ed.
p. 103.] (

= ch),

before the personal character

;

of

we

the pret., but generally is retained ana find, for instance, dg-t, " thou fearest,^ mag-t, " thou
t,

canstf"; and yet, before other inflections formed with

the g undergoes an euphonic transition into h, as for instance, 6h~ta,

104.

"I feared," mah-ts, "might."

. 98.,

Wlien in Sanskrit, according to

the aspiration
it falls

of a medial undergoes a necessary suppression,

back,

under certain conditions and according to special laws,

upon the

initial

consonant of the

root,

yet only upon a

medial, or throws itself

Cf. the Sclavonic

onward on the
.

initial

consonant of

and Lithuanian,

457.

t No other

roots in

in this person are to be found in Ulfilua.

CHARACTERS AND SOUNDS.

the following
si/thni,

95

sulfix.

We

find, for

instance, fii^fjT bhot;

hhiil,

"

"I shall know,'' for sifivmin^ hudh-syumi knowinor the vedas," for ^\| budli
;

^w'ff m/'/-

?S

bud-d-'in,

"knowing," for

^y<[

budhta

>ft^?Tf*T dhuk-sjiijdmi,

"I

shall

milk," for ^^ETlfiR doli-sijami;

^rq dug-dhn, "milked," for

first

Z^ dnh-tn.
l>art

In Greek we find a remarkable relic of the

of

tlie

transposition of the aspirate,* in the necessary

8Ui)prcssion of the aspirate in

i

some

roots which begin with

and end with an aspirate before

witli

a, t,

and

/u,

letters

which

admit of no union
back on the

an aspirate, and in

its

being thrown
6.

initial letter,

by which process t becomes

Hence, Tpe^o),
Tu),

dpe-n-auitidpe^lfui), dperrryp, dpefi-fia, Ta(pil]i dd-n;

ercKprjVf TedafM-jjiai

rpv(pO, dpviT-TUi, Tpv(pt]v, 6pvyi-yLa

rpkyjji, dpi^oiJLai;

6pi^, Tpf)(6^, rayy^, ddcrcroiv.

e;^

In

tiie

spirit

of this transposition of the aspirate,

obtains the spiritus as(e/cTos-, e|<), e(^/j).f

per when
*

"x^

is

obliged to

merge

in the tenuis,

See J. L.

Bumouf in

the Asiatic Journal, III. 3G8; and Buttmann,

pp. 77, 78.

t It

is

usual to explain this appearance

by the supposition of two aspiis

rations in the root of these forms, of

in deference to the

which one only

supposed to appear

euphonic law \Yhich forbids the admission of two con-

secutive aspirated syllables. of the two, aud the other forced to

1 his one would be the last [G. Ed. p. 10 .] would only shew itself when the latter had been

the

fact, that,

merge in the tenuis. Opposed, however, to this exjdanation is on account of the inconvenience of accumulated aspirates, tlie
itself in

language has guarded

the original formation of

its

roots agnliibt

the evil, and has never admitted an aspirated consonant at oi.cc for the
initial
is

and

final letter of a root.

is

complete, there

In Sanskrit, the collection of \\ hose roots no such instance. The foi-m.', however, fd(i(f)0qv,
present a difficulty.

T6d<fi6ai, Tf6d(f)6a3, T^a<^arat, Te6p(i(f>6ni, (6pi'(j)6qv

These, perhaps, are eccentricities of usage, which, once habituated to the

initial aspiration

by its frequent

ai)plication to
its radicality,

supply the place of the ter-

minating one, began to assume

was

legitimate.

a combination in
cording to

it wider thau might also say, that since (f)6 (as x^) is so favourite G ree k that it is even substituted for ird and ,^6 while, ac-

and extended

We

. 98.,

an original

(pd

ought to become 77^ on this ground the

tendency to aspiration of the root remained unsatisfied by fTdc{>6r]v kc; and as if the ordy existed out of reference to the 3, the original terminating aspirate necessarily fell back on the radical initiid. This theory, which seems to me sound, would only lc<;vc T(6d(j>aTai to be explained.

96

OF THE ROOTS.
[G. Ed. p. 105.]

105.

There are in Sanskrit, and the lanit,

guages which are akin to

one, which is

two

classes of roots

from the
verbs, and

by

far the

more numerous, spring

nouns (substantives and

adjectives) wliich stand in fraternal

connection with the verbs, not in the relation of descent from

them, not begotten by them, but sprung from the same

shoot with them.

We

term them, nevertheless,

too,

for

the

sake of distinction, and according to prevailing custom.

Verbal Roots

and the verb,

stands in close formal

connection with them, because from

many

roots each per-

son of the present

site personal

is

formed by simply adding the requi-

termination.

From

the second class spring

pronouns,
ticles
:

all

original prepositions, conjunctions, and par-

we name them Pronominal

Roots, because they

all

express a pronominal idea, which, in the prepositions, conjunctions, and particles, lies

more or

less concealed.

No

simple pronouns can be carried back, either according to

their

meaning or
root.

their form, to
(or

any thing more general, but

their declension-theme

inflective base) is at the

same

time their
all

The

Indian Grammarians, however, derive

words, the pronouns included, from verbal roots, although

the majority of pronominal bases, even in a formal respect,

are opposed to such a derivation, because they, for the most

part,

end with a

one, indeed, consists simply of a.

Among
is

[G. Ed. p. 106.1

the verbal roots, however, there

all

not a

single one in a, although long a, and

other vowels,

du excepted, occur among

roots.

the final letters of the verbal

Accidental external identity takes place between the

verbal and pronominal roots; e.g.\i signifies, as a verbal

root,

"to

go,"^ as

a pronominal root, "he," "this."

roots, like

106.

The verbal

those of the pronouns, are

OF THE ROOTS.
monosyllabic;

97

and the polysyllabic forms represented by

roots

the grammarians as
syllable, as Wf^Jdgri,

contain either

a reduplicate-

"to wake," or a preposition which has

;

grown up with the

play,"

root, as ^H^vtr ava-dhir, " to despise "

or thev have sprung: from a noun, like ofWIT kumdr, " to

which

derive from oFRR kumara, " a boy."

Except

the law of their being monosyllabic, the Sanskrit roots are

subjected to no further limitation, and their one-syllableness

may

present

itself

under

all

possible forms, in the she rtest

and most extended, as well as those of a middle decree. This free state of irrestriction was necessary, as the language
was to contain within the limits of one-syllableness the whole body of fundamental ideas. The simple vowels and
consonants were not sufficient:
it

was

requisite to

frame

roots also where several consonants,

unity, became, as
sttmd," a root in

combined

in inseparable

it were, simple sounds; e.g. "mi sthd, "to which the age of the co-existence of the s

and

th is

supported by the unanimous testimony of

of our race of languages.

all

the

members

So

also,

in

^;^
is

skand, " to go," (Lat. scand-o) the age of the combination of

consonants, both in the beginning and ending of the root,

certified

by the agreement of the Latin with the Sanskrit.

a
is

The

proposition, that in the earliest period of language

sufficient to

simple vowel

express a verbal idea,

is

sup-

ported by the remarkable concurrence of

[G. Ed. p 107.]

nearly

all

the

individuals of the
" to

Sanskrit family of lan-

guages in expressing the idea

107.

go

"

by the root

i.

The nature and

still

peculiarity of the Sanskrit verbal

roots explains itself

of the

more by comparison with those Semitic languages. These require, as far as we

their
antiquity, three

trace back

consonants, which, as

I-

have already elsewhere shewn,* express the fundamental

* Trans, of the Hist. Phil. Class of the R. A. of Litt. of Berlin for

tlie

year 1824,

p. 126,

&c.

98

OF THE ROOTS.
;

idea by themselves alone, without the aid of vowels

althoug;h they
syllable,
still,

and

may

be momentarily compressed into one

in this, the combination of the middle radical

with the

first-

or last cannot be recognised as orio^inal and

root,

belonging to the
chiefly

because

it

is

only transitory, and

depends on the mechanism of the construction of

Thus, in Hebrew,
dli

the word.

kdlul, "slain,"

in

the fem.,

on account of the addition

dli)
;

contracts itself to kldl {klul-

while

kotei, "

slaying," before the

same

addition,

com-

presses itself in an opposite

manner, and forms

kdtldk.

Neither

ktdl, therefore,
little

nor

kdil,

can be regarded as the root

only a shortening of the

and just as

can

it

be looked for in kl6l,as the status conis

strudus of the infinitive; for this

absolute form kdt6l, produced by a natural tendency to pass

hastily to the

word governed by the

to
it.

infinitive,

which, as

it

were, has

grown

In the imperative

kldl the

abbrevia-

tion is not external, subject to mechanical conditions, but

rather dynamic, and occasioned by the hurry with which a

command

is

usually enunciated.

In the Semitic languages,

in decided opposition to those of the Sanskrit family, the

vowels belong, not to the root, but to the grammatical motion,

the secondary ideas, and the
[G. Ed. p. 108.]

mechanism of the construction of

the word.
katala, "

By them,

for example,
kut'da,

is

dis-

tinguished, in Arabic,
slain";

he slew," from

"he was

and in Hebrew, kdtM, "slaying," from

is

kdtulf "slain."
it

A
it

Semitic root

unpronounceable, because, in giving

is

vowels, an advance

made to a special grammatical form, and

But
in the Sanskrit family of

then no longer possesses the simple peculiarity of a root

raised above all

grammar.

languages,

if its

oldest state is consulted in the languages

which

have continued most pure, the root appears as a circumscribed

nucleus, which
itself
is

almost unalterable, and which surrounds

with foreign syllables, whose origin we must investi-

and whose destination is, to express the secondary ideas of grammar which the root itself cannot express*
gate,

OF THE ROOTS.

99

The vowel, with one or more consonants, and sometimes without any consonant whatever, belongs to the fundamental
meaning:
raised
and,
its
it

can be lengthened to the highest degree, or

Vriddlii
;

by Guna or
to

and

this

lengthening or raising,
a,

more

lately, the retention of

i

an original
(. 66., 67.),

opposed to

weakening

or change to u

belongs not to

the denoting of grammatical relations, which require to be

more
to the

clearly pointed out, but, as

imagine

can prove, only

mechanism, the symmetry of construction.

108.
tion,

As

the Semitic roots, on account of their construc-

possess the most surprising capacity for indicating

the secondary ideas of

ing of the root, of which they also

the Sanskrit roots, at the
first

grammar by the mere internal mouldmake extensive use, while

grammatical movement, are
;

compelled to assume external additions

strange, that F.

so

must

it

appear

von Schlegel.* while he

[G. Ed.

p. log.]

divides languages in general into

two chief

races, of

which

the one denotes the secondary intentions of

internal alteration of the sound of the root

meaning by an
by
inflexion, the

other always by the addition of a word,

itself signify plurality,

which

may by

past time, what

is to

be in future,

or other relative ideas of that kind, allots the Sanskrit

and

its

sisters to
to

the former race, and

the Semitic

lan-

guages

the

second.

"There may, indeed," he

writes,

p. 48, " arise

an appearance of inflexion, when the annexed

particles are melted

down with
;

the chief word so as to be

no longer distinguishable
the Arabic, and in
all

but where in a language, as in

it,

which are connected with

relations, as

the

first

and most important

verbs, are denoted

those of the person to

particles

by the addition of

which have

a meaning for themselves individually, and the tendency

to
it

which

suffixes

shews

itself

deeply seated in the language,

may

there be safely assumed that the

same may have

* In his work on the language and wisdom of the Indiana.

9.

100

OF THE ROOTS.

occurred in other positions, where the annexation of particles of

a foreign nature no longer admits of such clear

discrimination:

one

may

at

least safely

assume that the

adornment,

language, on the whole, belongs to this chief race, although

in this single point,
it

by admixture or

artificial

has adopted another and a higher character."

We

must
tlie

here preliminarily observe, that, in Sanskrit and the lan-

guages connected with

it,

the personal terminations of

verls shew at least as great a similarity to isolated pro-

nouns as in Arabic.

How

should any language,

which

expresses the pronominal relations of the verbs by syllables

annexed either at the beginning or end of the word, in the

choice of these syllables avoid, and not rather select, those

which, in their isolated

[G. Ed,
p. 110.]

state, also

express the corresponding

pronominal ideas?

By

inflexion,

F,

von

Schlegel understands the internal alteration of the sound of

the root, or
(p. 35)

the internal modification of the root, which

he

(p.

48) opposes to addition

from without.

Jo or Jw, in Greek,

comes

J/Jco-fct, 5w-(ra), So-drjaojJLeda,

But when from what

are the forms

/ixt,

a-o>,

drjaofieda,
is

but palpable external addiall

tions to the root,

which

not at
?

internally altered, or
If,

only in the quantity of the vowel

then,

by

inflexion,

an

internal modification of the root is to be understood,

the Sanskrit and

reduplication, which is supplied

itself

Greek &c. have in that case except the by the elements of the root
inflexion at all
to shew.
If,

scarce
it is
;

any

however,
5o,

Orjaoixeda is

an external modification of the root

combined with
it,

simply

because

touches

it,

with

it

expresses

a whole

then the idea of sea and continent

may

be repre-

sented as an internal modification of the sea, and vice verad. " In the Indian or Grecian P. 50, F. von Schlegel remarks
:

language every root

is

truly that

which the name says,

given for
indefinitely

and

like a living

germ;

for since the ideas of relation are

is

denoted by internal alteration, freer room

development, the

fulness

of

which

can

be

OF THE ROOTS.
extended, and
is,

101
rich.
All,

in fact, often

wondrously

howroot,

ever, which in this

still

manner proceeds from the simple

its relationship,

retains the

stamp of

adheres to

it,

and

thus reciprocally bears and supports

ever, the inference not established
;

itself."

I find,

how-

for

from the capability

of expressing ideas of relation by internal alteration of the

root,

how can

the capability be deduced of surrounding the

(internally unalterable) root indefinitely, with foreign syllables

externally added ?

What kind
<ra),

of stamp of relationship

is

there between

/z/,

Orjaofieda,

and the

[G. Ed.

p.

111.]

roots to which these significative additions are jfppended ?

We

therefore recognise in the

inflexions

of the Sanskrit

family of languages no internal involutions of the root, but

elements of themselves significative, and the tracing of the

origin of which
if

is

the task of scientific

grammar.

But even
b<?

the origin of not a single one of these inflexions could

still

traced with certainty,

of

the principle of the formation

addition,

grammar, by external

would

not,
first

for

that

reason, be the less certain, because, at the

glance, in

the majority of inflexions, one discovers at least so

much,

that they do not belong to the root, but have been added

from without.
points,

A.
to

W. von

Schlegel, also, who, in essential

assents

the above-mentioned

division

of lan-

guages,* gives us to understand, with reg ird to the so-called

Nevertheless, in his work, " Observations sur la langue
prove/ifales," p. 14, &c.,
et la litteraturr.

he gives three
les

classes, viz.

Les langues sans ancurie

affixes, tt lea

structure grammaticale,

langues qui emploient des

langues

d inflexions.

Of

the latter, he says:

"Je

pense, cependant, qu'il faut

assigner le premier rang

les

aux la' gues a

inflexions.

On pourroit

les

appeler

langues organiques, parce qu'elles renferraent un principe

Wvant de
m'ex-

developpement
priiner
artifice
ainsi,

et d'accroisseraent, et qu'elles ont seules, si je puis

et

une vegetation abondante

est,

feconde.

Le merveilkux

de ces langues

de former une immense variete de mots, et de

murquer
petit

la liaison des idees

que ces mots designent, moyennant un assiz

nombre de

syllabes qui, considerees separement, n'ont point de significuiiun

102
inflexions, that

OF THE ROOTS.
they are not modifications of the root, but

foreign

additions,

whose

characteristic

lies

in

this,

that

fG. Ed. p. 112.]

regarded,

pT

se,

they have no meaning.

In the Semitic, the appended grammatical syllables or inflexions

have no meaning, at

least in so far that they

do not,

any more than

similar state.
is

in Sanskrit, occur isolated in a completely

In Arabic, for instance, antum, and not

turn,

said for "ye";

and

in Sanskrit ma, ta,

first

and not mi,

;

ii,

are

the declinable bases of the

"

and third person

and al-Ti,
" I ate."

he

eats,"

has the same relation to TA-m, " him," that in

I eat,"

Gothic IT-a, "

has to the monosyllabic

to

ATy
i

The reason for weakening the a of the base

in the difl^erent cases of the
viz.

is

probably,

two

sister languages, the same,

i

the greater extent of the form of word with

If,

(comp.
F.

. 6.)

then, the division of languages

is
still

made by
on which

von
it

Schlegel
founded,

untenable,

on

the

reasons

is

there

is

much

ingenuity in the thought of a

natural history or classification of languages.

We
(1.

prefer,

however, to present, with A. W. von Schlegel

classes,

c), three

and distinguish them as follows

first,

languages

with monosyllabic roots, without the capability of composition,

and hence without organism, without grammar.

comprises Chinese, where
all is

This class

hitherto bare root, and the

grammatical categories, and secondary relations after the

fication,

mais qui determinent avec precision

le sens

du mot auquel

elles

sent jointes.

En

modifiant les lettres radicales, et en ajoutant

aux

racines

des syllabes dierivatives, on forme de mots derives de diverses especes, et

dt's

derives des derives.

les idees

On

compose des mots de plusieurs racines pour

Ensuite on decline les substantifs, les
et

exprimer

complexes.

adjectifs, et les

pronoms, par genres, par nombres,

par cas

on conjugue

les verbes

par voix, par modes, par temps, par nombres, et par personncs,

en employant de

memo

des desinences et quelquefois des

augmens

qui, se-

parement, ne signifient rien.

Cette metliode procure I'avantage d enoncer

en un seul mot

I'id^e principale,

souvent

deja. tres-modifiee et

tres-com-

plexe, Hvec tout son cortege d'id^es accessoires et de relations variables.

OF THE ROOTS.
main
point, can only be discovered

103

from the position of the

with mono-

roots in the sentence.*

syllabic roots,

Secondly, languages

which are capable of combination, and obtain

this

their

organism and grammar nearly in

of the

way

alone.

The
class,

chief principle

formation of words, in this

appears to

me

to lie in the

combination of verbal and pro[G.Ed.

p. 113.]

nominal
as
it

roots,

which together represent,

.

were, body and soul (Comp.

100.).

To this

class belongs
all

the Sanskrit family of languages, and

moreover

other
1.

languages, so far as they are not

3.,

comprehended under
words

and

and have maintained themselves in a condition which

it

renders

possible to trace back their forms of

to the

simplest elements.
roots,

Thirdly, languages with dissyllabic verbal

and three necessary consonants as single vehicles of

This class comprehends merely

the fundamental meaning.

the Semitic languages, and produces its grammatical forms,

not simply by combination, like the second class, but by a

mere internal modification award to the Sanskrit family

over the Semitic, which

of the roots.

We

here gladly

of languages a great superiority

not,

we do

however,

find in the use

of inflexions as syllables per se devoid of

meaning, but in

the copiousness of these grammatical additions, which are

really significative,

and connected with words used isolated

in the judicious, ingenious selection

and application

of them,

and the accurate and acute defining of various

hereby becomes possible;
of these additions to a
finally,

relations,

which

in the beautiful adjustment

harmonious whole, which bears the

roots accord-

appearance of an organized body.

109 \

ing to

The Indian Grammarians divide the properties, ( which extend only to the

tenses which

We

find this

view of the Chinese admirably elucidated in

^'JJettre

W.
la

von
na^

Humboldt's talented pamphlet,

ture des

a M. Abel Remusat, sur

et

formes grammaticales en general,

sur

le

genie de la langue

chinoise."

: ;

104
1 call

OF THE ROOTS.
the special tenses,* and to the part, pres.,) into ten

classes, all of

which we have re-discovered in the Zend

also,

and examples of which are given in the following paragraph.

[G. Ed. p. 114.]

We

shall

here give the characteristics of

the Sanskrit classes, and compare with them those which

correspond in the European sister languages.

(l.)

The

first

and sixth

class

add

^a

to the root

and

we

reserve the discussion of the origin of this and other

conjugational afiixes for the disquisition on the verb.

point of difference between the
first

The
1000
sixth

class of nearly

roots (almost the half of the entire

number) and the

lies in

class, which contains about 130 roots,

this,
(.

that the

former raise the vowel of the root by Guna

the latter retain
it
;

26), while

pure;

e,g.

^vfiT

bddhati,

"he knows,"
tundit),

from WV budh (l.) from TTH tud (6.) As

but nearly
all

If^iT tudati, "

he vexes" (comp.

^ a has no Guna,t no discrimination can

1.

take place through this vowel between the classes

and

6,

the roots which belong to either, having

^a
and

as the radical vowel, are reckoned in the first class.

e (before nasals o,
Ae/7r-o-/iev,t
. 3.)

In Greek,

corresponds to the

affix

^a

<pevy-o-fxev,
first

from

AIII,

$Yr
fall

(eA/7rov, etpvyov),

belong to the
while,
class. II
e.g.

class,

because they have

&c.,

Guna

( .

26.)

6iy-o-ixev,

6\i^-o-^ev,

under the sixth

In Latin

we

recognise, in the third conjugation,

* In Greek, the present

subjunct.
is

(indie, imper.

and

optat., the

form of tlie Greek

to

wanting in Sanskrit) and imperfect correspond

them

be-

yond which certain conjugation-signs do not extend.

present of every

In German, the

mood

corresponds.

t The accent here distinguishes the Ist cl. from the 6th. e.g. for pdtati did it belong to the 6th. cl., we should have patdti.
t

We give

the plural, because the singular, on account of abbreviation,

less perspicuous.

makes the thing

II

Sanskrit long vowels admit

Guna

only wlien they occur at the end of

the root, but in the beginning and middle remain without admixture of
tile

^ a;

so

do short vowels before double consonants.


OF THE ROOTS.
which
first
I

105

would raise to the

class, since

first,

the cognate of the Sanskrit

and sixth

we
;

regard the addition

e.g. legimua

as a

weakening of the old a

(. 8.)

and

has the same

relation to Xey-o-fjLev, that the genitive ped-is has to -noS-og

fG. Ed. p. 115.] where the Sanskrit has likewise a (^^ a through the old the leg-a-nti, In legu-nt, from pad-as). In influence of the liquid, has become u (Comp. . 66.).

German,
of

all

the primitive (strong) verbs, with the exception

some remains
time, laid

of the fourth class (No.

first class,

2.),

stand in clear
is

connection with the Sanskrit

first
is

which

here, for the

down

in

its full

extent.*

The

^a

which

added to the root has, in Gothic t, before some personal terminations, remained unchanged before others, according
;

to . 67.,

and as in Latin, been weakened to

i;

so, liait-a,
;

"I

am
a-m,

called," hait-i-s, hait-i-th, 2d pers. du. huit-a-ts

hait-i-th, hait-a-nd.

pi.

hait-

The

radical vowels

and u keep the

Guna addition, as in Sanskrit, the Guna is here weakened to

i,

only that the a which gives

(. 27.),

which, with a radical

. 70.)
:

is

aggregated into a long

(written

ei,

hence keina

= ktna,

" "

"I germinate," from KIN; hiugo, I bend," from BUG, Sanskrit mr bhuj, whence TTri bhugnn, bent." The diphthongs m, an, as in Sanskrit if and "^
from
kiina),

(. 2.),

are incapable of any

Guna

a.

The Sanskrit

radical vowel

69.) and as are e ( = ^, ^ a has, however, in Gothic,

;

experienced a threefold destiny.

It

has either remained

is

nnaltered in the special tenses, and

lengthened in the
.

preterite, except in reduplicate roots (i.e. to d, see

69.)

have already,

in

my Review

of

Grimm's Grammar, expressed th

identical

conjecture that the a of forms like haita, liaitam, huilaima, &c. does not

belong to the personal termination, hut

Sanskrit 1st and 6th classes
;

is

with the

^ a of the
Guna

but I was not then clear regarding the

in the present in all roots with rowels capable of

for Crit. of Litt.,

Guna.

(See Ann. Rl^>

We

point

Book II. pp. 282 and 259.) make frequent mention of the Gothic alone as the true startingand light of German Grammar. The application to the Hi^h Ger-

man

will hereafter present itself.

106
thus,
e.g. far-i-th,

OF THE ROOTS.

"he wanders," answers

and
fdr, "

to

"mfn charati
to ^r^TT

[G. Ed. p. 116.]

(. 14.),

he wandered,"

chachdra
tenses

or,

secondly, the old a shews itself in the special

to
f,

weakened

but retained in the monosyllabic singu(.

lar of the preterite: so that here the stronger a

8.)

corre-

sponds to the weaker

the
<;

in the

same way
a.
. 87.,

that, in the first ease,

'STT fl)

does to the short

The

root

'5?^

ad, " to

eat," in Gothic,

according to

forms

AT;

hence, in the
third fate

present, ita;

in the sing, pret.,

at, as-f, at.

The
is
/,

which

befalls

the a of the root in Gothic

a complete

extirpation, and compensation by the

weaker

which
i. e.

is

treated like an original

special tenses
it

?,

existing in the Sanskrit

?,

in the

receives

Guna by

and in the pret.

sing,

by

(. 27.),

but in the pret.

pi. it is

preserved pure.

To

this

class belongs the Kll^^ " to germinate,"

mentioned above,

pres. keina, pret. sing, kain, pi. kin-um.

The corresponding
born"
(see
(jripxim,
:

Sanskrit root
.

is

apT /". " to produce," " to be

87.)

the same relation, too, has greipa, graip,

" to seize," to
7r>T

from GRIP,
other hand,
original
i,

grahh (Veda form)

bait,

on the
has an
" to

BIT,
so,

" to exists

bite," * (beita,

bitum),

which

in

Sanskrit (comp. f*^

bliid,

cleave"); just
(2.)

F'lT, "to know," Sanskrit

f^

vid.

The

fourth class of Sanskrit roots adds to them the

ya,

syllable

and herein agrees with the special tenses qf

it

the passive; and from the roots which belong to

chiefly neuter verbs, as e.g.

spring

rT^frT nasyati, " he perishes,"

to

Their number amounts altogether

about 130. The German

has preserved one unmistakeable remnant of this diss, in

those strong verbs which again lay aside, in the preterite, the
syllable ya

(weakened to

yi),

which
;

is

added to the root in the

va}is-t/a(Zer\d

[G. Ed. p. 117.]

special tenses

e.g.

j^^^MOS^y

ucs-yann, " crescebant,^' Vendidad S. p. 257), " cresco," vahsyi-th, ' crescit," pret. vohs.

* Occurs only with the prep, and, and with the meaning " to
but corresponds to the Old High

scold,'

German

root

BIZ,

*'

to bite."

OF THE ROOTS.
(3.)

107
add the personal

The secoud, third, and seventh

classes

termination direct to the root ; but iiTthe cognate European

languages, to facilitate the conjugation, these classes have

mainly passed over

(as a remnant of
it-a-m,

to the first class

tlie

e.

g. ed-i-mus,
e-/,

not ed-mus

old construction
issra-mi*

es-iis),

Gothic

Old High German

not iz-m^, answering

to the Sanskrit

^im

ad-mas.

^^ ad

belongs, leaves

The second class, to which the root without any characteristic

addition, with

Guna

of the vowels capable of

Guna
;

before

light terminations,
e.g. ^fir Smi,

which must be hereafter explained hence,

^JTff

corresponding to
etfju

imas,

as in

Greek

to

tfiev.

It

contains not

from \i "to go," more than about

exhibits roots,

seventy roots, partly terminating in consonants, partly in

vowels.
In this and the third-class, the

Greek
4>Y

almost entirelv ending in vowels, as the above mentioned

'I,

4)A,

rXO

iyid-di).

AQ, 2TA, GH,

(e^i/i),

AY, &c.

To

the consonants the direct combination with the conso-

nants of the termination has become too heavy, and 'E2 alone
(because of the facility of
a/i,

ar) has remained in the San-

skrit second class, as tlie corresponding root in Latin, Lithua-

nian, and

German.

Gothic and High

to the second

German class, /, DA,

Hence, ^f^fT a^/i, cot/, Lithuan. esti, est, int. In the Latin there fall also

STA, FLA, FA, and NA;

to

and also

QUI, is the root, which, in Gothic, appears as QUAT, weakened to QUIT, with the accretion of a T. FER and J EL {JUL) have preserved

in-quam, whence

QUA

weakened

some persons

of the ancient construction.*

is

[G. Ed.

p. II8.3

The

third class

distinguished from

tlie

second by a syllable

of reduplication in the special tenses, and has maintained

itself

under this form

in

Greek

also,

and Lithuanian.

In

Fire roots of the second

class introdnce in Sanskrit,

3^ t,

between the conas Oft^Ol rod-i-

sonants of the root and the personal termination, an

miy
t
'

weep," from ^5^ rud.

is

can, however,

no longer believe that the

of the Latin third conjag.

connected with thb

*;

as there

is

scarce

any doabt of its

relationship with the

9 a of the ver^' copious

first class.

108
Sanskrit
it

OF THE ROOTS.
comprehends about twenty roots
Lithuanian dudu;
" I beget,"
;

e.g.

^^fi?

dndami,
(. 16.)
;

StBooixi,

^^^\^

dadhdmi, ridrjm
yi-yv-o-fj.ai.

inrf^ jajanmi,
class, of

comp. which

The

seventh

about twenty-four roots, introduces, in the

is

special tenses, a nasal into the root,

extended before
e.g. f^rrf^T

the light personal terminations to the syllable na;

bhinadmi, "

cleave,"

f^r^fl hhindmas, "

we

cleave,"

The
114 G.

Latin has kept the weaker form of this nasalization, but has
further added to the root the affix of the
Ed.);
first class (p.

hence findo, find-i-mus.

considered roots, like

From the Greek come to be here MA0, AAB, IF, in which the inserted
on
in the word, with the preis

nasal has been repeated further

fi

xed

a,

and, like the Latin Jind-i-mus,

first class;

connected with the

affix

of the

thus, fxavd-dv-o-iiev, Kaix/S-av-o-fxev,

6iyy-av-o-fxev.
(4.)

The

fifth class,

of about thirty roots, has nu; and the

oir

eighth, with ten roots, which, excepting

all

kri, " to

make,"
addi-

terminate in
:

tt

n or

7^ n,

has u for

its characteristic

tion

the u, however, of these two classes

is

lengthened
supplied by

before the light terminations by Guna, which in the corre-

sponding Greek appended syllables, vv and

lengthening the v
'snrftfiT
;

v, is

thus,

e.g. SeiKvvfxi, SeiKvvjxev,

as in Sanskrit

dp-n6-mi, " ad-ip-is-cor," ^TSIW9 dp-nu-mas, " adipisei-

mur."

An example

of the eighth class is

K^

tan, " to

extend,"

whence TR^fi? tan-6-mi=Tav-lj-ixt, TT'^'ra tan-u-mas=rav-v-fj.e^. With the ^ u, v, of the eighth class, is probably connected
[G. Ed. p. 119.]

the V in

some Gothic strong verbs, where,

however,

it

adheres so firmly to the root, that, in a

it

German
it is

point of view,

must be regarded
strong verbs, the

as a radical.

Hence

not dropped in the preterite, and receives, in the special

tenses, like
class
;

all

affix of

the Sanskrit

first

e.g. saihva,* " I see," sahv, " I saw."

(5.)

The ninth

class adds

*tt

nd to the root, which syl-

lable, before

heavy terminations, instead of being shortened

*
of. .

now

80.

consider the v of saihva and similar verbs as purely euphonic, and Latin forms like cogno, Ibiqiio, stinguo.

OF THE ROOTS,
to
"^

109

na, replaces the

is

heavy

^rt

a by the lighter
E.g. from

\i

(%

6.\

and

thus weakened lo

"q^ ni.

mrid, "to

crush/" (comp. mordeo)

comes

n^jirf^

mndndmi, v.^^iws mridthe

;

nimas.

In this

is

easily perceived
vrj^Mt

relationship with
ij.

Greek formations
jiev.

in

(i'/i/)

vdfxev

e.

Sajivyj/jLi,

^dfiva-

As

a, ,

and

o,

are originally one, formations like rifx-voonly that they have wandered into the

fiev

belong to this

class,

more modern w- conjugation at a remote period of antiquity; for more lately vew would not have become vw from irjfjj.
(6.)

The tenth

class adds ^ti

aya to the root, but

is dis-

tinguished from the other classes in this farther important

point, that this affix is not limited to tlie special tenses:

the

final

a of ^nj aya

is

peculiar to
all

them, but

ay

extends, with very few exceptions, to

tions of the root.

the other forma-

All causals,

and many denominatives,

always accomvowel and of a

follow this class, and, indeed,

from every root a causal can

is

be formed by the addition ^sm ay, which

panied by

Guna

of the middle vowel of the root capable of

final

Guna, or by Vriddhi of every radical

n.iddle a belonging to

the root;

e.g. ^^;^f^{ led-nya-ti

"he

makes to know," from

to hear,"

from

ysi

f^ vid; ^TRTTfiT srdv-aya-ti, "he makes We recognise, in German, the affix snu
two shapes
:

^TT aya at least in

in the one

[G. Ed.

p. 120.]

the

first a,

in the other the

;

last, is lost,

and in the

latter case

so that I have no longer any scruple in y has become i tracing back Grimm's first and third conjugation of the weak

form to a common

origin.

According

to all probability,

how-

ever, the verbs with the affix 6 also (as

Old High German

mandn, " to mention,"

class,

" to

make

to

think,") belong to this

regarding which we will speak further under the verb. The Old High Germtrn gives e as the contraction of a + iy
. 78.),

(see
ai,

but retains

its

more firmly than

the Gothic
a.

its

which, in several persons, sinks into a simple

Compare

Gothic haba, habam, haband, with Old High

hapemea, hnpenf.

German hapim,
is

Very remarkable, however,

the concurthe Latin

rence of the Prakrit with the Old Hi'>h

German and

110

OF THE ROOTS.
it in like manner has Compare Sanskrit JTT^Tnft? m^fn mdnemi* Old High

of the 2d conj. in this point, that

contracted the affix ^nt ayatoTie. mdnaydmi, " I honour," Prakrit

German, var-manem,
[G. Ed.
p. 121.]

" I despise,"' Latin

moneo
OLD HIGH GERMAN.
LATIN.

SANSKRIT.

JTRTUfn mdnaydmi
jniT'^ftr

^wf^ mdrtimi
^^m^S mdnesi
JT'^f^

var-man^m
manes
manet

moneo

mdnayasi
.

JTR^fiT mdnayati
Wl'^PlTH^

mdnedl

man mond

-s

mdnaydmns mmv^ mdnemha

JTTimi

manemes movemiis
manit
monetis

W(Wr^ mdnayatha
>?T^^'PtT

mdnMha
mdn^nfi

mdnayanti

*TT?!lfTT

manent

monent

In regard to those
first
affix,

weak

verbs, which have suppressed the

'^ixf

vowel of the Sanskrit

aya,

and give therefore ya as

we

will

here further recall attention to the forms iyn

ijye),

which occasionally occur in Old High German and

Anglo Saxon, whose connection with WH aya is to be traced thus, that the semi-vowel y has become hardened to g, (comp. . 19.), and the preceding a weakened to i. In Greek,
the cognate verbs to the Sanskrit of the tenth class are to
*
is,

am

not at present able to adduce this verb from the edited texts

it

however, certain, that mdnaydmi mi\\\s dialect can have no other sound

but mdnSmi.
class,

The conjugation
"
I

is

supported by other examples of this

as chintemi,

think'' (from chintaydmi),

nivMemi (from
In the third

niv6-

day ami).

In the plural the termination

mha

is

nothing else than the appere. pi.,

pended verb substantive (Sansk. smas, " we are").

together with mdnenti the forms mdnaanti and mdnanti arc also admissible.

The Indian Grammarians assume

for the Sanscrit a root

won,

*'

to

honour": more probably, however, the verb, for which this root is supplied, is only a denominative from mdtia, " honour" ; and this substantive
itself

a derivation from 7nan, "to think," whence

avaman, "to

despise,"

as in

Old High German

var-MAN

(by Otfrid, fir-MON).

is

Tlie root,

theref"ore,

which

is

contained in

varman6m

identical

with the Gothic

MAN {man, " I mean," " I think," pi. munum

belongs, also, the Latin monere,&s, " to

manon), the radical o

(see, also, , 3.)
;

for

To this class make to think" (Old High German a of which we explain by the principle of . G6.
see
.

66.).

while the

of memin-i

is

a weakening of the original a,

explained

by

. 6.

OF THE ROOTS.
be looked for in those in
oco, ecu, oo)
;

Ill
in Latin, besides the
-1th

2d conjugation compared above, most verbs of the 1st and

also belong to this affinity.

We

shall recur to

them when
of the mul-

speaking of the verb.

109^ In order to adduce single

of the final letters

examj^^les

tiform construction of the roots, let us

;

examine the order

only such examples
several
sister lanis

but

we

will select

as are

common
The

to

the Sanskrit and

guages.

greatest forbearance,

however,
all

requisite,

as an authenticated comparison of

that admits of

com-

parison would easily swell to a book, which shall hereafter

be devoted to
(1.)

this

subject*
:

Roots ending with a vowel

are,

[G, Ed.
(.

p. 122.]

"There
roots in

as has

been already remarked

105.),

no

w a;

but roots in

^ d are numerous.
;

Thus
also,

T[f gd,\

" to go,"^ contained in

the Latin navi-ga-re

perhaps,

in fati-gnre, the first

fessus
;

member

of which belongs to fafiscor,

to i^njfri JogdmU
labials

in Greek,

{Siprjfii

answers

and
;

rests

on the frequent interchange of gutturals and

ga-thv6, " a street," (see p. 102. G. Ed.)
;

Gothic
ga-tu,

Zend >^ms^

"a "I

place," (nom. .tv?>^Jk

grit

us

Old High

German

ga-m,
con-

go,"

= nnfir _/a-^4-mi
(p.

not therefore,

as
but,

Grimm

jecturts

S6S),

by syncope from gangu,

with a more

ancient and regular foundation, only with a suppression ot

the Sanskrit syllable of reduplication, introduced, therefore

from the third into the second

Latin,
std-s,

class (see p. 117.

Bido-nev.
Tlius,

G.

Ed.), as in

da-mus answering to
std-f.

also,

sld-m,

in like

manner, with suppressed reduplication,

(rttrryjfju),

corresponds to T-imj-fu (for

root

and to the Sanskrit

wr

sfLd,

which

is

irregularly inflected, fimfi? tishthdmi.

for tasthdmU tasthdsi, tasthdii.

flf^ftr tishthasi, iwwftf tishthati,

Somewhat

that pertmns to this snbject

have already pnt together

very concisely at the end of

my

Sanscrit Glossary.
classes described in ^. 109.

t The attached cyphers denote the

112
which
will

OF THE ROOTS.
be

more

closely considered

hereafter.

The

Latin, in root and inflexion,

most resembles the Old High

its j^AUfen^JfeV

German

the Zend, however, in

. 53.),

hlstdmi* (for

sisfdmi, see

appears in a genuine Greek dress.

Ob-

serve, also, the ^^e^;oAj(3A5/ rathaesfdo,

" warrior," which

occurs

so

often

in

the
s

Zend-Avesta, properly "chariot

as

stander,"

with o for

the sign

of

the

nominative.

How,

then, in Old

extended

form
"
I

of

High German, comes from STA the the root STANT, whence the preand
preterite
stuonf,

sent stantu,

stand,"

"

or

he

stood";
will

for

which the Gothic has sfanda, stoth?

We
obd,

here only preliminarily remark, that

we have

served in Zend also, in some roots terminating in

inclination
to

an

connect themselves with a <-sound.

Auyjs snd, " to

Thus

we
" to

find,

from

wash,"

" to purify,''

(Sansk. ^T snd,
S. p. 233,
;

bathe,'')

whence

sndta, " purified,"

in

Vend.

frequently )<^^iM<^Mi)MM^^ fra-snddhayen " lavenV

da, "to lay," (Sans. VT dhd, p. 118
nidaifhyiinn,
"

from au^

G.

Ed.),

we

find /-^^^CajAi^j;

deponant

"

(as

Vendidad

S. pp.

205 and 206,

i-^^^GjAj^jy

^9fJ
:

;05^>' huski zeme nidaithyann,

"in
"

siccd

terra deponant ")

[G. Ed. p. 123.]

from the same root we

form, Ai^JuuGAu^jy

find the

imperative
depona-

ni-dd-thdma,

mus

" (Vend. S. p. 208,

aj^Wau

9^yAj^

^'^jM^Mjh
naraiim

^-^^j^j aj^

M^jM<3JM^jf

xs^

As^Aj^

AJ/>WAJ

kva

isritanahm

tanum bardma Ahura mazda kva niddthdma, "Quo homlnum Of the Germortuorum corpus feramus, ubi deponamus'?). manic we will further remark, that the root n md, " to measure " (cf. fxe-rpov), has connected itself with a /-sound, and
forms, in Gothic,

MAT,

present

mUa

(. 109*. i.).

^^ jnd,
(gnarus)

"to be acquainted with," "to know," TNO,

GNA

Old High German

CHNA

(.87.);

whence

chnd-ta,

"I knew,"

annexing the auxiliary verb

direct, as in Latin {g)no-vi.

To

I believe I

may deduce

this

form from the 3d

:

pers. pi.

J^^Cfe,*y>**
tlie

hiitenti (cf.

lorawt) in the V. S. p. 183

more on

this

head under

verb.

OF THE ROOTS.
the special form, '^rr^rf^Jfindmi, for ^TRlfK ^n^-n^-mt,

113

may

be-

Old Hi^h German CHANN {kanru chan^ "I know," see .94.. kunnum, chunnum, "we
Icns the Gothic root

KANN,

know,'" see .66.).

uiT^

dhmd, "to blow," alters

itself in

the

special forms to VH dham, Latin FLA, according to the second class (. 109 i), Old High German PLA (. 12. 20.),

whence
tioned

pld-ta, "flavL"

As

in Sanskrit,

from the above-men-

VT dham, comes

"a vein";
blijth,

nominal base Vf^ft dhamani. so may the Gothic base BLOTHA (nom. ace.
the

"blood") come here also under consideration. on to roots in

p. 107.
/,

We

fjass

and have

to

remark that the root

mentioned at
in

German.

We find

G. Ed., ^ i, " to go," is not unknown it in the Gothic imperative hir-i, "come
I believe, too, that in
i

here*"; du. hir-yats; pi. hir-yith.

the

irregular preterite iddya, "

went," the

alone can be asa^i-ti,

sumed
(from
sri,

as the root.
Ffir eii,

In Zend occurs j^jajas

. 2S. 41.),

"he
ei-tu

goes'"

according to

Lithuau.

fv

with the prep. T7T uf, "to raise itself"; hence, ^fidrf uchchhrita, " raised," "high"; compare cre-sco, cre-vi (see . 21.), Old High German SCRIT, " to step," with the
addition of a
t,

" to go,"

as in the case of mat, from

Jfid:

perhaps
"

the Latin gradior, as well as cresco, might be here included,

the

Guna form

of the vowel, as in ^^rflT sray-a-ti,

i\^

he

goes," being

observed.
;

smU

" to

smile," Old
^)ilfri
(. 47.),

High
Goth.
vif hhi,

German

SMIL

ift^prf, "t/j love,"

Zend

friyo, " I love"

(. 87.),

compare

fm priya,

" dear."
feiyaii/

"to fear,"
Jiya, "
I

f^irfir bibhi-mi.

"I fear"; Lithuan.

;

Gothic

hate"^ {fiyais,
" I

fya\th\ fiyands, "foe"

Old High Geranswers to

man
the

viem ov fiem,

hate"

the

Greek

<pe^-o-yiai

the Sanskrit reduplication oi bibhemi ;

so that, contrary to
prefix,
left

common

rule, the aspirates

have remained in the

but
only

m
(3

the base itself have become medials, and this has

as the whole root, as in Sanskrit da-d-mus, "

we give,"
p. 124.]

for da-dd-mos, J/-$o-/zey.

Perhaps,

also,

[G. Ed.
?,

^lA,

4>i$onou, is to

be referred to the roots in

I

so that an

;;

114

OF THE ROOTS.

unorganic dental affix would be to be assumed. si, " to lie," " to sleep," with irregular Guna in the middle

hence

sS-tS

German
p. 115.
a-tiy

= Kel-rat. ^ hri, " to be ashamed " Old High HR U, " to repent " {hriw-u, hrou, hru-umh, see
;

G.

Ed.).

Of roots

in u,

"5;

dm, "

to run," 'JwfTT drav-

"he runs" may

furnish, through the

Guna
/x

form, the
to derive

Greek
its

Spd-crKo>, Si-8pa-(TK0i,

which appears hence

:

a with suppression of the digamma

the

of dpeno,

how-

ever,

Bpeix-o-fiev, 5joe/x-e-Te, &c.,

might pass as a hardening of the ^ v (. 63.), and therefore represent most truly the

forms drav-d-mas, drav-a-tha.

plu, "to go,"

"to swim,**

"to float" (^^plava, "a ship"), Latin

TtXeu), ttAoco is

FLU.
if

The Greek
the old u had

again not to b^ so regarded as

been corrupted to
of the

e or o, but 7r\e(f )a), 7r\o{F)ui supply the place

Guna form
:

in plav-i (of the middle voice), 3d pers.

TrAeucrco,
;

plav-a-tS

the future

the v having the

I

Guna (.
(p.

26.),

answers to irt^ plo-shy^

Lithuan. plaukiu, "

" to

swim," with
98.

a guttural added, as in Latin flac-si from fluv

G.

Ed.).

Old High German VLUZ,

flow,"

pre-sup-

poses the Gothic

addition, with

FLUT
all

(.87.);
final

with the favourite dental

are
so

which

vowels

commonly
Gothic
"hearer,"

invested.

-^ sru,

" to

hear,"

KAY

(. 20.,

21.),

HLIU-MAN (nominative
with weakened
&r,

hliuma),
;

"ear,"

as

Guna
also,
'*

(. 27.)

with regard to the kl for

TsftTEft

compare,

dunis
I

with

srdni,

f.

" hip.")

Lithuan. klausau,
hear,"
is

hear."

Perhaps
:

erudio, as " to

make

to be referred to this class

is little satisfactory.

the derivation from e

and rudis

Anquetil introduces a Zend

erodi, celebre, {kKvto^), wliich I

have not yet found in the

ori-

ginal text, but

meet with the causal form

"^"^v^ifti

j9a3^^a>jui7ji>

Irdvay&mi (^9X\sk.
(V. S. p. 38).

"I speak," "recite" The Old High German, scrirumh, "we have
sr&vaydmi),

exclaimed," gives
the form srdv

SCRIR

as the root,

and

rests probably
i

on

(. 20.),

with a thinning of the d to

(.

66.)

the present and sing, preterite, however, have lost the r (serin

OF THB ROOTS.
for scrim, screi for screir), like the

115
kAt-o-o*, KeKhfj-Ko,

Greek

&c.

The Latin damo, however, has the same

that mare has to ?nft vAri, " water"

relation to y^m^sran

(. 63.),

and

dpcfj.

to

glorify"

from J dm, (M^^pv^ hunuta, " he celebrated," V. S. p. 39.), is probably the root of the Greek u/xvoj {vfj.{e)vo\ which I do not like to regard as an irregular derivative from vSui.
drav,
> /iii\

" to run."

"to extol," " to

\pu

This root is the verbal "to purify," PUms. parent of the wind and fire, which are both represented
^'

as pure,

as suflSx) is
(neut.
is

[G. Ed. p. 125,] xf^^pavana (with Guna and ana the wind,*' and the corresponding Gothic FON-d
.

nom. ^nccfon, see

116.) is "fire/*

which in Sanskrit
suffix.

called ttRoS pav-a-ha, with Vriddhi

and aka as

The

relation of

FONA

to xi^fTporana
;

resembles that of the

the loss of the syllable ^ va Latin mAlo from mavolo The Greek is replaced by the lengthening of the a (. 69.).
irvp

and Old High German

with weakened

VIURA
(.27.),

(nom. ace

viur),

the

latter
fall

Guna

and ra as

suffix,

both

to the root,

^u,

-^ bru,

"to speak," Zend

;

^^ mru

{e.g. ^\xi)^ mrad-m, " I spoke," V. S. p. 123.)

the Greek

pe(F)oi rests

as often happens, lost the

(cf.

also

pect),

on the Guna form ^^ftfi? brav-i-mi, and has, former of two initial consonants pevci, and mo, with s sni, ** to flow"). The

0!d High German

sm brav,
a

SPRAH,

or

^SPRAHH

(sprihhu,

'I

speak," sprah, "I spoke") appears to have proceeded

from

by hardening the
I

akin to the p.

(future bilsu, "

^ v (see . 19.), and prefixing an bhu, "to be," Zend bu, Lithuan. BU will be"), Latin FU, Greek $Y. Pro-

bably,

also,

BY, in

irpecr-^v-St

ttpea^vrriq,
, 18.);

&c.,

is

only

another form of

this root (of.

so that irpey would

irpo
(

have

to

be regarded as a preposition from

n
.

pro,)
96.).

essentially distinguished only

by a euphonic

(cf.

Moreover, the base

wpecr/Su

has a striking resemblance to

before."
to

n^ prabhu (excelsus, axigustwi), literally, " being In Old High German pirn or bim corresponds
12

the

116
Sanskrit
H^riffr

OF THE ROOTS.
bhavdmi: more exact, however,
is

the corre-

spondence in the plural of pir-u-mh,

"sumus," hhav-a-tha, "
also,
estis" (see . 19.).

pir-u-t, to bhav-d-mas,

To

this class belongs,

PU,

"to dweir' (pu-ta, "I dwelt"), as the Sanskrit

^w
la

7^05 **to

dwell," in

German VAS, V^AS,

>:jj)hu,

has become sfyn.

Sanskrit, too, from

" to be," comes the substantive

bhav-ana "house," as place of being.

" I build,"

may

The Gothic baua, be regarded as the causal of the idea " to

(. 19.):

be," like the

Latin facio

its

conjugation answers

also to >n^infT bhdvaydmi, "I

krit,

make

to be," v/hich, in

Pra-

may

sound bhdvemi, bhdvesi,

bhdveli

(Gothic baua,

bauais, bauait).

See

p. 121

G. Ed.

Sanskrit roots ending in

diphthongs (^ e,
roots in ysn d.

^6, ^

di; there are

no roots in i^ du)

follow in their formations, in

many

respects, the analogy of

We

abstain from adducing examples of

little

them, as they also offer

(2.)

occasion for comparison.

Roots terminating with a consonant.

p. 126.]

We

shall

give

[G. Ed.

only a few examples, in which we compare

in the order,
a,
i,

roots with the

same vowel, and proceed

.
1.

u.

According to
to

we do

not allow the vowel

^n and ^ri

belong to the root.

Long

radical vowels before a final

consonant are rare ; and the majority of them are probably

not original.

The most numerous

nant has a medial

class of roots

ending with a conso-

^ a.

So

W^^'^' vach,
S. p. 124),

(m^S^^m adda,
(.

"dixit,""

Vend.

Zend ^xil^ vach Greek En for FEU

14.),

Latin
"

VOC, Old High German, WJH,

pret.

WAG

(ki-

wahu,
ira

mentionem facio"

ki-wuoh

pi.

ki wuogumes).

prachh,

Zend

,Mg7g(5)

peres,

Gothic

FBAH;

pres ^^sifiT
.

prichchhdmi, i^Mi^3(^<^<i peresdmi, fraiha for friha {see

82.

and

109^.1.); the Latin

ROG

{rogo, inlerrogo)

appears to

be abbreviated from

FROG.

J^i pat,

"to

fall,"

"to

fly,"

Zend
"

^ajq) pat,

"to fly" (Vend.

trees grow").

S. p. 257. ^^^^aj^

^u^^

'>>aj;*o

/">.> ^*V5(5^>

aj7a>7>
fly,

y^^AJo) yatfrd vayo paiann urvara ucsyann,

where birds

One

sees clearly from this

OP THE ROOTS.
that, in

117
Trrrjfn,

Greek,

trtTrra,

Treraw, Trerdo/xai, TTerofiai,

Sea-

belong to a
proBpetes,

common

root IIET

Latin
for

PET,

pefo, im-peto,

penna
or,

by assimilation

pet-na.

In

Gothic be

FATH,
looked

with the vowel weakened,

FITH, might

To the latter corresponds, according to .87., Old High German FED, in ved-ara, "feather,*' ^^" vad, " to speak," Latin VAD^ contained in vas, vad-is. From
for.

^ vad
tains

proceeds the abbreviated form

{vSco, veoi, u5>7f).

ud, to

which per87.,

'YA

The Old High German gives

.

fK4Z

{var-tudzu "maledico"), with z for d, according to

tj

and the vowel of the base lengthened, as in

according to the tenth
prep,
fir ni,

class.

" to set oneself

^ down
""

<;mrn vddaydmi,

sad "
Latin

to sink, with the

SED, SID,
Gothic
an,

sido,

sedeo;

Greek 'EA,
"
I

'IZ, eSo^,

eBpa,

fCofiai;

(. 87.), sita.

sit" (p. 116 G. Ed.).

^
I

SAT

"to blow,"
"to beget,"

"to breathe,"

^H<Ji anila,

"wind," Gothic AN', usana,

"I expire,'' cf. Zend yAi^ zan (.

*rilf^ Jajanmi,

avefxag, " animus.''

58.), j^jus^aj^

w^^

Jan,

zazdmi, "

beget," Sanskrit

gigno, genus), Gothic

Greek TEN, Latin GEN {yiyvofiai, yeioy, KIN, "to germinate,"" (p. 116 G. Ed.)
(.66.).

kunU

**

gender"
this

WJ^ kar

(^A-W',
the

e.g.
fifth

omfir Nardil.
class;
e.g.

**facit":

root,

in Zend, follows

jjoj'^Ajyg^g^ kerenaoiti (. 41.), "facit,'"' wj^'-^^y^^j^ kerenaot, "fct//,"

-K2^/y'c3 kerenuidhi, "fac^^;

Old High German karaLatin

for c
creo,

uan

or garauan,

*'

to

prepare";

cura (cf ?r^

kuru, "foe""), ceremonia, and with

Kpaivo), Kpd-Tos
;

(. 14.),

paro

Greek

with

tt,

irpda-eo), irpaK-aoi,

[G. Ed.

p. 127.]

Trpdy-fxa,

where the guttural appears

e.g.

to be a hardening of the

(.

19.),

of

'S(^[f^

kurvanti, "faciunt " (from

kur-u(. 57.),

-anti).

W^

vah, "to drive," " to carry," Zend_^Aj^ vaz

ayo^, "

Latin
fo-yo^.
.
50.

VEH, Greek
Tg^
and
svas,
22.

wagon," as bearer, carrier, for

cf.

"to

breathe,"

spiro,

according
the

to

irf'^^grah, "to take":

is

original
this the

form, occurring in the Vedas,

tm

grabh.

To

Zend form belongs, according

to

the

tenth

class,

and.

Il8

OF THE ROOTS.

r,

indeed, so that the v^bh appears before vowels as

but
:

before

as

<d

p.

Thus we read

in the Vend. S. p. 155

A5<^j^

JSPMM nsw JM^ ;o^jA5i^A}7>j^Au ashdum

yizi

ndit

uzvarezydt j/6 narem dgereptem dgeurvaySit^, kd hS

asti

chitha?
tenet),

"Pure I
qutBnam

si

non

dimittit, qui

hominem captum

capit

(i. e.

ei est

pcena"?

In the European sister languages

:

I believe I recognise this root in three forms

the Gothic

GRIP
nues,

has been already mentioned

(.

(p.

116 G. Ed.), likewise

into their te-

prehendo

92. note)

by changing the medials

KAEn

also

seems to belong to
" thief."

this class, Gothic

HLIF,

" to steal,"
yp7^os,

hliftus,

Finally, also, in Greek, yp7TT0,

isolated,

"the net," stands quite

and appears to

me
tiie

to be related to
i.

the Indian ^pr grabh, by changing

ds,

the a into

^^
^cr-rat

"to

sit,"

Greek 'H2 a remnant of

^STOT ds-ti
el fit

second
. 109*. 3.

class,
;

terminating in a consonant to be supplied

at

answers exactly to
stands for rjanai, as

(middle
(San-

voice),

and hence

fjnai

for

ea-fxi

skrit asmi).
orj*

vr^^

bhrdj,

"to

shine,'*'

Zend jg^p

herez{^. 58).

jgAii barez, whence the part. pros.

berezans,

nom. m. "W-^J^g-l
quently occurs.

" spkndens,^'' "

^^-^ J^-* berezant, aUmr very freway for the Old

our Prac^<. The

This Zend form prepares the

root

High German

PERAH,
$AEr
(.

whence

PERAH-TAX, nom.

perah-t, "fulgidus.^"' Tothisroot belongs, also,

Greek language gives

[G. Ed.
p. 128.]

20.)

a cognate root, and thus

points to a Sanskrit short a for the long

one.
chhid,

The cognate

root in Latin

is

FLAG, fiagro.
(.

fw\
14.):
this

"to cleave," SCID, scind-i-mus=chhindmas

2XIZ, perhaps also 2KIA, a-KiSvrjfxt, &c. belong place tlie form is more genuine, and the ideas,
;

to

too, of

* Anqnetil
t Cf.
'I.

translates,

" Si

celui qui

a commit lAguereflS ne

reconnoit

pas safaute quelle sera sa punition."

p.

1281.

Note*
with
t.

The h

(in the sense of ch) corresponding to the^', y, accords

. 87.,

l>ui is

mortover I'avourcd by the following

OF THE HOOTS.
clearing, dispersing,

TO
kindred ones.
the

separating,
separate,"

are
if

The
is

Gothic
to the

SKAID,
root.

"to

relationship

certain, has a stiffened

Guna, so that
to
. 87.,

ai appears to

belong

According

however, the Gothic

form should be
for

SKAIT and
f^^
vid,

the Old

High German

SKEIZ
vid,

8EEID.
erSco,

" to

know," Zend

_^^

'lA

Gothic VID, Old High German, T'lZ; in the Latin VID,

and in
"

" I
to

see," the seeing is regarded as something,

which makes
according to

know," and the conjugation of video

Thus,
also,

is causal,

p.

121 G. Ed.

another root, signify-

ing " to know," namely

with the prep,

hudh, has, in Zend, gained the

to

meaning "to see."* According ni, VID, in Zend,

thic,

the tenth

class,

and

signifies

"to
.

summon"

( J^;oi^AS2;t)jujy niva^dhay^mi, "invocor see

VIT

receives through the prep, in the

invnit,

In Go28.) meaning "to

adore"

{inveita,
dis'
;

invitum).

f^

dis,

"to

shew,''

hence ^^^.majaj^oa frada^sayd, "thou shewest" (Vend. S. p. 123), Greek AIK, with Guna BeiKvvfUf

Zend MJ^

according to the
*

fifth class

Latin DJC, in
causa
).

dico, as it

were,

to point out,"

and

dicis ( diets

In Gothic, the rule

this root,

laid

down

in

87. requires the

signifies

form TIH. and

combined with ga,

taih,

"to announce" (ga-feiha, ga-

. 82.). On the other hand, in taikus, " sign," the law for the transposition

ga-taihum, for ga-tihum, according to

of letters is violated,
"alive,"

w\^
live,"

gywenu "I

jiv, "life;*" Lithuanian gywa-s, gywata "life" Gothic QUIVA,

it

nom.
as his

quivs, "alive";

Latin F/F, as

appears from QUIV,

from tviginii. Zend has dropped either the vowel or the v of this
duis (Sansk.

from

fs^

dwis), viginti

The
root.

Hence, eg.

xiii_Jva,

nom.

vpii,jv6,

"living," (V. S.

p. 189);

<^iiAj^^jj> hu-jitay6, "bonam vitam hahentes'''' (1. c. p. 222), from J^.^i> hu-Jiti. From Ji, the root, would become, with Guna, jaydmi, on which rests the Greek ^aw, the j having

and

Vide Gram.

Crit. p. 328.

120
fallen out
(. 14.)
;

or THE ROOTS.
but
fBiog

also belongs to this root,

and

finds

a medium of comparison with

roots with u,

jfi^Jiv, in the Latin vivo.

"^

ruch,

"to shine" and

Of

rud,

"to weep/'

may

serve as examples; the former, in Zend,

is ^^^-^^ radch,

(. 28. 32.),

and follows the tenth

and

class, e.g. j^JAJ^^AiyM^As^

[G. Ed.

p. 129.]

raochay^iti, "splendet!"

In Latin correspond

LUC,

luc-s, luceo (. 20.)

RUD
;

the Greek has, in both

roots, replaced the r

{dfKpiKuKt], KvKotpuig)
vevci, &c.,

by

/,

and presents, for comparison,

AYK
Aas^o

and

AYZ

to the former, \v^vo^, Au)^that,

has the same relation

in

Zend,

jk\5>

tafnu-s, " burning," has to the root q)aj^ tap

(. 40.)

We
The
27.),

must assign XevKog

Gothic gives

also,

with Guna, to the root AYK.

LUH for
like

LUK,

according to

87.

whence,
" to

with the original, or with weakened

spring forms
lauhmdniy

Guna

(. 26.,

" lightning,"

lauhatyan,

lighten," liuhath, "light."

Without Guna, and preserving

the old smooth letter, stands lukarn (theme, lukarna, neut.),

*'

lamp," rather isolated.

A root
. 87., .

corresponding to

i^ rud
it,

is

wanting

in Gothic,

but the Old High

German
" to

has for

quite regularly according to

RUZ,

weep"

{riuzu,

rdz for muz, according to

80.,

ruzumh).

^^

bhush,

"to adorn,"
loss

is

perhaps contained in the Latin or-no, with

as

of the initial letter,

" I

amo

in

relation

to zirnnnfk
t^ sh*

kdmaydmi,

love."

With

regard to the r for

gi? ush, " to burn,"

advert to the relation of uro to

gev,

The latter "to honour," mMh, "to think "(?). cannot hit'nerto be quoted as a verb it springs, however,
:

^^

from iRV midh as and

it

WT

rn^dhd,

"understanding," unless

should be preferred to assume for these words a root

midh, which, however, the Grammarians do not exhibit.

The Gothic
viz.

has, for

comparison,

MIT, whence

mitd,

" I

think": the Greek furnishes an analogous

word

to s^v,

2EB,

cre/3a). (. 4.)

110.

From
and

the monosyllabic roots proceed nouns,

adjective,

sub-

stantive

by the annexation

of

syllables,

OF THE ROOTS.
which we should
per
se,
;

121

not,

without examination, regard as not,

it

significative

and, as

were, supernatural

mystic

beings

to a passive belief in whose undiscoverable nature

we are not
natural
to

willing to

surrender ourselves.

It

is

more
a

suppose that they have or had meaning, and

that which has

that the organism of language connects

meaning with what

is

likewise significative.

Why

should

not language denote accessory ideas, by accessory words

appended to the root

word.

Language, which possesses both

represent

sense and body, infuses sense and imparts form to every

The

object of nouns

is to

[G. Ed. p. 130.]

persons or things, to which that which the abstract root expresses adheres
;

and hence

it is

most natural

to look for

pronouns in the elements used in the formation of words, as

the bearers of qualities, actions, and conditions, which the

root expresses in abstrado. as

There appears,

too, in reality,

we

shall

develope in the chapter on the pronouns, a com-

plete*

between the most important elements in the formation of words and some pronominal bases which
identity

are declined even in an isolated state.

But

it is

not sur-

prising that several of the elements of verbal formation, in

the class of independent words, should not admit of

certain explanation;
for these aflBxes

more

have their origin in

consciousness as to

the most obscure and early epoch of language, and subse-

quently they have themselves lost

all

whence they have been

pended
suflx

taken,

on which account the ap-

does not always keep equal pace with the

alterations which, in the course of time, occur in the cor-

responding isolated word; or

other remains unchanged.

it

has been altered while the

in

Still,

individual

cases,

we
the

may remark
appended

the

admirable exactitude
syllables

with

which

grammatical

have maintained
treatise

them-

I direct attention preliminarily to

my

" On the Influence of

Pronouns

in the

Formation of Words " (Berlin, by F. Diimmler).

122

OF THE ROOTS.
unaltered form; from the perfect accordance

selves through thousands of years in an

I say,

we may remark
exists

this

which

between various individuals of the Sanskrit

were, from

family of languages, although these languages have been

removed, as
been

it

each others eyes since time

immemorial, and every

left to its

sister dialect has, since that removal,

own

fate

and experience.
e.e.

111.

There are

also pure radical words,

those of which

the theme, without suffix of derivation or personality, repre-

G. Ed.

p. 131.]

sents the naked root, which are then united

in declension with the syllables which denote the relations of

case.

Except at the end of compounds, such radical words

Sanskrit, few in number, and are all feminine ab;

are, in

stracts

as,

vft bht,

" fear," tj^ yudh, " contest," ir^ mud,

is

"joy."

In Greek and Latin the pure root

;

the most rare

form of the word but it does not always appear as an abstract

substantive.

As, for instance, e.g. (jiKoy ((pKoK-g), on

(oTr-j).

w^

(v/tt- j), leg Qec-s),

pac

(pac-s),

due (dues),

pel-lie (pel-lec-s).

In German, commencing even with the Gothic, no pure

radical

words

exist, although,

tion of the base of the

have assumed that

by reason of the abbreviaword in the singular, many words appearance; for from the abbreviation
it

of these verbal bases, which has been constantly extending

during the lapse of time,

dialects

is

precisely the

most modern

which appear to exhibit the greatest number of

(cf. .

naked roots as nouns,

116.)

Naked

roots

seem most

generally used at the end of compounds, on account of the

clogging of the preceding part of the word.

this principle, in Sanskrit,

According to

every root can, in this position,

;

designate the agent by itself

"duty-knowing."
is as

as, e.g. V^f%5 dharma-md* In Latin, the use of these compounds

. 6.,

frequent as in Sanskrit, only that, according to

is

a radical a

weakened

to

or e;

thus, earni-Jie (fees),

is

tubi-cin (een).

An example

in

Greek

x^P^'l^

i^^^

'^^"^

from

v/TT-Tw).

Sanskrit roots which end with short vowels.

OF THE ROOTS.
as
ftf

123
this

**

to conquer,'' are, in

compounds of
t,

kind,

supported by the addition of a

which so much the more

affix

appears to be a simple phonetic

without signification,

that these weakly-constructed roots appear to support

selves

them-

on an auxiliary
e. g.

before the gerundial suffix ya also.

Thus,

^nfiliT svarga-jU, " conquering the heaven," f^fTm

vi-jit-yu, "

by conquering."

In Latin

I find

[G. Ed.

p. 13-2.]

interesting analogies to these formations in

from the roots / and STA, the

cording to
{egu-es),
. 6.

latter

weakened

/T and STIT, to STI ac"

Thus, com-it (com-es), " goer with '' ; equ-it

;

"

goer on horseback "

al-it

(al-es),

goer with

wings ""
in this

super-stit {-stes), " standing by."

t

The German has

several roots terthis letter the
(p.

way supported throughout with a

minating with a vowel, and hence given to

character of radicalism, as above mentioned
in

123 G. Ed.)

KdT, from m fn4

**

to

measure."

124

FORMATION OF
112,

CASES.
take up the declinable

The Indiau Grammarians

its

<

word in
of
all

primary form,
;

i.e.

in its state

when

destitute
is

case-termination

and

this

bare form of the word

given also in dictionaries.

In this

we

follow their example

unless
yr

and where we give Sanscrit and Zend nouns, they stand, it is otherwise specified, or the sign of case is
the
base, in

separated from

their

primary form.

The

W^^
-S

Indian Grammarians, however, did not arrive at their pri-

^
V

mary forms by
tion

the

method of independent

analysis, as it

were by an anatomical
practical use of the

dissection or chemical decomposi;

of the body of language

but were guided by the

which, at the beginning
is,

language

itself,

of

compounds

and

the art of composition

in Sanscrit,

just

as necessary as that of conjugation

or declension

s/requires the pure primary form;

naturally with reserva-

tion of the slight changes of the adjoining limits of sound,

rendered necessary at times by the laws of euphony.

present every relation
general, or the

As

the primary form at the beginning of compounds can reof case,

it is,

as

it

were, the case the unli-

most general of

cases, which, in

mited use of compounds, occurs more frequently than any

other.

Nevertheless, the Sanskrit language does not everyto the strict

where remain true

[G. Ed.
p. 134.]

and

logical principle usually

;

followed in composition

and as
it

if to

vex

the Grammarians, and put

their logic to the test,

places as

^
^
>

the
first

first

member

of the

compounds

in the

pronouns of the

and second person the ablative

plural,

and in those of the

then, in

third person

thenom. and

ace. sing, of the neuter, instead of

the true primary form.

The Indian Grammarians,

FORMATION OF CASES.
this point,

125

have applied

to the eases furnished to

them by
yushmadt

the language, and take the

augmented ^Wff
i\**t^

asmat^ or

awd

asmad, " from us," ximr^ yushmat or

"ifrom you," as the starting-point in the declension, or as

the primary form, although in both pronominal forms only

^a

and

ij

yu belong

to the base, which,

however, does not

extend

to

the singular.

That, however, in spite of this

to decline

error, the Indian

Grammarians understand how

is

the

pronouns, and that they are not de6cient in external

rules for this purpose,

a matter of course.

That the
him for the

interrogative, in its declension, resembles bases in o, can-

not escape any one

original indeclinable

who

holds the neuter

f^

form of the word.

Panini settles the

(edit.

matter here with a very laconic rule, when he says

Calc, p. 969) fwH',

W. kimaK

kali,

i.

e,

ka*

is

substituted for

kim.

If this

strange method were to be followed in Latin,

in
like

and the

neuter quid

manner regarded
at

as

the

theme, then, in

order to

get

the dative cu-i

(after
cus,^'

the analogy offructui), one would have to say " quidis

or " guidi cus."

In another place

(p.

825),

Panini forms

from idam,
of passing

" this "

(which in like manner has the honour

Av'm,
*

for

a base) anrt

what ?" a copulative

iski,

comjx)und ; and by ^^f^jftT

^Tli^

idankimdr

the

Gram-

marian teaches that the putative bases in

the forms
113.

[G. Ed.

p. 135.]

the formations under discussion substitute for themselves

i

and H.
Sanskrit, and the languages akin to
still
it,

The

which

in this respect have

guish,

kept upon the old footing, distinnatural

genders,
call

besides

the

two
to

another
Kliva,

the
eu-

neuter, which the Indian

Grammarians
be a

t.e.

nuch;

which

appears

peculiarity of the San-

He

fonns, namely, from kintf regarded as a base, kint'os, which

in reality does not occur,

and which has, for the sake of euphony, here

become kimah.

126
skrit,

FORMATION OF CASES.
or most perfect family of languages.
intention
it

According to

its original

VI

mate

nature, but

gender had to represent inanihas not everywhere confined itself to

this
life

these old limits:

the language imparts

to

what

is

inanimate, and, on the other hand, (according to the view

^

then taken,) impairs the personality of what

*

is

by nature

^^'

animate.
in

The feminine
where
it

in Sanskrit, both in the base

and
of

the

case-terminations,

loves

a luxurious fullness

form;
<^

and

is

distinguished

from
it

the

other
this

genders in the base or in the termination,

distinction

marks

^
't''

^-^

by

broader, and

more sonant

vowels.

The
base,

b^-^'^'^J^V neuter,

on the other hand, prefers the greatest conciseness,

itself

./
V

"^

but distinguishes

from the masculine, not in the

but only, in the most conspicuous cases, in the nominative

and
also,

its

perfect counterpart the accusative

in the vocative

when this is the same as the nominative. 114. Number, in Sanskrit and its sister
by a particular
affix

languages,

is

distinguished, not

denoting the number,

but by the /selection or modification of the case-syllable/

80 that, with the case-suffix, the
e.g. bhyam,

number

is

at once

known
the first
ifv^

bhydm, and bhyas are cognate

syllables, and,
;

among

other relations, express that of the dative

in the singular (only in the pronoun of the 2d person,

tuhhyam, " to thee

plural.

"),

the second in the dual, the third in the

The

dual, like the neuter, in course of

time

is

the

first

to be lost with the weakening of the vitality

[G. Ed.

p. 136.]

of the view taken by the senses, or

is

more and more straitened

in its use, and then replaced by the abstract plural expressive

of infinite number.
fully,

both in the
its

The Sanskrit possesses the dual most noun and in the verb, and employs it everyIn the Zend, which
it

where where

use could be expected.

otherwise approximates so closely to the Sanskrit,

is

found very rarely in the verb, more frequently in the

noun
viz,

The

Pali has only as

it

much

left of it as the

Latin,

a remnant of

in

two words, which signify "two'*

FORMATION OP CASES.
and "both";
the
in

127
wanting.

,i

the Prakrit

it

is

entirely

Of
-'^

^
^^ivj^^^
P^s'-

German
it,

languages, only the eldest dialect, the Gothic,

possesses
trary,

but merely in the verb;

while,

on the conthe

in

the
it

Hebrew
is

(speaking

here

of

Semitic

languages)

retained only in the noun, in disadvan-

tageous contrast with the Arabic, which, in

respects also,
is

many
;

other

a more perfect language, and which mainwhile in

tains the dual in equal fulness in the verb also

the Syriac

it

has been almost entirely lost in the noun as

i

well as in the verb.*

^

115.

The

case- terminations express the reciprocal relai.

tions of nouns,

e.

the relations of the persons spoken

of,

to

one another, which principally and originally referred only

^
I

to space, but

from space were extended

to their origin,

also to

time and

cause.

\According
part,

^ey

are, at least for the

most

hereafter.

of space,

pronouns, as will be more clearly developed /^Whence could the exponents of the relations which have grown up with the primary words
taken,

into a whole, have better been

than from those

words which express personality, with their inherent secon-

"^dary idea of room, of that which is nearer or

~ of

more

distant,

that which is

on

this

or that side?
i.

>
e.

LG. Ed.

p. 137.]

As also
sufiBxes

in verbs the personal terminations,

the pronominal

although,

in the course of time, they are

no longer

recognised and
origin, they
f
I

felt to

be that which, by their demonstrable

imply and are

are

replaced, or, if

we may
"^

A
-

use the expression, commented on by the isolated pronouns prefixed to the verb so, in the more sunken, insensible
;

state of the language, the spiritually

dead case-terminations
or ex-

are, in their signification of space, replaced, supported,

* Regarding the character, the natural fonndation, and the finer gradations in the use of the dual, and
its diflFusion

into the different provinces

of language,

we

possess a talented inquiry,

by
;

W.

von Humboldt, in the

Transactions of the

Academy for

the year 1827

and some which have been

published by Diimmler.

128
plained

FORMATION OF CASES.
by prepositions, and
Before
in their personal signification

by

the article.
1 1

6.

we

describe the formation of cases in the

order in which the Sanskrit Grammarians dispose them,

it

appears desirable to give the different

final

sounds of

the nominal bases with which the case-suffixes unite themselves, as well as to point out the

mode

in which the cognate

languages are in this respect related to one another.

three primary vowels
(a,
i,

The

u)

occur in Sanskrit, both short

;

and long,

at the
M.

end of nominal bases

the short
a,

thus,

^ a, ^ 7 m
t,

wd,

%i,

"gj

To
a,

always masculine or

neuter,^^

never feminine,
also in

corresponds in Zend and Lithuanian, and

/

German, where, however, even in the Gothic (in Grimm's first strong declension), especially in substantives, in more modern dialects it i it is only sparingly retained
:

commonly supplanted by a more

the corresponding termination
sion
(e.g.

recent u or

e.

In Greek,

is

the o of the second declen-

in \6yo-s):

and

was
;

also the termination of the

Latin noun in ancient times

but in the classic period, al-

though sometimes retained,

in the

it

was commonly changed

to

nom. and

accus. sing, (of the second declension).

still

An

old a, however, is

left

in cola, gena, cida, at the end of

compounds, where, however, from the want of other analogies, it is

used in declension similarly to the feminine

originally long
a,

[G. Ed.

p. 138.]

on which account the

nominative

is

written, not colaa, genas, cidos, but cola, &c.

The Grecian masculines

77-f

of the first declension in a-j,* with the

which has proceeded therefrom, must likewise, accordto which, in regard of quality

ing to their origin, be compared with the Sanskrit masculine short

a,

and preservafaithful,
its

tion of the nominative sign, they

have remained

while the o of the second declension has preserved

original brevity.
lently

old

Their identity with bases in o

in
ou,

is

excelall

shewn by the genitive

* Cf.
p. 1294.

w hich

does not at

1.

20.

G. Ed.

FORMATION OF CASES.
suit a

129

theme

in

a or

tj

and farther, from such compounds which the vowel that

iias

as

fJivpoTrui\>]-,

irou^orpl^r]-^, in

been added to the roots

usually stands.
117.

nUA

and TPIB supplies the place

for which, in Greek, o

of the Sanskrit a in similar

compounds

To

the short

/,

which occurs in the three genders,

In

the same vowel corresponds in the cognate languages.

German
ever,

it is

to be looked for in
I

Grimm's

fourth strong

declension,

which

shall

make

the second;

where, howit

from the destructive alterations of time,

first

becomes
In Latin,

nearly as hard as the a of the

t

declension.

is

interchanged

with

e;

hence facile

for facili,

mare

for mari, Sanskrit ^rfc vdrU " water."

In Greek, before
e.

vowels the

is

generally weakened to the unorganic

The

short u also shews itself in Sanskrit in the three genders,

as in

Greek

v,

and u in Gothic, where

i

it

distinguishes itself

from the a and

the
s

in

that

it

is

retained as well

before

of the nominative as in the uninflected accusative.

is

In Latin the corresponding letter

declension.
118.

the u of the fourth

The long vowels

(d,

i,

tl)

belong, in Sanskrit, prin-

cipally to the feminine (see

113.),

are never found in the

In

neuter, and occur in the masculine very rarely.

Zend

the long

final
it

a has generally been shortened in polysyllabic

[G. Ed.
p. 139-3

words

as

has in Gothic, in which bases

(.

in 6 correspond

69.) to the Sanskrit

feminine bases in

d,

and the 6 in the uninflected nom. and accus.

to a, with the exception of
**this,"
tlie

sing, is shortened
so, "she,'*

monosyllabic forms

Sanskrit
k(\.

trt

sd,

Zend

M;

kv6,

"which?** Sanskrit

and Zend
voc.,

The

Latin, also, in the uninflected

;

nom. and
In

has shortened the old feminine long a

but the Lithu-

anian has, in the nom., maintained the original length.

Greek, the Doric a approaches most nearly to the Sanskrit

feminine
preserved,
into
>;.

d,

sometimes

which the common dialect has sometimes shortened, sometimes transformed

130
119.

FORMATION OF CASES.
The long
thus,

appears, in Sanskrit,

most frequently
mahati (magna)

as a characteristic addition in

the formation of feminine

bases,

the

feminine

base

ir^
i

springs from Tf^ mahat.

The same

holds good in Zend.

Moreover, the feminine character

has been preserved

the

most
suffix

strictly in

Lithuanian, where, for example, in

part. pres.
ant,

and
and
be,"

fut.

an

is

added to the old participial

existing,"
bu-sent-i,

hant-i,

"

the

" that

that

shall

correspond to the

Sanskrit

wt

sat-t (for

asati or

asanti),

Hrjuidl bhav-i-shyanti.
i

In Greek and

Latin this feminine long

y

has become incapable of declenleft traces,

sion

and where
affix

it

has

still

there a later un-

organic
tions.

has become the bearer of the case-terminais,

This
rj^eia

affix

in Greek, either

a or B;

in Latin,

c.

Thus,

corresponds

to

the

Sanskrit
-rpid,
e.

Wf^
e.g.

swddw-it

from

^^T? swddu,

"sweet";

-rpia,

6pyr}<nptcct

^ KYjiTrpiq, \r](TTpiS-o^,

to the Sanskrit "^ tn,

g. l{ft{^ janibru

"genitress," to which the Latin genUrl-c-s, geniirt-c-is, cor-

responds

while in the Greek yevereipa, and similar forma-

tions, the old

feminine

is

forced back a syllable. followed

This

[G. Ed.
Tepeiva,

p. 140.]

analogy

is

by

fieAatva, raXaiva,

and substantive derivations, as reKraiva, AaKaiva.

is,

In Oepdiratva, \eaiva, the base of the primitive

as in the
it is

nom. masc, shortened by a

t.

In deatva, \vKaiva,

to be

assumed that the proper primitive

in v or vr has been lost,

or that these are formations of a different kind, and corre-

spond to the rather isolated word in Sanskrit

drAni, as the wife

s^s^TOft/nis

of Indra, as derived
i

from

^^ Indra,

termed.

The
vr,

cases where the feminine

is

solely represented

by a are essentially limited to feminine derivatives from

forms in
is

where t passes into a

i,

the preceding

v,

however,

replaced by v or

or the

mere lengthening
cr
:

of the pre-

ceding vowel, or

it is

assimilated to the
e/cr-a,

hence, ofir-a,
for
ovr-a,

eaa-a,
si^-a,

ao--o*,
ai/r-a,

ikx-a

evr-a,

vvr-a.

In Doric subsequent and original aur-a.

FORMATION OF CASES.
To
this

131

auaHogy belong, moreover, the feminine substantives,

like ddXaaa-a, ^a<ri\ia-(ra, fieXiaa-a,

which

J.

Grimm

(II.

328.)
like

very correctly, in

my

opinion,

compares with forms

')(api-e<T(Ta, ^leTuTo-ecraa,

and explains the double a by gemi-

nation or assimilation.

The feminine formations by a

i

simple a instead of the original

relatively, the

are most corrupt, and,

is

most recent;

and herein the Greek

not

supported

by any of the cognate languages.

The
it,

Latin,
leaves,

its twin-sister,

which otherwise runs parallel to

in the part. pres.

and other adjective bases terminating

the cases, since
i.

with a consonant, the feminine undistinguished from the

masculine through
all
it

has no longer the

power
120.

of declining the old

The German,
t;

too,

can no longer fully decline the

affix,

old feminine

and the Gothic, by a foreign

intro-

duces

it

into the 6 declension, but in the singular of sub[G. Ed. p. 141.]

stantives shortens the syllable yo in the

uninflected nominative and vocative to ?,in the adjective to ya.

More commonly, however,

declension

the old bases in

are introduced,
so-called
ei,

by the frequently employed affix of an w.into the

;

weak

and as

i*

in Gothic

is

denoted by

so to the

Sanskrit feminine participial bases in

fern,

^^^

anti,

and to the
142.

comparative bases in

fwt

lyast,

correspond the forms

.

ndein, izein, regarding the nominative of which refer to

121
at

The long u () appears, in Sanskrit, rather seldom the end of primary forms, and is for the most part

feminine.
vf

The words most

in use are ^y^vadhut " a wife,'*

>J

hhu, "earth," "^[^ ftimsru, " mother-in-law " (socrus),

bhrih

"

eyebrow."
V,

To

the latter corresponds 6(ppvs, likewise with

is

the long

the declension of which, however,

;

not different
is distin-

from that of the short v

while in Sanskrit the long u

guished from the short feniinine u in the same

from ^

i.

as ^ ^ But few monosyllabic primary forms end, in

way

Sanskrit, with diphthongs, not

any
K 2

at

all

with

-^ i

with

^ di

(from d + i, see

2.)

only"\

rae,

masc. "thing," "riches'"; in

l3Bi

FORMATION OF CASES.

the nom. irregularly

nised the Latin res.

tW rd-s
Still I

for x^S rdi-s.

In this

is

recog-

do not believe that Latin bases

in e should therefore

be looked upon as corresponding to

the
first place,

the Sanskrit

^ di

for, in

the Latin e corre-

sponds elsewhere to the Sanskrit ^ ^ (from a + i), never to di secondly, the connection of the e of the fifth declension
;

with the originally long a of the

taken (to which
T]

first is

not to be mis-

it

bears the same relation that the Ionic

a), for

does to the Doric

many words

with the same mean;

ing belong to the

A
is

and

declension

and, for example,

a sufhx which

is

employed

for the formation of abstracts

tie

from adjectives
[G. Ed.
p. 142.]

sounded as well

as
;

Ha

{planitie-s,
ia,

planitia, canities, canitia)

and ies, and

in the formation of primitive and derivative words

ejffigies, effiyia,

like

pauperies, pauperia

are clearly one and the

same

suffix, identical

for the

same purpose, and the Greek

of the feminine e and
a.
:

with the Sanskrit "m yd, which is used Let us now la, Ionic irj.

consider the objections which are opposed to the original

identity

the

in the

nom.
if

sing,

and

pi.

es,

The most weighty is es for e, ei, as musa,

the s in the
first

mus/e (musai),
singular,
it
is,

Ke(paKr],

Ke(paKai,

As regards

the identity with the

declension be

authentic, very remarkable; and forms like species, canities,

seem

to

be true lingual patriarchs: for the Sanskrit,

like the

Zend, Greek, Gothic, Lithuanian, exhibits the absence of the

nominative sign in the corresponding feminine bases in

I

a.

have, however, never considered as original the aban-

donment of the nominative sign, and the complete equalization with the primary form in ;R7n suid, '* daughter," and
similar
itself

words, although

it

has appeared to

me

as losing

very deeply in far-distant ages.

in

ever,

some other points

of

The Latin, howGrammar, shews greater

Greek,
as,

antiquity than
(to confine

the Sanskrit and

for

example

the present instance to the nominative case),

participial

nominatives, like amans, legens, are better and

FOEMATION OF CASES.
older forms than the Sanskrit and Greek, like
"K^yoiv,

133

H^^

tudan^

Tidei^,

because they have preserved the nomina-

tive

together

with

the

nasal,

and

therein

stand

on
of

the same footing with

Zend forms,
find,

like

J3'^Ail

bavans,

"being."

cannot,

therefore,
in

in

the retention

the nominative sign

the

fifth

declension,

any decisive
first.

argument against

its

original identity with the

We
In

will treat hereafter of the s of the

v-

nominative plural.

the genitive singular the

(deal),

common form

e answers to deae
es to familias.

the

more

rare,

however, and better, in

Schneider searches, but fortunately without

success, for genitive s like die-is
:

[G. Ed. p. 143.]

we

require

them
be as

as

little,

perhaps, as a familia-is,
letters
Sir;-^,

Let dies be written with Greek

die-is will
little re-

and then, perhaps, a

SiKrj-o^.

quired as a
clension,

Although a few bases of the third desyllable,

by rejecting a consonant or an entire

fifth

have

passed into the

that
all

declension,

we

will not therefore infer If

bases in e have arisen from such an abbreviation.

after rejecting the
t,

QUIET,
the
fifth

could be declined according to

for-

declension, then
fifth,
i.e.

must there necessarily have

merly been a
like

otherwise from
qidis,
it

QUIET
i.e.

must have been bases in e, could only have come QUII {quies,
there
in spite of the rejection of the
t

ccedes);

must have continued

in the third declension.

The connec'^ rdi is,

tion between

res and the abovementioned Sanskrit

re-s

in

my

opinion, to

be arrived at through the irregular

nominative TTR rd-s; and according to this

supported on an old d
:

would be

it

answers to TTH rd-s as re-bus to

TTi^ rd-bhyas, and as in

Greek 7^-v

to

the Sanskrit jtw

adm, "terram^ which,

Its

in the

remaining

cases,

has

"^tigd

for

base.

In Lithuanian there are feminine primary forms

in e (Ruhig's third declension) which resemble the Greek 7 in the suppression of the singular nominative sign, but in the

nominative plural in
in e.

e-s

approach more closely the Latin

134
122.

FORMATION OF CASES.
Primary forms
in

^d
div,

are rare in Sanskrit: the

"

only ones

known
is

to

me

are

^ dyd,
" to

heaven," and

rft

gd

the former
(a radical

feminine, and properly proceeds from

f^ dw
its

word from

f^

shine ") by the vocali-

zation of the

^
y.

V,

after which

the vowel

becomes

semi-vowel ^
[G. Ed.

In the accusative the 6 bases change this

d.

diphthong into
p. 144.]
rj,

To

the d thus obtained in

^ri'T

dyd-m,

Tn^ gd-m, corresponds the Latin

a, of yfj-v,

of die-rn,
is

the Greek

Doric

yd-v

the Latin
final

e,

however,

rendered short by the influence of the

the original

language requires

die-fn.

In Sanskrit, also, from

;

f^

div,

" to shine,'" are derived appellations of day

side, in Latin, those for the

as on the other

heaven
*'

divum, sub divo, sub dio

viz.

f^ divd,
which

as

primary form at
f^tfM dicasa,
div),

by day," and used as a the beginning of compounds; and also

an adverb,
Jt

masc, and
latter

dyu, neuter (a contraction from

signifies

both " day " and

"

heaven."

To

dyu answers, after rejecting the d (as viginti for Latin Ju of Ju-piter, ' heavens - lord or dviginti), the
fx

father":
better

the

oblique cases

Jov-is,

Jov-i,

Jov-em

answer

to

the broader

theme

?ft dyd,

whence the dative

and the locat. f^ dyav-i. The Djovis, moreover, furnished by Varro, deserves mention, as that which keeps
dyav-^,

most

faithfully to the ancient form.

The Grecian Zevf

its

sig-

nifies, therefore, in

accordance with
its

origin primarily,

"heaven":

form

relation to i^ dyd thus, that after

dropping the ^ d the following semi-vowel ii y became The oblique cases, on the contrary (A/os-, A//, &c.), C(. 19.)-

and must originally have had a digamma, proceeding by the natural law of sound from M, after which change the semi-vowel j must have become
belong to the Sanskrit
fr

dyu,

a vowel.
123.

A/df has the

same

relation to AiFog, that, in Latin,

sub dio has to sub divo.

Let us now consider the second of the abovemen-

tioned

primary forms

in

d,

viz.

t^ gd.

It

has several

FOBMATION OF CASES.
meanings
;

135
as masculine,

but the most

common

are

**

bull,''

and "cow"
forms.

and "earth" as feminine.

Both significations

have in Zend, as in Greek, divided themselves into two

the old guttural.

The Greek has preserved for the meaning " earth ''^ With regard to the vowel, 7^. 7a follows the
lias

example of the Indian accusative, where, as

remarked,
or gav-am.
irni^

been already

gdm {yrfv) stands for g4-m [G. Ed. p. 145.] For the meaning "ox" the Greek has preserved

the old diphthong

(for,

for

expected, according to
ral

. 4.,

^6 = ay>u may very well be ov) but has exchanged the guttuG.
Ed., ^i^VH-'

medials for

labials, as, p. 122

^^^

WUfH
have

jaijdmi.

The base BOY before vowels must

;

originally

become BOf

thus, in the dative, l3oF-i

would answer to the

hov-i
;

Sanski'it locat. ^\f^ gnv-u

and the Latin dative

language the

but in

the present state of the

middle
;

digammi
and there

between two vowels has always been dropped

is not,

as with the initial

it

for replacing

in

digamma, the medium of metre the oldest writings. Only theory and
decide here.
(n

comparative
in the

grammar can

word bos, changed the vowels

The Latin has, + v) (which were

originally of different kinds, but have been united into a

diphthong)

into

a homogeneous mass

(cf.

. 4.),

the nature

of whose contraction, however, discloses itself before vowel

inflexions, since the u-half of
is

BO

becomes

v,

and the short a

resolved into the furm of a short 0; thus, bor-i answers

to the Sanskrit locat. vf^gav-i.

The Zend

"earth'* has changed the guttural of the

for the meaning word under disguj^

cussion into
AAiAu^

z,

and gives

in the nominative

zdo for
:

zds

(. 56*^.),

in the accusative ^-^j

zanm

(. 01.)

am

not able to adduce other cases.

the guttural has
is

For the meaning "ox"

the nominative

remained

in

Zend, and

then m;>am gau-s or jt^^m gdo-s.

124. I

know only two

worls in Sanskrit which terminate

in 1^ du ^ ndu, "ship," and T^ny/au, " moon":

the former

has navigated very far on the ocean of our wide province of

136

FORMATION OF CASES.

language, without, however, in Sanskrit, having arrived at a

secure etymological haven.

viation of snau
[G. Ed.
p. 146.]

believe t^

ndu

to be

an abbreG.
ed.),

(cf. peut, pevo), ruo,

with

sru, p. 125

and that

it

therefore proceeds from the root

" to ^SJ snd,

bathe," which originally, perhaps,

may

also

have

meant
and

" to swim,""
t?^

and with which vaw,

n6,u

veco, na-to,

appear to

be connected,

would consequently be a radical word;

{dedi, dedit) for dadd,

in regard to the vowel would stand for n&, according to

the analogy of

^
6
ov.

daddu
. 6.,

from dadd-a.

As
by

a,

according to

is

a grave vowel, the Greek cannot

represent the Sanskrit Vriddhi-diphthong

au, while

^ du better than
commonly
repre-

(from short a + u)

is

sented by ev or

Hence

tf^^

ndu-s and vav-^ correspond

as exactly as possible;

the v of N.\Y, however, like that

;

BOY, has maintained itself only before consonants and the digamma, which replaces it, is lost before vowel inof
flexions;
vrj-e^, i/a-ej,

are from vdf-ej (Sansk.

'w{[^;^

ndv-as\

as /8o-es

from

^6F-eg.

The Latin
is

has given this word a

foreign addition, and uses navis, navi-bus, for nau-s, nau-bus.*

As

the semi-vowel

easily

hardened

to

a guttural

(. 19.),

we have here

also,

for nau, ndv-am, a sister

form

in our Nachen, Old

nacchin.

High German

naccho, " ship," gen. dat.

125.

We

pass over to the consonants: of these, n,

f,

s,

and r appear in Sanskrit most frequently at the end of primary forms all other consonants occur only in radical words, which are rare, and in some nominal bases of uncer;

tain

origin.

We
Of

consider next the

gutturals
{k,

consonants.

kh, g,

more rare or radical gh) we find none at

* Thus in

German an

has been added to the above-mentioned

is

ift

gd^ which, however, according to $. 117.,

suppressed, together with the

chuoi,

case sign in

Old High German ; hence chuo, " cow," gen.

where

the

dues not belong to the case designation, but to the here nninflected

base.

FORMATION OF CASES.
the end of the nominal bases most in use
Latin,
c is in
;

137

in Greek and on the contrary, they are of frequent occurrence;

Latin both radical and derivative,

[G. Ed.

p. 147.]

In Greek, y only radical DC'C, VORAC, EDJC, LEG. K, ^, and y are only radical, or occur in words of unknown
origin, as <I>PIK,

ROPAK. 'ONYX

(Sanskrit nakha),

$AOr.
in

Of

the palatals, ch and j in Sanskrit occur

most frequently
rdj,

TT^ vdch, "speech, voice" (VOC, 'On); THf

latter only at the

"king," the
" blood
'*

end of compounds

^rnr

asrij,

(sanguis)
evil

in Zend we have i>^ dmj, f., as name of an demon, probably from the Sanskrit root "j? druh, " to
:

hate.''

Of
t,

the two classes of the

&c.), is not

T-soimd, the

first,

or

lingual (z

used at the end of nominal bases;

is

and therefore the second, dental, or proper T-class,

so

more frequently employed. Still Z d,'^ dh, occur only in radical words, and therefore seldom Tf th perhaps only in tt^ path, as the secondary theme of ijf^PT pathin, "way"; nom. Mi^^i panthds, from ^^^ panfhas, which I
the
;

much

think

examples are,

again recognise in the Latin PONT, pons. Other ^^ ad, " eating," at the end of compounds,
f.,

and ^m yudh,
suffixes

" strife."

The

letter

tT

is

so

much

the

more common,
^J^
ant,

that several of the most frequently

it,

employed

end with

as that of the part pres. in

w^

at
t,

or
ex-

Greek and Latin nU

still

The Greek,

besides

hibits also 5

and 6 at the end of primary forms which are not

radical;

KOPY0

and 'OPN10 appear to

perly compounds, and to contain the roots

0H,

me to be pro0E (the vowel

to this,

being dropped) as their

last

member
"

and according
is

KOPY0
so
in

would properly mean

what

placed on the head";

autumn," " rainy season,** which Grammarians explain by a suffix ad, in my opinion means nothing but " water giving," and contains the root
Sanskrit, ^it5 sarad,
dd,

"

Greek

"to give," with d itself no etymology

suppressed.
:

'OPXI0

finds in
its

the Sanskrit offers for

expla-

nation ^rftjaran? (according to the pronunciation of Bengal, oroni),

"wood"; and

if opvi

is

con-

[G. Ed.

p.

U8.]

138
nected therewith,

FORMATION OF CASES.
we may
;

refer to deoi, " to run," in respei-t

to the 6: "bird" therefore

would derive

its

name from
its

its

going in the wood

while in Sanskrit, from

passage

through the air, it is called, among other names, f%fJT riha-ga. Regarding the later origin of the in feminine
bases in
i,

an account
i8

is

given in

119.;

that is to say,
i,

patronymics in
e.g.

may

be compared with Sanskrit ones in

^r(i bhaimi, " the

daughter of Bhima.
is

Probably, too,
;

the in feminine patronymics in a5

spring, like those in
iB,

a later addition

they

not from their masculines, but directly

in

from the primary word of the masculine, and,

stand in sisterly, not in
Latin,
filial

my opinion,
In

connection
affix in

with them.

d appears

as a

more modern

the base

PECUD,

which the Sanskrit, Zend, and Gothic terminate with u

(Sans.- Zend, pasu, Goth, faihu).

In Gothic, primary forms

part, pres.,

with a

final

y-sound are chiefly limited to the

t

where the old

appears changed into

:

d,

which remains

without extraneous addition

there only, however, where

;

the form stands substantively

tion of the

otherwise, with the excep-

nominative,

it

is

conducted by the

affix

an

a more current province of declension. The more modern German dialects under no circumstances leave the old T-sound without a foreign addition commixed with
into

the base.

In

Lithuanian the participial

suffix ant, in

re-

gard of the nom. sing,

the Latin and
skrit;

am

for

ants, rests

exactly upon

Zend

step,

which extends beyond the San-

but in most of the remaining cases the Lithuanian

cannot decline any

more consonants,
affix,

i. e.

cannot unite

them with pure

always, by a
and,
indeed,
p.

case

terminations, but transports

them
the

more modern
to

into a vowel- declension;

suffix

the

participial
ia,

ant

is

added
of

[G. Ed.

149]

syllable

by the

influence

which
ch

the

experiences

the
nasal

euphonic
of
this

transformation
dental
T-class,

into
viz.

(=
*

fsch^).
Tliis

The
is

the

sound

expressed by cz, as ia Mielcke's edition of Ruliig's

Grammar.

FORMATION OF CASES.
proper
n,

139

belongs to those consonants which occur most

frequently at the end of nominal bases.

all

In the
like

German
the San-

the words of

Grimm's weak declension

of the

skrit,

and the masculine and feminine in Latin, reject in

base,

the nominative the n

and thereby have a

presents
the

vowel termination.
cases adds

The Lithuanian

same

appearance in the nominative, but in most of the oblique

to

a base in en sometimes

ia,

sometimes a
including the

simple u
126.

Primary forms with a

as the last

final

labial,

nasal (m) of this organ, appear in Sanskrit only in naked

roots,

member

of compounds, and here,

too,

but seldom.

In isolated use, however,

we have

^r^ ap

(probably from the root ^nr dp, "to take in," "to comprehend"),

"water," which

is

used

only

in

the plural;

in

Zend, however, in the singular also.*

also,

In Greek and Latin,

bases in p,

b,

(f>,

are either evidently radical, or of

unknown
or in

origin, with probably radical letters at the end

Latin they have suppressed, in the nominative, a

;

vowel belonging to the base

and

so,

as in

[G- Ed. p. 150.]

German, the
to

first

and fourth strong declensions, according

Grimm, have only the appearance of a base terminating with a consonant. Of this kind is plebs, from plebis ; to
explain which
it is
:

not requisite to turn, with Voss, to

the Greek

-nXrjdo^

one must keep to the Latin root

explain like bus, bundus,

PLE.
bam.

The derivative

bis, bes, I

bills,

The

Latin adds an a to this old consonantal base, and thns arises,

according to 'he frequent interchange of

with qu

(cf.

quinque with

Tl^3 panchan), aqua

as

on the other hand, am-nis

and
a-efivos, for

rests

on the form ap,

snmnus

for soptius,

at^vos, in analogy with a Sanskrif

euphonic law

(Gramm.

Crit. r.

58

).

root another neuter, a\THn dpas, in

The Sanskrit has from the same which we recognise the Latin aqtior,
cequus, but
is

which therefore would not proceed from

In Greek, d<pp6s appears to belong
to the

transferred

from

the waves, or the mirror of the sea, to other things of a similar natnre.

same

oriqin.^

140
60 {amabam,
-bo),

FORMATION OF CASES.
as

from the root FU.

" to be," which, like

FEE,

often

changes the

in its middle into

(. 18.).

"Without appealing to the cognate languages,

Latin, to

it is difficult,

in

distinguish

those bases which

truly and

origi-

nally terminate in a consonant from those which only ap-

pear to do so;

for the declension in

dc clension,
it is

has clearly operated

i

on the consonantal
originally.

and introduced an
it

into dif-

ferent places in which

impossible

could have stood

i

In the dative and ablative plural, the

of forms

like amanfibus, vucihus, admits of being explained as

a con-

junctive vowel, for facilitating the

in

affix;

it

is,

however
bus, have,

my

opinion,

more correct

to

say that the bases VOC,

AMANT, &c., because

to

they could not unite with

in the present state of the Latin language, been lengthened

VOCI,

AMANTI;
it

so that
.

we ought
was

to divide voci-bwt,

amnnti-hus, just as at
that in most cases

125.

it

said of the Lithuanian,

extends

its participial

bases in ant to

anchia (euphonic for antia).

-bus
is

This view of forms like amanti-

proved to be the more probable, in that in the geni-

tive plural also before urn, as before the a of neuters,

an

frequently finds

its place,

without

its
i

being possible to say

that in amanli-um, amanti-a, the

facilitate

would be necessary to

the annexation of the ending.

On

the

other

hand, juveni-s, cani-s, forming the genitives canu-m, juven-um, remind us of older bases in n
;

as in

Sanskrit TSR

tuan,
"
,

"a dog"
p. 151.]

(abbreviated ^nr sun),

^;T

and

^^^

yuvan,

young" (abbreviated
[G. Ed.

yun), in
close

KYN, really
it

Greek kucoi/, abbreviated their theme with n. The

i

German resembles
rals,

the Latin in this point, that for the

convenience of declension

has added an

to several

numeconso-

whose

theme originally terminated with

Gothic,

nant;

thus, in

from
.

FID FORI

(Sanskrit ^rr^

chatur, in the strong cases

129. ^hI4.

chntwdr) comes the

dative fidvori-m.

navon,

" nine," ^T?R

The themes Tnr^ saptan, " seven," tT^ damn, " ten,^ by the addition of an i

FORMATION OF CASES.
in Old

141

Hi^h German mould themselves to SIB UNI, NIUNI, ZEHANI; which forms, at the same time, pass as
masculine nominatives, as these cases, in Old High German,

have

lost

the case-sufl&x
if

$.

The corresponding

Gothic

nominatives,
taihunei-s.

they occurred, would be sibunei-s, niunei-s,

this point hereafter.
(y,
r,
/,

More on
the
^^

127.

Of

semi-vowels

v),

have

never

found in Sanskrit

y and

at the

end of bases, and

V only in the word

f^

div,

before mentioned,
ift

which

contracts itself in several cases to

the other hand,

dyo and

dyu.

On

T words which are formed by the

the

occurs very frequently,

suflfix

especially in
to which, in

w^ tar*

cognate

languages, likewise correspond

bases

in

r.

Moreover,

r in Latin
s,

appears frequently as an alteration

in the comparative suffix ior (Sanfurther, as

of an original
skrit f^iTT lyos)
re,
;

as,

and,
;

an abbreviation of

ri-s,

as

for lis, le

or, in

the second declension, as abbre-

viated

from

ru-s;

as in
(.

Gothic, vahr, "man," for vair{a)s,

1 16.).

belongs to bases in a

In Greek *AA appears as a

[G. Ed.
p. 152.]

consonantal base
Sanskrit

but in contrast with the

^^^

salila,

" water," oA-f appears abbreviated as ^le'^a-^

exactly in the
12S.

same manner

from

fie-^oKo^.
first (^r s, '^ sK)^

Of

the Sanskrit sibilants, the two

as also the

h,
ts

are found onlv in radical words, and theres,

fore seldom;

on the contrary, concludes some very

common

suffixes

used in the formation of words, as

e.g.

^^

as,

which forms principally neuters,

" strength,"

Thra

tejas,

"splendour,"

from fK\

tij,

" to sharpen."

The Greek aphowever, proceeds

pears to be without bases in

this,

from the following reason, that

* Bases in

this

sibilant

between two

^^

ar in several cases, and in the primaiy form also at the

beginning of componnds, contract the sj'Uable ^r^ ar to "^ri; and this

rt is regarded

by the Grammarians

as their proper final sound.

($. 1.)

14^

FORMATION OF CASES.
is

vowels, especially in the last syllable,

hence, neuters like
fxevog,

usually rejected

yevos (from

MENE2. TENES,
fxeveo^,

with change of the

yeveog,

e into 6),
yevecro^.
I

form in the genitive

for fxevea-og,

The

of the nominative,

however, belongs, as
to the base,

have already elsewhere remarkeJ,

In the dative plural, howit

and not to the case designation, as neuters

did not stand
revxecr-at,

have no

in the nominative.

ever, in the old epic language, the 2, as

between two vowels, maintained

6fje(T-(Tt
;

itself;

hence

so likewise in compounds, like (rafcej-TraAoy, reXes-

(pSpog, in

which
to

it

would be wrong to assume the annexation

In yrjpas, yrjpa-os, for

of a

the vowel of the base.

yi^paa-os, after restoring the

of the base, the

form of word

answers exactly to the Sanskrit WCj^^jaras, "age," although In Lithuathe Indian form is not neuter, but feminine.
nian, another remarkable

remnant of the Sanskrit

viz.

suffixes

terminating with
perf., in

has been preserved,

in the partic.

the oblique cases of which us corresponds to the

Sanskrit
(.

T^

ush (euphonic for

in

^^ us)

of the weakest cases

130.);

still,

Lithuanian, on account of the above-

noticed incapacity for the declension of the consonants, the

old MS is conducted, as in other similar cases,

by the subse-

quent addition of
[G. Ed. p. 163
]

ia,
i

a or
the

i,

partly into the

;

a,

partly into the

declension
is

and only the nominative and

it,

the vocative, which

same with

belong, in the singular,

to the consonantal declension.

129.

The Sanskrit and Zend have eight

which
exist in Latin,

cases, viz. be-

sides those
locative.

an instrumental and a
also

These two

cases

exist

in

Lithuanian;

Ruhig
tive
is

calls

the former the instrumental ablative, the latter

;

the local ablative

in Lithuanian, however, the projier abla"

which in Sanskrit expresses the relation

With reference
to the

whence.^"

wanting.

primary form, which

in all words,

in Sanskrit does not remain the

same

or

FORMATION OF CASES.
suffixes used in the

143
all

formation of words through

the cases,
desirable

a division of the cases into strong and

for this language.

weak

is

The strong

cases are the nominative,

accusative,

and vocative of the three numbers, with excepall

tion of the accusative plural, which, together with

the

other cases,
of the
larity,

is

weak.

Where a double or
exists, there,

triple formation

primary form
the

with surprising regu-

cases which

have been

designated as strong

always exhibit the

fullest

form of the theme, which, from

is

a comparison of languages,

proved to be the original

it,

one; while the other cases exhibit a weakened form of

which appears also in the beginning of compounds, and hence is represented by the native Grammarians, according to
part,
.

122., as

the

proper primary form.

:

The

pres.

may

serve as an example

it

forms the strong cases

retained by the

with the suffix ant, but in the weak cases and in the be-

ginning of compounds rejects

n,

which

is

cognate European languages, as

by Zend
ticiple in
e.g.

so that

also, for

the

most

part,

at is

given as the

suffix of this
tt^ tud,

par-

preference to WnT ant.

The root

" to vex,"
in-

exhibits in the participle mentioned the

as the strong

form 7T^

-dant

and original theme

;

(cf.

tundenf-em),

and -^^ tudat as the weak theme

is

hence the masculine

[G. Ed. p. 164.]

declined,

STRONG CASES.

WZAK

CAS8.

Singular

Nom. Voc. j^^ iudan

Ace.
Instr.

H<^^H tudaniam

i^fudafd.
-^^tudatS.
rl^it'V

Dat
Abl.

tudatas,

^sn.
Loc.

W^cT^ tudatas.

-^tiidaii.

Dual: Nom. Ace. Voc. WS^tudarddu Instr.Dat.Abl.

^^^^m^tudadhliydtn.
H^lft^ tudafds.

Gen. Loc.

144

FORMATION OF CASES.
STRONG CASES.

WEAK

CASES.

Plural

Nom. Voc.
Ace.
Instr.

TrerrfH

tudantas
ifJrf?r O V TT^fsH tudadhhis.

tudafas.

Dat. Abl.

5^^
rTijrTW
rftfrW

tudadhhyax.

Gen.
Loc.
130.

ludatdm.

tudatsu.

Where

three formations of the primary form persuffix,

vade the declension of a word or a

tions begin with a vowel, the middle
suffixes

the weakest form

of the theme there occurs in those weak cases whose termina-

form before those caseThis rule makes

which commence with a consonant.

a division of the cases into strong, weaker or middle, and

weakest, desirable. (See

Gramm.

Crit.

r.

185.)

131. In suffixes used in the formation of words, which in

Sanskrit separate into different forms, the Zend usually carries

the strong form through
pres. retains the nasal in
all

the cases

for instance, the part,

[G. Ed.

p.

155]

most of the cases, which in Sanskrit proceed from the weakened theme. Words,
of form.

however, are not wanting which follow the theory of the

Sanskrit gradations
" ^ff^ swan,

Thus, the Sanskrit

the weakest cases
is

base

hound," which in

con-

tracted to ^tT sun, appears in

Zend likewise

in a double

form, and presents the weak genitive sun-d over against

the
skrit

strong nominative and accusative spd, spdn-em, San"^STT

swd, TiETRH

swdnam

(. 50.).

The

base ap, " water,**

d,

which, in Sanskrit, in the strong cases has a long

is

but

not used in the singular, forms in the

Zend

the strong

sing.

nom. auoam dfs (. 40.), accus. ^^q>au dpem; on the other hand, ap-6, " of the water," ap-at, " from the water," &c.*
This word occurs

in the

Codex of the V.
where that

S.,

edited
tlie

by Burnouf, very
o which
it

frequently, and mostly with that quantity of

initial

is

required by the theory

so that

is

not the case

can only

be imputed to an error

in writing;.

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.

146

In the plural, where the Zend very frequently makes the

nominative and accusative the same, confusion has, for

this
is

reason, crept in
^^yAuaJjs

found for

and the weak ^y^^ sund, " canes,^^ and, on the spdno in the nominative
;
:

other hand, the strong ^q)au dpo, in the nominative as well

as in the accusative.*

The Greek, in the declension of kvu)v, has limited the [G. Ed. p. 156.] strong form to the nom. and voc. sing. in some cognate words in p, however, in accordance with the
132.
:

Sanskrit,

it

has given the accusative also the strong form, in

it.

which the Gothic agrees with

iraTep, iraTpi,
pe/rj (locat.);

Compare

iraT^p, "narepa,
fxrfi

with

fmn pita,

fMHI.M^

pitaram, f^fRp'ttar,

and the Gothic

brothar, as nom., accus.,

and
the

vocat.,

opposed

to broihrs, " of the brother," brdthr, " to

"iUTWl

brother," with the Sanskrit

lynrr bhrdlar, dative

bhrdta, \JTKT:r

bhrdfaram,

HT%

bhrdtrS, locat. vrf^bhrdtru

Accordwhile
e.g.

ing to the same principle in bases in an, in Gothic, the a in

the genitive and dative sing,
is

weakened

to

(. 1-10.)

the nominative, accus., and vocat. retain the original a;

ahma, ahmin-s, ahmin, ahman, ahma, from

(.

JHMAN,
final

"spirit^

140.).

133.

As regards

the

mode

of

combining the

vowels

of the primary forms with case-suffixes beginning with a

vowel,
is

we must

first

draw attention

to a phenouienon,

which

almost limited to the Sanskrit, and the diaiects which

have, however, found also ^2)aj apo xa the accusative; and

tlie

am

therefore in doubt, whether in this word, owinf; to

AJ a

facile

exchange of

and

jukj

a, the confusion
S. p. 21,

has not originated in nieie graphical overfiud

:

sights.

Thus, V.

we

^^ji^ijwasI^
dp<'-

M:<^'>>y^l}

^i^juu

nJjJAJ^iJUi j>Jo^y<i>A)xa)A> Cui^JU(0;M4^X3^

tsanhuisvohistdo ynuzila-

dhatao ashaoms aycke, " aquas puras, optimas, ab Orinuzdo creaias^ viuudas
celebro"
oilier
I

and ^a)AU

CukJ5)j}.^9

vUpuo apo,

'^

omnet aquas."

On

the

hand, in the page following:

AJ^i;\>^C5

xs^^mm^m

^^J

JCMjc^ytU A)^jj^/aj/> imdo npas-iha zenai-eha urardot-tha dyese,

**

has aquaqiie

terraj<que arboresque celelro'

146

FORMATION OF CASES.
it,

approximate most nearly to

as Pali and Prakrit, through

which, to avoid a hiatus, and to maintain pure the vowels

of the base and of the termination, a euphonic n is introduced.

This euphonic expedient cannot, in the extent in which

it

exists in Sanskrit, belong to the original state of the lan-

guage

otherwise

it

w^ould not be almost entirely lost in the

cognate European
fore regard
it

dialects,

and even in the Zend.

We

there-

as a peculiarity of the dialect, which, after the

period of the division of languages, became the prevailing

one in India, and has raised

language in that country.
that the
sally

itself to

be the universal written here to remark,

It is necessary

Veda language
the

did not use the euphonic n so univer-

as

common
is

Sanskrit

and together with ;?^

ind, ?[n ind, ^rfi und, occur also

^^

ayd,

^JH\ iyd,

Tm

vJ/d.

The euphonic n
[G. Ed.
p. 167.]

most frequently employed by the neuter

the latter limits

gender, less so by the masculine, and most

:

rarely by the feminine

its

use to the plural

it

genitive termination ^J^ dm, in which place

is

intro-

duced by the Zend

quisite.

also,

although not as indispensably re-

And

it is

remarkable, that precisely in this place

dialects,

in Old

High German, and other Old German

;

an n

has been retained before the case-suffix

thus in Old

High

German,

ahd-n-d, " a(juarum,"

from the feminine theme

,

AHO
is fur-

(nom. aha).

Besides the use of the euphonic

there

ther to be remarked, in Sanskrit and Zend, the attachment of

Guna
which

to the

vowels of the base

(.

26.) in certain cases, to

also the Gothic presents analogies.

SINGULAR.
NOMINATIVE.
134. Bases, of the masculine and feminine genders, end-

ing with a vowel have, in the Sanskrit family of Imguages,

(under the limitation of
.

137.) s as nominative- suffix,

it,

which

in Zend, after an a preceding

always melts into

w,

and

is

then contracted with the a to

A (. 2.),

while this in Sanskrit

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
takes place only befoie sonant letters
(.

147
25.)*

Examples

are given at

148.

I find the origin of this

case-designation

in the pronominal base

^ sa,

"he," "this," fem.

is

^sd; and
the said

a convincing proof of this assertion

the

fact, that

pronoun does not extend beyond the limits of the nom. masc.
and fem., but
is

replaced in the nom. neuter, and in the

ta,

oblique cases of the masculine, by WT

td regarding:

and feminine in
[G. Ed.

which more hereafter.

i

135.

The Gothic suppresses a and

s,

be-

p. 158.]]

fore the case-suflRx

except in monosyllabic bases, where

Hvu-s, "

this suppression is impossible.

who ?"

is, "he," are

used, but vuJf-s,

(cf

*'

wolf," gasi-s, " stranger," for vul/a-s, gasti-s

. 87.).

host is,

according to
(j/a),
i

In masculine substantive

bases in ja

however, the

final

vowel

is

retained, only
If,

weakened
as
is

to

(.

66.); e.g. haryis,

"army."

however,

generally the case, the

final syllable is

preceded by a

long syllable, or by
to ei (=t,
.

more than
e.g. ondeis,

one, the ji [yi) is contracted

70.);

"end," ragineis, "counsel,"

for andyis, raginyis.

This contraction extends also to the

genitive,

which

is

in like

manner denoted by
i

s.

To

the

Gothic nominatives in yis correspond the Lithuanian, like

Afpirktoyis, " Saviour," the

of which has likewise arisen

from an elder a.f I deduce this from the majority of the oblique cases, which agree with those of the a bases.
Where,
however,
in

Lithuanian,

consonant precedes

the final syllable ya,

there the y
is

which

is

the

more common
/,

case,

changed into the vowel

a,
is

and the follow:

ing

i,

which had arisen from

suppressed

hence,

ynunikkis,

"young man,"

for

yaunikkyis from yaunikkyas.

all

Hereto correspond in Gothic

'
litis

adjective

bases in ya,*
sutas tava, ^fi-

(/.

T^

V[t\

tuto manuit "JUius

mens" Tlim

IR

tuus" {.

-2-2.).

t Throua;h the
euphony
I

influence of the y, in accordance with a

Zend law of
1309 G. Ed.,

(. 42.).
tlie

Respecting

nom. e.g. of Gothic bases

in ya, see p.

Remark.
L 2

148
as

FORMATION OF CASES.
"the middle" (man),
V^vc^^

midi-s

for midyi-s
also,

from midya-s,
in

Sanskrit
zation*

madhya-s,

The Zend

the

vocali-

of the syllable ya, presents

a remarkable analogy

to

the Lithuanian and Gothic in contracting the syllable

A5^*0 yo.

before a final 9

regularly to ^

i,

as also

Aj(p

va

to

^u
136.

(. 42.).

The High German

has,

up

to

our time, preserved

the old nominative sign in the changed

theless, as early as in the

form of

r; never-

Old High German, in pronouns

however, in this

and adjectives
[G. Ed.
p. 159.]

only, with a vowel termination of the base.

The High German

all

is,

point, superior to the Gothic in fulness, that in its a bases

to

which belong

strong adjectives it has not suppressed

it

the vowel before the case-sign, but preserved

in the

form

of

e,

which, in Old High

the influence of the r

German as

it

appears through

is

long, but only in polysyllabic,

not in monosyllabic

forms.

Thus, e.g.
;

plint-^r,

^'

coscus,"'

completes the Gothic blinds for blinda-s

is, " he," corresponds i-r
e-r.
;

as to the Gotiiic

Middle and

New High German

s
is

The Old Northern

sign,

has likewise r as the nomina-

tive

and,

in

fact,

everyvvhere where, in Gothic,

stands.

In the other dialects the nominative character

entirely lost.
137.

Feminine Sanskrit bases

in

d,

and, with very

few exceptions, polysyllables in ^ i, together with '^ strt, " wife," like the corresponding forms of the cognate languages, have lost the old nominative sign (with the exception
of the Latin ^ bases, see
.

121.),

and give the pure base

vowel.

the

cognate languages do the same, the base having been weak-

ened by the abbreviation of the

final

In Gothic, 6 be-

comes a

(.

69.);

only

s6,

"this," and hwd "which?" remain

unshortened, on account of their being monosyllabic, as in

Zend
*
I

Jkuw"

hd and

^3^^ led

while in polysyllabic forms the

liave used vocalization

t

and vocalize
Trans.

to

express the change of a semi-

vowel

iU corresponding vowel.

NOMINATIVE SIXGULAB.
AU d
is

149
even in

shortened.

In Zend, ^

also is shortened,

the monosyllabic ^V-"

^^"' " wife,*" see

V.

S. par. 136,

(by

Olshausen),
vaque^^
;

p. 28,

where we read

aj^j'ij)jj

stri-cha, "feml-

whilst elsewhere the appended aj^ cha preserves

the original length of the vowel.

Here,

too,

the

Zend nomi^''

natives in

;o e

deserve to be mentioned, which seem very

similar to the

Greek

in

ij;

as jrsi^^^^ perenS,

*'

plena,

which
zdo,

in the Vendidad occurs very often in relation to

" earth,"

^j
I

without

my

being able to remember that

A>yg/ja)

have

found

another case from

peren^.

But from the

[G- Ed.
I
p. 160.]

nora. fCfjM^ kainS, "

maid" (Sanskrit w^m

S. p. 42());
is

kanyn), which
^-NS^^/As^

is

of frequent occurrence,

find the

accus.

kanyanm (V.

this furnishes the

proof

that the jo S in the nominative

generated by the eupho-

In ^^y>^M^ nic influence of the suppressed ^^ y (. 42.). " " cousin," and aj^^^j^^ tuiry^, a relation in the brdturyi,
fourth degree" (V. S.
p. 3S0),

the ^^ y has remained;

on
the

the

other

hand, in nJ^AW^^y vyAki.

"grandmother,"

dropping of a ^^ y must be again assumed.

fifth

We

cannot

here refrain from conjecturing that the e also of the Latin

declension, as with very few exceptions
i,

it is

everywhere

preceded by an
flnence of this
i
;

is

likewise produced from a

by the

in-

so that the Latin here stands in reversed

relation to the Greek,

rj,

where

rejects the
((TO(f>ta).

combination with
genders which

and preserves the original a

13S. Bases of the masculine and feminine

terminate with a consonant,

. 94.,

lose, in
if

Sanskrit, according to

the nominative signs; and

two consonants termi-

nate the base, then, according to the

these also
is lost.

same

law, the latter of

Hence, f^ifU

hibkrat, for f^>n?T bibhrat-s,

"the bearer";
^TTcf

w^

tudan, for TT^nW tudant-s

"the vexer";

^T^ vdch, f.), for m^ idk-sh, " speech." The Zend, Greek, and Latin, in preserving the nominative
vdk (from
sign after consonants, stand in an older position than the

Sanskrit;

Zend jm^jm

df-s

(for

dp-s,

.40.),

"water";

150
>\57^^ Ic'r'ffs, " a demon."

FORMATION OF CASES.
"body""; m5(3^>^ cZrwc-s (from the base druj), The Latin and Greek, where the final consos

nant of the base will not combine with the

native, prefer

of the nomifor

abandoning a portion of the base, as x^P^^

(cf. . 6.).

yaptT-g, comes for comit-s

The Latin, Lithuanian agree remarkably with the Zend in

[G. Ed.
p. 161.]

^Eolic,

and

this point,

that nt, in combination with

(.

s,

gives the
corre-

form
(man).
139.

ns;

thus amans, rtdev^, Lith. suknns

10.),

spond to the Zend oj^.iiA}AM7j} srdvayans, "the speaking"

final

n after a short vowel

is,

in Sanskrit,

no

favourite combination of sound, although one not prohibited.

It is

expelled from the

e.g.
;

theme

in

the

first

member

of a

compound,
rajan-putra

XJWT^ and it is rejected in the nominative

short vowel
is

rdja-pntra, " king's son," for TTST^'nr

also,

and
;

a preceding
e.g.

lengthened

in
;

masculines

TTn rdjdt " king," from TTiR rdjan, m.

TTTrT

nT ndma,

" name,'' from

ndman,

n.

vrt dfiam, m.,

irffT dliani, n.,

from

^fJTT

dhanin, "rich."
;

The Zend

in this agrees exactly

v.ith the Sanskrit

but from the dislike to a long a at the

the length-

end, which has been before mentioned, omits

ening of the vowel

e.g. >Axitii^(i.shava,

"the pure" (man),

from

yA5A5ta5-w ashavan,

m.

aj^j^aj^ chashma, " eye," from

follows the Sanskrit in

/w^iajAs^ chashman, n.

The Latin
but

the suppression of the n in the nominative, in the masculine,

and

feminine,

not

in

the

neuter:

sermo,

sermon-is, a^tio, action-is;

but nomen, not name or nnmo.

of

The
this

root

can

at

the

end

compounds, refrains

from

rejecting the n, probably in order not to

weaken

still

more

weak

radical syllable;

thus tubi~cen,Jidi-cen, os-cen (see

Uerti-s
;

. 6.).

Lien-^ia

an abbreviation of
is

hence the retenstands

tion

of the

not

surprising.

Pecten

rather

isolated.

In Sanskrit the naked roots also follow the prinrejection

ciple

of the

of n

^^^

" slaying,"

" smiting,"
I

ncm.

^ hd,

is,

however, the only root in n which

have

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
met with
is

151
sic4,

so used.

t^R ^ivan " hound," nom. ^gi

its

which,
sun,

in the weakest cases, contracts

of obscure origin.

theme

to

^^

The
"

Latin has extended the base

"5SR

swan, in the nominative,

cani;
.

to
(cf.

so

W?^

yuvan,

young,"

by an unorganic addition, has become Juveni

[G. Ed.
p. 162.]

126.).

between
-is,

As regards and i, by which,

the opposition
in several

words
is

as homo, hom'mis

arundo, arundin-is

the nominative
i;

distinguished from

the oblique cases, this o appears to

me

a stronger vowel,*

which compensates for the loss of the n, and therefore

substituted for the
ciple

weaker

according to the same printhe nom. tpt) dhani,\

by which,
in

in Sanskrit,
;

comes
Thus,

from vfiTT dhanin

give,

and, in Lithuanian, bases in en and un

(

the nominative, u

= mo)

for

or

from the bases A

KMEN, "stone," SZUN, " hound," come the

;

nominatives akmu, s~u

as in Sanskrit, from the

primary

forms of the same signification, ^^^ asman, yp^^ swan, have arisen ^^qi asmd and "sj swd. It does not follow that homin-is has come from homon-is,t because the old language

had hemo, hemonis, for homo; hominis

cognate
one,
suflBxes,

but

mon and min are

affixed to

signifying the same,

and were originally

one and

and therefore may be simultaneously

the

same word. 140. The German language also rejects a final n of the base in the nominative and in the neuter, in the accu* Althoagh
trary,
still
it

its

quantity in the actual condition of the language

is

arbi-

appears to have been originally long, and to imply a similar

contrast to the

Greek

rjv,

fv-oi

atv,

ov-os.

For the

rest

it

has been

already remarked, that between short vowels also exists a diflFerence of

gravity {.
6.).

t In bases

in yspt

an the lengthening extends

to all the strong cases^

with the exception of the vocat. sing. ; thus, not merely XTSTT rdjd, "rej:," but also rajdn-am, "regem," rdjdtias, " reges."
X I

TT3nW now prefer

The

4^|<|H<I

taking the

of homin-is, &c., as the weakening of the o

of homo.

relation resembles that of

Gothic forms like ahmin-is,

uhmin, to the nom. and ace. ahma, ahman, wliich preserve the original voweL

152

FORMATION OF CASES.
In
in

sative also, like Sanskrit.

Gothic,

in

the masculine

and neuter
old

where

alone,

my

opinion, the

n has an
n.

and original position

an
is

a always precedes the

There

are, that is to say, only bases in an,

none in
to

in

and

un; the latter termination

[G. Ed.
p. 163.]

foreign to the Sanskrit also.

is

The

a,

however,
.

weakened

in the

genitive and dative (see

cases, as especially in the

132.); while in Sanskrit, in these

(. 130.), it is

weakest cases

entirely

dropped.*

Among

masculine bases in an, in Gothic, exist

is

several words, in which an

the whole derivative- suffix,

and which therefore correspond to the Sansk. TTn? rdj-an, "king," as "ruler." Thus J H- J N, "spirit," as "thinker"
{ah-yo, "I think"),

STAU-AN, "Judge"
aha, staua. in

(s/aw-i/a,

"I judge"),
also, as in

whence the nominatives

Sanskrit,
" spirit,"

There are

some masculine formations

man

as,

AHMAN,

nom. ahma, with which perhaps the Sansk. '^iw^ dtman, "soul,"^ nom. ^nTTT dtmd, is connected; in case this
stands for dh-man, and comes from a lost root ^n"? dh,
" to

think,"t

where

it

is

to be

remembered

that also the

root

^H

nah, " to bind," has, in several places,

changed

its

hintot.

The Gothic

MILH-MAN,

nom. milh-ma," cloud,"

suffix

appears to have sprung from the Sanskrit root mih, by the

addition of an
a,
/,

whence, remarkably enough, by the

tt

and by exchanging the F h for

gh,

arises the

nomiin the

nal base Hti mSgha, " cloud."

In Latin ming-o answers to

;

ik^ mih, and in Greek

three languages the same.
141.

o-fxcxi-eo)

the

meaning

is

Neuter bases

in an, after rejecting the n, lengthen,

6,

in Gothic, the preceding a to

in the nominative, accusa-

e-ff'

* In case two consonants do not precede the termination ^r^ an ^TfW|n dtman-as, not dtmn-as^ but f|^lT ndmn-as, not ndman-as, t Perhaps
identical with the actually -occurring ^STT? dh,
in

" nominis."

" to speak,"

as

JT'JT

man, "to think,"

Zend means

also

"to speak"; whence

nom.
nmntfis, "

A76-y>j^

mahthra, "speech," and in Gothic

MUN-THA,

mouth"

$.68..

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
tive,

163
[G. Ed. p. 164.]

and vocative, which sound the same

so that in these cases the Gothic neuter follows the theory of

the strong cases (. 129.). which the Sanskrit neuter obeys

only in the nom., accus., and vocat. plural, where, for example, ^rTrfr chatwdr-i, "four," with a strong theme,
is

opposed to the weak cases

'^TnSi^ chaturhhyas.

like

^ttRHi chaturbhis

(instr.)^

The

a, also,

of neuter bases in an is

lengthened in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural

in
Sanski-it,

and in Gothic

and hence

fl'JlfT

ndmdn-i,
in

Gothic namdn-a, run parallel to one another.

However,

Gothic namn-a also

exists,

according to the theory of the

Sanskrit weakest cases

genitive
Hltil^

(. 130.),

whence proceeds the plural

;

ndmn-dm,

"

nominum'"

while the Gothic

namdn-S has permitted itself to be led astray

of the strong cases,

by the example

and would be better written namn-^ or

namin-i.
142. In the feminine declension in

German

can find

no

original bases in n, as also in Sanskrit there exist

in
;

no

feminines in an or

but feminine bases are

first

formed
;

by the addition of the usual feminine character \i

as,

TT^

rdjni,

"queen," from TTsPT rdjan

vfffTt dhanini, " the

rich'' (fern.),

from

"vftnT

dhanin, m. n. "rich."

Gothic

fe-

minine substantive bases in n exhibit, before

either an o
final
(

this consonant,

= ^,.69.)

orei: these are genuine feminine

vowels, to which the addition of an n can have been

only subsequently made.

connection of bases in ein

And
(

already, at

120.,

a close

and Lithuanian in

z,

with the Sanskrit in ^ t, Most substanhas been pointed out.

^ in)

tive bases in ein are feminine derivatives

from masculinerelation, ex-

neuter adjective bases in

cluding the modern
n,

a,

under the same

as in Sanskrit that of <'0 sundan,

"the fair" (woman), from Wf^sundara m. n. "beautiful" Gothic substantive bases in ein for the most part raise
the
adjective,

whence thev are derived,

* Vide p. 1083, Note.

to

an abstract;

154
[G, Ed.
p. 166.]

FORMATION OF CASES.
e.g.

MANAGEIN, "crowd, nom. managet, from the adjective haaeMANAGA (nominative masc. manag-s,
neut. managa-td)
;

MIKILEIN,

nom.

mikilei, " greatness,"

from
bases

MIKILA
in
6n,
I

{mikil-s, mikila-ta), "great."

As

to feminine

they have arisen from feminine bases in d;

and

have already observed that feminine adjective bases

in 6n

as

BLINDON,

nom.

hlindo, gen. blindon-s

must be
adjec-

derived, not from their masculine bases in an, but from the

primitive feminine bases in 6 (nom.

tives).

a,

Grimm's strong

Substantive bases with the genitive feminine in 6n pre;

suppose older ones in 6

is

and correspond, where comparison

made

with old languages connected in their bases, to

a,

Sanskrit feminines in
these old

Greek in

a,

ri,

Latin in a

and in
final

languages never lead to bases with a

tung6n),

n.

Thus,
to
{

TUGGON (pronounced
Latin
lingua,

nom.

tuggo,

answers
jihwd,

the

and
and

to

the

Sanskrit

fT3fT

= dschihwd,
;

see

. 17.);

DAURON,
vid6v6, "

nom.

daurd, to the
^scti-

Greek dupa
skrit

VIDOVON,

nom.

widow," to the

f^\m

uic?/iatj(l,

"the without man" (from the prep.

It is

f^ vi and V[^ dhava, "man"), and the Latin vidua.

true that, in
suffix

MITATHYON,

"

measure," nom. mitathyd, the

thgon completely answers to the Latin Hon, e.g. in

ACTION;
as
is

but here in Latin,

too, the

on

is

a later addition,

evinced from the connection of ti-on with the Sanskrit

ti,

suffix fiT

of the

same import, and Greek

.

a-i-g

(old rig),

Gothic

ti,

ihi,

di (see

91.).

And

in Gothic, together with

the base

MITATHYON exists one signifying the same, MInom.

mitaths.

TATHI,
the

In

RATHYON,
RATION,
;

nom.

raihy6, "ac-

count," a relationship with

suffix, is

at least in respect of

only a seeming one

for in Gothic the

:

word

is

[G. Ed.

p. 166.]

to be divided thus, rath-yon

to the root,

the th belongs.
part, rath-

in the Gothic

soil,

whence the strong

suffix ydn, of
ijd
;

nn{a)-s has been preserved.

The

RATHYON

therefore corresponds to the Sanskrit

"knowledge."

Of

the

same origin

is

e.g. in fwr vid-yd, GA-RUN-YON, nom.

garunyd, " inundation."

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
143.
If

155

a few

members

of a great family of languages

have suffered a loss in one and the same place, this

accident,
all

may

be

and

may
all
;

be explained on the general ground, that

languages, especially

sounds, in

when

final,

are sub-

ject to abrasion

but the concurrence of so

many

languages

in a loss in one and the

same place points

;

to relationship,

or to the high antiquity of such a loss

and in the case

before us, refers the rejection of an n of the base in the

nominative to a period before the migration of languages,

and to

tlie

position of the original site of the

It is

human

races,

which were afterwards separated.

fore, that the

surprising, there-

Greek, in this respect, shews no agreement

;

with

its sisters

and in

its v bases,

according to the measure

of the preceding vowel, abandons either merely the

nomiIt is

native sign, or the v alone, never both together.

question whether this

of language,

is

a remnant of the

oldest

period

or whether the v bases, carried

away by
which
again

the stream of analogies in the other consonantal declensions,

and by the

example of

their

own

oblique cases,
v to

do not permit the remembrance of the

and oldest path, after they had
loss

be

lost,

returned, at a comparatively later period, into the

common
similar

experienced

to the Sanskrit,

Zend, &c., by which

we

should be

conducted to nominative forms like

repe, TaA,a,

evSaiiioj, evdaifxo, Teprj,

raXd?
It

do not venture to decide with positivehere deserves to be

[G. Ed.

ness on this point, but the latter view appears to be the

more

probable.
that,

p.

167]

remarked,

in
is

German, the

n,

which in Gothic, in
the oblique

the nominative,
dialects

always suppressed, has in more modern

made

its

way

in

many words from

;

cases again into the nominative.

So early as the

Old

High German
native,

this

was the case

ein,
.

and, in fact, in femi-

nine bases in in (Gothic

70.),
ei

which, in the nomifull

oppose

to

the

Gothic

the

base

in

as

yuotlihhin, "glory" (see

Grimm,

p. 628).

In our

New High

156

FORMATION OF CASES,
the

German
fusion

phenomenon

is

worthy of

notice, that

many

original n bases of the masculine gender, through a con-

m
its

the use of language, are, in the singular, treated

;
i.

as

if

they originally terminated in na

e.

as

if

they be-

longed to

Grimm's
s,

first

strong declension.

Hence the n
is

makes

appearance in the nominative, and the genitive

which, indeed, in Gothic, not want-

regains the sign

ing in the n bases, but in High

German was withdrawn

since.

from them more than a

Brunnen, Brunnens,
is

thousand years

Thus,

used instead of the Old High Ger-

man
In

prunno, prunnin, and the Gothic hrunna, brunnin-s.

in

some words, together with the restored n there occurs

the nominative, also, the ancient form with n suppressed, as

Backe or Backen, Same or Samen ; but the genitive has in these words also introduced the s of the strong declension.

Among neuters the word Herz deserves consideration. The base is, in Old High German, HERZAN, in Middle High German HERZEN; the nominatives are, herza, herze ; the New German suppresses, together with the n of Herzen, the vowel also, as is done by many masculine n bases; as, e.g. Bar for Bare. As this is not a
transition into the strong declension, but rather a greater

weakening of the
[G. Ed.

weak nominative,
With
/xeAa-f
this

the

form

Herzens,

therefore, in the genitive, for an uninflected Herzen, is surp. 168.]

prising.
s

assumed or newly-re-

stored inflection

would be to be compared, in Greek, the

e\<}it-g,
;

nominative

g,

as of

and with the n of Brun;

nen for Brunne, the

v of Satfxoov, reprjv

in case, as is ren-

dered probable by the cognate languages, these old forms

have been obtained from

still

older, as 5eA^/, /xeAa, Batfxco, reprji

by an unorganic retrogade step into the stronger declension.*

That, in Greek, the renunciation of a
i/

of the base

is

not entirely
Several
viz.

unknown may be
cardinal

here shewn by an interesting

in

example.

numbers

Sanskrit

conclude

their

base

with "3 n;

pancha?i,

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
144.

157

Bases in

ar

(^ ri,

.1.) in Sanskrit reject the r in

it n,

the nominative, and, like those in

lengthen the pre-

ceding vowel
"brother,""

e.g.

from

JTTffT

mdtar, "mother," ^^TR; duhitar,

frjcR pilar, "father," >JT1T^ bhrdtar, "

daug^hter,"

come

f^f^^ pita,

^mn
r.

bhrdta,

mm

Jtiatd,

^f^ffl duhitn.

The

lengthening of the a serves,

for the rejected
all

I believe, as

a -compensation

As

to the retention, however,

through

the strong cases, excepting the vocative, of the long

of the agent,
rrjp,

which corresponds
tor, this

to

Greek formations in
all

Twp, and to Latin in

in

takes place because, in

pro-

words WTT tdr, and not iTT tar, is the original form of the suffix; and this is also supported by
bability,

these

the length of the suffix being retained in

Greek and Latin

[G. Ed.
p. 169.

through

all

the cases

rrip, Tiop,
r,

tor; only

that in Latin a final

in polysyllabic words, shortens

an

originally long vowel.

Compare
ORERK.
Sor^p,
BoT/jp-a,
^orrjp-e,
Sorfjp-eg,

SAWSKRrr.

LATIN.
dator,

Nom.

sing.

^T?n ddtd,

Ace. sing.

^TrnTH ddtdr-am,

dator-em,

N. A. v. dual, ^Tnfr ddtdr-au,

Nom. Voc.
The Zend
rejection

pi.

^irfK^ dutdr-as,

dator-es.

follows the analogy of the Sanskrit, both in the

of the r in the nominative, and in the length

vanchan, "five," saptan, "seven," ashtan with aahtau, "eight," riavan^

"nine," damn, "ten." These numerals are, indeed, used adjectively^ when they are not governed by the gender of their substantive, but display always a neuter form, and indeed, which
is

surprising, in the nominative^

accusative, and vocative sing, terminations, but in the other cases the suit-

pancha (not panehdnas) rdjdnat ; e.g. Xf^ TITTT^ " quinque reges "; on tbe other hand, ^^^ TUTO pancfiasu rdjasu " in quinque regibus." To the neuter nominatives and accusative of the sinable plural endings

gular TRT pancha,

j[Tf sapta,

.f^ nat)a, and

the

^^

dasa

^which
inrd,

rest

on the
Svca,

regular suppression of the

answer

Greek

neirre,

eVi/ea,

with the distinction that they have become quite indeclinable, and retain
the old uninfiected nominative through
all

the cases.

158

FORMATION OF CASES.
noun agent,
in the

of the preceding a of the

same

places

as in tlie Sanrkrit, with the exception of the nominative sin-

gular,
e

where the long

a,

as always

when

final, is

shortened;
;**

a5^ja5q) paita, "father,''

^g7A5^jA5C2)

M^JM^data, "giver,'' " Creator

ace

paitar-em,

^^/au^au^ ddtdr-em.

In Lithua-

nian there are some interesting remains, but only of femi-

nine bases in
tive,

er,

which drop
of the

this letter in the

nominathe
old

but in most

oblique cases

extend

er base

by the

later addition of

an
the

i.

Thus

mote, " wife,"

dukte

"

daughter,"
;

answer

to

abovementioned Jnrn
In the genitive singu-

tnOtd, sff KT duhitd

and, in the plural, moter-es, dulder-es, to

mwiyei mdtar-as, ^ffflC'H duh'itar-as.

lar I

regard the form moter-s, dukter-s, as the elder and

moteriis, dukterles, as corruptions be-

more genuine, and

longing to the
i

bases.

In the genitive plural the base

i;

has kept clear of this unorganic

hence, moler-u, dukfer-u,

not moteri-u, duktsri-u.

the

Besides the words just mentioned,

base

SESSER,

" sister,"

belongs to

this

place

it

answers to the Sanskrit

distinguishes itself
in that the
e,

nom. '^rfn swasd; but in the nominative from mote and dukte,
swasar,

^^

after the analogy of bases in en, passes into v,

thus

sessh.
p.

[G. Ed.

170.]

145.

The German languages agree

that,

in their
affinity)

r bases (to

which but a few words belong denoting

with the Greek and Latin in this point,

contrary to the

analogy just described, they retain the

r in the nominative.

As

-narrip, fxrjTrjp,

dvyaTrjp, Bai^p (Sanskrit,

^^ divar,

^^d^v/U

nom.
It is

\m devd), frater,
;

soror

so in Gothic, brdthar, svidart

suesiar, tohtar.
is

dauhtar

in Old

High German, vatar, pruodar,

or,

a question whether this r in the nominative

after

a rem-

nant of the original language,

suppressed, whether
actual
it

being anciently
its

has not again

made

way

in the

condition of the language from the oblique cases

I

into the nominative.

for the Sanskrit, Zend,

think the

latter

more probable

and Lithuanian are three witnesses

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.
for

159

the antiquity of the

suppression

of the r; and the

exhibit some'

Greek words

like ira-njp, fi^rip,

<T(iiTr,p, prfrtup,

thing peculiar and surprising in the consonantal declension,

in that p and ? not combining, they have not rather pre-

ferred giving

up the base-consonant than the case-sign

It

(as

irai^, Trous-, &c.).

would appear that the form

the

tt;? is

of

later origin, for this reason, that the p

having given place

rrjp-oq

to the nominative

$,

form

t>;-?,

whence

should

come, was, by an error of language, made to correspond to

the
ri-

of the first declension.

Latin, as in

The want of a cognate

Sanskrit, as
also the, in

form

in

Zend and

other respects, cognate form and similarity of meaning

with inr Mr,

to-r, rrjp

for the spuriousness

and TCdp, speak at least plainly enough and comparative youth of the nouns of

agency in
146.

rr]q.

Masculine and feminine primary forms in

^^

as

in

Sanskrit lengthen
are, for the

the a in the nominative singular.

part,

They

most

compounded, and contain, as

as,

the last member, a neuter substantive in ^?j

as ^ffr^
p.

durmanas,
(before
" mind,"

" evil-minded,"

from
25.

^tt

dus

[G. Ed.

171]

sonant

letters

5T dur) and
fern,

^^^ manas.
is

whence the nom. masc. and

durmanas.
in

^^rpw durmanas,
here
$vcrfi.eve^.

neut.

^^^
s

remarkable agreement
j;

shewn by the Greek,

Svcrfxevrj^, 6,

opposed to to

The ^

of y^Hi?T durmands,

unrecognised, to the base;

however, belong?, though and the nominative character is,

In Greek, on the other hand,

wanting, according to
the
J

94.

of

^v<TfMvfj

has the appearance of an inflexion, because

the genitive, &c.,is not ^vcruevecr-o^, like the Sanskrit ^

durmanas-as, but
.

Bvajxei'io^.

If,

however, what was said at

then in the compound

^hH^S 'ON

128

is

admitted, that the j of /xevo? belongs to the base, and

/xei'eoy is

abbreviated from

/xevecr-of,

SvafievTjg also,

and

all

similar adjectives, a

belonging to

the

base
lie

must be
at the

recognised, and the

form Bvaneveaos
In the

must

bottom of the genitive

Bvafxeveos.

160

FORMATION OF CASES.
g

nominative, therefore, either the

belongs to the base, and

then the agreement with

plete
;

or the

durmands would be comof the base has been dropped before the cases^-sfHT
is,

sign

?.

The
is

latter

in

my

opinion, least probable

also,

for the

former

supported by the Latin

answer

to

where the forms which the Sanskrit as bases are in the nom. masc. and

fem. in like

manner without

the case-sign.

Thus the San-

skrit comparative suffix is ^tto lyas the last a but one of which is lengthened in the strong cases, and invested with a

dull nasal (Anuswara,

. 9.)

in Latin,
;

ior,

with the

changed
in
o,

into

r,

which so frequently happens

is

and the nominative

:

both genders

without the case-sign

the originally long

final r.
as,

however,

is

shortened by the influence of the

In the
is
;

neuter us corresponds to the Sanskrit ^ra

favourable to a
final
s,

because u

and prevents

its

transition into r
JTT.1i|

hence gravius has the same relation to the Sanskrit

ganyas (irregular from

[G. Ed.
p. 172.]

jt;^

guruy

"heavy,") as

lupus

to

"^"JPfl^ vriftas,

only that the

s of the nomi-

native character in the latter belongs in the former to the

base.

The

final syllable ur,

though
us,

short,

must nevertheless
does to

be held, in Latin, as graver than

and hence gravior forms

a similar antithesis
8vcrixeve,

to gravius that in

Greek

Bva-fiev^g

147. In
isolated,

and in Sanskrit ^Rrr^ durmands to 5^^r^ durmanas. Lithuanian a nominative, which stands quite

menu (=:menuo),
:

"

moon*" and "month," deserves

here to be mentioned

it

proceeds from the primary form

MENES*.
the

and, in regard to the suppression of the final

consonant and the transformation of the preceding vowel, has

same

relation to it that, as above

(. 139.),

ahnu has

The

relation of this to ITPH mds,

which

signifies the

same

from ^T^
tiie

mds^ "to measnre," withont a derivative suffix

interposed nasal syllable ne answers to
tlic

is

remarkable; for
T

Sanskrit

na in roots of the

seventh class (see p. 118); and in this respect

relation to the Latin

MENES bears the same

MENSI that

1.

c.

fUtlf^ bhinadmi does iofindo.

NOMINATIVE SINGULAlL
to

l61

AKMEN, sessu
s

to

SESSER

in the oblique cases, also,

the
er

of the base again rs-appears, but receives, as in the

bases,

and en

an unorganic increase

thus the genitive

;

is menesio,

whence

MENESIA is the theme

wilka-s.

as wilko, " lup't"

from

WILKA,

nom.

148. In neuters,

throughout the whole Sanskrit family of

is

lan^uasres the nominative

identical with the accusative,

.

which subject

is

treated of at

152. &c.

We

here give a

seneral view of the nominative formation, and select for the

several terminations and gender of the primary forms, both
for these cases

and for
:

all

others which suit our purpose, the

oE ka,

following examples

Sanskrit ^05 vrika, m. " wolf ;"

;"

"who.?"
f.

^Tf d^na, n. "gift

cST

ta, n. "this ;"

fifd^ Jirtud,

"tongue f

ka, "which.?" rjfffpati,

^^fl^vdTi, n.

m.

"lord,''

"husband;"

Tr\fn
*'

;"" pritUt "love

"water ;"

vihj^Jifibliavishyanti,

who

is

about to be;" ^r^sunu, m. " son;"

f.

THT tanu,

"body;"

[G. Ed. p 173.] ini madhu, n. "honey," " wine;" T*l

ra.
f.

vadhu,
" ship."
final

f.

"wife;" t^gd,

"bullock,"

Of

the consonantal declension

"cow;" ^ ndu, f. we select only such

" speech
(. 129.)
cl.
'*-,

consonants as occur most frequently, whether in single

i.

words or in entire classes of words: ^T^ vach,

VRjR( hharont, in

the weakened form, >^^ bharat

" receiving;,"

m.
1.

n.

"

bearing,"

from

>tt

bhar
n.

(>T

bhri)

^rnW5T fitmnv,
hl.rdtar,

m. "soul;"

ttihtt

ndman,

"name;"

>JTcTT

ddlar,

m. "brother;" ^ffiTT duhitar, f. "daughter;" ^IT^ m. " giver ;" ^^w vachas, n. " speech," Greek, 'EHES,

eTTo? (. 14. 128.), for

FEDE^,
f.

Feiro?.

Zend, j^^7w^l^ verhka,

data, n.
jui^

m. " wolf ;"

to, n.

AJ^ ka,

m. " who

.?"

m^ma

datum

a>^

"this;"

jm^^^ hizrd,

"tongue;"

M, "which?"

cases:

* Masculines and feminines in the consonantal declension agree in all hence an example of one of the two genders is sufficient. Tha
is

only exception

the accusative plnnd of words denoting relationship in

^rr ar

^,

114.),

whxh

form

this case

from the abbreviated theme ia

162
J^JAJ^ paiti, m.

FORMATION OF CASES.
(. 41.)

" Lord

;"

j;o^^^am

^ti,

f.

" bless-

ing
"
f.
'*

;"

j9jmI^ vairi, n.
will
;"

who

be

;'"'

>j3ajq>

"water;" ^^^jxi^i)ip^_^ bushyainii, pasu, m. " tame animal ;" >yAj^ tanu,
n.

body

>^^

madhu,

"wine;"

^^

gd,

m.

f.

*'

bullock,"

[G. Ed.

p. 174.]

cow

"*;

^Awt

^^Aj^Aii barant, or
barat,

^^g^

barent,

m.

n. "

bearing

;" yAj^jJAj

f. "f weakened form ^aj^ asman, m. " heaven ;" jm^jmj

^^ch,

" speech " " voice

ndman
*
It

(also y-w^"^*/

nanman),
$.

n.

"name;"

Aj^au^I bTdtar,X

has been remarked at

123 of the cognate nom. cuj^ zoo,

"earth," accus. ^vnV ssahm, that I have only met with these two cases.

The very common form ^c^ z?m^ which

oblique cases,
article in the
is

is

found onl> in the other

nevertheless represented

b}'^

Burnouf, in a very interesting

I

Journal des Savans (Aug. 1832), which

only met with

after
I I

that page had been printed, as belonging to the

same theme.
I

agree with

him on

this point at present, so

much
^^'^^j

the rather as

believe

can account for the relationship of A>9?_<

"

terrce," (dat.)
1

J^? <

emi,
that

" in terra" &c.

to the Sanskrit

im gavS, 7Tf% gavi.

do not doubt,
at . 63.

is

to say, that, in accordance with

what has been remarked

and

p. 114, the

Zend ^

tw is to
v.

be regarded as nothing else than the

jf^ go,

hardening of the original

The Indian

before vowel terminations

gav, would consequently have made itself almost unintelligible in the meaning " earth," in Zend, by a double alteration ; first by the transition
of

to z, in

e.g.

^xs^jam, "
and

which J must be assumed as the middle step in which to go," from im gam, has remained ; secondly, by the
Advert,
also, to

hardening of the v to m.
since 8

the

Greek

8r],

for

yrj,

in brjfi^rrjp ;

z,

from

Hj

(=rfscA), have so divided themselves in the

sound whence they have sprung, that the Greek has retained the T-sound,
the

Zend the
I

sibilant.
;

cannot quote the nominative of this word

but
c
;

it

can only be

J^)(5^AM9 vdc-s, as palatals before

j^

change into

(S^

and thus, from

u>7a
druc-8.

drtij,

"an

evil

demon," occurs very frequently the nom. AM<Si>A

too,

have scarcely any doubt,

that

what Anquetil,
is

in

liis

Vocabulary, writes vdhksck, and renders by ^'parler, cri"

native of the said base
jkV
;

the nomi-

as Anquetil everywhere denotes

(3^

by kh, and
44, as

by

sch.

X
is

In the theme

we

drop, intentionally, the c e required

by

it

clear that ^aj^au^I brdtar, not

cZoyA/| brdiare, must be the base

word; 7aj^aj^ baraiar

also occurs, with a)

interposed.

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR.

163

m, "brother ;" 9m(^o>^ dughdhar, L "daughter;'* ?m^jm^

ddtar,

m.

"giver,"
It is
:

"creator;"

^?^Aj(p

vachd,

n.

(.

56".)

"word."

not requisite to give here examples in Greek

select the bases,

and Latin
Lith.

from liithuanian and Gothic we

Goth.

WILKJ,

JULFJ. m.

"wolf;" Lith. KA, Goth.

HFA, m. "who?"
Goth.

Lith.

GERA,
f.

n.

"good;" TJ,

n. "the;**

DAURA,
HVO,

n. "gate," (Sanskrit, STt dwara, n.);

THA,

D. "this;" Lith.
(.

RANKA,

"hand;" Goth, G1B0, f."gift"

69.);

f."

which?"; Lith.
/,

PATI, m. "Lord"*; Goth.

n.

GASTI, m.
"it;"
o/f);

"stranger;"
f.

m. "he,"

[G. Ed.

p. 175.]

Lith.

Goth.

"sheep," (Sansk. ^i^ avi, m. cf. otw, AWI, ANSTI, f."mercy;" Lith. Goth. SUNU, m. " son;*
f.

Goth.

HANDU,

"hand;" Lith.
Lith.

DARKU, n. "ugly;"

Goth.

FAIHU, n. "beast;" FIYAND, m. "foe;"

SVKANT,

m.t -turning; Goth.

m. "stone;" Goth.
;"

Lith.

AKMEN,

AHMAN,
SANSKRIT.

m.

" spirit ;"

NAMAN, n. " name BROTHAR,

f.

m. "brother;"
m. m.
vrika-s,
ka-s,

DAUHTAR, Lith. DUKTER,

EEND.

"daughter.*
GOTHIC.

GREEK.

LATIH.

UTBUAN.
wilka-s,
ka-s,

vehrkd,X
kd,X

\vko-^,

lupus,

vulf^s,

....

....

hva-s.

* In the comp. tpim-poii-a, "landlord";

with
in
. i

isolated

pats, "husband,"
all

in the

nominative suppressed, as

is

the case in Gothic in

bases

Compare the Zend j^.>aj<2)^^9

vtg-paiti,

" lord of the

region."

t These and other bases ending with a consonant are given only in
those cases which have remained free from a subsequent vowel addition.
I

Before the enclitic particle eha, as well here as in

(.

all

other forms, the

termination as, which otherwise becomes 6

o6^.), retains the

same
is

form which, in Sanskrit

AJftJJJAJA^feVc^j

also,

^7^ o^ assumes

before

^ cha

hence

said

vehrkascha, " lupusque," as in Sanskrit det S vrikascha. j

And
in

the appended cha

original

preserves the otherwise shortened final vowel

:

its

length

hence

ajcjau>j^ jihvdcha,
''

" linguaque,"

AJ^^^^jAs^^l^jll
'''fraterqus "
final

hushyuinitcha,

futuraque" aj^juj^au^ brdtdeha,

Even without

the aj^ at times the original length of the

:

vowel

is

found undiminished

the principle of abbreviation,

I therefore

how-

ever, remains adequately proved,

and

observe

it

everywhere

in the terminations.

164
SANSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.

GREEK.
JwjOO-V,
TO,

LATIN.

UTHDAN.

GOTHIC.

n.

ddna-m,
ta-t.

ddte-m,
ta-t,

doTium, gera.
is-tu-d.
ta-i.

daut'.
tka-ia.

Q.
f.
f.

jihwd.
kd.

hizva,*
kd,
paiti-s.

X<^pa,

terra.

ranka.

giba. hvd. gast's.

is.

....
TTOO-Z-y,

....

....

m. m.
f.

pat is,

hosti-s. pati-s.

....
prili-s.

....
nopTis,
t^pt,

is,
sitis,

....
awis.

dfriti-s
vairi.

ansfs.

n
1
1

vdri,

mare.
i-d.

....

Pn
^
ft

....

.... ....
!X,dv.g,
iriTV-s,

....
busenti,

i-ta.

gf. bhavishyant (, bushyainti*

m.stinu-s,

....

....
sunus.
handu'i
faihu.

paiu-s,
tanu-s.

pecu-s, sunus,

Sf. tanu-s,

socrus,
pecu.

....
darku.

n madhu.
.

madhu,
....
gdu-s,t

jxedv,

f.

vadhu-s,
.

....
/3oC-r,

....
bos,

....

....

m.f
f.
f.

gdu-s,f
ndu-s,

....

....
....

vav-^f
OTT-,
(}>epoiv,

....
vocs.

....
....

vdk,

vdc-s.

....

m.

bharan.

baran-s.

ferens, sukah-}\fiyand-i>
sermd'.

m.
n

dtmd\

asma,*
ndma'.
brdta\*

akma',

ahma'.

ndma,
bhrdtd\

rdXav,
ttarrjp,

nomen.
frater.

.... ....
dukte,'

nam6\
brdthar.

m.
f.

duhUd\
ddtdf
vachas,

dughdha*.

dvydrrip, mater.
doTrjp,
eTTOf,

dauhtar

m.
n.

data*
vachS,*

dator. opus.

....
.
.

ACCUSATIVE
SINGULAR.
149.

The character
;

of the accusative is
v,

in

Sanskrit,

Zend, and Latin

in Greek

for the sake of euphony.

still

In
to

Lithuanian the old

has become

more weakened

See the marginal note marked (X) ^^ t^ foregoing page.

t
X

Irregularly for Tft^

gos.

Or jiup^^

^"o*; 33.

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAE.
the dull re-echoing nasal, which in Sanskrit
[G. Ed.
p. 177.]

165
is called

Anu-

swara, and which we, in both languages,

express by n

(. 10.).

the Gothic even,

The German languages have, so early lost the accusative mark in substantives

entirely, but in

pronouns of the 3d person, as also in adjeconly

in

tive
sion,

bases ending with a vowel which follow their declen-

they have hitherto retained

the

it;

still

the

masculine:

feminine nowhere exhibits an accusative

is,

character, and

like its nominative, devoid of inflexion.

;

the High na instead of the old m The German, with more correctness, a simple n hence, Gothic hlind-na, " coecum,'* Old High German plinta-n, Middle and

Gothic gives

Modern High German

to the case-sign

blinde-n.

150. Primary forms terminating with a consonant prefix

a short vowel, as otherwise the combithus,

nation would be, in most cases, impossible:

skrit

in

San-

am, in Zend and Latin em, appears as the accusative

in the present condition of the language,
.

termination*: of the Greek av, which must originally have

existed, the v
lost:
is,

examples are given in

157.
i,

151. Monosyllabic

words in

u,

and

du, in

Sanskrit,
as

like consonantal bases, give

am

in place of the

mere m,

the accusative termination, probably in order in this

to

way

and n ndut "ship," form, not bhi-m and ndu-m, as the Greek vau-v would
polysyllabic.
vi\ bhi,

become

Thus,

" fear,"

From

the bases

^^3
if

''"f/ **^
S.

cJAmp vach^
;

I find

besides ^?Ji>

7a

druj^m, 9CASAU9 nlch'^, in the V.

9Jc>iau9 vdchim
:

al3o freqaently ^iii>7A drujim,

and

these forms are genuine, which I scarcely doubt,

they are to be thus explained

that

the vowel which stands before

is

only a means of conjunction for appending the

ever, the

for this purpose,

how-

Zend
for

uses, besides the

ce mentioned

at $.30, not unfrequently

^j; eg

^M^i^AXiA
;

dadhnahJ, occurs also

^m^jaxaa dadimaMy
answering to the SanvrSL"

and many similar forms

ricrit

as ^>a^ jj3> ns-i-mahi,

<f^Hn uimas (in the Vedas ^^nf^ usmati),

"we

166
[G. Ed. p. 178.]

FORMATION OF CASES.
lead us to expect, but fnVJ^ bhiy-am,

^H^

ndv-am.

With this agree the Greek themes in ev, since these give e-a, from eF-a, for ev-v; e.g. /3ao-/Ae(F)a, for /3a(ri\v-v, It is, however, wrong to regard the Latin em as the true, originally sole accusative termination, and for lupu-m, hora-m,

fruc-tum, diem, to seek out an older form lupo-em, hora-em,

fructu-em, die-em.

That the simple nasal

suffices to charac-

terize the accusative,

and that a precursory vowel was only

is

added out of other necessary reasons,

established, without Sanskrit

proved by the history

of our entire family of languages, and would be adequately

and Zend, by the Greek, Li-

thuanian, and Gothic. The Latin em in the accusative third declension is of a double kind: in one case the e belongs to the base, and stands, as in innumerable cases,
for i;

so that e-m, of igne-m (Sanskrit ^fj*f T

agni-m),
t-v,

corresponds to the Indian i-m, Zend i-m, Greek

Li-

thuanian

i-n,

Gothic i-na (from

ina,

"him"); but in the

a,

em

of consonantal bases the e answers to the Indian

it

to

which
152.

corresponds in

many

other cases also.

in a,

The

Sanskrit and

Zend neuter bases

and

those akin to them in Greek and Latin, as well as the two

natural genders, give a nasal as the sign of the accusative,

and introduce into the

nominative

also

this

character,

which

is less

personal, less animated, and is hence appro-

priated to the accusative as well as to the nominative in

the neuter

hence, Sansk.

^|44fH^

sayana-m, Zend ^jyAj^^AJjj

ioyane-m, "a bed"; so in Latin and Greek, donu-m, Jwjoo-v

AH
ter,

other bases, with but few exceptions, in Latin, remain

in the

nominative and accusative without any case characre-

and give the naked base, which in Latin, however,

i

places a final

by the cognate

e;

thus,

mare for mari corre-

[G. Ed. p. 179.]

the Greek, like

spends to the Sanskrit uf^ vdri, " water"; the Sanskrit and Zend, leaves the / unchanged
Sanskrit

HSpt-s, iiSpt, as in

vrf^

suchis,

tN suchl

The
tlie

following are examples of neuter u bases, which supply

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.

167

place both of nominative and accusative : in Sanskrit ire madhu, '* honey,^ " wine," asm, " tear," ^tT^ sicddu, " sweet'" in Zend >'^^ vdhm " wealth" (Sanskrit ?rB

^^

vasu); in

Greek

fiidv,

BaKpv, rjSv; in Latin ^ecu, genu.

The

length of this u is unorganic, and has probably passed into

the nominative, accusative, and vocative from the oblique
cases,

where the length

u

is

to be explained

from the sup-

pressed case terminations.

final
is

With regard
is

to the fact that

always long in Latin, there

perhaps a reason
ex-

always at hand for this length:

in the ablative, for

is

ample, the length of the originally short u

explicable as a

compensation for the case sign which has been dropped,

by which,

too,

the o of the second declension becomes long. shortness of the u of the fourth declension
pi.

The
is

original

perceivable from the dat.

u-bus.

The

2, in

Greek
is

words
ed at
case

like yevog, fievo^, evyeve^, has

.

been already explainthe

129.

as

belonging to the base: the same

e

with
:

the Latin

in

neuters

like

genus,

corpus,

gravius

it is

the other form of the r of the oblique cases,

(see
.

like gener-is, oorpor-is, gravior-is

127.);

and corpus

appears akin to the Sanskrit neuter of the same meaning,

vapus, gen. '^Tl^Tf capu-sh-as (see . 19.). and would consequently have an r too much, or the Sanskrit

^^

has lost one.*

Te/3ar,

The 2

also of neuter bases in T, in Teri/^xJf,

does not seem to

is

me

to be the case

sign, but

an
is

exchange with T, which

either rejected
(jj.e?u,

not admissible at the end, but

Trpdyfxa) or

exchanged
ttjoot/,

[G. Ed.

p, 180.]

for a cognate 2, as irpo^

from

Sanskrit

jffji

prati

Compare, in this respect, brachium, ^paxiav^ with m^Tl biihu-s, "arm"; frango, pifywfu, with tTTn^q bhanajmi^ "I break," Vf^Stm hhanjmas, " we break." t With thia view, which I have already developed in my treatise
**

On some

Demonstrative Bases, and their connection with various Pre-

and Conj unctions " (Berlin, by Diimmler), pp. 46, corresponds, as to the essential points, what Harttmg has since said on this
positions

fobject

168
In Latin
it is

FORMATION OF CASES.
to be regarded as inconsistent with the spirit

of the language, that most adjective bases ending with a

consonant retain the nominative sign

of the two natural

it

genders in the neuter, and in

the accusative, as
soler(t)s,

this

gender extend

also to

if it

belonged to the base, as capac-s felic-Sf

very

aman{f)s.

In general, in Latin, in consonantal bases,

is

the perception of the distinction of gender

much

blunted, as, contrary to the principle followed

skrit,

by the Sanis

Zend, Greek, and Gothic, the feminine

no longer

distinguished from the masculine.

153. In
line, the

Gothic substantives, as well neuter as mascu-

case sign

is

wanting, and hence neuter bases

i,

in a stand on the

same footing with the

all

u,

and consonantal
the nominative

bases of the cognate languages

in that, in

and accusative, they are devoid of

inflexion.

Compare,

with regard to the form of this case, daur{a) with ^TR**^ dwdram, which has the same meaning. In Gothic there
are

no neuter substantives
p. 181.]

in

i;

on the other hand, the

[G.Ed.

substantive bases in ya, by suppression of

(cf. . 135.),

the a in the nominative and accusative singular

gain in these cases the semblance of

base

bases;

e.g.

from the
likewise

liEIKYA, "rich"

(Sanskrit

TTW

rdjya,

neuter), comes, in the case mentioned, reiki, answering to

the

Sanskrit TTsRH? rdjya-m.

The want

of neuter

bases

suhject in his valuable

work on " On the Cases,"

is

p. 152, &c.

where

nlso

the p of ^irap and vScop

explained as coming from T, through the inter-

vention of

2..

The

Sanskrit, however, appears to attribute a different

origin to the p of these forms.

To

TJoinT yukrit

" liver " (likewise neuter),

corresponds hoxh jecur and ^irap,

through the common interchange between

"Httot-os should be
also in this

h and p
the

both owe to

it tlieir p,
'

as {jnar-os does its t

fjnapT-os, Sanskrit 7jc|ri f( yakrit-as.

But the Sanskrit

word, in
?

weak
e.g.

cases, can give up the

r,

but then irregularly substitutes

for

if

gen. X(^gfl yakn-as for tpiTtn^ yakanas.

With

regari to the

p ofvdwp, compare

TJ

udra, " water," in

W^ sani-udroy "sea."

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
in

169

German

is

the less surprisino^, that in the cognate Sanskrit,

Zend, and Greek, the corresponding termination in the neuter Of neuter u roots the substantive deis not very common.
clension has preserved only the single

FAIHU.
is

" beast."

In

Lithuanian the neuter in substantives

has
left traces

entirely lost, and

only in pronouns and adjectives, where the

latter relate to

case,

Adjective bases in u, in this pronouns. have their nominative and accusative singular in pc-

cordance with the cognate languages, without case sign;

e.(j.

darku, "ugly," corresponds as nominative and accusa-

tive neuter to the masculine

nominative darku-s, accusative

is

darku-n.
nian,

This analogy, however,

followed in Lithua;

by the adjective
forms

bases in a also

and thus

gera,

"good," corresponds as nominative and accusative to the

masculine
gera-s, gera-n,*

which are provided with

the sign of the case.

[G. Ed.
p. 182.]

154. It is a question whether the m, as

(it is

the sign of the nominative and accusative neuter

ex-

cluded from the vocative in Sanskrit and 2^nd), was originally limited simply to the a bases, and was not joined to the

The

e of neuter

forms like dide, "great," from the base

DIDYA

nom. maac.didi-s

for didya-Sy as . 135.* yaunikkis,

"youngling"

ex-

plain through the euphonic influence of the suppressed y.

As

also the
ia

feminine originally long a

is

changed into e by the same influence, so

the nominatire and accusative neuter in such words identical with the

nominative feminine, which

flexion
;

is

likewise, according to

137, devoid of in-

and dide therefore

remarkably

signifies also

" magna" and answers, as femiat ^. 137., as

nine, very
;t3

to the

Zend nominatives explained

)c/cq) perene,

ro^y>^iu2i brdturye.

In this sense are to be regarded,

also, the

feminine substantives in Ruhig's third declension, as far as they

e,

terminate in the nominative in

as giesme^

"song."

As no masculine

forms in

is

correspond to them, the discovery of the true nature of these

difficult
;

words becomes more

rankdy
tion, or

for the lost

is

or

has been preserved only

in the genitive plural,

i.e.

where tfiesmy-u

to be taken like rank-ti

from

the final vowel of the bases

is

suppressed before the termina-

has been melted

down with

it.

170
i

FORMATION OF CASES.
;

and m bases also

so that, in Sanskrit, for vdri

we had

ori-

ginally vdri-m, for madhu,

madhu-m ?
felt

I should
;

not wish to

deny the original existence of such forms

the a bases alone have
the nominative and accusative neuter
relation or of personality?
It is

for

why

should

the necessity of not leaving

without a sign of
that the

more probable

a bases adhered only the more firmly to the termination

once assumed, because they are by far the most numerous,

and could thus present a stronger opposition

structive influence of time

to

the de-

of their analogies;
stantive, in like

in

by means of the greater force the same way as the verb subits

manner, on account of

frequent use, has

allowed the old inflexion to pass less into oblivion, and in

German

has continued to our time several of the progeny of

;

the oldest period

as, for instance, the nasal, as characteristic

of the 1st person in bi-n, Old

High German pi-m Sans.

vr^JT^

bhavd-mi.

In Sanskrit, one example of an

i

as the

nomina-

tive and accusative sign of an

it stands quite isolated
;

base

is

not wanting, although

and indeed

this

form occurs in the

pronominal declension, which everywhere remains longest

true to the traditions of bygone ages.
I

mean

the interfaf ki,

rogative form

f^

ki-m,

"what"? from the base

I

which

may
is

perhaps, in Sanskrit, have produced

ki-t,

which

contained in the Latin qui-d, and which

f^TiT chit,

recog-

nise again, also, in the enclitic

ki-t

Otherwise

or u-bases of

weakened from fojnr pronouns in the nomina-

(man), substitutes
[G. Ed. p. 183.]

tive accusative neuter do not occur; for 'em awu, "that" adas ; and \h " this," combines with

^^ ^ dam (^^

idam, " this").

Concerning

the original procedure of consonantal bases in the nominative

and accusative neuters no explanation is afibrded by the pronominal declension, as all primary forms of pronouns terminate in vowels, and, indeed, for the most part, in
155. Pronominal bases in a in Sanskrit give
t,

a.

the inflexion of

Zend /, as the nominative and accusative neuter. The

in

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
Grothic gives, as in the accusative masculine,

171

na for

or n,

so here ta for simple

liarities of the

and transfers these,

like other pecu-

pronominal declension, as in the other Gere.g. hlinda-ta,

man

dialects, also to the adjective a bases;

" caecum,'''' midya-ta^ " medium.*'

The High German

Gothic
t

gives,

in the older period,

z instead of the

(. 87.),

in

the most

follows in
bases,

of

t.

modern period, s. The pronominal base I (later E) German, as in Latin, the analogy of the old a and the Latin gives, as in the old ablative, d instead The Greek must abandon all T sounds at the end of
:

words

the difference of the pronominal from the

common
however,

declension consists, therefore, in this respect, merely in

the absence of
all inflexion.

From

this difference,
it is

and the testimony of the cognate languages,

that TO

perceived

was originally sounded tot or

toS, for a tov

would

have remained unaltered, as in the masculine accusative.

Perhaps we have a remnant of a neuter-inflexion t in
so that
otti,
t,

we ought

to divide ot-t/

and therefore the double

(Buttmann,

in this form, would

no more have a mere metrical foundation,

128.) in ope(T-<Ti.
p. 85.)
t

than the double

'

o- (.

156.

We

find the origin of the neuter case-sign

in the

pronommal base K ta,

&c.);

" he," " this," (Greek TO, Goth,

THA,

and a convincing proof of the correctness of

is this,

this ex-

planation

that fnt ta-t "it" "this,** stands, in regard

to the base, in the

" she," as
t,

same contrast with

iR sa,

" he," Tn sd*

p. 184.]
(.
1

as the neuter case-sign, does to

[G. Ed.

the nominative s of masculine and feminine nouns

34.).

The

m
;

of the accusative also

is,

doubt not, of pronominal

origin

and

it is

remarkable that the compound pronouns

that,"

i-ma, "this,"

and a-mu, "

occur just as
;

little

as ta in the

nominative masculine and feminine

stitutes for the

but the Sanskrit sub-

base amu, in the nominative masculine and

s

feminine singular the form asdu, the

stands in the same relation to the

of which, therefore,

of ysn^ amu-m, " illum,^

cases, as,

amu-shya,

"

illius,""

and other oblique

among

178

FORMATION OF CASES.

the case-terminations, the sign of the masculine feminiiife

nominative to the
tive.

of the accusative and neuter nominais

Moreover, in Zend

used <a$9j imat, "

" this""

this," (n.)

(nom. accus.), but not imo, " this" (m.), but ^rsM

aim (from

^^ ayam), and 9^ im (from ^^ iyam),

in
tion to
JT

(f.). Observe Greek the pronominal base MI, which occurs only in the

accusative, and, in regard to its vowel, has the

same

rela-

ma
ta

(in the

compounded base
lf^

i-ma) that fsm

neut.

H-m

"

what?" has
( 87.),

to

ka-s "

who

"?

The Gothic
:

termination

anwers, in respect to the transposition of

sound
ever,

to the Latin

(id, istud)

this Latin d,
t
;

howthe
apot

seems

to

me

a descent from the older

as, e.g.,

b of ab has proceeded from the

diro;

of the cognate

^R

and in Zend the d of 9^__^* d-dem, "him," is clearly only a weakening of the ^ of iT ta, a5^ ta.'f [G. Ed. p. 185.] 157. To the Sanskrit ia-f, mentioned above,

Zend

ta-t,

Greek

to, &c.,

corresponds a Lithuanian
I

tai,

" the,"

as the nominative and accusative singular.

do not believe,

however, that the

* The d of d-d^
is

which

is

here incorporated in the base

to the

TA

the preposition corresponding

Sansk.

a.

" t See my treatise " On the Origin of the Cases in tlie Trans, of the As T in Greek easily becomes 2 (but a Berlin Academy for the year 1826. final 2 has in many parts of Grammar become v), Hartung founds on this,
in the pamphlet before mentioned, p.
original identity of neuters in v
ever, agree with
1.54,

the acute conjecture of an

in
t.

(m) with those

We

cannot,

how-

him

in this, because the case-sign,

is

m, on account of the origin

which we

ascribe to

tliis

as little surprising in the nominative

of the neuter as in the accusative of the

besides, a greater antiquity
is

more animated genders ; and

proved to belong to the neuter m, through

(ni mas), and in the dual tov,
viz.
;

the Sanskrit and Zend, than probably the v sounds can boast, which, in

Greek, stand for an older 2, as

Tov for yj^ thas, H??
inflexion
,

fxtv for fits

tas.

What

is

wanting in the Greek,

a neuter
J

appears, however, to be possessed

by the Sanskrit

and

am
to

inclined to divide the form

^^

ados,

" that " (nom.

accus.) into a-da-g^

Grit.

and
r.

to explain
;

it

as a corruption of a-da-t (cf.

Gramm.
when

Addend,
the

299.)

but to regard the syllable da as weakened from

ta, as in

Zend

^^AAU d-de-m, "him."

pronouns.

We

shall recur to this

treating of the

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR.
is

Vt3
d,

any way connected with the neuter

:

t,

of the cognate

languages

should rather turn to a relationship with the

{ovroa-t, eKeivoa-i),

/demonstrative in the Greek

and to the

it,

which

is,

in

Vedas

a petrified
;

manner, used enclitically in the neuter, which is no longer conscious of any

like

gender or case

and hence, in several cases, combining with

This

masculine pronouns of the third person,*

which, in the Greek
sity,

^
I

it,

is

consequently the sister form of the Latin id and Gothic

eKtvo(ri, has,
5,

i-ta,

perhaps only from neces-

dropped the t or

and which already, ere

I

was ac-

quainted with the Veda-dialect,

represented as a consis-

tent part of the conjunctions %tt chit (from cha

and

+ if),
p.

"if,"

net (na+it).

[G. Ed.
at
.

186

The words mentioned

SANSKRIT.

148.

form

in the accusative

ZEND.

CREEK.

LATIN.

UTHDAN.
wilhi-n,
ka-tif

GOTHIC.

m.
n.

irrika-m,

vehrke-my
ke-m,
ddte-m,
ta-t,

Xvko-v,
,

lupu-m,

vu/f.

m. ka-m,
dana-m,
ta-t,

hwa-na,

Su>po-v,
ro,

donu-m,
is-tu-d,

gera,
tn-i,

daur.
tha-ta.

n.
f.

jihwd-m,
kd-m,

hizva-nm,
ka-nin,
are given

-xoipa-v, terrain,

ranka-n,

gibn.

f.

....
by Rosen
as,

hvdA
pp. 24, 25,

* Examples

in his

Veda Specimen,
"he,"

which, though short, are in the highest degree interesting for Sanskrit

and comparative Grammar;

^T^

sa'it,

trf^lT iamit,

"him"

ir^fut /a^onV,

"of these two"; TTWTSW

tasmdit,

^ to him" ;

SHW

jiT

asmdit, "to this"

(m

).

The Zend combines

in the

same way

a) or

frequently.
Cf.

with the interrogative: A3J3A5^ kas^ and jjjaj^ kasi, "who"? occur Perhaps only one of the two modes of writing is correct.

Gramm.

Crit.

Addend,

to

r.

270.

t One would expect hv6-na, or, with abbreviation of the base, hva-na, which would be the same as the masculine. With regard to the lost casetermination,
it

may

be observed, that, in general, the feminines are less

constant in handing

down

the old inflexions.

it

A charge which

is

incurred
is

by the

Sanskrit in the nominative, since

gives kd for fcd-s* {. 137.),

incurred by the Gothic (for in this

accusative also.
* Cf.

manner the corruption spreads)

in the

386. p. 544.

174
SINSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEKD.
paiti-nif

GREEK.
ttoan-v,

LATIHr

UTBnAN.

GOTHIO.

m.

pati-m,

hostem, pdti-n,

gast\
i-na.

m
f.

pnti-m,
vdri,

mare,
i-d,

*
dwin,

dfrtti-m,
vairi,

TTopTi-v, siti-m,
i$pt,

ansf,

n.

....
....
*

n
f.

....
bhavishyantim,h{ishyainti-mi

....

i-ia.
.

m.sunu-m,

pasu-m,
tanii-m,

i')(Bv-v,

pecu-m, sunu-n, sunu.

socru-m, ....
pecu,

f.

tanu-m,
madfiu,

Ttirv-Vj

handu,

^n.

madhu,

fiidv,

darku, faihu.

^
f.

f.

vadhH-m,
ga-nm,-\
^ov-v,
vav-v,
oir-a,

J^ m.f.^4-m,t
ndv-anif

bov-em

....
vdch-em,

....
voc-em,

^.

f.

vdch-am.

....

* The feminine participial bases in t, mentioned at $. 119., remain free from foreign commixture only in the nominative and vocative singular
in all other cases, to the old
i

is

further added a

more modem a

and the

declension then follows

RANKA exactly;
i,

only that in some cases, through

the euphonic influence of the

and in analogy with the Zend and the

Latin

fifth

declension ($. 137.), the added

i is

a becomes,

or

may

become, e:

in the latter case the

suppressed, as

1.

c.

;o /JA5^ kain& for kainyS {. 42.).

(f.),

Thus, from sukanti, "the turning" (f ), sukusi, "the having turned"

and
czeh

suksentif

" the about

to turn,"

Mielcke gives the accusatives svkansuktiseh,

(see. p. 138,

Note) or sukanczian,
if,

and auksenczeh or suk'

4),

sencziah.

And even
e, o,

according to
it

before o,

is

scarcely heard,

Ruhig (by Mielcke, pp. 3, must not therefore, in this

the

case, as

well as in those there enumerated, be the less regarded as etymologically

present,

and

it

was

originally pronounced so as to be fully audible.

the feminine, where the t,a8 Sanskrit

tion, this

vowel appears

to

From grammar shews, has an original posihave made its way, in Lithuanian participial
and
to be here invested

bases, into the oblique cases of the masculine,

with
is

a short masculine

a.

The
it

accusative sukanti-h, " the turning" (masc),

therefore to be regarded in the

same

light as yaunikki-h,

from the theme

YAUNIKVA,

i.e.

stands for sukanfyi-h from sukantya-h, and hence

{, 42.),

answers to the Zend accusatives, like 9j7j^) tuirim for tuiryem and to the Gothic, like hari from the base (. 136.).

BApyA

t See

J.

121?.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

175

UTBCAN. GOTHIC.

m. bharant-am, barent-em, m. dtmdn-am, asman-emt ndma, n. ndma,

m. bhrdtar-am, brdtar-em.
f.

^epovT-a,
$aiixov-a,

ferent-em,

Jiyand,

sermon-em,

ahmaru

TaXav,
-narep-a,

nomen,
fratr-em.

namS.
brothar.

duhitar-am, dughdhar-em, 6vyaTep-a, matr-em,

ddtdr-em,
SoTrjp-a,
e-TTOJ,

dauhtar.

m. dntdr-um,
n.

dafor-emy
opus.

vachas,

vachd*

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE.
158.

The instrumental
inflexion
is,

is

denoted in Sanskrit by wi d
opinion, a
fi a,

and

this

in

my

[G. Ed.

p. 188.]

lengthening of the pronominal base

the
preposition

and identical with

"

^n

d,

" to,"

" towards,"

up

to,"

which

springs from this pronoun, and appears only as a prefix.

The Zend d appears still more decidedly in its pronominal nature in the compound mentioned at . 156. Note *, ^?/um As a d-dem, "him," "this," (m.) fern, ^-^i^ d-daiim.
case-sign,
juu

d generally appears abbreviated (see

p. 163.

Note

X)i

even where this termination has been melted into

;

one with a preceding aj a of the base so that in this case the primary form and the instrumental are completely
similar;
e.g.

Ajjaj^As^

zadsha,

"voluntarily,"

AJiio<|>A}<A

azadsha, " involuntarily," (V. S. p. 12.) Mf<3^xi6i^Mi skyadthna,

''actionem

often

occur;

ajjaj
**

ana,

"

through this"

(m.),

M^'^'^'^^J^JM^ paiti-berefa,

uUevato.^^'\

The long d appears

ai

in the instrumental only in monosyllabic bases in

a;

thus
Jcha
is

au^jo

khd, " proprio'''' V.

p. 46.),

from the base xi^

In Sanskrit a euphonic ^ n (Sanskrit siva, . 35.). added to bases ending with short vowels in the masc

* See.56.

t Cf. Gramm. Crit. r. 638. Rem. This interesting instmmental fonn was not known by Rask when he published his work on the Zend, and
It

was not easy

to discover

it,

on account of

its

discrepancy from the San-

gkrit

and the many other forms with

final aj a.

176

FORMATION OF CASE^.
final

and neut. genders;* a

suffix is

a,

however,

is,

as in several

other cases, changed into

shortened, as
of the base
vdri-n-d,
;

it

and the d of the caseappears to me, by the influence of

J^

6;

this clog

as "^WH vriki-n-a, but ^f^^T^ agniJnfTT

n-d,

^
(see

mTxjm
vnka,

WHTT sunu-n-d,

madhu-n-d, from
exhibit

&c.

The Vedas, however,

^})*i swajpni-n-a

further

remains of formations without the euphonic

swapnay-d for
.

n, as

^rrnn

from

^rJT

swapna, m. "sleep"

133.)

7^xn vru-y-d

for

T^wr
43.);

uru-n-a, from

^^

uru,

"great," with a euphonical y(%.

IT^Ti^

H^"^;^ prabdhav-d, from

prabdhu, from
p. 189.]

m^ bdhu,
pra.

" arm," with the preposition

[G. Ed.
finds "

u
in

The Veda-form WSfVl swapnayd,

dialect in irm mat/d, twayd, " thi'ough thee," from the

analogies

the
jtSjn

common

through me," and

bases

ma and
m.

twa, the a of which in this case, as in the

4.

loc, passes into

^^ sakhi,
d,

" friend," the

And from Jjfif pati, m. "Lord," and common dialect forms instruT

mentals without the interposition of

n, viz. "mtfj

paty-d,

TT^m sakhy-d.
as before

Feminines never admit a euphonic n; but

some other vowel terminations, passes

i

into

J? i,

that is to say,

is

blended with

it,

and

it is

shortened

to 'H a;

hence, f^;^Tn jihway-d (horn jihwi +

d).

The Zend
6,

follows in this the analogy of the Sanskrit.

159.

As

in Gothic, according to
thi, hvi,

. 69.,

just like

re^

presents ^sn d, so the forms

and
base

798.) regards as instrumental s,

which Grimm from the demonstrative

(pp. 790.

THA
base

and the interrogative HVA, correspond very

to

remarkably
the

the Zend instrumental, as

kha.

jkM^c

khd from
also
svi

as^jo

We

must, however, place

in the class of genuine

Zend instrumental forms, which

:

have been correctly preserved

* The
nouns
in

besides sv^ from

SVA

is also,

orig'nal has

''Stammen

gen. masc.

ond fem.

;"

but genitives of

a do not take a euphonic n, nor do feminine nouns ending in short vowels use such an augment in the instrumental : here is no doubt

some typographic

error.- Editor.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

in respect of its base,

177

akin to jim^o khd from kha (. 35.).* The meaning of svS is "as'' (o)S^), and the so, which has arisen in High German from sva or sv^, means both "as" and " so," &c. The case relatious, however, whicli are expressed by

"as" and " so" are genuine instrumentals.t

[G. Ed.

p. 190.]

The Anglo-Saxon form for sve is sid, in which of the Zend auj^ khd is most truly preserved.
sva, " so," is,
sve,

the colouring

The Gothic
:

according to

its

form, only the abbreviation of

tlirough

as a is the short equivalent both of and of d

this
its

abbreviation,

liowever, sva has

AyAj

become
is,

identical

with

theme, just as

ana in Zend
its

according to

. 158.,

not distinguished from

theme.
Gothic and in Old High
tlie

160. J As the dative in

German

very frequently expresses

the termination
also

instrumental relation, and

is

of the

dative

identical with the

Sanskrit-Zend instrumental character, shortened

in

only, as

polysyllabic

words

in

Zend,

it

may be

proper here to
of the

describe at the
dative.

same time the formation

it is

German

In a bases

in Gothic, as in Zend, identical

1

with the theme, and from

velirka

ULFA

comes

vidfa, as A>^^kv^(;>

from

EHRKA.

Moreover, there are some other

lengtli,

remarkable datives, which have preserved their due

and answer to the monosyllabic iustrumentals th^ v^ svS, which have been already explained, viz. hvamme-hf hvar-

ynmmS-h, "cuique," and ainummS-hun, "

ulli,"

for

ainamm^

Grimm's conjertures rtgarding the forms sva and svi (III. 43.) appear to

me

untenable

and an explanation of these forms, without

is

tlie

intervention of the Sanskrit and Zend,

at the

impossible.

More

regarding this

pronouns.

*' t If as " is regarded as ** through which means, in which manner or way," and "so" as 'ihrough Uiis means, in this way," it is certain that

among the

eight cases of the Sanskrit language there

is

be adapted in the relative and deironstrative to express

J

none which would "as" and " so."

to be everypi.

The German
identified

da. sing. is

according to
;

356.

Rem. 3

where

with the Sanskrit dative

and

so, too,

the dat.

the

of which appri aches as closely to the Sansk. bhyas, I^tin bus, Litlu mu*,
as the instrumental teriiiination
6/it',

Lith. mis.

1*78

FORMATION OF CASES.
Bases in
i

hurt (. 66.).*

reject this vowel before the case-

sign

hence

gast'-a for gastii-a:

is

on the other hand, in the

have been prooriginal vowel

u bases the termination

receives the

suppressed, and the base-vowel

will

Guna: hence sunau, which

;

nounced originally su-nav-a

termination, the
nature.
i'

so that, after suppressing the

its

has again returned to

The form sunav-a would answer

and
u,

to the

Veda form

n^T^m pra-bdhav-d.
with J
i >

In Zend, the bases which terminate

both in the instrumental and before most

of the other vowel terminations, assume

[G. Ed.

p. 191.]

Guna or
AAj^.u3j

not at pleasure.
bdzav-a,
57.)
;

Thus we

find in the

Vend.

S. p. 469,

"hrachio^^ as analogous to
p. 40S,

J|'fIlIT

pra-

-bdhav-d (.

on the other hand,

229, the

AiarfG^Ai^ zanfhiva

from

zantu,

"the slaying," "killing."

find,
1,

From
^yjj'^a)

>jm^q> paiisnu,

" dust,"

we

c. p.

form

pansnu, which
if

Anquetil translates by "par

cette poussiere";

and

the read-

ing

is

correct, then pansnu, in regard of the suppressed ter(

mination

compensation for which

),

is

made by lengthening
Gothic sunau.
lost,

the base vowel

161. Bases

would answer

to the

ending with a consonant have

in Ger-

man, the dative character: hence,

brdlhr
(.

in Gothic, ^?/ar?c/, ahmin,

132.), for fiyand-a,

ahmin-a, br6thr-a.\
to

All femi-

nines, too,

must be pronounced

have

lost

the

dative

sign, paradoxical as it
gibai,

may

appear to assert that the Gothic

huic,''''

"dona" and

thizai, "

izai, "ei,"

do not contain

any dative
gibai to

inflexion, while

we formerly

believed the at of

be connected

with the Sanskrit feminine dative

Here the appended

termination, as
is

particle has preserved the original length of the

if

the case in Zend in all instrumentals,

they are com-

bined with

AJc>J

cha,

" and."
{for fatera), "patri," proceeds,

+ The Old High German iormfcUere

as do the gemtive /atere-St and the accusative Jatera-n, from a

theme

FATERA, extended by a.

The

accusative ^a^erfl-w, however,

is

remark-

able, because substantives, so early as in the Gothic,

have

lost the accusa-

tive sign, together with the final

vowel of the base.

In Old High German a

few other substantives and proper names follow the analogy of

FATEJiA.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

character
culine

179

di.

and

neuter
not,

But as we have recognised in the masdative the Indo-Zend instrumental,

the

we could
the

except from

most urgent
necessity,

necessity,

betake ourselves to the Sanskrit dative for explanation of

Gothic

feminine

dative.

This

however,

does not

exist, for, e.g., hveitai,

"albaer from

HVEITO

from

HFEITJ, may
iwitay-d, " aM,''

be deduced from the instrumental iyrim

from

WI swM,

by suppressing the

ter-

mination, and changing the semi-vowel to a vowel in the

same manner as, above, sunau from sunav-a, [G. Ed. p. 192.] or as the fem. handau, " manui^ from handav-a* Analogous
with sunaUf handau, are also the dative feminine
and, e.g., anstai, "graticE," has the
i

bases

same

relation to its

theme

ANSTI that
162. In

handau has to

HANDU.
diu, hviu, correthS,

Old High German the forms

the

spond to the Gothic instrumentals

differ as to

hvS; but authorities

we
the

shall say

mode of writing them,* regarding which more under the pronouns. Tlie form hiuy

from a demonstrative base HI, has been preserved in compound hiutu for hiu-tagu, " on this day," " to-day" (see Grimm, p. 794), although the meaning is here properly locative. The Gothic has for it the dative himmaalso,

"daga.

This termination u has maintained

itself also in
i,

substantive

and adjective bases masc. neut. in a and

although

it is

only sparingly used, and principally after the

preposition mit (see Graff, I.e. pp. 110, 111); mit wortu,
" with a word,"

from

WORTA;

mit cuatu, " with good," from

C UA TA ;
important

mit kastu, " with a guest," from

KASTL
in
sociative

It is

here

to remark, that the instrumental

se,

Sanskrit
relation.

very frequently expresses, per

the

We

cannot, however, for this reason look

upon

this w case

as generically different

from the common

is

dative, which,

we

have already remarked,

With
reference to
tlieir

likewise of instrumental origin

use with various prepositions

readers to Graff's excellent treatise, "

tions," p. 181, &c.

we refer oar The Old High German Prrpuei-

N 2

180

FORMATION OF CASES.
:

and meaning
[G. Ed.

we

rather regard the u* as a corruption

u,

p. 193.]

(although one of very ancient date) of

just as in the neuter plural of pronouns and adjectives a u

corresponds to the short a of the Gothic and the older cognate

languages. In Lithuanian the a bases form their instruii,

mental in

which

is

long, and in which the final vowel

of the base has been melted down.

That
diewu

this
is

it,

also,

has
tlu^

arisen from a long

a,

and thus,
for

e.g.

akin to

Zend

Aj;c Ai^ dci^va,

" deo,""

ama)^

da^vd,

appears to

me

the less doubtful, as also in the plural diewais answers

AV5JAM;t)Aj^ daevdis,

very surprisingly to
over, in
ii

^^^dSvdis.
also, the

More-

many
In

other parts of grammar,

to

Lithuanian
the plural

corresponds

the

Sanskrit ^T d;
also,

e.g. in

genitive.

feminine a bases,
is

in

Lithuanian, the

vowel of the base

nation,
*'

melted down with that of the termiis

but

its

quality

not

changed

as,

e.g.

raiika

manu" from

RANKA.

In

all

other bases mi stands as

the termination, to which the plural instrumental termi-

nation mis has the same relation

(voJBIS,

as, in
63.,

Latin, bis to bi
I
b.

tiBI)

and, according to

do not doubt

that in both
163.

numbers the

m
in

has arisen from

.

The bases given

148. form, in the instrumental

and in the Gothic, in the dative,

SANSKRIT.

ZEND.

LITH-'ANIAN.

GOTHU;.

m.
f.

vrikS-n-n,

vahrka,
hizvay-a, paithy-a,
cannot

wi/kii,

vulfa.
gibai.

jihway-d.
paty-d.

ranka.
pati-mi,

m.

gast'-a.

Contrary to Grimm's opinion,

long, even not to notice
its

let.

the instrumental u pass as

;

derivation

from a short a

for, first, it

ap-

pears, according to Notker, in the pronominal forms diu, &c. without a cir-

cumflex (other instrumentals of the kind do not occur

secondly, like the short a,
it is
^^

in his
;

works);

exchanged for o

(. 77.)

hence, wio,

weo, with wiu, wio-lih, hueo-lih,

thirdly, the length of this
hvP,, sve,

quails " (properly, "similar to

whom");

u c&nnot be deduced from the Gothic forms tM,

all

because these, in

probability,

owe the

retention of their long

vowel

to their being monosyllabic (cf. . 137.).

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

SANSKRIT.
f.
f-

181

ZEND.

LITHUANIAN.

GOTHIC.

prity-d,

dfrithy-a.
1

awi-mi.
.

avstai.
.

bhavishyanty-d, busJiyainty-a,
sunu-n-d,
pasv-a.
tanv-a.

P s
v i
ii-i

m.
f. f.

sunu-mi,

sunau.

tanw-d.

vadhw-d,
gav-d.

....
gav-n,

m. f.
f.

ndv-d,
vdch-d.

....
vdch-a.
barent-a.

m.

bharat-d,

m.
n.

dtman-d.

asman-a,

ndmn-d,
bhrdfr-n,
duhitr-d.

ndman-a.
brdthr-a,

m.
f.

dughdlier-a^
ddthr-n.

m.
n.

ddfr-d.

vachas-d,

vacanh-a,

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

handau.

.... ....
fiyaiid.

ahmin.
namin.
brdthr.

dauhtr.

".

....

164. In

Sanskrit and Zend, ^

is

the sign of the dative,

which,

have scarce any doubt, originally belongs to the

S,

demonstrative base
i

whence the nom. ^npT ayam (from

it

am),

"this";

which, however, as

appears,

is

itself

only an extension of the base

of the cases of this

a,

from which arise most

pronoun {n-smdi, a-smdt, a-smin, &c.)

it

and regarding which

to S by the

is

to be observed, that the

common

a bases, also, in Sanskrit in

many
i

cases extend this vowel

admixture

of
its

an

(. 2.).

The dative sign conwas explained, de-

sequently would, in

origin,

be most intimately con160.)

nected with the case, which, as

(.

notes, in German, both the dative and instrumental relation,

and occurs in Zend also with a dative signification.*

* E.g. Vend.
9^^<3>q)

S. p.

45:

^^JM^QM^

JH341J^JJUuyAV)^^Ai

^9\^aj'

v^^JMM*i6^

Haomo afizdnditibis dadhditi csaito-puthrim, "Horn

who have not bad
offspring."

gives a splendid daughter to those

The

liihographcd Codex, liowever, gives the form azizdndUibis as three words.

182
[G. Ed.
p. 195.]

FORMATION OF CASES.

We

have here further

to

remark, that in

the pronoun of the 2d person the

bhi

affix ii

bhyam (from
the
plural.
i

+ am)

in ttwjh tu-hhyam,

" to thee/'

stands in evident
bhis

relationship to the instrumental

fk^

in

The feminine
u>

bases in

d,

i,

u,

and, at will also, those in

and
dz

prolong in Sanskrit the dative termination

final

to

with the
jihway-di

d of the base an

is

blended

hence faT3^^

from jivdi~di.

On

ceive the

Guna augment before ^ ^, but broader ^ di; as ^R^ sunav-S from sunu.
nation
:

the other hand, ^ i and 7 u renot before the

In Zend, femi-

nine a and i-bases, like the Sanskrit, have at for their termi-

however, hizvdy-di

is

not used, but

.>au^^ajjj

hizvay-di, from the base hizvd, as long vowels in the penulti-

mate, in polysyllabic bases, are

so frequently shortened.

Bases in j

have, in combination with the particle as^ cha,

preserved the Sanskrit form most truly, and exhibit, without

exception in this case, the form m^jgxs^^m at/-aS-cha (see

.28.), e.g. as^aj A5^^A5;e^2wj fcarsfayaecAa,

"and on account
cha,

of the ploughing," " in order to plough" (Vend. S. p. 198),

[G. Ed.
p. 196.]

from

karste.

Without
sole

however, the
occurs,
e.g.

form

A>g e^

is

almost

the

one

that

ri<^'^<^y>^ kharetei,

"in order to

eat,"

from i^<^M)A
ay-i,

hhareti.

This form,

doubt not, has arisen from to^^m

by

re-

jecting the semi-vowel, after

which the preceding

as

a has

become
dfrile,

g e (. 31.).

Forms

like ;o^^j*axj dfntS* or

j^^j^au

which sometimes occur, and are most corrupted, may

Such separations in the middle of a
I entertain

AW^ J^ iJMJMSf
word
are,

J(AJ azi zdnditi his.

however, in this Codex, qnite common.

no doubt
I anti-

of the correctness of the length of the a, both of

cipate a variety aztzanaitibis or
csaito.
bis.

zd and ndi ; and

is

Probably also csaSto

la

to be read for

Anquetil translates

" O Ilom, donnez a

femme, qui

n'a pas

encore engendre, beaucoup d'enfans brillans."

hereafter
;

We will return to this passage

that, at the

and we will here further remark

same page of the

'*

Vend.

S.,

the instr. AU.5i;0A) a^bis also occurs in the sense of

to them.'*

Cf. p, 286

Note f.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

rest
e.g.

183

on errors in writing.*

Bases in u

may

take

Guna
The

;cAj'9uU9 van-hav-e

from >w^lfvatihu, "pure"; or not

as A3<JAj7 rol/jv-^ from >^xi) rata, "great," "lord."

form without Guna

also is

euphonic ^^ y found interposed between the base and the termiis

the

more common.

nation (.43)
165.

e.g. ;t3^j>yAj^

ianu-y-i, " c&rpori.'^

;

Bases in
i (

but from ^ with

^ a add to the case-sign i also an ^ a = a +1) and a is formed ^m aya ; and this,
Aya,
arisen,

the a of the base, gives

thus ^cH'T vrikdyn.

final
a,

Hence may have

Zendian

by suppressing the

the

jjuuj7'j(p vehrkdi, after

vowel must return to

its

which the preceding semivowel nature. It might, how-

ever, be assumed, that the

Zend has never added an a

for

to

the dative

e,

and that

this is a later

appearance in Sanskrit,
;

which arose after the division of languages

is

from a f ^

formed, quite regularly, di

(. 2.).

The Sanskrit forms

is ;

also,

from the

particle

w
?

sma,

which

added to pro-

nouns of the 3d person, the dative

oR^ hasmdi, " to
knhmdi.
the

^ smdi

and

thus,

e.g.

whom"

answers to the Zend

im^^
addino-

The

Sanskrit, in this case, abstains

is

from

a,

which

elsewhere appended to the dative ^ ^

since
cipal

sma, already encumbered with the preceding prin-

nation,
cal

pronoun, cannot admit any superfluity in its termiand for this reason gives up its radi- [G. Ed. p. 197.3
a before the termination

in in the

locative

case

also,

and forms sm-in for smen.

166.
tion,

The

particle

w sma, mentioned in the preceding secitself

which introduces

between the base and the

this,

ter-

mination, not only in the singular, but (and

occurs in pronouns of the two
if

in fact,

first
I

persons) in the plural also,

first

not separated from both

as

have

attempted to shew

* ^^^jus dfrite

is

undoubtedly incorrect

however, c

is

ofln

found erroneously for jc

em other forma alec.

184
in

FORMATION OF CASES.
Sanskrit

my

Grammar gives
this

to the

pronominal declenit

sion the appearance of greater peculiarity than

possesses.

in fact

As

particle

recurs also in the

cognate

European languages, and

partly

there, as I

have already elsewhere

shewn, solves several

enigmas of declension,
appearance, pursue
it is
all

we
its

will therefore here, at its

first

modifications and corruptions, as far as

possible.

In

Zend, sma, according to

53.,

has been changed to hma;

the plural of the two
besides,
first

and also in Prakrit and

persons, the
s;

Pali, in
h,

has become

and
"

by transposition
altered
^TfTojrH

of the two consonants, the syllable

to

mha

e.g.

Prakrit

^srT%

amM,

hma has been we" (a/i/xey), Pali

amhdkam, Zend ^^^au^ ahmdkem, rifj-iov. From the PrakiitPali mha we arrive at the Gothic nsa in u-nsa-ra, rjuQiv,
u-nsi-s,*
**

nobis,''''

" wos."

In that the Gothic has

left

the

sibilant unaltered, it stands

on

an older footing than the

Pali and Prakrit

and on the other hand, by the change

facile

of

into n, for
s,

more

combination with the followstage.

ing

it

rests

on a more modern
the

We

cannot,

therefore,
[G. Ed.

any longer assume

p. 198.]

the ns of uns, " nos,'" to

accusative termination, as

be

common

we

have formerly done in unison with

gasti-ns, sunu-ns

Grimmt
it,

cf.

vulfa-ns,

and thence
with

allow

as though

it

had becases,

come a property
and connect
it

of the base, to enter into

some other

new

case-terminations.

To

this is op-

posed, also, the 2d person, where izvis {i-zvis) stands in the

accusative,

and yet in
;

essentials the

two persons are identical

nos,''''

in their declension

uns, " nobis," "

stands, therefore, for

unsi-s (from wnsa-i),

and

this has s as the case-suffix,

and u-nsa

(weakened from

u-nsi)

as the

compound

base.

And we

* The a being changed into I. 813. " unsara appears

Cf.

according to

r.

67.

to be derived frora the accusative una, as

to the

aloo the dative

unsu, which, with izwis, preserves a parallel sound

I,

dative singular."

813, 34,

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGDLAB.

185

cannot, also, any longer regard the of unsa-ra, " nostr'C

&c. as the vocalized v of

izvarat "vestriT &e.

veis,

"we," although the

of

can be nothing
goes through

else than the vocalized

y of yu9,

**

your''

for in Sanskrit, also, the syllable

all

yu,

of

yuyam, "ye,"
while in the

(.43.)
1st

the oblique cases,

person the ^

r of

^Tlf[^

vayam, "we,"

is

limited to the nominative, but the oblique cases combine a

base

This a, then, in Gothic, 'S a with the particle FT sma. through the influence of the following liquid, has become
u
;

hence, unsn-ra, &f. for ans-ara

167.

(. 66.).

As

in Zend, the Sanskrit possessive

swa shews
diffe-

itself* in

very different forms in juxta-position with

so
I

rent

letters,

believe
least

can point

out

the
;

particle

sma in Gothic at
the second

under four forms

namely,

as nm, zvn, gka, and

discussed
;

mma.
zva,

The

first

has been already

zvi

and in a weakened form

occurs in the pronoun

the
1st

of the 2d person, in the place

;

where

has nsa {mi)

and while in the cognate Asiatic

languages (Sanskrit, Zend, Pali, Prakrit), as also in Greek and

Litimanian, the two pronouns run quite
[G. Ed.
p. 1D9.]

parallel in the plural, since they both exhibit the interposed

particle

under discussion, either in

its

original form, or simi-

larly modified, in

Gothic a discrepancy has arisen between the

that the

two persons,

in

doubly transformed.

sma has in them been The form zva from sma rests, first,
syllable
s into z (. 86. 5.)

on the not surprising change of the

secondly, on the very
168.

common change

of

and v

(. 63.).

From

the Gothic downwards, the particle

sma has

been

still

further corrupted in the

German

dialects, in the

pronoun of the 2d person, by the expulsion of the sibilant. The Old High German i-wa-r has nearly the same relation
to the

Gothic i-zva-ra that the Homeric genitive roio has

See Ann. of Lit. Crit. March 1831,

p.

376,

&c

186

FORMATION OF CASES,
which is older than the Homeric Compare, without intervention of the Gothic, the
i-iva-r,
i-u,

to the Sanskrit kt^ tasya,

form.

Old High German

thuanian

i-wi-h.

with the Sanskrit

yu-shmd-kam, yu-shma-hhyam, yu-shmd-n, and with the Liyu-sii,

yu-mus, yu-s

thus

it

would be regarded as
is

settled, that the tv

or u belongs to the base, but

not the

corrupted remainder of a far-extended intermediate pro-

noun; and
opinion.

it

would be incorrect to divide iw-ar,

I,

iw-ih,

in,

for i-wa-r, &c.

too, formerly entertained that erroneous

repeated examination, and the enlarged views

since then obtained

through the Zend, Prakrit, and

Pali,

leave

me

thoroughly convinced, that the Gothic interme-

diate syllable zva has not been lost in

High German, but

i-zvi-s,

that one portion

of

it

has been preserved even to our

e-u-ch

time

(e-ue-r

from
:

i-zva-ra,

from

Old High

German
(^^

i-ivi-h)

on the other hand, the u of the base yu

yu), as in

Gothic so also in the oldest form of the High

[G. Ed.

p. 200.]

German,

is

rejected in the oblique cases,

;

both in the plural and in the dual*

^

and the Gothic

zva-ra,

Old High German i-wa-r &c., stand

for yu-zva-ra, yu-wa-r.

The Old
nian,
base,

Saxon, however, and Anglo-Saxon, like the Lithuain respect to the preservation of the

shew themselves,

which in

more complete than the Gothic, and carry the w, Anglo-Saxon has become o, through all the
iu-we-r,
eo-ve-r,

oblique cases:

"vestri^

&c.

If

merely
dis-

the two historical extremes of the forms here under

cussion

the

Sanskrit and

New German

forms

be

con-

trasted with one another, the assertion

must appear very

paradoxical, that euer and ^^HI^iH,

yushmdkam are connected,

and, indeed, in such wise, that the u of euer has nothing

So much the more remari<able

dialect

is

the u, which

is still

retained in the
In

North Friesian

(Grimm,

p. 81-1),

where, e.g. yu-nkcr, yu-nk.

ropard to the base, distinguishes itself advantageously from the Gothic

i-ijqva-ra, i-nqri-s.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

in

187

common
169.

with the u of

tf

yu^ but finds its origin in the

of the syllable

w sma.
and plural in the oblique
first

The

distinction of the dual

cases of the two

the

persons

is

not organic in

German

for

the case-terminations.
are, in Gothic, the

two plural numbers are distinguished originally only by These, however, in our pronouns
same; and the difference between the
lie

two plural numbers appears to

vZi'iv,

in the base

ugka-ra,*

unsa-ra, ^fidv, igqva-ra,

(TtpCtiv,

izva-ra, vficiv.

But from

more

close analysis of the forms in the

two plural numalso identical

bers,

and from the light afforded us by the cognate Asiatic

it

languages,
in the

appears that the proper base

;

is

two plural numbers

it

and

it is

only the particle sma

combined with
the plural.

which has become doufely corrupted, and

then the one form has become fixed in the dual, the other in

The former comes nearest

to

[G. Ed.

p.

201.]

the Prakrit-Pali form 5 mhat and between u-nsa-ra and

u-gha-ra {=u-nka-ra) an intervening u-nha-ra or u-mha-ra

must be assumed.

At

least I do not think that the old s beis

came k

at one spring, but that the latter

h,

a hardened form
Pali,

of an earlier

which has remained in the Prakrit and

as in the singular nominative the k of ik has been develo{>ed

from the h of ^p? aham.

Gothic, qv

The second person

k,

gives, in

{=kv

86.

i.)

for

while the other dialects leave

the guttural the same form in both persons: Old High Ger-

man, u-ncha-r, i-ncha-r ;

Old
i-nce-r.

Slavonic,
It

u-nA'e-r,

i-r,ke-r

Anglo-Saxon,

u-nce-r,

would

consequently
first

appear proved that the dual and plural of the two

persons are not organically or originally different, but belong, as

distortions

and mutilations of
;

different kinds, to

one and the same original form

t\^o

and that therefore these

little

pronouns have preserved the old dual just as

as

It

must not be overlooked, that here g before k only represents the

1.).

nasal answering to k (86.

188

FORMATION OF CASES.
all

the other pronouns and

clensions.
170.
is

substantive and adjective de-

The fourth form

which
I

in

which

w sma appears in Gothic

I

that

first

remarked, and which

have brought

forward already in the "Annals of Oriental Literature"

(p. 16).

What

have there

said, that the datives singular,

like

thamma, imma,

ha.ve arisen,

by

assimilation,

from

tha-

sma, i-sma, I have since found remarkably confirmed by

the

Grammar

of the
is

Old Prussian published by Vater, a

pronouns of the third person
e.g.

language which

nearly connected with the Lithuanian

all

and Gothic, since here

have smu in the dative.
Gothic
Gothic hva-mma, "to

Compare,

anfar-smu with the

anthara-mma, "to the other":

ka-smu with the

whom?"

We

have also shewn in

ipr

Greek, since then, a remnant of the appended pronoun

sma similar
[G. Ed.
v-fxfi-eg,

to the Gothic,

and which rests on assimilation,

the

p. 202.]

since

we deduced

^olic forms

a-/i/x-e?,

&c.,

from
vixeig,

oi-a-fxe-es,

v-a-fxe-es,

to which the

common

forms

rjiJ.ei,

have the same relation that the Old High

are

German de-mu has to the Gothic tha-mma, only that rjfMeig, vfxei^,
in respect to the termination
6?$-,

more

perfect than the

^olic forms, since they have not

Cfxe,

lost the
/xeTj.

vowel of the particle

but have contracted

/xe-ef

to

171. The Gothic datives in

. 160.,

mma

are, as

follows

from

by

origin, instrumentals,* although the particle

sma

in Sanskrit has not

made
158.),

its

way

into these cases, and e.g.

or,

^
*

tSna, "

through him," not tasm^na,

(.

according to the
is

Zend

principle

tasma (for tasmd),

principle;

used

say, according to the

Zend

for though in this

The

difference

between the forms

thS, hvS,

explained at .159., and

that the latter express

the datives tha-mma, hva-mma, consists

first in this,

the case relation by the affixed particle, the former in the main base
secondly, in this, that

thamma, hvamma, for thamm4, hvammS, on account

of their being polysyllabic, have not preserved the original length of

the termination
(cf. . 137.)

INSTRUMKNTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

1S9

language hma has entered miO the instruuienUil mascuiine

and neuter,

this ease iu the base ta could only

be aj^;o tahma

or ju)^^ tahmd (from ta-hma-a).

In the feminine, as

we

can sufficiently prove, the ap})ended pronoun really occurs in

tlie

instrumental and while

;

e.g.

from the masculine and neuter

(n,),

base xijM una, "

this'""

(m.),

"this"

we have found

the

instrumental of the same sound

the demonstrative base
aj

AjyAj

ana not anahma, from

a occurs rather often the feminine

instrumental as^^^ ahmy-a, from the fem. base

increased by the appended pronoun.
172.

^^ ahmi,
p. -203]

The

Sixuski

it

appended pronoun

L^. Ed.

W sma should, in the feminine, form either tRT smd. or wt on the latter is based the Zend form ^Q hmi, mentioned 57ni at . 171. But in Sanskrit the feminine form wt smi has
:

been preserved only in such a mutilated condition,* that before

my

acquaintance with the Zend

could not recognise

it.

From

ta-smi must

come

the dative fa-smy-di, the gen. and

ablative ta-smy-As, and the locative ta-smy-dm.

These forms,

by rejecting the m, have become abbreviated to tt^ ta-sy-ait l*fl!H^ fa-sy-ds, rff^m^ ta-sy-dm; and the same is the case with the feminine pronoun smi in all similar compounds; so
that the forms mentioned appear to have proceeded from the

masculine and neuter genitive tasya, by the annexation of new

case-terminations.

This opinion was the more to be relied

on, that in Gothic, also, the feminine

forms

ihi-zds, "hujus,""

* The Zend, too, has not everywhere so fully preserved the feminine hmi, as in the instr. a-hmij-a; but in the genitive, dative, and ablative
has gone even farther than the Sanskrit in
tlie

demolition of this word,

t.

and has therein rejected not only the

but also the

The feminine
it

^W-^
also

a-n^'-ao($. 5Ga.)>

"%/' for
which the

a-'""y-ao, often occurs; and for

^fev^AJ
dative

ainh-do, in

i is,

to use the expression, a reflec

tion of the lost ^^

ilie

(. 41.).

From

another demonstrative base

we

find

jMiiy^Ai

ava-nh-ai, and

more than once the

ablative

X'A^A> ava-nL-dt

for ava-hmy-di, ava-hmy-dt.

19b
thi-zai,
this,

FORMATION OF CASES.
"huic^ might be deduced from the masculine genitive
6s

by the addition of the terminations

and ai

and

as, too,

in Lithuanian, the whole of the oblique cases singular of the

1st

and 2d person stand in close connection with the Sanskrit-

Zend genitives in? mama, xsjxs^ mana, HW tava, a}aj^ tava, and have the same as base. After discovering the Zend fe[G. Ed. p. 204.]

minine pronominal forms in hmy-a in the

instrumental and locative

in

the latter for hmy-anm

the
then,
di-

above-mentioned forms in Sanskrit cannot be regarded otherwise than as abbreviations oUa-smy-di, &c., as this
suited to the nature of the thing.
thizds, thizai, will
is

far more

The Gothic forms

be regarded as abbreviated, and must be

vided into

thi-z6-s, thi-zai.

The masculine and neuter appended

in

pronoun sma must, for instance,

base

Gothic give the feminine

SMO = WT smd, as BLIND 0,

m.
n.

nom.

blinda, "cwcot"'''

from

BLINDA,
by the
tion

(nom. blind's, hlinda-ta).

SMO,

however,

loss of the m, as

experienced by the Sanskrit in the

;

feminine, has become

SO

but the

s,

on account of
.

its posiz.

between two vowels (according to

86.

5.),

has become

Therefore, thi-z6-s * has

only s as case-sign, and the dative

thi-zai, like gibai in . 161., is

without case character.

With

the masculine and neuter genitive this, therefore,

zai,

thi-z6-s, thi-

have nothing in

common

but the demonstrative theme

i (.

THA, and
jectives)

the weakening of its a to

adjective

6&.).

173. Gothic

bases in a (Grimm's strong ad-

which follow the

pronominal declension,

differ

from

it,

however, in this point, that they do not weaken

i,

the final a of the base before the appended pronoun to

but extend

it to at,

and form the feminine dative from the

not

simple theme, according to the analogy of the substantives t

:

hence

blindai-z6-s, blindai,

blindi-zd-s, blindi-zai.

* Cf.

356.

Rem.

3. p. 601. last line

but seven.

+ With respect

to the extension of the

iis,

to ai,

compare the gen.

pi.

and

Sanskrit forms, as tS-bhj/ag, "

tSshdm, "eorum," for ta-bht/as, ta sdm.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

1*74.

191

The Zeml introduces our pronominal

syllable

sma

in the

form of hmu also into the second, and probably into

the first person too:

jCAjjxjCa'

we

find

repeatedly, in the locative,

[G. Ed.
p. 205.]

thuu-hni-i, instead of the Sanskrit

i^fil

Ucay-i,

and hence deduce, in the

1st

person, ma-him'-i,
Prakrit, in this

which we cannot quote as occurring.

respect, follows the analogy of the Zend

The
;

and in the 2d perthee,'' or,

son

irives

the form inrfw tuma-svi

"HTfwr

-i,

" in

with

assimilation,

tumammi, with im tume (from tumn-i)

mama-srn-i or HHdH mama-mmi,
also, in
"

and

IT^ tai;

and

JwfiFR

in

me," together with the simple h^ mai and h^ ma'L* Ought

not, therefore, in
first

German
s in

the singular of the two

persons, a

remnant

of the pronominal syllable

sma

to

be

looked for?
" to

The
and

the

Gothic

mi-St

"to me," thus,

thee,"

sis,
;

" to

himself,"

appears to

me

in

no

other

way

intelligible

for in our Indo-European family of

s

languages there exists no

or dative.
" nobis,"" "

as the suflBx of the instrumental

is

Of
nos"

similar origin
i-zvis, "

the

in the plural u-nsis,

co6w," " vos

"";

and

its

appearance in

two otherwise differently denoted cases cannot therefore be

surprising, because this s
is

neither the dative nor accusative

character, but belongs to a syllable,

which could be declined

all

through

all cases,

but

is

here deprived of
the Sanslq-it
?it

case-sign.
is

In

u-nsi-s, i-zvis, therefore,

sma

doubly con-

tained, once as the base,

I

and next as the apparent case-suSix.

above-mentioned Prakrit
thee,"

am

inclined, also, to affirm of the

forms,

tu-masm'i, "in

and ma-masm'i, "in me,"

that they doubly contain the pronominal syllable sma, and

that the middle syllable has dropped a preceding

s.

For
and

there

is

no more favourite and

facile

combination in our
;

class of languages'

than of a pronoun with a pronoun

is

what

is

omitted by one dialect in this respect

often

afterwards supplied by another

more modern

dialect.

See Essai iur

le

Pali,

by . Burnoof and Laasen, pp. 173. 17&

192
[G. Ed. p. 206.]
thu-k, si-k {me,
vcot'v,

FORMATION OF CASES.
175.

te, se),
s,

The k in the Gothic accusatives mi-k, may be deduced, as above, iu u-gka-ra,

;

&c.,

from

by the hardening of an intervening h

and thence to mi-k
;

so

that

mis

is altered to mi-h,

and thereand ac-

fore, in the singular, as also in the plural, the dative

cusative of the two In Old

first

persons are, in their origin, identical.

particle

High German and Anglo-Saxon our

Old High Gi^rman mi-h " me,"
di-h,
*'

ap-

pears in the accusative singular and plural in the same

form

thee," u-nsi-h,
w-s/-c, " us,"

"us,"
the-c,

i-M'i-//,

"

you";
eo-vi-c,

Anglo-Saxon me-c,

"

me,"

"thee,"

"you":

on the other hand,

in the Old
mi-r,
di-r

in

the

dative singular the old s of the svllable

in the

sma has become r

Saxon
;

High German, but has disappeared Old High German and Anglo-Saxon
:

Old

Saxon mi,
176.

tin;

Anglo-Saxon me,

the.

In Lithuanian

w sma

appears in the same form

(.

as in the middle of the above-mentioned

174.) Prakrit
first,

forms

namely, with

dropped, as

ma and
;

indeed,

in

the dative and locative sing, of the pronouns of the 3d per-

son and adjectives

and, secondly, in the genitive dual of the

two

we cannot, however, refer to this the m, which the latter in some cases have in common with the substantive declension. The pronominal base TJ, and the
first

persons

adjective base

GERA,
good

form, in the dative, td-mui, " to thee,"

"
;

(jera-mui, " to the

(shortened /am, gerdm), and in the

locative ta-mb, gera-mh

and

if

-mui and -me are compared

it

with the corresponding cases of the substantive a bases,

is easily

seen that mui and me have sprung from ma.

first

The

pronouns of the two

persons form, in the genitive dual,

mu-mtJ, yu-mH, according to the analogy of ponH, " of the

two

lords."

We have a

remnant of a more perfect form of the

particle

9T smn

in

the locative interrogative form ka-mme, " where "? Sansk. '3|;f^^ ka-smin,

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE SINGULAR.

177. Lithuanian substantives

193

have

for

[G. Ed. p.2C)7.]

the dative character, but

this
i

bases have ei*;

final

a before

passes into u

hence

willcu-i.

Although we must refuse

i

a place in the locative to the dative

still

of the

Greek and

Latin,

this

Lithuanian dative character appears connected with

S,

the Indo-Zend

so that only the last element of this diph-

thong, which has

grown out of a +

1,

has been

left.

For

the Lithuanian has, besides the dative, also a real locative,

which, indeed, in the a bases corresponds exactly with the

Sanskrit and Zend.
178.

The nominal
.

bases, Sanskrit, Zend,

and Lithuanian,

explained at

148.,

excepting the neuters ending with a

full

vowel and pronouns, to the

shall

declension of which

we

return hereafter, form in the dative

sASSKRrr.

ZEND.
vehrkdi.
hizvay-ui.

LITHUANIAN.

m.
f.

vrikaya.

uUku-i.
ranka-i.
pdch-ei.
au'i-p?.

jihuay-ui,

m.
f.
f.

paty-iA
pritay-^,

paife-ifX
(yrife-S,

bhavishyanty-di,
sunav-^,

bushyainty-ah
pasv-S,

....
sunu-L

Dl.

**in

whom," which, according to the common declension, would be eC^ kasmi (from kasma-i). Compare the Gothic hvamma, ** to whom?*
hvasma.

for

The form dwiui, with dwiei appears to admit of being explained as arising from the commixture of the final vowel of the a bases.
t

The form

XfjQpatyS

is,

with respect to

its

want of Guna,

irregular,

and should be Tufy patayL

X

In combination with asm cha

we

find in

V.

S., p.

473. A5aj;o^^(3Jaj3>

paithy4-cha, and hence deduce for the instrumental (p. 193 G. Ed.) the form
pait/iya, while, according to
}.

47., also

paitya might be expected.

From

JCS^AJW haci, " friend,"

find in V. S., p. 162, the instrumental aj^^A5J5a5W

hacaya with Guna,

at
.

after the

analogy of the ajavaui bdzava, mentioned

160.

194

FORMATION OF CASES.
SANSKRIT.
ZEND.
tanu-y-6,*

UTHUAXIAN.

9 s
l>0

f.
f.

tamiv-4.

vadhw-di.
f.

m.
f.

gav-e. ndv'i.
vdch-e,
hharat-^.

gav-i.

....
vdch-i,
barent-S,

f.
1 f

m. m.
n.

diman-i,

asmain-S,

ndmn-e,X
bhrdtr-e.
duhitr-e,
ddlr-e.

ndmain-S,
hrdthr-i.

m.
f.

dughdher-e,^
ddthr-S,

m.
n.

vachas-^,\

vachanh-^,

I give

AJ^^>yAJ^ tanuyi with enphonic

j-,

because I have found this

form frequently, which, however, cannot,

peculiar to the feminine; and, instead of

for this reason,

also tanve

ho considered

it,

and tanave
it is

may be

regarded as equally correct.

Cf. . 43., where, however,

necessary to

observe, that the insertion of a euphonic ^^

y between w and ^ is not everywhere necessary; and, for instance, in the dative is the more rare form. t The c^in 1o1<^(^q>a dughdhSr6, and
dughdhera,
consonants.
is

in the instr. aj^c^o^o

>4

placed there merely to avoid the harsh combination of three

I

deduce these forms from the plural genitive 9^'^?<2^?23

dughdher-ahm, for ^vji/co^Q

X

>A dughdhr-ahm.
140,

Respecting t^T^ ndmne, for vfPT^ ndmane, and so in the instru.

mental ffl^ ndmnd, for rflHHI ndmand, see

similar words,
I

In Zend, in this and

have not met with the rejection of the a in the weakest

cases {. 130.), but examples of its retention, e.g. in the

compound

aocto-

-ndman, whence the genitive aocto-ndmano (Vend. S.

I

p. 4,

and frequently).

consider the initial a in this

nic

for in all probability

it

compound as the negation, without euphomeans "having untold (countless) names."

;cife>'AJtty<|A3p

Similar compounds precede, viz. c/AjA5A}i

^/^fxi^

l^iAJ^ctJA}^ Jiazanro-ghaoshahe bahiare-chashmand, "of the thousand In words in van, on eared, ten thousand eyed." Cf. Anquetil II. 82.

the other hand, aj a

is

rejected in the weakest cases,

and then the

t

V becomes

>

or
41.

i4>

o.

Regarding the addition of the j

in

^mum^msi

ndtnainS, see

ABLATIVE SINGULAR.

195

ABLATIVE.
179.

The Ablative
be

in Sanskrit has 7^

[G. Ed.

p.

209.]

for its character, regarding the origin of

which there can no

longer

any uncertainty, as soon as the influence of

pronouns on the formation of cases has been recognised, as

we

are conducted at once to the demonstrative base /a, which already, in the neuter nominative, and accusative,

has assumed the nature of a case-sign, and which

we

shall

subsequently, under the verb, see receiving the function of

a personal termination.

This ablative character, however,

has remained only in bases in

before
rians,
it
;

a,

which

is

lengthened

a circumstance that induced the Indian

Gramma-

who have been

followed by the English, to represent

It

^[\K at as the ablative termination.

would therefore be

to

be assumed, that in ^cniT vriMt the a of the base has

been melted down with the a of the termination.*

180.

to bring

M. E. Burnouft has been the first home the ablative character to a

lost it in Sanskrit,
t,

[G. Ed. p. 210.J

class of

words in
can be
the true

Zend which had

and whence
and not

it

satisfactorily inferred that a simple

dt, is

ablative character.
hereafter.

We mean the declension in w, of which As regards bases in a, which in Sanskrit alone

have preserved the ablative, we have to observe, that in

*
I

have drawn attention already, in the

first

(German)

edition of

my

Sanskrit

Grammar,

to the arbitrary
;

and unfounded nature of this assump-

tion ( j^. 156.

and 264.)

and

have deduced from the ablatives of the

pronouns of the two

first

persons {mat, twat) that either at with short a, or,

t,

more

correctly, a simple
I

must be regarded

as the ablative termination.

This view

supported in the Latin edition of my

Grammar, on

the ground

that in old Latin also a simple d appears as the suffix of the ablative.
since then the justness of

But

my

opinion regarding the Sanskrit ablative has

been

still

Zend stands

more emphatically confirmed by the Zend language, because the in a closer and more evident connection with the Sanskrit
III.

than does the Latin.

t Nouveau Journal Asiatique 1829, tom.

311

02

196

FORMATION OF CASES.
and thus tM^7wclf
i

Zend

also the short vowel is lengthened,

^'oirTff

vehrkd-t answers to in the ablative

like
TiffTT^
:

vrikd-t

'

Bases in j

have

di-t

whence may be inferred

ir^ffiT

in Sanskrit ablatives

pate-f,

pritS-t (. 33.),

which, by adding
e-s.

Guna
The

to the final vowel, would agree with genitives in

Zend-Avesta, as far as
offers
I

it

is

hitherto edited, nevertheless

:

but few examples of such ablative forms in >j^ Si-t owe the first perception of them to the word <j<^^^5^ju>

dfrifdit,

" benedict ione,'''' in a passage of the Vendidad,* explained elsewhere, which recurs frequently. Examples of

masculine bases are perhaps r^j\?^M5>^M7M^ f^A'H^^ rajoit zaratusirdit, " instftutione zaratvstrica " (V. S. p. 86), although otherwise jjjaj/ raji, which I have not elsewhere met with,
is

a masculine

longs to the three genders.

[G. Ed.
p. 211.]

the adjective base zarafustri, however, beFrom j7ja}^ gairi, " mountain,""

occurs the ahlatiye (^j>\7m^ garoit

in

the Yescht-Sade.-j;

ablativell

Bases in u have qeXxi ao-tt in the and in no class of words, with the exception of

* See Gramin.

Crit. add.

ad

r.

156.

t What Anquetil Til. 170. Rem. 4, writes ffuerScd can be nothing else than the ablative oo^^j/a(0 garoit, for Anquetil generally expresses

M by gu,
however,

AJ
is

by

e,

^^ by 6e,

and

(x>

by

d.

The nominal base j7jAs^gaM,

was the
original form, and the
i,

treated in

Zend

as if gari

which precedes the r was produced by the

final

as

remarked by

M. Burnouf in
ji\5j\|>!a>|Vj
1. c.

tlie article

quoted at p 173, and confirmed by the genitive

is remarked by M. Burnouf, and of which the Vend. S. p. 64. affords

gnrois.

That, however, wliich

with respect

to the genitive,

frequent proof in the genitive ji\5J^^a5q> patois, must also be extended to

the ablative in oit

t-lie
+

and the i, which, according

is

to . 41., is

adduced through

final

of the base,

dropped again before

/>e eut
;

this termination.

For

this

we

also find

e.g.

tK>>c^ipxi^ mainycut from

maingu.
II

Interchanges of > o and

^ 6 are

particularly
e.g. for

common, owing

to the

slight difference of these letters.

Thus,

r<^A>/^ niraot,

"ho
is,

spoke," occurs very frequently q^^Xi/^ mraot ; the former, however,

as

we

can satisfactorily prove, the right reading

for, first, it is

supported

by

ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
that in a, does the ablative

197

these words are in

more frequently occur, although number but five or six, the ablative use
e.g.

of which
iione,"

is

very frequent;

qo^xsw^^Mj ddonhaot,

*'crea-

ii>Aj'3LU

from ddonhu, in a passage explained elsewhere* anhad-t, " mundor from >yyyj anhu ; (^Ai^M^
from
>yAj^ tanu.

tanadt "corpore,""

Bases ending with con[G. Ed.

p. 212.]

sonants are just as

ablative
t

little

able to

annex the

without the intervention of another

is to

letter, as

the accusative

annex

without an intermediate letter;

and they have

which occur;
" igne^^
;

at as their termination,
e.g.

numerous examples of
;

t^Andj^ ap-at,

" aqud'^

rAxs/<3xu aihr-at,

t^Mtxii^tip^^^ chashman-at,
"naso^"';
(cf.

"oculo^^;

/wAjyAsw^^y
',

ndonhan-at
vis-af,

i)6>Ais>2^ druj-at,

" dcemone''^
. 21.).
juj

rAjjj^^

"

loco''^

vicus,

according to

Owing
d,

to

the facile

interchange of the

a with
iaj at;

<au at is

sometimes erroneously written for

S. p. 33S,

thus,

Vendidad

chanl-at

rAu^^A5^'^Aj.M sadchant-dt for rwAj^^As^'^Ajj} sad" lucente."^ Bases in u sometimes follow the

by the Sanskrit form

abrav-tt
p.
is

^Isfift abrot, for

it

which the irregular form ^id^lif

Ist pers.

used; and secondly,

answers to the
is,

mraom
a

(V. S.

123)

thirdly, the Sanskrit

in

Zend, never represented by *aj

\' .

ao, bat

by

^ 6, before which,
:

according to
<J>aj

28., another aj

is

placed,

hence
$.

<^aj

ao
.

on the other hand,

If,

ao represents

u, in accordance

with

32 and

28.

then,

> jjajq) paku formed

in the ablative ncniJAJ jjajc)

paiaot, this would conduct us to a Sanskrit

tl^rrr

pasu

while from the

ablatives rjij^jJ^AUa/rifoi-/, r^j^/^Mi>^\i/j<i^2aratustr6i-t,fA^^/xi^

garoi-t,

and from the analogy, in other

TJ^ftTT

respects,

with the genitive, the

Guna

form,

pas6-t must be deduced.

Moreover, in the Vend. S.

;

the ablative form rtijA5 ao-t actually occurs

for at p. 102

(asojasw

TOAJtyjuUiAJ^ f^WAjpfeyanilp heuAa vanheao-t mananh-at,

spirit ") occurs vanheaot, the ablative of

"from pure
e preceding

vanhu

and the c
is

the
p.

is

an error in orthography, and vanhaot

**

the form intended:

245 occurs r^i^AJWjuU anhaot,

mundo," from anhu,

Gramm.

Crit. . 640. ann. 2.

198

FORMATION OF CASES.
(aj at

consonantal declension. in having

as the ablative ter-

mination instead of a mere

a simple
s,

just as in the genitive, besides

as, . 56^.),

they exhibit also an 6 (from

although

more
ianaot,

rarely.
" corpore

Thus, for

the

above-mentioned i^aj/aj^
p.

occurs also tanv-at (Vend. S.

482).*

Feminine bases in am d and ^ i have au 6.1 in the ablative, as an analogous form to the feminine genitive termination

Wnr

guj do; e.g. as, whence, in the Zend dahmay-at, " prcsdara,''^ from axj^aj^^ dahmd ;

<au^^a5^^a5__^

jiu^^aj/aj7>

urvaray-dt)

" arbore,^^ from

^x^/xs7>

urvard;

r^xu^^/ogTAil
^7og7A5i bare-

[G. Ed. p. 213.]

thfC.f

barethry-dt, " genitrice,''''

from

The feminine bases

also in u,

and perhaps also those

/jku dt
;

in

i,

may

share this feminine termination

" begetting,"
.

thus,
(cf.

from zantu,

comes the ablative zanthw-dt

2.).

Gramm.

Crit.

640.

Rem.

Although, then, the ablative

all

has been sufficiently shewn to belong to

declensions in

Zend, and the ablative relation

is

also, for

the most part,

denoted by the actual ablative,

still

the genitive not un-

frequently occurs in the place of the ablative, and even

adjectives
in

the

genitive

in

construction
read.

with

sub-

stantives in the ablative.

jc\5J^yj>JA5^^A5^Au9

Thus we
<>>A>J3.^9

Vend

S. p. 479,

rA>>*o

q6iM^yjxi A)^A5^ httcha

avanhdlX visat yat mdzdayasnois, " ex hac terrd quidem mazdaijasnicd."

* Burnouf writes tanavat, probably according

I

to

another

Codex.
both

hold both forms to be correct, the rather as in the genitive,

all

also,

tanv-6 and tanav- 6 occur ; and in general, before

terminations beginning

with a vowel, both the simple form and that with

Guna

are possible.

t Vendidad Sade,
9g7(J>Q)

p.

436

<^/(O^AJi>^^7A>G)(r<3AJ^

|>y

W J9

m(3xsj^

<Ai^7Gg7A}i /A^^/JAJ^J/A5^bjy Yatha vehrko chathware-jangro nishdaredairydt harWiryat hacha puthrSm, "As a wolf,

A5^A>^

a four-footed animal, tears a child from

also important as
^.

its

mother."

This sentence
(cf.

is

an example of the intensive form

Gramm.

Crit.

363.).
\

The Codex, however,

divides incorrectly nishdarS dairy at.

Regarding this form, see

p. 172.

Rem.

ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
181.
Efird

199
in re-

The Old Roman corresponds with the Zend

to the debisrnation

of the ablative; and in those

rostrata,

two
and

memorials of the language, that on the Columna

the S. C. de Bacchanalibus, which are the

most important
so that
letter could

inscriptions that remain, all ablatives end with d;

it is

surprising that the ablative force of

tliis

be overlooked, and that the empty

could be held satisfactory.

name
in

of a paragogic

Bases ending: with a consoas

nant use ed as ablative

suflBx,

the accusative they

like pr(B-

have em instead of a simple

sent-ed dictator-ed,
{Jucente

hence, forms

answer

to

the

Zend mochard-al

dtkr-at

igne);

while navale-d* prceda-d, inalfo-d tnari-d,

the

senatu-d, like
cjaroi-t,

above-mentioned Zend forms

r^^xifM^ tanad-t, "
corpore,"^

(xsj^'^jom
;

" monte^^

&c.

and in

Sanski'it ^ctth vrikd-t, " lupo^

have a simple
also

sound to

denote the ablative.

sign d through
able
all

The Oscan
Bantia,
e. g.

takes the ablative

declensions, as appears from the

remarkp.

inscription

of

dolu-d

[G.
It

Ed

2U.]

mallu-d,

cum

preivatu-d, toula-d prcpsenti-d.^

may

be pre-

liminarily observed, that, in the 3d person of the imperative,

old Latin and

Oscan forms
similar

like es-tod, es-tud

for es-to,

and
are

therefore with a double designation of person

correspond

remarkably to

Veda forms with which we

;

hitherto acquainted only

which
sense

signifies
is

both "

from Panini e.g. "^ifimmtjiva-tdt, vivat'''' and "vive,'" but in the latter

probably only an error in the use of the language

as 3d

(cf. vivifo

and 2d person).
Latinity a kind of petrified
ablative

182. In

classical

form appears to be contained in the appended pronoun met, which may be transferred from the 1st person to the
others also, and

answers to the
it

Sanskrit

ablative

matt

"from me."

But

is

possible, also, that

met

may have
t.

* The e here belongs

to

the base, which alternates between e and

t See O. Miiller'a Etruscans, p. 36,

200
dropped an

FORMATION OF CASES.
initial
s,

and

may
its

stand for

sinef,

and so be.

long to the appended pronoun

&c.,

sma, explained in
smat,
(for

165.
it

corresponding with

ablative

to

which

stands in the same relation that

to ^^ smri

from smar,

. 1.

"to
all

memor

mesmor) does

remember."
for

The comsma, as has

it

bination of this syllable, then, with pronouns of the three

persons, would

require
itself

no excuse,
to

been shewn, unites

itself

persons, though

must

be regarded as a pronoun of the 3d person.*

sed, too, is
;

The
Bacch.
inter;

conjunction

certainly nothing but the ablative

S. C. de

of the reflexive
as

and sed occurs twice in the

fact,

an evident pronoun, and, in

p.

governed by

[G. Ed.

215.]

whence

it

may
is

be assumed that inter can

that, in the

be used in construction with the ablative, or also

old languages, the accusative

the same with the ablative

the latter view

is

confirmed by the accusative use of ted and

med

in Plautus.

1 183. In Sanskrit the ablative expresses distance

from a

place, the relation "

whence
case,

;"

and

this is the true, original

destination

of this

to

which
towns.
is,

the

Latin remained
the
relation
trans-

constant
"

in

the

names

of

From
in

whence," however, the

ablative

Sanskrit,

ferred to the causal relation also;

of which

since that on account

any thing

is

done

is

regarded as the place whence

an action proceeds.
tive

In this manner the confines of the abla-

and instrumental touch one another, and

TnPTTff

t6na

(.

158.)

and

tasmdt,

may

both express " on account of which."

still

In adverbial use the ablative spreads

further,

and in

some words denotes

to the ablative.

relations,

which are otherwise foreign

coj

In Greek, adverbs in

may

be looked upon

as sister forms of the Sanskrit ablative; so that m-^, from

bases in

o,

would have the same relation to the Sanskrit

" he touched," of which
o,

* The reduplication in me-mor, from mesmor^ would be of the kind

used in Sanskrit,

e.g. pasparsa,

hereafter,
1.

t Cf. the Gothic ablatives in

adduced

in . 294.

Rem.

p.

384.

ABLATIVE SINGULAR.
^HTIT d-t,

201
^^rfir

from bases in

a, that, e.g. BiSuio-t

has to

dadd-t i
samd-t,

Thus,

ofMco-s

may

be akin

to

the

Sanskrit

5Hlfl

"from the

similar," both in

termination and in base.

into f was requisite,
;

In
if

Greek, the transition of the

T sounds

indeed they were not to be entirely suppressed *

.

and in

152.

we have
it

seen neuter bases in

final letter

t,

in the uninflected
lost

cases,

preserve their
into
j.

from being entirely

by
or

changing

We

deduce, therefore,

[G. Ed. p. 216.]

adverbs like
6/io>-5,

o/xw-j, ovroi-^, tb-j,

from

6fiS>-T, ovroi-r, cb-r

&c.,

and

this is the only

way of bringing

these forma;

tions into comparison with the cognate languages

and

it is

not to be believed that the Greek has

created for this ad-

verbial relation an entirely peculiar form,

any more than

the

other case-terminations can be shewn to be peculiar to the

Greek

alone.

The

relation in adverbs in

a)-f is

same

as

that of Latin ablative forms like hoc modo, quo modo, raro,
perpetuo.

In bases ending with a consonant, oj for ot might

be expected as the termination, in accordance with Zend

ablatives like qaMjxi^tpj^^ chashman-at, " ocuh ";

but then

the ablative adverbial termination would be identical with

that of the genitive
:

this,

and the preponderating analogy

of adverbs
(rco^pdv-o)j,

from

o bases,

may have

introduced forms like

which, with respect to their termination,

may

be

compared with Zend feminine ablatives

harethry-dt.

like rAMi^^7<^^^^

We

must

also,

with reference to

the irre-

gular length of this adverbial termination, advert to the

Attic genitives in oj for oj .f

* As,

in ovToj, together

with

ouroj-r, S)8f,

S(f)v<o,

and adverbs from

remark, that in

prepositions

e^o), avco,

Kara, &c.

It is here desirable to

Sanskrit, also, the ablative termination occurs in adverbs from prepositions,

as ^SM^frnT adhastdt, "(from) beneath," qt^cTTTT purastdt, "(from) before,"
&;c.

(Gram.

Crit. ^

652 p.279.).

t In compounds, remains of ablative forms

may

exist

with the original

T sound

retained.

We will

therefore observe, that in 'A(f>po8iTr] the first

member

202

FORMATION OF CASES.

THE GENITIVE.
[G. Ed.
p. 217.]

184. In

no case do the

different

members
declen-

of the Sanskrit family of languages agree so fully as in the

genitive singular
sions, together
;

only that in Latin the two

fifth,

first
first

with the

as well as the

two

persons

of the pronouns, have lost their old termination,

and have re-

placed

it

by that of the
first

old locative.

The

Sanskrit termias,

nations of the genitive are

the three

are

^ s, common to

"m

sj/a,

^w

and

^^

ds:

the three genders;

as is

member

has a genuine ablative meaning

and

as the division a<j)po-8iTri

satisfied

admits of no satisfactory explanation, one

may rest

with a(^pob-inj.

In Sanscrit,

'STiJTf^iTT

ahhrdditd would

mean "the female who proceeded

itd (J.

from a cloud,"

for abkrd-t

must become abhrdd before

in d(j)pob-iTr],
''

93\) ; and in

neuter verbs the otherwise passive participial suffix ta has usually a past
active meaning.
this

Of this usage

tr?;,

might be a remnant, and

arose,

compound might mean,

therefore,

She who

who

sprang, from
toS.

foam."

The only

difficulty here is the short

vowel of ob

for

As

re-

gards the Sanskrit, here also the s of the ablative

rest

may in

most declensions
j

on an exchange with an older

t (cf. p.

184 G. ed. Note)

and, as the

Zend

gives us every reason to expect Sanskrit ablatives like Jihwdi/-dt,

prltS-t, suno-t, bJiavishyanty-at,

dtman-at

so

it

will be

most natural to
vogue

refer the existing iorms Jihwdy-ds, prit^-s, &c.,

tive

where they have an ablais

meaning, to the exchange of

t
;

with

s,

which

more or

less in

according to the variety of dialects

particularly as

it is

known,

also, that,

vice versa., according to certain laws,

. 100.).

* passes into if t

(Gramm.

Crit.

Consequently the identity between the genitive and ablative, in

in their history

most declensions, would be only external, and the two cases would vary ; so that, e.g.jihwdy-ds would be, in one sense, viz. in that
of linguee, independent and original
;

and

in another, that of lingua, n

corruption ofJihwdy-dt.

At

the time

when

Sanskrit and Zend were sepat

rated from one another, the retention of the original

must have been

change into

the prevailing inclination, and, together with

* have arisen, as the

it,

may

also its

Zend

also uses, at times, the genitive

S. p. 177.).

form with an

ablative

meaning

{e.g.

Vend.

GENITIVE SINGULAR.
principally confined to the consonantal bases,*

203
and hence has

the

same

relation to s that, in the accusative,

am

has to m,

and, in the
185.

Zend

ablative, at has to

t.

Before the genitive sign

i

Ji

the

[G. Ed.

p. 218.]

vowels ^

and

g'

u take

Guna

and the Zend, and

in

more
this

limited degree, also the Lithuanian and Gothic, share

All u bases, for example, in Lithuanian and
:

augment.

Gothic, prefix an a to their final vowel

hence the Lithuanian

sunau-8 and Gothic sunau-s correspond to the Sanskrit

sunos
is
(Jilii)

from sunaus

(. 2.).
;

In the

bases in Gothic,

^nr^ Guna
bases

restricted to the feminines

thus anstai-s, " gratia," answers

i

to irtri^ pritS-s.

Respecting Lithuanian genitives of

has,

see

193.

The High German

from the

earliest period,

dropped the genitive sign in

the other genders also.
186.
after

all

feminines: in consonantal

bases (. 125. 127.) the sign of the genitive is

wanting in

The form which the Sanskrit genitive termination

it

consonants assumes, as
s,
/

were of necessity
og,

(. 94.),

viz. as for

has in Greek, in the form

passed over also to

v;

the vowels

and v and diphthongs terminating in

i-)(dev-^,

and

genitives like iropTci-g,

which would be in accordance

but
iropri-o^,
i-)(dv-o

with

185. are

unheard

of;

answer,

like iroJ-of, to Sanskrit genitives of consonantal bases, as tj^s pad-as, " pedis, ^^ WP^re vdch-as, " vocis.''^ The Latin, on the

other hand, answers more to the other sister languages,

but

is

without

Guna

so hosti-s is like the Gothic genitive

gasti-s.

In the u bases (fourth declension) the lengthening

of the u
class of

may

replace the Guna,

or,

more

correctly, this
principle,

words followed the Greek or consonantal

s

and the vowel dropped before

* Besides

was compensated
u,

for

by

this, it

occurs only in monosyllabic bases in $

t, 'gi

au

e.g. rdy-as, "rei,"' ndv-as,

" navis ;" and

rl

in neuters in

^ di, and ^ and ^ a,

t

which, by the assumption of an euphonic

declension in most cases.

n, assimilate to the consonantal

204
lengthening the

FORMATION OF CASES.
u.

The

S. C. de Bacch. gives the genitive

senaiu-os in Grecian garb.

Otherwise the termination

is

of consonantal bases
[G. Ed.
p. 219.]

is

better derived from the Sanskrit

^
i,

as than

from the Greek

og,

because the old

Sanskrit a in other places in Latin has been weakened to

as frequently happens in Gothic
187.
(. 66. 67.).

With regard

to the senaiu-os just mentioned, it

that, in

is

important to remark,
"

Zend

also,

the

bases, inj^3> j^^yjAj^

stead of annexing a simple s in the genitive, as

mainyeu-Sy

of the

spirit,"

from mainyu, may,

after
cf. p.

the
212,

manner
G.
Ed.),

of consonantal bases, add as

'3aJ^

(from

as,

danhv-6,

or

^m'^a)^ danJiav-6,

for

danheu-s "

loci,""

from >^^ju^ danhu.

This kind of genitive

occurs very frequently as a substitute for the locative, as

also for the ablative (Vend. S. p. 177),

more rarely with a

genuine genitive meaning.*

188. Bases in ^ a, and pronouns of the third person, of which only amu ends with a vov/el other than a, have, in

Sanskrit, the

more

full

genitive

sign

sya

hence,

e.

g.

"^T^vrika-sya, " lupi^

IT^ ta-sya,

" hujvs,''^

&c.,^Faj amu-shya.

It

might be assumed that as

/Sao-tX/os clearly stands for ^asCKifos,

^o6s for ^oFos, vaos for vaFos,

(. 124.), so also

aareos would stand for

aarfFos, and that aa-rtos, therefore, should be compared with the Zend
genitives with

Guna,

as

^xi^^^

danhav-6.

The

e,

therefore, in

aareos would not be a corrupted v of

tlie base,

but the

Guna vowel

foreign

to the base; but the v of the base, which, according to the original law of

sound, must become

before vowels,

is,

like all other

digammas
latter to

in the

actual condition of the language, suppressed.

The

is

certainly a very
e,

heterogeneous vowel to the

v,

and the corruption of the

in the

middle of a word, would be a greater violation of the old relations of sound

than the rejection of a v sound between two vowels.

of
?

The corruption
(^"i.

to e is less surprising,
also,

and occurs
is

also in

Old High German

72.).

In Greek,
deficient;

a consonant y

wanting, but cannot have been originally

and therefore the question miglit be mooted whether also

TToXfcosy (Tivdnfos

may

not stand for pole-yos, sinape-yos.

GENITIVE SINGULAR.

205
[G. Ed.
e.

illius," (. 21.)

In

Zend

this termination
hS, (.

p.

220.]

appears in the form of

vehrkah^, "lupi,"
189. In

42 )

hence,

g. jww'aj^

Vj9

^vi^^^h^^

tuiryMii. "

quarti,'"'

ioT tuirya-hS. in another

Greek and Latin we have already,

place, pointed

out a remnant of the genitive termination

sya, and, in fact, precisely in places

where

it

might be

most expected.
bases in
o,

As

bases in

a correspond to the Greet

and as a in Greek at the furthest extremity of words

is

between two vowels

generally dislodged,

do not enter-

tain the smallest doubt that the old epic genitive termination in
to is

an abbreviation of
the
first o

crio

ta-sya,

belongs to

and that e. g. in roio = it^ the base, and only lo to the

;

case-sign.

As

regards, however, the loss of the

o^o,

<j

in roio, the
is

Greek Grammar supplies us with another

lost,

where a 2

the necessary and original existence of which no one

:

can doubt

eBiSoao,

and the ancient position of the

in the

second person, testify for Sioiao instead of

yecro instead

BiSoio, as for eAe-

of eXiyov, just as

the Indian tt^ ta-sya

for
also,

To-ato instead of toTo.

In the
(r,

common
and the

language the

/,

has been dropped after the

o of the termination,

which has remained, has been contracted with that of the base
to ov
;

hence tou from

to-o.

The Homeric form ao

(Bopeao,
a-io,

Alvecao) belongs likewise to this place,

and stands for

and

this for a-<Tto (. 116.). jus,

The Latin has transposed our

is

^ sya to
-jus,

with the change, which

s to

so frequent, of the

old a before the final

(cf. W^STt vrika-s, "lupu-s,^'

^>3H9

yunjmns, junglmus) ; hence, hujus, cu-jus,

e-jus, iHiiis for illli

&c.

I cannot,
is

however, believe that the

oio,

of the second
/

declension

an abbreviation of
;*

of which the

alone has
p.

been retained
liipcp

for

it is

clear that lupi and

;

[G. Ed.

221

.]

from lupai rest on the same principle and if lupi proceeds from \vKoio, whence can bipni be derived, as the corresponding Greek feminines nowhere exhibit an aio or rjio?
* Hartung's Cases,
p. 211.

206

FORMATION OF CASES.

190. In Lithuanian the genitives of the a bases differ re-

markably from those of the other declensions, and denote the case by o, in which vowel, at the same time, the final
vowel of the base
milka-s.
It is
is

contained

thus,
(o)

wilko,

"

lupi" for

probable that this o

has arisen from as,

(. 56''^.).

according to a contraction similar to that in the Zend

In old Sclavonic, also, o occurs, answering to the Sanskrit

as
;

and

nebo, gen. nehese,

corresponds to the Sanskrit

left

vpm

nabhas.

That, however, the Lithuanian has

the sylla-

ble as in the nominative unaltered, but in the genitive has

contracted

it

to

o,

may

induce the remark, that like corlike places, if

ruptions do not always find entrance in

they
this

have not raised themselves to a pervading law.

tive base
hvi-s the

In

manner, in Gothic, the old a has remained in the interroga-

HVA

in the nominative (hvas), but in the genitive

i

weakening to

has taken place; so that here, as

more worthy powerful nominative has preserved the older more powerful form, and an unorganic difference has found its way into the two cEises, which
in Lithuanian, only the

ought to be similar.
19 L

The Gothic has no more than the Lithuanian

full

pre-

served a remnant of the more

genitive termination sya,

and the Gothic a bases, in

because a before
final
s

this case,

resemble the

bases,

has, according to .67.,

become
in Old

weakened
with

to

thus

vulfi-s

for vnlfa-s

as also

Saxon the corresponding declension exhibits as together

e-s,

although more rarely

p. 222.]

thus, daga-s, " of the day,"

[G. Ed.

answering to the Gothic dagis. The conso-

nantal, bases have, in Gothic, likewise a simple s for case-sign;

hence, ahmins, Jiyand-s,hr6thrs

(. 132.).

The

older sister

dialects lead us to conjecture that originally

lately

an

i,

preceded this

ahmin-as,Jiyand-as,
e.

an

a,

more

brdthr-as,

which, as in the nominative of the a bases {vuJf-s for vulfas),

has been suppressed.

The Zend

exhibits in the r roots an

g.

agreement with the Gothic, and forms,

Mi^^j nars, " of

GENITIVE SINGULAB.

207

the man," not nar-6, probably on account of the nature of

the r bordering on that of a vowel, and of

its facile

combi-

nation with s*
192.

Feminines in Sanskrit have a

fuller

genitive

ter-

mination in bases ending with a vowel,

s (see . 113.);

viz. as

for simple
p. 223."1

and, in

fact,

so that the

[G. Ed.

short-ending bases in ^i and

may

use at will either

ift^TT prite-s, B'ffw

simple

or ^ro^

ds',

and instead of

ian6-s, also Tftwra prity-as, "in^ra tanw-ds, occur.

The long
This
.

vowels ^^ d,%i,

"Wi

u,^

have always
in

'WPR^ ds

hence, fHd^liTIU

jihwuy-ds, ^rHluiiqru bhavishyanty-ds, ^Sira vadhw-ds.

termination

^rm

ds,

is,

Zend,

according

to

56^.,

sounded do

hence, 5us^^aj>>^j' hizvay-do, g^Mii^^JAJ^^t^^J

hushyainty-do.

In bases in j

and

>

have not mei

ms/m:^ p >4

* Hence
dughdhar-8

deduce the genitives avj/aj^au^ brdtar-s,

which cannot be quotedand the probability that the correji.

sponding Sanskrit forms are properly hhrdtur, duhitur, which cannot be

gleaned from the Sanskrit alone, on account of
11.,
r.

and by reason of the

>n'iTT bhrdtur,

elsewhere occurring euphonic interchange of * and

similar forms,

and

would therefore stand

for

-w*, and

this apparently for ars,

. 94.,

through the influence of the liquids ; and, according to

they would

have

lost the genitive sign.

The same

is

the case with the numeral advorb

^HT

on'

chatur, " four times," for

'v\
<t|rlll

chaturs ' for which the Zend, ;

(^. 44.).

by

transposing the

r, gives jiv>/v:ajc>j

c^aiAn

The Indian Gram-

marians

also, in
(

the genitives under discussion, assume the absence of the

p. 35).

genitive sign

Laghu-Kaumudi,

As, however, the Visarga, in

1.),
is

"^fe kroshtu (from the theme fhj^i. kroshtar or "^{W kroshtri^ see $.

may

evidently stand as well for s as for r

so in such doubtful cases

it

of no consequence to which side the Indian

Grammarians

incline,

\\

here

arguments are not found

in the Sanskrit itself, or in the cognate languagis,

which either confirm or refute their statements.

the Visarga, in HTTTJ hhrdtuK, stands for
r,

And

it is

impossible,

if

that the preceding u can be

a transposition of the

final letter of the

r,

both retained in the form of

p. 55,

base ("^W ^"!T ), for this cannot be and yet changed into (of. Colebrook,

Rem.)

t Only the few monosyllabic words make an exception.

Crit. . 130.)

(Gramm.

rC8

FORMATION OF CASES.
;

with this termination

ji\5>P/A5^ taneii-s,

together with jtcj^^^o^Au

dfritdi-a.

or ^)Xi^ tanv-d,

^M)Ai^ tanav-6,

find

no ^^^w^oAam d/rithy-do, gusyAj^ tanv-do. The cognate European languages exhibit no stronger termination in the
feminine than
ever,
in the

masculine and neuter; the Gothic, how-

shews a disposition to greater fulness in the feminine

genitive,

inasmuch as the d bases preserve

to

this

vowel in conbut the

tradistinction
i

the nominative and accusative;

bases, as has

been shewn above, attach Guna to

it

this vowel,

while the masculines do not strengthen

gibd-s with the uninflected

at

all.

Compare
Respecting

and base-abbreviated nominative

and accusative
zd-s, see

giba,

and

anstai-s with gasti-s.

the pronominal and adjective genitives, as thi-zo-s, blindai.

172.

The Greek, also,

in its feminine first declen-

sion preserves the original vowel length in

words which have

(T<pvpdu^, Movctyi^,

weakened the nominative and accusative

[G. Ed.
p.

224.]
a-s,

opposed to

(rcfyvpa, cr(j)vpa-v,

ixovaav*

In

Latin, also,
terras,

with the original length of the base escas,

esca, escd-m.

&c. stands opposed to

It

cannot be sup-

posed that these genitives are borrowed from the Greek;

they are exactly what might be expected to belong to a

language that has
s

for the genitive

character.

That,

however, this form, which no doubt extended originally to

all

a bases, gradually disappeared, leaving nothing but a

itself of

few remains, and that the language availed

helps, is in accordance with the

other

usual fate of languages

of their old heredi-

which continually
ditary possessions.
193.

lose

more and more

its

The

Lithuanian, in

genitive rank-ds for ranka-s.

The

Attic termination as
;

is,

perhaps, a perfect transmission of the

Sanskrit ^l^R da

so that forms like n-oXe-wj

is

answer

to jfltQI^ prity as.

it is

Although the Greek ms

bases are feminine.

not limited to the feminine,

nevertheless

excluded from the neuter (norfof ), and the pivponderating number of t

SKNITIVE SINGULAR.
resembles the Grothic;
places the feminine

209
cases, also, reIt is

and in some other

o.

a by a long or short
i

doubtful

how the As they

calines

genitives of
are, for the

bases, like awih, are to be regarded.

part, feminine,

most

and the few masand

may

have followed the analogy of the prevailing

gender, the division awi-h might be

made

this
r,

might

be derived, through the assimilative force of the

from

aui-&s

(ef.

p. 174, note*),

which would answer to the SanIf,

skrit genitives like irhTPET prity-As.

however,

it

be com-

pared with
as

't(tk\ pTites,
i

and the

^ of aw'ih

be looked upon
is

Guna

of the

(. 26.),

then the reading awih for aivis

objectionable.

Ruhig, indeed, in his Glossary, frequently

i,

leaves out the

and gives ugnes,

also,

" of the

fire,""

for ugniSa

but in other cases,

an

is

suppressed before the e

note*);
and,
e.g.,

generated by

its

influence

(p.

174,

all

feminine bases in yd have, iu the genitive,

as yiesmi-s, for giesmy^, from

is for

i-h or ySs,

GIESMYA

(see p. 169, note).

it

Therefore the division awiS-s might also be made, and

might be assumed that the

bases have, in

some

cases, ex-

perienced an extension of the base, similar to those which

were explained
view appears to
cially as in the

in

the note,

p.

174

(cf.

. 120.),

This

me

the most correct, espe-

fG. Ed.

p. 226.3

vocative, also, awiS answers to giesme for

giesmye, or giesmie.
I

194.

As regards the origin

of the form through which,

is

in the genitive, the thing

designated

personified, with
tlie

the secondary notion of the relation of space,

in this case returns back to the
.

language
in

same pronoun, whence,

is

V And there a pronoun for the fuller termination also, ^ sya, which occurs
134., the

nominative was derived

viz.
a

only in the Vedas

(cf. . 55.),

and the

of which

is
t

replaced

in the oblique cases likewise, as in the neuter,

Crit.
.

by

(Gramm.
TTK ta-t.

268.)

so that
UTiT

^ sya
that

stands in the
?r

same

relation to

WR
R

tya-m and

tya-t

sa

does to WT ta-m,
in tya,

It is evident, therefore, that in

Ui,

^ aya,

the bases Visoy

are contained, with the vowel suppressed and united

210

FORMATION OF CASES.
ti

with the relative base

ya.
;*

Here

follows a general vie^

of the genitive formation

SANSKRIT.

ZEND.

GREEK.

LATIN.

LITHUAN.

GOTH
vulfi-

m. m.
f.

vr'ika-sya,

vehrka-M,

\vKo-io,

....
cu-jns,

wifko,
kd,

ka-sya,

ka-M,
hizvay-do.
patdi-s.

....
'Xjcipu-g,

hvi-

jihwdy-ds.
pati-s,

terras,
hosti-s,

rankS-s, gibo
.
. .

m.

....
ItOffl-O^,

.^ gast

paty-us.
f.

....
dfntdi'S,

....
siti-s,

priU-s,

....
<j)V<Te-U),

t anai

pnty-ds.
f.

....
paseu-s.

....
sunaH
s,

bhavishyavty- ds, hushyainiy-do

siind-s,

m.

sunt

....
^^'
P-f.

pasv-d,
taneu-s,

iyOv-og,
socru-s.
TTiTU-Oy,

tan6-s.

han

tanw-da,

tanv-6,

vadhw-ds.
f.go-s,

....
gpu-s.
^o{f)-6,
va(F)-of,
OTT-Of,

isOS e
f.

bov'is,

ndv-as,

....
vdch-d,l
barent-6,%

vdch-as.
hharat-as,

VOC-is,

m.
n.

<ppovT-o, feretit-is,
^atfiov-og,

....

Wjiya

m. dtman-as,
ndmn-as,

asman-6,\

sermon-is, dkmen-s,

ahn
nan

ndman-dfX

ToAai/-of,

nomin-is,

....

* The meanings

will be fonnd in . 148.

t See . 193. I See p. 163. Note

:.

And

^^A5Aii barato also

I

may

occur, according to the analogy of

yyAt^c/c

b^reaato,

'^

spkndentis," V. S. p. 87, and passim.

The
is

reten-

tion of the nasal in the genitive, however, as in all other cases,

the

more

common
also

form, and can be abundantly quoted.

is

For

f C^^?^^

barento,

<|j^^AJ^ii baranto,

possible,

and likewise,

in the other cases, the

older A5

for c

e.

In some participles, as in M'^i^^'yMA^ fsuyahs (nom.),

usual epithet of agriculture

which

is

of constant recurrence as the

(aj^^/^ojjjajIj vaistrya) c e never occurs.

Vide

254. p.

.302,

Note

%.

LOCATIVE SINGULAR.
SAHSXBIT.

211
UTHOAJf-

zsso.

GRE.

LATIH.

GOTmi&
brothr-s,

bhratur.
duhituT,

brdtar^Sj*

varp-og,

fratr-is,

....

dughdhar-s,^
ddtar-s.

dvyarp-og, matr-is,
^oTrjp-cg,
eiTe{a)-os,

dugter-s, dauhtrs.

ddtur,
vachas-ast

datOT-is,
oper-is,

vachanh-6,1

THE LOCATIVE.
-

195. This case has, in Sanskrit

and Zend,

for its cha-

racter,

and in Greek and Latin

[|

has received the function of

[G. Ed.
p. 227.]

the dative, yet has not suffered

signification to be lost
aypu>, oiKoi,
7r) airrrj
X'^A'tt''
5
;

its locative

hence, AwSwi'/, MapadCdvi, 2a\a/im,

rrj

^^^' transferred to time,

C<^mi divasS,

avr"^ 7Mep<?i

pvktL

So in Sanskrit,

"in the day;'' ftff^

nisu "in the night."

196.

With
)f

^a
S

of the base preceding exactly as in

(. 33.)
;

it,
;

the locative

passes into

(. 2.),

Zend

but here,

also,

j^
fjiotf

6i

stands for

jo i

so that in this the

Zend
oiiKoti

approaches very closely to the Greek datives like

and

aot,

in which

has not yet become

subscribed, or

been replaced by the extinction of the base vowel.

To

the

forms mentioned answers j^^^^aj^ maidhydi, "in the middle. One must be careful not to regard this and similar
'

phenomena

as shewing a

more intimate connexion between

Greek and Zend.

197. In Lithuanian,
locative, bases in

which language possesses a proper

this case in

a correspond in

a remark-

able

manner with the Sanskrit and Zend,

It

since they con-

wonld be better

to

read brdthr-6, after the analogy of ddthr-6,

**crealoris."

(Bumouf, " Ya9na," p. 363, Note), + The gen. of dughdar is probably dughder-6 (aee X Seep. 163, Note J.

p. 194,

Note

t).

locative,

cases admit of being more abundantly qnoted in Zend than the with which, nevertheless, Rask appears to have been nnacquainted at the time of publishing his treatise, as he does not give it in any or

Few

his three paradigms.

D I

now

refer the Latin dative to the Sanskrit dative, rather than to

the locative; see p. 1227 G. Ed., Note t.

^12
tract
this

FORMATION OF CASKS.
a with the old locative
to e
;

i,

which a])pears pure

nowhere any more,

hence, dietvk, " in God,''

from

DIETFA, answers to dht jj^A)A5^ da^. The bases which terminate with other vowels employ, however, in
Lithuanian, without exception, ye as the locative termination,

without any accent upon the

This e

e,

a circumstance which

must not be overlooked.

into
y, as,
a,

is,

perhaps, only an unor-

ganic echo, which has occasioned the change of the old locative
i

in Zend, the plural locative termination su,

by

adding an

appears, for the

most

part, in the

form of a5i:^

[G. Ed. p. 228.]

shva, or a5' hva.

To

the Lithuanian ye

answers

also, in old Sclavonic,

a locative termination ye, for

i;

which several declensions have the original pure

so

that nehes-i, "in Heaven," and imen-i, "in the name," agree

most
198.

strictly

with the Sanskrit

f>?Tff

ijvffTt

nahhas-i and

n'rfT

ndman-i, from

nabhas, Tni*^ nnman,

i

Masculine bases in

and

u,

and, optionally, feminine

bases also, have a different locative termination in Sanskrit,

viz.
v:fi(

du, before

which

^*i

and

7w

are dropped;

but in

pati, "lord,"

remained

in its

and ^f^ sakJii, "friend," the i has euphonic change to "^ y: hence, Vj$\ paty-du,

;H^^ sakhy-du. If we consider the vocalization of the s to u, shewn in . 56^, and that, in all probability, in the dual,
also,
tlie

^ du has proceeded from ^to ds

(f^fafuiraia

(. 206.)

moreover,

circumstance that in the Vedas the genitive occurs

dakshindyds, " in dexterdr

with a locative meaning

for <rjl[jmi H

dakshindydm, Panini

VIL
i

1. 39.)

and, finally,

the fact that, in Zend, masculines in

and u likewise em;

ploy genitive terminations with a locative signification

shall

we

be
ds,

much

disposed to recognise in this

^ dv,

from

W^
in

a sort of Attic or produced genitive termination.

199. In u bases, instead of the locative the

Zend usually
as), while,

employs the genitive termination

(from >R^
is

a genitive meaning, the form Mi>9 eu-s

;

more com-

mon

thus

we

read,

in

the Vend. S.

p.

337,,

j^^iom

^jMjM^MJ<y

<ajC1^

^^^

a^tahmi anhvd yat astvainti, "in

LOCATIVE SINQULAE.
hoc

213

mundo quidem existenie."'' This Zend termination 6 (from a + u) has the same relation to the Sanskrit du that a short a has to a long a, and the two locative terminations
are distinguished only by the quantity of the
of the diphthong.
first

member
in

On

the

other hand,

we

find

the

feminine base
locative

>;a5^ tanu, "

body," very often the genuine

;

form j /aj^

tanv-i

and we do not doubt

[G. Ed.

that, in

Sanskrit also, originally the u bases of the

p.

229.]
i

three genders admitted in the locative the termination

(Trfr^ sunic-i, Iff^ tanto-i, *rfs^

madhw-i, or

nrfT

madhu-n-i).

Bases in j
termination

employ, in the locative, the usual genitive

thus, in the

di-s;

Vend.

S. p. 234, ^iMi^xit

j^

MM^jMAs^^M^^Au(^ fKiJ^y^ ahmi namdneyat mdzdayasndis, " in

hac terra quidem mazdayasnica, which Anquetil renders by
" dans
le

pays des mazde'iesnans.^^

In pronouns, also, though

they have a locative, the genitive sometimes occurs with

a locative meaning;

e.g.

Vend.

S.

p.
(cf.

46,

jw-m^v

^^^^Om

ainM

vis^, "

in this way," or " place,"

.

the feminine form

^tvj/jAj ainhdo,
200.

172. Note.).

From

compelled to

Zend and Sanskrit we have already been acknowledge a connexion between the genitive
the

and locative;

and as we have seen the locative replaced

by the genitive, so must we, in Latin, recognise a replacing

of the

genitive by the locative. Through the formal agreement of the corresponding Latin and Sanskrit termination, and from the circumstance that the genitive occurs

with a locative meaning only in the two

not

first

declensions

{Rornce, Corinthi, humi), not in the third or in the plural (ruri

ruris),

M.

Prof.

Rosen was

first
first

induced to characterize
declensions as borrowed
[

the Latin genitive of the two

from the

old locative

a view, the correctness of which

do not doubt, and which I have already corroborated elsewhere by the genitives of the two first persons, in which mei tui, agree most surprisingly with Hftj mayi (from m^-i, . 2.X in me," twayi (from tiv^-i). Or ought, perhaps, a double
'

j^
i

inflexion

to be

assumed as the sign of both a genitive and

tl^

FORMATION OF CASES.
Should Romts (from Romai\ Corinthi,
in their different meaning be also of

a locative dative ?
be on
[G. Ed.

one occasion genitives and on another locatives, and

p. 230.]

different origin?

And

where, then, would the origin of the

locative has been
*rfi|

genitive

Romce be found, as that of the

?

found already
mayi,
r^ftl

Should mei,

tui,

be compared, not with

iwayi, fwi, to/, but with Hl

mama,

^W^ tava, fiov, toC,

Goth, meina, theina ?

prepositions,

As

the cases, like their substitutes the

pass

easily

from

one

relation

of space

to

another, and, to use the expression, the highest

lowest, nothing appears to

become the

me more

probable, than that,

after the first declension had lost its as, then the dative,

according to

its

origin a locative, necessarily

became

substi-

tuted for the genitive also.*

In the second declension the

form

o-i,

which belongs
o),

to the dative locative, corresponding

to the

Greek

oi

and

of

which examples

still

remain

handed down
altered
:

to us (as populoi

Romanoi)

has become doubly

left,

either
p. 231.]

the vowel of the base alone, or only that

of the termination, has been
in the dative, and the

[G. Ed.
first

and the

form has

fixed itself

latter in the

* The assumption that a

ae {a-l) appears to

rejected s lies at the base of the genitives in

me inadmissible,

because in

all

other parts of

Grammar
has in

numerous
Roman

as the forms with a final s otherwise are

this

letter

defied all the assaults of time,

and appears everywhere where the

:

cognate languages lead us to expect

lupi for lupos,

it

no

terrce for terras (ace. pi.),

is

no

no amce

for

amas, &c.

The question

not here that of an

occasional suppression of the * in old poets, before a consonant in the

following.

word

The

genitives in e-

and

as

occurring in inscriptions {pro-

vincie-s, suce-s, see Struve, p. 7.)

appear to be different modes of wiiting

tj-s

one and the same form, which corresponds to the Greek

I

for

would not therefore derive the common genitive

(-uces

sucb

older form suai

\&,

as

and

from

with the * dropped.

The

genitives in us, given

by Hartung
ia Latin, a
relation

(p. 161.)

from inscriptions in Orelli

(twotiti-us, exercitu-us, Castor-us, &c.),

am

not surprised at, for this reason, that generally us

fiivourite termination for

^R^ as ; hence nomin-us has the same

to

n^H

ndnin-as, that noniiiui-bu8 has to

vrika-s.

tn^^tH ndma'-bhyas, and

lupvA. to

"^MM

LOCATIVB SINGULAR.
genitive,

^tl^

which

is

therefore similar to the

nom.

plural,

where,

in like manner,
is

Romani stands

for Romonoi.

But the dative

persons mihi
tibi

not universally represented in Latin by a locative ter;

mination

for in the
r?nT
as,

pronouns of the two

first

answers to
tu-bhyam;
locative

ma-hyam, from ma-bhyam, and

to TTWW

however, the league between the dative and

this truly dative termi(ibi, ubi),

had been once concluded,

nation occurs with a locative meaning

versd, in Sanskrit, the locative

while vice

very frequently supplies the

place of the dative, which latter, however, is most usually

expressed by the genitive, so that the proper dative

the most
201.

is,

for

part, applied to denote the causal relation.

instead of

Pronouns of the 3d person have, in Sanskrit, in of the appended i in the locative, and the ^ a

hence, sma is elided (see . 165.) wfWT This n, iasrnin, "in him"; csfw?^ Arasm'jn, "in whom?" which seems to me to be of later origin, as it were an n <l>\Kv<mK6v, does not extend to the two first persons, and is wanting in Zend also in those of the third; hence,.

pronoun

j^

ahmi, " in this."

As

to the origin of the.

it

signifying

the place or time of continuance,

is easily

discovered as
;

soon as

is

found as the root of a demonstrative

all

which,

however, like the true form of

other pronominal roots,

has escaped the Indian Grammarians.

202.

Feminine bases ending with long simple vowels

;

have, in Sanskrit, a peculiar locative termination

viz.

^iw
at

dm, in which,

also,

the feminines in short

192.)
i
;

and u

may

will participate

(cf. .

while the monosyllabic femiu,

nine bases in long

and

for

wm

dm, admit also the

firftl

common
fear,"

|^ i

hence,

fvnjT\

bhiy-dm

or

bhiy-i,

"

in

from wt bhi*

In Zend this termi-

[G. Ed.

p. 232.]

* Perhaps the termination

termination ds
(cf.

dm

is

a corruption of the feminine genitive

198.

^a{mH(| g

dakshindyds for dakghindyam\

where

it

should be observed that in Prakrit, as in Greek, a final has

frequently become a nasal.

216
natioij

FORMATION OF CASES.

dm

has become abbreviated to a

(of.

.214.);
4i^)ii

hence,

Ai.i.J^>*0
(cf. .

yahmy-a,

"in

which"

from

yahmi

172.).

to be less

This termination appears, however, in Zend, diffused than in Sanskrit, and not to be applicable
i

to feminines in j

and

>

u.

The form ianwi

existed.

is

clearly

more genuine than

earliest period, also,

the Sanskrit tan&u, although from the

tanwdm may have

in

S03.

We

here give a general view of the locative, and

it

of the cases akin to

Greek and Latin

(see

148.)

m. vrike*
t,

vehrki*
hizvay-a,
. < . .

Kvko),

lup-^,
ierra-U
hos(-i,

wilke.

Jihwdy-dm,

XWP9
"nocri-'i,

ranko~ye,
pdti-ye.

m. paty-du,^
f. f.

prlt'-du.t

....

TTopTi-'i,

sW-i,

awi-ye,

bhavtshyanty' dm, bushyai'nty-<i,

s{in-du,
<an'-4tt,

m.
f.

....
tanw'i,

'X^i^-'
irtTv-i,

pecu-i,
socru-i,

sunu-ye.

n.
f.

madhu-n-i,

....
gav-i,

jxedv-t,

vadhw-dm,
/3o{F)-i,
vd(F)-t',

m.f.gav-i,

bov-i,

'^ f.

ndv-i,
bharat-T,
barent-i,

....

W
o

ra.

<t>epovT-t, ferent-i,

m. dtman-i,
n.

asmain-t,

8ai[iov-i, sermon-i,

ndmn-i,
bhrdfar-i,
duhitar-i,
ddtnr-i,

ndmain-i,
brdthr-i?\\

raXav-i,
Ttarp-i,

nomin-i,
fratr-i,

m.
f.

dughdher-i ? dvyarp-i, matr-z,

ddthr-i9\\
SoTrjp-t,
e7re(<r)-/,

m.
n.

datdr-i,
oper-i.

vachas-i.

vacanh'i,

* See
II

196.

The

rejection of the
its

Or tanw-dm. t See . 198. J Or prity-dm. a preceding the r in the theme seems to me more

probable than

retention.

The

of the termination

is

guaranteed by the

other consonantal declension, which in this case

exemplify.

(Regarding dvghdher-i, see

p. 194,

we can abundantly enough Note t). That in Sanskrit

is

bhratar-i, duhitar-i, ddtar-i, are used instead of Mirdtri, &c.

contrary
to

VOCATIVE SINGULAR.

217

VOCATIVE,
204.

The vocative
the

in the Sanskrit family of languages

at
is
is
all,

has either no case-sign

nominative
:

or

is

identical

with the
the

former

the principle, the latter

limited in Sanskrit to
:

practical corruption,

and

mono234.]

syllahic bases terminating in a vowel

hence, Wt^ bhi-s

[G. Ed.
;

" fear P as

k!-^.

A final

a of the nominal

p.

bases remains, in Sanskrit and Zend, unchanged

in Lithuaalso, in

nian

it is

weakened

to e;

and the Greek and Latin

the uninflected vocative of the corresponding declension,

prefer a short e to o or
u,

which, under the protection of the

final

terminations, appears as the

letter of the base.

:

We
these
xeiTe,

must avoid seeing

quinque,

in A^kc, lupe, case terminations

forms have the same relation to

"^

vrika that

have to xr^ pancha

o,

pears in \vKO as
e without

in lupus as

and the old a, which apw, has assumed the form of

In 2^nd, the consonantal
it

any

letter following

it.

bases,

when they have

s in the nominative, retain

in the
fre-

vocative also;

thus, in the present participle

we have

quently found the form of the nominative in the sense of the

vocative.
205. Bases in
i

and u have, in Sanskrit, Guna

:

neuters,

however, have also the pure vowel

on the other hand.

to the theory of the weakest cases (. 130.), to

locative belongs.

which

in other respects the

As, however, bases in ^TT ar

a,

(^ ri),

with respect to

the rejection and lengthening of the

baaes in
locative,
art,
it

have a very great agreement with

do not
is

must here be further remarked, that these too, in the strictly foUow the suppression of the a in the weakest
conditionally prescribed in , 140., but optionally retain
it ;

cases,

which

the a, or reject

so that with

ndmn-i

also

ndman-i
pitr-i,

is

used.

With
$.

bratar-i, however, exists

is

no bhrdtr-i, and the form

irarp-L

given at

132.

an oversight: the Greek

may

therefore, with respect to the

shortening of the base, be better compared with the dative jntr-L

218

FORMATION OF CASES.
{l

polysyllabic feminines in i and

shorten this final vowel

while a
(. 2,).

final 58n d,

by the commixture of an i, becomes ^ The language, however, both by producing and

final

shortening the
sarae end, only

vowel, clearly aims

;

at

one and the

by opposite ways

and

this end, in fact, is

a certain emphasis in the address.

To

the

Guna form
Sanskrit

6,

from a + u, correspond remarkably the Gothic and

;

Lithuanian
?nft sun6,*

as

sunau,

sunau,

resembling
i
:

the

Gothic feminine bases in

Ulfilas in the vocative

do not occur in
as,

[G. Ed. p. 235.]

however, they,

in other respects, run parallel to the u bases, the vocative

anstai,

from

ANSTI, might

be expected as an analogous form

to handau.

their

The Lithuanian i bases in the vocative extend theme in the same manner as in the genitive (. 193.);
to zwdke, giesme (Ruhig's third declension),

so that, properly, there is no vocative of this class of words,

and awie answers

for zwdkie, giesmye.lf

Masculine bases, in Gothic, in

i,

like

the masculine and neuter a bases, have lost their final vowel

in the vocative, just as in the accusative and nominative

hence vulf,
with the

daur*, gast\

In bases in n the Gothic shares

of

Latin the

suppression

the

final

consonant,

which has passed over from the nominative to the vocative; while only the Sanskrit and Zend again ihtroduce

* The Zend can

at will attach

Guna

to a final

>

, or not;

and we find

both \^^JJxs^ mainyd and >^^/.JA}^ mainyu as the vocative of >i^yJXJ9

mainyu, " spirit."

out

On the other hand, we have found

a final j

only, with-

Guna; and

indeed frequently ^^jajq) pai'i, "lord"

So Vend S.

p. 466,

j^jA5c^ ^iAU^Asy A5;eW->'.>-W> usihista namdno-paiti,^^ Ar\8e, lord

of the place I"

The j t between
assist

the preposition and the verb serves as

(cf. . 150.

a conjunctive vowel, to

the juncture of the words

. 193.,

Note).

It follows

from
ei

this,

and from

that

{.

177.) I have incordivision

rectly assumed

as the termination in the dative.

is

For dvoi-ei, the

should be made thus, dwie-i ; and this

for zwdkie-i, giesmye'i.

analogous with zwdke-i, gietme-if

VOCATIVE SINGULAR.

219

into the vocative the nasal which had been dropped in the

nominative.
vocative,

Adjectives in

have departed
of

from the

German, with respect old path, and

hence Gothic

to

the

retain
blind's,

the

case-sign
!'^

the

nominative;

' blind

In Old Northern, substantives also follow this

sign.

irregular use of the nominative

preserved a tolerable

number

of its

The Greek has vocatives pure from

which the laws of
;

the nominative sign, and in some classes of words uses

the bare base, or that abbreviation of
it

euphony or eflPeminacy rendered

for traiS opposed to ttu?^.

requisite

hence, roKav opirat

posed to ToKaq, y^apiev for )(aplevr opposed to yapiet,

In guttural and labial bases the

language has not got free of the nominative sign in the vocative,

because kj and

ttj

(^,

yj/)

are very favourite combina-

tions, to

which the alphabet also has paid homage by partiStill

is

cular letters to represent them.

vocative ava, together with ava|,

the

[G. Ed.

p. 236.]

remarkable, and has that

sound which might be expected from a theme dvaKT, to which, in its uninflected state, neither kt, nor, conveniently,
even
tlie k,

could be

left.

"

For the rest

it is

easy to imagine

(says Buttmann, p. 180), that particularly such things as are

not usually addressed, prefer, when they happen to be addressed, to retain the form of the nominative, as w ttoCj !" *

The Latin has followed

in
its

still

farther the road of corruption in

the vocative which was prepared by the Greek, and employs

place the nominative universally, except in the

mascu-

line
.

second declension.

The substantive bases mentioned in

148. form, in the vocative,

* To this circumstance may also the re-introduction of the case-sign in the neuter be owing, while the Sanskrit employs the bare base. Moreover, this fact also

may have

co-operated towards the Greek more easily

it

freeing itself in the vocative from the bare primary form, because

ap-

pears at the beginning of compounds

much more

rarely than in Sanskrit.

(See

J. 112.)

220
SANSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
XESJ}.

GREEK.

LATIN

UTHUAN.
wilke,

OOTHIC.

m.
n.
f.

vrika,

vehrka,
ddta,

\vK,
BS>po-Vf
5(;Wjoa,

lupe,

vulf.

ddna,
jihw^,
pats,

donu-m,
terra,
hosti-s,
siti-s,

....
ranka,

daur\
giba?
gasC.

hizvSf
paitif
dfritif

m.
f.

Ttoyi,

....

prifA
vdrit

itopri,
i^pt,

n.

vairi,

mare,

L m,
f.

bhavishyanti,

b^shyainti,

sund,
tandf

pasu,
tanu,

tx6v,
iriTV,

pecu-s,
socru-s,

sunaH,

sunau.

....

handau.

n.
f.

madhu,
vadhu,

tnadhuy

fiidv,
m
i

pecu,

..
OQ^Sf

Qm.f.ydu-,

gdu-s.
vav.

..

g ?
ej
""^

f.

idu-s,
vdyt,

f.

vdc-S?
baran-Sf

OTT-f,

voc-s,

m. bharan,

(pipav,
Saifiov,

feren-s^ sukan-s, Jiyand,

m. dfman,
n.

asman,

sermo,

dkm&',

ahmd,
nam6'.
brothar.

ndman,
bhrdtar,
duhitar,
ddtar,

ndman,
brdtare*

Ta\av,
iraTep,

nomen,

....

m.

frater
mote,
dator,

L nu
n.

dughdhare,* dvyaTep,mater,
ddtar e,*
vachd,
Bori^p,
67rof,t

dauhtar,

vachas,

opus,

DUAL.
NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE.
206.
line

These three eases have, in Sanskrit, in the mascudu,

and feminine, the termination wj

^ittt

which probably
s (cf. . 56^.

arose from
198.),

ds

by vocalization of the

and

and

is

therefore only a stronger form of the plural

as.

termination

The

dual, both in the cases

mentioned and

in the others, prefers the broadest terminations, because

it is

based on a more precise intention than the indefinite

See

44.

t See

$.

128.

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE DUAL.

plura],

221

and needs, therefore, stronger emphasis, and more

lively personification.

Compare,
with
the

also, in
i

the neuter, the

long
^ff^ITTt

of the dual

short

of the plural;

as

asruni with

^TSTT!! asruni.

207. While the Prakrit and Pali have lost

[G. Ed. p. 238.]

the dual, the Zend has retained

instead of
it

it

still,

however, so that
S.,

the plural often occurs, and in the Vend.

AXJ

p. 203, i.}^jJAj^>y^)o

schenubyaschit,

"and

as far as

the knees," the dual

is

used with a plural termination.

In the verb
it is

is still

more rare

but here, however,

of
it

not en-

tirely lost,

and

many examples

can be quoted in the

The Sanskrit termination du occurs in the corresponding places in Zend in the form of gui do, which, according to . 56^, stands at the same time for the Sanskrit
V. S.*
termination ^ra
d,

and gives an emphatic proof that the

and, in fact,

Sanskrit dual termination "# du is nothing else than a cor-

ruption of ^rr?^

ds,

an occasional one which

.

appears in

grammar

only once or twice (see

198.),

while

the example herein given by the Sanskrit has been raised

to a general principle

by the Zend.

This principle be-

comes almost irrefragable matter of

ration that the
dual, the

fact from the consideZend has even actually retained, in the

sibilant

before the

particle

as^ cha,

and uses
if

dos-cha, not do-cha, as

might have been expected

Sanskrit,
ds.

the

dual termination

^ du, in

were the original form,

and not a corruption of wni

Vend.
tdi

Thus we read

in the
i\>^

S. p. 225,

a^.u^^a)^^/^^a) A5^j3^/>tt WAU>

Anquetil, in his Voca[G. Ed.

uba^ hurvdos-cha ameretat-dos-cho, " the two Haurvats and

Amertats."t

What

p.

239]

Cf.

Gramm.

Crit.

Add.

to

r.

137.

t Cf. Anqnetil II. 175. The two Genii, which Anquetil writes Khordad and Amerdad, appear very frequently in the dual, also with the termination hya
this
($. 212.)
;

and where they occur with plural terminations,

may

be ascribed to the disuse of the dual, and the possibility of

replacing

'

222
bulary
(p. 456),

FORMATION OF CASES.
writes
naereke'ido,

and renders by "deux

femmesr can be nothing

from the base
ndirikaydo
is,

else

than ^^^As^j^jjuny ndirikay-do,

JM^j7jjMf ndirikd.

however,
as,

evidently

The form ^^^aj^j^jamj more genuiMe than

^^j7jAuy ndirikd]
(. 213.),

according to the Sanskrit principle

from a feminine base must have been formed

ndirikd.

From

bdzvdo, " arms," without

>^j^ bdzu, Rask cites the form ^>>^auj remarking that it is a dual it
:

clearly belongs, however, to this

number, which was to be

;

expected referring to the arms

the nominative
Still,

and

>^AUi

bdzu forms, in
bdzavd.

plural,

^>>^amj

bdzvd

or

4>A5^Ajii

in the edited parts of the Zend-Avesta, examples are

wanting of bdzvdo, regarding the genuineness of which, however, I

208.

have no doubt.
In the Veda dialect, the termination
d,

^ du
;

occurs

frequently abbreviated to

so that the last element of the

diphthong
viated

is

suppressed.

Several examples of this abbre-

as, ^jfTfftn form occur in Rosen's " Specimen " " asvin-d, the two Aswins,'' from asvin, and Jfjj nard, " two [G. Ed. p. 240.] men," which can be derived both from nar

replacing the dual in all cases

by the

plural.

Thus we
VVe
will,

read,

I.

c. p.

211,

haurvatdt-6 and arneret-as-cha as accusative, and with the fullest and

perhaps sole correct reading of the theme.

however, not dwell

any longer here, but only remark, that hnurvatdt is very frequently abbreviated to haurvat^ and the d of amereldt is often found
on
this point

shortened; whence, p. 104, A5yij(^AJAA5Aa/'wa/Aya, aj^>aj^^!''^9a5

arrieretatbya, (see ^. 38.)
;

AJi^i AjrA5^ J/g^-'^ ameretata bya

is

a palpable

error.

Undoubtedly, in the passage before

us, for hurvdoscha,

must

l)e

read either haurvatdoscha, or haurvatdtdokcha, or Jiaurvatatdoscha.

Com-

pare

1.

c. p.

91, A5oijM>AU^A}^AJ/^AJ' JioSrvatataus-vhavf ii\\ the termi(cf.

$.

nation ^>AV) dus for j[)C\M dos

33.),

but incorrectly

^6

ior \) 6.

The two twin

*'

genii are feminine,

and mean apparently, " Entireness" and

therefore, toi

Immortality."

The forms preceding them,

;

and uhaS, are

likewise feminine
(cf. . 28.).

the former for

ti (. 33.), the latter for

g^
.

ubhi

We

must

also regard the dual

form mentioned at

46. of

the so-called Amscluispants not as neuter, but as feminine.

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE DUAL.

(ytnri)

223

from

nar.

and from nara, but which more probably comes In Zend the abbreviated termination from du is
fact,

likewise employed, and, in

termination
also, the

and we rejoice

more copiously than the fuller to see, in the Heaven of Ormuzd

p.

twin pair called Indian, and celebrated for their

youthful beauty.
h3(oJaj9jaj,^

We

read, namely, in Vend. S.

Aj^Auy>5)^Ai aspind-cha

313,

vi>mMj^

yavano yaz

{muidhe), " Asvinosque juvenes veneramur,^^ which Anquetil

renders by "jefais Jzeschne a texcellens toujours {subsistant").

The

Sanskrit

f^^T asvind however,

(. 50.)
:

can, in Zend, give

nothing but aspind or aspina

the former
175,

we owe
Note
%

here to the protecting particle aj^

chxi (see p.

G. Ed.).

The

plural yavan-d (from yavanas), referring to

is

the dual aspind,

worthy of remark, however

it

(if

the read-

ing be correct), as

furnishes a

new
part,

proof that, in the

received condition of the Zend, the dual

lost:

was near being

the verb being, for the

most

found in the plural

when

referring to nouns in the dual form.

209.

From

the

Veda termination
it
e,

d,

and the short a*

which frequently stands for

easy to the Greek

in Zend, the transition is

as this vowel, at the

;

end of words,

is

favourite representative of the old a

and, as above, in the

vrika, ju^^wgl? vehrkoy

vocative

(. 204.),

XvKe stood for

so here, also, avdpa (with euphonic 5) corresponds to the

above-mentioned Veda
though, according to

"sni

nard, and
also

Zend

m7asj nar-a.

Al-

. 4., to

very frequently stands for

WT d, still we must avoid regarding: KvKOi as the analogous form to g-ciT vrikdf or juuA^fevclp vehrkd (see . 211.). That
however, the Lithuanian dual
bases in a
(in the
it

of masculine
is

[G. Ed.

p. 241.]

nominative)

connected with the Veda and

L
e.

Zend dual termination spoken

of,

has proceeded from

a, I

* Thus, Vendidad Sade,

p. 23,

Ai^Mi^^?<^^xi a}^A}^>ajw haurvata

amcretata, "the two Haurvats and Amertats"; p. 136, and frequently,

AiAjy Xi>>^

dm

nara, " two men."

Cf.

Gramm.

Crit.

Add.

to

r.

137.

224
have the
Sanskrit,

FORMATION OF CASES.
less doubt,

because in the other declensions the Li-

thuanian dual also agrees in this case most strictly with the
places, equally the representative of

and the Lithuanian m or S (uo) is, in some other an old d (see . 162.),
^^rfi?

or dudu, " I give,"" with " dusu, I will give," with <^ <4< rH ddsydml

compare, dumi,

daddmi;

And

the

mono-

syllabic

pronominal bases also in a sound in the dual u

thus

tu

= Tn td,
wilku,

ku

= kd.

We

hold,

therefore,
vehrkd,
:

the

Veda
at

form
least,

^TcRT vrikd,

the Zend
as

jM^?vi>^(^

and the Li-

thuanian

identical

in
to

principle

we
is

are,

much more

inclined

this

view of the matter

the last
tvilku

than to the assumption that the u of wilku

portion of the Sanskrit diphthong

^ du,

and that
falls

belongs to the form ^s^ vrikdu.

In the vocative the Lithu-

anian employs a shorter

preceding syllable
respect
:

u,

and the accent

on the
205.

thus wilku^ opposed to wilku, in which

itarrip,
i

may

be compared Ttarep opposed to

and

210. Masculine and feminine bases in

and u suppress,
du, and, in
its

in Sanskrit, the dual case termination

comunin-

pensation, lengthen the final vowel of the base in

flected

form

thus,

xfif\

pati,

from

^fVr

pati; i^sunu, from

^sj^rm.
tioned in
.

The ^>>^a^
207,, is

hdzv-do, "arms,'" (from hdzu)

men-

advantageously distinguished from these

abbreviated forms.

The
also,

curtailed
is

form

is

not, however,

wanting in Zend

and

even the one most in use.

From

>i^yjAj^

mainyu, " spirit,"

:

we

frequently find the dual

^A^yjAj^

mainyu

[G. Ed. p. 242.]

on the other hand, for _^JJ^J erezu, " two fingers," we meet with the shortened form
is

><f7j

erezu,

which

identical

with the theme (Vend. S.

p. 318, >5f^J A5>>^ {fva erezu.

211.

The

Lithuanian, in

its

and

bases, rests

on the
hence,

above-mentioned Sanskrit principle of the suppression of

the termination and lengthening of the final vowel
:

awl, "

two sheep" (fem.), answers to w^ avi, from 'wf^ am; and mnu, " two sons," to ^^sunu. On this principle rests

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE DUAL.

a'so the

225

not desired entirely to

soil,

If it be Greek dual of the two first declensions. remove the o) of Xvkoj from a Grecian
it

and banish

completely to India,

it

may

be allowed

to seek its origin, not in the long

a of

^"oRT vrikd,

but in

the short o of the base, as the

first

declension has a long

a in the dual, because

in the

its

bases terminate with a, although

sented by

common dialect Or may

T],

this letter is
it,

very frequently repre-

perhaps, have happened, that, in

t

the dual a of the

lost,
TT

first

declension an

subscribed has been

to the Sanskrit

and thus rd for ra would correspond

tS

(from td+i or i)?

and the
ca

Be

that as
it is

it

has always the quality a, because

base,

may, still the dual comprehended in the

that if

of Kvkco

may
;

be regarded as merely the

it

lengthening of the o of \vko

for

must be assumed,

the Sanskrit a bases had preserved the short

a in Greek, and

^<*^

vrlka-s

had become

Ay/ca-y,

then the dual too would

be \vKa, and not Kvku}.

212. Neuters have, in the Sanskrit dual, for the termi-

nation of the cases under discussion, not

the plural they have not as but short
of the base
i

^
(^).
?

du, but

i,

as in

final

^
"

sate,

with this ^ t passes into ^ (. 2.); hence, "two hundred," from ^nr^sot^-t: [G. Ed. p. -^J-S.]
In
as,

other vowels interpose a euphonic n; hence, iTT^Trt tah-n-it

two

palates."
;

Zend

can quote the neuter dual only in

the a bases
snit4 (. 41.),
^\57jxjAs'

for example,

we

frequently find ks^jajjj

answering to the Sanskidt duyS hazanr^ " two thousand,"

^ saM

and
for

(. 43.)

% ^r^
distin-

^^^

dw^

sahasri.

213.

The Greek has renounced a termination

guishing the neuter from the two natural genders; but the Sanskrit appears to have extended the neuter t mentioned above also to the feminine a bases.

But the coin-

cidence

of the

feminine form f^jihit^, "two tongues,"

from fiTd^Jihwd, with the neuter ^^ ddne, " two gifts," is. as the Zend instructs us, only external, and the two forms

226
meet

FORMATION OY CASES.
in quite different ways, and have such a relation to

one another, that in ddn^, from ddna + i, a dual term i nation, and, in fact, the usual

one of neuters,

is

actually con-

tained; but in
tion

a^jihwi

the masculine-feminine terminabut can, however, be again

ndirikay-do, "

du (from

as, . 206.) is lost,

restored from the

Zend form ^^ixs^j7jMSf

is

two
has

women."

believe, that

to

say, that Hn^jihivi

arisen or been corrupted from f^f^^ jihwny-du* in such a

manner, that after the termination has been dropped, the

preceding semi-vowel has returned to
its

vowel nature, and

. 2.

has become a diphthong with the a of the base (see

cf. p.

and

121 G. ed.).

The dualjihw^,
(^.

therefore, like the Gothic

singular dative gibai

161.)

would have only an apparent

In Zend, however,
jo S

termination,

i.e.

an extension of the base which originally

likewise occurs
;

accompanied the real case termination.

the abbrevialTid feminine dual form in
(.

207. Notef). and

p. 244.]

is,

indeed, the prevalent one

but

it is

[G. Ed.

remarkable, and a fair and powerful conassertion, that

firmation of
in
A)
^,

my

even

this abbreviated

form

where the appended

particle

aj^ cha

stands beas above,

side

it,

has preserved the ease sign s;

anieretat-dos-cha,

and,

Ai^^^^A5^^/^^As

"the two Amertats," so

we

find.

spent^,

Vend. S. p. 58, Hd^vWPQ>J) As^jJAJtajg^J^ amhhes-cha "and two Amshaspants" (" non-conniventesque sancamisha and Nalus V.
25, 26.

tos," cf. ^jfiro

and see

. 50.).'|*

The form srv> Ss is to be deduced from the full form M^^^AA ay-dos ; so that, after dropping the fJM do, the preceding ay must have been contracted to ^, just as (p. 121

* Cf. the dual genitive and locative

r<Hd^'4')f1

jihway-6a.

t The MS. has here A)^>)^c^c9'^ amesescha^ but c frequently ocean

in the place of
p. 88,
;t5,

although, as

it

appears, through an error.

ofjvS yuh-nfi

Cf.

c.

c^^gQ>j}
^.

^^Jtvs^^At

"^/J3XJ^ |^AJ

amesi ipente;

and see

51.

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, VOCATIVE DUAL.

227

G. Ed.) in Prakrit, ^fR Smi has arisen from the Sanskrit We may support the <amrn aydmU by rejecting the d.
derivation
of fiT% jihwS
also, that

from

ftn^

Jihivay-du,

by

this

circumstance,
bases

in the

Veda

dialect the feminine i

may

lose the dual termination du,

;

and then display the

naked base

thus, in the scholia to Panini,

^ITT^

dMM^

vdrdhi updnahdu, " boar-leather shoes," for

It is

^ro^

vdrdhydu.

very remarkable, that even this Veda form, only one

example of which can be quoted, can be referred to the Zend

language.

We
its

find, frequently,

V^^9;o
Vend. S.

tevishi applied to
p.

feminine dual substantives

infer that

{e.g.

225.);
i,

and

theme ends with a long, not a short

accusative

from the

frequently-occurring plural

h5^CU^?^ tevishis
[G. Ed.
z,

(Vend.
214.

S. pp. 99, 102).*

To the Sanskrit-Zend feminine dual

I
;

p.

245.]

forms in

answer the Lithuanian in

as

ranUt, horn.

RANKA
ment
is

so that of the diphthong

only the last eledual, in

left

The Lithuanian forms the accusative

e.g.

contradistinction to the cognate languages, according to the

analogy of the singular, by a ringing nasal,

wHkuh.

The

Latin has preserved only in duo and amho a remnant of the dual corresponding to the Greek, which, however, in the oblique cases, is replaced by plural terminations. Here follows a general view of the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual (see
. 148.).

It is perhaps a participle of the rednplicated prct., according to the analt^' of the Sanskrit Fftr^TT tinivas, fem. Ttijwi thatski (Gramm.

Crit. $. 603.)

and indeed, from the root xs^ tav, "

to

be able,"

it

mar

signify " powerful, strong."

The e

e for a) e

is

explamed by the
is

influ-

ence of the

p. And ^^J^iyM^>
am
to learn

utayuUi also

an

adjective feminine

dual; but I

unable to quote examples of the other cases of this word,

from which

whether ^

or

t is its

final

YOweL

228
SANSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.

GREEK.
.

LI-i-HUANlAir.

'-rm.
P'

vrikdu,
vrikd,

vehrkdo,

....
N. wilkii, V. wllku.
....
....

vehrkd*
ddt^.

KVKU),
hoipiji,

=>

ddnS,

Mzvay-do,
hhvS,
paiti ?

....

i'lL-i

jihwS,

Xwpd,
TTOCTi-e,

N. ranH, V. ranku
'S.pati,

-S^o

path
pnti,

V.

pdfi.
du>i.

dfrM
....

Ttopri-e,

N. awu N.

n.

vdri-n-i,

t8pi-e.

* While consonantal bases occur in the dual both with a long and a short
a, the

a bases, contrary

to the practice otherwise adopted of shortening

final a, exhibit in the

nom.

ace. dual, for the

most

part, the original long

vowi

1.

deduce

this,

anaong other words, from the so-called Amshaa.

pants, which, together with the feminine form noticed at

are found also as masculine
;

207. Note f.,

:

e g.

Vend. S. pp.

14, 30, 31, &c.

juj

yy icCAi

HSOJAS^^AU

<|j'^^HM^>'

JkM/(3A5Jivi(J^>

JkXJ^^CQ>jto

amesha speatd
coimi-

liucsathrd huddonho dyesS, " I glorify the

two Amshaspants (non

ventesque sanctos) the good rulers,

who

created good."
final

If amesha spentd
short, or at Uast

and hucsathrd were plural forms, the

appear

a would be

much more
a,

frequently short than long; while, on the contrary,

these repeatedly recurring expressions, if I mistake not, have everywhere

a long

and only in the vocative a short a (Vend,

is

S. p. 67.

Cf.

. 20;).).

That the epithet huddonho

dual nature of the

in the plural cannot incur doubt,

(cf. $.

from the

Amshasp

20P.)

this resembles, to a certain

degree, the use of adjective genitives referring to a substantive in the

ablative,

which was mentioned in

180.

We

find,

also,

the forms

anieshdo spentdo (Vend. S. p. 313.), which indeed might also be feminine

plural forms, but.

meaning

as the so frequent

shew themselves only as masculine duals, in the same Wc find also, frequently, amesha spentd.
" the two most holy
is

_^^^/->aj9 au^^;oj/c<j)J3 spenistd mainyii,

(p. 80),

spirits

through which the dual form in d of bases in a

likewise con-

firmed in the most unequivocal manner.

The answer

to

the query,

Whether

generally only two Amshaspants are to be assumed? whetlicr

the genitive plural (ameshananm spentananm), and sometimes also the

accusative plural,
is

only the representative of the dual, which

its

is

vtry

uncertain and shaken in

use? whether under the name Amshaspants,

perhaps,

we

should alwaj s understand the Genii Haurvat (Khordad) and

Amertai

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATiVB, VOCATIVE DUAL.

SAXSKRIT.
f.

229

mrili.

GREEK.

UTHUANIAS.

blmvhhyanty-^Ufhushyainti,

....
ixdv-e,
n'trv-e,

m.
f.

sunu,
tanu,
madhil-Ti-i,

pad,
tanH,

N. sunu, V. sunn.

m.
f.

....

nedv-e,

vadhw-du,

....

....
va(f>e,

m. f. gav-du*
f.
f.

ndv-du,
vdch-du,

vdch-do.

Amertat, and whether these two Genii, according to the principle of the
Sanskrit copulative compounds, have the dual termination for this reason
alone, that they are usually found together,

and

are, together,

two?
reply

whether, in

fine,

these

two twin-genii are

in . 208. to the

identical with the

Indian

Aswinen, which were referred

to

Zend-Avesta ?

The

aU these queries

lies

beyond the aim of

this book.

We will here only

JU5(ejjica)jj

notice that, Vend. S. pp. 80

and 422, the Genii Haurvat and Amertat,

still

although each

is

in the dual,

are, together,

named

}^-i?^

au4<aj9 ^^iJ-i*i9 spenistd

spirits,

mainyu mazdd

tevisht, &c.,

"the

two most holy

vispa,

the great, strong."

As

Genii, and natural objects

of great indefinite number, where they are praised, often have the

" all," before them,

it

would be important

to

word shew whether " all

Amshagpants" are never mentioned; and the utter incompatibility of the

Amsh. with the word vispa would then
these Genii.
testify the impassable duality of

If they are identical with the celestial physicians, the Indian

Aswinen, then "Entireness" and " Immortality* would be no unsuitable

names

for

them.

In Panini we find
ftl
ri

(p.

803) the expressions HTrRf^TrT^

niatara-pitardu and
Vedas.

1.14

1 ri

O pitara-mdtard

marked

as pecuhar to the

They

signify

" the parents," but,

literally,

they probably

mean

"two mothers two fathers," and "two first member of the compound can here
viated dual pitard,

fathers

two mothers."

For the

scarcely be aught but the abbre-

matard; and

if this is

the case,

we should here hav

an analogy to the conjectured signification of haun\it-a and ameretat-a,

* Bases

in

o form the strong cases {. 129.)

'<^'">

&om

^ du

those in

^^

an, and nouns of the agent in jfX

lengthen in those cases, with

the exception of the vocative singular, the last rowel but one (see
$.144.).

230
SANSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.

GREEK.
OTT-e,

UTHUANUJI.

>

vdch-(i,*

vdch-a,
barant-doy

-Qin.

bharant-duy
bharant-d,
dtmdn-du,j[

....
^epovT-e,

.
.

barant-a,

asman-do,

....
8aifJiov-e,

...

dtmdn-d.

asman-a,

N.V.

dkraen

^n.
m.

Tidmn-t,

....
brdtar-do,

rdKav-e,

bhrdfar-du,

....
Trarep-e,

bhrdtar-d

brdtar-Oy

t
m.
n.

duhitar-du.
duhitar-d,
ddtdr-du,'\

dughdhar-do, ....

dughdhar-a. dvyarep-e
ddtdr-ao.
ddtdr-a,
.

ddtdr-d.
vachas-i,

Borfjp-e,
e7re(o-)-e,

....

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE.

215. These three cases have in the Sanskrit and

Zend dual

common
It is

termination;

while in Greek the genitive has

its

joined itself to the dative, and borrowed

it.

termination from

in Sanskrit nT bhydm,
Aj^jli

which in Zend has been

is, first,

abbreviated to

bya.

Connected with the same

the termination wnr bhyam, which, in the pronoun of the two

first

persons, denotes

the dative

singular and plural, but

in the singular of the first person has

to

become abbreviated
agrees

^R hyam
[G. Ed.
p.

(. 23.).

This abbreviation appears, however,

249]

to be very ancient, as the. Latin

* The Veda duals

in a are as yet only cited in bases in a, n,

and or

t^)

iJ.

1.)

however, the Zend leads us to expect their extension to the

other consonantal declensions, as also the circumstance that, in other parts of

grammar,
thongs
**
;

in the

Vedas d

is

occasionally found for au, and other diph-

e.g. ffTHT

ndbhd, as locative for tfl^ nubhuUy from tflfW ndbhi,

navel."

t Sec the marginal note marked (*),

p. 229.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVB, ABLATIVB DUAL.

remarkably with
as
ti-bi
it
;

231

and mi-hi corresponds

tu-bhyam.

to

H^m ma-hyam,
plural, is

does to

WWR

In the second place, rt

bliyas,

which expresses the dative and ablative

(. 56^), in

pronounced in Zend byd

Latin bta, suppressing

The Lithe y, and with the usual change of as into tw. thuanian has mus for bus in the dative plural (. 63.): this
more complete form
pronoun of the two
yu-mus,
in
all

has, however,

remained only in the

"nobis,'"'

first

persons,

where mu-muSf

" vobis"

are used as well as mu-m''s, yu-m's;

while

other words

we

find

simply ms as the sign of the

dative toi/^a-ms, &c.

has only the
wi/ka-m.

In the dual dative the Lithuanian

of the Sanskrit termination rnT bhydm, as

This

is,

however, not the

a nasal form

final letter
(.

of bhyi\m,
to me, at

but the
least, it

initial labial, b, in

63.)*

appears improper to regard this dual termination

;

otlierwise than that of the cognate plural case

and

have
with

no doubt of the identity of the

explanation, therefore,
tlie

of wilka-vh

"kuKoiv,

that of wilka-ms (for uilka-mus), \vkois.

According

to this

German

plural dative corresponds

to the Lithuanian dual dative, vulfa-m, (/asti-m, sunu-m.f 216.

A third form related to

n^ bhydm
is

the dual terbh'is,

[G. Ed.

p. 250,]

mination

f>ni

as

sign of the instruis

mental plural.

This termination which

in 2iend *v^^

bis.

On
'

the facile transition of v into

(cf. p.

114) rests also,

doabt

not, the connexion of the termination

Xf^mi/uvdm, "ye two,"

dm, and
is

^yicfiq

dvdm,
which

we

two," with the

common

termination du, before vowels dr^

stiffened into

in the

pronouns spoken of has

in this

form

has remained even before consonants. the verbal

tliird

Whether

the case

the same with

dual person

'ifra

tdm

shall be discussed hereafter.

t Cf. Grimm, I. 828. 17, where the identity of the Lithuanian-German inflection m with the b (bh of the older languages) was first shewn. When,
however, Grimm,
adjectives have
I.e.,

says of the Lithuanian that only the pronouns and

ms

in the dative plural, the substantives

is

simply m, this
;

is

perhaps a mistake, or the plural

named

instead of the dual

for

Ruhig

gives /xwKzms, "domiio*," akims^ '"'oculis," &oe.

232
(also Miji bis),

FORMATION OF CASES.
has in Latin fixed itself in the dative and which must together supply the place of the instru-

ablative,*

mental;
labial

while in Lithuanian, with the exchange of the

(. 63.),

medial for the nasal of this organ

mis

is

the

property of the instrumental alone, so that puii-mis answers

to
Tlfrrfiro

pati-bhis, a\j^__ij^jaiq) paiti-bis.

217.

have already elsewhere affirmed, that the Greek

(f)i,

termination
is
<pi,

(ptv, is

to be referred to this place.t

also.

and what

there said

may

be introduced here

If

<f)tv,

and not

be assumed to be the elder of the two forms, we

it

may offer

the conjecture that

has arisen from

<pt^,

following the analogy

of the change of neg into fiev in the 1st person plural, which

corresponds to the Sanskrit mas and Latin mus|

<pts

would

correspond to the Sanskrit bhis and Latin

Perhaps,
<pt

bis,

in nobis, vobh.

also,

there originally existed a difference between

find used indifferently for the singular

and ^tv (which we

and
the

plural), in that the

former

may
;

have belonged to the

singular, the latter to the plural

and they may have had

mi has
"

same

relation to one another that, in Latin, bi has to

bis in tibi

and
"

vobis

and

that, in Lithuanian,

to mis

in akimi,
eyes."
It

through the eye," and akimis,

through the
(pi
:

has escaped notice that the terminations

^tv belong principally to the dative
avro^t,
dvprjcpt, (3tr)(piv

and
ex-

[G. Ed.

p. 251,]

their
is

locative and instrumental use

plained

by the

fact, that

the

common
The

dative also has assumed

the sign of these relations.

strict genitive

use of the ter;

mination
positions,

^i, 0/1/,

may perhaps be altogether

denied

for if pre-

which are elsewhere used in construction with the

* In the

Ist

and 2d pronoun (no-Ms,

vo-bis),
bhi/as.

where

bis supplies the

place of the bus which proceeds from

wni

t Trans. Berlin Academy,

1826.

Comparison of Sanskrit with

III. p. 81.

its

cog-

nate languages, by Prof. Bopp.

Essay

X Observe, also, that the Sanskrit instrumental termination bhis has

been, in Prakrit, corrupted to

f^

hih.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE DUAL,

genitive, occur also with the case in
pelled,
<pi, (ptv,

233

we
all

are not com-

on

this account, to

regard the latter as the genitive

In general,
prepositions,

or representative of the genitive.

which are used in construction with the genitive, would,

according to the sense, be better used with an ablative or a
locative,
if

these

cases

were particularly represented in

genuine ablative
is

Greek.

The

suffix dev also, of

signification,

expressing separation from a place,

incorrectly consi-

dered to represent
latter, in

the

genitive

termination, where

the

the

common
In

dialect,

has received the sign of the

would,

lost ablative.

ocrae daKpvocpiv TrifnrAavTo, daKpvotpiv

:

in Sanskrit, be
is

rendered by ^^ftn? asrubhis

is

the relation

entirely instrumental, and

is

not changed because the

verb mentioned

with the genitive.

Kpv6<piv repcravTo.

more usually, though less suitably, used The same is the case with oaae Sa~
In
'l\i6(pi /cAt/ra rerj^ea it is

not requisite

to

make

'lAid^i

governed by
Ilium.''''

re'iyea,

but

it

may

be regarded af^'

as locative ''to

And

in Od. XII. 45.

{iroKi/g 5'

6(TTe6<piv 6)g dvdpdiv

itvdofjievcav)

there

is

no necessity

to look

upon
by

6aTe6(piv as the genitive, for it

I

can be aptly rendered

ossibus.

know no passages

besides

where a genitive

To the meaning could be given to forms in (pi and (piv. cjn, foreign, the form <piv, is and accordlikewise, accusative,
ing to
its

origin does not suit it;

nor does

it

appear in

the train of prepositions, which elsewhere occur with the

accusative, with the single exception of e? evvY]<piv in Hesiod
(cf.

Buttmann,

p. 205).

As

to the opinion
^/, ^tv,

[G. Ed.

p. 252.]

of the old

Grammarians, that

may

stand also in the

/

nominative and vocative, and as to the impropriety of the

subscribed before this termination in the dative singular of

the
first

declension,

we

refer the reader to what

Buttmami

(p. 205) has rightly objected on this head, 218. The neuters in 2, mentioned in ,

12S., are nearly

the only ones from bases ending with a consonant, which

occur in comlMnation with

cpi,

(ptv,

in

forms like cr^ea-^

234
op<r-<f>i,

FORMATION OF CASES.
(TTrjdea-^tv,

which have been misunderstood, bebefore vowel

cause the

2 dropped
is

terminations was not

recognised as the property of the base.

sonants,
base,
1/

Of
(}>iv

the other con-

the only one, and

KOTYAHAON
;

the only v

which occurs in combination with

and since

does not combine with

liary vowel o

so readily as 2,

it

assumes an auxifollowed,
;

KorvXT}6v-o-(f>tv

after

the analogy of com-

pound words

like Kw-o-dapaiq^.
it

This example

without the necessity for

however, by SuKpv

is

aKpv6(f>tv

while vav-^iv, in an older point of view, resembles exactly

the Sanskrit
base
tf)f>?^

ndubhis

for in

compounds,
o,

also,

the

NAY

keeps free from the conjunctive vowel

on which

account vavaradixov

may

be compared with Sanskrit com-

pounds
219.

like

^^^
to
it

ndu-stha, " standing (being) in the ship."

But

return to the Sanskrit dual termination

is

wnn bhydm,
a
final

further to be remarked, that before

;

it

is

lengthened
It

hence, loirWT'T^ vrikdhhydm for

^oifrr?

vrikabhydm.

hardly admits of any doubt, that

this lengthening extended to the cognate plural termina-

tion fvnr bhis

; and that hence, from "^ vriJsa also vrikd-bhia would be found. The common dialect has, however, ab-

breviated this form to

^^
2.,

vrikdis,

which
for

is easily

derived

from vrikdbhis by rejecting the

[G. Ed.
p. 253.]

bh',

di

is,

according
1

to

=d +

i.

This opinion, which

have before expressed,*

In the
first place,

can now support by new arguments.

which did not then occur to

me
first

in dis-

cussing this question, the pronouns of the two

really

persons

form from their appended pronoun

in

w sma,
;

smd-bhis;

hence ^rwrfir^ asmdbhis, ^p^\i^^^ yusJimdbhis

stand

which forms
asmdn, '^*M}^

the

same

relation

to

the ^ojrrfW^^ vrikd-bhis,

assumed by me, that the accusatives

yushmdn, do to ^wnt^ vrikdn, "
* Trans. Berlin Academy, 1826.
nate languages, by Prof. Bopp.
lupos.""

^wr^

Secondly, the opinion

Comparison of Sanskrit with

p. 79.

its

cog-

Essay III.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE DUAL.

which
I

235

arrived at theoretically has, since then, been so far

practically established
final

by the Veda

dialect, that, in

it,

from a

^a

not d-bhis but ^bhig, has been formed, according to

the analogy of the dative and ablative, as^%nT^ vrikihhyas

hence, ^^rf*?TT asvebhis, "per equos^ from

^^

asia.

In the
hos,^*

common

dialect the pronominal form ^ftra S-bhis "per

this

answers to

Veda

form, which must properly be de-

rived from the pronominal base

^ a,

which generally plays

the chief part in the declension of ^^idam. Though, then,

on

one side, from the pronoun

on the other
the
side,

a springs the form ^fim S-bhis;

from

^ttT

asma and xro yushma proceed

and adjective bases in
still

the forms ViMlf^T^ asmdbhh, ^Qflftnr yushmdbhis; and though

Veda

dialect, in its substantive

a,

attaches itself to the former form,

no necessity hence
on an
Perhaps, however,

arises for supposing the abbreviated ais to be based

S-bhis,* as that could

never lead to
ibhis,

dis.

dbhis might
force of the
i

become

either through the assimilative

of bhis, or through analogy to

[G. Ed.

p.

264.]

the dative e-bhyas, the S of which may, in like manner,

its

owe
comd of

origin to the re-active influence of the

220.

y.-\

The

Prakrit has fully followed out the path

dialect,

menced by the Veda

and changed into ^

i the

From
i,

ibhis

would come,

after rejecting the bh, not dis,

i

but

ai/is,

for

=a+i,

cannot be combined with a following

into a diphthong, or, as

it is itself

already a diphthong, into a triphthong.

t I do not regard the Veda 7f||^ nadt/dis, for

ff^fW^

nadi-bhis, as

an abbreviation of nadi-bhis (for after rejecting the bh, from nadi-\-i would be formed nadis), but as a very common instrumental, for which an extension of the base nadi to nadya is to be assumed. On the other

Zend pronominal instrumental dis mentioned by Bnmouf (Nonv. Journ. Asiat. III. 310.) may here be considered, which occurs frehand, the

quently in the Jzeshne, and

*!>-i^^ dibis,
is

is

probably an abbreviation of

jj^rjjjfl dibis

or

from a base
i

di,

the accusative of which ^j^ dim,

$.

"him,"

often foimd with

unlengthened, contrary to

64.

The

connection of

the

baae^ di

with

aj^o ta cannot,

on

this account,

be disputed.

236

FORMATION OF CASES.

asmd-hhis, yushmd-bhis, as also, in the locative plural, that of

asmdsu, yushmdsu;

hence ^I^l^ amM-hin,

^n%^ amhisu, WTf^ tumMsu.

TT^f^ tumM-hint Moreover, in Prakrit, all other

a bases, as well pronouns as substantives

and
;

adjectives,

terminate the instrumental plural with uf^ e-hin

FW^fi^ ArMswrne-Am, " floribus,"

and thus
to the

(horn kusuma,) answers

Veda

oiw^f>?H kusumi-bhis.

Before, however, the forms in

Trfim S-bhis, ^f^ e-hin, had arisen, from ^iftro dbhis, by the change of d into S, dis must have proceeded by means of

rejection

and contraction from that most early form.

thus, in Rosen, p.

This

form exists also in the oldest hymns of the Vedas, together

with that in
pp. 15
dis is the
if?'H

ebhis

14,

Tif^ yajndis;

and 21
often.

^ranff arkdis.

In

Zend the abbreviated form

it

only one that occurs, which

does, indeed, ex-

tremely
221.

Before the dual termination xsi^ bya the Zend, in

p.

[G. Ed.

255.]

its

a bases, differs from the Sanskrit in the

same way

as the

Zend and Prakrit do before the terminait

tion finr bhis, f^ hin ;

employs, namely,
. 28. 41.

for

d:

but

from vehrki-bya, according to

pddhaeibya, "
siiis pedibus,^''

comes

vehrkaeibya.

Thus, in the Vendidad, a5A^s.>^a5(o^q>

A}.ijiijn3Ajfe>'

hvaiibya

= ^sn^TP^ ^^[^imtf^swdbhydm pddd" manibus.^^

bhydm; M^r^xi^MXi^ zaka^ibya (^wt^TTh)

in this case, also, the diphthong
e.g. M^Js^\Li> ubdibya,

But
If in

^ is

supplied
p.

by

6i (. 33.)
).

" ambobus"'' (Vend. S.

305

this

form the
I

lost nasal

be

restorec*,

and

it

be assumed (of
tv is

which

have no doubt) that the Greek dual termination

an

abbreviation of the Sanskrit

like w/xoi-iV are to

bhydm* then the Homeric forms

be compared with the AjiiiJ^> ubdi-bya

By
is

rejecting the labial, as in "4%13 vrikdis from

to
iv,

'ToRfH^

trrikabhis,

and by contracting the X[mi/dm

ishta
said,

as when, in Sanskrit, for yashta,

from yaj, "to

sacrifice,"

and n Zend ^^tm,

*^haa,*' for

5TI?T li/am (see, also, . 42.).

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE DUAL.

above mentioned
the base, which
;

237
fall

where, therefore, the

first

would

to

it

lengthens, the other to the termination.

The third
tion
first

declension,

by

its

forms like Baifiov-on; might give

rise to the conjecture, that otv

:

and not

iv is

the true termina-

the latter, however, is

declensions,

shewn

to

be so from the two

attached to the final

where

tv

and not

oiv is

vowel of the base

fore,

(yiov<ra-tv, \oyo-iv).
iv

In the third, thereas, .

we

explain the o before

in the
\iz.

same manner

21S.

before 0<v (KOTvXt]dov-6-(pti');

as a conjunctive vowel,

which has made have

those
I

its

way from

the bases which necessarily

it,

i. e.

from those terminating in a consonant into

it

which might dispense with

v)
;

(into

the bases

in

and

as, in general, in

the third declension the conso-

nantal bases have given the tone, and have

to the vowels
i

shewn the way

[G. Ed.
p. 256.]

and

u.

It

might, however, not

have been necessary

for the conjunctive

vowel o to make
termination,

its

appearance between consonants and the

3atfj.ov-iv

as

could very easily be uttered

but the o of Satfxoioiv

comes evidently from a time when the tv was still preceded by the consonant, which the eoiTesponding Sanskrit termination hhydm leads us to expect
^amov-o-tv,
;

in

all

probability a

thus,

from

Bouiiov-o-cfiiv*
<piv

We

should have, therefore,

.

here a different

from that which, in

<pi^,

217.,

we endeaas,

voured to explain from

(<}>)tv

finr bhis: the nasal in the dual

its

stands quite regularly for

predecessor m,

in ge-

neral, at

the end of words.

In order to present to our

tv,

* The conjunctive vowel

o,

therefore, before the dual termination

has an origin exactly similar to that of the possessive snffix evr, which has

been already elsewhere compared with the Sanskrit '^nT vant.

therefore have been originally pronounced Fevr;

Y.vt

must

and the conjunctive

the whole third

vowel, which the

bases,

digamma made

requisite or desirable before consonantal

itself to

and which, from thence, has extended

answers

declension, has remained also after the

digamma has been dropped, and

:

thus

Tix'p-o-is

to irvpoiv,

from

Ttvp-o-lv

on the other hand, rvpo-tis

to TVpOUf {TVpO-w).

238
view
in
still

FORMATION OF CASES.
more
clearly

how forms

quite similar take root

the language

as

corruptions

of preceding dissimilar
first

forms, let the form ervnTov be considered as the

per-

son singular and third person plural

eTVTTTOfjL,

in one

case from

in the other
If

from

eTvirrovT.
iv

222.

the dual termination

be explained as a conalso, the origin

traction of bhydm,

we

shall

have found,
tv,

of

the dative plural termination

which appears to have been

pronouns of one gender as
<t0'-/v,

changed in
it

this

number

in the

were by accident

(f/fi-^v,

v^x-lv,

together

with

a^i-at).

The Greek, however, in misled by the Sanskrit; or, more

this respect, is

guided or

correctly, the distinction

is

of the plural dative of the pronouns of one gender

ancient, and the Sanskrit has in

very

them wnr bhyam

as termi-

nation ('ST^viin asma-hhyam,

(G. Ed,
p. 267.)

"nobis,^^ '^^{v^^

yushma-bhyam,
all

"vobis''''),

opposed to the nT^ bhyas of

other words.
as easily, or
(cf. . 42.).

From
more
so,

this

bhynm, then, we arrive

at iv quite

than from the dual termination bhyam

wjir

As, however,
.

bhyam, and
has also
its

its

abbreviated form

?nT hyam, according to

215.,

place in the singular

dative of the pronouns of one gender, but occurs nowhere

else
;

as,

moreover, the Latin

also, in

the pronouns referred

to, has maintained a genuine dative termination, and to the

common

i,

which

is

borrowed from the

locative, presents in
(.

contrast the termination bi or hi (for bhi)

therefore, in the singular tv also of

200.)

we

can,

e/jC-iv, re-'iv, t-i'v, Tu, a^'-tv,

see nothing else than an abbreviation of ni bhyam, a

form

which the Latin and Greek have shared in such a manner,

that the former has retained the beginning and the latter

the end.

In the

both coincide.*
Max. Schmidt,

The

occasional accu-

short time since.

in his excellent treatise

"Comto

mentatio de Pronomine Graeco et Latino" (p. 77), endeavoured

nect the tei-mination
tv

con-

here treated of with the Sanskrit in a

diflferent

way, by designating

it

as the sister form of the pronominal locative ter-

mination

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE DUAL.

239

eative use of this termination, in Theocritus, is to be ex-

plained from

its

original signification being

no longer

felt,

and

the exchange of its v with that of the accusative thereby

caused.
satives,

On

the other hand,

we have

in

/xiV

and

vlv real accu-

and should therefore divide them

(p. 296),

fxi-v,

vi-v,

and

not assume, with Buttmann

this

a connection between

form and the dative

-7 v.

223.
fin?

As

to the origin of the case-suffixes

[G. Ed. p. 258.]

bhi-s,

wm

bhy-am, WTR bhy-dm, and

fV?

wm

bhy-as, which
notice,
to,'
first,

begin with

wy bhy (from

bhi),

we must
^aft?

their connection with the preposition

abhi, "
cf.

" to-

wards," " against," (whenc-e ^TcrB^ abhi-tas, "at,"

"apud^^).
ter-

However, in abhi

itself bhi is clearly, in like

manner, the
;

mination, and the demonstrative

^ a the theme

so that this

preposition, in respect to its termination, is to be regarded

as a sister

form to the Latin

fi-hi, si-hi, i-bi,

u-bi ;* just as

another preposition, which springs from

base
" over," finds a, viz. ^rfv adhi,

the

pronominal

analogous forms in the

(. 16.).

Greek
the

locatives, like o-di^ aAAo-0/, ovpavo-di

c?/ii

Related

to the suffix fv

is

dha,

which has been retained in

i-ha,

common

dialect

only in the abbreviation ha, in

"here," and in the preposition sa-hOf "with"; but in the Veda dialect exhibits the original form and more extended
diflFiision,

and in the Zend,

also, is

found in several pro-

mination ^TT in

(. 201.).

In this view similar forms would be con-

trasted, exclusive of the length of the

Greek

tf,

which, according to

my
it

explanation,
Still I

may

pass as compensation for the a, which has been dropped.

diflFen

lay less stress on the

nee of quantity than on

this,

that

is

precisely the pronouns of one gender in the Sanskrit,

locative not in
to

but the

common

($.201), but

which exhibit in tlie attach still more weight

f^ bhi

what has been said above in support of my opinion. * In Prakrit the termination f^ hih, which is connected with
"where?'*

(cf. .

217.), unites also with other pronominal bases, for the formation of

locative adverbs, as irf^ ta-hih, "there," i|f\| A:a-Ain,

240

FORMATION OF CASES.
;

nominal bases with a locative signification e. g. a>(2;Ma ava-dha, "here." In the Greek, compare da of ev^a, opposed to
dev,

from

evdev,

efxedev,

&c.,

from

\RT dhas,

for

iT^ tas, in

^TUTT a-dhas,

"beneath": in which formations

t,

V dh

stands as a permutation of

and occurs in

this

way,
are

also, in

some other formations.*

Th
I

refore dha,

dlii,

to be derived

from the demonstrative

I

ase

ta

but

it is

more

difficult to
aficj)!).

trace the origin of th

6f hhi of

^H ahhi
used for

(Greek

suspect that an initial consonant has been

[G. Ed.
(rtfitv,

p. 269.]

dropped. Sanskrit

As

in Greek, also,

(ptv is

and as

in

f^^K

vinsati "twenty," is clearly

an abbreviation of

fs^rfw dwinsati,

and in Zend
is

jho^^j his,

"twice," A5i^^^ bitya, "the second,"

used for MS^y>^

dvit,

(Sanskrit fir^ dwis), m^^^j>>^ dvitya (Sanskrit fffdln dwitiya),

so
fv{

hhi

may

be identical with the pronominal base

(r(pei, <T(piv, <piv,

^ swa

or

f^

swi

whence the Greek

his,

&c.; and so

indeed,

that after the s has been dropped, the following

semi- vowel has been strengthened or hardened, just as in

the Zend m5^_j
xi^^^JA bitya, and the Latin
bis, hi.

Tlie

changed sibilant might also be recognised

tion of the
>T

in the aspira-

hh, as, in

Prakrit
still

(. 166.),

TH

sma has become

T^mha; and, (which comes

closer to the case before us), in

Greek
this

for

(T(piv is

found also

yj/lv.

should spring from 6

+A

is

not entirely

And, in Sanskrit, that w bh unknown and in

;

way
r.

is

to

be explained the relation of mnJ^ hhuyos,

bahu, "

" more," to
Crit.

much," the a being rejected (Gramm.

will serve as

251. Rem.).

224.

The following

a general view of the

dual termination under discussion, in Sanskrit, Zend, Greek,

and Lithuanian:

Amon^

others, in the
for

2d person plural of the middle

is[

dhwS and

8^ dhoam

^ tw^, j^

twam.

INSTBUMENTAL, DATIVE, ABLATIVE DUAL.

aREE.

241

UTBCAKLUI.
tcilka-m.

{vehrkaSi-bya, or
in.

vrikd-bhydm,
vehrkoi-bya,

y
ranko-m.
Ttcxyi-o-iVf

f.

Jihicd-bhydm,

hizvd-bya,
paiti-bya,

m. paii-bhydm,
f.

paii-nu

tanu-bhydm,

tanu-bya,

iriTv-o-iv,
OTT-O-Tv,

vdg-bhydm,

vdch--bya*
bar an -bya,

m. bharad-bhydm, m. dtma'-bhydm.'\

(pepovr-o-iv,
BaiiJ.ov-O'iv,
a.

asma-bya.

deduce this form principally from the base

in the terminations

cjiJjaj/

raoch, " light,"

i

which often occurs

interposes

beginning with

b,

and always

ce as conjunctive vowel

jiv;^_i cckjA5/ raocA-tf-W*, <y.>^te^nl>A)/

raoch-e-byo.

We find, also,

jic^PpiSA}^

vi-voch-e-bis (Vend. S. p. 63.).

Bases in 7 r interpose c e; those in

letter, conjoin

/,

when

a vowel precedes that

the termination direct (AJ^^rvAJ^OJUi^c/c^-w amereidtat:

bya, according to . 38.)

on the other

hajid, the

/ of

^m

nt

is

rejected; thus, V. S. p. 9. AJii^ /c^cTcj

berezen'-bya,

" tplendentibuSf"
brvat-byaiiniy

with
**

t,

contrary to

60.

The form 9>>^<^

(. 61.).

rAJ>>Zs

supercilHs" also deserves notice, because in this solitary

word the

case

termination appears unreduced

this

The MS., however,

as often as
S.

word

occurs, always divides the termination

from the base (Vend.

p. 269,

twice

^WJ^
is

iK>M>>2i brvat

byahm ;

pp. 321 and 322, noAJ/AJj

it

5>n4^
that
bhru),

barvat byahm, probably for bravat byahm; so that

the ablative singular of a theme a /
this
\

would seem
>2

rAJ^ brvat
I

bru (Sansk.

have not found

word

in

any other case :

it is

not likely,
is

however, that any thing but ^as>>^ brvat or

^^aj^
nt, the last

brvant

its

theme:

in the latter case

it

would be a
last

participial form,

and would
but one also
sin-

demonstrate, that instead of the

consonant of

may

be rejected.

Or

are

we

to regard brcat

byahm

as a

form of that

gular kind that unites with the termination of the ablative singular that

of the dual, and thus a

/ \

bru would

still

be the theme

i\r,

in Sanskrit
;

and Zend, is rejected before case terminations b<>ginning

thus, in Greek,
fiaiito-ai,

with a consonant

and in Gothic dhma'-m.

242
lAKSUUT.
Yn.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.

GREEK.

MTBrANIAN.

bhrdtri-bhydm*

bhrdtar-e-bya,
vachd-hj/a,

narep-o-iVy
hxe{a)~o^iv,

....
.

n.

vach6-hhydm,^

GENITIVE, LOCATIVE.
[G. Ed.
p. 261.]

225. These
^fft^ 6s,

two

cases, in Sanskrit,

have

tlie

common termination
the singular

which

may

be connected with

genitive

termination.

The following are

(cf. . 158.),

examples:

^eRTft^^ vrikay-6s, fii{^T^^^jihway-6s

TTf^tlT taniv-()S,

mftw pafy-6s,

^^t^

vdch-Ss, >JT^\Ta^ bhrdtr-6s,

^^PRt^ vachas-ds.

In

Zend
is

this termination

seems

to

have

disappeared, and to be replaced by the plural;

likewise in
:

Lithuanian, where, awy-u

both dual and plural genitive.

PLURAL.
NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE,
226.

Masculines and feminines have, in Sanskrit,

^^
all

as

for the termination of the nominative plural, with which, as in the cognate languages, the vocative is identical in
clensions.
I

de-

consider this as to be an extended form of

so that in this extension

the singular nominative sign s; of the case-suffix

lies
is

a symbolical allusion to plurality:

and the
in

.9,

which

too personal for the neuter, is wanting

that

gender,

in

the

singular and dual, as well as in

the plural.
t';eir

The

three numbers, therefore, with regard to

masculine-feminine termination or personal designa-

tion, are related to

one another, as

it

were, like positive,

comparative, and superlative, and the highest degree belongs to the dual.
In

Zend

599 as has, according to

36

VT ar before
to^r

case terminations beginning with consonants

is

short-

ened

($.127.).

NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE PLURAL

become
chit
;

243

6 or jjai as before the

e^,

the Greek exhibits

appeuded particles cha and under the restriction of . 22S.

the Latin es* with anorganic length of quantity through the influence of the s but elsewhere simple
aj^j3A)/a)2^P
-es,
;

the Lithuanian has es in bases in r

s.

Thus the words ^ffirnr

duhitar-as,

2J dughdhar-as'cha, dvyarep-e^,
of the termination
is

dukter-es,

matr-

correspond with one another.

227.

The a

melted

[G. Ed. p. 26-2.]

;

down with a preceding

vrikas,

a of the base to d

thus,

<i4illl

from vrika
(.

as, corresponds to the Gothic vulfos, from

IVLFAas

69,).

In

this concretion only,

however, with

the vowel of the base, the Gothic has preserved the full ter-

mination; but elsewhere, both with vowel and consonantal

bases, the s alone of the old as is
left,

as in general the ter-

mination

asm
to
is

Gothic polysyllabic forms has everywhere been

or s
(cf. .

weakened

135. 191.)

hence, sunyu-s, ahman-s,

too, is contracted

for suniv-as, ahman-as.

And WF

d,

with

the termination as to d*; hence, f^t^m Jihuds, for jihivd-ag.

It cannot,

however, be shewn with certainty, from

what
has

has been just said, that the Gothic gibos, from simple
its
s

GIBO,

or as (contracted with the base vowel to 6=^6) for

case designation.

228.

The masculine pronominal bases

Zend, and Gothic, the
it

in

a refuse, in

Sanskrit,
tion,

full

nominative designawith

and in place of
i,

extend the base by the addition

to
.
2.,

of an

which,
i,'\

according

the a

of the

base forms ^
* Vide
.

for which, in Zend, is used ro & or

di;

797. p. 1078.

t As
tliat

is

lengthened in
first

many

other cases to
is

^ e, and
all is

with this the

case terminations are then

in
jT te,

conjoined, there

good ground to assume

contained, and

and similar forms, no case designation at

that the pronouns, as purely words of personality, find themselves suffici-

ently personified in this case through themselves alone

as in the singular
6 for 6s
;

is

said for sas, in Sanskr.t as in Gothic,

ille

and

in

Greek

while in

Latin, with is-te also ipse and

are robbed of the nominative sigiu

foct that

This opinion

is

remarkably confirmed by the

^sn^ ami (Grimm.

CriU

244
hence, Sanskrit ^
[G. Ed.
p. 263.]

FORMATION OF CASES.
t^,

Zend

w^^
to the

td,

Gothic

thai,

"

this,**

answering

feminine form

irra

tds,

guu^o tdo (. 56'.), thus.

To

this corresponds, in

Greek, rot
i,

(Doric for

ol).

In

Greek and

Latin, however, this

(ej, es),

which

practically replaces the termination as

has not reo

mained
.

in the masculine

pronominal bases in

{='^
;

a,

116.);

but

all

other bases of the second, as of the

first
it

declen-

sion, have, in

Greek and Latin, taken example from

hence,
terrce

\vKOt,

ypipat, for KvKo-es, yj^pa-e^, lupi (from lupoi),

terrai), for lupo-es, terra-es.
its

(from

The Latin

fifth

declension,

although in

origin identical with the

;

first (. 121.),

has

preserved the old termination

hence, res from re-es, as,

in Sanskrit jihwds from jihwd-as.

fixed

narrower

restrictions than

the

The Lithuanian has Greek and Latin on

it

the misuse of the pronominal inflexion under discussion, or,

to speak

more

correctly,
lupi,

want of inflexion
that in

gives, indeed,

wilkai=\vKot,

but not rankai, but rankos.

!

Honour,
it

therefore, to the Gothic

this

respect

has not

overstepped by one hair the old Sanskrit-Zend limits; for

that the adjective a bases, as they in general follow the

pronominal declension, give also

therefore,

ai for ds {blindai " caeci ")

is,

no violation of the old law.

229. In Zend, in consonantal bases the dual termination

goj

do also (from ^rw

;

ds, . 207.)

occurs with a plural signivdch-do,

"voces,''''

fication

thus, frequently,

^^jud^

zxu^^fxi?

Crit. . 271.)

shews

itself clearly

through most of the oblique

cases, as

ami-byas, " Hits," ami-sham, " illorum," to be the naked theme.

The form

which occurs

in the Zend-Avesta ascj^coJaj^^ vi'spes-cha, ''omnesque"

(cf.
\J.

(V. S. p. 49), considered as a contraction of vispay-as-cha

leads to the conjecture, that to

244.),

t^,

and similar uninflected forms, the

termination as also might attach

itself; thus,

H^H

tay-as.

In Zend, the

pronominal form in e occurs, for the most part, in the accusative plural and thus the abovementioned vispes-cha 1. c. stands probably as accusative, although, according to Anquetil's inaccurate tiuuslation, it

might

be regarded as the nominative.

NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE PLURAL.

raoch-do,
**

245

luces^

which forms cannot be regarded, perhaps,

;

as regular plurals of bases in d

I

for I believe

[G. Ed.

p.

264.]

can guarantee that there exists no such base as Au^au(p

vdchd and juu^waj/ raochd.

The form ^tv^^ donhd

"lupi,''''

in a

bases, as ^'Wjgoj^^w^i;* vehrkaonhS,

and

"

lupos^ rests

on that in the Vedas, but which only occurs in the nominative,

^HTOTT dsas

(.

56.); e.g. U^HlflH stomdsas, "songs of

praise," for u'Ihih stdmds,

230.

from

^ffW stoma.*

Bases in i and u have, in Sanskrit

patay-as, THT^H sunaw-as, for paty-as, sunw-as.

also has preserved this
(. 27.),

Guna hence tnnra The Gothic

;

Guna, but in

its

weakened form

which, before

u,

(for suniu-s,
telligible

from

sunau-s,) a

becomes y ; form which would be uninhence, sunyu-s, "sons,"

theory, which has been
t

without the

Guna

shewn
melted
70.);

to belong to the

German.

Ii

bases the
i

Guna

is

down with
The

that of the base

to long

(written

ei, .

hence, gastei-s, ansfei-s,

from GASTI,

ANSTI
;

(cf. p. 105.).

2jend employs

Guna

or not at pleasure

hence

^^^^ojajq)

paity-6, or paitay-6,

'|jjas2)

pasv-d, or pasav-6.

231. Neuters have,

in Zend,

as in

the

cognate Euro[G. Ed.

p. 265.]

pean languages, a short a for their termination|

to
;

perhaps the remains of the

natural genders,
after

full as,
s,

which belongs
is

the

the

which

too

per-

This fonn

is,

in

my

opinion, to be so regarded, as that, for greater

emphasis, the termination as has been a second time appended to the

termination, which had become concrete with the base.
*

t The

i,

which, according to

$. 41., is

blended with the base, remains

in spite of the
I

a preceding the
is,

y.

Simple as this point

have nevertheless found

it,

it

very

diflBcult to

come

to a firm conclnsion regarding

although, from the

first, I

have

directed

my

attention towards

it.

Bumouf

has already (Nouv.

Joom.

Asiat. III. 309, 310) given the plural neuter form,

and instituted comlike

parisons with the Gothic and Greek, &c.

''

But from forms

it

hu-matOy

bene-cogitata"

"hucta" " bene-dicta,''

is
;

cannot be perceived what the

neuter plural termination properly

skrit,

because, setting out with the San-

we

are tempted to assume that the true termination in these forms

has

246

FORMATION OF CASES.
speechless gender, has been dropped.

sonal for the dead [G. Ed.

p. 266.]

Tliis

a remains, then, in the accusative.

feminine
have,
in

The masculine and

generally likewise
following

the

same
"

case,

as

(Zend
:

6,

aj^joaj

ascha).

The
pura
In
;'

are examples
\

A5yA5Ajja3As

ashavan-a,

M^^Mxs(c/c
AJ^Ajy

berezant-a, " splendentia;'^ m^xuI^ vdch-a, "verba ;"

nar-a,

" homines

;"

aj^^^^aj

ast-a,
is

"

ossaJ'"'

no-

minal bases in a the termination

the vowel of the base
:

melted

down with

the d so produced has, however, in

of the

the

received condition
its loss

language, according to a
by lengthening the
final

has been dropped, and

vowel, or not.

either compensated

We

must

therefore direct our attention to bases with a

different termination than a, especially to such as terminate

with a con-

sonant.

The examination

of this subject

is,

however, mucli embarrassed,

is

in that the Zend, without regard to the gender of the singular,

prone,

contraiy to natural expectation, to

plural
;

make every noun

numerous
mashya,

neuter in the
class of a bases

an inclination which goes so

lost the

far, that the

have hereby entirely

masculine nominative, and but sparingly

exhibit the masculine accusative.

is,

When,

e.g.

"human

being,"

in the plural nominative, likewise,

mashya (withcAa, mashya-cha), here

is

am nevertheless
aj

convinced that this plural mashya, or mashya,

{. 66''.), as in

not an

abbreviation of

mashydn from mashyds

o or a
<i

no other part of

Zend Grammar
form belongs
culine

stands for

^rw

ds:

am

persuaded that this

to the neuter.

The

replacing, however, of the plural mas-

by

neuters rests upon a deep internal feeling of the language

for in the plural

the back ground.

infinite

number it is clear that gender and personality are far in The personality of the individual is lost in the abstract
;

and inanimate plurality

and

so far

we can but

praise the
it,

Zend

for its evitation of

gender in the plural.

We must

blame

however, in

this point, that

into concord

it

does not, in all places, bring the adjectives or pronouns

refer,

with the substantives to which they

and that in

this

respect

it

exhibits a downright confusion of gender, and a disorder

which

has very

much impeded

the inquiry into this subject.

all lights

Thus, e.g. vispa

anaghra-raochdo (not raoch-a), "

which have had no beginning";

tisaro (fem.) iata or thrayo (masc.) sata, "three

hundred"; chathwdro

(masc.) sata *<four hundred." In general the numbers " three " and *'four " appear to have lost the neuter ; hence, also, thrayo cunfn-a, "three
nights," chathwdro csafn-a, " four nights": in Vend. S. p. 237, on the other
hiind, elands

tdnara yd,** ihosa persons who

."

divide thus war-a

although

NOMMATIVE, VOCATIVE

LDEAL.

247

principle often quoted, been again shortened, and remains

only in monosyllabic bases and before annexed particles.

The Gothic and Zend,

in this respect, stand

[G. E<L
;

p. 267.3

very remarkably upon one and the same footing

"hcEc,^ is used (for thd.
. 69.),

for thd,

HVAa;
*'A<Bc"

but daura, from

THJa hvo, " quae," DAURA, as, in Zend, jujp

from
;

for
to,

MiJ^

yd,
It-

"qiuB,"'^

opposed to

ajoaj agha,

" peccataT

from agha.

cannot, therefore, be said of the Gothic that

the a of the base has been dropped before that of the termialthough the form might also belong to a theme
but
riara,

which

also occurs,

much

less frequently

than nar

whence

also,

elsewhere, the masculine

nar-6 ta&-cha, "and those persons."

From
(also,

the theme cocA,

"word,"
appears,
ajciWiu^

"speech," we
vach-a);
e.g.

find

frequently vdch-a
S. p. 34,

erroneously as

it

Vend.

A5^jj^/a)^ M^C^^vy aj^A}^>

vdehu humata hucta hvareJta, " verba bene-cogitata, bene-dicta, bene-peracta."

From

JA>AJX3)A5 ashavan, " pure," occurs very often the neuter plural
:

'shvana-a

as,

however, the theme ashavan sometimes,

itself

too,

although

-ery rarely,

extends

unorganically to ashavana., this form proves less

(though

it

be incorrect) that the neuter ashiivan-a should be derived from

the imorganic extremely rare ashavana, than from the genuine and most

common

aghavan., in the

weak

cases

ashaun or cushaon.
;

Participial forms,
I

too, in nt are verj'

common

in the neuter plural

and

have never found

any ground
the Vend.

for

assuming that the Zend, like the Pali and Old High Gerparticipial

man, has extended the old

S., p. 1 19,

theme by a vowel

addition.

In

we

find

an accusative agha aiwUhitdr-a, "peecata

corruTnpaitia (i)."

Anquetil renders both expressions together by "fa

but probably aitei-sitdra stands for

corruption du cceur" (II. 927.);

-cgitdra,

and means
So

literally
is

"

the destroying" (cf.

f^

kshi, intrans.

"to

be mined ").
tar
is

much

certain, that aiici is a preposition (p. 42),

{. 144.),

and
is

the sufi&x used in the formation of the word

it

which

in

the strong cases tdr ; and from this example

follows, as also

from asha-

van-a, that where there are more forma of the theme than one, the Zend,
like the Sanskrit (see

Gnunm.

Crit. r. 185. c),

forms the nominative, acI

cusative, and vocative plural

from the stronger theme.

refrain

from ad-

ducing other examples for the remarkable and not to have been expected
proposition, that the Zend, in variance from the Sanskrit, forms its plural

neuters according to the principle of the

I..atin

nomm-a, Greek

T-uXay-a,

Gothic namon-a or namn-a.

248
nation, for
it

FORMATION OF CASES.
could not be dropped, because the base-vowel
first,

and termination have been, from the

concrete.
:

The
this

old
is

length of quantity might, however, be weakened

the fate of long vowels especially at the end of words.

It

cannot, therefore, be said of the

Greek ra

Siopa and the

Latin dona, that the a entirely belongs to the termination,

This a

is

an old inheritance of the oldest

bases with
e
(.

date,

from the

time when the second declension, to use the expression,

terminated
its

a.

This a has since then beor

e,

come, in Greek, o or
maintained
its

204.), in Latin, w, o,

and has

ancient quality only in the plural neuter,

and the

a,

which
This
a,

has grown out of a+d, has

become
offspring

shortened.
6, e,

however, in contrast with

its

u,

may even

pass for a

more weighty ending, which

unites base and termination, than if ^mpo or Biope, dono,

done, stood as the plural neuter.

232. Bases in

and u may,

in Zend, suppress their final

vowel before the termination, and u may be suppressed and

replaced by lengthening the base-vowel: thus

we read
from

in

the Vend. S. pp. 46 and

gairi (see p. 196, Notef):
(fem.).

48, aj7as^ gara, " hills,"

j^jaj^

on the other hand,

268.)
le pont, le

p. 313, gaiiis

That which Anquetil (IL

renders by "une

action qui empiche de passer

peche contre nature,"

runs in the original (p.

A>AijAs<5)jAJ4'Ajy

119),

Msj^Mj<3^xi^^^ A>w<^7gQ)AMyA5 asoai

yd,

agha andperetha skyaothna

i.

naro-vaipaya,

[G. Ed.

p. 268.]

e.

"

the sins which stop the bridge, the

it is

actions

which ...."; and here

evident that andperetha

actually "bridge."*
is

stands for andperethw-a, for peretu

means

Burnouf8 MS.
for

divides thus,

and peretha, which

following OlshauI

have no ground assuming that in Zend there exists a preposition and, " without," so tliat and peretha miglit mean " without a bridge " ; and th&t peretu would,
sen (p. 6), but with the various reading andperetha.
in the singular instrumental, iotta perethwa or peretava.
fore, that
I suppose, there-

peretu

may

bo conjoined with the preposition d, and then the

prefixed.

negative

an have been

NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE PLURAL.

Bat a
final

249

may

also be retained, in the

form of a semi-

vowel, either pure or with

Guna

the latter form I recognise

;

in AA550AM^ ydtava (Vend. S. p. 120

in Olshausen, p.
>spJ>>^JC^

7),

which can only be the plural accusative of

for
it

ydtiu

stands with ajoai agha, "peccata; and in the

same

page in Olshausen occurs a derivative of ydtu in the accusative singular, viz.

cian," "gifted with
I

^^^^c^>^^uJ^ydtuTnentemt "the magito Anqnetil,

magic" (according

mo gicien).
sins

render, therefore, agha yntava literally by "the

"

of

sorcery
quetil's

(An quetil, "la magie tres mauvaise"); and in AnVocabulary is (p. 467) 9^oju>^ ydthvaiim, the
of our

regular plural genitive

therefore,
it

base

yfitit,

which

means,

"of the sorceries";

while Anquetil faultily gives

(magiciens), and, according

the

meaning of the derivative

to

his custom, takes

this oblique case for a nominative.

is at

An

example of a neuter plural form without Guna

AJ2>^^g hendva
"

V. S.

p. 122,

" the Indies'^;

with hapta hendu, "the

seven Indies

(Anq.

11. p.

270).

It

has the epithet us-astar-a

("up-starred?") in opposition

to

^^wgty
(?)

^j^As^oo-wjiOAy
[G. Ed.
p. 269.]

daus-astarem hendum, "to the ill-starred

Indies."

An
is

example, in which the suppressed termination in

is

a u base

replaced by lengthening the final vowel,

^^wiijlp

the very

frequently occurring
233.

vShu, "goods,"
(cf.

from >^v^l}vdhu.
in

The

interrogative base ki

quis, quid), wliich

Sanskrit forms only the singular nominative-accusative (neuter) foFT ki-m, but is

elsewhere replaced by ka
this base, the use of

whence, in
is

Zend,

rAJ^ ka-t, "

what ":

which

very

limited,

forms in Zend the plural neuter

aj^^^ ky-a*',

and

* V.S.p. 341. A5WJU56jUJ^ 'C^3^ A'-C^ Xi^Xil^ ^^A)A5 AJi^^ M^^/^Mi juoj/o kya aeti vacha yoi henti gdthdhva thris dmruta (erroneously thris dmruta), " "VVnat are the words which are thrice said in the
prayers (songs) 1"
to

The masculine forms

no
difficulty.

aSte and y6i can here, according

Note

at . 231., occasion

So

also

V. S.

p. 85,

xi^^^ kya
before

250
this

FORMATION OF CASES.
form
is

the

more important, since we

still
i

require
of the

examples which can be relied upon, in which the

base
is

not suppressed before

it

the termination

a (above,

gara for gairy-a), although

may

with reason be conjec-

tured, that, in accordance with the

abovementioned hendva

and ydtav-a, forms

also like vairy-a or vairay-a,

from

vairi,

were in
tive

use.

As
i

in Gothic, neuter substantive

and adjec-

bases in

are

wanting, the
base

numeral base
/,

THUI,

" three," and

the

pronominal

" he," are

very im-

portant for the neuter cases under discussion, in which

they form thriy-a {fhriya hunda,

" three

hundred

")

and

iy-a,

according to the principle of the Sanskrit

forms, of which the
i

monosyllabic
its

sound has not passed into

iy;

simple

semi-vowel, but into

>Tt

thus, in Sanskrit,

fnm

bhiy-d,

from

bhl
234.

The Sanskrit
a,

gives, in place of the

Zend- European

neuter

an ^
p. 270.]

i,

[G. Ed.

perhaps as the weakening of a former a the final vowel of the base is length(. 6.)
;

ened, and between

is

it

and the case termination a euphonic n

placed

(. 133.)

madhu-n-i.]

hence ^^Tf?T c?dn4-n-i, mr\fm vdri-n-i,* ^\^^ The bases which terminate with a single con;

sonant

t^

n and T r being excepted

prefix

to

it

a nasal,

before the masculine <^aj^aj7 ratavo (|)aj50aj/ aj^^A

kya ratavo,
n following

" which are the lords"?). * According to a euphonic law (Gram.

after

Crit.

r. 84''.),

an

TT

r,

and some other

letters,

is,

under

certain conditions,

changed into

f^ysn vlswd,

t In the Vedas, the ni in a bases is frequently found suppressed ; e.g. '^ omnia" from viswa. In this way the Sanskrit is connected
this coincidence
is

with the Zend vispa, viipd-cha : but perhaps

only exter-

nal ; for as the Sanskrit nowhere uses a neuter tcrminationa, f^fv^viswd can-

not well be deduced from v'lspa+a, but can only be explained as an abbreviation of the d-ni, wliich likewise occurs in the Vedas, as also ^'iR
purii,''^

multa," ">wfl.9na,"isused for tr^fT!l/>ri/m( Rosen's Spec. pp.

9, 10).

NOMINATIVE. VOCATIVE PLURAL.

and after
s

251
;

and n the preceding vowel

is

lengthened

hence
I

^^rftl vachdn-si,

mm^fi

ndmdn-i.

Into relation with this

might be brought the neuter

i/iaic)
still

inflexion of quce {quai)

;

and

h(e-c

which stand in Latin very isolated

quce

is,

however,
while
it

tolerably distant

from the Sanskrit Wjf^

kd-n-i,

is

nearly identical with the neuter dual

ke

from ka+i

(.212.).
is

Since, however, the antiquity of this dual termination

supported by the Zend, the plural form kdni stands on the

its

other side isolated, and

age

is

thereby rendered doubtful

as, moreover, the Latin, in the verb also, has introduced

termination originally dual into the plural*

[G. Ed.

p. 271.]

we cannot avoid recognising

remnant
235.

in the Latin plural

quce
kS.

as true as possible of the Sanskrit dual

We

give here a general viewj of the formation of

of the vocative, identical with

the plural nominative, and

it

and the neuter accusative

SANSKRIT.

ZEND.

GREEK.

LATIN.
lup'-l.

LITHtJAN.

GOTHIC.

m.

vrikds.
tS.

velirkdonhd.,t KVKOI,
tS,

w'dkai,
tie,-{-

vulfos.
thai.

m.
n.
f.

rot.

is-Ci,

ddnd-n-U
jihwds,

data.

Slop a,

duna.
terrae.

....

daura.

hizvdo,

X^joa/,

rankos. yibos.

* The termination
yH tha or
"ff

tis

answers to ^n? thas, Greek rov from

re.

tos, not to

ia,

Greek

With

respect to the otherwise remarkable

is

declension of gut, and of hie, which

narily to

akin to

it, I

would

refer prelimi-

my
.

treatise

" On the Influence of Pronouns in the formation of

Words"
t See

(l)y F.

Diiramler), p. 2.

229.

X This form belongs not to the base gular, ta-s, and nearly all the other cases

TA
j

(=(1
to

tn),

whence, in the

sin-

TIA, whence, through the influence of the i, tie has been developed (cf. p. 174, Note* and and whence, in the dative dual and plural, tie-m, tie-vis. The . 193.) nominative plural is, however, without a case termination. The original
but
;

form

TIA
^^

corresponds to the Veda JH tya, mentioned in

sya
(-OJ

194.;

while

the base

shya^ see

$.

65.)

is

fully declined in Lithuanian in the

form of SZIE, and in the plural nominative, likewise without inflexion,

is

252
SANSKRIT.
f.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.
ido,

GREEK.
rat,

LATIN.
is-tae,

LITHUAN.
tes,

GOTHIC
th6s.

ids,

m. patay-as,
f.

paity-6,*

hos-es,\
TTopri-es,

....

gastei-s,

prttay-aSf
vdri-n-i,

dfrity-6*
var'-a,

mess*-es,i dwy-s,

anstei-s.

n.

mari-a,
iy-a-

n
Pf.
eu

ky-a,l

bhavishyanty-as, hushyainty-u*

m
n.
f.

sunav-as,
tanav-as,

pasv-o,
tanv-6,*
TTlTV-eS,

pecurs,
socru-s,

sunu-s,

sunyu-s.

*? f.
to

....

handy II- .

madhu-n-i,
vadhw-as,

madhv-a,

fiedv-a,

pecu-a,

m.f.gdv-as,
is szie.
its

geU'S,^

^o(0-ef,

bov-es.f

From the pronominal declension the form ie (from ia) has found way into the declension of the adjective also so that the base GERA,
:

"good," forms several cases from

gerl appears to stand in

GERIE;
and nom.

viz. dat. du.

pi. geri

gerie-m for
This

ffera-m, dat. pi. gerie-ms for gera-ms,

for gerai.

most complete agreement with the Latin nominaj

tives of the corresponding declension (bont, lupl)

but the difference be(for hono-i) belongs to

tween the two languages

(analogous with

is this, is

that the

oibom
(cf.

the termination, while geri

tie),

void of termination, and stands for gerie

but this latter for gerie-i

yaunikkie-i.)

* Seep.
t See
X

163,

Note t. from
if,

p. 1078.

To

this kg-a,

ki-a, corresponds surprisingly the

it is

Latin gui-a
is

(quiaiiam, quiane),

as I scarce doubt,

a plural neuter, as quod

singular neuter

(cf.
'"''

Max. Schmidt " De

pron. Greeeo et Latino" p. 34).

:

\h&l," quia is cliarly shewn to be an accusative the In the meaning meaning " because " is less apt for tliis case, and would be better expressed by an instrumental or an ablative; but in the singular ^twd we must be content to see the idea " because " expressed by an accusative. On the

other hand, quo,

among other meanings,

signifies

" whither," a genuine

accusative signification in Sanskrit

grammar.

Without the support of

singular had been pre-

quod we might conjecture that an instrumental

served in quia^ after the analogy cf xs^^^JM'i paity-a, forpaiti.

We

might expect gav-o, gavah-cha,

9, in

**

bovesque;" but

we

read jte>C(0

geus in the Vend. S. p. 263, L.

ncntere

combination with the pronominal

to

M^

td,'*illa,"

au;*o V^y ">" which, according

$.231.

Note, cannot surprise us.

NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE PLURAL.

SANSKRIT.
f.
f.

253
UTHUAN.
GOTHIC.

ZEND.

GREEK.

LATIN.

ndv-as,
vucli-as,

....
vdch-6,*

va(f )-e?,
oit-eq,

....
vocs,f

....

....
fiyand-

m. bharanf-as,
m. dlmdn-as,
II.

barent 6*

(pepovr-e^,
aifxov-e^,

ferent-es,f

....

asman-6,

sermon-es,f

.... .... .... ....

ahman
namun...
.J

ndmdn-i,
bhrdtar-as,
duhitar-as,

ndman-a,
brdtar-6*

Toc\av-a,
-narep-eg,

nomin-a,
fratr-es,f

tn.
f.

dughdhar-(j*

duyarep-eg, matr-es,f dugter-es,

^oTrjp-e^,
e'ne{(x)-a,

....
....

m.
n.

ddtdr-as,

ddtdr-6*
vachanh-a,%

dator-es,f
oper-Ot

vachdns-i,

....

THE ACCUSATIVE.
236. The bases which end with a short vowel annex ^ n in Sanskrit, and lengthen the final vowel of the base

hence,

'"J<*1^

vrikdn, ^TTtiT patin, ht sunun, &c.

We might

imagine

this

n to be related to the

of the singular ac-

cusative, as in the verb the termination WlfT dni (1st pers.

sing, imperative) has clearly proceeded

from

^Tfir ami.

The

cognate dialects speak, however, in favour of Grimm's acute

conjecture, that the Sanskrit n
is,

in the accusative plural

masculine, an abbreviation of
tire in the

ns,||

which has remained en-

Gothic

vulfa-ns, gasti-ns, sunu-ns,

but

has been

divided in the other sister languages;

since the Sanskrit,

according to

. 94.,

has given up the latter of the two con-

* See

p. 163.

Note

t See Note t
I

in preceding page.

The Gothic r

bases annex in the plural a , and can therefore be

contrasted no further with the cognate languages.

BROTHAR becomes
S.

BROTHRU, whence brothryu-s,

$

&c., according to the analogy oisunyu-s.

Or AJWjj^Aj^

vachenha.

Thus we read Vend.

p 127, rwmenha^
{y{ff^ namas,

which, I think, must be regarded as accusative of

"adoration"),

mmo

and as governed

by aj7(^7g_j

berethra,

"from him

who
II

brings," " from

him

offering."

The Old

Prussian, too, exhibits in the ace. pi. ns, e.g. tdva-na, naTtpas,
hr,

Rcepectmg the Veda termination

from

n, see . 517.

Remark.

254
sonants, and has

FORMATION OF CASES.
lengthened, as
it

appears, in compensa;

tion for this, the final vowel of the base*

[G. Ed.
p. 274.]

while the Greek

sibilant,

\vKovs has preserved the

but has

permitted the v to volatilize to v.f In fact, Kvko-v has the same relation to hvKov^ that rvTrrovcri has to tutttovo"*, from
[G. Ed.
p. 275.]

Ti^TrTovT/.J

For

-nocrt-a^,

ix^v-as,

not, however, expect a

/

itocrt-v^, i-)(dv-v^,

as the

we could Greek makes the

and

t;

bases in

all

parts similar to the bases which terminate

with a consonant, which, in Sanskrit, have as for a termi-

hence "q^ padas = iroSa^ and even in the most vigorous period of the language ns could not have attached itself
nation
;
:

to a consonant preceding. This as for ns

may be compared with

whence the accnsative
fc^'gitT

Thus
r(3lHH
{*'

vrikdri for vrikahs; as, f^irf^ vidwdns,

vidwdhs-am, in the

uninflected

nominative

vidwdn,

sapiens").

t As

the V also passes into

(ridfls for ridevs, -flEolic rv-^ais, fxiXais for

Tvi^rav{T)s^ fiikavs),

Hartung

(1.

c p. 263)

is

correct in explaining in this

sense the

in iEolic accusative

forms like

vofiois, to\s OTparryyois,

&c.

As

regards, however, the feminine accusatives like fieydXais, noiKiKais, rdfiaig,

quoted by him,
culines,

believe that they have followed the analogy of the massufficiently distinguish their

from which they

i ;

gender by the a
first

preceding the

we

cannot, however, thence infer, that also the

and

specially feminine declension

had originally accusatives

in vs, as neither

has the Gothic in the corresponding declension an ns, nor does the Sanskrit exhibit
rison, p. 62).
I

an n (see $.287., and

cf.

Rask

in Vater's Tables of

Compaa truly

It

cannot be said that rvTrrovai proceeded from

rCtTTovTo-i,

monstrous form, which never existed in Greek, while the tvhtovti before
us answers to all the requirements of Greek

Grammar,
anti,

as to that of the
enti,

whole

base, since o-vri corresponds to the

ri (Dor.), in

Sansk

Zend

Goth, nt';

and from the singular

expected.
first

the plural nothing else than vri can be

it is

But

to arrive at ovai

from ovri

not requisite to invent

so strange a

form as ovrai

for that ovri can

become

ovo-i is

proved

by the circumstance that the

very usual transition of

latter has actually arisen

from

it,

by the

into 2,

and the not rare vocalization of the

7ir us has arisen from nt
"Rut if in the dative plural,

to Y, as also in Sanskrit, in all probability, 172,

(cf. p.

Note ), of which more hereafter.

indeed, ov-<rt has arisen from oi^-ori, not from

ovon

(\tov<ri

not 8aifu>vai)y

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
the Ionic arat, aro, for vrai, jto, a

255

form which has extended

from the places where the vocalization of the v was necessary, to those also where v might be added {-neneldaTai, rerpd(jtaTai
;

then, also, irenavaTat, KeK\idrai, &c. for irenavvTai,

KeKKtvTai).

This comparison with the 3d person plural apthe

pears to

me

more

in point, as, in

my

opinion, the n

in the presupposed forms, like "^^Wt vrikahs, ^THI^ patins, \vKovg, has the same object that it has in the 3d person
plural
;

viz. allusion to

plurality by extending (nasalizing)

the syllable preceding the sign of personality.

troduction of a nasal
foreign,
is

The
of

in-

an admixture which
to the

is

least of all

and conies nearest

mere lengthening

an

already existing vowel.

237.

Feminine bases with a

final

vowel follow in Sanbut with the supthey

skrit the analogy of consonantal bases;

pression of the
too,

a* thus

for as or ns

may

perhaps,

never have had

ns, for else

:

hence would have arisen,

to the
[G. Ed. p. 276.]

as in the masculine, a simple n

we must remember that the abandonment of the n before case terminations

beginning with a consonant
is

a very old and therefore pre-Greek pheno-

menon, which
compensation

is is

not to be accounted for in the Greek, and wherefore no

to be required for the v,

which has been dropped.

even

if it

were

so,

we must

still

be

satisfied, if the

sation for a lost V remains unfulfilled in several

tliere are

But demand for compenplaces of grammar; for

languages
its
:

two kinds of euphonic alteration

in all

the one,

which has acquired the force of a general law, makes

a similar

appearance under

form on each similar occasion, while the other only irregularly

itself.

and occasionally shews

* Monosyllabic bases only have preserved the a as the case sign in the singular nominative
(.

137.)

hence,

f^t^T

striy-ag,

^^eminas,"

vmT( bhuvas, ''terras," from "Bfi stri, Vfbhu. There is scarce a doubt that this form originally extended to polysyllabic bases also for besides
;

the Greek, the Zend also partly evinces this

{. 238.),

as also the circum-

stance that in the actual condition of the Sanskrit language the accusative plural shews, in general, an inclination to

weaken

itself,

and thus

contrast itself more submissively with the imperious nominative (. 129.).

266
feminine gender,
able than n.

FORMATION OF CASES.
too,

the well-sounding Ionic a

is

more

suit-

In general, the Sanskrit feminines in other parts

cast off the n,
(. 133.).

of

grammar

which

is

annexed by masculines
in

and neuters
has) is

Moreover, the Gothic also,

it

feminine
t6s (eas,

6 bases, gives no ns, but

appears that th6s

= ITW
;

a pure dowry from the ancestral house

i

and when the

like i-ns, u-ns,

feminine

and u bases in Gothic, by forms

assimilate themselves to the masculines, this

may be regarded
follow the ex-

as a disguise of gender, or a deviation caused by the example

of the

masculines.

The consonant bases

hence, Jiyand-s,

ample of the Indian, but have

native
(.

lost the a, as in the

nomi-

227.)

ahman-s,

for fiyand-as,

ahman-as.
238.

Feminines with a short

it

final

vowel lengthen

it,

to

compensate, as

appears, for
is

the suppression of the a;

prity-as,

thus Tfhrtw pntt-s

formed from

and

thto^ tanu-s

from tanw-as.
spect, only

The Greek

certainly presents, in this re7s,

a casual coincidence, through forms in

Cy,

which, however, are not restricted

to the feminine, and

i-es,

stand at the same time, in the nominative, for

u-ej.

The Zend,

like the

Greek, follows in

its

and u bases the

hence,
"^.^^^Jajq)

analogy of the consonantal terminations

paity-d (paity-as-cha,)
<^JiA5Q)

pasv-6 {pasv-al-cha,
i,

or,

with

Guna,

paitay-o, pasav-6.

In feminine bases in
ti-s,

u,

occur at

times also the forms is,

corresponding to the Sanskrit;

as, Av^yjAStt gnirt-s, "monies''^

(Vendidad

S. p. 313.),

-H3j>Jg7^

erezu-s,

"rectos,''''

Mi^Aj^^tafnil-s, " urentesr Mi^^<^/^<^ peretu-s,

"pontes."
239.

Masculine bases in

a5 a,

where they are not replaced

^^eni^-w^ mazistan, ^'maxi-

by the neuter (. 231. Note), have, in the accusative, a(cf. .61.);

as, ^9-^ ima,* "Aos," often occurs,

mos" (Vend.
[G. Ed.

S. p. 65.).

The

sibilant is retained before the

p. 277.]

particle aj^ cha,

;

and these forms can be

copiously quoted

as,

As^jj^eyj^-'^

ame sham -cha,

"

non-

* Cf. VSdic forms in dh.

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.

257

conniventesque'" ; aj^j3^/(3"^(; manthrans-cha, " sermonesque^'t

aj^j3^9j3;oa5 aSsmahs-cha, "lignaque"; aj^jjvm^^^IjojjauI? vdstryans-cha,

'*

agricolasquey*

The form
to

a}cijjjv>j^>7jC3aj

a^^au-

run-ans-clia, " presbyterosque''^ (V. S. p. 65. j, is

remarkable, as

there

is

no reason elsewhere

assume a theme athauruna;

an unavoidable
to suppose
it

and

this

form would accordingly shew that consonantal bases

assume the
inflexion ns, with
;

also could

auxiliary vowel
that, in

however

unless, indeed,

we are

the perverted feeling of the language,

has been

introduced by the preponderating analogy of the a bases.

More important,
and

unans-cha are the

therefore, than this AYjj^y>7>AjUAj athauraccusatives jv>c/Ajy nareua, " homines,^'

"
stellas,''''

Av>^7(jojj streus,

which occur very frequently

while from ^aj^juj aiar, " fire,"

Sthr-eus, but

we have

found, not Mi>c7<3AU

^76au
it

athr-o, in

that atar distinguishes itself

which it is to be remarked from other words in r in this

point also, that

A3C0AU (da,

forms, in the nominative singular, not

but jtcAj^Au dtars.

I

But how

is

the termination eus

to be explained ?
nns,

believe in

no other way but from u^

[G. Ed.
p. 278.]
. 31.,

by changing the n into a vowel, as in

after which, according to
:

K6^^'ov\

the

a5

a has be-

come

c e

the sibilant, however, which, after

>

a and

^ ah,

is jj i,

must, after

u,

appear as M^

s.

We actually find, too,

in the V. S. p. 311,

^g/ ner-ans

in the sense of a dative;

But

formerly thought

I could,

through forms of this kind, quote the

9.

introduction of a euphonic * in Zend, according to the analogy of

if this

95.

introduction cannot be proved

by

cases, in

which no ground

exists for the assumption of

particle
AJrtj

an original

sibilant,

preserved merely by the

cha

(cf. ^. o&>.

207. 228.), then the above examples are the

more important,
Towel.

in order to supply a fresh proof that ns is the original

designation of masculine plural accusatives of themes terminating with a

The superlative aj9c^j3-^^aj7(3C^9 verethrazahitema (of which

hereafter)
cases,
>/,

may be regarded as derived from a participial nominative. Other which might suggest occasion to assume, in Zend, a euphonic after have been nowhere met with by me.
8

258

FORMATION OF CASES.

4Aa>i*i)A5 a7>aj am^as^ -M^^ify iM^jJM^ ddidt at nerans mazdd ahurd ashaond, &c. "da quidem hominibus, magnv Ahure !

240.

As a

in Sanskrit occurs the

most often of all

letters

as the termination of masculine bases, and

take, in the history of

we cannot mis-

our family of languages, the disposia language to introduce, by an

tion in the sunken

state of

unorganic addition, the more inconvenient consonantal declension into that of the vowels, I cannot therefore think
that
it

admits of any doubt, that the

New

Persian plural
of

termination an,

which
is

is

restricted

to

the designation

animate creatures, answers to

If,

identical with the Sanskrit ^rT^

:

the masculine plural accusative

mines,''^

thus,

^^^li/o

dn in marddn, " hoanimate

T^TT

martydn, " mortales^ "homines.*^*

^J\

241.

then, the termination

dn, applied to

beings, belongs to a living being in the old language, the

inanimate neuter will be

fitted to

give us information re-

garding

that
to

New
the

Persian

plural

termination which

is

appended
suffix,

appellations

of

inanimate

objects.
is

in

the

formation

of words
is

which
(. 128.),

peculiarly
is still

the property of the neuter,

^^

as

which

In the more frequently used in Zend than in Sanskrit. 56*. or enha form anha 235.) plural, these Zend neuters (.

and with this ha hd in

the

is
;

evidently connected the lengthened

thus, Ubjjj roz-hd, " days,"

New

Persian

answers to

Zend

AJ'3uu^i*Aj7 raochanha, " lights."

sian words have been compared with

[G. Ed.
p. 279.]

Many New PerNew German words

;

and

often,

too,

correctly

but,
it

except

through the medium of the Sanskrit and Zend,

could not
its

have been conjectured that our "

termination, related to the
the High

fVorter'''' is,

in respect to

New
its

Persian hd.

As, however,

German
s

has,
r,

from
o

earliest period, repeatedly

i

changed

into

and

into

(later

e),

have

no

* Thus in Spanish the whole plaral has the termination of the Latin
accusative.

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
doubt the
ir

259
er

Middle
is

and

New High German

the Sanskrit

which
suffix

makes

its

appearance in the plural in

identical with

many Old High Gerneuter

man

neuters,

^m

as;

e.g. husir, "houses," chalpir, "calves^' (cf.

Grimm,

pp. 622

and 631).*

242.

Here
:

follows a general view of the accusative for-

mation
SANSKRIT.

ZEND.

GREEK.

lATTN.

UTHDAJC.
tcilku-s,

GOTHIC

vrika-n.
ddnd-Tt-i,

vehrka-n.
ddta.
hizvd-o.
td-o,

KVKO-V^f
Suipay
Xwp<i-?,
rd-.
7ro<T/-af,

lupd-s,

vulfa-ns.
daiira.

dona.
terras,
is-ta-s.

....

jihwd-s.
tds.
patt-v.

ranka-s. gibd-s.
ta-s.

thd-s.

paify-d,\
dfrity-d,1[

hosf-es,

....
....
dwy-s.

gasti-ns.

bhiy-os,
prili-s,

iTopTt-a^,
TroprT-f,

mess-s.

....
ansti-ns,]

dfrili-s.

....
mari-a,

vdri-n-i.

var-a.
kya.

tSpi-a,

....

....
iy-a.
p. 280.]

....

....
....

....

....

bhavishyanti- s, bushyainii-s,\

....
pecu-s.

[G.Ed.
sunii-s,

sunu-n.
bhuv-as.
tanu-s.

pasv-6,\

sunu-ns.

....
tanu-s.
ttlTV-^,

....

socru-s,

....
....

handu-ns
* .
.

madhH-n-i,

madhv-a,X

fiedv-a.

pecu-a,

* This

ir,

however,

is

treated in declension as if the

theme

originally

terminated in a, and would thus, in Sanskrit, be asa.

Hence, compared

with the dative husiru-m (from husira-m,

appears an abbreviation.
is

^. 168.),

the nom. aeons, hiisir

Bu

the relation of our ir to the Sanskrit a

not thereby disturbed, because in general, most of the original consonantal

terminations in
Cf. pp. 148

High German have

received nnorganic vowel additions.

this hereafter.

and 191, G. Ed. Note.

t-

More regarding

t See p. 175, G. Ed. Note

X This form

is

further confirmed by aj /As^t^jsca) peso-tanva, from

is

peso-tanu, which signifies the hind part of the body (\199.), but

also

used in the sense of " blow on the hinder part of the body "

and

in this

manner

it

occurs in the loth Fargard of the Vend.

as^aso* <A>fe>^JA

AJyAJ^<|>jJCa)

J^vW JAJA5i AJWAJ fj^^/MMi)^^M^^yjc<unhat{ainhdt?)

s 2

hacha

260
8AKSKBIT.
f.

FORMATION OF CASES.

vadfiH-s,

m. f. yds*
f.

gdu-8.
va(f)-aj',
vdch-d,'\
barent-6,1f oTT-a?,

bov-es.

ndv-as.

t m.
m.
n.

vdch-as,
hharat-as,X

voc-es,

<})epovr-as,
$aifj.ov-as,

ferent-es,

fiyand-%

dtman-as,

asman-d,^

sermon-es,

. .

ahman-%

ndmdn-i,
bhrdtri-n,^

ndman-a,
brdthr-eus?

raAav-a,
Tiarep-ag,

nomin-ai
fratr-es,

namdTHi

m.
f.

....
duyter-es,

duhitns,^
ddtri-n,^

dughdher-eus? dvyarep-as, matr-es,

ddthr-eus?
vachanh-a,
BoT^p-a^,
e7re(o-)-a,

m.
n.

dator-es,

....
....

vachdns-it

oper-a,

THE INSTRUMENTAL.
[G. Ed.
p. 281.]
it,

243.

The formation of

this case,

and what

is

connected with
it is

has been already explained in .215

224.

therefore sufficient to give here a comparison of the forms

which correspond to one another in the cognate languages,

hacha skyaothnd-vareza atha bavaintipeso-tanva, " hacprofacti-peractione

turn sunt verbera posteriori corpori inflicta " (Anquetil, Celui qui
cette action sera coupable

commet

du tana/our). In regard

to the annperetha,

men-

tioned at

232.,

it

is

further to be noticed that the

th can only bo

occasioned

by a

<wJ to

that has been dropped (. 47.) for the

is

theme of the

concluding substantive

>rae7cQ) peretu, not perethu (Vend. S. pp. 318

:i

and 362, twice). Irregularly from a theme

iff

9^ (V

122.), for

7l^^^gav-as.

The
on the

Zend M3>AUO g&us

(also

jtv)^ gdos), which

jft

often occurs, rests

strengthened Sanskrit form

gdu ;

so that in respect of the strong and

is

weak

cases

(. 129.),

the relation in this word

distorted.

In the noai-

natiye, for instance,

we

should expect AU>JkU gdua, and in the accusative

A^>eM

geut, rather than vice verad.

p. 163,

t See
See

Note

J.

t See ^.129.
$.

127.

Note and

$. iMO.

Note

%.

INSTRUMENTAL PLURAL.
by which a summary view of the subject

261

may

be assisted.

As
its

the German, in its singular dative,* is identical with

it is

the Sanskrit-Zend instrumental,

hence deducible that

the dative plural,
of fin^

character

(for

see

215.), in

must rather be regarded as an abbreviation

hhyas
;

bhh
vqTJ

than as belonging to the dative-ablative termination

although
it

approaches equally near to the two old

terminations.
SANSKBTT.
ZESl>.

GREEK.
6e6-<piv,

UlTIK.

UTHUAN.

GOTH. DAT.

m,

vriki-bhis,

....
tehrkd-is,

vo-bls
wilka-is,

vu^a-m,

trikd-is,
f.

jihiL'd-bhis,

hizvd-bis,
dfriti-bis,

pnti-bhis,

m.
f.

sunu-bhis,
nau-bhis,
dtma'-bhis,

pasu-biSj

.... .... .... ....

vau-^zv,

....
ansii-m,

ranko-viis, gibd-m.

awi-mis,
iunu-mis,

sunu-m.

....
asma-bis,

m.
n.

ndfna-bhis, ndma-bis,

.... ....

ahma -m.
.

namn-am.
p. 282.]

n. vach6-bhis,f vach6-bis,f o%e<r-^/v,t

[G. Ed.

THE DATIVE, ABLATIVE.

244.

these two cases in

Mention has already been made of the suffix of Only the s of the Latin bus has , 215.
in

been

left

the

first,

second, and (according to Nonius)

for the
<

occasionally, also, in

the fourth declension;

of

lupi-s, terri-s, speci-s (for speci-bus

from

specu-bus),

must be

allotted to the base.

Lupi-s stands for lupo-bus, as evinced

by ambo-bus,
in

dtw-bus.
o, u,

From

o-bus (by lightening the final

a, . 6.),

vowel of the base,

the

from an original

as occurs

beginning of compounds {multi-plex for multu-plex

or multo-plet, of which hereafter), the language arrived at

i-bus, {parvi-bus, amici-bus, dii-bus, cf.

Hartung,

p. 261).

In

the

first

declension a-bus has been retained with tolerable

Vide
t See

$.160.
66b.

Note:
and 128.

26!^

FORMATION OF CASES.
is

frequency, but the middle step i-bus

wanting;

yet the

language has scarcely made the spring from a-bus at once

to is, but a-bus has
to

compensate for
283

weakened the a of the base to T, which; the bu which has been dropped, has been
mdlo from mdvolo.
ZEND,
vehrka^i-byd,

lengthened;
[G. Ed.
p.

thus terri-s from terri-bus, for terra-buSi as

.]

Compare,
LATIN.
lupi-s.
terri-s,

SANSKRIT.

LITHUANIAN.

m. vrike-bhyas,
f.

w'dka-7n{u)s*

jihwd-bhyas,

hizvd-byd,
paiti-by6}
dfriti-byd,

Tanko-m{u)s.

m. pati-bhyas,
f,

hosti-bus.

priti-bhyas,

messi-bus,

awi-m{u)s.

m.bhavishyantt-bhyaSfbushyainti-byd, ....

....
sunu-m{u)s,

m. sunu-bhyas,
f.

pasu-byd,
vdch-e-byo,

pecu-bus,t
voc-i-bus.

vag-bhyas,

....

m. bharad-bhyaSf

baren-by6,%

ferent-i-bus,

....
....

m. &tma-bhyas, m. bbrdtri-bhyoa,

asmd-byd,
brdtar-e-byd,

sermon-i-bm; ....
fratr-i-bus,

THE GENITIVE.
245.

The

genitive

plural

in Sanskrit,

in substantives

and adjectives, has^the termination ^t*^ dm, in the Zend anm, according to . 61. The Greek wv bears the same relation to the original

form of the termination that

4. 10.).

e^l^oiv

does to

va<*<^IH

adaddm (.

The Latin

has, as usual^

See $.21

t The mascaline

bases pass in the plural,

by an anorganic increment,
and dative singular,
1.).

into a different declension.

And

in the dual
p. 35,

also,

PATJ had
I

to be given

up (Mielcke,

Rem.

I liftve selected

the mascul'ne base

PECU,

which occarQ only

pahu, and
I

few
ried

cases,
it

on account of its connection with

all

>Ji)a)q>

in a have car-

through

the cases, and think, therefore, that I

may

here also

give the original u-btts for the corrnption i-bu.

$ See $.224.

Note*,

p. 241.

GENITIVE PLURAL.
preserved the labial
final

263
original form, but
;

nasal in

its

by

its

influence has shortened the preceding vowel

hence,

ped-um {=pad-dm), the u of which supplies the place of a

[G. Ed. p. 284.] lupum = ^e^ vrikam^ Kvko-v.* the final nasal. dropped The German, like the Lithuanian, has

short

a,

as in

In Gothic, however, the d, which has been left, shews itself under two forms, and thereby an unorganie difference has

been

introduced

between

the

feminine genitive
;

termi-

nation and that of the masculine-neuter

since the fuller 6

has remained only to the feminine 6 and n bases.

246.

Bases ending with a vowel, with the exception,

necessary and partly arbitrary, of monosyllables,

partly

place, in Sanskrit, a

euphonic n between the termination and

if

the base, the final vowel of which,

short, is lengthened.

This interposition appears to be pristine, since the Zend

partakes of

it,

although in a more limited degree

as

for

instance, in all bases in

a and au

6.

hence, ^"^/Aj^^tyg^

vehrka-n-anm,

9"y-w'jj>^,

jihva-n-anm.

To

the latter corin

respond very remarkably the

genitives (which occur

Old High German, Old Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon, in the

Regarding the termination i*um

respecting

in consonantal bases, and, vice verscL,

refer

um
.

in places

where i-um might have been expected, we

i

the reader to
. 119.

126.

In adjectires the feminine character

its eflFect,

mentioned in

may have had

Note *
.

and

may have

passed over from the femi-

nine to the other genders, according to the analogy of the Lithuanian

(p. 174.

157.)

thns the

oi/erenti-um reminds us of the Sanskrit

feminine HCffl bharanti.

form ferenti-a ;

it

is

The same is the case with the i of the neuter bequeathed by the deceased feminine theme FE'

RE ATI.
, 126.,

On

the other hand, contrary to the opinion preferred in regard the

before but {e.g. voc-i-bus) as a conjnno

we must now

tive vowel, like the e e in the

Zend vdch-e-byo.
annex an

Here

it is

to

be observed

that those consonantal bases,

which admit neither i^a nor i-um^ must neveri.

theless proceed before btu to

tives

In the chapter upon the adjec ;

we

shall recur to the feminine character

and then treat

also of the

i for e in the singular ablative of the

common dialect.

264

FORMATION OF CASES.
6-ti-6,

corresponding class of words) in

e-n-a;

hence, Old

High German
aife-n-a.
247.

kep6-n-6,

Old Saxon gpbd-n-d, Anglo-Saxon

y
We
find the bases in short

and long

i,

in Zend, if
:

[G. Ed.

p. 285.]

polysyllabic, only with euphonic n

i

on the

other hand the monosyllabic

direct, either attaching

bases annex the termination

it

Guna

to the final vowel, or keeping

pure; iims,thry-anmoTthray-anTn,"trium,''''frovnthri,- vay-onm,

"aviumr from

vi.

Bases in

>

u admit both of the annexing

>^a}q> -pasu

the termination direct and of the insertion of the euphonic n

but I find from the masculine

the other hand,
I

only pasv-anm

on

have found from feminine bases

like >yAj^

tanu, "body,'' >j3A5y

. 21.),

nam, "corpse" (cf. veKv^ according to With Guna 9>^a>j3aj^ hitherto only u-n-anm.
(. 27.).

pasav-anm would serve as a prototype for the Gothic suniv-S

with

Guna weakened
sdm* for
^T^^

248,
iRTf

Pronouns of the third person have, in Sanskrit,

dm

formerly universal

and this form of the

;

may be

the original and

so
that

case-suffix,

dm

would properly be only the termination of the termination,

and the
this

connected with the genitive singular would be

If this is the case, the abbreviation of
still

the chief person.

termination in substantives and adjectives must

;

be recognised as very ancient

for the Gothic,

which in the
the old

plural nominative restricts itself so rigorously to limits

(.

228.),

gives to the sibilant, in the genitive also,

no wider scope;
sdm, according to
rum.'"

hence
.

thi-ze

(.

86.

5.)

= te-shdm

(for tS-

21.)

"horum";

thi-zo

td-sdm,

"ha-

Here

the

a, like
i (.

the 6 of the base

66.)
:

THA, THO,

appears weakened to
jective a

on the other hand, the adblindai-zS, " cnecorum " (for

and d bases, which follow the pronominal de;

clension, have ai-z^, ai-zd

blinda-zS),

and

answers exactly to the Sanskrit ^th'^ te-shdm

*
Cf.

Old Prussian

son, e.g, in siei-son,

"rwyJ


GENITIVE PLURAL.
(from fat-sdm) from the base
TT to.

2G5

The High German has

in

changed the old sibilant to

hence, in Old

r,

as

many

other places;

High German,

d'e-ro for thi-ze

and

thi-z6, of

which termination only the r has remained

to us.

[G. Ed. p. 286.]

To

the Latin, in like manner, belongs

rum

for

sum

(.22.); hence, istorum, istarum.*

249.

We

give here a general view of the formation of

the genitive^:
SANSKRIT.

ZEND.

GREEK.

LATIK.

LTTHTTAS'.

GOTHIC.

vrikd-n-dm,
\^.te-shdm,

vehrka-n-anm, KvK-tav,
tae-shaiim,
r-atVy

lupo-rumt wilk'-u,
isto-rum,

vulf-i.
thi-zi.

f-H,

jihwd-n-dm,

hizva-n-anm,

yoapa-uiv,

terra-rum, rank'-H,

kep6-n-6.f

This rum, however,

{.

has, like the property of the plural nominative

228.), found

its

way

or returned from the pronominal declension

into the entire second, first,

tical

and

fifth declension,

which

is

originally iden-

with the latter (), 121 and 137.). The transplanting of the rum termination into the declensions mentioned was the easier, as aH pronorau
in the genitive plural belong to the second and
first

declension.

Forms,

however, remain, especially in the old languages, which evince that the
language was not always equally favourable to the bringing back the termination

rum {deum,

socium,

amphorum, drachmum, agricolum,

&c.).

On

the other hand, the termination

rum

appears also to have attempted

if,

to fix itself in coiisonantal bases,

with

e as conjunctive vowel,

at least, the

forms furnished by Varro and Chans.

regerum, nucerum (Hartimg, p. 255.)

boverum, Joverum^ lapiderum,

as correct,

are to be regarded
;

and

do not perhaps stand for bovo-rum, &c.

extend
itself to

as also, in Zend, the base

go may

gava.
:

The Latin rum and

this is not

Sanskrit ^TTT

sdm

lead us to

expect the Greek a-av

met with, however, even

in the pro-

noun

so that the Greek, in this respect, stands in the strongest opposition

to the Latin.

The forms

in a-av, e-av {e.g. avrd-av, airrf-ap, dyopd-a/',

dyopeav) point, however,

to a consonant that has

been dropped.

It is

question, therefore, whether universally a

skrit

(cf. . 128.), or,

as the San-

and Zend lead us to expect, only in pronouns a

first

S,

but in other words

of the

and second declension an

According to
this,
,

has been dropped, as in fidCa*

from

uftCova.

\vKav would be to be derived from

but tS>v from roaav rdav from
rcuratv,

\vKo-v-(i)v,

^apdav from

x.'^pa-v-wv

Old High German,

see . 246.

266
SANSKRIT.

FORMATION OF CASES.
ZEND.

GREEK.
ra-coj/,

LATIN.

LITUUAN.

QOTHIC
tki-z6.

td-sd7n,

d-onhanm,*
Ihray-anm,
dfnti-n-anm,

istd-rum,

e-n.
tri-u,

Q"- n.tray-d-ndm,
n''
^3

rpi-cdv.
nopri-Uiv,
t^6v-(i>v,

tri'um,

thriy-S.

pnh-n~am,
suniL-n-am,

messi'um,

awi-Ut

ansf-e.
suniv-S.

m.

pasv-anm,
tanu-n-anm,

pecu-um.
socru-um,

sun-u,

''
f.

ianu-n-dm,
gav-dniy

irtTv-cov,

handiv-L

gav-anm.

i8o(f)<3^
va{F)-S>v,
6tt-Q)v,

bov-um.

.... ....
....
Jiyand-i

f.

nd-vdm.

....
vdch-anm.
barent-anm,^

....
voc'um.

f.

vdch'dm.

m. n. bharat-dm.

^epovT-cov ferenti-urrif
8atfj.6v-uiv,

m. m.

dtmon-dm,

asman-anm,

sermon-um akmfn-4, ahman4.

.
. .

bhrdfp^n'dmi brdthr-anm,X

Ttarep-oiv, fratr-um,

....

This word often occurs, and corresponds to tho Sanskrit ^TPBT^T d-sdm
**

harum" " earum "

I

(''

56^.)

from axj^

td,

tdonhahm would be expected,

(polysyllabic) pronominal

which

am

unable to quote.

The compound
;

bases shorten the last syllable but one

hence, ^ v^>^9uU^;0A) ai-tanhahm

not aitdonhahm, as might be expected from ^HI^I'T etd-sdm,

t Or,

also,

9vnj^^aj7a5j barantahm, as in the Vendidad Sade,

:'*

p. 131,

^^^^AiciSu^ASsU iaochantanm, " lucentium

frequently saochentahm.
\

on the other hand,

also

This and the following genitives from bases in ar are clearly raoro p;'nuiiie
to the cognate

and are more nearly allied therefore

European languages than

the corresponding ones in Sanskrit, which, in this case, has shortened ar to

ri,

and has then treated

it

according to the analogy of vowels.

,

From /Mt
" fire,"

nor frequently occurs nar-aiim^ with retention of the

base being monosyllabic
:

on account of tho
dtar,

on the other hand, dthr ahm from

and 9 v^i/AW.}^ tisr-ahm " trium," fem. for the Sanskrit

fri^iiji

tisri-rt-dm

(Gramm.

Crit.

r.

256.).

From /AJ(2^o >4 dughdhar, we

:

find the

form

dughdher-ahm
dtujder-anm
(p.

(cf. p.

208, G. Ed. Note f)

2.).

the

Codex

has, however,

472, L.

In general, in this word the readings dughdhar

:

and dugdar are interchanged in various passages

is

the former, however,

the more

common.

THE LOCATIVE PLURAL.

LOCATIVE.
250.
is,

267

The character of the

plural locative
is

[G. Ed.

p. 288.1
t|

in Sanskrit,
(.

su,

which

subject to be changed into

is

shu

21.), for which, in

Zend,

found >j^ shu

(.

52.);

while from

su, according: to . 53.,

has been formed

>o

hiu

The more

usual forni for shu and hu (for which, also, occur

is,

shu and hu)

however, A5et3 shva, aj' hva, which leads

This appears to

to a Sanskrit

Wswa.

me
is

to be the original

form of the termination; for nothing

Sanskrit than that the syllables

more common
ti

in

^ ua and

ya should free

themselves from their vowel, and then change the semi-vowel

into a vowel, as

T^
far

ukta

is

said for vakta (see also

42.).

The

supposition, therefore, of the Indian abbreviation of the

is
it

termination
extension of

more probable than

a,

that of a

by a lately-added

especially as

in

Zend no

other case does a similar aftergrowth admit of being: established.

But
it

if

^ sioa
si-bi

is

the original form of the termi-

nation,

is

then identical with the reflective-possessive

base

sua, of

which more hereafter.*

or that

The same
iu-bi,

relation

which, in Latin,
tured from
su-i),

has to su-bi (which might be conjecti-hi

has to

Sanskrit

"rrwn?

iu-bhynm, the Greek dative-locative termination

to the Sanskrit

ai {(riv)

has

su.\

Therefore, in Zend, the locative

identical with a>cj^j/(JO trishva,

AtHij7(3 thrishvaj "

in

tribui"

is

" the third part,"

idea of part.

since the

pronoun in

the latter

compound denotes the

t Regarding the termination iv of the pronoun of the 1st and 2d person see . 222. From the ^olic form dfifitaiv, quoted by Hartung
(p.

260) from Apoll.,

cannot infer that

T]fuv

is

an abbreviation of
It

o-iv

if it

were

so,

the v also in

would not adhere so firmly.

appears to

me more
fluence

suitable, therefore, to accord to the

common
;

declension an into the

upon the transformation of the form of inflexion peculiar

a<i>iai for a<piy.

pronouns without gender, but of the highest antiquity

has penetrated farther in

an influence which


268
[G. Ed. as in
(. 2.),
p.

FORMATION OF CASES.
289] 251.

The bases
i
;

in

a add to that vowel,

many
to

other cases, an
ot

but from a
;

+1

is

formed ^

which the Greek

corresponds
t

hence, KvKoi-ai

^V^

vrihS-shu.

Hence the
r}-,

in

Greek has

also passed over

to the bases in a-,

either preserving

its full
;

value or sub-

scribed, while in Sanskrit the 'B a

remains pure

hence, fvid^
best
116.

jihwd-su, with which the locatives of

agree, as TLXaraida-iv, 'OXv/jLTTiaat,

names

of towns
.

'kdrjvrja-i

(Buttmann,

7.

and Hartung,

p. 461.).*

252.

Like the Gothic, the Lithuanian has an unorganic

difference

between the terminations which mark the case

in the masculine and feminine in the genitive plural: the

first

has the sound of

se,

and the

latter of sa, with the

original and

more powerful a, which, in the masculine, has The ending sa is plainly from the swa, softened into e.
(p.

assumed above
which
253.
it is

267,

1.

7.) to

be the original form, from

made by

rejecting the semi-vowel.

of the Sanskrit, Zend,
:

Here follows a general view

and Lithuanian plural locatives, with the Greek datives

m.
f.

vriM-shu, vehrka&shva, wUku-se,

jihwd-su,
pnti-shu,
hizvd-hva,
dfriti-shva,^

KvKoi-a-t.
OXvjjLiriaa-i, "xidpai-a-t.
"noprt-cri.

ranko-sa,
dwi-sa,

^f.

^m,
(g-

sunu-shu, pasu-shvQy
go-shu,

dang use, ....

....

lydv-ai.
(Bov-ai.
vav-<ri.

m. f.

....
....

JS f.

nau-shu,

* The

common
lost,

termination

ois, ais (ot-f, oi-s),

formed by curtailing

ot-o-t, ai-tri,

and so brought into agreement of sound with the third declenthrough

ending
its

uon,

is

here

apparent connection with the Sanskrit cur($.219.),

is

tailed instrumental

^<iw

which had before required

but
can

consideration, because the

Greek dative

also used as the instrumental.

u>
t,

t
otily

have no authority for the locative of the Zend bases

in w,

it

be analogous to that of the bases

which can be referred

to in

copious instances.

LOCATIVE PLURAL.
SANSKRIT.
f.

260
GREEK.
ott-ct/

ZEXD.

UTHDAH.

idk-shu,

vdc-sva?
brdfar-e-shva ?

....

ra. n. bharat-su,

(pepov-au

m.

atma-su,
bhrdtri-shu,

m.
n.

asma-hva* ....
vach6-hva,X

irarpa-aiA
ejreo'-<r/.

vachas-su,

Thus,
uahaji,

in the

Vend. Sade,

p. 499, AJ'AJja)>

u^ahva, from yAJjaj)

Xiy^wxi^MA ddmahva, from im^j^ daman. form is not, as is generally supposed, a conjunctive vowel, but rests on a transposition as thpaKov for ebapKov, and in Sanskrit '^^\{\\drdkshydmi, "I will see," for ^T^fir </arA-.<A^amj (Sansk. Gramni.
and
p. 600,

t The a

in this

$.34b,)

thus narpacn (compare

rtrpacj-i) for Trarapai

(compare

rea-crapai),

which, by preserving the original vowel, agrees with the Sanskrit base
fitccr better

than

iraripa, iraripts, &c.

The same

applies to the dative

apvdai, since the

pTjv, apTjv, dppT]v,

theme of dpvos

has, as appears

from the cognate word

v,

rejected a vowel

between the p and

which again appears

its

in

the dative plural in the form of an a, and

removed from

place.

The whole
( tjnri),
is

REN appears to

be a transposition of iVer, Sanskrit T^X nar

"a man," for dpijv properly means " male sheep." The a of dpvaa-i
281.
:

therefore etymologically identical with that ofavSpaai (comp. Kiiliner's

.

complete Greek Grammar,

Rem. 2.).
it is

It

ismore

difficult to

give any

accurate account of the aofviaa-i

for the r of vUa-i, or this

either the older

and stronger form

('YIO, 'YI, 'YIEY), a fourth,

word must have had, besides its three themes YIAT, from which came vldai, as yovaai from
latter agrees

rONAT,

the

more prevailing co-theme of rONY, which

with

^fmjdnu.
X

In the Vendidad Sade, p. 499,

we

find the analogous plural locatives

AJ"^Z><> uzirohva, and Aj'^5)A5Jid!^ csapohva.

AnquetU translates
ira-

the former by " au lever du soleil," and the latter by " a /a nuit." It is
possihle to pronounce these forms aught but derivatives
OJAJ ai (<^ 6, . 66'>.)

from themes in

Most of the

cases of the latter word,

which occurs

very frequently in various forms, spring from a theme in ?m ar, and the
interchange of
ajQ>Ajjiv5(S^

csapar with ^<dxiM&^ csapo

is

a similar case

to that in Sanskrit,

where ^S^iT ahan, " day," forms some cases from

in ^a ^fiy^ ahobhis, &c.)
;

^5^

ahas (from which ^sr^ aho

and together
with

270
G.
Ed.
p.

FORMATION OF CASES.
291 .]
*

Remark.

From the bases m ES,

to

which

The

dative eaai (

= ^rw as-su)

properly belongs, this form

other bases terminating

appears to have imparted

[G. Ed. p. 202.]

itself to

differently, in which, for this case,

is

an exwhich,

tension of the original theme by eg

in
its origin, is identical

to be adopted

with the abovementioned

ir

(.

241.)

plural increase to the base by

(from

is

and

thin,

from

as),

in

Old High German forms,

sative,

as hush, "houses," chalpir "calves,"

which are the plural themes, with which the nominative, accu-

and vocative are

identical,

and from which, in the

for that case, arises hu-

dative,

by the addition of the ending

as,

sirum, chalpirum;

in Greek, Kvvea-a-i, veKveaat, itdvrecat,

yvvaiKe(T(Tt, noX'ieacri,

and

others,

from the unorganically

in-

creased themes
logy of 'EIIE2.

KYNE2, NEKYE2, &c., according to the anaFrom the doubled 2 one may then be renoKiecri, fn^veat),

jected (dmKTecr/i/,
self be

or the doubling of a

2 by itThis,

employed

as, for

example, veKv-vai, for

veKV-crt.

with the

theme

^'^^ exists another,

^r^X ohar.

The anomaly of the

namely

Sanskrit

"day"

appears, in Zend, to have passed completely over to

"night," as
<;sapan, of

this latter

word has
pi.

also a

theme

in n,

/ajq)ajaoCS^

which the genitive

^^mxsM^CS^ csqfnanm

analogous with
is

^^T*7 ahndm, "dierum "

(. 40. relative to

A/for

Q>p)

found in conS.

nection with the feminine numeral ^vjJ/MJJ^o tisranm, " trium " (Vend.
p. 246);

for

we

read,

I.

c.

. 163.,

asnahmcha

{=W^[^
nights."

ahndncha),

c.snfananmcha (read csafnanmcha),

"of days and

In Sanskrit,
its

by the suffix

^ n, the form ^li^ahna, derivative, but equal in

meaning,

has arisen out of ^f^ii ahan, which, however, occurs only in compounds
(as

n^x^ pdrvdhna, "the

early part of the day"), and in the adverbial

therefore,
it is

dative ^STCTIJ ahndya, " soon," " immediately," which,

not

necessary to deduce from the root

?
as

hnu, with the a privative.

The

Zfnd, however, whose night-nomenclature, in this respect also, isnotout^tr^pped

by the Sanskylt, produces,

from
/ajq)ajjA5CJ^

it

appears, by a similar mutation,

A/^AJAV}(3^ csafna

csapan; whence we find the locativf

^ j\MMi<^ csafne, wliich might also be taken for the dative of ^ajq>A5ao<J$
csapatiy

LOCATIVE PLURAL.
in

271
.

most important

particulars, is adopted
ecrat

by Thiersch,
;

128.,

for the

developement of the forms in

only that he with-

draws from the neuter bases described in . 129., as EEAE2, the 2 which belongs to them, and, by a supposition, proved
to be erroneous,

BEAE

is

made

the

theme

and he divides
and,
I

forms

like

o-)(e(Ji^i

into v)^e-ad>i instead of

o-)(^e(r-(pt,

by
be-

assimilation, derives a^e-utri

lieve I

from

o^e-(T<pi

while, as

have proved, the forms oxeo-4>t and oy&jcri rest on

(.

entirely different case- suffixes

218.),

and have only the

base
tion,

'OXE2

in

however,

common may be remarked

we

with one another.

in yovvacT-cri,
itself to
it

An

assimila-

from yovvaT-ai,
the second, not

so that the

first letter

has assimilated

the reverse.
the
first
.

In SeTraa-at

shall leave

undecided whether
the

be primitive, and
or whether
it

yrjpa^,

128.),

theme (comp. has arisen out of t, and so

belono^ to

AEIIAS

AEDAT

with

TEPAT, KEPAT,

one

class.

If,

csapan, but that

locative
1.

it is

preceded (V. S. p. 163.) by the tmequivocal adjective

^^Kixsinahne {horn xi^j^xitnaema, "half").

where K3yAJjted3 aj^<3J
^V/JJ-w

Compare,
ami,

also,

c.

$. 149.,

aj^oJ

ithra,

ithra,

csa/ne,

probably means "in this day," " in

ithra,

this night,"

with the locative

adverb aj/oj

" here,"

in the sense of a locative demonstrative.

To

the theme

xiAxy*M^

csafna, the plural of the

1.

same sound
and

csafna,

might

also be assigned,
:

which occurs

c.

^. 330. 331.,
csafiia,

in several

places elsewhere

>s^xiMi6^ ^^^m/(^ thrayo

" three

nights,'

ajAajac^

j^5A)jto^ csvas csafna, "six nights," Aif^xiMi^ AiXif

if

nava csafna, "nine nights,"

here csafna be not (as in

0.

231. Note J

it

was considered to be) rather to be taken

for the plural of fXidjiiMi^ csapan,

as neuter, since, as has been before observed, the

Zend uses the gander of

For the

the substantive with great laxity, especially in the plural.

frequently-occarring ablative

MM3?xs(ij&Mi^

csapardt, however,
if

we

cannot assume another theme csapara, but we must,

correct,

the reading be

admit that feminine consonantal roots in the ablative ad;>pt also

the broader ending, dt (or at.

272
however, in
case-suffix,
all

FORMATION OF CASES.
these forms,
all

we allow only o-i

it is

or

mv

to be the

and

that precedes
it

referred to the true or an-

organic increase of the base,

not even to

can therewith not be denied that

Homer

himself, in forms like eVeao-/, not to

e<T<Ti

men-

tion unorganic forms like Kvvea-at, did the entire

[G. Ed.
p. 293.]
;

present

itself as

pertaining to that which marked

eirea-ai

the case
sent
it'is,

for in the feeling of the speaker

could pre-

itself,

during that period of the language, only as what

e-necr-cTi,

namely, as
&c.,

while

eTrecroj, eitea-i,

plural eireaa. and

different

not

eTreoj,

were used in declension.

is

But

from

what has been here adopted

(p.

the assumption of
8.),

260,

ff.)

and Kiihner

(1.

c. .

255. R.

Hartung in the most marelative to the

(1.

terial points following

Greg. Cor. Mo\,

. 35.,

production of the Greek plural datives.

Kiihner says
ej (character

c.)

The
plural)

character of the dative plural

is

of the

and

or
I,

iv

(character of the dative singular), theieey

fore, ecn{v)."

however, think

not the character of nuni*

ber, but of the

nominative plural, and connected with the

its

nominative singular through

a union of the plural

is,

nominative

suffix

with the singular dative

to

me, not to

be imagined.

If it

were

so,
is

how

could neuter nouns, to

which

e? in the

nominative

quite foreign, arrive, in the

?

dative, at their identity of

It

form with the natural sexes

further deserves to be remarked, that, in Prakrit, the

locative ending

^ su

frequently assumes an Anuswara, and

sun, for
su,

so adapts
<Tiv,

itself,

by the form ^

to the Greek,

for

<Tl.

254.

After laying
it

down

the laws of the formation of a

if

single case,

may

serve to facilitate the general survey

of the

examples are adduced

most important classes of

words in their connected declension.

order, according as

We

pass over here

from the Sanskrit, and go to the other languages in their

they have, in the
particular
;

cases,

most truly preserved their original form

and where one

or other of them has departed entirely from the original

FORMATION OF CASES.

273

principle of formation, or by an unorganic increase to the

base has entered the province of another declension,

there, in the

we

place in question, exclude

it

from the com-

parison.

MASCULIXE BASES IN
Nominative,
Sanski*it
vehrk-d,

a,

GREEK IN

O,

LATIN IN

U, O.

8IXGULAK.
vrika-s,

Lithuanian

wilka-s,

Zend

with cha, vehrkns-cha, Greek Xvko-^,

[G. Ed.

Latin lupus, Gothic vulf-s*

Accusative,
Sanskrit,

vrika-m, Lithua-

p.

294.]
"SLko-v,

nian wilka-n, Zend vehrke-m, Greek Latin lupu-m, Gothic vulf.

Instrumental, Sanskrit vrike-n-a, Zend vehrka, Gothic Dat.

vul/a,

Lithuanian Instr. wilku.

vrikdya,

Dative,

Sanskrit
u'ilkuL

Zend

vehrkdi,

Lithuanian

Ablative,

Sanskrit vrikd-t,
(see
. 181.).

Zend

vehrkd-t, Latin lup-d(d)

Genitive,

Sanskrit

vrika-sya,

Greek

KvKo-{d)i6\,

Zend

vehrka-hS, Gothic vuJfi-s, Lithuanian wilko.

* The meaning
in its first origin.
rests

is,

in all these languages, the same,

and so

is

the

theme

The connection

of the Lithaan. wilkas with vrikas

I;

on the very usual interchange of the semi-vowels r and

through the whole of the European
sister

and

this

latter goes

languages.

The

Gothic vulfs shews, moreover, the equally conamon interchange of gutturals

and

labials,

and foUows the rule for the alteration of letters (Asp.

In Latin the same thing takes place with regard

for Tenuis, see . 87).

to the supply of the guttural

by the corresponding
this
u.

labial

but lupus
is

is

further altered through the loss of the initial letter F, as

the

Greek

\vKo-s :

it

may, however, be assumed, that

and k are united, they

is

introduced into the

therefore, in Liv.

middle of the word in being vocalized into

thuanian, in tciZfraa,
I

While

are, in

Greek, separated by

t M. Reimnitz, whose ramphlet, "The System of Greek Declension" (Potsdam, 18.31), had not been seen by me before I complet* d the preceding
Part of this book, unfolds
(1.

c p.

122 passim) the same views concerning

the

274
Locative,
[G. Ed.

FOIIMATION OF CASES,
Sanskrit vrik^ (from vrika^-i),
. 196.), .

p. 296.] {maidhydi,

Lithuanian
195.) Latin

ivilke,

Zend vehrk^ Greek

Dat. \vK<fi {oiKoi

Gen. lup'-h

Vocative,

Sanskrit vrika, Zend vehrka, Lithuanian wilki,

Greek

\vKe, Latin lupe, Gothic vulf.

DUAL.

Nona. Ace. Voc. Sanskrit vrikdu, Vedic vrikd,

Lith.

Nom.

ivilka,

Voc. wilku,

Zend Greek

vehrkd,
Xvku).

lustr. Dat.Abl. Sanskritvrikd-bhydm,

ZendvehrkaH-bya, Greek

Dat. Gen. Auko-/v, Lithuanian

(see
. 215.).

Dat wilka-m
Rem.
1.),

Gen. Loc.

Sansk. vrikay-Ss, Zend vehrkay-d (see

Lithuanian wilku.
PLURAL.

Nom. Voc A ccusative,

Sanskrit vrikds, Gothic vulfos.*

Sanskrit vrikd-n, Zend vehrka-n, Goth, vulfn-mt,

Greek Xvko-vs (from

\vKo-vg,

236.),

Lithu-

anian wilkus, Latin lupo-s.

the

Greek oto and its connection with the Sanskrit a-sya which
.

I have, withI

out being aware of his concurrence, brought forward in

189.

have,

however, in this respect, already stated

the Demonstrative and the Oripin of
Hist. Phil. Class of the
p. 100.

my

views in

my pamphlet

"

On

Case"

(in the Transactions of the

Academy

of Science of Berlin for the year 1826,

Srjfwcrios,

Here

have only further to observe, that the Greek adj

is,

from the root

AHMO,

in the suffix

by which
;

it is

formed, probably contherefore remarkable

nected with the genitive ending in the text

and

is

with reference

to the preservation of the ,

br}ii6cnos
;

which

is lost in drjuoio.

With

regard to the origin of

from the genitive,

let reference

be mad<

to the Latin cujus, a, urn

like f{i\vi

and the identity of the Sanskrit suffix of words manushya, " man," as a derivative from Mann, with the genixq shya for

tive ending

sya, as in ^W^iT
.

amu-shya, " iUins."

With

reference to the Zend, see

231. Note J; and with regard to

.

the Greek, Latin, and Lithuanian forms XvVoi, hipi, wil/tai, see

228.

FORMATION OF CASES.
Instrumental, Sanskrit
vriki-blds,

275

vrikd-is*

(from vrikd-Ohis), Veda

Zend

vehrkd-h, Lithuanian wilka-is.

Prakrit
. 220.),

deve-hin

(from

dSva,

"God,"

see

Greek
(. 215).

deo-iptv.f

Gotliic

Dat. Instr.

uulfa-m
Dat. Abl.

Sanskrit vrike-bhyas,
vehrkaei-byd,

Zend

[G. Ed.

p. 296.]
. 244.),

Latin lupi-s (amici-bus

(. 215.).

Lithuanian wilka-m(u)s
Genitive,

Sanskrit vrikd-n-am, Zend vehrka-n-anm, Greek

\vK-oiv,

Lithuanian niUc-u, Gothic wulf-S,

(. 248.),

Latin lupo-rum

take the liberty,

m order to separate the base and the termination, to

;

divide the diphthongs, as above in \vko-vs

therefore one

must here probnt as

noance

vrikdis,

and in Lithuanian wilkais, not as ^ 217., but only

trisyllables,

dissyllaWes.

t
(})iv

have remarked

at

as a conjecture, that the

ending

in the plural is perhaps identical with the Sanskrit fjTO bhis,

and the

thence-derived Prakrit
I

will not advance

with dev^-hin.

f^ Mh, and the Latin bis in nobis, vobis ; and more than a conjecture here, also, in comparing 6(6 <^t This only is certain, that with the syllable fi? bhi, which
bottom of the case-forms fira
bhis,

in Sanskrit, hes at the

nT bhyam,
Greek ^i

and

vzrnr

bhydm, as their

common

root (see

215. passim), the

and

(Piv is also to

be associated.

I here willingly agree

(})iv

with

M. Ag. Beij/xtv, c/xtV,

narj- (Berl.

Ann. July 1833,

{.

p. 51.), that

might be formed from the

t

ending IJ? bhyam

Tftv,

222.)

by the

contraction of jjya into

(as in

&c.

. 222.).

The

third possible supposition

would be the derivation

from the usual dative-ablative plural termination VITO bhyas; again with
the corruption of s \o
v,

as in the 1st person plural /xev

from

^ej,

and

in

the 2d and 3d person tov, tou from

^m

thas, j(j(

tas.

The fourth possible

bhyam

case would be the derivation from

{. 215.),

the dual termination VITPT

and the changing

this

number

of restricted plurality to that of

<^iv

unlimited plurality.

I prefer,

however, to consider

(^t) as from one

of the multifarious terminations of the Sanskrit plural belonging to all

declensiona ; therefore, from

fV^

bhis or

I^

bhyas.

T 2

276
Locative*

FORMATION OF CASES.
Zend vehrkaS-shva, anian wUkuse, Greek Dat. KvKot-at.
Sanskrit vriM-shu,
LitLii-

NEUTER BASES
Nona. Ace.

IN

a,

GREEK

o,

LATIN

U, O,

SINGULAR.

Sanskrit ddna-m, Zend ddte-m, Latin donu-mt

Greek
Vocative,

diopo-v,

Lithuanian gera, Gothic daur.

Sanskrit ddnOf

Zend

data,

Gothic daur\

The

rest as the masculine.

DEAL.

Nom. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit ddni (from ddna-j-i), Zend The rest as the masculine.
[G. Ed.
p.

ddlS.

297.]

PLURAL.
ddnd-n-i, Vedic ddnd,

Nom. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit

tin dona,

Zend ddta, LaGreek ^wpa, Gothic daura.

The

rest as the masculine.

"Remark
ceived
blished

The Zend system of declension has resome valuable additions from the treatises pub1.

by Bumouf since the appearance of the First Part

I

of this book, which

must

lay before

my

readers.*

First

a dual case,

viz.

the genitive-locative, which I imagined

to be lost in the Zend, as I

had searched for

it

alone in

vain, and could supply

all

the other dual endings in tolesupplies this (Yasna, Notes

rable copiousness.
et

M. Bumouf
p.

eclaircissements,

cxxii.)

by the

expressions

^i^'^jy
S.

^'9uu ubdyd anhvd which are to

p.

be twice found in V.

312, and on both occasions are rendered by Anquetil, whose

First,

a review of this Part in the Journal des Savons, which refers

particularly to the

Zend

then the First Part of the First Volume of a

lastly,

Commentary on the Ya9na;

Asiatique,
''

a disquisition in the Nouveau Journal

Sur

les

mots Zends

et Sanscrits Vahista et Vasichta, et sur

quelques super latifs en Zend."

FORMATION OF CASES.
translation
is

2T7

in this place particularly confused, " dans ce

monde."
the

This translation might lead us astray so

easily, that 4''>' anhvo,

much
. 187.,

more
also

according to

might
tion
this

be

the

singular

genitive,

which

frequently

occurs with a locative meaning.

We

await the elucidawill give of

which Neriosingh's Sanskrit translation

passage
;

but, for the

present, content ourselves with

the inferences deduced by Buruouf.

^ii7_i> ubSyd, according to that authority, corresponds with the Sanskrit

3"fift?i

ubhayos {amhorum, in nmbobus), with d for

to

a,

probably,
the

according

Burnoufs

acute
6,

conjecture,

through

influence of the preceding

and with the

loss of the

con-

cluding

s.

am

the

more

inclined to assent to
first 6

Burnoufs

opinion regarding the origin of the

as
I

of ^i^^-l* uboyd,

have been so fortunate as to

find

another example

for the hitherto

missing dual case, in which ^^^aj ayd, not

;

because, that Vi.iY ^y^ actually occurs exercising the force of assimilation in
the

is

to say,

no

letter

question precedes
(

mean

the form

<^^^aj^j3av zastayo
as^jjai^ zasta,

= Sanskrit

Iwstayds), " in the hands,"

ill

from

[G.Ed. p. 298.]

a passage of the Jztschne, wliich has perhaps not yet been

examined

by M. Burnouf (V.

S. p. 354.)

jau^daj au<3A5^

"i^Aj^jjAj^ 9"8*J^

^fiL>2^kathd ashdi drujem

192) translates
le

which Auquetil
vielfrai-je
le

(p.

by

'*

dyanm zaltayo,* Comment moi -pur,

It

main sur

Daroudj?"
little

appears,

how-

ever, that
"i^i^Aj^jjAi^
I I

jjukJCtjAj

ash6i can as

be a nominative as
;

zaslayd a singular

accusative
literal

and
:

believe

am

not wrong in the following

"

translation

"How can

give the (Daemon) Drudj into the hands of the pure (into

the power) ?

"Remark

2.

In

the instrumental singular

M. Burnouf

admits the termination ana in bases in a (Ya<;na, p. 98. passim), with n introduced, for the sake of euphony.
* The Codex has fauhily jjujooaj asdi and ^ 9ii>>^ drryjem.

2*78

FORMATION OF CASES.
w^ina
(, 158.).

according to the analogy of the Sanskrit

He

rests this,

among

other forms, on that of

ajjaj^jjaiaj^

maesmana,
attention,

" urinal"

a word which had often attracted

I,

my

and from which

in

in like
if I

manner, would have

had not differed from
I I

deduced instrumentals in a-n-a

Burnouf

the etymology of the same, as

in n;

theme terminate
Sanskrit

and
"

this

word, which

make its remember

to have seen only in the instrumental, I derive from the

root ft^ mih,

mingerer by a

suffix

n^

man,

according to the analogy of )m^m<^m^ haresman, from

vrih,

"to grow," whose instrumental

AjyAi^jJAJAJ^

Aj/As^jag^Aii

baresmana,

analogous with
quently.

M. Burnouf

maesmana, occurs very freappears, on the other hand, to

ma in the word maesmana, in which we we cannot agree with him as long as we cannot supply any cases which must indubitably belong to a theme in a. If, further, some words, which in their theme
adopt a suffix
think

terminate in

mm

as

(<^,

Sanskrit

^^

as),

adopt ana in the

instrumental form

M. Burnouf quotes,
and

p. 100 note,

mjm^m^
still,

mazana,

AiyAJ^^AJAW srayana,

Aj^Aswjtulp

vanhana;

in

my

opinion, bases in a

may

be assigned as the origin of be divided maza-na, &c., only

these forms, and they can

in as far as such to

forms have been already proved to belong

a.

But now we prefer dividing them mazan-a, so that the letter s, with which these themes
undoubted bases in
originally terminate,
[G. Ed. p. 299.]
is

interchanged with a nasal, just

""Ifl^^

as,

in Sanskrit, the words

t

yakrit,

^l^
sub-

iakrit

change their
xioF^

for

n in the weak
sakan
first
]

cases,

and

may

stitute

yakan,

igprli^

or

as,

in

more remote
/xei/

a:i ilogy,

the Greek, in the

person plural, has formed

this,

from

/xef (^fX

mas, "mus

").

Besides

M. Burnouf

cites

also the interrogative instrumental as)m^ kana, "with

what.'**'

which

is

the only word that brings to

my mind somewhat of
vazna
yazdn^,
"

conviction, and had struck

like

my

attention before, in passages

^O/Au^As^ '^Vi^'^

AjyA)^

kana

with

FORMATION OF CASKS.
what offering
this
shall I sacrifice?"

'

279
I

(V. S. p. 481.)

have
prone
I

not,

however, ventured to draw a grammatical deduction from

form, because

the

pronominal bases

are

to

unite with one another, and because I believed

miglit

assume that the same pronoun which

is

contained in ^nr

ana and FT ^na forms also the last element of asjasj kana, if from this base the instrumental only had been evolved
or
^Stj

preserved,

as

has

also

occurred

in

the

Sanskrit
rest,
ajjaj^

ana and
it

^r Sna in but a few eases.

For the

the Greek
kana, if

KeTi'oy
is

also

appears

connected with this

looked upon as a theme, with which the inif

strumental must agree in sound, for kcivo^,

of interrogative

not directly

meaning,

is

still

plainly connected with

hHj1

the old interrogative base (comp.

ever.*^.

kakchana,

"

who-

Under

these circumstances

cannot yet admit

of in

any instrumentals
i

in a-n-a, especially as also the bases

and u (in which the Sanskrit in the masculine and neu-

ter likewise introduces a euphonic n) in the Zend, in

words

(. 160.).

which we have noticed, have dispensed with a similar insertion In another place {Journal des Savans\ M. Burnouf deduces ihe frequently-occurring instrumental Juu^^AjjajAj
ashayd, " with purity,"

from the masculine theme

Ajjajjy

asha

and there would be accordingly

I

aj^^aji^aj ashaya,

an

instrumental form, at present standing alone in the Zend,

which

hesitate

to

acknowledge, although
in

it
.

would be
158.,

analogous to the Vedic form mentioned

^THH

swapnayii, if one derives this, with the Indian grammarians,

from a theme

^w

swapna.

But

if

instrumental forms of
to be pro-

this kind, in the

Vedas or in the Zend, are not

duced in other undoubted instances as in

stantives, nothing

the

case

of

adjectives in construction with masculine or neuter sub-

prevents the assumption, that the form

"^Tffl

T^nn\ swapnayd belongs to a feminine theme

especially as the suffix
in the feminine
t?

swapnd,

na occurs also in other abstracts

nA,

form tn

and therefore ^M^l sivapnnyd


280

FORMATION OF CASES.
be explained according
p.

may
I

to the

analogy of

rioimi trishI

[G. Ed.

300.]

nayd, " with thirst."

In every case

think

may

deduce the Zend aj^^asj^xs ashaya from a feminine

AUtaJA5 ashd, as the

theme

Zend

in general, in the substantive,

;

passes readily from one sex to the other

and, for example,

with a masculine base As/uvi^ manthra,

also, a
*'

"

a speech/' occurs,

feminine au/O'^^ manthrd.

3.

Remark
exists,

For the genitive termination j^w M there

Burnouf has most
rare
is

also

as

satisfactorily proved, a

form nearer
although
corrupt

to the

Sanskrit sya, viz. au^^w hyd, which,

in
still

rather

comparison
sufficiently

with
frequent

the
in

form

hS,

more some
its

chapters of the Jzeschne to satisfy one perfectly of

signification,
I

according to

the

proofs given

by Burnouf.

had remarked words with the ending am^^> ht/d, but in passages where AnquetiFs translation was little
too

adapted to bring to light the genitive nature of the same,

which, besides, was very
representative

much

obscured through

its

usual

me

under

k^w M, and was, moreover, concealed from appearance of an instrumental form. the
termination hyd

However, the
Sanskrit

for
it

which

is

sometimes

found, also, JM^^\a khyd

;ct

approaches

so very near to the

so precisely according
a,

sya,

and agrees with

to rule, as far as

the unorganic lengthening of the

that

a single passage, with the accurate translation

singh, who, in

of Nerio-

the

passages

hitherto edited, follows

led

the

original

word by word, would have

is

us to

it.

Such a

passage

given, although with a different aim, by Burp. cxxxix.),

nouf in his Ya9na (Notes,

as
it

which we here annex,

is

interesting in other respects, also, for

|^^7>0;A$Q>

grammar:
M^)^3Xi^

MiJMXi^

AU^^WASjajAS

AU^AJo)

AUQxfCaW

^cyAM(2A3

MAM^ Aj^^c/^jJ

M^cj^

kosud

znnthwd paid

ashahyd paourvyo kasnd kheng strencha ddt adhvdnem. Neriosingh translates this passage word for word, only that

he renders kasnd, " which

man?"

(here properly not more

FORMATION OF CASES.
than "who," for the idea of

2Si
in
Tid,

man
by

is

lost

the general

signification of the whole,) not

crt tjt

but simply,

by

cFt

kd,

as follows
Hi^'^^JT

cB^

nT?rt f<Tin

JJIWW

TT^PT

W.

^^^

HKcBT^TTW f^

kS jananeli pita punyasya prathaman*

(t^R^ *<(^<JjNKrfj; ^S^^

'^

kila

sadvydpd-

[G. Ed.

p.

301.]

ratvan kas chakri,

i.e. "

boni originem quis fecH?^) kali surFt

yasya tdrakdndncha daddu padavim (fts^ W\h^ ^H\T^

kila

^
for

mdrgan teshdn kd daddu,

translate

i.e.

"

viam

ipsis quis dedit?").

We

from the Zend,

puri)

"

Quis {qualis

vir) creatione pater

est puritatis (or

primus? quis

{qualis vir) soli stellisque

dedit

viam

?"

The Zend expression AucuTcaWf zanthud,

p. 351, is

which, in the lithographed codex,

erroneously
>^,uja3<

given -WJ^^W
zantu
;

zarithd, is plainly

the

instrumental of

which would correspond to the theme of a Sanskrit

jantum, as the latter
is

infinitive, "STtTK
I

feminine, and to which

have, in another place, referred the ablative rwAuoxSO^

p. 253.).

znnthudt (Gramm. Crit.

This form

is,

besides, re-

markable on

this account, viz. that it

is identical

with the

Sanskrit instrumental gerund, which, from ipT jan, without a

conjunctive vowel and without the euphonious suppression of

the
r[

n,

would sound

l{:^j^ jantwd.

to the length of the concluding a of the

With regard, however, Zend form, which is

. 118, 158.

preserved contrary to the prevailing rule (see

and

160. p. 191

G. Ed., where, however,

I

xiifS'<^'^ii_^janthwa is to

be read for zanfhwn),

do not attach any particular import-

ance to
.sage
is

that,

because in the chapter from which this pasa,

taken

originally short, is repeatedly to be found

lengthened.

The Sanskiit

Wff^l jananSfi, with which Nerio-

singh translates the Zend instrumental case, must be considered as an ablative, as this case often enters the depart-

ment

of

tlie

instrumental, and

is also

capable of expressing
is

* Perhaps the adverb MVIH prathaman, '^primum,"

a cormption for

Vmw.

prathamaJi, "primus,"

which answers

to the original,

and

is to

be

expected from the sense.

+ Vide as

to Ajarf"(3vj^

zanthwd, p, 1244 6. ed.

s :

282

FORMATION OF CASES.
XIL
89.).

the preposition "through" (for example, Nal.

Considered as a genitive, if^^'JananM would not correspond

with AwoxTOvij zanthwd, which cannot possibly be a genitive, for the genitive of >^^aj^ zantu could only be J^^>c^^Av
zanteus, or, also, "^cxfCaW zanthwd, or <^a5^^a5^ zantavd (see
. 187.),

but in no case
is

auoxTcs-^j

zanthwd.

Add

to this, also,

that nrf^Jawani

feminine, like the

V[jpi^ punyasya, therefore, could

Zend >^^MXi^ zantu, and no more pass as the epithet

of ^rf^: JananSK than, in Zend, au^^wajj^aj ashahyd could

I will, however, as concerns the Zend, lay no great stress on this circumstance,

pass as the epithet of auoxTo-^ zanthwd.

since in

it

the genders of the

substantive are constantly

changing.
genitive,

M. Burnouf, who

looks upon "W^^l

it,

jananM

as a

and refers tnnj^ punyasya to

according to this

interpretation justly takes objection to the tn?!^ punyasya,

which does not agree with the gender of

[G. Ed.

'S(^fi\ janani,

but he

confirms, however, the reading expressly by the addition of a

p.

302

sic.

His translation runs, "Quel

est le presoleil

mier pere de la creation pure? qui a montreleur route an

vt

aux

astres."

look with anxiety for

explanation of this passage,

M. Burnoufs further but expect from him rather injkuoxi^vv^

formation of value in other respects, than to find that he has

succeeded in making the forms Wf(^ jananefi and

zanthwd pass for genitives.

Anquetil's traditionary inter-

pretation sounds, in this place, very strange, but does not

contradict

my apprehension

of Axxafo"^

zanthwd : he makes

the genitive Au^^WAjjaj"'^ ashahyd pass for the nominative,

and does

not, therefore,
axj^^^-

throw any light on the meaning of

hyd
;

the termination

for, in

the presumption that

it

was

right, au^^wajcuaj ashahyd might, perhaps,

have next
as follows

bein taken for an instrumental, and perhaps have been translated " father with purity."
" Quel est le

His translation

is

premier pere pur^ qui a engendre

qui a donne

* In other places (V.

S. p.

385) Anquctil renders

(p.

137) the won?

FORMATION OF CASES.
de
lui
is

283
The must be
it

meme

les astres

qui ne sont pas a deux faceg?**

sun

here quite

left

out of the question

and

it

acknowledged, that, as far as relates to etymology,

very

is

much obscured

in this passage;

we might

identify,

with reference to the form of 50^?!^ kheny, this expression with the reflective pronoun aj^jo kha (as in kha-ddta, " created
of itself," which is

often

said

of the

stars,

as of self-

created lights),
slren-cha
;

and consider it as the epithet of aj^^c7^jj so that it would correspond as accusative plural
It is

to the Sanskrit ;^T'^ swdn.

here to be remarked, that

in

some chapters
instead

of the Jzeschne,

m^
and,

ng

is

repeatedly

found

of a

simple

nasal,

indeed,

without

regard to the organ of the following

read, in the

initial letter.

So we
dushdaas

V.

S. p. 391, ^^c7c3Ajjkv?(S^A5^y>^

dushacsathreng*

^^cy6^A}^wo.M3>^
ineng,

dusskyadfhnevg,
indeed,

^^^A)a}^Jo>^
these

Anquetil,

renders

expressions
le

singular nominatives, " ce roi mechanic qui fait

mal, attache

la

mauvaise loi"; but they, together with

dushvachanho,

[G. Ed. p. 303.]

4''3uu^A}tb>^

'|'9ui'yA3^l*y>^

dushmarmnhd,

refer to the plural 4'^-^^cZ.5 dregvato, and I have no the whole passage, howdoubt of their accusative nature
:

ever, like

many

others in the Jzeschne, can be explained

translation.

only with the help of Neriosingh's Sanskrit

We

can but regret that the in other respects highly valuable

of

elaborate exactitude
leaves

Burnoufs
will

excellent

Commentary
to

us no

hope that he

come very soon

the

elucidation
I

of this

and other passages, regarding which

am

most curious.

But

to

return to our ^)^?t^ kheng,

ui^^WAJtaj-w AU^Axd paid ashahyd rightly by ph-e de la purete: his

translation
is,

however,

little

calculated to throw light on the connection

of the passage referred to.

The lithographed MS. has

two words ; the a
the prefix
is,

mjttJc/(3Ajjiv^ avm?>4 dusa csathreng aa

however, clearly only a conjunctive vowel, to unite

CUM <^h

more conveniently with the following ms^cs.

284
the

FORMATION OF CASES.

^ kh

makes no

difficulty in this expression,

even

in its

acceptation for the sun, for which, commonly, j7a5' hvare is found (the Sanskrit t^TT^ swar, " heaven,"), as jo kh is used

very frequently for > hv (see

expect
to
find

35.)

but we might here

j^w^o

khare,
n,

and
and

may
this

suppose that the

letter
is

m^

ng has

arisen out of

out of

r,

as

these liquids are easily interchanged, as

skrit,
aliar,

shewn

in San-

by the connection of ^Tf^ ahan,

and, in the
(I write it thus,
. 44.).
if,

with ^r^^ Zend, that of fM^xsMiCS^ csapan, " night,"

" day,"

with ?M^MMi(S^ vsnpar

csripare, designedly, see

and not
I
it

g/AJQ)A5Jcv5(5^

At

all

events

take

^n^9^

kheng to be the accusative,

indeed,

may

not also be
entirely lost

conjectured that the base /a5 hvar

its
r,

may have

and that

it

may

be

^^c^^ kheng
kita.

for ^^^ khem, the

accusative of a base aj^

aj^^p^ijojj stren-cha, also,

according to

my

opinion,

is

the accusative, and not, as one

translation, the

might expect from the Sanskrit

plural,

genitive

which more frequently occurs in the form ^'^7jm^m

Although, from
this,

stdranm.

^c7^jj

stren

might

easily
cha, I

be formed by contraction and combination with a5^

secondary form
so
tliat

nevertheless prefer acknowledging in aj^^c7ijoj3 strencha, a

of -io>p7ipJ3 krevs,

explained

in

239.;

the nasal, here vocalized

to u, is

there retained,
.

but the sibilant has been removed (comp.

cially as, in

239.);

espe-

other places also, aw^ dd

is

found in construc-

tion

with the accusative

of the person,

which has been

adhvdnem, the
be observed
in-

given.

In the Zend expression,

^<^jMi(Oj^
fail

Sanskrit 5HgTTH

adhwdnam cannot

to

(comp.

4 5.).;

but in the lithographed

is

MS. we have

stead of this, 9^/Au^Aj advdnhn, which

easily seen to be

an error.

This

false

reading appears, nevertheless, to be an

ancient one, and widely diffused;

and upon

this is founded

Anquetil's, or rather his Parsi teacher's, interpretation, which

is

strangely at variance with Neriosingh's exposition

[G. Ed.
p. 3( 4.]

" qui

ne stmt pus a deux faces^ so that

aj

is

FORMATION OF CASES.
taken for
the

285
as

the well-known privative

particle, aj^ dva

number

two, and the last portion finds in the Sanskrit

its

^TtTTanana, "countenance,'*

corresponding syllable.

FEMININE BASES IN
Nominative,
Sanskrit
rankn,

d,

dhard,*

GOTHIC 6 (. 118.). Greek xwpa, Lithuanian

Gothic giba, Latin
terra.

Zend

hizva,

Accusative,

Sansk. dhard-m, Latin terram, Zend hizca-nm,

Greek

^a>pa-v, Lith. ranka-n, Goth. giba.

Instrumental, Sanskrit dharay-d, Zend hizvay-a, Gothic

Instr. yibai
(.

Dat

161.),

Lithuanian ranka.
Lith. ranka-i.

Dative,
Ablative,

Sansk. dhardy-di,

2^nd hizvay-di,
ferra(d).

Zend

hizvay-dt,

Latin

Genitive,

Sanskrit dhardy-ns,
^oypa-^,

Zend hizvoy-do, Greek

Lithuanian
ranku-s,

Latin

terras,

Gothic
Locative,

gibd-s.
(.

Sanskrit dhardy-dm

202.),

Zend

hizvay-a^

Lithuanian ranko-ye
Vocative.

(. 197.).

Sanskrit dharS,

Zend

hizvS

(?),

Greek

%<3pa,
(?).

Latin terra, Lithuanian rankn, Gothic giba

DUAL.

Nom. AccVoc. Sanskrit dhar^, Zend hizve (. Nom. rank}, Voc. rdnki.
Instr.

213.),

Lithuanian

Dat.Abl. Sanskrit dhard-bhydm, Zend hizvd-bya,t Greek

Dat Gen. ^^wpa-zv, Lith.

Gen. Loc
Sanskrit dharay-os.
is

Dat. ranko-m
[G. Ed.

(.

5.).

p.

305.]

Means " earth," and

probably connected with the Greek x^po? 8

aspirates are easily interchanged

(Bnttmann,

^'.

16.

Rem.

1.).

The root

is

dhri (\n: dhar^

. 1.),

"to hold," " carry ;" whence,

its

also,

VTU

dhdrd^
the

which,

by reason

of the long vowel of

root, approaches nearer

Greek x<^pa ( 4.), although it does not signify earth. t Without being able to quote this case in Zend bases in
no doubt of the genuineness of the above form, since
cognate case terminations:
that an
t

d, I still

have

can prove by other

1.

That the a

is

not shortened; and 2. also

assimilative

is

not introduced into the theme

;

by the

power of the
(V. S.

termination
p. 308.)

hence,

e.

g.

in

the instr. pi.

" (yvi^).

AO^_iAuy?^ gendbis

from au/?^ gend " woman

;^G

FORMATION OF CASES.
FEMININE BASES IN
SINGULAR.
?/

Nominative,

Sanskrit pnti-s,

Zend

dfriti-s,

Greek

iropTt-s,

Latin
Accusative,

turri-s,

Lithuanian

aivi-s,

Gothic ansf-s,

Sanskrit priti-m, Latin turri-m,

Zend

afriti-m,

Greek

-nopn-v,

Lithuanian dwi-n, Gothic ans.

Instrumental, Sanskrit j}r%-d, Zend dfrithy-a, Gothic

Instr. ansiai (without case suffix, se

Dat
Zend

. 161.).

Dative,

Sanskrit pritay-i (or prity-di,

dfrite-e.*

164.),

Ablative,
Grenitive,

Zend

dfritdi-t,

Latin turn-{d).

Sanskrit priU-s (or only with the feminine

termination prity-ds), Gothic

dfritSi-s,

anstai-s,

Zend

Greek

tropri-o^, (pvae-cog,

Lat

turri-s.

Locative,

Sanskrit prit-du, (or with the feminine termi-

nation only prtty-dm).

Vocative,

Sanskrit prit^, Zend

DUAL.

dfriti,

Greek

Troprt.

Nom.Acc.Voc. Sanskrit jjriti, Zend

CG. Ed.
p. 306.]

dfriti{?),

Lithuanian

Nom.

awl, Voc. did.

i,

It may be sufficient to give here the cases of a Sanskrit mascnline in which differ from the feminine paradigma from agni, " fire," comes the
:

instrumental singular agni-n-d

whilst from
. $.

jaa^i,

" master," comes jsa^y-o,

in the accus. plural

and from sakhi, "friend," sakhy-d (see

168.) and

^Tfhr agnt-n. t Differing from what

is

stated in

164. p. 196. G. Ed.,

it

is

now my

opinion that the e e in v^c^^joax) dfrUe& does not represent the At a of

the original form K3^^A5^^dA5 afntay^, but

as, for instance, in

is

the contraction of a and y

the Prakrit f^Tjffil chinUmi, from r^iTtllfH chnUais

ydmi.

c e

is

here a weaker form of S^=X!, and

more properly used

to

represent the latter than another vowel.

see p. 218,

With

regard to the Lithuaman,

Note

t.

FORMATION OF CASES.
lustr. Dat. Abl. Sanskrit priti-bhydm,

2ff7
dfntt-bya,

Zend

Greek

Gen. Dat.
(. 215.).

iropTt-o-iv,

Lithuanian Dat. atti-m

Gen. Loc.

Sanskrit jmty-ds, Zend dfnthy-6

(?) (see p. 276.

Rem.

1.).

FLUBAL.

Nom. Voc.

Sanskrit pritay-as,

Zend dfriihy-6 (with cha "and" dfrithy-as-cha), Greek Troprz-ej, Latin

Gothic
anstei-s,

turr-es,

Lithuanian dmy-s.

Accusative,

Sanskrit prtti-s,

Zend

dfnti-s,

Greek

-nopri-^,

Gothic

ansti-ns,

Lithuanian dwy-s.

Instrumental, Sanskrit priti-bhis, Zend dfnti-bis, Lithuanian

awi-mis, Gothic Dat. Instr. ansti-m
(. 215.).

Dat. Abl.

Sanskrit priti-hhyas,
ri-bus,

Zend

dfriti-byo,

Latin tur-

Lithuanian ain-m{u)s

(. 215.).

Genitive,

Sanskrit priti-n-dm,
turri-um,

Zend

dfriti-n-anm, Latin

Greek

Tropri-oiv,

Lithuanian awi-Ut

Gothic ansi-^.
Locative,
Sanskrit priti-shu,
ghu),

Zend

d/riti-shva (or dfritiiropTt-a-t.

Lithuanian dwi-sa, Greek Dat.

NEUTEB BASES IN
SINGULAR.

i.

Nom. Acc. Voc. Sanskrit

mare.

vdri,

Zend

vairi,

Greek

tdpi,

Latin

The

rest like the masculine.

DUAL.

Nom. Acc. Voc. Sanskrit vdri-n-i. The rest like the

PLURAL.

masculine.

Nom. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit

thriy-a

vdri- n - i,

Zend

[G. Ed.

p. 307.]

vdr-a, Greek

tdpi-a,

Latin mari-a, Gothic

" three ").

(from

THUI,

The

rest like the masculine.

* Vide p. 1078 G. ed. as to turre-s and suuiJar forms*.

288

FORMATION OF CASES.
MASCULINE BASES IN U.
SINGULAR.

Nominative,

Sanskrit sunu-s, Gothic

sunu-s,
fSoTpv-g.

sunu-s,

Lithuanian

Zend

pasu-s,

Latin

pecu-s,

Greek

Accusative,

Sanskrit sAnu-m, Latin pecu-m, Zend pasu-m,

Greek
sunu.

^orpv-v,

Lithuanian

sunu-n,

Gothic

Instrumental, Sanskrit silnu-n-d (Veda prabdhav-d, from prabdhu,

sunau.
.

158.),

Zend pah-a, Gothic Dat. Zend

pasv-S,

Instr.

Dative,

Sanskrit
sunu-i.

sunav-i,

Lithuanian

Ablative,

Zend

palad-t, Latin pecu-{d).

Genitive,

Sanskrit suno-s (from sunau-s), Gothic sunau-s,

Lithuanian sunau-s, Zend paseu-s or pasv-d (from pasv-as), Latin pecd-s, Greek
Locative,
(Borpv-og.

Sanskrit sun-du.
Sanskrit sund (from
sunau),

Vocative

Gothic

sunau,

Lithuanian sunau, Zend pasu, Greek ^orpv.

DUAL.

Nom.Acc.Voc. Sanskrit sunu, Zend

sunu, Voc. sunu.
Instr. Dat. Abl. Sanskrit

pas(L,

Lithuanian

Nom.

sunu-hhydm, Zend pasu-bya, Greek

^oTpv-o-iv, Lithuanian

sunu-m

(.

215.)

Gen. Loc.
[G. Ed.
p. 308.]

Sanskrit sUnv-ds, Zend pasv-d (see p. 276.

Rem.

1.)

Nom. Voc.

Sanskrit

s4nav-as,
cha,

Greek

^orpv-eg,

Zend
pecu-s,

pasv-d (with

pasvas-cha),

Latin

Gothic
.

sunyu-s (for suniu-s, from

sunau-s,

230.),

Lithuanian sunu-s.

Instrumental, Sanskrit sdnu-bhis, Zend palu-bis, Lithuanian

sunu-mis, Gothic Dat. Instr.

swm-m

(.215.).

FORMATION OF CASES.
Genitive.

289

Sanskrit sunu^n-6m

Zend pasv-anm, Latin

pecu-um, Greek ^0Tpv-u)v, Gothic suniv-S, Li-

thuanian sun-u.
Locative,

Sanskrit sunu-shit,

Zend pasu-shva (or pasu-s/iu), Lithuanian sunu-se, Greek Dat. fioTpv-cri.

bases
in u
in

Remark.
prifi

Feminine
from

Sanskrit differ in
p.

declension from the masculine, exactly as,

f.

305 G. Ed.,

irtfif

differs

^fxtf agni

m.

NEUTEB BASES IN
SINGULAR.

U.

Nora. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit madhu,

Zend madhu, Greek

/zt'^f,

Latin pecu, Gothic faihu.

The

rest like the masculine.

DDAI.

Nom. Acc.Voc. SaDskrit

The

madhu-n-i.

rest like the masculine.

PLDRAL.

Nom. Acc.Voc. Sanskrit madhu-n-i, Zend madhv-a, Greek

fiidv-a,

Latin pecu-a.

The

rest like the masculine.

FEMININE BASES IN
Sanskrit,

i.

[G. Ed.

p.

309,]

Zend,
bhi-s,

Nom.
Accus.
Instr.

iinri,

"woman,'

"fear,"

ndiri, "

woman.'

nari-m,
nary-d,

hhiy-am,
bhiy-d, bhiy-S, or bhiy-di,

ndiri-m.
ndiry-a.
vdiry-di.

Dat.

ndry-di
nary-ds,

AbL
Gen.
Loc.

bhiy-as or bhiy-ds, ndiry-dt.

bhiy-as or bhiy-ds, ndiry-do.
bhiy-i or bhiy-dm,
bhi-s,

ndry-ds,

ndry-dm.

ndiry-a,
ndiri,

Voc.

290

FORMATION OF CASKS.
Sanskrit.

Zend.
ndiri{se(i .213, p. 227.)

N
I.

A. V. ndry-du.

bhiy-du.

D. Ab. ndri-bhydm,
ndry-Ss,

bhi-bhydm,
bhiy-6s,
PLURAL.

ndiri-bya.

Loc.

ndiry-6 9

N. V.
Accus.
Instr.

ndry-ds,
ndri-s.

bhiy-as,
bhiy-as,
bln-hhis,

ndiry-do.
ndirt-s.

ndri-bkis,

ndiri-bis.

D. Abl. ndri-bhyoji.

bhi-bhyas,

ndiri-byd.

Gen.
Loc.
"

ndn-n-dm.
ndn-shu.

bhiy-dm,*
bhi-shu,

ndiri-n-anm.
ndiri-shva or -shu.

Remark.

By the
in
t,

side of the declension of monosyllabic

feminine bases
peculiar to

which

the feminine alone,

fcf J,

may reject may be

Gen.

the

terminations

placed the Greek

[G. Ed. p 3101

and a remarkable similarity of inflexion

bhi-s, xf-f,

will be observed, as

Nom.

bhiy-as, k7-6^, Loc.

K~i-g.

Dat. bhiy-i,

ki-'i,

Acc. stri-m,^ k1 -v,Voc. bhi-s,

Ki-idv,

Plural

Nom.
Acc.

bhty-as, Ki-e^,

Gen. bhiy-dm.

Loc. Dat. bhi-shu,

I

Ki-crt,

bhiy-as, Kt-ag, Voc. bhiy-as, Ki-e^.

consider, however, this

coincidence as accidental, but, nevertheless, an accidental coin-

cidence of that nature, that can only occur in languages

which were

originally really one:

and

undoubtedly the

terminations, whose

common sound
As
far,
(.

appears so startling,

are historically connected.

the theme,
I

however, as concerns
k'i

believe, with Kiihner

287,), that the 7 of

was

not the original concluding radical letter of the word, but that a

consonant has

fallen out after the

i.

would rather, however,

leave the question as to this consonant undecided, than assume * Or bhi-n-dm.

nines in

Further, the longer case-terminations, which belong

to the feminine (see $. 164.), are

f,

added at will

to tiie

monosyllabic femi-

m; for example, together with bhiy^, bhruvS, also bhi^di,

bhruvdi.

t Or,

like the other monosyllabic

words in

i,

with the termination am,

ttriy-am.

FORMATION OF CASES.
that

291

nally Kifi

Kir is the true theme, and that the nominative was origifor if K/of, ku, in the form in which they have
;

been received, be analogous to

still,

A/05^, A//,

from A/foj,

A/F/,

to establish a

theme

Klf, a proof

similar to that which really

must be brought attaches to AtFt from its being

that which of itself is

found in inscriptions.

And besides this,

alone sufficient proof, the cognate Sanskrit word

f^

div,

"heaven"

(. 122.)

likewise attests a
is,

digamma.

All

ground

for supposing a
I

theme KIF

however, w^anting, for the long

could, as in the Sanskrit vH bhi,

and

like the long v in 6(f>pvq,

be also the real final letter of the base, only that the long
t

in the Sanskrit, except

in

compounds
m. f.,

(for

example iWiH

gfita-bhi

m. f., " void of fear,"

169.
1

aTcjjl

" water-drinking," see

Gramm.Crit. .

70.),

concludes only the feminine themes.

We

will therefore seek elucidation

regarding the Greek

,

kI^
it

in another way, through the Sanskrit

and we

find this, as

appears to me, through a like masculine base, which approxi-

mates closely to the

(cf-f,

as well in

form

as in

meaning

namely, in ?r^ kita, Nom. '<v\z\ kita-s, " insect " " worm," which would lead us to expect in the Greek <c7toj, Acc. kItov,
to

which

Ktg, kIv,

bear the same relation as i^eyas, ficyav, to the

to be presupposed /zeyoAoj, /xeyaAoi

do not consider

it

re-

quisite to

assume a theme MEFAT, although the Sanskrit

it
;

W^
(.

mahaf, " great,** might support

but

ir^TT

mahat

is

participial form, and its full

129.) is

and original form

[G. Ed. p. 311.]

v[^Rt

mahant,

Nom. masc.
/Lieyuv."

P[^T\ mahdn^

which

would correspond to the Greek

FEMININE BASES IN
aUGVULR.
Satukrit,

u, V.

Greek.

Nom.
Accus.
Instr.

raJAil-s, "wife," 6Aru-,

"eye-brow,"

oxftpC-s-

vadhu-m,
vadhw-d,
ladhw-di^

bhruv-am,
bhruv-d,

6(ppu-v.

....
-d/),

Dat,

bhruv-^ (or

....

u 2

292

FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGUT.AR,

Sanskrit.

Greek.

Abl.

vndhw-ds,

bhruv-as (or -ds).

bhruv-as (or
bhruv-i (or
bhru-s,
DUAL.
-ds)'

....
6(f)pu-o^
6(f)pv-'i.

Gen.
Loc.

vndhw-ds,

vadhw-dm.
vadhu.

-<im),

Voc,

6(f>pv.

N,Ac.Y.vddhwdu,
I.D. Ab. vadhu-hhydm.

bhruv-du.

6(ppv-e.

bhru-bhydm.
bhruV'ds.
PLURAL

6^pv-o-tv

G. L.

vadhtu-ds.

....

N. V.
Accus.
Instr.

vadhw'as,
vadh'd-s.

bhruv-as,
bhruv-as,
bhrA-bhis,

6<ppv-eq.

6^pv-aq.

vadhu-hhis.

....
....
6(j)pV-lj)V.

D. Abl. vadhu-bhyas,

bhru-hhyas.

Gen.
Loc,

vadhu-n-dm,
vadhu-shu.

bhruv-dm
bhriL-shu,

(or bhril-n-dm).

6>ppv-(Tl.

Remark. The
[G. Ed.
p.

identity

of

>?^

6/jrM

and '0$PY*

is

312]

sufficient
. 121.),

proof that the length of the v

it is

is

organic (comp.

and

not necessary, therefore, to

.

suppose a theme

O^VYF

(comp. Kiihner

289.) so as to

consider 6<ppv as coming from 6(ppvFq, and the long f as a

compensation for the rejected

before the terminations
at a time

f,

as perhaps fiiKag from

jueAai'S".

That, however, F originally stood

for

example, o^pvFoq

now commencing with a vowel, though

is
;

when

the language had not a Grecian form

shewn

by the Sanskrit bhruv-as

by which, at the same time,

is justified,

the shortening of the u in this case

for the Sanskrit

The

o in ocftpvs is based

on the peculiar disposition of the Greek

in another place,

to

prefix a vowel to words wliich originally

to

commenced with a consonant,

and by whicli,
nakha-s^ fflH

which

have already drawn attention

among other
ndma,
is

things, the relation of ovu$, ovoua, to

tf^^

shewn

FORMATION OF CASES.
changes, that
is to

293
0,

say in polysyllables, as well u as

before

vowel terminations, into a simple r; but in monosyllables,

in order to

avoid commencing with two consonants, or to

its

gain a polysyllabic form, the semi-vowel has

corre-

sponding short vowel placed before

it,

and thus

is

formed

T^
for

uv (vi), as well from u as from

u, as,

under a similar
"

condition,

^ from

and

hence the two opposite forms,

vadhuv-as),
;"

example,

vadhw-as (not

women,"

and

bhruv-as (not bhriv-as), " the eyebrows

as above, bhiy-as
In the dative

(not bhy-as), opposed to nary-as (ndriyas).

plural the short v of o^pu-<ri for 6<ppv-(Ti

may

be attributed to

the effeminate habit of regularly shortening the v before vowel

terminations."

BASES IN du (^),*
SINGULAR. Sanskrit.

Greek.

Nominative,
Accusative.
Genitive,

nd.u-s.

vav-^.

ndv-am.
ndv-wt.

vav-v.
vd(f)-os.
v(F)-V.

Locative,

ndtw.
ndu-s.
DUAL.

Vocative,

vav-^.

[G. Ed.
vd{F)-.
vd(f)-o-?v.

p. 313.

Nora. Ace. Voc. nav-du.

Instr. Dat. Abl.

ndu-bhydm,
PLURAL.

Nominative,
Accusative,

ndv-as.

i'd(f)-er.

ndv-as.

va{F)-a^.
va(^F)Qv.

Genitive,
Locative,

ndv-dm.
ndu-shu.
ndv-as,

Dat

vaxj-<jl.

Vocative,

vaifyeq.

Remark.
1.

find

no

sufficient

grounds, with Kiihuer,

c. .

283.) to suppose that the base of the nominatives

give only the cases retained in the Greek.

294

FORMATION OF CASES.

in avs, evs, ov^, originally terminated in F, so that in the

case before us
for even
if

it

would be requisite to suppose a theme

v,

NAf

the vocalization of F to

in order to facilitate the

junction with a consonant following, did not surprise us

(forms like vaFg,

vaFcri,

could never occur)

still,

on the other

hand, the transition of the sound v into

semi-vowel, in order to
regular, and
is

its

corresponding
is

avoid

the

hiatus,

far

more

required in the Sanskrit according to the

common
from the
though,
if

rules of euphony.

We

will not therefore differ

Indian

grammarians, by the assumption of a

theme tTR ndv

of the Indian

for ^ nAu,

and tt^ gav for

if^
it,

gd

(bos)

al-

there were adequate reasons for

the practice

grammarians would not

restrain

us from

laying

down n^ gav and n^ ndv

terminations,

in the Sanskrit as the true

themes, which maintained themselves in this form only

before vowel

but
u,

before

consonants

have

allowed the v to pass into a

according to the analogy

;

of the anomalous fr^ div, " heaven "

whence, for example,

div-bfiis,

the instrumental plural irf*TO dyu-bhis for f5^f>?TB

which
.

would

be

phonetically impossible
navis

208.).

The Latin
itself
;

(Gramm. Crit. cannot compel us to lay down a

and Greek, for the Latin base
i,

theme ndv

for the Sanskrit

has extended

by an unorganic
it

as swan, " dog," length-

ened to cani

and therefore
v.

exhibits in its declension

nowhere
[G. Ed.
p.

u,

but universally
]

314

BASES TERMINATING WITH A CONSONANT.

SINGULAR.

Sanskrit.

Zend.

Latin.

Greek

Thema,

ViCH,
vd^,

VACH,
vdc-s,

voc,
voc-s,

t)n.

Nom.
Accus.
Instr.

vdch-am,
vdch-d,
vdch-S,

vdch-em
vdch-a.

vooem.

oTt-a.

Dative,

vdchS.
See Locative.

FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGULAR,
Sanskrit.

295

Zend.
vdch-at.

Laiin.
voc-e{d).
voc-is,

Gredk.

Ablat.

* vdch-as.
vdch-i,

Gen.
Loc.

vdch-6,^
vdch-i.

D.

voc-i.

D.

01T-t.

Voc.

vdk,

vdc-s ?
DUAL.

voc-s.

N. Ace.
or
I.

vdch-du.
vdch-d,X

vdch-do.

vdch-a.

....
.

ffjr-.

D. Abl.

vdg-hhydm.
vdchSs,

....
vdch-6
?

D. G.

G. L.

PLURAL.

N. V.
Accus.
Instr.

vdch-as.

vdch-6,^
vdch-6,'\

voc-es.

oir-Cf.

vdch-as.
vdg-hhis.

voc-es.

oTT-ag.

....
....
vdch-aiim

....
voc-i-bus,

D. Abl.

vdg-bhyas,
vdch-dniy

Gen.
Loc.
"

voo-um.

vdk-shu.

vdc-shva ?

D.

6it-<Ti.

Remark L

leave the terminations in

[G, Ed. p. 315.]

the Zend which

to
c
e,

commence with
opinion
(.

6 unnoticed, since, contrary

my
in

former
forms

224.

Note

*),

look

on

the

like j^ojjc^'i'jo^ raochebis,

;

no longer as a conj^jj_ic^'i>A5/

junctive vowel

and therefore no longer attribute the said

raoch,

form to a theme ^^aj7

rnochehis,

but assume that

and similar forms, have proceeded from bases in

. .56^.)
;

4^0 (from as

so that

look upon the c

as a corruption

of the

6,

and

to the

form

<^y>je^<A5/ raochehyd I place as

anterior a lost form ^iA^^^ijAj? raoch6-by6.% In a similar

* Like the Genitive. t With cfia, "and," vdchas'-cha. X See p. 230, Note *.

p.

way

M. Bumouf, who has induced me, by

his excellent pamphlet, cited at

276, on the Vahista (in the separate impression, p. 10, and following), to

rectify

my

fonner views, leaves,

like

p.

18 note, the question

still

unde-

cided,

whether forms

Mi^QfM^

maxeblg, jkA5^_jc>Aj9

maneMs,

296
[G. Ed. p.^316.]
p. 40.),

FORMATION OF CASES.
I lind,

in
for

the Prakrit

Urvasi,

by Lenz.

^^^ff achkarmn
;

^W^fiachharohin (Sanskrit apa-

rdb/m)

and

if this

form

like ji\y^_19^vbA3:?raoc/}e6ii-,

is genuine, then tlie ^ e, in forois appears to stand for ;vi^, as generally

many

interchanges between ^ e and

jo S

occur, although in

the case before us the ^ e is very constantly written, and AJ ^ has not yet been pointed out in its place. If it is further

considered that

^5 ke for \^ k6, person in the plural also

we often find " who ?" and

^(?

c^^l^

ye for ^^C^ yd, "which," the

in

pronoun of the 2d
and, finally, in
;

ve for \l^ v6;

the pronoun of the 1st person cy ne for ^y nd then we see the change of the ^ 6 with c e is sufficiently ascertained, although
it

appears to be restricted to the end of

;

words of a monosyllabic form

writing the
4*

and in these the practice of

before termi-

^ is the prevailing one, while

H3^_J9N-W9 vachebts, Mi^_je\svfM7 raochebts,have so arisen from the bases

iWaj^ mazo,

&c., that the

{mm

as)

is

suppressed, and c e then

introduced as conjunctive vowel ; or whether, before the 6 (from as) only,

the 3 has been rejected, and the preceding a with an epenthetic
i

united

with an

e.

In the former case

should not have been entirely wrong,

from the analogy of raoch-e-b'iS)

sider,

to

deduce forms

liiie

vdch-e-bis.

con-

however, the

last

view as the right one, only that I prefer

letting

the 6 from the pre-supposed original form, mano-bis, raocho-bis, be changed

in its

whole

force into

e,

rather than reduce

it

into

its
i

elements, and
for the deri-

mix

the

first

of the said elements (a) with a conjoined

vation of manebis from mandibts from manabis, for manasbis, would extend
to the Sanskrit form

Hq ^fn ^

manobhis, which originally

may have been

in his

manarbhis {manas-bhis was never possible).

But
obis.

believe that in the

Zend the form

etns really

preceded the form

M. Bumouf,

review in the Journal des Savans (in the separate impression, pp. 30, 31),
calls attention

to a

form

^^boJU)9

vdghzhhjo, for which

is

once

found, in the Vend. Sade, pp. 69 and 70,

^^^eb^OAMv?

vdghezhehyo,

once 4'<^?<)9-'^9 vnghzhebyo, and once f.iJLi'o^9J^9 vaghezhhjd, which,

FORMATION OF CASES.
nations

297
been pointed

beginning with b as yet no 6 has

out

so that b appears to be as repugnant to a preceding 6

6, if

as favourable to a following

the conjecture of Burnouf,

mentioned at
I

p.

297, G. Ed.,

is

well-founded.

On

this point

was not yet clearly informed,

I

w-hen, at . 224.

and

242., [

inconsiderately imagined

could deduce vacho-bya, vacho-bis,

Instead of this should be
;

from

4>^Aj(p

vachd (from vachas).

read aj^^c^ju^ vache-bya, .\5^_ic^a59 vache-bis

this, in the locative singular,

and besides
according

jwM^xil^ vachahi for jw^ul/^ju^

h,

vachanhi
to
is
.
i,

since the nasal to be prefixed to the

falls

56^,

away when

the vowel which follows the h

which has been already indicated in the paragraph

[G. Ed.
p. 317.]

quoted, but since then fully proved by Burnouf.

Besides, there really occurs, also, in one passage (where,

unfortunately, the lithographed

MS.

is faulty,

and

is

therefore

which, with the conjunctive vowel c e (see

30.)

mtroduced

in diflFerent

ways, plainly represent one and the same word, and have proceeded from
t^,i^j30Au(p

vdghzhbyo, which

itself

never occurs.

Although these

forms, which had struck

me
is

likewise, clearly belong to a

otir vdch^ I

theme which
still

means "discourse," and

not,

connected with
it

would

rather

with Burnouf, derive

from vdch

so that the nominative of this,

MS<^Mii^ vacs, raised to a secondary theme, would be contained therein.

We

dare not, without further authority, attribute to the Zend such a

it

malformation, although

derives

its

superlatives in

as^?^ iema from

But Anquetil,
in

the masculine nominative, instead of from the theme.

his Glossary, gives

a form vakhsenghe, "parole

utile,"

which we ought
if

probably to read KSWaLA^j^V^AJlp vucsanhe (as dative),

K3W3uUJ>\5<3I^AU9 vdcsaiiM.

not with long a

to a

This

latter

form would belong

pi.,

theme

"^-HJ^^AUlp idcso {vdcsas)\ from which, in the dat. abl.

<^y>je)opAU9

vdghzhbyo {vaghczhbyo, &c.) might proceed

as with Jw^_i9 <As9 mazehis, Jk^_j9yAJ9

for

<|>i^jiv<3^AU9 vdcslyo ;
also

maneKs, occur

Mi4_i^x\^

mazMs,

m^^^mm^

mantns

for the jio s

of i^ms^auIj vdcso must, aa

)o

Burnouf ha^ shewn,

in contact

with b become

zh.

298
impossible for

FORMATION OF CASES.

me

to use) the

locative jtvAs^As^ vachain

that is to say, in the Vend. S.

AM^WfeVAs^Ajtp
Au^jfeVAj^Aslp

p. 173,

where, for jiw^AJWAjyAj^

to be read Au^jwAsyAj^

manaMchd

vachahechd,

is

manahichd vachahichd. In a Grammar, the lost acquaintance with which is again to be restored, oversights
of this kind
will, I

trust,

be excused in the
to the

first

labourers

and

if,

for example,

Rask gives
.

word

paiti the genitive

f,

paitdis, while,

according to
the

180.

p. 196,

Note

patois is to

be written,

still

form

paitdis was, in its time, instructive

in the main, and

first

taught

me

that the Sanskrit genitive

ois in

termination
If,

S-s

corresponds to the form

in his

the Zend.

too,

Rask has incorporated

scheme of declensions

the ablative paitdit (for patdit), this was indeed a

new

error,

but also a new advantage for the Zend

then

.state,

and brought

to light a

Grammar in its new and important fact,

namely
for
this,

which
that

believe I was
i

the

first

to discover;

bases in

form their ablative

in

oit,

which the
it,

proofs in the Zend-Avesta, as

much

as I have of
I

are

neither numerous nor easily found.

make

this

remark

because

M. Burnouf,
I

as

it

appears to me, speaks too unfa-

vourably of such theoretic formations.

concerned,
believe I

regarding
tion.
I

As far as I am may assert that my communications Zend Grammar are founded on careful reflec-

could not, however, perfectly conclude

my

con-

siderations,

and

am

very ready to complete and adjust

of

For in this book M. Burnouf. Zend Grammar, one must carefully distinguish the disquisitions given in the text from the
also,

them through those

in

regard

to

general comparison added at the end of each rule regarding

case.
I

In the former
I

give only those Zend forms which

:

have seen, and

to

thence deduce theoretic laws

in the

latter I seek

make
of the

the deductions from the inquiries

I

pursued in the text evident in one select example.

perfectly

am

sure

prevailing

majority of the forms

given in the

tables,

and can produce abundant examples

FORMATION OF CASES.
of them.
I

290

have marked some as questionable, and shewn

;

the limits of the probability of others, in notes

and

if

an

error has crept into the

believed to be correct,

forms
give

spoken

of,

and

by

me

it will

me
it.

pleasure to be able

hereafter supplementarily to correct

The form

jwjuu^ajC?

vachanhi was, however, only in a measure a theoretic formation

;

and

should not have ventured to

[G. Ed.

p. 318.]

exhibit

it if I

had not observed,

in other

words of the sanip

declension,

i.e.

in other bases terminating with a consonant,

the locative, which has entirely escaped Rask.

"

Remark

2.

One

might consider the

has

o of ottoiv instead

of a conjunctive
.

vowel, as

been
i.e.

stated

above (see

221.), as

a property of the base,

it;

as

an unorganic
it

extension of
ition

or, in

other words, regard

the second

as a trans-

from the third

otv of

to

declension;

a decladual

ration which

must then naturally extend

and

itself to the

termination

the whole third declension

{Ttoalo-iv, (3o-

Tpvo-iv, ^aiiJLovo-tv like \vko-iv),

to all cases in the

forma-

tion of words

and arrangement of the same, where we have forms like neTuroa^, would
be,

represented an o foreign to the proper base as conjunctive

vowel.

According to

this,

/ieAiTOTrwAj/y,

<f}v<j-io\oyta, l3oTpv6ei, jSorpvoBcopog,

under the preto

supposition of the bases

MEAITO, $Y2I0, BOTPYO,

us to

be

divided into fxeTuro-ei^, and would lead

expect the

nominatives

fxe\iTo-v, &c.,

which are not to be found.

its

The

statement here given has this in

favour, that similar

cases occur also in cognate dialects, since in general that

declension which
prone, in certain

is

the most in vogue and most used,

is

cases, to

receive

into

itself

the other

declensions, which annex to their original base the final

letters of the

bases of the declension

more

in use.

The

origin of

6iro7v

from 'ono, of
first

(f>p6\rrotv

from 4>EPONTO,
of the
;

was as

it

were the

commencement
closely

disease,

which came
this

to its full

developement in the Pali

otlierwise

since in

language,

which

resembles

the

Sanskrit, the bases which end with consonants are declined

300
in the old

FORMATION OF CASES.
way only
in the singular, but in the plural are

so corrupted, that, with the exception of the nominative

and the vocative of similar sound, and the genitive, which

at

the

same time

supplies the place of the dative, they

have extended the old base by an unorganic a (= Greek o), and have thus partly brought it from the Greek third
declension into the

second

and in

the

singular,

also,

most of the cases may, together with the

old form,

assume

more

recent forms, which have originated in the

manner
char, " to

stated.

In this manner, for example, the root

its

^r

go," forms

participle present partly

from the original base

. 129.),

^Tyi( charant, or its corruption ^ttt charat (see

partly

from the augmented theme

[G. Ed.
p. 319.]

^Rfi{ charanta,

and in part also

charant

arbitrarily

from

'^ff

or

^TnT

charanta, as follows (see Clough's Pali

Grammar, Colombo

1824, p. 25, and

p.

compare Burnouf's and Lassen's Essay,

SINGULAR.

l\2

et seq.):

Th.

CHARANT.
charan,*
charant-am,'\

CHARANTA,
charantd,

CHARAT.
....

Nom.
Ace.
Instr

charantS-n-a,

charat-d.

Dat. like the Genitive,

Abl

charanta-smd,
or charanta-mhd,4
I

charat-d.^

* The

final rf

n
I

is,

as in the Prakrit {. 10.), transmuted

n.

into the

Anuswara, which
t It

here express, as in the Sanskrit, by

might

also

be divided thus, charanta-m, and

deduced from

charanta.
X

Transposed, and with h for s (comp.

. 166.).

These forms are

which, in
^,

derived from the medial pronoun

the Pali also, has forced
its

sma mentioned

in $.166.,

way
is,

into the usual declension.

The

which

was

to

have been expected,

as generally happens at the end of a word,

suppressed.
$

Charaid

is,

according to appearance, identical with the instrumental,

but

FORMATION OF CASES.

301

CHARANT,
Gen
,

CHARANTA,
charanta-ssa,
charant^,
\

CHARAT,
eharat-d,

Loc.

^or charanta-smin,\
or charanta^mhi,

charatri.

{charath

\ ?

Voc

or chara*

pixnuL.

[G. Ed.

p. 320.]

Nom.
Ace.
Instr.

.... ....
{

charantdyf
charant^, charantSbhi,

(or charantehi,
like the Genitive, like the Instrumental.

Dat
Abl.

Gen
Loc.

charat-am.

....
charanfd,

charanti-su,

Voc.
" If the

charantd,

.... ....

ending with a consonant had followed the declension-confusing example of the Pali, one would have expected, for instance, from <f>epoiv a genitive (pepovrov,

Greek

in its bases

dative

(f)epovru>;

and in the plural indeed,

(pepovTtav

from

but

is,

in reality,
.

corrupted from charat-ai^ analogous with Zend forma

180.)
:

like ap-ai (in

the suppressed

is

replaced by the lengthen-

ing of the preceding vowel, as in acharcL,

"he went," from achardt

in nt, as I believe,
it

(Clongh,

p. 106.).

* If this form really belongs

to a

theme
and

haa

sprung from the original form charari, by suppression of the concluding

nasal (comp.

Bumouf and

Lassen, p. 89)

in chard this deficiency is

replaced by lengthening the vowel.

t According to the usual declension ending with a consonant one

would expect with charantd

charant
;

also charantd,
is

from the original theme

'*

as, for

example, gunavantd

used with gunavantd,

the vir-

tuons"; the former from gtmavant, the

latter firom

gunavantd.

302

FORMATION OF CASES.
(pepovToi, (pepovrov^, ipepovroic;,

4>EPONT, but
In this

from 4>EP0NT0.
lias

manner

the form (pepovroiv in the dual, which

been

lost in Pali,
;

would be clearly explained as deiived from

*EPONTO

but even

when standing

isolated, (fyepovroiv

may
com-

be justly referred to a theme

OEPONTO,

as the first

mencement of a corruption which was

Pali
;

further pursued in the

and
at
.

prefer this view of the matter

now

to that laid

down
thus

221. of

Both views, however, concur so far; and

opinion
all

much

my

may

be looked on as proved,

that in <l>ep6vrotv, and

other dative-genitive forms of the

third declension, the o belongs neither to the original theme,

which

lies

at the root of all the other

cases,

nor to the

true case-suffix.
[G. Ed.
p.

321.]

siNGuiAR.

Sanskrit.

Zend.
baran-s,

Latin.

Greek.
(Jyepodv,

Gothic.

N.
Ac.

bharan,

feron-s,

fiyand-s.*

bharant-am, barent-em, ferent-em,

barent-a,
barent-^,

(pepoi'T-a{i'),

fiyand.

Ins. bhnrat-d,

....

....

D. Y.fiynnd.
see Dat.

D.

bharat'^,

see Locat, see Loc.

ferent-e(d)

Ab. see Gen.

barant-at,

....
^epovr-o^,

G.
L.

bharat-as,
bharat'i,

barent-6,^ ferenf-is,

Jiyand~h.\

barent-i,Y). ferent-i, D.<j)ipovT-i,

bararv-n,

....
fiyand.

V.

bharan,

feren-t,

ipkpoav,

* Feind, "foe," as " hater," see 125. p. 138.

t See p. 210. Note

X
I

with cha, barentas-cka ("ferentisqtie'^).

I

imagined,

p. 210, that

must, in this case, which before was not

proved to exist in

ND bases, set down fiyand-s as a mutilation offiyand-is

with a

ivom. fiyand- as, according to the analogy of other bases terminating

consonant [ahmin-s, brdthr-s, ^.191.);

friyondis or friyonds from firiyonds.
additions

Grimm

has

(I.

1017.) conjectured

Since this, owing to the very valuable

made by Massmann

to

our Gothic authorities, the genitive

nasyandig of iVinayanrf (" preserver, "preserving") has come to light (see

his Glossary, p. 153),

by analogy with which

I {orvafiuand-is.

FORMATION OF CASES.
nu^L.
Sangfcrit.

303

Zend.

Greek.
<}>epovT-e.

N. Ac. Voc. bharant-du,

Vedic, hkarant-a*
1.

baranUdoy or baranta,

D. Abl.

bharad-bhydm,
bharat-os.

baran-bya,^
barat-6? (p. 276,
PLURAl..

^epovro-iv.X

Gen. Loc,

1.)

[G. Ed.
Greek.
(pepovr-e^,

p.

322.]
Gothic,

Sanskrit.

Zend.

IiOtin.

N. V. bharant-as.
Ace.
bharai-as,
Instr. bharad-bhis,

barent-6,%
barent-6,%

ferent-es,

fiyand-s.
Jiyand-s.\\

ferent-es,

(pepovT-a^,

baran-bis,^

....
ferent-i-ous

....

D. Ab. bharad-bhyas, baran-by6,\

.... ** ....
fiyand-eXX
[G.Ed. p. 323.3

Gen. bharat-dm^
Loc.
bharat-su,

barent-anm,fifirenti-um,

<pep6vT-a)v,
<j>pov-(Ti.

....

See p. 230,

Note*
See
2. p.

t Or harenbya.
X

241 Xote

*,

nnd

p. 210.

Note

$.

See

p. 299.

Rem.

$ Barentai-chcL, ^'ferentesque.'
II

See p. 210 Note

is

j.

This form, which, owing to an oversight,

44.,

omitted in p. 260,

is

found at
5.

Matth. 5.

and agrees with/rtyoTi//*, " amicos " (" amantes "), Matth.

47- as generally with the declenaon of a root terminating with a con-

sonant.

See

Comp. Grimm (T. 1017.). p. 241 Note *, and p. 210 Notef.

dative, *vhich
I

** The Gothic

would have used also

ending in nd.
t-

as the instrumental

(>. 243.), does not occur in roots

f\ Or barant-ahm.
JJ

3ee

p.

266 Note

This case certainly cannot be proved in bases in nJ; but may, how-

ever,

be correctly deduced from the other bases ending with a consonant,

sister dialects.

and from the elder

See

243.
p.

conjecture a transition into the

a declension (comp.

299 Rem.
$.

2.),

by suppressing the nt;

as Vend. S.
su,

thus, perhaps, baraeshva (or

shu, or -Afi,
*^'") for

250.),

p 354

^Mi}o>s^z/Adregva^
(^.
1

(read ^jaj
;

dregvat-

from dregvat, in the strong cases

is

29.) dregvant

on the supposition

that the reading

correct, except the falst. s.

See

$. 52.

304

FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGU LAR.
Sanskrit.

Zend.

Latin.

Greek.
Sai/jutyv,

Gothic

N.

6imd

asma,
asman-a
asmain-e,

sermo\
sermon-em,

ahma.
ahman.
ahmin.
(. 132.)

Ace. dfmdn-am, a&man-em,

I "St

5a//uov-a(v),

dtman-d,

....
see Loc. see Loc.

D.

I.

Oat. dtman-S,

see Dative.

Abl. see Gen.

asman-at,

sermon-e^d)
scrmon-is,
Bai/xov-o^f
Saifxov-i,

....
ahmin-s
(. 132.)

Gen. dtman-as, asman-o*

Loc. dtman-i,

asmain-i D.sermon-i,

Voe. diman,

nsman,

sermo
1)U \L.

^aiuov,

ahma.

Sanskrit.

Zend.

Cfreek.

N. Ace. Voc.

dtmdn-du,

asman-do, or asmxin-a,

Balfxov-e.

Veda, dtmdn-a,
Instr.

D. Ab.

dtma-hhyam,
dtman-6s,

asma-bya,

D. G. ^aiii6vo-ivA

Gen. Loc.

asman-6?
PLURAL.

(p. 276,

I.),

....
Gothic,

Sanskrit,

Zend,

Latin.

Greek.
Batfiov-e,

N. V. dtmdn-as,
Ac.
Instr.

asman-o,

sermon-es,

ahman- s.
ahmAin-s.

dtman-as,

asman-6,

aermon-es,
{datjJLovo-cpiv),!}, I.

dtma-hhh,
-hhyas,

asma

-bis,

ahma-m\
ahmanS.

D.Ab dlma
Loc.

asma-hyo, sermon-i-bus.

Gen. dtman-dm,
dtma-su,
p.

asman-dm, sermmi-um,
asma'-hva,

Baiju-ov-av,
Sai^xo-iTi,

....
SINGULAR.

G. Ed.

324

Sanskrit.

Zend.

Latin.

Greek.
Trari^p,
'iraTe.p-a{v),

Gothic.

N. bhrdtd,
Ac. bhrdfar-am,

brdta,

/rater,

br^har.
brdthar.

brdtar-em,% fratr~em,

* Ahnaiius-cha,

'.'

coelique."

t Seep.299, Rem.2.

Seep.241, Note t.

5 Also 9c7<3axj2i brdthrcm might be expected, as Vend. Sade, p. 357;

^c^ajq) patrem (j}athrem?), contrary

(^.129.), iar patarem.

to the theory of the strong cases

FORMATION OF CASES.

305

SUiGCr^AIL

Sanskrit.

Zend,

Latin.

Greek.

Gothic.

In.

bhrd^r-d,
bkrdtr-S,

brdthr-a,
brdthr-i,
brdihr-at,
brdthr-d,^
brdthr-i,-f

D. Inst brothr (see .

see Loc.
fratr-e{d),
fratr-is.

132,

D.

see Loc.

Ab. see Gen.

G.
L. V.
bhrdtur,
bhrdtar-i,

brdthr-s{see
Trarp-i,

13

D.frair-i,
frater,

bhrdiar,

brdtare,X

narep.

brothar.

DDAL.
Sanskrit.

Zend.

Greek,

N. Ace. Voc. bhrdtar-du, Ved. bhrdtar-d, brdtar-do or brdiar-a,

Inst.

irarep-e,

D. Ab. bhrdtri-bhydm.

bratar-e-bya.

vaTepo-i

Gen.

Loc

bhrdtr-6s,

brdthr-6Q)

PLURAL.^
Sanskrit.

Zend.
brdtar-6,
\\

Latin, fratr-es.

Greek.

Nom. Voc.
Accus.
Instr.

bhrdtar-as,
bhrdtri-n,^
bhrdiri-hhis,

iraTep-e*

brdlhr-em?**
brdtar--bis.

frair-s.

iraTep-a

....
fratr-i-bus,

[G. Ed.

p.

325

Dat

Abl.

bhrdiri-bhyas.

brdtar-e-byo.

....

Genitive,
Locative,

bhrdtri-n-dm.
bhrdtri-shu.

brdthr-anm,^^

fratr-um.

iraTep-u

itaTpd-c

* Vide t See

. 194. p.

211, L
H.

1.

Note.

p. 216.

Note

See
is

44.
J.

r'or the Gothic,

II

which

here wanting, see

p.

253, Note

a^J3AjZm^au/| hrdtarai-cha^ '"fratresque."

See
$.

IT

127. Note.
also brdthr-6, hrdthras-cha {"fratresque "), according to

** Perhaps

the

analogy oidthr-6, "iynes," from dtar.

See ^.239.

See p. 266, Note t.

'

FORMATION OF CASES.
SINGPLAR.
Sanskrit.

Zend.

Greek.
fievos.

iMtin.

N. A. V. manas.
1

mand.*
mananh-a,]
mananh-S,

genus.

nstr.

manas-d,
manas-e,
see Gen.

...
see Loc.
gener-e{d).

Dat.
Abl.

see Loc.
. .

mananh-aU
mananh-6 {mananhas-cho0,
manah-i,{see p. 3 1 6, G. ed .)D.

Gen.
Loc.

manas-as,
manas-i.

fxeve{a)-o^,
/xei/e((r)-/,

gener-is.

gener-i.

Manas-cha, "mensque," " mentemque."

t

M. Burnouf remarks, in

his review (in the separate impression, p.

1 ),

that in this class of words the instrumental

I,

ending

is

generally long.
rt,

in like manner,
in passages

had remarked forms enough of this kind with a long

also

but

where

many a's,

originally short, appear to be lengthI

ened at the termination, and which, therefore,

into account
:

was not willing

to bring

moreover, the cases could not be included, where, through

cha^ a preceding au a
is

the particle

A}p>>

preserved in

its

original length.

After deducting these two classes from forms in anha, the computation

might perhaps turn out in favour of the short a given above.

however, as yet not applied any closer reckoning:
surprise
it

I have,

would, however,

me

if,

on more exact calculation, but

still

in departure
a, the

from

tlie

fate of other polysyllabic

words ending with a shortened

advantage

in this particular case should incline to the side of those

retain the long vowel,

words which

which

would then gladly

is

restore.

No

one will

deny

that the collation of

MSS.

of great importance in deciding

I

many

grammatical and orthographical questions, although

that even a single lithographed

believe I

may assert

MS. opens a
:

rich field to inquiries and

it is

important grammatical observations

it

for although

very full of errors,

is

nevertheless shews no systematic opposition to what

correct

and

many
MSS.

expressions, passages, and turns recur so frequently, that, taken

together, they can in a measure supply the place of a comparison of other

For the
first

rest I

had

at

my command

the edition of Olshausen of

the three

chapters and part of the fourth of the Vondid&d, with the

it,

various readings attached to

so that, through these means,

was not

Wft entirely destitute of

MSS,

FOBMATION OF CASES.
[G. Ed.
Sanskrit.
p.

307
326]

Zend.

Cfreek.
/iei'e(o-)-e.

N. Ac. V. manns-t
I.

....
mananh-u{?)

D. Ab. mand-hhydm, nutne-bya {p. 316 G.e6.),D G.

manas-6s,
{p.

/neve((r)o-/v.*

G. L.

297 G. ed .),

....
Latin,

PLURAL.
Sanskrit.
2^nd.

Greek.
fieve{(T)-a,
(jievecT-ipiv,)

N. Ac. V. mandiis-i,
Instr.

mananh-a,-[
mane-hts,

gener-a.

mano-hhis.

Dat. Abl. mano-bhyas, Genitive, manas-am,

Locative, manas-su,

mane-byo,

see Loc.
/uei'e((r)-a)v,

gener-i-bus.

mananh-anm,
mand-hva,

gener-um.

fxevea-tn,
FEMINIirE.

SraGULAB,

MASCUUNS AND
Zend.

|G. Ed.

p. 327.1

Sanskrit,

Greek.

Nom.
Acciis.

durmands,

dushmando

(.

56^).

^vfffievrjg (. 146.)
5t(r/iei'e(cr)-a(v).

durmanas-am, dushmananh-em,
durmanas,

Voc.

....

The
N. Ac. V. durmanos-da,
Veda, dnrmanas-d.l

rest like the simple word.

DUAL
i

d^hmananh-a

(?)

SvfffjLevexo)-^.

The
N. Voc. durmanas-as,
Accus.
durmanas-as,

rest like the simple word.

dushmananh-d
dushmananh-o

(as-cha),
(as-cha),

5t;(r/ieve((r)-ef.

Svirfiev{<T)-a.

The

rest like the simple word.

* See

p. 299,

Rem. 2.

t See p. 245, Note;. It was, however, from an oversight that I, as was observed at p. 253, Note . read in the Vendidad Sade, p. 127, AJW^g^ jy nemenha it should be Ai^^^^i nemanha, and may also be

considered the instrumental singular

sage,

then

we

should have in this pasin AttiV juu arJia

which recurs three times, the instrumental

See p. 230, Note
*,

both

editions three times with a short a.

I

X 2

308

FORMATION OF CASES
SINGULAR, NEUTER.
Sanskrit.

Zend.

Greek,
8v<T[xeve^.

Nom. Ac V.
"

durmanas,

dushmand (a-cha),

The

rest like the simple word.

the
is

Remark. It was remarked in . 152. (comp. . 146.), that in forms like fxevog, evyeve^, belongs to the base, and
;

not the nominative character

r,

and that the

like

in

forms like
to the

TeTu0o? has come from

and in

manner belongs
first

theme.

M. Reimnitz, who,
ed.,

in (p. 54, &c.) his

pamphlet mengiven in

tioned at p. 294, G.

agrees with this view,

my

treatise "

On some

Demonstrative Bases," wishes to look

to the

upon the 2 in the masculine Teru^coj as belonging

base,

and arising out of t

in

which

cannot agree with him,

as

I,

according to the view generally taken, consider the

final letters of Tert/^of as

marks

of the nominative, before

[G. Ed.

p. 328.]

which the

final letter

of the base is suppressed

. 99.),

on account of the incompatible association of rcr (comp.

and replaced by lengthening the preceding vowel
example, in
/txeAa? for fxeKavg.
;

as, for

The

Sanskrit has a few bases

(see
.
;

in n which, differing

from the ruling principle

139.),

run parallel in the nominative to the Greek fxeKdg

thus,

pimthds, " the way," from panthan, accusative panthnn-am.

Only

in this panthds the lengthening of the a can be less re-

garded as a compensation for the rejected n than in the Greek,

because
it

extends also to the other

;

full

cases

(^. 129.),

with

the exception of the vocative

but perhaps the lengthening

of the a has originally taken place only in the nominative,

and has thence imparted

itself,

when

the

reason of this

prolongation was no longer perceived, to those cases which

otherwise stood upon an equal footing with the nominative.

Thus one says

mnliant,

H?T*^ mahdn, "great" (from the theme properly a participle present from ^^ mah, " to

grow"), with the vowel of the concluding syllable lengthened,

according

to

the

analogy of the Greek

form, as

Xeyov.

The Sanskrit word, however,

retains the long vowel


FORMATION OF CASES,
also in the other strong cases

309

{mahdntam

"

magnum" mahdntas

"mogni,"' mtihantmt, " fxeyaXui"), with the exception of the vo-

cative

while the usual participles present leave the a short

In most exact accordance, however,

in all the strong cases.

with the Greek participle present stand the Sanskrit possessive

adjectives,

which are formed

by the

suffix

vant

(Greek evr for Fevr, in /neA/roe/f and others)

and mant

(in the

weak

cases vaf, mat).

These lengthen,
;

that is to say the a

only, in the nominative singular

^'

so, for

example, dhanavdn,

dives"* {from dhana, "riches"), dhanavant-am,dhanaxxint-du,

dhanavant-as, as \eyioVf Keyovra, Xeyovra, Keyovre^.

OLD SCLAVONIC DECLENSION.t

255.

[G. Ed.

p.

329.]

Before

we

enter upon the province of Sclavonic

Grammar, we
of sounds;
all

must

endeavour
it

to

explain
requisite

its

system
specify

and although
of the

is

not

to

the minutiae

subject,

we

must,

nevertheless,

bring into notice those parts which are indispensable to

the understanding of the
principal object, in the

Grammar.

It is therefore

our

following remarks, to exhibit the

connection of the Old Sclavonic sounds with those of the

elder languages, of which they are either the true trans-

f,

as has been
itself in
if the

remarked

in another place, the suffix ^fff vant

lerit

has

maintained

the Latin in the form

(as opulents),

it

would not
I

be surprising

weak form ^ir

in the

vat, without the interchange of y with

i,

but with the weakening of the a to

divit,

had

its

representative in the Latin

which stands
sj-Uable, as
is

same

relation to dhanavat,

by

passing over the

middle
t It

malo

to mavolo.

stated

portion of this
general, that
it

by Professor Bopp, in the preface to the second published Grammar, commencing with the formation of cases in
had not occurred
to

him
:

to direct his attention at

an

earlier period to the Sclavonic tongues

having subsequently considered

the subject, he found sufficient reason to include

them

in

the same

femily of languages, and accordmgly devotes to

the supplementary section which foUows.

its

principles of declension

Editor.

310

FORMATION OF CASES.
more or
less
vitiated.

missions, or corruptions
therefore, for

We

give

the

first

time, a history of the

is natural,

Sclavonic

sounds, in which, however, as

is

as far as their value

;

concerned,

we have nothing new

Sanskrit
'^r

to bring forward

and in

this respect follow

(a.)

only the teaching of native grammarians.

The Old

a has so far experienced, in the

it

Sclavonic, an exactly similar fate to that which has befallen

in the Greek, that

(e, o),

it is

most frequently supplied by

it

e
a.

or o In

which are always short:

very rarely remains

the interior of the bases, also, e and o are interchanged as in

Greek

and

as,

for example, Koyo^ is

is brod,

related to AIyco,
bred'O,,

so, in the

Old Sclavonic,

"ferry," to

"I wade

through"

voz, "carriage," to vezu, "1 ride in a carriage."

And
rabo,

as, in

the Greek, the vocative \6ye

is,

is

related to the

theme AOFO, so
weight
than

in the Old Sclavonic, rate,

rab,

"O slave,"

to

nominative
e,

The o has more "a slave." more than but a o and hence a
;

corresponds most frequently to a Sanskrit

for instance, in the

d,

so

that,

Old Sclavonic, forms in a answer to

in like
to
e.

the feminine bases in ^n d (comp. vdova, " widow," with

fcf

tm

vidhavd), which, in the vocative,

!),

is

abbreviated to o {vdovo
vowel, also, of the
first

as above

manner As final
a
is

member

of a compound,

weakened

to o

for instance, vodo-pad, " waterfall," vodo-

poi, " water-drinker,"

for voda-

just

as in the

Greek
to

Moucro-Tpa^jjf, Moi/o-o-^/A)/?,
[G. Ed. p. 330.]

and similar compounds, which

>;

have shortened the feminine a or

in respect to

o.

Even
I

if,

therefore, a is in the Old Sclavonic a short vowel,

it,

nevertheless regard
;

grammar,
shewn

as the long

so that in this the Old Sclavonic stands in a reversed

itself to

relation to the Gothic, in which a has

us as

the short of
a,

d,

and, in case of abbreviation, d would

o.

become

exactly as in the Old Sclavonic a becomes

i

(6.)

and ^

both appear in the Old Sclavonic as

is

i,

and the difference of the quantity

removed, at

least I

IN
do

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

311

or shorter I is anywhere not find that a longer compared with Let ^hivH, "I live." be spoken of. silz ; and. on the " virtue " ^vith sila, ,fNTf^ jivdmi to vid, " see." with the root other hand, vidyeti, to which, ^ftl v^dmi, the Old know" to the Guna form of from vyedmy, infin. vyes-t Sclavonic vyemy (abbreviated
;

#^

f^

ioTvyed-ti,)

so that v.d and "I know," assimilates itself, as two different roots. The vyed in the Sclavonic appear frequently in the Old Sclashort 1^ i. however, appears the Greek corruption to e (e). as

vonic also in the

and the Old High German

bases in
i

(.

72.);

that

is

to say. the

three (f?

and the numeral shew, in several cases, e for i. in composition in the iri) appears frequently
treputye, " fritium."
So. also, p^te-shestvye,

form

tre, e, g.

The iis also very frequently plural dadyaU "they *suppressed.e.i/.in the 3d person sut, "they are." Sanskrit dadati; Sanskrit
65o7rop/a

from P^T/ (.260.).

give,"

J^
is

is^

santl

Where
it.

preceding

it

forms a diphthong with a vowel marked in the old writing with a

e.

short mark, which we retain,

" strife." g. boi,

Old Sclavonic, in the forms (c).-7 u and ^ fi have, in the both become i/.f In correctly, which are retamed most (infin. by-id answers to this manner, for instance, by
Dobrowsky's incorrect * The suppression here noticed of final i refers to i in Old Sclavomc has final the however, orthography. In point of fact,
has either been retained unaltered, or

become b y

e.g., that

which Do-

browsky,

corrected to

writes dadjat, "they give," sut, Regarding the nasahzed AAA-^Tb, dadahty, CATb sunty. vowels, see .783. Remark. u Crreek rw We express, as in Polish, the yery or duU i by y, as, like the
I.C.,

"they

are," should be

V,

long . supplies the place of the old short or as II. 666.), Gretsch p. (by ReiflF to It is pronounced in Russian, according according to monosyllabically ; and short in the French oui, spoken very

where

it is

original

it

Heym,
1.

nearly like u, in union with a very short

(Heyra,

p. 5).

This

aU does not, however, remain the same than labials like a dull thick c), and it sounds after consonants other
("
i

positions of this letter (Reiff,

i

sourd

et etouffe").

312

FORMATION OF CASES

6Aw,"tobe;" svekry,"inother-m-]a.w,^\o'V3^vasru; myshy,

"

mouse,"

to

>rq

musha

syn,

" son,"

to

^rr

sunu

chetyri, reaa-ape^, with ^ttc ckatur (in the theme),

nomina-

The instances of y for u are, nevertheless, more rare than those where y corresponds to the long "m u', for the short u, as in
tive masculine 'srstkh chatudras.

the Old
[G. Ed.

High German
p.

(. 70.),

has

for the

most part
o6a, "both,"

331.]

become

and thus, for example, snocha,

"xgrm

"daughter-in-law," answers to
to ^>n ubhd (Vedic form),

snushd

Zend

.wi> vbd.

Hence,

also,

the old u declension has, in

many cases, become

(a.),

similar to

the
"W

declension, which, according to

;

has arisen from

and,

on the other

side, o

may
:

also, but

only in

substantives, participate in

those forms which belong

only to the genuine u declension

perceived that

whence

it

is

easily

the genius of the language could

not
o,

everywhere distinguish further the two kinds of

their history, indeed, far

in

separated from one another,

but phonetically identical,

(c?). -Unorganic
y,
i.

e.

as

representative

of

original

vowels other than

u or
like

gs m, is

not

uncommon
mus,

in the

grammar;
(1st

that

is to

say, the personal termination

my

person

plural),

the Latin
;

has

arisen

from the more ancient mas

^en d)
still

and

if

the bases in a (for

the y here is so

have y in the nominative plural (vdovy, " vidua "), much the less to be looked upon

as

a case termination, as no account could be given

;

of y in this sense

and with bases in ya the a of the

base

is

also really retained {volya, "voluntates").

But
so

as the V exerts the force of an Umlaut

on an o suce,

ceeding

it,

by which that vowel

an
i

is
o,

changed to an

I think that to

following the

without the interven-

tion of another letter, the force of a reactive Umlaut

must

be ascribed, even

if this

force is not everywhere exerted,

to be the Umlauts

and that some

of
J

y's

must be declared

that is to say, as soon as so

much

has been re-

IN
cognised
bases
all

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

Old Sclavonic adjectives, that

313
thtir

in

the

end either in o or yo (changed by the Umlaut

" white,"

to ye), and are thus sister forms to the Greek, like Ar AGO,

'AFIO; andof the Sanskrit, as"^ sueta,

"

f^divya,

heavenly

";

so

soon,

say, as the abbreviation of the

base in the masculine nominative has been recognised

(nov, novus, for novo),

then will

it

be no longer said

wit..

Dobrowsky
to the

(p. 318) that the definite adjectives are derived

from the primitives

y7 or it*

(indefinite)

by annexing, according
the primitive, either

measure of the
If,

final letter of
I

however,

may

trust that I

have obtained

an accurate knowledge of the organization of the Old

Sclavonic

grammar on any point, it

or u, but in
i

is

on this, that the

afilx

in the nominative singular of definite adjectives consists

not in

t/7

as a mutilation of yo

from ya

(n ya), and in the feminine of ya from yd

(tit

[G. Ed. p. 332],

yd).

This also appears to

if,

me

subject to no

manner
svyatyi

of doubt, that

for example, the

svyato,

compound word
a,

comes from the word

theme, the y
cases, in
is
i

" holy," its

acknowledged
through the ini

a euphonic product from

fluence of the

which
it

is

added to

it.

This

has, in

some

which

has been dropped,

left its

still

in a degree, in its

euphonic operation,
proof of
svyaty-m,
its

reflection,

and thereby the

for

former

existence.

Thus,
the

instance,

" per

sanctum,"

from

older

svyatylm,
svyatyi-ch,

svyaty-ch, " sanctorum,''''

and

" in Sanctis,"

from
said

corresponds to the indefinite forms svyato-m, svyatye^h

(for svyato-ch).\

At times, through the

pronominal
will into

syllable

t,

the preceding o

may

be changed at
i

* Dobr.
adjunct
;

also himself, p. 493, considers simple

or

ii

as the definitive

but in considering, as he there does, blagyi as the confluence of

ii,

blag and

he appears

to look

upon the y
it

as having arisen

from the

of

the sufivx, and not to acknowledge in

adjective root.

the final vowel of the simple

ylch,

t In the oldest MSS., according to Dobr. p. 502, the more yim, yimi occur in the plural, for ym, ych, ymi.

fbll

forms


314
or not
:

FORMATION OF CASES
thus the interrogative exhibits the forms kyi,

"(juis?" (Dobr.

500 and 3^3.), kyim, "per quem?" kylch,

kylm,
kdich,

"in

quihm,

quorum?"
koi,

"quibus?'*
koimi.

kylmi,

"per

quos?

with

koim,

The
all

possessive
to the de-

pronouns allow no euphonic reaction at

monstrative
i,

which forms the

last

member
;

of them,

and they always retain their radical

molm, "per

e.

g. mot, " mens,"''

meum"

not myl, mylm.

form

of the adjective bases in yo, which

li,

As to the definite Dobrowsky forms

slightest

through the addition of

doubt that here,
for the first
i

I
i

have not the

is

also,

a simple

the defining element,

is
;

clearly the vocalization of the

y of the
but into

primitive base

so

that therefore,

for

example, sinu
sin-ii,

"the blue,"
sini-i.

is

to

be divided, not into

The primitive
is

adjective is sounded in the nomina-

tive

which

deprived of all inflection and of the last vowel

siny, the

of the base

y
"

of

which appears as

in the

nomi-

native plural masculine, just as iu the definite pronoun,

sini,

" ccerulei,"

sinii, at

coerulei.'"

In order, however, here

fully to

explain the nature and origin of the definite

declension, and not hereafter to be compelled to repeat

what

is

already settled,

it

may

be stated that

its

pro-

nominal defining addition

relative

is identical

with the Sanskrit

base

t(

ya,

in the Lithuanian, in

which is most correctly preserved " which language *ya signifies " he
him").
the
all

iya-m, "to him," ya-me, "in

vis,

The nominative
y an assimilating
i/a (. 135.).

"he"

(for
is

yas),

has given

influence, as

the case with

bases in

The
yes,

feminine, also, is
assimilation,
all

pronounced in the nominative,

yi
for

through

ya;

but

the

genitive

and

the other cases, are easily perceived through

the

declension of ranka,
p. 333.]

"hand," and giesme, "song,"

(p. 169,

[G. Ed.
* Written

from

GJESMfA

Note).

The

ja

in the text.
j^,

This passage furnishes a good reason for

writing the Germanic > by

as haa

been done throughout

this translation.

IN THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

Old Sclavonic has, in
accusative;
all

315

the masculine bases ending with

a vowel, suppressed this vowel in the nominative and

and since the vowel has dropped from the

Sanskrit-Lithuanian base tj ya, ya which, according to(a.). makes one expect yo in the Old Sclavonic, from which, according to (n.), must be formed ye* the y must be

changed into a vowel

hence,

7,

" he,"

"

him," which

must, therefore, on no account be plac-ed together with

the Latin-Gothic
is,

from the base

i.

In the nominaSclavonic pro-

tive singular masculine, however,

this

noun occurs in

all

the three genders, not isolated, but in

sche,

union with the particle

which has preserved

to it

the old relative meaning:

i-sche

means

as well ''qui"

as "quern"; ya-sche, "qu(E"; yu-sche, "

quam"; and ye-sche

"she," and ye, "it,"

"quod."
I
.

Now

as

means

" he,*" ya,

could not imagine

how one

could create the definitive

adjective forms svyaiy-T, svyata-ya, svyato-e (for svyatoye),

accusative svyaty-T, svyafu-yu, svyato-e, in their opposition

to the indefinites svyat{p), svyata, svyato, differently

from

Dobrowsky

(p.

493),

and

perhaps other

grammarians
pronominal
;

before him, have done, namely, by the addition of the

pronoun here under discussion

;f

for this

suffix supplies the place of the article of

other languages

and the Lithuanian language uses the same pronoun

* Hence in the genitive ye-go, dative ye-mu,
loc.

ye-m, the e of which

Dobrowsky wrongly
itself before all

ascribes to flexion, because he

everywhere seeks the

base in the nominative.

However, the base ye has not fully maintained

in i-m,
t/e-m,
'*

terminations beginning with a consonant, but become, in

:

like
i-ch,

manner, shortened to i " eorum," " in iig," for

per turn" and

its,

t-mi "per eos"

&c.

t What Grimm (by Wuk,

not convinced

p. xl.)

remarks against
I,

this declaration has

me ;

least of all

can

for the

above reasons, concede to

him

that the

of vyati/i has
.

any thing
;

to

do with the a oiblinda, "the

blind " (from blindan,

nite declension; and,

140.)

so that svyatyi w^onld belong to the indefito the Sclavonic

defi-

on the other hand, svyat, contrary

to

Grammarians, would be
nite forms.

be removed from the indefinite into the

3IG
for the
as
it is

FORMATION OF CASES
same
object,
i.

e.

equally

in

tlie

emphatic,

or,
;

also termed, definite declension of the adjective

so,

and certainly
tive

that,

through

all cases,

both the adjec-

which precedes and the pronoun which concludes are

declined, while, in the Sclavonic, in

most cases the pronoun

only

is

provided with the inflexions of case, but in some

p. 334.]

[G. Ed.
is still to
(e.)

it

has utterly disappeared, and in others

be recognised in the y for o mentioned above.

^ I

The Sanskrit diphthong u

that after

have found always ren;

dered, in the Old Sclavonic, by ye, in similar forms

so

weakening the ^

S,

to

compensate for
would
"

this,

the semi-vowel

y has made

its

appearance, to which, in
be, according

this union, a particular legitimacy

to (c), to be ascribed.

with

Let pyena,

phina

svyet " light," with

foam," be compared
sveta
;

vyemy,

" I

The most important "cases in ^f^ vidmi. the grammar wth ye corresponding to ^ e are the dual case forms of the feminine and neuter, and those of the
know,'' with

imperative, in accordance with the Sanskrit potential of

the
(y.)

first

conjugation.

The

Sanskrit diphthong

6 (from a
;

+ u)

is

reprefirst

sented in the Old Sclavonic by u (a)

so that the

* Although this vowel

at least,
is

may at times be pronounced short, still this much,

its

certain, that, according to

it

origin

and

its definition, it is
:

long.

In Bohemian

appears in two forms, as au and u

the former

is

pro-

nounced
in

ou,

but the writing points to an older and different pronunciation,

in its place
:

which the a was accurately preserved

whence, however,
it

the u

is

pronounced

short,

cannot be deduced that this short u perhaps

'gr

corresponds to the Sanskrit

or

and Greek

ti,

and that au

is its

intensitive

Guna

but, on the contrary, only the

<r ,
;

u retained

in the in

au

corre-

sponds to the Sanskrit

is

and the u which stands alone

from
is to

Bohemian

a weakening of the au
is left
:

so that,

this,

the concluding element u

alone

etymologically, that

say, the

Bohemian
v.

a, as also u,
(a), only that

answers to the Sanskrit

the former
is

^
:

6,

and also to the Sclavonic

exact,

and without the loss brought about by time. Hence, also, usta (written vsta) " ora " corresponds to the Sanskrit '?ft osh ha, "the lip" more complete, however, is austiie, " by word
phonetically

more

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

317
itself to

element of the Indian diphthong has assimilated

the second, and, in conjunction with
lar
it,
tt

presents a simi(ov),

long vowel,

as,

in the

Greek

two hetero-

geneous vowels, according to pronunciation, have united

tliemselves in a similar measure.

As, according to

(a),

the Indian short a has, in the Sclavonic, mostly

become
be-

short

0,

we must
also (so

consider the

first

element in the diph-

thong u

we

write the a) to be o;

and

it

comes

visible, too, in this form,

when u

is

resolved before
[G. Ed.
p. 335.]

vowels into ov, (compare ^o{f)6 from By,

. 123.),

while the Indian

^ 6 becomes av
go).

before a vowel

(ijf^ gavi
gi
u,

= ^ofly from
to

ift

Now

as, in

the Sanskrit, ? u,

rise

through Guna
stu,

(. 26.),

and sto-shyumi

appears as the future of

in like

so in

the Old Sclavonic,

;

manner, y (cy) is interchanged with u so that bu in bu-du, "I shall be," must pass as the Guna form of by
(in byfi, " to be
"")
:

but

if

a class of nouns, which in the

nominative-accusative terminate in a consonant or in

yerr (see
k.),

exhibit, in

many

oblique cases, the syllable

ov before vowel-endings, this ov

must neither be

consi-

dered, witli Dobrowsky, for an

base,

augment added

to the

nor can

it

be deduced from forms like

si/novi, "

from

a son" (Sanskrit
(a'timi
is

^^

sunav-e,

from simu),

irynov-e,

"sons"

sunav-as), that syn, in the nominative-accustitive,

;

an abbreviation of synu

and that therefore the yerr,

is is

when it is added to or weak remainder

that syv,
"filiu\,"

the form syn,

of u
:

a representative
clear,

but
if

it

from
in

(c),
its

" filium,"

its

final

vowel,

most genuine form, had remained

syny,

to

it,

would sound
the

from

which synov

is

the
ji

Guna

intensitive,

ov of which has arisen from

of

through the influence

mouth"; and even

for vsta
to the
;

is

to

be found uusta (Dobr. Bohm. Lehrg.

p. 4.):

ruA corresponds

Lithnanian ranAa,

"hand"; andA2Mtoth8
hausa
to ^. 783.

Sanskrit

f^ hahsu,
q. v.,

" goose "

for which, according to p. 319. rauka,

was

to

have been expected.

he

distinction
u,

Remark

made between oy

must here, according and & uh.

318
of the

FORMATION OF CASES
vowel following
it,

but

has

remained
with

in

the

genitive plural also, after the ending has been dropped.

Let synov, "filiorum" be

suniv-S
(. 247.)

compared

the Gothic

As,

in

the Sanskrit, the substantive

of the u before the
it

bases in u

adopt the

Guna form
suffix,

vowels of the derivative

that,

so

is
y,

very remarkable
also,

in

the Old Sclavonic bases in

this
its

vowel

appears before certain derivative suffixes in

Guna

form

e. g.

domov-it from

"debtor" from byn

dom (DOMY), house "; binov-at, (BYNY).* Derivative substantives

"

and adjectives in

ov,

ev

(theme

ovo, evo, the latter for

;

yovo, see n.), correspond to the Sanskrit in ^r^ ava

as

VJJ^ pdndav-a (nominative

^TH^
in

as),

"descendant of Pandu";

drtava, "seasonable,''

Old

Sclavonic,
;

from WiJ rHu, "season": so, Adamov, "Adamite," from Adam

not,
ev,

{ADAMY ZARYY).
but

zarev for zaryev, " kingly," from zar (theme

For these formations, therefore, we must

(322,

with Dobrowsky

323),

assume a

suffix

ov or

we must
is

look upon the o alone, which, in the nomi-

native,

suppressed, as the derivative suffix

{ADAMOV-0,
(.
(a.),

ZAREV-0). Through
Cfld Sclavonic

the Vriddhi increase

o,

29.) thej

y becomes av, because

according to

usually corresponds to

hence, from the root

(infinitive), as

by,

"to be," comes the causal

[G. Ed.
p. 336.]

baviti

in the

Sanskrit

m^^H
baviti.

bhdvayitum.
sia, this

But

though

staviti

occurs as the causal of

form

may
still

have arisen in the perverted feeling of the language as an

irregularly analogous word to

In order, then,

more to

establish,

by a few other examples, the representa-

tion of the Indian

find ust, "
*'

o or

av by the Sclavonic
'Wt? dshtha, "lip";

u,

we
"to

mouth," correspond to

sh'&'i

sinister''''

(theme
causal,

SHUYO),

to

v^

savya;

buditi,

awake"

whose primitive bdyeti has entirely

* ])obrowsky supports himself in these cases by calling ov a prefix (p.

329).

IN
lost
" to

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

319
bodhayitum, also

the vowel of the root

to
and

T^vftTrHT

awake/' from

j^

budh, " to

know."

Thus

guhiti is

the causal oi gyh-nu

(1. P.).

sfuditi of styd-nu

(Dobr.

360, 361.); while vyesiti

is

the causal of visyeii (see e), as.

'*

in the Sanskrit, ^^rftnra v^sayifum,

to

cause to

enter,''

from
(fi.)

As
e.g.

f^

vis,

"to go

in."
u,

the nasals* easily resolve themselves into

so

the second element of the diphthong u sometimes also

supplies the place of a nasal in the cognate languages

Tuka,

"a hand," Lithuanian ranka

puty,

Sanskrit

M.^m

panthds,

id^

Latin pons; goluby,

"away," "a dove,"

"

columba

gusy, " a goose,"

hansa.
"

The Polish has

a dove," gansie,
in

preserved the old nasal in golamb,

gosling," gansior,
cases.

" a

gander,"

and

many

similar
in

Hereby the u

in the accusative
for the

of bases

(from

d),

which are
;

remarkably explained
vdinu

most part feminine, is compare vdovu from vdova, " a

Therefore
a.)
;

widow," with ftrvWTR vidhavdm, " viduam.^^

is to

be derived from vdovrt-m for vdnva-m (see

is

so that the a which

weakened

to an o is contracted
u.

with the nasal mark of the case to

This view

is

further

supported by the consideration, that in Polish,

also,

the

corresponding feminine declension marks the

of the base with the
i\

final

vowel

same sign which,

is

in the middle of

word, expresses a nasal, which

governed according
but at the end,

to the

organ of the following

letter,

probably through a corruption of sound, is said to have an equal value with a ringing h. This nasalizing mark
recurs also in the Polish verb, and, indeed, exactly in such a place where one had to expect a nasal, i.e. in
the 1st person singular and 3d person plural; and thus,
in

Bandtke's
e,

second

and

third

conjugation, the

so

marked
the

e.g. in pieke, "I

bake," supplies the place of

am

of the first conjugation, as *

czytam, "

read."

5.783. Remark.


"
;

320

FORMATION OF CASES
has,

The Old Sclavonic

jugations;

however, excepting some anoall

malous remains of an older formation, u in

and, according
to

the consaid,
it

what has

been

admits of no doubt, that in the second part of this diph-

thong

(o

+ u)

the personal character m, and in the

first

part of the diphthong the conjunctive vowel,

is retained.

When

therefore, in the 1st person,

an

corresponds to the

e (e) of nes e-shi, "

thou carriest,"

nes-e-t, "

he carries "

[G. Ed.

p. 337.]

for nesu is for nes-o-u for nes-o-m

from
e,

nes-e-m

it

must be assumed that the conjunctive vowel

u,

before

its

confluence with the

;

which has arisen out of m,

has passed into o

of e and
o,

as in Greek ov arises by the contraction

e into o

through the transition of

relation
is

and

o into

v.

The same
"

to be found in the

Old Sclavonic in

the 3d person

plural, where,

corresponding to nes-e-m,
"

we carry,"
is

nes-e-te, "

ye carry

(comp. \e7-e-Te), the form

it

nesent

expected, but in place of

occurs vesut in sur-

prising accord with the Greek \eyovai for \eyovai from

KeyovTt.

The

Polish has, like the Bohemian, relinquished

the character of the 3d person in the plural, as well as for

the most part in the singular, but everywhere retains, in
the
first,

the old and

more powerful a (^), and marks

this

with the diacritical sign mentioned above, which, in the

middle of a word, supplies the place of a nasal function

thus,
santi,

m,

" they are,"

corresponds to the Sanskrit ?rf^

Sclavonic sut

The Bohemian has

also, in

many

conjugations, retained the old conjunctive vowel a in the

3d person plural, but. like the Sclavonic, permitted the n

to dissolve into

therefore,

in
"),

wezau,

" vehunt

(wpz-e-me, " vehimus" wez-e-te, " vehitis

the u answers to

the n of ^f ftar vahanti, " vehunt,^' and the u which, in Bohemian, is united with an o, is essentially different from
that which stands alone
;

for the latter

(),

answers

to the

Old Sclavonic diphthong u

the latter portion of the
il,

but the former only to

which, in the Old Sclavonic,

u,

never stands alone, at least never occurs as

but as y

(c).


THE OLD SCLAVONIC.
what has been

TN
If,

321

then, through

said, the vocalization of

the

m or

n, whicli is of

such frequent occurrence in the Sclasufficient clearness, it is

vonic,

has been shewn with

remark-

able that conversely, also, the latter portion of the u () has occasionally been hardened into a nasal; and thus hudil, "I
will be," is in Polish bendp (written bedp).
(h.)

d (m) unorganically supplies the place of the Sclavonic H, i.p. in the instrumental of pronouns without gender, and all feminiues; thus,
vdovoy-u, "through the widow," answers to f^M^^yi vidha-

In certain cases an old

vay-d; and toboy-u, "through thee," to

i^^ tway-d. DenoOld Sclavo^|c^iMi"ftT

minatives also, in uyu (1st per.

nic,
"

pres.). in the

correspond to the Sanskrit in ^(T^]f^dydmi, as

I

sabddydmi,
chirdydmi,

sound," from l^T^ sabdn, "a sound,";

hesitate,"

f^i^l^^lfH

"I

from

f^

chira,

"long": thus,

in the Sclavonic, zieluyu, "I greet," "I kiss,"

from

ziel,

(ZIELO), "healthy": vdovuyu from vdova,

p. 372.).

"

widow" (Dobr.

Finally,

words

in iln

{UNO) answer, as it ap^jears,

to the Sanskrit participles of the middle voice, in ana, as

H^(r^ yunjdna, "uniting," from tht^ yuj; so in the Old [G. Ed. p. 338.] Sclavonic, perun, {PERUNO), '^Deus

tonans" from the root per, " to shake

";

** byegun, " runner

(BYEGUNO), from

BYEG

"to run" (Dobr.

p. 289.).

(i.) There are in the Sclavonic alphabet two marks, which

by some are called liUertE aphona, but by Gretsch semivowels I mean the so-called soft yer* and the hard yerr. The former is represented by Gretsch as half U and by
;

his

translator,

Reiff (A 7),

as

answering

to
;

the

tones

mouilles' of French (compare Kopitar,

schal^,

p. 5)

and thus
respec-

"sympathy," and
soft

ogon^,

"fire,"

are,

in

to

the

yer

compared

with the pronunciation of

travail

and cicoyne.

This yer, therefore, denotes a tone

In the original ^*CT", prononnced, howerer, yer ; and hence y has been
sabstituted for J in all that follows.

Editor.

322
which
of a
is

FORMATION OF CASES
rather to be called a y than an
^

i*

and

it

may

be said that in schal^ and ogon

2/

one hears quite as much

with a

as can be heard of this semi-vowel after a conit.

sonant preceding

Hence we mark
it

it

y,

and

write the above words schaly, ogony, Old Sclavonic ogvy.

In the words, too, which end with

in the uniuflected
it

nominative and accusative singular,

oblique cases as a distinct proper y,
zaryu, " regi"

occurs in several
in zarya, " regis^

e.g.

from znry,
it this

"rex," " regem.'"'

On the consonant
its

which precedes
ders
its

ycr has an influence which ren-

pronunciation

more
y,

mild, because

sound
its

is

somewhat broken by the

which throws back

sound.
i

Etymologically the yer corresponds either to a

the cognate languages, as in yesty, " he
e<TTt,

final

of

is

''

(^rfta" asti,

Lithuanian

est'i),

kosty,

"bones"

('^fvn asthi),

or

in the nominative and accusative singular of masculine

substantives and adjectives, to

vowel has dropped

for the
i

a, y ( t{^i/), from which a theme of siny, " coeruleiis,"

concludes neither with

cally

nor with
final

y,

but with yo (euphoni-

w, seen.); whose

vowel, suppressed in the

nominative and accusative masculine, appears, however,

in the feminine sinya, in its extension to a, while the

neuter sine for sinye has rejected the

(k.)

y.
n,

The hard yerr

is

represented by Gretsch as a semi

but by ReifF, more correctly in

my

opinion,

it

is
:

comit is

pared to the French silent

and the Hebrew schva

to "

therefore, to use the expression, equivalent

nothing ";
still

and one cannot perceive of what vowel the small,

perhaps remaining vowel part of it
nants preceding
[G. Ed.
|>.

is

the residue.

Conso-

it

have a stronger and free pronunciation

339.]

and Kopitar
it

(p. 5) tells

us that they are

it

pronounced before
is

sharp, and without echo, and that

for this reason called the hard yerr, and not on account
its

of

own

pronunciation.

We

require, therefore, in the

* In the Carniolan dialect this sound has mostly disappeared; but

where

it

has remained

it is

also written

by a

j/ ;

as,

kony. " horse."


IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

no
substitute
it

323
mark, and

Roman
logically,

character,

for this

Dobrowsky
pressed

also on its

at the

end of words.
always
an

Etymonor, as

however, this yerr always represents a sup-

mute vowel, only not

conjectures (in
p.

o,

Grimm

his valuable
u.

Preface

to

Wuk's

Servian Gramra.

xxxrv) a

Rather, each of the

three short fundamental vowels

a (as represented also

y, o),
;

by

0, e),

i,

w,

(for

which

may

stand

is

very

fre-

quently dropped at the end of words

7

and although the

is

seldom entirely suppressed, more generally throwing

its

back
after

sound as

y,

nevertheless the vowel suppressed

in

the

m
by

of rabo-m, "per servum," and

yerr,
i.

Russian
the

replaced

is

clearly,

as

we gather from
the whole

Lithuanian, an
(/.)

I* believe

may

assert, that in

extent of
least

the
all

structure
the

of the Sclavonic of its no. in

after

language, at

iu

conditions

and verb, not a single

be pointed

final

consonant occurs

which some termination,

which, through the cognate languages can

out as beginning with a vowel, has not been dropped.

Thus, the base

plural,
is,

NEBES,
nebes,

"caelum," forms, in the genitive

likewise
Sanskrit,

but

the

vanished

termination
" cceloe.

in

^W dm
(ve^e(o-)a)v),

(TT?rR

nabhasdm,

rum"), Greek uv

Latin um, Gothic

The

real final consonants,

however, which, in the truly-pre-

served elder dialects of the Indo-European family, stand

as the foundation of the word,

have utterly disappeared

in Sclavonic polysyllables;

e.

g.
;

in the

nominative plural,

e (e)

from ^w as, ej- is formed, and synov-e answers to

consonants

forms
(m.)

As

like ?r*T^T? sunav-as, (Sorpv-e^.

far

as regards

the writing of those

which, in the Sclavonic alphabet, properly correspond to

the

Roman, we express the sound

our

of the

French j

{zivvtie,
sch, that

in the Carniolan sh), as in of

Zend
by

(. 65.),

by
in

German

sch

= ^)
2

sh

as

Sanskrit

* Cf. $.783. Remark.

; ;

324
and
also

'

FORMATION OF CASES
in

as,

Sanskrit,

the fsch

by

ch:

for

tlie

sound of the Greek ^ { ds) we retain (, and use z for the sound of our German z { = is): for 5^ we write ch. In
regard to etymology,
to
it

is

important to
to

call

attention

the

relation

of this

letter

sibilants,

by means
to

of

which

snocho,

"daughter-in-law,"
snushd.

corresponds
in

the

Sanskrit

^(m

Ch

also,

declension
into s

and conjugation before

[G. Ed.
p. 340.]

certain

vowels,

passes

(Dobr. pp. 39, 41), and in

some cases
I

into sh (Dobr. 41.).

Finally, in preterites like dach, "

gave," dachom, "

whence

it

(^ 2) has proceeded, in the cases where a personal

s
s,
t

we gave,"

the ch returns to the

ending beginning with a

follows it;

hence, daste,

"ye
the

gave"

dasta,

"ye two" and "they two gave."*

As

vowels exercise a multifarious influence in the trans-

formation of gutturals preceding them, we

will further reitself in

mark

that the ch

under discussion maintains

H,

the
;

3d person plural before

but before a appears as sh

hence, dosha or dachii, " they gave."

(n.)

I'For the

gives the Greek

semi- vowel y (xi^ y) the Cyrillian alphabet in the cases for which the /, excepting

inventor of the character has provided

letters

by particular

set together according to their value, which, at

the same time, express the

that
is

y with

the following vowel

letters.
It

to say,

ya

is

never written by two

would, however, for this reason, be

wrong
it

to

assume a
ye, also,

vowel ya, as
still

this

syllable,
itself

however

may

be written,

always unites in

two sounds.

For

* Dobrowsky has, however, as

i

it

appears to me, not perceived the

rref ragable

connection between the ch of dach and the s of daste, for he

considers the ch

and

ste,

&c. as personal terminations (pp. 264. 383. 397)

t

and hence he nowhere informs us that ch before

this subject

passes into

s.

More on

when we come

to the verb.

t The vowels mentioned here, preceded by y, are, with the exception of ye, and "fe ye, nasalised vowels (see . 783. Remark) ; and hence pyaty,
must be pronounced /ja<^
(in the original cliaracter

"five,"

llATb).

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

by a simple
an
sign,
/.

325
yil is

Cyril has provided

and

expressed
in

by an
to

o in conjunction with

But y often appears

" I

Sclavonic as a
the

dialectic addition

before vowels foreign

cognate

languages.

Compare yesmy,

am,"

yam

{for

yadmy), "1

eat," pyaty,

"&ve," desyalyj "ten,"

yedin, " one," with the corresponding Sanskrit forms, 05771^

admi, panchan, damn, adi (primus).

is,

An
(.

which follows

in

accordance with similar forms which

137.

we have
p. 174,

observed in the Zend and Lithuanian

Note*), changed into e
tlirough

and

the influence of a

preceding

it.

In like manner, in accordance with the

the y, after
itself
it

Zend and Lithuanian,

vowel following
left
it,

has assimilated a

has often
effect,

disappeared, and has

its

behind only

its

and thereby the proof of

former existence.*

garding this form,

consonants
is

Dobrowsky does not express himself with when he says (cap. II. ^. iii.)
changed into
e.

sufficient

clearness re-

that

after

y and liquid
that,

According to

this,

one would believe

besides y, certain other consonants had the j)ower of changing xn o follow-

ing
I

tbem

into

e.

Dobrowsky understands

know, he nowhere expressly says

softer pronunciation
1

which, however, as far as under '^consoiue liquidce," those

no consonant
is

which, inconsequence of a following i/er

and

(y), have retained a more flowing while he calls the consonants without yer " con-

soruB solidce" (comp.

c. p.

267)

so that

by nature and

of itself alone liquid, but receives this quality through a following yer
(a y without a vowel).

Thus, in Dobrowsky's second masculine declen-

sion, the consonants r, ch,

and

(,

in zary, "king," vrachy, "physician,"

and knya(y, "prince," are

raental

liquid.

But

as these words in the instme for o

form zarem, brachem, kr.yn^em, Dobrowsky ascribes the

consonant
;

to the influence of a liquid

while, according to mj" opinion, the

into

consonants in these forms have no concern whatever in transforming

e,

but for zarem, &c. zaryem must originally have stood.

1/

And

as in this

form the

is

the fuU semi-vowel, not entirely without a vowel sound, and

jrer

therefore not the expression of the

without a vowel which softens the

consonant preceding
also, in

it

as in the

abbreviated nominative sary

so the r
nowhere
stated

zaryem, was not liquid, and has not, according to

;

my
1

opinion, beit

come liquid after fhe dropping of the semi-vowel

at least,

find

326
[G. Ed.
to
p. 341.]

FORMATION OF CASES
256.

We

must now,
first

in order to be able

compare the true

case-suflBxes of the

Old Sclavonic with

endeavour
to ascer-

those of the cognate languages,

of

all

tain the final letter of the kinds of base which occur, as they

have for the most part been rubbed off in the singular nominative, whence it has appeared as if these letters,

where they again present themselves in the oblique cases, either belonged to the case termination, or were an addition equally foreign to the base and to the termination, which has
been termed "augment" by Dobrowsky.
[G. Ed.
p. 342.]

After becoming

acquainted with the true base, the case ter-

minations assume, in

many points, an

entirely different shape

(p. 460),

from what Dobrowsky has represented

with

whom

we cannot concede
or
e,

to the neuter a nominative termination

but perhaps the advantage of having preserved, in prefinal

ference to the masculine, the

ease.

vowel of the theme in this

to

For the practical use of the language, and

keep

simply within the limits of the Sclavonic language,

notwithstanding, be assumed as inflexion which

all

might,
usually

is

represented as such.

It is

not,

however, here our object

to consider those syllables as supplying the place of

grambe so

matical relations which present themselves to the feeling

of the

speaker as such, but only those which

may

traced through the history of the language, and which, for

thousands of years, have subsisted as Grammatical forms.

257.

To

the masculine and neuter

bases in

a corre-

spond, in the Old Sclavonic as well as in Greek, bases in

o,*

which vowel has disappeared in the nominative and

and other consonants, in forms
like

stated that the r

zarem, knya^evi,

golubem, lebedem, are differently pronounced from what they are in pirom,
vo^om, hbom^ adorn, of Dobrowsky's first masc. declension.
in the
letter

The difference
last

two

classes of words is only this, that the

former have at/ for the

but one of their theme, which, by the power of assimilation, has

e,

changed the following o into

not again become
*
o.

which

e, after the

y has been dropped, does

Dialectically the older a has, in certain cases, maiutaiued itself, as iu

TN
accusative

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

so

327

singular:

the

corresponding a has disap(as

peared in Gothic, except in the neuter

"cosium," in contrast with
blind'-s^

Gothic blinda-ta,
it

"cacus"}:

has also

maintained

itself

frequently in the beginning of compounds

to the oldest

in the Gothic
principle, the

and Old Greek, where, ac-cording

naked theme
is

required
as

as, nov,

"

novus"
"

appears in

many compounds
is

novo

{novo-grad,

new-

town

"),

but

then not to be considered as the neuter

as the

vovo, "

novum" but

commo theme

[G. Ed.

p. 343.1

of the masculine and neuter, in which as yet no difference of

sex

is

pointed out.

The

clearest proof that the class of

nouns

under discussion corresponds to the Indian, Lithuanian, and

Gothic nouns in
(for
a, is

afforded by their feminine bases in a

" servant,"

form rab (for rabo), corresponds a feminine raba, "a maid": that is to ^T
a);

so that to the

say, all

Old

Sclavonic primitive adjectives,

i.

e.

those with an indefinite

declension, correspond to the Sanskrit in as, d, a-m,

o-s",

Greek

rj{a), 0-1',

Latin us,

a,

u-m; much as one might be led

astray by outward appearance to seek in the adjectives, which

in the in
e,

nominative masculine end in y

sjht/,

(yer),

and in the neuter

as

" cceruleus," syne, " caeruleum"

miti-s, mite,

an analogy

to

Latin adjectives like

258.
tioned,

But

recognise in adjectives like that just

menwith-

and in similarly-constituted substantives, as knya^y,

"the sea," bases of such a nature
.

"prince,'' more,

as,

out the euphonic form mentioned at

255.

(n.),

must have

terminated in yo, whence ye masculine

and hence, in the nominative

in the neuter e retaining

according

to the suppression of the final vowel

of the base, y in this case

and
?i

the vowel and dropping the y.

These bases, therefore,

correspond to the Indian in

ya, the

Greek and Latin

in

the Camiolan, before all inflections beginning with

bers, as posla-m,

in the three

num-

"through the domestic," posiz-ma "the two domestics." This word appears to be identical with xj^ putra^ " son," Persian pisar "aaa," " boy," ** young man," and to owe its meaning to familiar address.

328
to,

FORMATION OF CASES
;

iu (dyio-^, ayio-v, aociu-s, prceliu-m)

that

is to say,

serdze

(nominative and accusative

the

neuter), " heart,"

is

corresponds to
neuter.

Sanskrit

^^^

hridaya-m, which

likewise

The

feminines, again, afford a practical proof of the jus-

tice of this theory, for the Sclavonic bases in

ya correspond

to the
ia);

and

Sanskrit feminine bases in in yd Greek la, Latin this form, in the uninflected nominative, stands

sinya, "caerulea" to siny, " cceruleus,^*

opposed to the masculine termination y and neuter e, as and sine, '^ cob ruleum"
[G. Ed.
p. 344.]

When an
y

or other vowel precedes the

last

y but one
masculine

of the base, the

is

in the nominative,
e;

and accusative
'^

changed into the vowel

as, vyetii,

nepos ex

soTore* (Dobrowsky, p. 282).

The corresponding feminine

form
i

is iva,

of the

form

and the neuter w, the y of which has arisen from iye, which is to be supposed the original, after
last

dropping the

y but

one.

To the

Sanskrit ^^TH savya-s,

^fnm savyd, V^**^ savya-m {sinister,

shui, shuya, shue

a, urn),

correspond thus

(compare Dobrowsky,

p. 285).

259.

The Old
:

Sclavonic masculine and neuter bases in yo,*

are,

with their feminines in ya,

of four kinds

according to their origin,

1.

savya, both the semi-vowel

Those in which, as in SHUY0=W3j and the vowel following, from

case
is
i,

the earliest period of the language, belong to the base of

the
2.

word

and

this

perhaps
to

the

most

rare.

Such as originally end in

;

which an unorganic o
i,

has been added

as, in

the Lithuanian, the bases in

ia (ie)
(.

in

many
and

cases,

change into the declension in

193.

p. 171,

Note*).

To

this class belongs

MORYO,

nom.

more, " the sea," the e of which therefore differs widely from
* "Where
I

fix

the theme,
I

leave the euphonic law contained in

$.255. (n.) unregarded, and

give

SERDZJO
is i.e.

aa the

theme of serdze

(" heart," nom.

ace.),

although the latter

no other than the theme

without inflection, as in
iit

modified according to that euphonic law,

the Sanskrit vdch
is

laid

down

as the theme, although ch cannot stand

vdfc,

the end of a word, but passes into k, as in the nominative

properly identical with the thimc.

which

is

IN
the mare in
Latin,

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

corrupted

329
;

from mari
its

so

that the

Sclavonic y, which again

makes

appearance in the genispoken

tive morya, dative moryu, corresponds to the Latin e

of.

The Latin word must, however,

Neuter bases in
z,

in

order to

be

classed with the Sclavonic, be pronounced in the nominative

mariu-m.
Are

without an unorganic augment.

[G. Ed.
p.

entirely wanting in the Sclavonic.

345.]

Among
(theme

the masculines of this class of words cheny, "a

worm"
krimi

CHER}1[0), answers

to

the

Sanskrit

oTpiT

and the Latin

iyaty

FERMI,

Old High German,

to

WURMI /and
ifrfff

{{JATYO),

"gener"

the

Sanskrit

jdtU

feminine, "famiUa,^' " genus,^" from aH^/on, "to be bom.*'

The

third kind of bases in yo

final
.
o,

is

that

where the unorganic y

corresponds to
In the fourth

precedes a

according to the euphonic disposition

(n.).

mentioned in
the Indian

255.

So

gu<iy

(GUSYO)

hansa,

" goose "

(. 255. g.).

place there exist

among

bases in yo the words in which the

as well as the following

vowel

is

an unorganic addition.
correspond to the

Thus fnouns
Sanskrit in

of agency in

TARYO
in
ryjp,

irr tar (cT tri,

in the strong cases ttk tar,) to the

reap;

Latin in

idr,

and

to the

Greek

hence

tlie

nomi-

natives my-tary, schi-tary, and ^latary (Dobrowsky,p. 295), and,

with

for

a,

pas-iyry, "shepherd."

Of
/

this kind, also, are

the nouns of agency in

TELYO,
(. 20.),

the

of which

is

clearly

an interchange with r
forms
itself to

so that this suflSx also con-

the Sanskiit

ur;

far; hence the nominatives

blago-dyetely, "benejicus" pye-tely,

jnje,

"a

cock,"
**

from the root

saJvatixr.^^

"to sing," schntely, " messor," spas-i-tely, and

* ( frequently answers to the Sanskrit

ai j,

for

example ^jna^

"to know,"

is in

the Sclavonic Cfto (infinitive Cnati).

5.

+ But see p. 879. Note

I

647.
ft*,

As

these words stand in analogy with the infinitive in

in so far

that their suffix b<^gins with a like consonant,

derives

them from the

and

infinitive,
it

Dobrowsky (pp.292, 293) and allows them simply ely as sufiBx (as
has been the custom to derive
also, in

also simple

ary for iary), as

titrus

the

Latin, tor

from the supine.

However,

it

is

certain

the

330
260.

FORMATION OF CASES
To the Sanskrit feminine bases in ^t d correspond been already remarked, Old Sclavonic in a. To
p. 346.]

as has

[G. Ed.

this class of words,

however, belong also

some masculines,
116.),

particularly proper names,

which are then

declined entirely as feminines, as in Latin nauta, coelicola ,&c.

(.

on which we
i

will

not here dwell further.

Among

the bases in

there are, in

Old Sclavonic, no neuters, and only

a very small

number

of masculines

as

in

Lithuanian
as

which

Dobrowsky,

p. 469,

represents

as anomalous,

though they were only irregulars of his second declension

masculine
this
:

they are, however, in reality, foreign to

it,
i,

for

very reason, that they end their theme with

(. 263.).

but
only

the former with yoy and in part with yy,

in the nominative
classes

It is

and accusative singular that these three of words, from various reasons, agree and, gosfy,
;

"guest," from

GOSTl*

(Gothic

GJSTI,

Latin

HOSTI)

agrees with knyniy, "prince," from

" medicus,"

KNYA^YO,

and vrachy,
bases origi-

from

VRACHYY.

The masculine
i

nally ending with n

there are

but a few of them

;

form

most of their cases from a base augmented by

" stone " (Sanskrit

KAMEN,

^:^H^ asman),

is

extended to

KAMENI
correspond

and then
261.

follows

GOSTL
^
e

To

the Sanskrit feminine bases in

of a
is

numerous Old Sclavonic bases

(Dobrowsky,
decl. fern, iv.)
;

similar termination

that

to say, the Sclavonic

agrees with the Sanskrit in the formation of feminine abthe suffixes

TOR,
t

TURU and the

first

Sclavonic

TARfO, TELYO,

used to

borrow their
mencing.

not at

from another syllable of formation so com-

They form

primitive words from the roots themselves, and not

derivatives from other words.

* Thus, also, PtJTI, "away" (Sanskrit nftpf pathin), and

LJUDI, pi.

num, nom.

lyudy-e, "people," Gothic

to

LA UDI, nom. lauthn, "a person," the

represented by w (y), and, according

au of which, according
pati, Lithuan

|Ji.255. {/.), is

to$.266. (i.),has gained a prefixed y.

PATJ axid Gothic

theme

GOSPODI, "a master" (comp. Tjfjf FADI) is in fact irregular, as it passes

into several kinds of

its

declension.

; ;

IN
stracts in Tl, as

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

331

PA-MYA-Tl, "memory," nom. pamyaty,

in Sanskrit irfw mati (for rwan/i), from the root " spirit," " meaning," from JHf man, " to think "* (compare [G. Ed. p. 347.] memini). These words weaken, indeed, in the nominative and accusative, their i to yer, but in no case

MAN, as

overstep their original base by an unorganic addition

and

hence they must not,

on any account, be looked upon as of the

of masculines terminating simi-

same base with the majority

larly

in

the

nominative

and accusative singular.

is

But

Dobrowsky's third feminine declension

{zerkovy, " a church
")
:

of a

mixed nature

in this

we

recognise

some words

which have, by Guna, changed a Sanskrit final ^ u to ot? and from this form several cases, as from a base ending with
a consonant e.y.
?erAu;-e,

genitive singular and nominative

plural but so that the

tions.

o is

suppressed before vowel termina-

In
i,

some
in

cases the
;

theme extends
and
also

itself

by an unexten-

organic

others by a

before
is

these

sions of the base the o of the syllable ov

e.

suppressedt
zerkvii,
eccleaiis,**

g.

zerkviy-u,

" per

ecclesiam" zerkvi,

" ecclesia"

"

ecdesiarum" zerkva-m, " ecclesiis" zerkva-ch, "in

zerkva-mi,

"per
this
it

ecclesias."

The dative

locative zerkvi is

doubtful, as
zerkvi,

case could have

no other sound than

whether

come from

ZERKOV or from ZERKVI.

Dobrowsky (p. 355) imputes, in my opinion wrongly, the n of pomyami, " I remember," and some similar bases, to derivation, instead of
supposing that the radical n
Sanskrit,
is

snppressed before

t,

in analogy with the

tati-s,

and

as, in

Greek, rdais from TAN, Sanskrit u Tam

"a line"

(as extended), for

'hOhW tanti-s, t The example given by Dobrowsky, zerkory, " a church," nevertheless does not apply to monosyllables, as krovy, "blood" (Sanskrit Jgsikravya^
neuter, "flesh"), nor to those polysyllables in which

precede the syllable oo

ticable (comp. Gretsch
to

for yatrvach
Reiff, p.

by

two consonants and krvuch would be equally imprac163). Brovy, " eyebrow," also appears

form

all its cases

from a theme

BROFJ,
i,

an eitension of the Sanskrit

)j bhru, feminine,

by the addition of
is

with a

Guna

of the gi u.

The

nominative plural

hence brovi (Dobrowsky,

p. 115),

not brov-e.

332

FORMATION OF CASES
of this class

Some words
" sucrus"
(.

have, in the nominative,

y,

and
with

[G. Ed. p. 348.]

thus svekry agrees

c.};

with Hj^lt swasru-s,

vi,

255.
;

others have, at will, ovy or

zerkvi.
i;)

o suppressed

hence zerkovy or

262.

Among

bases in u (Greek

of the cognate

lan-

guages only masculines have maintained themselves in the

Old Sclavonic.
final

They, like the bases in

o,

suppress their

vowel in the nominative and accusative, but in the

this letter
(.

remaining cases
255. c);

shews
/.),

itself either

with

Guna
o

changed to ov or u
(.

255.

or without Guna, as
it

and in the

latter

form

appears also in the

beginning of compound words as a naked theme.

it is

Hence

more

probable, that anciently for syn, "filius" "^lium"

(.

stood syno rather than syny

lar
is

255.

c.).*

With

this simim, it

conformation of theme of the old bases in a and

not surprising that two kinds of bases, which in their

origin are widely different, run very

in the Sclavonic declension
dialects, these
;

much

into one another

and

that, in the

more modern

two declensions, which were originally so

have
fallen almost entirely into one.

strictly separate, 263.

As

in the o bases which have arisen from

^ a,

a y

preceding introduces a difference of declension, which we,

. 258., have represented as purely euphonic, the same phenomenon makes its appearance also in the y bases, by means of which their Guna form is articulated ev (for yev) instead

in

We

term this

class of words, nevertheless, bases in

still,

yj

for

although

their final letter never occurs as y,

according to

^.

225. (c),

is

the

most legitimate, even

3" u.

if it

be the most rare, representative of the Sanskrit

o,

But should

it

be wished to call them bases in

they would not be

distinguished from the order of words, which, according to 257., bear

this

name with more

right.

The term u

bases

would be appropriate only

so far as here, under the u,

(etymologically

=^

6),

might be understood, not the Old Sclavonic but the Sanskrit T or the Latin u of the

fourth declension, which, in the Old Sclavonic, has no real existence.

IX
of ov.*
If,

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

we
di[G. Ed.
p.

333
349.]

however, with Dobrowsky,

vide the Old Sclavonic masculines

bases in
sire, as
i,

"

witli the exception of the

260.

into two declensions, and in doing

ground the division on the

this de-

is

natural, to

final letters

of

the bases,

we must place knya(y, Dobrowsky 's second declension in the first, and by the on the other band, the words of rab, " a servant"
:

prince" (nominative) of
side
syn,

" son,"

and dom,

" a house," of

Dobrowsky's
to

first

masculine

declension

must be transferred

the

second declension

as mutilated y forms.

Of

the paradigma here given

by

Dobrowsky, vrachy,
ev to the
like zary,

'*

medicus," adheres most strictly to the

.

true y declension, and, according to

oi;

255.

(;?.),

opposes

of

SYNY.

On

the other hand, words inflected

"a king" (nominative), clearly form the nomihence zary e, native and genitive plural from bases in i
;

"kings," zarit,
spites,^''

"of kings," from

"

ZARI ;

as gosty-e, "ho-

and

gostii,

hospitum" from

GOSTI.

In the dative
is

plural and instrumental singular the

ful
:

form zare-m

doubtit

in this

and other words,

also, of

obscure origin,

rei,

mains uncertain whether the more contracted theme

or the more extended in yy,
that several old
i

in

is

the older; but

it

is

certain

bases have migrated into this declension

for instance, ogvy, " fire" (noni.),

by an unorganic addition;
dative ognev-i, from
agni, Latin

OGNYY,

agrees with the Sanskrit mfnj

It

IGNI, Lithuanian UGNI.\

[G. Ed.

p. 350.]

* Without Guna, the

($.

255. n.)
little to

as

final of the base is pronounced e for ye from yo and hence, in the cases without Guna the yy bases are just be distinguished in their inflection from the yo bases, as, in

the instrumental singular, syno-m (from the theme

SYNY) from
also,

rabo-m

In the beginning of compound words, end like those in yo, with e for ye.

(theme

RABO).

the yy bases

+ As regards words inflected like mravii, the only proof which could bring them imder the head of the y bases is the vocative sing, mruviyu that they, however, although they have borrowed this case from the
declension, originally belong to

the a declension,

is

proved by their

feminine in iya and neuters in iye or ye (Dobrowsky, p. 282).

334

FORMATION OF CASES
more modern

(leserves here to be further remarked, that in the

dialects of the Sclavonic stock, the

two masculine declensions

here spoken of have been transfused almost entirely into one,

which has taken several cases regularly from the old u

declension, in which, however,

from the point of view of

in

the

more recent

dialects,

e.g.
ov,

the

genitive plural of

the Polish and Carniolan,

case termination.

ow, form an exception as a

also,

In the Old Sclavonic,

rab (theme

HABO), "a
a theme

servant,"
(for

may
:

optionally form several cases from

;

MAB Y

rabu)

and for

rab,

" servorum,"

we
of

may
this

also
class

have rabov
of words

and
find

in the nominative plural

also
ov-e,

we

according to the
adjective

analogy of synov-e.

On

the

other

hand, the

masculine o bases (the indefinites) of the y declension have admitted no irregular trespassings any more than the
pronouns.
264. Bases ending in a consonant are, under the limitation of
.

260., entirely foreign to the masculine:

es,

on the
at (yaf),

other hand, there are neuter bases in en,

and

T/hich are important for the system of declension, because

commencing with a vowel, divides itself so much the more distinctly from the base ending with a The bases in en correspond to the Sanskrit consonant.
the case sufSx,
in ^snr an, and

have preserved,

too, in

the

uninflected

nominative, accusative, and vocative, the old and more powerful

a,

but with the euphonic prefix of a y (see

255.
.

n.),

and with the suppression of n of the base

All of

(see

139.).

them have an

before the termination en;

full

so that

men

is

to be considered as the

formative

suffix of the

word, which answers to the Sanskrit r^ man c. g. in oiw^ karman neut., " deed " and to the Latin men ; that is to say,

STEMEN
mutilation

(nominative syemya, " seed," from the base syo)

answers to the Latin se-men;

of

and imen, "a name,"

is

a
es

tTfni ndman, " nomen.^^

The bases
in
as,

in

answer to the

Sanskrit

neuter

bases

as

nebes,

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

fTTO

335
[G. Ed. p. 351,]

"heaven," Sanskrit
cluding
the e to

nabhas.

In the

nominative, accusative, and vocative, they relinquish the cons

(according to
(.

235.

/.),

and afterwards strengthen

255.

a.).

We cannot, therefore, any longer

o,

com-

pare the o of nebo with the Sanskrit-Zendian

arisen out of a

which has

+ u.

As

in this abbre%-iation of es to o the

neuter es bases in the cases mentioned become similar to the

bases, it is

then

on account of the influence of these

shews in the oblique cases as
in itself deficient,
is

cases,

and because the nominative principally gives the tone in

the declension, and
tion that
inflec-

which

it

is

then,

we

say,

not surprising,

if

the original o bases at times admit an es

in the oblique cases, particularly

when we

consider the ori-

ginal great extension of these neuter bases terminating in

(compare
words,

241.),

which induces the conjecture, that

many
that

now
is

declined as o bases, were originallv domiciled in

es.

the bases in

On

the other hand,

es

Dobrowsky proves
from
("
.

there

no admixture of
It
is

in the thoroughly legitimate

clear,

adjective o bases.

also

255.

(/.),

that

the bases in ynt* in the uninflected cases

must

lay aside

the

t,

and follow

ac^fia,

not

m^

mahai

magnum'^) and

capvt.

265.

Of

the class of words in r mentioned in

144.

two

feminine words have remained in the Old Sclavonic which

derive most of their cases

from the genuine

r bases, but
i,

in others increase the original base also

by an unorganic
.

or

h\ya (compare

the Lithuanian in

144.): in the

nomi-

native singular, however, in accordance with the Sanskrit and

Lithuanian, they suppress the r. These are, mati, " mother," and dshchi, "daughter"; in the latter only occurs the increase
of the base by ya (in the nominative accusative and dative
plural) ; the declension of the

former springs

[G. Ed.

p. 352.1

* They are all derivatives from names ol young of the animal mentioned.

^nimi^lR^

and denote the

330
partly from
(/xdrep-es-),

FORMATION OF CASES

MATER,
order

e.

g.

mater-e,

" matris,"

and matres

partly from

MATERI,
to

e.g. maferVi

"matrem."

266. *In
cases, the

now

pass over to the formation of

lost

nominative and accusative have

the casea,

signs

and m, with the exception of the bases in

(a),

which

present in the diphthong u

a contraction of the vocalized

o,

nasal with the final vowel of the base shortened to

.

(see

255. g.);

hence voM,

"

aquam" from

vodo-u.

The

instru-

mental has, in the feminine, and the pronouns which have

no gender preserved the genuine Sanskrit inflection; but it is to be remarked of the feminine bases in i that they change this vowel before the termination <i, (for d, see
.

255.

h.),

not into simple

y,

but into iv;

so that in this
closely with

respect the

Old Sclavonic agrees

the

more

the

Pali, which, in

corresponding class of words, changes

all

the

final

before

the vowel endings into

let kosfiy-u,
tj'tfrnn

iy,

than with

the Sanskrit.

Hence,

from KOSTI, "bones,"

be compared with the Pali

for the Sanskrit
77it

pitiy-d (from piti, " joy")

for

Masculines and neuters have their instrumental ending; and this is, I have no

v\w prify-d.

doubt, an abbreviation of the Lithuanian mi, and comes there-

ore from
267,

bi (. 215.).

The dative has,

in the singular, a

common ending with

i

the locative, and, in fact, the Old Sanskrit

imen-if "in nomine,"

(.

IS 5.); hence,

and " nomini";

and
is
il,

synov-i, "Jilio," hrachev-i,

"medicor
Guna.J
f G.

from

SYNY
becomes
"Jilio*''

BRACHfY

(^.263.),

with

If the case-sign

suppressed, the preceding ov

Ed. p. 353.]

and ev (from yov) becomes y^

hence, also, synH,

with synov-i, and zaryd, " regi" with

* Cf. $.783. t For m, according

I

to

Dobrowsky, we should read

disposed, contrary to
.

Mb my,
assume
for

Hence

am now
common

177., to

the

Lithuanian a
condition
ciise in

origin for the

two

cases,

although in their received

is

they are externally separated from one another, as

also, in several classes of words.

the

Old Sclavonic,

:;

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

337
ti,

the y bases, but prefer, however, the abbreviated form

hence rahu, from

RABO, more
o bases,

rarely rabov-L

The

o bases

of the adjectives, and of these

line

there are, in the mascu-

and neuter, only

have alone the

and those of neuter substan*

tives
blayii,

uninflected
sinyu,

form
*'

in u;

hence, e.g.

"bono" masc. neut;

In

coeruleo,"

masc. neut.

slovu,

"verbo" moryu, "mari": not blagov-i,

sinev-i, slovov-l,

morev-i.

masculine
in

names

of inanimate
itself also

things

this

uninflected form

u extends

to

the genitive

and locative; hence domu, "of the house," "to" and "in
the house
":

but in the dative

is

also found domov-i,

and in

the locative domye.* culine

The pronouns

of the 3d person

mas-

and neuter

with

exception of the reflexive

have

in the dative, in

like

manner, the uninflected H; for the

this," is clearly

form

mu

in to-mu, " to

from the Sanskrit

appended pronoun V{ sma (. 165. &c.). which has extended itself in the cognate European languages so much, and
under such different forms, and
dropping the
this,

in the Old Sclavonic,

would necessarily give the base

s,

SMO, from
mti,

which, after
as rabu from

would come the dative

o bases, as has

RABO.
268.

While the

been shewn above, have

borrowed their dative from the y declension, the y bases appear, in the locative, to have intruded on the o class
for synye answers
(.

to

rabye,

from
is,

RABO
vrike

from
.

RABA
255.
(<=),

255.

a.)

but the ye of rabye

clearly

from the Sanskrit ^

^ of

according to

from

vrika,

[G. Ed. p. 354.] and answers to the Lithuanian wUke from WILKA (. 197). As, however, in Lithuanian, from SUNU

comes sunu-ye, so may

also the

Old Sclavonic synye require

* Masculine names of inanimate things

all

follow the declension of

dom

(theme

DOMY), although very few among them, according to their origin,

the class of the old

tali into

^ ,

i.e.

of the Latin fourth declension, but

for the most part correspond to Sanskrit bases in

^ a.


338

FORMATION OF CASES
:

to be divided into syn-ye

and

this is

rendered the more pro-

bable, as the feminine a bases, also, have in the locative ye

for a-ve;

hence vod-ye,

" in aqua,'^

from VODA, answers

to

the Lithuanian ranko-ye (for ranka-ye) from ranka*

in
i,

In bases

masculine and
i,

feminine,

it

might appear doubtful

e. g.

whether
the

with which they end in the dative and locative

way,"
kosti,

pufi, " in the

" in

the bone "

:

is to

be ascribed

to

theme or

to the

inflection
i,

as,

however, in the

genitive, (to which belongs an

inflection),

though not through any

they have just the same sound, and otherwise

i

never entirely give up the

strumental plural,
it is

of the base, except in the in-

more

natural to consider the forms

puti, kosti, uninflected, just like

domu, "in the house."

We

may
else

also look

upon the

in the dative
last letter
;

and locative of those

but one, as nothing

bases,

which have y as the

knya^i, mori, brachi,

the i, therefore, of than the vocalization of this y voli, represents nothing else than the v

of the

masculine bases

the neuter
269.
In

MORYC,

and feminine

KNYAi:YO, VRACHJY, and VOLYO.

termiuations
as,
os,
is,

of

the genitive the

which
but the

in the cognate languages, are joined to bases ending with a

consonant, must, according to

[G. Ed.
p.

255.

(/.),

drop the

s,

365.]

vowel appears as
(.

e in all

the bases ending

with a consonant

260. 264.): hence imen-e, "of the name,"

It

must be allowed that here occurs the very weighty

objection, that

the f minine form rankoye in the Lithuanian, and vodye in the Sclavonic,

jihwdy-dm

might stand in connection with the Sanskrit ^rnTPT cydm in fuS^TTTT^T the m, as the Zend {). 202.), ( ). 202.) ; so that, after dropping

the preceding vowel, which in the Zend

the enphonic influence of the
Lithuanian,
y,

is

already short, would, through

e.

become

As

the bases in

in the

down

to

a few exceptions, are feminine, so might also awiye

into awiy-e,

from

aivi-Sy

" a sheep," be divided

and compared with ml]J^

maty-dm, from mati or f^milf bhiy-dm from

for ko8ty-u, from

bhi (comp. in $.266. kostly-u^

KOSTI).

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

ndmn-as, nomin-is
;

339
nebes-e,

answers

to

hihh

" of the

heaven," to *TH^ra nabhas-as, ve^e((r)-oy; muier-e to matr-is,

nrfrpo^.

The pronominal forms

" mei^
teb-e,

also follow this analogy

"sui,"

men-ey

"

tui,*"

seb-e,

because,

in

the

oblique singular cases,

MEN, TEB, SEB

are their themes.

We

recognise the fuller Sanskrit genitive ending

^ sya in
easily

the pronominal genitive termination go, as to-go

(. 188.).

= fl^ ta-sya

This comparison might alone be

is

sufficient in place

of all proof; but, over and above,

to be

remarked the

adopted hardening of the semi-vowel y to g (comp. p. 121 G. ed.), and in the Prakrit to "^ j (. 19.) ; finally, let the

high degree of improbability be considered, that the Sclavonic

should have formed an entirely
foreign to
all

new

genitive

termination,
the g of the

the cognate languages.

is

Now,

if

termination go

the Old Sclavonic has

taken for a hardening from y (xf y), then preserved exactly as much as the
;

Greek
Greek

of the
lo,

termination sya
to-go,

and go answers
to

to

the
As,

and

" hiijus,"

the

Greek
also

to-7o.

however, in Sclavonic, the sibilants are easily interchanged with gutturals (see
.

235. m.), one

might

conjecture
the

the g of go to be a corruption

of the Sanskrit s and

lost.

semi-vowel of

^ sya,

which had been

;

Tliis conjec-

ture cannot entirely be put aside

but in any case, even in

this supposition, the termination go

remains connected with

sya and to. As, however, in the Old Sclavonic, g is elsewhere exchanged only with ^ and sch (Dobr. p. 41), but not
with
s,

in

my

opinion the derivation of g from y

(ti

y)

is

to be preferred to that

from

s.

270.

The

substantive and adjective (indefinite) o bases,

in disadvantageous

comparison with the pronouns which

hold fast the old form, have lost the genitive termination go;

but for it, in compensation for the

lost

termi-

[G. Ed.

p.

356.1
of,

nation, they have retained the old a of the base, instead

according to

255.

(a.),

weakening it
z 2

to o

hence raba, "servi"

the y bases

nova

(= Sanskrit

nava-syn) "vovi."

Now. although

340

FORMATION OF CASES
a,

in the genitive end in

the comparison of the form syna, "filil"

with the Lithuanian and Gothic sunau-s, sunau-s, and the

Sanskrit sun6-s (from
stinau-s),

teaches that the a here is only

Guna
271.

element, but foreign to the proper base, as well as to

.

the case-suffix, which, according to

255.

(6.),

must disappear.
in

The feminine bases

which
have
into

in

a,

with the exception of

y,

those

a
;

penultimate

change that a

the

y but voJya, "voluntatis" with unaltered base,

I

genitive

hence vody, "aqua" from

VODA, from VOLYA,

ascribe that y, as well as that in the nominative plural, to

,

the euphonic influence of the

which originally ends the

if

form

(see

255. d.):
;

this,

however, does not obtain

precedes the n
the theme.
bases
in

hence volya,

" voluntatis," is identical

with

On

the other hand, the feminine pronominal

a have preserved a remarkable agreement with

;

the Sanskrit pronominal declension

the

for

if to,

" this " (at

same time the theme), forms

to-ya in the genitive, I

do

not doubt of the identity of the ending ya with the Sanskrit syds (. 172.), as in the

word

rT^trra tasyds,
.

of the
(A),

same
give

import, for the

final

must, according to

255.

way; but the a of the Sclavonic ya directs

to
.

us, according

255. (a.), to

an Indian

d,

just

as the preceding o

points to a short

a.

The

irregularity, therefore, in the

lies

shortening of the Sclavonic termination

only in the drop-

ping of the sibilant before

y, as, in

the Greek, to?o, from

ir^

t'l-sya,

and in the

to-go, for fo-(s)yo,

mentioned in

. 269.

972.
is

In

the vocative, which

in

the cognate languages

without any case

/".

suffix (. 204.), o is

weakened to

e (e)

and

a to

255
357.]

a.),

hence nove (from

tT^

NOVO,
from

"new"), for
"water,"
(n.),

[G. Ed.

p.

Sanskrit
to the

nava,

is
:

identical with the Latin

nove,

and answers
;

Greek

ve(f)e

VODA,
.

comes vodo
for volyo:

but from

VOLYA,

according to

255.

vole

and so from

KNYA^YO,

"prince," knyashe* for

( before e becomes sh.

IN

THB OLD SCLAVONIC.

341

Bases in yy change their y by Guna to u (. 255./.), hence vrachifu more commonly, in analogy with . 205. On with y suppressed, vrachu " medice /" from

knya^e.

VRACHYY

y for their penultimate letter weaken their final vowel, and Guna, the commonly omit hence syne, " oh son !" more rarely like the o bases, to e
the other hand, y bases without
;

synu (Dobr.
skrit und

p. 470),

=Gothic

sunau, Lithuanian sunau, San-

from sunau.

DUAL,
273.

By

preserving a dual, the Old Sclavonic surpasses

this

the Gothic, in which

it

number

is

lost

in

the

noun:

exceeds, in the same, the Lithuanian in the

it

more true
Sanskrit

retention of the terminations, and

is

richer than the

the

Greek by one
and Zend
is

case.

The agreement with

be mistaken
:

not to

let the

comparison be

made.
SANSKRIT.

SDID.

OLD SCLAVONIC.
oba.

N. Acc V. m. uhhd (ambo Vedic),

f.

ubd,

n.

ubhS,

ub^
uboi-bya,

obye

(.

255.

n.).

LD. Ab. m.f.n.

G. L. m.
f.

ubhd-bhydm.

L D.

o6i/e-/ia (. 2 1 5.)J

n. vbhay-6s,

uboyd,

oboy-iut

* The

ye,

which precedes the termination ma,

may
:

be compared with
ye-ma, however,

the Sanskrit S in plural forms, as ^oKV^^ vrikebhya^

occurs in the Old Sclavonic only in drye-ma,

" duobus," "per duos," and

and the

some pronouns.
is

The

usual form of substantive o-bases before this ending

;

that with an unchanged o, as sto-ma, from sto, " a hundred "

final

a of feminine substantives

also remains imchanged, as dyeva-ma,

from

DTE FA,
and
(Z.),

"a

girl."

t The form
casting

u, for the Sanskrit

:

ending

6g, is,

according to

255. {/.)

necessary

away the

Zend certainly approaches the Old Sclavonic in voluntarily. The oy, which precedes the terminathe

tion Uy dearly corresponds to the Sanskrit

OT

ay

(see . 225.)

and the

Ztnd

342
(

FORMATION OF CASES
p. 358.]

G. Ed.

cording to
case-sufEx

. 212.,

The Sanskrit vbM, as neuter, comes, from the theme ubha, in union with
is

ac-

the

i;

and the feminine ubM

is

an abbreviation of
(.

ubhay-du, and

therefore without a case termination

2 1 2.).

The Old
Indian ^
regards

Sclavonic, which runs parallel to the Sanskrit in

(/.),

both genders, and, according to .255.

S,

opposes ye to the

it

entirely as a case-suffix before

no longer recognises the origin of this ye, and which the final
Therefore,
their

vowel of the theme appears to be suppressed.

also,

neuter bases ending in a consonant

if

make ye

termination,

the imenye, "two

names," given by Dois

browsky,
mation.

p. 513, actually occurs,

and

not a theoretic for-

In feminines, however, the termination ye extends,

d,

exactly as in Sanskrit, only to bases in a (for Sanskrit

.

255. a.); but in such a

last letter

manner, that those with y as the but one in the theme reject the termination ye,
;

and vocalize the y of the theme hence dyevye, " two from di/eva, but ste^^i, "two steps," from STEt,YA.
feminine
bases
in
i,

girls,"

The

in the

dual case

under discussion,

answer to the Sanskrit and Lithuanian forms mentioned

at
. 210.

211.,

as

pati,

"two
h.),

sirs,"

[G. Ed.
that,

p. 359.]

aim,
.

"two

sheep,"

from xjfir pati from AWI; only

is

according to

255.

the

in the Sclavonic

not

lengthened; as dlani from

DLANI

(nominative singular

Zend 6y or ay

(see p. 277);

but that occurs only in rfvo!/-M= Sanskrit

dway-os, "of two," "in

" of these two," m. f. n.

also rest

two" m. f. n., and in <oy-M= Sanskrit tay-os, The genitives and locatives of the two first persons
older

on
rest,

this

principle, only retaining the

final

a
is

nayu,

vdyu.

For the

however, the

vowel of the theme

rejected before

the termination m, as st'-u (Sanskrit shatuy-os) from

dyev-H.

STO, "a hundred,"

also, together

from

DJEVA, "a

girl";
dvii.

and thus occurs,

with

dooyu, the syncopated form

does not drop the final
s, still

Although the Lithuanian generally

the

u mentioi.ed

in . 225.

may be

identical
is

with the Sclavonic u ; as in the Zend,

often dropped.

also, in this

termination the s

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

343

dlany), " vola manus.^

On

the other hand, the masculine y

bases do not follow this

principle, but suppress the final

vowel before the case-suffix a;

hence syn-a, "two sons^"

from

SYNY.
PLURAL.

274. In the plural, the

masculine nominative termina-

tion e (e) for the most part answers to the

Greek

ef,

and,
*
:

according
(.

to
;

universal
gynov-e,

rule

of sounds, omits
sons,"' ^<^

the

235.

/)

hence

" the

sunav-as

compare
asmdn-as

fiorpx^eg,
(. 21.)
;

kamen-e,

"the

stones,"

for

^^iTTTO

compare

$a/'/io'-ej,

gosty-e, "guests"

(theme
iioai-e^.

GOSTI), for the Gothic gastei-s, and Greek forms like

The

bases in o take, as in Lithuanian do the corresponding

a,
i

bases in

as their termination (see

;

22S.),

but before

this reject the o of the base

rabo-i

hence

rab'-U " servants," for

(comp. \vKo-t), as in Latin lup-i for lupo-L

like the
i

Neuters

have a for their ending,

cognate dialects, with the

for a
;

exception of the Sanskrit with

nevertheless, slova,

"verba" from

SLOVOas
.

^capa

from

AQPO answers

to

Vedic forms

like tand, " woods,"

from tana ; and the same

thing obtains which,

231. p. 267 G. ed., has been said of

Gothic, Greek, and Latin, regarding the relation of the a of

the termination to the o of the theme.

As regards

the bases

ending in a consonant,
heavens," with ve^((r)-a

let

imen-a,

"names," be compared
;

with the Latin nomin-a and Gothic namon-a

;

nebes-a, " the

and

telyat-a, " calves,"

with Greek

forms

like acofxar-a.

Feminines, with the exception of the

.

class of

words in ov mentioned at
;

261.,

have

lost

the no-

minative ending

hence volya,

" voluntates," is

the

same as

the theme and the nominative singular; and

[G. Ed. p. 360.]

from KOSTI, "bones" (Sanskrit

nominative singular
275.
kostv,

asthi,

neuter) comes the

like the

and the plural

theme.

The accusative plural is, in feminine and neuter Doons, the same as the nominative, and therefore in the former

344
mostly without
bases in
i
;

FORMATION OF CASES
inflection, exactly as
gosti for the

in the

few masculine
Bases in
o,

hence

Gothic

gnsti-ns.

without y preceding, like

rahy, "servos";

RABO,
;

change
and

this o into y, as

at least I cannot believe that this

I

is

to

be looked upon as the case-suffix

influence

pronounce

it

to be

the euphonic alteration of the o of the base, through the

of the

consonant of the

inflection

which

has

been dropped
(a) of the

(corap. .271.):

as in Lithuanian, also, the

final

corresponding class of words often changes the

base into u
;

vowel

hence wilku-s,

" lupos,"

answering

to

the Gothic vulfa-ns and

Sanskrit vrikd-n.
of

But

if

the

Old Sclavonic

bases

in

y,

animate

creatures,

form
this

owy

in

the
to

accusative

plural,

and

thus

synovy, " filios"

answers

the

Lithuanian

svnu-s

(from

SUNU),

very Lithuanian form, as well as the Gothic and Sanskrit

8unu-ns, ^"5*! sunu-n, prove

that

the Sclavonic

form

is

unorganic, and formed from an augmented theme

SYNOVO,

according to the analogy of raby.

Bases in yy in this case

follow bases in yo (from yo, .255. a), which, preserving the

old a sound, give ya, as in the genitive singular (see
.

270.);

hence vrachya,

"medicos,"'''

like

knyntyn,

"

principes":

but
fol-

forms, also, like doschdevy, analogous with synovy, occur,

lowing the euphonic

276.

rule,

255.
is

(r?.).

The view here given

the

more

incontrovertible,

as in the dative, also, synovo-m, "filiis^^

is clearly

(compare robo-m),
increased by
a,

formed from a theme

SYNOVO,
sunu-ms.
.

corresponding to the
suffix

Lithuanian

This dative
according
all

m, for the Lithuanian ms (from mus,

p. 361.]

215.),

LG. Ed.

to

255.

(/.),

extends

itself

over

classes

of words, and appears to be attached by a conjunctive vowel

e to bases

terminating with a consonant

but, in fact, it is

to be considered -that these, in the cases mentioned as also in

the locative (see

. 279.),

pass over into the

declension, as
e:

final

?,

before the signs of case

and

ch,

becomes

and a

similar metaplasm occurs in the Lithuanian, and indeed, to a

IN THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

345
. 126.).*

much

greater extent (. 125. sub finem, eomp.

hence

imene-m, imene-ch, from I

koste-m, koste-ch,

MENI from IMEN,

" bones."
.

"names," as

from

KOSTI,
is

277. Less general

the instrumental ending m/, an255.

bis.
(/.),

swering, subject to the loss required by

to the

Lithuanian mis, Sanskrit

bhis,

and Zend

This ter-

mination mi
for

is,

however, in masculine and neuter nouns

477)

the most part lost (comp. Dobr. pp. 473 and

is

and

preserved principally, and indeed without exception,

i

in feminines, as well as in a few masculine

i

bases

a final

of the base

is,

however, suppressed before the termina^f^erftnr asthi-bhis,

tion mi.

Let kost'-mi be compared with

asthi,

from 'afw bhis, from

raby,

" bone

'';

vdova-mi with f^VTrftra vidhavd

a widow."

f^^rai vidhavd, "

The instrumentals

synovy,
(.

are,

like

the
i

accusatives of similar sound,

uninflected

275.);

the

of kvya^i, vrachi, is the vocali-

zation
after

of the

y of the

bases

KYNJ^YO, VRACHJY,
;

the

loss

of the final

vowel

and the y of neuters

is to

terminating in a consonant, like imeny "per nomina,''

explained by a transition into the o declension, and

be

is

there-

fore analogous to raby, slavy, similarly to the o of the

Greek

dual forms like Saifiovoiv

278.

(p.

318 G.

ed.

Rem.

2.).
il,

Dobrowsky

(p.

461) represents ov, y,

;

ev, en, yat,

and

es,

as plural genitive terminations

but in reality the

o,

sufl&x of this
a,

ease has entirely disappeared, and in bases in

and

y, has also carried

i

away

those final vowels with

;

it,

while

bases in

double that vowel

hence

rab,

[G. Ed.

p.

362.]

RABO; vod, "aquarum," from 1 ODA; syn. "Jiliorum," ivom SYNY; kostil, "ossium," from KOSTI; imen, "nominum," from IMEN ; nebes, " coelorum," from NEBES.
"servorum," from

The n and
tion

of imen, nebes, would, without the former protec-

of a following termination have been dropped, as in

Sclavonic

we have only

a second generation of

final

conso-

while the former, with the exception of a few monosyllabic forms, has, according to . 255. (/.), disappeared,

nants

346
279.

FORMATION OF CASES
The termination
all

of

the

locative

plural

is

ch

throughout
.

classes

of

words, and has been already, at

255. (m.)

recognised as identical

with the Indian

at
:

su,

and
this

therefore, also, with the

A5i^

Greek

compare,
in
.

also,

the

Zend

kha, for

the

Sanskrit

swa,

35.

Before

kh,

passes into ye,

exactly as

the corresponding
rnbyc-ch,

Sanskrit
servis,^''

a into

answers to
in

^ i (see . 255. e.); hence ^fm vriki-shu, "in lupis^

their analogy

"in

Bases in yo

and those

yy follow

suppress,
;

however^
cases;

before this ye, their

preceding

y, as in

similar

hence knyat^ye-ch, "in principibus," not knyal^yy-ch from

KNY^KT^' A
" in viduis,"

final

a remains unchanged

hence vdova-ch,

answers to the Sanskrit vidhavd-su.

.

For bases

in

i,

and consonants, see

276.

280. For an easier

survey of the results obtained for

the Old Sclavonic case-formation,

to bring

we give
all

here, in order

under one point of view

another easy,
"

the kinds of

theme
of the

existing in Old Sclavonic, and to render their comparison

with one

the complete

declension

KNYA^YO, m. "a prince," SLOVO, n. "a word," MORYO, n. "a sea" (Dobr. p. 476, "water," VOLYA,l "will," GOSTI, m. .11.), VODA, "a guest," KOSTI, "a bone," SYNY, m. "a son," DO MY, m. "a house," VRJCHfY, m. "a physician," KAMEN, m. [G. Ed. p. 363.] " a stone," IMEN, n. " a name," MATER, "a mother," NEBES, n. " heaven," TEL YAT, n. " a calf."* In
bases: i^/^^O, m.
a servant,"
f. f.
f.

* The above examples are arranged according

hence precedes the a for Sanskrit d ($.255.
before the preceding
after sibilants
;

to their final letters, a,

with the observation, however, that o represents an original short

a.).

and

All bases in

have a y
also,

this semi- vowel

is,

however, readily suppressed

p.

hence ovcha for ovchya, Dobr.

lize) the genitive, dative,

475

and hence,

from lizyo come (nom.

nlnes in ya, an

and nominative accusative

plural lizay lizu, for lixya, Uzyu.

i

If in bases in yo,

m.

n.,

and

in femi-

precedes the semi-vowel, this involves some apparent

variations

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

347
word
to

those forms of the following table in which a part of the

is

not separated from the

inflection,

rest,

thereby shewing

itself

be the

case-sufifix;

but

we recognise no inflection at all, ue. no we see therein only the bare base of the
;

word, either complete or abbreviated

or also a modifica-

tion of the base, through the alteration of the final letter,

occasioned by the termination

which has

been dropped
present in the

(compare

271.).

In some cases which

we

notes, base

and termination have, however, been contracted

into one letter,

by which a division
the
dual,

is

rendered impossible.
to

With

respect to
all

which

cannot be proved
specimens,

belong to
refer to
.

the words

here

given as

we

273.

vanatioDS in the decleusion, which require no particolar explanation here

(see, in Dobr. mrai'tJ, m. p. 468 ; ladi^a, f. p. 478 \Vith r^;ard to zary^ " a king," see $. 263 }.
j

and iuhenye,

n. p. 474,

348
[G. Ed.
THKME.
p.

FORMATION OF CASES.
3 64.1
MOM.
ACCUS.

SINGULAR.
INSTR.

DATIVE.

GEN.
raba,^^

LOC.
rabye,'^

ro6'. RABO, m.' KNfACTO. m. ^ knyaCy\ slovo. SLOVO, n.3

raV,

rabo-my.

rahU;^

knyaCy\
slovo.

knya^e-my. knyaCyu,
slovo-my.
slovu,

knyaCya,''^
slova,^^

knyaii,
slovye,^^

MORfO,

n.^

more.
voda.
volya.
gosty.
kosty.
syn'.

more.

more-my.
vodoy-u^^
voley-u,^^

moryti,
vod'-ye,^^

morya,^^

mori,

VODA, f.* rOLfA, f.* GOSTI, m.* KOSTJ, f.*

AFiVF,
m.

vodu,^
volyu}^
gosty.

vody^^

rod''ye,^
voli,

voH,
gosti,^ kosti,^
synov-i,

vlya,
gosti,
kosti.

goste-my,^^
kostiy-u,^^

gosii,^ kosti,^
kvsti.

hsty.

syn.

syno-my^''

syna,^^

tynye,'^

synu.^

DO MY, m/

dom'.
.

dom\
,

domo-my.
vr ache -my,

domov-i,
vrachev-i.

domu.
vrachya,^

damn.
vrachi.

dome
vrachyi
.

VEACHYY,m 8 vrachy KAMEN, m. kumy',^* IMEN, n."' imya.

^f^rjSfl,
f."

vrachy'.

....
imya.

kamene-my. kamen-i,
imene-my.
imen-i^
mater-i,
nebes-i,
telyat-i.

kamen-e,^ kamen-i.
imen-e,^*
mxiter-e<^

imen-i,
mater-i.
nebes-i,
telyat-i,

matt.

....
nebo.
telya.

....
nebese-my,
telyate-my.

NEBES, n,i2 TELTAT,n}^

nebo.
telya.

nebes-e,^
telyat-c,'^*

'

Cora p.

p. 273,

&c.

See

^-i^.

268. 259
p. 288.

^ '

Comp.
See

pp. 275, 276.

Comp.

p.285.

5 *

Comp. p.286. Comp. p. 304.

Comp.

p. 337,

Note.

See $.263.
;

The

cases wanting

come from

KAMENI
also,

(see $. 260.)

whence^
dative
just

also,

kamene-m, kamene-ch ($.266.); and whence,

I

might be derived the

and locative kamen-i, which

as iu
'"

prefer,

however, deriving from the original theme,

MATER.
Comp.
. 133.

" See
'*

265. and comp. p. 305.

'2

Comp.
See
.

p. 306.

and

. 147.

13

See ^.264.

Dobr.p.287.

'

266.

*^
18

*"

'^ Comp. L'lth. pali-mi, Comp. Sanskritjihway-d, &c. See . 266. aunu-rm. '9 See Or rabovi, . 267. .268. The i may also be ascribed to the mark of case, and the dropping of the final letter

of the base

may be assamed

but in the genitive of the same sound, the

clearly belongs

to the theme.
2'

See $.270.

aa

See $.271. See

p.

^ More commonly vracha,

8*

and in the vocative, vrachu.

347, Note.

See

).

269.

See

268.

m Or

syne.

IN

THE OLD SCLAVONIC.

H.URAL.
\G. Ed
p.

349
365.]

woM. roc.
rab'i,

ACCOS.
raby,

INSTR.""

DATIVE.*

LOCATIVE.*
rab',

raby,
knya(,i,
slovy,

rabo-m,

rabye-ch.
kiiya^e-ch
slovye-ch,

knyaCi,
slova,

knyaCya,
slova,

knya^e-m,
slovo-m,

knyaCy',
slov\

morya,
vodtf,

morya,
vody,
volya,
gosti,
kosti,

mori,

more-m,
voda-m,
volya-m,
goste-m,
koste-m,

mory',
vod",

morye-ch.
voda-ch.
volya-ch.
goste-ch.

voda-mi,
volya-mi,
gost'-mi,

volya,

voly\
gosttt,

gosty-e,
kosti,

kost'-mi,

kostii,

koste-ch,

synov-e,

synovy,*

synovy,*

synovo-m,*

synov,

synovye-ch.*

domov-e,
vrachev-e,

domy,
vrachya.

domy,
vrarhi,

domo-m,
vrache-m,

domov,
vrachev.

dome-ch,
vraehe-ch.

kamene-m,
tmen-a,
mater- e,
nebes-a,
telyat-a,

kamene-ch.
imen,
imene-ch.

tmen-a,

imeny,

imene-m,

....
nebes-a,
telval-a.

mater-mi,
nebesy,
telyaty.

matere-m,
nebese-m,
telyaie-m.
nebes,
telyat.

nebesye-ch.
tetyatecft*

See

274.

'

See $.271.

See

$.

276.

From SYNOVO,
and synove-ch.

'

see $.275.

In the locative occur also synovo-ch

See $.277.

See .276.

See $.278.

See $.279.
fre-

One would expect nebese-ch ; but

in this case ech

and yeck are

quently interchanged with one another, and the form yech appe&rs to
agree better with the preceding s (comp. Dobrowsky, p. 477).

350

ADJECTIVES.

ADJECTIVES.
LG. Ed.
distinct
p. 366.]

281.

The declension
;

of the adjective is not

from that of the substantive

forms, which in the Sanskrit and

pronouns, have, in

and if some inflected Zend belong only to the the cognate languages, emerged from the

circle of the pronouns,

and extended themselves

with the
also.

further, they

have not remained

adjectives alone, but have

extended themselves to the substantives

the

As regards
already ex-

Greek, Latin, and Sclavonic, we

have

plained at . 228. 248. and 274. what has been introduced

from

pronominal
:

declension

in

those

languages

into

general declension

we

will

here only further remark that

.

the appended syllable sma^ in

165. &c., which, in Sanskrit,

characterises only the pronominal declension,

Pali

may

in the

be combined

also,

in several cases, with

adjective
bases,

masculine

and neuter substantive and

with
nally
all

and indeed

bases in

a,

i,

and

u,

including those which, origi-

terminating

in

a consonant, pass by augment or

;

apocope into the vowel declension

locative

thus the ablative and

is

singular

of kesa,

"hair,"

either

simply kSsd

(from kSmt, see

p. 300),

khe, or combined with

sma or

its

variation mha, kesa-smd, kesa-mhd, kesa-smin, kha-.mhi.

In

the Lithuanian, this syllable, after dropping the

s,

has, in

the dative and locative singular, passed over to the adjective declension, without imparting itself to that of the substantive,

and without giving

appended
such

to the adjective the licence of

renouncing this

syllable

as,

geram,

"
it

bono"

gerame, "in bono." be

possible,

According to
indeed

this principle
lately

would

and

was

my

intention,

ADJECTIVES.
to explain the

351
full adjective dative,

agreement of the Gothic

.

as blindamma (from blindasma,

170.),

with

[G. Ed.

p. 367.1

pronominal datives like tha-mma, "to this," i-mma, "to him";

but the examination of the Old Sclavonic declension, in which
the indefinite adjectives

remove themselves from

all

admixparallel

ture of the pronominal declension,

to

and run entirely

the

German
to
the,

strong substantive, not to the weak, has

to

led

me

me, very important discovery, that

Grimm's strong and Fulda's abstract-declension-form of adjectives diverges in not less than nine points from the
strong
substantives
(?. e.

those

which

terminate

in

the

tlieme in a vowel), and approaches to the pronominal de-

clension for no other reason than because, like the definite

adjectives in the Sclavonic

and Lithuanian, they are comits

jMjunded with
declension.

a pronoun, which naturally follows

As,
then,

own
the

the

definite

(so

now name

strong) adjectives are defined or personified by a pronoun

incorporated with them,

clension should

it is

natural that this form of de-

be avoided, where the function of the inis

herent pronoun
cedes
it
;

discharged by a word which simply pregufer,

thus

we say
to

or der yute, not der gvter, which

;

would be opposed
still

the genius of our language

for
is

it

lies in

our perception that in guter a pronoun

conal-

tained,

as
tlie

we perceive pronouns
pronoun
is

in

im,

am,

beim,
its

though

here no longer present in

behind
its

original

form, but has only

left

case-termination.

In

comprehending, however, the definite adjective declension,

the science of

Grammar, which
still

in

many

other points had

raised itself far above the empirical perception of the lan-

guage, was here

left

far behind it;

and we

felt,

in

forms

like guter, gutem, gute,

still

a pronoun which

more than we recognised, namely, operated in spirit, although it was no

longer bodily present.

tiou
is, is

How acute, in this

respect, our percep

proved by

tlie fact

the adjective beside the ein

that we place the definite form of when deprived [G. Ed. p. 368.]


352
ADJECTIVES.
but,

of its definitive pronominal element;

in

the oblique

cases, beside the definite eines, einem, einen, the indefinite:

ein
grosses,

eines

grossen

(not grosses),
is

einem grossen (not

at the

grossem).
definite

In the accusative, grossen

indefinite
;

same time
it

and

but in the former case

is

a bare

tlieme,

and therefore
which
is

identical with the indefinite genitive

and

dative,

likewise devoid of inflection

but in

the latter case the n evidently belongs to the inflection.

282.

The pronominal

base,

which

in

Lithuanian and
is,

Old Sclavonic forms the

nal form, ya
(

definite declension,
^^

in its origi-

= Sanskrit

ya, " which")

and

has, in the

Lithuanian, maintained itself in this form in several cases

(see below).

In the Old Sclavonic, according to

;

255.

(a.),

yo

must be formed from ya

.

and from yo again,

ac-

cording to

255.

(n.),

ye or

but the monosyllabic nait

ture of the form has preserved

from the suppression of

lu

the y, which usually takes place in polysyllabic words.

some cases, however, the y has vocalized itself to i after lanIt signifies in both the vowel has been dropped.
guages
with
"

he "

but in Old Sclavonic has preserved, in union

sche,

the old relative

this

complete declension of

meaning {i-sche, "which"). pronoun is as follows

;

The

SINGULAfi.
UTHHANIAN.
OLD SCLAVONIC.

Nominative,
Accusative,

m.
m.

yls
yin,

f. f.

yi.

m.
m. m.

J,*
i,

f.
f.
f.

ya*
yH,

n. ye.

yen.

n. ye.

Instrumental, m. yu,
Dative,

tye.
f.

n. im.

yeyH,
yet,

m. yam,
m. yo.

yei.

m. n. yemu, m.
m.
n. yego.

f.

Genitive,
Locative,

f.

yrh,

f.

yeya.
yei,

m.

yanik.

f.

yoye,

n.

yem,

f.

Occur." only as the relative in union with sche.

ADJECTIVES.
PLURAL.
UTHUANIAN.
OLD SCLAVONIC.

353

Nominative,
Accusative,

m.
m.

yfe (yi)^

f. l/os,
f.
f.

ySs,
yeis,

yes,

m- i* f. m. f. D.
m. m.
va.
f.

n.

yo*
ya.

Instrumental, m.
Dative,
Genitive, Locative,

yomlt.

D.
n.

imu
im.
icfu
ich.

m.
m.
f.

yiems,

f.

yoms.

f.

yu.
tf^sk,
f.

f.

n.

m.

yoM,

m.

f.

D.

DUAL,
UTHUANIAN.

[G. Ed. p. 369.] OLD SCLAVONIC

Nominative,
Accusative,

m.

yu

(v&),

ff.

yh
t/in,

....

m.
m.

yun,

....
Instr. Dat,

Dative,
Genitive,

yiem,
f.

f.

yom,

m.

f. f.

n. yima.
n.

m.

yu.

Gen. Loc. m.
its

yeyiL

283. The Lithuanian unites, in

definite

declension,

the

pronoun

cited

which,

according to Ruhig (Mielcke,

article

p. 52.), signifies

the

same as the Greek

;

with
all

the

adjective to be rendered definite

so that both the latter,

and
the

the pronoun, preserve their

cases
;

full

terminations through
its y,

only the pronoun in some cases loses

and the

terminations of the adjective are in some cases somewhat

shortened.

GSras, " good," will serve as an example.

MASCULINE.
SraCCLAK.
DUAL.
PLURAL.

Nominative,
Accusative,

gerasis,\

gerui/u.

gene^fu
ger^fus.
geraiseis.

geranyan,
gerUyu,

geruyun.

Instrumental,
Dative,
Genitive,

geramyam,
geroyo.

giriemsiom,^

geriemsiema.
gertofiL
geru-tuse.

Locative,
Vocative,

getamyame.
gerasis,

geruyn

gerieyi.

* See Note on preceding

t

page.
as, in

Or
The

gerassiSf

by assimilation from gerasyU,

itself to

the Prakrit y frefor

quently assimilates
I

a preceding

s,

as tassa,

" hujus"

HW tasi/a.

* of the adjective is here not in its place,

and appears to be

borrowed from the plural.

A A

354

ADJECTIVES.
FEMININE.
SINGULAR.
DUAJL.

PLURAL.

Nominative,
Accusative,

geroyi,

gerieyi,

gerosos,

geranyeh,
geraye,
geraiyei,
gerosies,

geriyin,

gerases,

Instrumental,
Dative,

geromsomis,

geromsom,
geruyii,

geromsomn.
geruyii.
gerosusa.

Genitive,
Locative,

geroyoye,
geroyi.
geriyi,

Vocative,
LG. Ed.
p.

gerosos.

370.]

284.

The Old

Sclavonic, differing

from

the Lithuanian, declines only in

some

cases

the adjective

together with the appended pronoun, but in most cases the

latter alone.

While, however, in the Lithuanian the appended

lost its

pronoun has

y only
in

in

some cases,

in the

Old Sclavonic

that pronoun has

its

lost,

many

vowel, and therefore the whole base.

is left.

more, not only the y but also Thus the termi-

nation alone
insert

For more convenient comparison we

svyat (theme

here, over

against one another, the indefinite and

definite declension:

SF^ATO),

"holy,"

may

serve for example

SINGULAR.
HASCUUNE. Indef. Def.
FEMININE.
Indef.

Def.

Nominative,
Accusative,
Instrumental,
Dative,

svyat.
svyat,

svyaty-7,^
svyaty-'i,^

svyata.
svyaiu,

svynta-ya.

svyatu-yiL

svyafom,
svyaiu,

svyaty-m,^

svyaloyu, svyato-yd.^
svyatye.
svyaiy,

svyato-mH,
svyuta-go,

svyafo-L*

Genitive,
Locative,
* See Note
'

svyata,

svyaiy-ycu
svyato-iJ^

svyaiye.

svy(tto-m^

svyaiye,

on preceding page.
^

See

255.

ff.

Or

svatye-m, in which, as in the Lithuanian, the

time.

adjective
3

is

inflected at the

same

The

indefinite

and

definite fijrms are here the same, for this reason,

thatstn/fl/o-yej/M, as

the syllable ye.

The

the latter must originally have been written, has dropped adjective base svyata has weakened its o to a

just as in the dative and locabefore the pronominal addition (. 266. with the indefinite form is not tive svyato-i, where an external identity
perceptible.
*

a\

Or

svyatye-i.

Comp. Note

2.

ADJECTIVES
PLUKAL.
ludef.

355

Def.
svyaii-i,

Indef.

Def.
svt/aty-ya.

Nominative,
Accusative,

svyati,

svyaiy,
svyaty,

sryafy,

svyaty-ya,

svyaty-yot

Instrumental, ivyafy,
Dative,

sryaty-imi,^ svyata-mi. gvynty-imiJ

sayatom,
svyaf,

svyafy-imi,^ svyata-m,
svvafy-ich,
svt/aty-ich^'

svyaty-imJ
svyaiy-iclu

Genitive,
Locative,

sryat,

srynfyech,

svyata-ch^

sryaty-ichJ

SINGULAR.
Indtf.

PLURAL.
Tndef.

Def.

Ikf.

Nona. Accus.

svyato,

svyaio-e,

svyata,

svyaia-ycu

The

rest like the masculine.

*
tl

give those fonns which, according to

Dobrowsky

(p. 302.),

occnrin
lost

e oldest MSS., in place of the

i

more ordinary forms, which have

the
*

of the pronominal base

si^aty-mi, svyaty-m^ svyaty-di.

is

Although in the pronominal declension the genitive plural

exter-

nally identical with the locative,

separate the

we most

nevertheless, in
I

my

opinion,

two

cases, Ln respect to their origin.

this,

find,

however, the

reason of their agreement in

that ^he Sanskrit,

which

m this case is

most exactly followed by the German and Sclavonic, in pronouns of the

third person begins the plural genitive termination with a sibilant, Sanskrit

sdm, Gothic ze

(for se,

<).

248.).

This

s,

then, has, in

Old Sclavonic, become

ch, just like that of the locative characteristic

^ * (}.279.).
/.)
:

The

nasal rf

^TR sdm must, according

to rule,

be

lost ($.

255.

the vowel, however,

has, contrary to rule, followed

it,

as also in the ordinary declension the

;

termination ojn has entirely disappeared (. 278.)

which imen^ " nominum," has

has to thi-ze.

to the Gothic

naman-e^

and the same relation tye-ch, " horum"

This tye-cK however, answers as genitive to the Sanskrit

W^iT
for
^

te-thdm, and as locative to

le-xhu

ye being used in both cases

^ e,

according to

$.

255.

(e.)

See Notes 5 and

6.

The identity with the masculine and neuter forms

is

arises

from

this, that
;

the grave a of the feminine adjective base

changed
is

into the lighter o

and
$.

this again, as in the

(<i.},

masculine neuter,

con-

verted, according to

256.

into y.

a8

366
[G. Ed.p.371.]

ADJECTIVES.
285.

As in the Sanskrit the preponderating

majority of adjective bases end in the masculine and neuter

in a,

and in the feminine in

6,

and as

this class

is,

in the

Old Sclavonic, only represented by bases in o, yo in the masculine and neuter (see . 257.), and a, ya in the feminine;
it

is

not surprising that in

of a

German

also,

with the excep-

tion

few in M

(of the

comparative

and

participle

present), all
dition,

other adjective bases, in their original cona,

end in

feminine

o for

(. 69.).

It is,

however,

remarkable, and peculiar to the German, that

in their indefinite condition, have
[G. Ed.
p.

its adjectives,

all

lengthened their theme

that in substantives

872.]

by an unorganic n, and

the class of words in n appears to be the most generally

made

use

of,

inasmuch as a large number of words, whose bases

permitted this to be increased by n.

in Gothic terminate in a vowel, have, in the

dialects,

more modem The reason,

dialects,

however,

why

the indefinite adjectives

not

simply in part,
but

and for the

first

time in the more modern

so
is

universally, and

early as in Gothic

have

passed into

the n declension,
the inflection
. 139. 140.,

to be sought for in the obtuseness of

class

of this
in

of words, which, according to

common

with

the Sanskrit,

Latin,

and

Greek, omits the nominative sign, and then, in variance

from the older languages, dispenses also with the dative character, upon the loss of which, in Old High German,
has followed,
sence of the
also,

that of the genitive character.

This ab-

animating
to

and personifying mark of case

adjective, because it feels

might belong
itself

the

indefinite

more
it,

exactly defined through the article which pre-

cedes

or through another

pronoun, than the

definite
it,

adjective, the

pronoun of which incorporated with

left

has

for the

most part

behind only

its

case terminations.
is

In the Lithuanian and Sclavonic, in which the article

wanting, and thereby an inducement further to weaken the

declension of the indefinite adjectives, the latter s*and on an


ADJECTIVES.
equal footing with
i.e.

357
of substantives,

Grimm's strong declension

they maintain themselves, without an unorganic conso-

nantal augment, in the genuine, original limits of their base.

2S6.

As

the feminine,

where

it

is

not identical, as in

adjective

bases

in

in

the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin,

is

with the theme of the masculine and neuter,

in the Indo-European family of languages,

always,

made

to diverge
it

through an extension or an addition

important for

to

the end,

is

German Grammar German

from
its

to

remark

and

have

already called attention to this point in another place

that

the feminine of the

indefinite

adjective, in
p.

variance from the principle which has been

just given, has not arisen

[G. Ed.

373]

masculine, but from an

older form of the feminine;

e.g.

the primitive feminine

BLI^DA m. n. " blind," has extended itself in the indefinite to

BLIKDAS, and the primitive feminine BLISDO to BLINVOX: one must not, therefore, derive the latter, although it
is

the feminine oi

BLIND AX

m., from this, as

it is

entirely

foreign to the Indo-European family of languages to derive

a feminine base through the lengthening of the

but one of the masculine and neuter.
declension of

last letter

As

far as reg^irds the

BLINDAN
322 G. ed.). and

m.,

it

follows precisely that of

AMMAN
(p.

(p.

176 G. ed. &c.); the fem.

BLINDAN n., that of NAMAN BLINDON differs from the masinfiection, since its 6
a,

culine only

by a more regular
according to

remains

everywhere unchanged, while

singular,
is,

in the genitive to

and dative
therefore

. 132.,

MASCULINE.

weakened NEUTEB.
PLUKAL.

FEMININE.

Theme,

BLINDAN.
PLURAL.

BLINDAN.
SINGULAR. hlinflu\^

BLINDON.
StNCnLAK.
PLtTBAL.

SINGULAK.

^.Y.blinda',^
Ice. biindan,

blindan-s,
blindan-s,

blindon-a?
blinddn-Oy^

bhnd6\
blindCn,
b/ind&n,

bUndon-g.
bUndon-s.

blindS?
blindin}

)at. blind'w,^

blinda'-m,

blinda-m,

blind^-vu

jien.blindin-s}bl'mdan-S,
*

bIindin~s,^bHnd6n-Sj^

blindon-s, blinddn-d.^

See J 140.

See

141.

See

345.

358

ADJECTIVES.

287. In order, then, to examine the definite declension of

adjectives in Gothic,

we

will,

in the first place, for the pur-

pose of bringing into view their agreement and discrepancy

with substantives and simple pronouns, place by the side

of each other the declension of the definite

BLIND A m. n.

and
n.,

B LIN DO
"a
gate,"

f.,

and that of
f.,

VULFA

m., " wolf,"

DAURA

GIBO a gift," and the interrogative [G. Ed. p. 374.] HVA m. n., " who? " what ?" HVOf.; further, by that of HAR YA that of MID JA m. n. {medius), MID TO " m., "an army," BADJA n., a bed," KUNTHJOJ., "news," and HVARJA m. n., " who ?" " what ?" HVARJO
f., f.

MASCULINE.
SINOULARPLCRA.L.

N. vulfsi
A. vulf\ D. G.
V.
vulfa,*
vulfi-s,

blind's,

hva-s}
hva-na,

vulfds^

hlindai,

hvai^

blindana,

vulfa-ns, hlindans, hva-ns.

blindamma, hva-mma,^
blindis,
blind's,

vulfa-m,
vulf-S,
vulfSs,

blindaim, hvai-m.
blindaize, hvi-zi.
blindai,

hvi

s,

v<tJf\

....
hvaryi-s,

N. hnryi-s^
A. hari,^

midyis,''

hury6s'^

midyai,

hvaryai?

midynna,

hvaryn-na,

harya-ns, midyans, hvarya-ns.

D. hnrya.

midynmma, hvarya-mma, harya-m, midyaim, hvaryai-m,

midy'fs,

G, hnryi-s,

hvary-is,

hary-^,

midyaizS, hvaryaizL

V.

hari,

midyis,

....

haryds,

midyai,

....

See

135.

"

See
See

.
$.

228. 160.

See

. 171.

See $.227.

*
.

^
^

From

haryu-s, see

135.

Tlie nominative in adjective bases in

ya docs not
;

occur, unless perhapa

it

in the fragments

which have

last

appeared

and

have here formed

170.).
If, 1.

by

analogy with haryis and hvaryis.

Grimm gives midis (1.

c, the

form

yis

is

considered as nnorganic, and, in regard to midis,

is

if its

analogy
ihe

with hardus

remembered, then

Grimm
comp

is

wrong in taking

MIDI for

theme, as in reality

HARDU

is

the theme oi hardus.

The

true theme

MIDYA

occurs, however, in the

midya-sveipains, "deluge," and

answers

ADJECTIVES.
NEUTEB.

959

^.A.Y,daur\

blindata,^

hva,^

daura.

hlindot

hiA.

The

rest like the masculine.

N.A.V.

badi.

midyaia,^ hvarya-ta^

badycu

midyoy

hvarya.

The
SINGDTJtR.

rest like the masculine.

FEMININE.
N.
A.
gihoy
g'lha.
gihai,''^
g'lbd-s.

[G. Ed.
PL0KAL.

p.

375

blindat hl'mda.
blindai}'^

hvS.

gibSs,^ gib6-s.
gibd-TTh
gib'-d.

blindos,^

hvds.^

hv6}^
hvizai}^

blindds,

hv6-s.

D
G.

blindaim, hvai-m.
blindaizo, hvi-z6.
blindos,

bUndaizds,^ hvizd-sP

V. giha.

blinda?

....
hvarya.
hvarya.
hvaryai}"^

gxbos,

....
hvaryos.

N. D. V.

ku^thi}''

midya.

kunthyos^ midyos^
kunthyo-s,
,

A. kunthycL,

midya.

midyds,
midy'6,

hvaryd-s.

kunihyai,'^'''midyai^''
,

kunthyd-m midySm, hvari/d-m.

hvary^d.
hvaryos.

G. kunthyd-s, midyahSs,
;hznM"i.

hvaryaizds}^ kurdhy-d.
kunthyds.

midya.

midyos,

answers to the Sanskrit ifv^ madhya.

Formed from midya

as theme,
i

midyis would be clearly more organic than midis.

Adjective

bas^s,

which could be referred

stantive, as
*

to

hardu-s as u base, do not exist, bat only sub-

GASTI, nom. gasts.

like

Compare Zend forms

).

^^/ja^

tmriniy

" qvartum" from J^^yJ^^

High German huaz,
also midi.

tuirya (^.42
9

Hva, with suppressed

;

termination, for hvata, Old

see . 155. 156.

'"

for blindata also blind;

and so

for

midyata

The form hvo, which, like some others of this pronoun, cannot be shewn to occur, is, by Grimm, rightly formed by analogy from tho,
'^heec."

Grimm
is
p.

here finds, as also in the accusative singular, the 6 in

the reason of the deviation,

opposition to the a of blinda surprising:

however, " See

'*

fixed
173,

by

$^. 69. 137. 231. +.

Note

See

$.

161.

'

$.

172.

For kunthya, from kunthyo, by suppression of the

final

vowel of the

base,

which again appears

;

in

the accusative, but shortened to a (see

;

. 69.)

but here,

also,

the final vowel can b dropped

hence kunthi as

aocnaatire.

Luc 1. 77.

360
If,

ADJECTIVES.
it is

then,

asked which pronoun

is

contained in the

German
defi-

definite adjective, I answer, the

same which,
ya).

in Sclavonic

[G. Ed.
nite,

p. 376.]

and Lithuanian, renders the adjective

(ii

namely, the Indian relative ya

This pronoun

in

German,

indeed, in disadvantageous comparison with the

its

Lithuanian and Sclavonic, does not occur isolated in

inflected state
;

but

it is

not

uncommon

in the history of lanits isolated

guages, that a word has been lost in regard to

use, and has

been preserved only in composition with other

should be observed, too, that a demonstrative

words.
i

It

base must be acknowledged to belong to the Sanskrit,

is

which, in Latin,
completely;

completely declined

in Gothic almost

but in Sanskrit, except the neuter nomina-

tive accusative idam, " this," has

maintained
it

itself

only in

derivative forms, as
" so

2^

i-ti,
**

^rvm

iham, " so," ^rnr iy-at,

is

much,"

^^ i-drisa,
the

such."

The case
:

the

same
other

in Gothic, with the pronominal base ya

in

from

this comes,

my

opinion
also,

affirmative
is

particle

ya, as

in

languages,

affirmation

expressed

by pronominal
"if,**

forms

(e-fa, irn ta-lhd,

"so," ovrag),

and further yabaU

"lest";
as

analogous with
in Sanskrit. Tjf^ to
this, as
I

ibai,

"whether,"
"
if,"

ibaini,

also,

yadU

now

being laid aside

has the same relation as in Prakrit, in the

believe, the
ai,

comes from the same base, and Greek el the semi-vowel

e.g.vfj^bhamai,

3d person singular present,

(L^rvasi

"he wanders"
adi,
c.

by Lenz,
Sanskrit

p. 63),
^ffffT

has to the more usual ^f^

In
Prakrit, too,

for
p.

the

ati.

u^jai

(1.

63 on j for

y, see

. 19.),

really occurs

for yadi;

so

that in this conjunction, as in the 3d person of the present

Ae7e/ from \eyeTi), the Greek runs parallel to the corruption

Tf

of the

Prakrit.

If,

however, in
the
iEolic

el

the Sanskrit

y has
it

disappeared,

as

in
6g,

t!)Li/xe?= Sanskrit

yushme,

appears as h in
6,
17,

the article
line

where h

falls

which has nothing to do with only to the nominative mascuruns through

all

and feminine,

wliile in 6f it

the cases, as

ADJECTIVES.
in Sanskrit the
Tr yas,
6f,
7{^

361
this

y of jm^

ya-s.

To

[G. Ed.

p. 377.]

in regard to the

rough breathing, bears the same

"to
"to be worshiped;" va-yuv

relation

as y/ietf to ^TO yushmi, aC^, 07^0? to tn^ yqj,

^lail i/o/yo,

worship,*" "to sacrifice,*"

to ir^ yudh,

"to strive," ifiR yudhma, "strife" (comp. Pott, But to return to the Gothic YA, let us further observe yah* "and," "also," with h enclitic, of which hereafter,
pp. 236. 252.V
It also clearly

andyw, "now,"i.e. "atthis time," "already" (comp. Latin jam).

forms the
last

portion of hvar-yis (for yas),

itself

as,

in the Sclavonic, this

all

pronoun often unites

with almost

others, and, for example, is contained in ky-i,

"who?**

although the interrogative base also occurs without this

combination.
288.

In Gothic definite adjectives the pronominal base

itself

YA

shews

most plainly
all

in

bases

in u.

Of

these,

indeed, there are but a few, which

we annex

below.f but

a ya shews itself in

the cases, and these in blinds differ

from the substantive declension, to such an extent that

before the

y the u

of the adjective

is

suppressed, as

in

Sanskrit before the comparative

iyas,ishtha; e.g. laghiyas,
light,"

and superlative
light," Inyhishtha^

suflBxes

"more

"most
as,

for

laghv-iyas,

laghv-ishtha

from

layhu;

and

even

in

Gothic,

hard'-hd, "

more

hard " (according

to

* The h may
word, and thus

assimilate itself to the initial consonant of the following

may

arise t/ag, t/an,

and yas, and in conjanction with thi:

yatthe, " or " (see

Massmann's

Gloss.),

t AggvuSf "narrow," agluSf "heavy," ^i7^^ru*,"indnstrioua,"AarA, "hard," manvus^ "ready," thaursus, "dry," thlaqvtu, " tender," seithug, " late,"^u, " much," and, probably, hnasqvus, " tender." Some occur
only as adverbs, as glaggou-ba, "industriously."
Jibi,

In addition to the adverb

" much," since

{Jilatis

Grimm

treated this subject the genitive _/liju* has been see

found

mats, "for

much more,"

Massmann's

Gloss.),

which

is

the more gratifying, as the adjective u bases had not yet been adduced in this case


362
[G. Ed.
p. 378.]

ADJECTIVES.

Massmann,

p. 48),

for

hardv-izd

from

HARD U.

Hitherto, however, only the accusative singular

masculine <^aMrs-vana, "siccum," manv-yana," paratum"; the

accusative singular neuter manv-yata; the dative plural

hnasqv-yaim are adduceable,

if

Grimm,

as I doubt not, is
is

right in ascribing to this word, which

not to be met
Finally,

with in any other case, a nominative hnasqvus*

also,

the accusative plural masculine unmanv-yans, aitapa(2 C. 9.

4.),

CKevaarovq
different

although, in this case, hlindans

is

not

from

vulfans.

These
;

examples, then, although

few, furnish powerful proof

because, in the cases to be

met

with, they

represent an entire class of words

the definite adjective in u

single variety of

in

viz.

such a manner, that not a

It

form

occurs.

may

be proper to annex

here the complete definite declension of

either to be
cases,
is,

MANFV,
the

as it is

met with, or, according to with more or less confidence,

difference of
:

to be expected

MASCULINE.
SINGULAR.

FEMININE.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.

N.
D.

mnvvu-s,

(manv-yni),

manvu-s,

(manv'-yds).

Ac. mnnv-ya-na,

manv-ya-ns,

(manv-ya,)

(manv-yds),

{ma7w-ya-mma),manv-yai-m, (manv-yai),

{manv-yaim),

G.

mamau-s,
LG.

(manv-yaize), {manv-^aizds), {manv-yaizd^

Ed

p. 379.]

NEUTER.
SINGULAR
PLURAL.

Nom.

Accus. manv'-ya-ta,f

(manv-ya).

* I

am

the more inclined to agree with him, as a few other adjecfiye

bases in vu occur.

Perhaps a euphonic influence of the v on the vowel

also ar

which follows
So Urvasi,

it is

work ;

as at times one finds in the Prakrit a final

TIT

a changed through the influence of a preceding

p. 72, aZu, tdlu,

n,

",

or qJ

/,

to g* m. p. 71,

dvaranu^ for

kdla^

tdki,

dvarana;

manoharu

for

manohara.
inflection

t Without
anian darku.

and pronom. manvuy as 7^1? swddu,

^di, Lithn

ADJECTITBS.
"

363

Remark
upon
1,

I.

Grimm

finds

(I.

721.) the identity of the feit

minine with the masculine remarkable, since he, as

looks

appears,

as an originally

mere masculine termination

and that
I
i,

(comp.

c.

824, 825. ^').

s

That, however, the feminine has

it is

equal claim to

as the nominative character,

entirely without inflection

I

where

this is

wanting,

think

have shewn in

134. 137.

Adjective bases in

which

in the Gothic, as in the

Lithuanian

and Sclavonic, are

wanting, end, in the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, in the

nominative of both genders, in

devoid of inflection
iuchi
n.,
:

is;

and only the neuter

suchi-s

is

compare

^f^

m.

f.,

"clean,"
u,

with

iBpi-^, t^pt, facili-s, facile.

Adjectives in

in

Sanskrit, frequently leave, in like manner, the feminine base

undistinguished from the masculine and neuter, and then

end, according to
ax.
f.,

234., in the

nominative in w-s; so pdndus

agrees with
Tjiarjfu.

with

If

pdndu two consonants do not precede the final

may, except
i,

manvus

above, and the neuter

u,

as in pdndu, the feminine base

in

com-

pound words, be lengthened by an

characteristic of this gender
;

which
<iisl

is

particularly

and thus

swddict, " the

sweet" (theme

and
is

nominative), answers

to

the Greek
(.

word

7]^eia,
;

which

lengthened by an unoi^nic a

119.),

for ^BFta

and swddu-s answers both as feminine and masIn the Sanskrit,

culine nominative to the Gothic manvus.

also,

a short u in the feminine base

may

be lengthened, and
is

thus the feminine of inj tanu, " thin,"

tantl,

either tnnu or

tive,

whence the nominative fanu-s; and tanwt, as substanmeans the " slender woman."" The Lithuanian has
bases
t|tt

adjective

in

u,

as

szuriesu-s,

m.

**

light,"

" clear,*'

(compare

sivHa, " white,")

which nevertheless, in seveas szwiesam dangui, " to the

ral cases, replace the

u by a
some,
of

bright heaven":
the assimilating

in

too,

they prefix an

to the a,

power

which changes the

into e

(comp.

p.

169 Note);

as, sziviesiems
is,

dangums, "to the bright

heavens."

The feminine

in the nominative, szwiesi, the

364
[G. Ed.
p. 380.]

ADJECTIVES.
final
i*

of which is evidently identical with

the Sanskrit
ever,

in

swddwt
is

In the oblique cases, howi,

an unorganic a also
rjBeia
:

added to the Lithuanian

as it

has been in

this ia, however,

becomes either by eu-

phony,

(comp.

p.

174,

Note

*),

e.g. accus. szwiesen, accus.

plural szwiesesf or

it

happens, and that, indeed, in the majority

entirely suppressed, so that

of cases that the

is
;

SZWIESA
hand " from

passes as the theme

as szwiesbs rankos, "of the bright

(gen. szwiesai rankai (dat.).

The

of

ia,

however, appears,
itself

as with the participles, to have communicated

the feminine to the masculine,

"Remark
been
cited,

2.

With

the accusative

manvvana which has

the conjectured dative

manvyamma

is

least

That Grimm should suggest forms like hardvamma, hardv-ana, arises from his regarding amma, ana, as the dative and accusative terminations of the pronoun and
doubtful.
adjective
;

while, in fact, the terminations are simply

mma
and

and na.
accusative,
theless

When,

therefore,

HARDU,
a

in

the

dative

without annexing

pronoun, follows
cases

never-

the pronominal

declension, the

mentioned

must be written hardu-mma, hardu-na, analogous with

tha-mma, tha-na, i-mma,
all

i-na.

If,

however, contrary to

expectation,

forms

like

hardvamma, hardvana, shew

themselves, they

must be deduced
it

from

hardu-ya-mma,

hardu-ya-na ;
w, in

so that after suppressing the v, the preceding

the place in which

would be

left,

has passed into

it is

v.

With regard

to blindamma, hlindana, blindata,

doubtful

whether they ought to be divided blind*-{y)nmma,

bUnd'-{y)ata, as analogous with

blind' -{y)ana,

manv{u)-yamma, manv{u):

-yana, manv{u)-yata, or bl'mda-(^a)mma, &c.

have thereforms

fore

left

them, as
undivided.
is

also
If

the

corresponding

from
is

MIDY^^f

the division

blinda-mma, &c.

made, nothing

left

of the pronoun, as in the Old Scla-

vonic dative svynio-mii, and as in our expressions like beim,

am, im, except the case-termination, and the adjective base

ADJECTIVES.
has preserved
its a.
If,

365

however, the division blind'-amma,

I

&c. is made, to which

now

give the preference, and

different
t/,

which

is

also adopted

by Grimm, though from a

point of view, then the pronoun has only lost its

as in

some

cases of the Lithuanian definite, e.g. in ger&s-us for

p.

gerus-yus (see

353)

and with respect to the y which has

is
left,

been dropped and the vowel which

blindH-amma

would have the same relation to blindC-yamma as midums^ " the middle man" (theme MID UMA), to its Sanskrit cognate form of the same import, inOT madhyama, whose relation
to
first

MIDUMA
aXo
i,

thus

trace

the

latter has softened

a,

the

and has changed the middle

;

through the

influence of the liquid, into u

and both, however, have, ac-

cording to . " Remark

line,

66.,
3.

suppressed the semi-vowel.

Although, in the accusative plural mascu-

hUndans

is

not different from vulfans, and the simple not form aught but
[G. Ed.
p. 381.]

word

BLINDJ could
is

blinda-ns; nevertheless the

word manv-ynns, mentioned above,

which

of the highest importance for the

Grammar,

as well

as the circumstance that

where any
adjective,
I say,

inflections peculiar to

the pronoun admonish us of the existence of an inherent

pronoun in the
exists
;

definite

this

inheritance really

these two reasons,

speak in favour of dividing

it

thus, blind-anSf

and of deducing

from blind-yans.

Just in

the

same manner the dative

blindaim, both through the aim,

which occurs elsewhere only in pronouns, as through the

an abbreviation of
only by
skrit
its
te,

word hnasqv-yaim, mentioned above, declares itself blind' -yaim ; but blindai proves
pronominal inflection (compare
ke) to
4.

to be
itself

thai, hvai,

San-

be an abbreviation of blind-ya.
Sanskrit, in

"

Remark

In the
final a,

some cases an

blends

itself

with the

which, with the a of the base, be-

comes ^: hence the instrumental plural of the Veda dialect

and of the

Prakrit,

^T^fire asiv^-bhis from

asua,

5^ft

ktuume-hin from

kusuma.

To

this

answers the ai in

366

ADJECTIVES.
hvai-m, "quibus"
its

Gothic pronominal datives like

**

iha-im
origin,

Ais"; as the

German

dative, in accordance with

is identical

with the old instrumental.

We

were, however,

compelled, before

we had

a reason for seeking the pronoun

Y-^ in the Gothic definite adjective, to give to the extension of the base in

German
it

a wider expansion by an has in the Sanskrit

;

which means nothing, than

while

we
i

have now every reason, where, in Gothic

unsubstantiated by the oldest

definites,
itself,

an

grammar shews

to reY-^f

cognise in the

a remnant of the pronominal base

either as a vocalization of the y, which so often occurs in

the Sclavonic (see p. 354), or the

may

be considered as

an alteration of the a of YA, as in the Lithuanian geras-is

The latter view pleases me the better because it accords more closely with blind'' -amma, The vowel, blind'-ana, &c., from blind' -yamma, blind' -yana.
for yeras-yis, (p. 353).

then,

which in blind'-amma,

&c.,

maintains
i

itself

in its

original form, appears, in this

view, as
is

in the feminine

singular genitive blindaizos

iz6s

which
=

to be divided blinda-

from

blinda-yizds

and

this yizos is analogous

with

hvizds, ihizds,
(.

from hvazds,
the

thazos,

Sanskrit kasyds, tasyds

blindd-izds

172.).

We
is

must not require

BLINDO

feminine adjective base

6,

because
there
is

for

a reason for the thinning of the

in the
is

difficulty
srhort

of d

placing the syllables together, and a

(.

tne

of

69.).

For

the the
is

rest,

let

it

be

considered,

that
its

in

the

Sclavonic

graver

feminine

before

union

with the pronoun

(p.

weakened

to the lighter
oi in

masculine c
the Gothic

354,

Note

3.)

and that a diphthong

is

[G. Ed.

p. 382.]

never admissible;

on which account
i,

salbo, " I anoint," in

the subjunctive suppresses the

[salbos, salbd, for salbdis, salbdi).

which
In the

belongs to this

mood

feminine dative one should expect blindaizai for

bliridai,

which

is

simple, and answers to gibai, while the remaining

dialects are, in this case,

German

compounded in

the very

ADJECTIVES.
same manner:
line

367
is

in

Old High German the genitive

phnfera,

and the dative plinteru.*

In the genitive plural mascu-

and neuter the ai in hlindaize might be substantiated

^

through the Sanskrit ^

l^a:[^

of the pronominal genitive, as

teshdm, " harum''

or hlind'-{y)aize
syllabic

and therefore the division hlindai-ze should be made: as, liowever, the mono;

pronominal bases, in which one would rather ex.

pect a firm adherence to the old diphthong (comp.

137.),

do

not retain

it,

and

tki-zS, "

horum,^ hvi-ze, " quorum," as weak;

ened forms of tka-zS, hva-ze, are used

thi-z6,

and in the feminine

td-sdm, kd-sdm;

hvi-zd, for

thd-zS, Ard- 2d,

= Sanskrit
f.,

I therefore prefer to substantiate in

a different way the ai

i

in hlindaiz^

m.

n.,
(f.

and blindaizd

than by the Sanskrit

of te-shdm m. n.

td-sdm), which,

moreover, would not be

;

applicable to the feminine

fact,

form blindaizd

and

do

it.

in

by the pronominal base

the division to be

Jyi, so that blinda-izi blinda-

izd, is

made according

to the analogy of

blinda-izds.

"

Remark
and

5.

The nominative masculine and feminine has

Gothic, from union with the old relative
resting

kept
base,

itself free, in

has remained

upon

the

original,

as

received from the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin.

culine
blinds,
also,

The masand

through

the verv characteristic

animated

(see . 134.).

has cause to

feel itself personified

if blinds

and defined determinately enougli.

"old," from the base

Even

could be

looked upon as an abbreviation of blindeis (comp. altheis,

ALTHYA,
I

according to Massmann),

or of blindais, to which the Old

High German

plinter

would give authority,

should

still

believe that neither the

one nor the other has existed in Gothic, as even the u bases,

* The Gothic at would lead ns to expect i, and Grimm. As, however, with Kero, the doubling of
Notker, the circumflex
the
e, is

this, too, is

given by

the vowel, and, with

wanting, I adopt in preference a shortening of

or leave the quantity undecided.

368
like

ADJECTIVES.

manvu-s above, which, in the oblique cases, shew so clearly the pronominal base X-^* have not received it in
the nominative singular of the personal genders.
Pligh

In Old

German however,
its oldest

the pronoun spoken of has had

time, in the space of almost four centuries which intervene

between

memorials and
to the

Ulfilas, to raise itself

;

up

from the oblique cases

nominative

which was the

more

desirable, as the
p,

Old High German substantive declen-

[G. Ed.

383-3

sion in the nominative masculine, in dis-

advantageous comparison with the Gothic, omits the mark of

case.
is

Plini^r (the length of the ^

is

here rendered certain)

;

contracted from

plinta-ir (for plinta-yir)

for the Old

High
ai.

German

i corresponds,

according to

. 78.,

to the Gothic

In the feminine, therefore, the form plintyu, which occurs

in the chief
ties,

number of

strict

Old High German authoriremarks, are the oldest

fitly

and those which, as

Grimm

of

all,

has good substantiation, and corresponds very

to the masculine plinth;

and in the nominative and accusais more genuine than the The form plintyu, moreover,

tive plural

and neuter the form plint-yu, with regard to the

retaining the y of the pronoun,

Gothic blind-a for blind-ya.

answers to feminine pronominal forms

syu, "she," desyu {de-syu), "this"*
(f.),

like dyu, " the "

(f.),

and

to the

instru-

mental masculine and neuter dyu

(in the interrogative huiu),

i or y\ while remarks, here and

where

all

authorities concur in retaining the

in the adjective, Otfrid, and, as

Grimm

there Isidore and Tatian, have u for yu.

For explanation,
in

* As in the Old High

writing,
it

German

and j (y) are not distinguished

if

remains uncertain in many,

not in

all cases, in

wliat places of
in

the memorials which have

come down
If,

to us the sound y,
it

and

what that
i

of

is

intended; as even where the Gothic has a/,

may hecome

in

the Old

High German.

however, in the analogous adjective forms

is

like plintju

one reads J, which

it

supported by the Gothic (p 362),

we

must,
t,iu^

m my opinion, leave
;

in the above forms also.

p.

Grimm writes diUy

t.

but desju

and expresses,

791, his opinion regarding the


ADJECTIVES.

369

however, of the proDominal forms which have been mentioned, it is important to consider, that in the Sanskrit

the pronominal

base

to,

or the sa which supplies

its place in the nominative masculine and feminine, unites

itself

with the relative base

loses
its

noun

vowel.

n ya, by which the Compare, then

OLD HIGH
'hcBc,
GF.RH.

first

pro-

SANSKRIT.

OLD scixvasic
ta-ya.
.

W\syd

sydy)

syu. dyu,

'

WIK tydm, "/lanc,"

dya,
d'l/i.

tu-yu.
n-i.

t^l " hir

tyds,

T?ra

"her "hasr

dyd.

ty-yata-ya.

JKlfmydni, "hcEC,

dyu.

Here, then, in a manner as remarkable as convincing, the

relation is proved in

which the Old High German forms

s6, ihd, thai,

mentioned stand to the Gothic

iMsy thd
:

[G. Ed.

p. 384.]

one must

first

transpose these into syo, thyd, &c.,

before they can pass as original forms for the Old High Ger-

man.
obtains

Our mother

tongue, however, in the case before us,

the Sclavonic, where the

more explanation through

demonstrative base

TO may

indeed be simply inflected

through

all

the cases: in several, however, which

partly given above,

most probable, that

has extended
for that
it

we have It is it occurs also in union with YO. in the Old High German the combinaall

tion of the base of the article with the old relative pronoun
itself

over

the cases of the three genders

is

does not belong to the feminine alone

neuter

seen

from the masculine and

(d'^u),

instrumental form dt/u

and from the dative

also

plural,

where together with

in

dhn
dien.

occurs

dyem

(diem),

and,

Notker,

always
demu,

According to

this, I

deduce the forms

difhr, d'es,

&e.,

from

dyer, dyes

(for dyis),

dyemu (from dyamu); so

and thence to
e.

that, after suppression

of the vowel following the y, that

i

letter has vocalized itself first to

Ac-

cording to

this,

therefore, des,

and the Gothic genitive

B B

370
this,

ADJECTIVES.
would be, in their origin, just as different as in the
In the neuter, on the
blind'-ata
left,
i)

accusative feminine dya and thd.

other hand, daz

for dyaz, as Gothic

for blind-

yafa the vowel of the base

DYA
e

is

and the semihas disappeared.

vowel, which above had become

(from

Further support of
bases in the
de-n
(I

my

views regarding the difference of

Gothic tha-na and the Old High

is

German

give the accusative intentionally)

deser,

furnished by

the

demonstrative

which

I explain as

compounded,

and as, in fact, a combination of the Sanskrit

tioned at p. 383 G.
latter of
also, as
i^e

w tya,

men-

ed., for taya,

and

^ sya

for sa-ya, the

which has a

full

declension in the Old Sclavonic,

a simple word.

I>eser stands, therefore, for dya-s'dir

ai);

and our Modern German

above
deser,

diespr rests, in fact,

is

upon

a more perfect dialectic form than that which

to us in the

preserved
dia-sir;

namely, upon dya-sSr or

referred

to
(I.

which the
strange,

Isidorean dhea-sa, mentioned by

Grimm

795.), at least in respect of the first syllable,

no

longer appears

for

dliea

from dhia

for

dhya,*

answers admirably to the Sanskrit

syllable
.<?a

tya,

answers
6),

to

the

Sanskrit Gothic

and the final nominative

form
"

sa

(Greek
6.

which has not the sign of

case.
first

Remark

The

adjective bases which from their

origin end in ya, as

favourable to the

M/Z>J^ = Sanskrit madhya, are less retention of the y of the definite pronoun
diffi-

for to the feminine or plural neuter p/m^'-vw for jp/en/a-yu a

midy-yu would be analogous, which, on account of the

[G. Ed. p. 385.]

culty of pronouncing

it,

does not occur, but

may have
yn-ya
;

originally existed in the form midyo-yu, or mid-

for the masculine

as,

nominative midy^r

is

from midya-ir

for midya-yaTf

in Gothic, the feminine genitive-form

If,

ntidynizus

from midyn-yizds.

however, according to

this

even hvar-yaizds (from hvar-yayiz6s) be used, and analogous

* D,
th,

and dh are interchanged according to

different authorities.

ADJECTIVES.
fontis in several other cases, so that the base

371

YA

is

therein

doubled,

we must

recollect, that in the

its

Lithuanian also the

itself,

base J^, besides also, with

composition with adjectives, combines

for

itself,

stronger personification
it
'

and,

indeed, in such a manner, that

is

then doubly declijied,

as yis-sai (for yis-yai*),

289.

'

he ' yo-yo, of him,' &c."

;

The

participle

present
singular

has,

in Gothic,

preserved

only the

nominative

masculine of the definite

declension, e.g. gibands, "giving,"

as well

which

may

be deduced

from a theme

oijiyand-s (see p.

GIBAND, according to the analogy 164), as from GIBAXDA, according to

(.

the analogy of iTi^'-s

135.).

The

Pali (see p. 300) and

of a

Old High German support the assumption

theme

GJBANDA,

as

an extension of the original

GIBAND;
theme from

whence, then, by a

new

addition,
as,

the

indefinite

GIBANDAN has B LINDA', and it

bases have been

arisen,
is

above,

BLINDAN
all

very probable that

unorganic n

preceded by an older with a vowel terall

mination
{nd,
r,

for as

bases which terminate in a consonant

are in their declension, with the excep;
.

and

n, . 125.)

tion of the nominative nd-s, alike obtuse so

it

[G. Ed. p, 386.]

would not be necessary for

GIBAND,
itself to

in order to

belong, in the indefinite adjective, to a

weak theme, or one

gibandan (com-

with a blunted declension, to extend

pare
(see

p. 302), unless for the sake of the nominative gibanda

. 140.).

no feminine theme charanti has been formed from the unorganic theme charanta, mentioned at p. 319 G. ed.
290. In the Pali,

* Ruhig (by Mielke,

p. 68)

wrongly gives ai as the emphatic adjunct,

as the doubling of the * in ta^gai, szisstii, yusai is clearly to be explained

through the assimilative power of the y (see p. 353, Note +). The termination ai answers to the neuter tai, mentioned at . 157., for tat^ which
latter is contained in the

compound
is

tut-tai

(comp. kok-tai, tok-taX).

After

two consonants, however, the y

not kurs-sai.

entirely dropped;

hence

e.g. kurs-ai,

BB

372

ADJECTIVES.
form eharanfa has arisen from

for the masculine and neuter

the necessity of passing from a class of declensions termi-

nating in a consonant into one more convenient, terminating

with a vowel in the theme.

The
.

Sanskrit, however, forms

from bases terminating in a consonant the feminine theme

by the addition of a vowel

comes
charanti,

{i,

see

119.); e.g.

from charant m.,

and there was therefore no reason in the

the

Pali to give also to

more recent form eharanfa a

Here, again, the Gothic stands
the Pali, for
it

feminine theme charantd.

in remarkable accordance with

has pro-

duced no feminine base

GIB AND

from the presupposed

GIBANDA
it {as

and therefore,

also, the indefinite

GIBAN DAN
to

has no feminine,

GIBANDON,
which

nom. gibnndo, answering

has
arisen

BLIND ON to BLINDAN);
{ei=-i, . 70. \

but the feminine form

gihandei

from

the

old

theme GIBAND, in analogy with the Sanskrit charanti, has become GIBANDEIN, by the later addition of an n.
Hence, according to
.

142., in

the

nominative gihandei
this

must have

arisen.

It is not,

however, right to regard

nominative as a production of the more recent theme, bat

as a transmission from the ancient period of the language,
for it answers to

the feminine Sanskrit nominative chalike

is

ranti

{%.

137.),

and to Lithuanian forms

sukanti,

"the

turning," for
sible.

which a theme sukantin

i

nowise admis-

In Latin, bases in

or

f,

originally feminine,

must
a

have arisen
consonant:
.

from adjective
thus
:

bases

terminating

with

FERENTI
and
this

from

FERENT
i,

(compare

119. geniln-c-s)

feminine

as

is

the case in

Lithuanian, as well with the participles (see

[G. Ed.
p. 387.]

p. 174,

Note) as
has

with the adjective bases in u

(p. 363),

in

some
i

cases no longer

remembered

its original destination,

:

and been imparted

in
(for i-d),

to the other

genders

hence the ablatives

genitive plural in i-um, neuter plural in ia

(ferenti{d), fprenti-um, ferenfi-a);

and hence

is

explained,
that

what

must otherwise appear very

surprising,

the

ADJKCTIVES.
participles,
t,

373

when standing

as substantives, freely take this

which

is

introduced into them from the feminine adjec-

tive {infante, sapienfe).

"Remark.

In the yu
I

of k'epan'yu, the

Old High German

feminine of kepantir,

recognise the regular defining eleplinter.

ment, as above in plinfyu, answering to the masculine

On
it is

account

of the participial feminines in

y//,

therefore,

not requisite to presuppose masculines in yer, accordto

ing

the

analogy of midyer, mi^yu, midynz, partly as

kppenter and kepantaz, incline, in none of their cases, to the

declension of tnidySr, midynz, and

indefinite base in

also

as

the derivative

an has sprung from

KEPANTA,

and not

from KEPANTYA: therefore m.

f.

k'ppanto

{=Goih\c gibanda),

n. kepantn

to the

(= Gothic giband6). This only is peculiar Old High German participle present, in relation to
its

other adjectives, that in

retains

uninflected adverbial state

it

the defining pronominal

i;

base

YA

in

its

contrac-

tion to
It
is,

therefore kepanti, " giving," not kepanff like plinf.

however, to be observed, that

there

is

far

more

frequent occasion to use this form divested of case terminations in the participle present, than in
tives,
all

other adjecin

as

the

definite

form

in

nds

in

Gothic,
it;

the

nominative singular masculine, corresponds to

it

and as
place of

may

be assumed, that here the

supplies the
;

the case termination, which has been laid aside

is

so that

it

very often arbitrary whether the definite form of the

participle, or the uninflected

form
is

in

i,

be given.

So in

Grimm's hymns

(II. 2.). svstollens

rendered by the unintaufanter, although the

flected ufpurrenti,

and haptizans by

reverse might just as well occur, or both participles mit^ht

stand
in the

same form, whether

that of the nominative

or adverbial.
tioned
**

by

As regards the Old Saxon forms menGrimm, namely, slApandyes or slnpondeas,

dormieniisr gnomondye, " mcBrenfes," huandynm, " habiton-

iibusr they should, in

my

opinion,

be rather adduced in

374
proof of the

ADJECTIVES
propositioD, that the
participle

present has,

in the dialect mentioned, preserved the defining element

more

truly than

other adjectives;

and that those forms

p. 362,

have maintained themselves in the degree of the Gothic

[G. Ed. p. 388.]

forms

like

manvyana, mentioned at

than that a theme in va belonged to the Old High

German

participle present before its conjunction with the pronominal

syllable."

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
291.
suffix

The comparative
tara,

is

expressed in Sanskrit by the

feminine

tard,

and

the
to

superlative

by tama,

feminine tamd,
culine

which are added

the

common mas;

theme of the positive e.g. punya-tara, punya-tama, from punya, "pure"; suchi-tarut suchi-tama, from suchi, "clean"; halavat-tara, balavat-tama, from
and
neuter
halavat,

"strong."
the

In

the
a>7aj^

Zend,
tara

through

perverunite

sion

of

language

and aj^^^

^ma

themselves with (in place of the theme) the nominative

singular masculine
p. 383)
;

e.

g.

ajZm^<Kmj> huskdtara (Vend. S.

from

huska, nominative

masculine ^y^>' huskd,

"dry";

Aj^j^'^^^goJjJ

spentdtema from spenta,

"holy";

As^j^vM-^Aj^uj^gt?
verethrazant,
'

verethrazamtema
verethrazans,

(Vend.

S. p. 43)

from

nom.

" victorious "

(literally,

Vritra-slaying ").*

According to

my opinion

wttara owes

* The

participle present xant^ the nominative of

which

recognise in

j3v}4(j<}/oc/C9 verethra-zans, rests on the analogy of the frequently-

occurring <j<^AJ(2)> upa-zoitf " let him strike"; since, in fact, the root zan
(Siinskrit ^fT han) suppresses
its

final vowel,

and has treated the a which

first

remains according to the analogy of the conjugation vowel of the

sixth class (see p. 104).

and

The Sanskrit radical ^^ han, " slaying," which ap-

pears in a-tt^rl Vritra-han, " Vritra slaying," and similar compounds, has,
in

Zend, taken the ioTVojan, the nominative of which is

pa^jdo (Vend. S.
p. 43),

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
origin to the root it tn (tar, step beyond " "to place beyond "
its
. 1.),
(e. g.

375
[G. Ed.
p.
;

"to

389.J

"

over a river") hence,

In the Latin, as Lisch

also,

the substantive tara, " a float."

has acutely remarked, with this root are connected the preposition trans, and also terminus, as that which
is

overstepped,

and probably

also tra^ in in-tra-re, penetra-re.

The

superla-

tive sufl&x I derive, with

Grimm

(III. 5S3.),

from that of the

comparative, although

assume no theoretic necessity that the

superlative must have been developed through the degree of

the comparative.
factory etymology;

But tama, as a primitive, presents no

I

satis-

formerly thought of the base tth

tan,

"to extend," whence, also, raroj could be explained; but then

im tama would be no regular formation, and I now prefer recognising in it an abbreviation of tarama, partly because
torily

the

superlative
as

sufl&x

ishtha
its

may
is

be satisfaciyas,

considered

derived from

comparative

through the

suffix tha,

which, in the Greek,

contained in

the form of to, as well in KT-Toq as in Taroq, for rapTos or

rapoTog.

In this manner, therefore,

:

is

formed raro-s and

TPm tama-s

they both contain the same primitive, abbreviated in a similar manner, but have tiken a different derivative suffix, as in
iteyL-n-ro^

contrasted with "T^^ panchama,

is

"the

fifth":

the vowel, however,

more

truly retained

in the derivative rarog than in its base repo^.

In Latin,

TfWB tama-s has

ultimus);
is

become

timu-s {optimus, intimus, extimus,

t

and,

by the exchange of the

in

witli

s,

which
hence.

more usual in Greek than

Latin,

simus;

43),

and is analogous to the Sanskrit ^7i/A<i, from, panthan, mentioned

at p. 308.

More

nsnally, however, do in

Zend nominatives stands

in the

place of the Sanskrit an of the suffix txint and vd/ts ; so that, in Zend, the
sign of the noYninative has taken the place of the Indian n, the said sign

being o for

*,

according to $.56".

In cuk5 vdo, from

^t^ vdm,

the

2^nd

o may

also be looked

upon as belonging

to the base (oomp.

BumouTs

Ya^na, Notes,

p. cxxviii. &c.).

376

ADJECTIVES.
However, the simus is, which we will

maxlmus [mac-simus) for mag-simus.

is

generally

preceded by the syllable

hereafter explain.
292.

As
p.

in comparatives a relation
390.]

between two, and in

[G. Ed.

superlatives a relation between

many,

lies

at the bottom,

it is

natural that their suffixes should also be

is

transferred to other words, whose chief notion

individual-

ized through that of duality or plurality: thus they appear in

is "which of two persons?" "which of more than two persons.^" oinTT^ katama-s, ^oFrTTlTT ekataras is "one of two persons," and Skatama-s, "one of more than two." It is hardly necessary to call attention

pronouns, and cir?R^ katara-s

and

to similar forms in Greek, as Trorepog (for Korepos), eKorepo^.

In eKacTTog the superlative

different modification
"

suffix

(otoj for ta-rog) presents a

from that

in ekafama-s,
'

and expresses

the one of two persons,"

instead of

the one of

many
tara

persons."
is

In Latin and German, indeed, the

suffix

not in use in genuine comparatives, but has maintained

itself in

pronouns in Latin in the form of

;

TERU (ter, teru-m),

;

and in Gothic in that of THAR A hence uter, neuter, alter Gothic, hva-thar,* "which of two persons?" Old High German,
[G. Ed.
p.

391.]

huMar, which has remained

to us in the

adverb weder, as an abbreviation of the Middle High Ger The Gothic resembles the Latin
nominative from
its its

in

withdrawing the sign of the

masculine bases in ra, as the latter does from

corresponding bases in ru.

Hence, above, hvathar

for hvathar{a)s, as

alter for alterus; so also vair,

" man,"
is

Latin vir for virus.

This sup-

pression has, however, not extended itself universally in both languages.

In the Gothic, as
sonants
;

it

appears, the s

protected

by the two preceding con;

hence akrs, " a field" (corop. Grimm, p. 599) still the adjective nommatives gaurs, " mournful " (theme Gaura, comp. Sanskrit ^ftx ghora,
"terrible"), and svirs, "honoured," occur, where this cause
is

wanting,

where, however, the preceding long vowel and the diphthong au

may
here

have operated.
first

In

valr.,

indeed, a diphthong precedes

If, in

but the a

is

introduced through the euphonic law 82.

ri,

Latin, in adjective
,

bases in

only the masculine has predominantly given up the

with tbc

preceding

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
man, combined with a
also,
^rrfj^H antara-8,

377
Anthar,

particle of negation neweder.

our anderer, belongs here, and answers to the Sanskrit

whose

initial syllable is
itself

the

same which
*'

in

^^
TI

any a, "

alius,'^

has united

with the relative base

alter.^^
If,

ya.

From

this "^PH

anya comes anyatara,

however, ^HKK antara means, in general, " the other," the

comparative

suffix

is

here intended to denote the person

this

following after, passing over

thing;

so

is,

also, the

Latin ceterus to be considered, from ce as demonstrative

base (compare
" the other,"
ci-s, ci-tra);

and

so, also, in

Sanskrit, itarOf
i,

comes from the demonstrative base

as,

in

Latin, the adverb iterum from the

same base."*
suflBx,

In our

German,

also,

wieder

is

the comparative

and the

whole rests, perhaps, on a pre-existing Old High German word huia-dar or huyadar, with a change of the interrogative
-weder.
p. 37j0,

meaning into the demonstrative, as in toeder, entThe icie in wieder, therefore, should be regarded as, die in dieser; and herein we may refer to the Isidoric
it

dhea-sa.

293. In prepositions, also,

finds
fix,

cannot be surprising

if

one

them invested with a comparative or superlative sufor if some of them occur merely with a comparative
For
e.g.

termination.

at the

bottom of

all

genuine prepositions.
its is to

preceding

i,

while

the feminine acris might have permitted

I

havebeenremoved,justas well as the masculine,

stance that the vowel

can find the reason of this

is

firm adherence of the feminine to the termination

i

only in the circum

it is

particularly agrees with that gender, as

*?.

in

Sanskrit (although long), according to

for the feminine base.

119., the true

vowel of formation

In Gothic, the suporession of the nominative sign

* is universal in bases in sa

and

.si,

in order that, as the final

vowel of the
;

base
e.ff.

is

suppressed,

two

should not meet at the end of the word

hence

the nominative drus,

"a

tall,"

from

DRUSA;

garuns,

"a market,"
which

from
*

GARUXSI,
I

f.

have traced back the comparative nature of

iter,

this adverb,

Voss derives from

Forster'8 Sanskrit

"the journey,"

for the first time in

i.

my

Review of

Grammar

in the Heidelb. Jahrb. 1818.

p. 479.

378

ADJECTIVES.

at least in their original sense, there exists a relation between

[G. Ed. p. 392.]

two

opposite

directions

thus,

" over,"

"from." "before," "to," have the relations "under," "in," "towards,"

"

from," as their counter-poles and points of com-

parison, as the right is opposed to the left;

and

is

always

expressed in Latin,

also,

with the comparative

suffix, dexter

(^frpiT dakshina), sinister.

ture of these formations

is

As, however, the comparative nano longer recognised in the present

condition of the Latin, the suffix ter admits of the further

addition
exterior,

of the
interior)
;

customary

ior

(dexterior,

sinisterior,

like

while the superlative timus has affixed

itself to the core of the

word {dextimus or -tumus,

Latin, contain

sinistimus).

The

prepositions which, in

a comparative

suffix,

are

inter, prceter, propter,

the adverbially-used subter,

pariier).*

and probably,
inter

also, obiter

(compare audacter,
Wn(T. ardar,

To

answers the Sanskrit

"among," "between";
wanting, as in Sanskrit

for which, however, a primitive

an

is

the relation "in"

is

always expressed by the locative. Notwithregard to

its suffix, is

standing

this, antar, in

an analogous

word
\(r.

to Tfiw^ prdtar, " in the

morning," from the preposition

Ed.

p. 393.]

pra, " before,"t with a lengthened a, as in the

was of

opinion,

when

I first

treated this subject (Heidelb. Jahrb.

i

1818, p. 480), that ob-i-ter must be so divided, and

looked upon as the

is

vowel of conjunction.

As, however, the preposition ob

connected with

the Sanskrit ^fij aAhi, " to," " towards," the division obi-ter might also be

made, and the original form of the preposition recognised in

the Sanskrit derivative
tas.

obi

observe

^tfim

abhi-tas, "near," from abhi with the suffix

is

The common

idea,

however, that obiter

compounded of oh and

iter cannot entirely

be disproved, partly as then obiter would be a similar

&c. in certain compounds.
track,

compound to obviam. t Comp. ni, pari, prati,

numerous

for ni,

Formations
intelligible

which do not quite follow the usual

Indian Grammarians.

and are rendered

analogies, are nevertheless frequently misunderstood

by by the

Thus Wilson, according

*'

to

native authorities,

derives v^THT antar from anta, " end," with rd,

to arrive at,"

and the

analogous

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
Greek
-npuit

319

from

itpo.

For the

relation " under,'" the San-

skrit has the preposition

w^H

adhas, which I have else-

where explained

as

coming from the demonstrative base

V a; from which, also, come ^vt: a-dhara and ^VH. a-dhama, "the under one," or "the most under," to which inferus and
infimus are akin, as

fumus

to

^nr dhuma-s,

" smoke,"" and,

with a nasal prefixed, as in

d/ii^/

in relation to ^fi? abhU

and in

dfitpot,

"ambo^^ answering to
suffixes

g^

ubhdu. Old Sclaare, in

vonic oba.

The

v^ dhara and VT dhama

my

opinion, only slightly-corrupted forms of the tara and

fama

first,"

mentioned in . 291.; as also in thr prathama, "the m. from pra, " before," the T sound of the suffix is

somewhat

differently transposed.

The

suffix

dhas of adhas,
fas,

" beneath," however, has exactly the same relation to

in ^nrrr atas, "

from here," as dhara, dhama, have

a cognate form of subtus,
tas, like

to tara,

tama; and therefore adhas, as a modification of

respect to
its suffix,

otas, is, in

intus.

The
the
it,

usual intention of the suffix irs

tus, is

that of the Latin

to express distance
6ev

from a
.

place.

In

this, also,

Greek

(from

Beg,

comp.

217.) corresponds

with

which, in regard
in ^avfi adhas
(.

to its

T sound,

rests

on the form \i^ dhas

which only occurs in
tas,

16

),

as the latter also serves as the patdit,

tern of the Old Sclavonic suffix

pronouns, and expresses the same relation as ttr

tus: e.g. ovo-udU, "hence,"* ono-udu, "thence."

dev,

The form
p. 394.]

du, however, corresponds to the euphonic alteration, which

final

as in the Sanskrit

must suffer before

that into d (see
.

[G. Ed.
235./.),

sonant letters

(. 25.), viz.

which ia

Zend has become

fixed

(. 56*.).

analogoas word prdtar from pra, with a<,

theless,

**

to go."

A
are,

relation,

never-

between anta, "end," and antar, "among," cannot perhaps be

denied, as they agree in the idea of room.

They

however,

if

they

are related, sister forms, and the latter

is

not

an offshoot of the former.

remarkably
to

The demonstrative

baae

OVO

answers
;^'.

the

Zend

jkiM ava, with

for a, according to

255. (a.).

380
"Remark. form of the
"there/'

ADJECTIVES.

Dobrowsky
suffix,

p.

451

gives

udil

as the

full

just as he also lays

down a

suffix dcJye,

which forms adverbs of

place, as kudye,

"where?"

onildye,

As, however, the definitive pronoun, which has

p. 353, &c., exists in these

been treated of at
ttdH,

two adverbs,
so

adye, and forms, with sche, udHsche, Hdyesche, for yudu,

&c.;

and as

this

pronoun
also

is,

in

general,
is

frequently

compounded with other adverbs, there

assume that
it

every reason to
ono-udtl,
itself in

is

contained

in

ovo-udu,
is

on-udye, C-udyp, and others.

u-du. yu-dye, to be explained ?

But how
I

the

cannot speak with confi.

dence on

this point

but

as,

according to
ii,

255.

(gr.),

in the last

element of the diphthong

a vocalised nasal

is

sometimes

recognised, yudA, yudye, might be regarded as corruptions

of yondu, yondye, and, in respect to their nasal, be

compared
might

with the Latin

indcf uvde,

from

I, U.

J^wrfye, yildyH,

also have proceeded

from the feminine accusative yu, which

(.

would again conduct us to a nasal

preposition

266.): this accusative

would then stand as theme to the derivative adverb, as our

h'mtcr,

Old High German

accusative,

hiniar,

has arisen
the

from

hiuy

petrified

on which

Gothic

hina-dag, "this day," "to day," throws light.

suffix dye,

Before the

however, elder form

vowel of the base
idyesche, "
(6.),

de,

occur also the pronouns

in a simple form, as gdye, " where .^" (more anciently kde,

with

tlie final

KO suppressed);
As

zdye (older
accord-

sde), "

here
.
i,

"";

where

" (relative).

e (e),

ing to
older

255.
I

frequently stands as the corruption of an

recognise in the suffix de the Sanskrit fv dhi,

adhi, "over,"
a),

from ^fu

strative base

which, in Greek,
aXAodi)"

"upon" "towards," (from the demonis far more widely diffused

in the form of
294. In

di {-nodi,

German, even more than in Latin, the preposishew themselves inclined to combine with the comtions
parative
suffix.

To

the Sanskrit ^TnTT antar, Latin

inter,

men-

tioned above (at p. 392,G.ed.), corresponds our unter, Gothic

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
uvonr, with u for the old
ever, the, in
a,

381
If,

according to

. 66."*

how-

my

opinion, incontrovertible original identity

[G. Ed. p. 395.]

ofthe latter with the two former is recognised,

one must

not, with

Grimm (III.

260.), derive undar from the

preposition und, " as far as," &c., by a suffix ar, and so again

divide the dar

for unrfor.f as transmitted

from an ancient

period

of the
of a

language, was

already formed, before the

existence

German

dialect,

and the abovementioned

itself

preposition
relations
.is

has only to dispose

according

to

the

of sound

mentioned in
language, or
"

. 66. 91.

The matter
"after,"
to

different

with the Old High

German

af-tar,

for

the

primitive

languages,

transmit

us

only ^TJ apa, duo,

inter,

from

";

to which, in the spirit of

WiTT antar,
has
first

sutler,
itself

united

Sec, the old comparative suffix upon German ground. In Gothic,

I

fjffra

means "again," which

adjectives,

look upon

as an abbrevia-

tion of nftara, as in Latin extra, intra, contra,

and others,
In

as
to in

feminine
the
tra,

from

exfera,
oftra,

&c.

regard

termination
thro,

however,

and

similar

forms
in-

appear to

me

as

datives,

i. e.

original

strumental
as

(.

160.), as also, in

the Sanskrit, this case occurs

an adverb,

e.g. in

^nRiJJ antar^na, "between."

tra,

Per-

haps, also, the Sanskrit pronominal adverbs in

although

they have a locative meaning, like "ij^ yatra, " where,'* are to be regarded as instrumental forms, according to
the
principle
in
Tf

of the

Zend language
Crit.
.

(.

158.),

and of the

gerund
tra
like

ya,

(Gramm.
trd,

633.
tttt

Rem.), so that their

:

would be

to be derived

from

tard

compare forms

HH^^^I manushya

"inter homines"

(Gramm.

Crit.

* Regarding dar and tar for thar, see

. 91.

f Grimm however,
tionship in the

also,

at

II.

121. &c., divides hrdth-arj

vatar

("brother," " father"), although the

many

anologons words denoting rtla-

German and

tie cog late languages clearly prove the

Tsound

to belong to the derivative suffix (see

Gramm.

Crit. . 178.

Rem.).

382
.

ADJECTIVES.
As
aflra is related to aflar, so is the Gothic

252. suff. trd).

vithra, "against," to the

the primitive of which

is

Old High German widar, our widevt supplied by the Sanskrit through its

[G. Ed. p. 396.] inseparable preposition f^ vi, which expresses separation, distraction, e.g. in visrip, " to go from one

another," "to disperse."

f^T ni,

Exactly similar
first to

is

the Sanskrit

to

which

was the

prove the meaning "below"

to belong,*

and whence comes the adjective tT^ nicha, "low" (Gramm.Crit. . lll.)> the base of our nieder. Old High Ger[G. Ed.
p.

397.]

man
G.

ni-dar.f

From

hin-dary

Old High
177. c).

German
discussed

hin-tar,
(p,

comes our
ed.

hin-ter

which has already been

Gothic

394,

compare Grimm. HI.

sun-dar,

In

the

Old

High

German

sun-drd,
is,

" seorsim,"

afterwards a preposition, our sondern, dar

suffix,

in

like

manner, clearly the comparative

and

the

base appears to me, in spite of the difference of signi*

in
It is usual to attribute to it the

meaning "in," "into," which cannot

which has been already expressed in
Gothic

any way be supported.

t Grimm
259)

assents to

my opinion,

another place, regarding the relationship of ff ni and nidar (III. 268,

:

he wishes, however, to divide thus nid-ar, and

to suppose a

verb nithan, nath, neihun, to which the Old High German gindda (our

Gnade) may belong.

It appears that

Does, however, ^i-narfa really signify Aw7n$/i<flw?

it

only the meaning gratia can be proved to belong to

and

this is also given

by Grimm,
root,

I.

617. and II. 235. gratia, humanitas^

to

where he divides ki-nd-da, which appears

me

correct,
suffix
;

and according
as in the

to

which nd would be the

"

and da the derivative

affiattis," to

etymo-

logically clear ki-wd-da,

to

"

which the Sanskrit gives

(^. 09.) {vaia^ vaivo).

too,

blow," as root, the Gothic gives v6

To gi-nd-

-da, indeed, the Sanskrit supplies no root nd^ but perhaps nam, " to bend
oneself," the

before

m of which, according to the laws of euphony, is suppressed which does not produce Guna as nata, " bent," naft, " bending,' with the preposition sam, san-nati, which Wilson explains by " reverence,"
t,
;

" obeisance," " reverential

sition

salutation."
is,

As the Gothic
as

inseparable prepo-

ga. Old

High German gi or Art,

would, however,

identical with the Sanskrit sam,

Grimm first acutely remarked, gi-nd-da has much the same formation
still

with aan-na-ti :

it

better agree with the feminine

passiv*

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
fication, related to the

383

Sanskrit ^pr sanh ''with" (compare

with,*"

Gothic samnth, " together

Old High German samant),

according to
%.

and the
Latin

u,

therefore, is

from

a,

66.

The
in

con-trcL,

however,

is

nearly just as

much opposed

meaning
contra,
also,

to its primitive

cum

and as cum (compare avv)

belongs, in like manner, to ^j^ sam, so sundar, sundru,

and

would

be, in a double respect, sister forms.

Observe,

the Gothic samath. Old

High German samant, "toanswers

surprisingly
to

gether

with":

the latter

the

Sanskrit Wf'it samanta (from

sam + arda, "an

in all

end*^)>

the

ablative of which, samantdt, as also the adverb, samanlatas,

mean "everywhere." Perhaps, too, German adverbs in nt (Grimm. HI.

is

other Old High

214.), the said ^nT anta

contained, for the

in

meaning " end," cannot be unexpected adverbs of place and time, and, like Mitte, "mid,"

passive participle san-na-td.

Be

that as

it

may,

so

much

is certain,

that

there

is

no necessity

for a hypothetic

Gothic base nith or nath, either for " below,"' and

the substantive gi'tiada or for the preposition nidar, as they can be fully
set at rest

by the existence of a Sanskrit primitive f^

ni,

the comparative suffix dor, which frequently occurs in prepositions. as the circumstance that genuine original prepositions never

And

come from
etymoto divide

verbs, but are connected with pronouns, I must, with regard to its

logy, keep back every verb from our nidar.

Grimm wishes also

German

the Gothic preposition vi-thrd, Old High

wi-dar, into vith-ra,

wid-ar, and to find their base in the Anglo-Saxon preposition widh,

English with, Old Sclavonic wid, Old

vfd,

Norman

vidh, Swedish vid,

Danish

which mean " with," and, according

If,

to appearance, are

wanting in

the Gothic and High German.

frequent interchange ofr,i, and

however, one considers the easy and

(^ift ran", " water, "=marp, ^poT6s=

recognise, in the

^J(^ mritas, " mortuus "), one would rather

positions, dialectic variations of

above preis

sound from the Gothic mith, which

of

the same import with them (=:the Zend t^xi^ ^ot), and which, in most
of the dialects mentioned, maintains itself equally with the other forms:
as
is
it

often occurs, in the historj- of languages, that the true form of a

it.

word

equally preserved with a corruption of

384
(compare
ning,"
it

ADJECTIVES.
inmitten,

"in the midst") and Anfang, "beginfirst

attaches itself

to the

prepositional ideas

therefore hinont, "this side," enovl, "that side," would be the same as " at this end," " at that end." With regard
to the comparative forms there
is,

further, the

Old High

Germnn
[G. Ed.

for-dar, fur-dir

(*' porro,''^

" amplius"'), our fiir-der

to be mentioned,
p. 398.]

whence
"

der vordere, vorderste.

1.

Remark

As

we have endeavoured
I

above to explain the Gothic af-tra and vithra as datives,

lieve I can with
still

be-

thrd or taro

more confidence present the forms in as remarkable remains of ablatives. Their meanplace,

ing corresponds most exactly to that of the Sanskrit ablative,

which expresses the withdrawing from a

the Greek adverbs in dev
;

and to that of

"whence?" tha-tlirS, " thence," yam-thro, " hence," alya-thrd, " from another quarter," inna-thrS, "from within," uta-thro, "from without," af-tar6, " from behind," dala-thrd, " from under," and
thus hva-thrd,

some

others, but only

from pronouns, and, what

I

is

nearly the

same, prepositions.
not from
dal,

might, therefore, derive dalathr6,

"a

valley," but

suppose a connection with

the Sanskrit
aeresis

"srv^

adhara,

" the under person," with aph-

of the a and the very

common exchange

of the r
is

with
so

I (. 20.).

Perhaps, however, on the contrary, thai

the notion of the part below.

named from

As
5BT

to the

ablative forms

in tarS, thro, the 6 corresponds to the San6,

;

skrit dt (. 179.), with

according to rule, for

(. 69.),

and apocope of the

from
ovTUiT
(. 183.

so that 6 has the

dt

same

relation

to

the to-be- presupposed

that in

Greek

ovroi has to ovtu><:,

Note

* p. 20l).

Many

other Gothic ad" hastily^" pran<^,

verbs in o,as

sinteind, "

a\way sr sniumundd,

" suddenly," thridyp, " thirdly,** &c.,

might then, although

an ablative meaning does not appear more plainly in them than in the Latin perp'^tuo, cito, subito, tertio, and others, be
rather considered as ablatives than as neuter accusatives of
indefinite

(Grimm's weak) forms;

so that

thridt/6 yfOu\d

DEGREES OF COMrARISON.
answer
to the Sanskrit ablative iritiyit

385

while the

ecmmon
It

Gothic declension extends the ordinal bases in a by an

unoro^anic n
;

thus

THRJDY^N,
all

nom.

thridya.

must
ren-

be further observed, that

unorganic adjective bases in

an

are, in general, only used

where the adjective

it
;

is

dered definite through a pronoun preceding

fore the forms in
6,

that there-

which pass for adverbial, are, for the

as-

very reason that

no pronoun precedes them, better

as

signed to the definite (strong) declension than to the indefinite;

especially
adjective,

an

old

which

most of them are only remains of is no longer preserved in other

belong to a period

cases, and, according to their formation,

where the

indefinite adjective declension

had not yet reto the transla-

ceived the unorganic addition of an n.

tion of TovvavriQv, 2 Cor.
ii.

As

7.,

by

thata undaneitho, here of

course andnneithd

is

the neuter accusative;

but the int)ie

ducement
article,

for using the indefinite

form

is

supplied by

and Tovvavriov could not be otherwise

literally reniv. 17.,

dered.

The

case

may

be similar with 2 Cor.

where
as

Castiglione takes thata andavairtho for the

[G. Ed.

p. 399.]
:

nominative, but

Grimm

for the adverbial accusative

it

would

else

be an unsuitable imitation of the Greek text,

to

where to does not belong

opinion, however,
it

avrUa, but to eKa(pp6v.

In

my

can in no case be inferred from these

d,

passages that the adverbs in

without an article preceding

them, belong to the same category.

neilhd

Moreover,

also,

anda-

and andavairthd do not occur by themselves alone adAs, then, thro has
thrdt, it
is

verbially.

shewn

itself to

us to be an

abbreviation of
sion of the
<

a question whether the suppresrequisite, as

by a universal law of sound was

in

in Greek, and

the Prakrit,

all

3'

sounds are rejected

It
is

from the end of words, or changed

that the

into 2.

certain

sounds

(t,

th, d).

which, in

the

actual

condi-

tion of the Gothic, are finals, as far as

we can

follow their

etymology, had originally a vowel after them;

c c

so that

386
they are
final

ADJECTIVES.
sounds of a second generation, comparable
(.

in that respect to the Sclavonic final consonants

255.

/.).

This holds good, for example, with regard to

tli,

d, in

the

3d person singular and plural, and the 2d person plural

= Sanskrit
th

fir ti,

^nT

anti,

^ tha

or

f{

ta

and

I explain the

or

d,

which, in pronominal bases, expresses direction to

a place, as coming from the Sanskrit suffix

v dha (^ ha)\ which, in like manner, in pronouns expresses the locative

relation.

The passing over from

the locative relation to

the accusative, expressing the direction whither, cannot be

surprising, as, even in Sanskrit, the

common

locative ad-

verbs in
sative

tra,

and the ablatives in

i.

tas,

occur also with accu-

meaning,

e.

expressing the direction to a place

(see tatra in

my

Glossary).

The Sanskrit

suffix

V dha
is

appears,

in

common

language, abbreviated to ha, and

found
base
i

indeed, only in i-ha, "here," from the pronominal

and
I

tt^ sa-ha

in the Vedic dialect and Zend sa-dha

It

which

derive from the pronominal base sa.

its

ought,

according to

origin,

and consistently with the usual

destination of the suffix dha, to

has, however,

mean "here

or there":

it

become a
iha,

preposition, which
is,

expresses " with."

fre/

The adverb
[G. Ed.

"here,"

in Zend,

a5^ idha,* and

as

p. 400.]

quently occurs in combination with

na,

"not";
j^y

so that xs(^\i^
ndit,

naMhat means
"not
*'

" nor," answering to

"neither"

(literally

it,"

From

AJAJ

ava and aj^/oaj aMa,

this " (mas.),

from na + it, . 33.). comes aj(oaja

* Vend. Sade,

p.

368. several times: a)as79a50^ "^^ajI? A5 (P^

^^^

imah idha vacho framrava, " fuBC hie verba enuntia," which Anquetil
translates

by " en prononfant

bien ees paroles."

In the same page also

occurs repeatedly aj(OAJ adha, with the same meaning, from the demonstrative base a, as in the Veda's

^U
;

adfia (Rosen's Sp. p. 10), without

perceptible meaning.

t a + makes ^, according to $.
naidha.

2.

and from nidha

is

formed, by

28.,

DEGREES OE COMPARISON.

387

To the avadha and Aj^^;rAj aeta-dha (Vend. S. p. 164). Zend-Vedic suffix dha corresponds most exactly the Greek
da, in evda
i-dlia,

and evrav-da, "here."

are,

Perhaps evda and

base,

aj(oj

iha,

with regard to their

identical

evda, therefore, is for

nda from

tda (comp. in, inde), as nasals

are easily prefixed to another consonant, and thus d/i^/ an-

swers
the

to ^fi? abhi, afx<poi to

^>^ iibkdu, Old Sclavonic oba;

is

but avda, in the triple compound ev-r-avda,

completely

Zend

a}(2aja5

avadha, whose theme ava has been conto av

tracted in the

Greek

(compare av-di and av-ro^, the latter

but in the Old Sclavonic it
is

being combined with the

article),

more

correctly preserved in the

**

form of

OVO* To the word

^^

ihatya,

of this place," which is derived from

suffix
;

^ iha
**

through the with (J from t

propitius

w tya,

corresponds the Greek

suffix,

kvdd<TiO,

compare, with regard to the

prope,

the Latin

from

and, in

the Gothic, frama-thya,

foreigner," through which the preposition

to be

/ram shews

itself

an abbreviation offrama.

As

in the Sanskrit the suffix

W tya belongs only to local adverbs and prepositions, so might

also

the Gothic ni-thyis, "cousin" (for ni-tLyas,

. 135.),

as

propinquus, or one

who

stands

somewhat lower in relationship

[G. Ed.
p. 401.]

than a brother, &c.,t be derived from the

* Before

my
I

acquaintance with the Zend, and deeper examination of

beUeved I could make out the Greek base av to agree with the Sanskrit amu, " ilie," by casting oat the m (as Kovpos with kuthe Sclavonic,
vidra)
:

now, however,

<iS(^

ava and

OVO have

clearly nearer claims to

take the Greek forms betwfen thoni.

t Terms of

relationship often exj>ress the relation, of

the representatives, very remotely, but ingeniously.

which they are Thus f5r naptri,

pitri,

"a grandson,"

is,

have no doubt, compounded of , *'not," and

is

"father"; and "not- father"

regarded as a possessive compound, "not

having as father," in relation to the grandfather,

the grandson.

who

is

not the father of the etymology of

In Latin

it

would be

difficult to find

nepos (nf/x)/-) and the same

aid of the word Vat:r, which

may

be said of our word neffe

without the
In the

is

fully preserved

from the Sanskrit.

C C 2

meaniig

388
ancient preposition

ADJECTIVES.
ni,

mentioned

at p. 382,

from which,
the

in Sanskrit, nitya actually comes,

but differently related,

less

and with a signification answering

of the
e.g. in

to

meaning

of the preposition, namely, sempiternus.

aspirates in

In consideration

Greek being
is

easily interchanged, and,

the Doric,

"OPNIX

said for

"OPNI0, one may

also

recognise in the syllable xi ^^ forms like -jravTa-'x^o-dev Ttavra-xp-tre, TToT^Kaxoo^e, and others, a cognate form of the
suffix 6a, dha,

or of the corrupted
lies,

^ ha (comp.

. 23.).

At

the bottom of these forms

in

my

opinion, as the theme,

at,

the plural neuter, which need not be wondered

as iravra

and TToAAa are also used as

{TToKKd-(Ti^fjLos,

first

members

of

compounds

ttavrd-ixop^o^).

Ti.avTa')(o

might, in the iden"

tity of its

suffix

with 6a, dha, or ha,

said
7ravTa-)(p-c-6,

mean

everywhere ";

whence may then be

&c., as

"from everywhere,"

we combine our
which might
eKet is

locative adverbs
;

wo and da with
versus
illic,

her and hin {woher, wohin)

CKeidev,
illic,

and in Greek,

also, eKe7di, eKeiae,

literally

as

local adverb.

mean in Forms in

illic,

ah

5^0,

however, are in

a measure raised to themes capable of declension, though

only for adverbs, and develope,

also, case-forms, as travTa'xpv,

iravraxoi (old locative and dative), iravTa-x^.

The

addition

of

new

suffixes

or terminations to those already existing,

but which are obsolete, appears to

than, as

me assuredly more

natural

Buttmann

supposes, the introduction of an

axo, in

un-

meaning ax or even
to

which case we should have

divide TTavT-axo-6ev, &c.

But as the x under discusI

sion

has arisen from 6a, dha,

rjxi

think
61,

recognise in the
fVf

Xt of

a corruption of the

suffix

from
fs

dhi

in

which respect might be compared dyxh

a sister form to

meaning of Neffe the negation of the relationship of father points

uncle.

to the

Tlie Indian G'-ammarian?, according to Wilson, see in naptri the

negation, but not the father, but the root /a/, "to fall," and a
suffix
tri.

Un&di

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
^sf^ adhi, "to," "towards," with a nasal introduced.
third

389

As a

form
I

in

which the Vedio-Zend

<re,

suffix

dha appears in

Greek,

notice

with

mrdhya, "midst,"
in the

tlie

form
is

fxeaa-o^,

cr for d, ^ dh, as /zeaof from mil y of which has assimilated itself, The suffix ce, however, in to the a:

that
rest

it

altered

from

its

original

intention to denote

in

a place, to the expression of motion to a place,

d,

answers to the Gothic th or

whence we
iro-ae,

set out in this

examination, in forms like hva-tk,

hvad

John

xiii. 3.

hvad

gagcjis, itov

imayeig

"whither?" also
yain-d, eKPi-ae,

alya-th, a\Ao-<re.
i-th;

To the Zend
mean
'

idha,

Greek

evda, corresponds

which, however, contrary to the original intention of

"thither," but is used as a convii. 7.).

the form, does not

junction" but,"
also,

"

if,"

then " (1 Cor.

To

this class,

belongs ath, which only occurs in combination with than

" but," like ith-than
;

ath-than,

and it has
(.

[G. Ed.

p. 402.]

the Vedic-Zend a- dha as prototype

bination with the relative particle

399.).

Thad, in comis

ei,

which
the

probably

c-on-

nected

with

ij

ya,

has

preserved

original

locative

cited as

meaning together with the accusative, and thad-ei may be "where" and "whither." The d in these forms, answering to the Greek 6, agrees with the rule for the transmutation of sounds
at the
(.

87.)

and

it is

to

be observed that medials

end of a word freely pass into aspirates

(.91.);

compare bauth,
suffix
it.

bu-dum

so

that the Gothic

it

sound of the

under discussion, after

"

has, in

one direction, diverged from

the Greek, has, in another, again approached

Remark
also,

2.

As

the formations in thrd, tard, so

suffix,

we have above recognised ablatives in we find in this comparative

th,

a remnant of the Sanskrit locative; in wliich,

d,

however, as in the adverbs in

the expression of

repose in a place is changed into that of motion to a

place

in hidre,* "hither," Mark xi.

John
vii.

3.

Luke

xiv. 21.; hva-drS,

" whither.?"

35.

On

the other hand, yaindri ac-

* Vide .991.

390

ADJECTIVES.
meaning;
fharei leik, yaindrS

tually occurs with a locative

gaUsand

sik arans, 'o-nov to o-to/^a, K7 (Tvva')(^di^crovTat oi aeroi*

Compare

these forms

with the Sanskrit,

(.

as,

adhari, "in

the lower," and the Lithuanian wilke

ever, the Gothic
i,

197.).

That, how-

which in the genitive plural masculine

to the Sanskrit
is

and neuter answers

corresponds to
if i,

^d

(. 69.),

moreover

proved by preterites like nemum,

as, in Sanskrit,

'we took/ answering to the singular nam;

*rrW

nemima, *we bent ourselves/ answers to

'

"i^fi

nanama

or *nnR nnndmn,
295.

bent myself.'

"

The

superlative suffix ith lama occurs in the Gothic

also in the

form of

TUMAN,

nominative tuma,

or,

with

for

in prepositional derivations, either simply or in

comthus,

bination with the

common

superlative suffix

ISTA

af-ium,a, "posferus" af-tumisfs, " postremus," hin-dumists, " ex~

trem,us.^^

If

have

suffiired

one considers the Indian suffix ^t^ tama, to apocope of the a as in Latin, also, timus apviri-tim, caterva-tim,

pears abbreviated to tim in adverbs like

which
p.

have already,

in

another place (Heidelb. Jahrb. 1818.

480), explained, together with

forms

like legi-iimua,

as

superlatives

one

may

look for that tarn in the Gothic cor-

[G. Ed. p. 403.]

rupted to iana, after the analogy of the ac-

cusative masculine of pronouns, like tha-na

iHT tarn, rov,

hva-

-na=oF? ka-m,
Gothic af-tana,
ni-dana,

"whom?"; and accordingly regard

"

the pre-

positional derivations in tana, Jr/na, as superlative forms; thus,

behind

";

hindana, -nepav, Old High

hie-nieden,

German
As,

"under" (compare our

"here below."

however, in Old High

in

German
t

there exist, also, formations

III. 203, &c.),

ana without a preceding

sound (Grimm

it is

a question whether innana " within," Azana

"

"

abroad,"

forana shortened to forna

" TToppoidev,^^

from the beginning," ferrana

" vylrodev,"

rtimana " from a distance," hdliana

t

heimina

"

oiKodev" have lost &

or a d preceding the a;

or

if

they are formed after those in tana, dana, in the

suffix consists

notion that the whole of the

or,
finally,

merely of ana;
other principle.

whether they rest on some

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
The
to

391

preposition obar, " over," Gothic ufar, which answers

the

Sanskrit

TJTft upari,

Greek

tnrep,

has,

in

the

same manner, an adverb

to
it.

obanoy "above,*'

corresponding

296. In

the

Sanskrit the appellations of the quarters

of the heavens

come from
anch, " to

prepositions
;

in combination
is

with the root

^^

go"

thus the east

denoted
'';

as "that which is before," by irra prdnch, from "Upra, " before

the west as " that which

is

over against

it,"

by TTW^ praiyanch,
its

from

tifn prati,

" opposite '*;

the south as "that below,*"

by m^^J^ avdnch, from w^T

pole, the

ova,

"below"; and
called

opposite

north, as " that above," is

^'^^ udanch,

from

T?T ut, " up."

Now it

is

remarkable that in
tar

German
and
ianui

the names of the quarters of the world shew themselves

through their terminations, Old High German

or as they so frequently occur in prepositions, dar, dana, to be

derivations from prepositions, though the nature of their
origin has become obscure.

The custom

of the language

disposes

of the forms in r and

na in such a manner,

that the former expresses the direction whither

(Grimm.

in. 205.), the latter the direction whence, which, however,

was

not, perhaps, the original intention of the terminations,

;

both which seem adapted to express the same direction

the former comparatively, with a glance at
[G. Ed. p. 404.]

that which is opposite, the latter superlatively, in relation

to
all

the

quarters

of

the

globe,

as,

p.

376,

ekatara, " one of

two persons," but

fact,

t^cktlH

ikatama,

ildkAK " one

of

many

persons.**

The west may perhaps be most

lies

satisfac-

torily explained,

and in

as being etymologically pointed

out to be that which

over against the east, as in Sanskrit.

ourselves to the prepositional
382,

For
base

this object
wi,

we betake
at
p.

mentioned

whence

the

comparative

wi-dar.

We

do not, however, require to deduce ues-tar*

we,

* By writing

Grimm marks

the corruptioa of the e from

i,

in

which

I readily agree with him.

392
"towards
the
west,"

ADJECTIVES.
wes-iana,"

from the west," from

to its base wi, in the Sanskrit, in
s; as

the derivative widar;

but

we may keep

with the assumption of a euphonic

also,

some prepositions terminating

before

in vowels

certain

combinations, and
to have
tishkasa

consonants which are disposed

e.g. pra-

an
for

before them, assume this letter;

;

pratikasa
(. 96.).

and as in Latin
if it

abs, os (for obs),

from
then
the

ab,

ob

But
to

were preferred
widar,

to deduce
it

westar,

w'estana,

from

the

derivative

would
into
s.

be
base,

necessary
and,

force
to

the
.

d of derivation
102.,

according
difficult

change
than

it

into

The

east is

more
east,"

of

explanation

the west
6s-tano,

Old
It
is

High German

6s-tar,

"towards the

east,"

"from the

for

several prepositions start

up

toge-

ther that would gladly sustain this quarter of the heavens.

not necessary that the preposition
after

which the
a prepo-

east is

named

should elsewhere, also,

for

be received as a

German
sition
case, is

preposition;

in

this
itself,

appellation

might have incorporated

It

which, except in this

foreign to the practice of the

German

language.
us,

[G. Ed. p. 405,]

first

may

therefore be allowable for

of

all,

to turn to

a preposition which, in the Indian

the south, and, in the
the
position to the east;
is

language,

is

prefixed to
its

may have
as,

changed

German, more so,

with prepositions, the principal point

always where

one stands, and the direction to which one is turned and one may, with perfect justice, turn that which is at the
bottom to the uppermost, or to the
which in Sanskrit
the Sclavonic
front.

In Zend, ava,

signifies " below," exists as

a pronoun,
proper to

and means "this"; and as

this

pronoun

is also

{OVO, nom.
this

ov),

(av-dt, at/Tor. see p. 387), it

obsolete
east
is

remnant of

and occurs in Greek as av, need not surprise us to find an base in German, and that the

taken as the side opposed to the west.

Here
s

it

may

be necessary to observe, that in

Sanskrit the
;

pre-

position ava, in like manner, annexes a euphonic

from


DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
avaa,

393
but one, would

therefore,

by suppressing the
Gothic

last a

arise (as in

Greek av) aus

uz,

(different
ilt,

from

our

aus,

Old
~),

High German
is

in Sanskrit g-w

vt, "

up

and hence, according to

austr, austan.

, 80., ds:

the old northern form

The Latin

aus-ter

might then
beside

to which
p.

Grimm
be

has already alluded (Wiener Jahrb. B. 28.

32)

placed

with

more confidence
and
led

the Old

High

German

as a sister form,
suffix

back by the hand of our

comparative
has given
its

to

the

preposition,

which in Sanskrit
as it at

name

to the south, bold

if

the

first

glance might appear,

{ava

we

declared aus-ter and ^sji^ avdnch

+ anch),
haurio,

" southern,"

to

be related.

The

derivations

from
and

or

avo),

certainly deserve less

notice.

As,

however, the juxta-position of austar with the Latin ouster

the

Indian

preposition

ava,

avas,

is

most

suitable,

we

refrain

from

giving other prepositional

modes

in

which one might arrive at the appellation of the east in

German.

As the most natural

it

point

of departure,

we

cannot place

in so subordinate a position to the west as to

"

mark

it

out as

not west " (a-mtar from a-

[G. Ed. p. 406.]

w'estar).

We

turn
"

now

to the south, in

Old High Gerfrom

the

man

sun-dar,

towards the

south," sundana, "

south," the

connection of which with the sundrd, sundar,

p. 383,
is

mentioned at
therefore,

not to be mistaken.

The

south,

appeared to our ancestors as the remote disthis quarter

is

tance,

and the reason for the appellation of

of the heavens being clearly in allusion to space,

a new

guarantee for the prepositional derivation of the names for

east

and west, as also for the

fact that the designation of the

north, too, has subjected itself to a preposition, although it is

still

more

veiled in obscurity than that of the three sister

appellations.

We

cannot,

however, omit

calling

atten-

tion to the Sanskrit

preposition

f^

nis,

"out, without," and before sonant letters, to

(. 25.)

which signifies which d belongs

according to a universal law of euphony, appears

394
in the form of
nir,

ADJECTIVES.
which
it is

also usual to represent as

the original form.

297.

In

the Old

Sclavonic

the

Indo-Greek compara-

tive

suffix

occurs in vtoryi, "the second" (m.), in which

is

the definitive pronoun

is

contained
(. 255. d.),

(p. 352)

viory-i, then,

formed

from

vtoro-i
is

in which
v,

the

cardi-

nal
this

number dwa

melted down to

corresponding in
years,"
v.

respect to the

singular, with 6

"two as a hardened form from

6 in
h-yare,

Zend

but
the

To

Sanskrit

"Sfiw^

katara,
"

"which of two

.^

m." (Gothic Ara-tW)

(as
definitive), older

and

iTfR ya-tara,

which of both," corresponds etymoloko-tory-i

gically, the

Old Sclavonic
ye-ter,

ko-tery-i
ye~tero.

and

feminine

ye-tera

(ye-Tepa),

neuter

two pronouns is, however, forgotten, together with their comparative meaning for kotoryi means "who?" and yeter, " some one '' (compare
origin of these
;

The

p. 352),

Dobrowsky
p. 407.]

(p. 343),

however, in which he
divides

is

[G. Ed.
ot-or ;

clearly wrong,

the

suffix

into

for

although

the

interrogative

base

KO may
to

lay aside
(Mo,
*'

its o,

and combine with the demonstrative base

p. 342),
still it

quis?"'

Dobr.

is

more

in accordance

with the history of language to divide ko-toryi than kotoryi or

koto-ryi,
;

as the formation or would there stand

quite isolated

and besides
and yet

this

the

pronoun

i,

" he,"

from

yo,

does not occur in combination with the demonto,

strative base
298.

ye-ter is said.

small

number
ishtha,

of comparatives

are formed in

Sanskrit by

f<tnr tyas,

and the corresponding superlative by

as has been already

ishthn, in

which

remarked
its

derivation from lyas in traction to ish (compare ish-ta, " offered," from
(p. 389.),

we recognise a

conso
tha,

yaj),

that the suffix of the highest degree througli which, also, the ordinal
(Terajo-To-j),

is

properly

numbers ^g^w
(e*c-Tor),

chotur-thas

and TO^ shash-ihas

lies

are formed, for

the notion of the superlative

very close to the ordinal

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
numbers above two, as that
latives,

395

of order does to the super-

and heuee the

;

suflfix

jm tama occurs

in

ordinal

numbers

e.g. f^^lPririH^

vinsati-tama-s,

wherefore mo, in forms like

q^H^

" the twentieth, pancha-ma-s, " the fifth,

may
ish,

be held to be an abbreviation of tama.

contracted from tyas
is,

To

the

form

euphonic
is,
is,

for is

in

Greek and

Zend
(comp.

corresponds the Latin

in the superlatives in

is-simus,

which
.

deduce through assimilation from is-timus

the

101.);
is

simple

however, which, viewed

ids (. 22.),

from Latin,
with

a contraction of

appears in the
be compared
(.

simple form in the adverb mag-is, which

fj.^/t

may

in fieyt(T-Tog.

In the strong cases

129.) the

Indian comparative shews a broader form than the lyas

above, namely, a long d and a nasal preceding the
fTTHT tydns
s,

thus

(see

. 9.),

This form, how-

[G. Ed.
all

p. 408.]

ever,

mav

originally have

been current in
(. 129.),

the cases,

as

the

strong form in general

as is

probable
&c., if

through the pervading long o in Latin,

compensation for the rejected
accusative
mel-iosem, mentioned

idris,

iori,

one would not rather regard the length of the Latin o as

nasal
:

compare the old

with
Sanskrit

in

. 22.,

The breadth of the sufiix, which is still remarkable in the more contracted from lyas, may be the cause why the form
forms
like J|0^iu*4

gar-iydhs-am (graviorem).

of the
it;

positive

is

exposed to great reductions

final

before

so

that not

only

vowels are rejected, as gene-

rally before

Taddhita suffixes* beginning with a vowel, but

together with

whole

suffixes,

the vowel preceding tliem,

.

are suppressed

(Gramm.

Crit.

252.)

e.

g.

from ^f^m^t

mati-mat, "intelligent," from matt, "understanding," comes

maC-tyds

from

haluvat, " strong " (" gifted

with strength,"

* The Taddbita

suffixes are those

which form

deriTatire

words not

primitives direct from the root itself

396
from
the
bala

ADJECTIVES.

+ vat),
kship,

hal4yas;

from

kshipra,

"quick"

Cfrom

base

"to

throw"),

comes
;

ksMp-iyas;
tripra,

from
" satis-

hhudra,
fied,"

" insignificant,"

ksMd-iyas

from

trap-it/as;

since with vowels capable of

suffix
is

Guna

the

dropping
the

of the

compensated by strengthening
appears to me,

radical

syllable

by Guna, as in the Zend vaedista;

p. 22) deduces, as it

which Burnouf (Vahista,

Sanskrit

with equal correctness and acuteness from vidvas (vidvd,

.

56\,

vidwas),

"knowing."

With respect
ar, as

to

trapiyas,

from

tripra, let it

be observed that

Guna

of

f ^, is easily transposed to ra

(Gramm.
;

Crit.

34\)

compare
explains

the Greek eBpuKov for eSapKov

p. 290,

iraTpadi for trarapai (see

G.

ed.).

In a similar

manner M. Ag. Denary

the connection of variyas with uru "great," with which he

rightly compares
[G. Ed.
p. 409.]

the Greek evpvs (Berl. Jahrb. 1834.

pp. 230, 231).

I.

But variyas might

into one.

also

come from
tion

vara, " excellent,"

and uru might be an abbrevia-

of varu, which easily runs

perlative "^T^s varishtha, which does not only

To the sumean latissi-

mus but
is

also optimus, the

Greek

apicrro (therefore faptcrro^)

without doubt akin, the connection of which with evpvq one

could scarcely have conjectured without the Sanskrit.

Re-

markable,

too, is

the concurrence of the

Greek with the

Sanskrit in this point, that the former, like the latter, before the gradation suffix under discussion, disburthens itself

of other
p.

more weighty
from e^dpo^,
;

suffixes

(compare Burnoufs Vahista,

kvSktto^, jxrjKKrro^,
kshPpislithas

28)

thus,

e')(6t(TT0, ai(T')(i(no, o'lKTicrro^f

a\yia-Tog,

&c., exactly as

above

and

others from kshipra

and

I believe I

can hence explain, ac-

cording to the same principle, the lengthening of the vowel in

uYjKiaro^, ixdcraov,

from

fiuKpog,

on which principle

also rests

the

Guna

in analogous Sanskrit

pensation for the suppression of the

forms namely, as a comThe case is suffix.

3.

the same with the lengthened vowel in forms like 6d(Taov,

afforov^

where Buttmann

(.

67.

Rem.

N. **) assumes that

DEGREES OF COMPABISON.
the comparative the a (a)
;

397

has fallen back and united itself with

while, in

my

opinion, a different account

/

is

to

be

given of what has become of the

j3pda(Tu)v (. 300.).

in forms like daafXiaVt

The formation
similar to
bahuia, "

of /ley/oroj from fieyag,

origin, in

from /xeyaXo-^,

is

the

Sanskrit, of

much" Tff banhishtha, from comes bbuyhhtha and /xey/oroj, in relation to MEFAAO, has lost as much as banh'-ishtha, compared with bahuia, only that
much "; from
;

bahu., "

the Sanskrit positive base

the addition of a nasal
(1.

c.)

has

compensated for the loss of ul/i by which therefore, as Ag. Benary ; very correctly remarked, rests on the same
is

principle with the

"

Guna

in kshepishtha, &c.*

Remark.

It will then, also,

be necessary

[G. Ed.

p. 410.]

as

Burnouf (Ya^na,

p. 131) first pointed out, but afterwards

(Vahista, p. 25), in

my opinion, wrongly retracted to

by Guna, instead of the

explain

the

^ of srh/as, " better," srSshtha, " the best," as

i

coming

from the
sra
as

of

srt,

" fortune,"

common

view, in which

formerly concurred, of substituting a useless

positive,

and hence, by contraction with

lyas, ishtha,

forming
rnat, "

srSyas. sreshtha.

From
I

m comes
deduce

the derivative sri-

fortunate,"

from which

sri-yas, ir^-shthn^

by

the prescribed removal of the suflBx.t although one

might

* The Guna, however,

in the gradation

forms under discussion, might

it

also be accounted for in a different

way, namely, by bringing

into con-

nection with the Vriddhi, which occurs before

suffixes, especially in

many

other Taddhita

patronymics, as

%^^iT

vaivasicata, from

f^^TT

vivasicat.

On

account of the great weight of the gradation suffixes i^*,

rise to the

ixhtha,

which has given

suppression of the suffix of the positive

base, the initial vowel also of the

same would accordingly be

to

raised

by

the weaker Guna, instead of by the Vriddhi, as usual (^.26.).

Be

that

how

it

may, one must

in

any case have ground

assume an
fXTjKicrros,

historic con-

nection between the

others,

Gncian vowel-lengthening
it

in

Bacraovy

and

and that of Sansk

forms like kghep'yas, k.^hepisktha.

t^hfc

t If there existed, as in Zend, a krira^ one might hence also derive

above gradations.

398

ADJECTIVES.

expect in the superlative sray-ishtha, euphonic for srS-ishtha ;

this ground it is that Burnouf takes his objection. But as in Greek e/ca-oroj, otto-o-toj (see p. 376), in spite of the want of the of tarog, are nevertheless nothing else than
/

and on

superlative forms, I do not see why, in certain cases, in

Sanskrit, also, the suppression of an
i

may

not hold good.

sthi-ra, " fast,"

This happens, moreover, in stM-shtha from

spM-shtha from sphi-ra,

" dear."

" swollen,"

and pr^-shtha from

since priy
, 51.)

priy-a,

In the latter case, after removing the

y,

suffix a,
is

the

preceding

also,

must

retire,

only a
to the

euphonic alteration of pri (Gramm.

derivation, however, of the

Crit.

As

meanings

melior, optimus,

from
^'

a positive with the meaning

remarked,
that,

" fortunate," it

may

be further

in

Sanskrit,

" fortune " and " splendour

are generally the fundamental notions for that which

is

good and excellent

[G. Ed.
p. 411.]

hence, bhagavat, " the

honourable,"

" the

excellent," properly, " the

man

gifted with

fortune

";

for our besserer, bester, also Gothic bat-iza, bat-ists,

are associated with a Sanskrit root denoting fortune {bhad,

whence bhadra, "fortunate,"" "excellent'^), which Pott was acute enough first to remark (Etymol. Inquiries, p. 245), who
collates also bdtyan,

"to use."
t,

to
It

. 87.,

in the Gothic

The old d gives, according and the Sanskrit bh becomes b.

if

might appear too daring

;

we made an attempt

to refer

melior also to this root

but cognate words often assume the

transitions of sound,

most estranged form through doubled

which, although doubled, are usual.

It is

very

common

for

to

become

(. 17.),

and also between labial medials and the

the Greek
(3e\rioiv, /SeAr/o-TOf,

nasal of this organ there prevails no unfrequent exchange

(comp.

. 63.).

If,

also,

should

belong to this class, and the t be an unorganic addition, which

is

wanting in

l3e\-Tepog, ^eh-rarog, /3e\

would then give the

middle step between H^ bhad and mel.

of BehTtoiv,

The

ideal positive

namely ayadog, might be connected with 'ermv

agddha

"

deep," with which, also, the Gothic gdths (theme

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
g6da)
is

399

to be compared, with

6,

according to rule, for

.

^A
87.

(. 69.),

and medials for Greek aspirates, according to

299.
.

From

the strong theme

t^ITO^ lydhs,

mentioned at
94.

298.,

comes the nominative

lyan,

with the suppression

.

of the final letter rendered necessary through

The

vocative has a short

the Greek

Ztov,

To lyan answers a, and sounds iyan. and to the vocative lyan answers ~iov to
;

the neuter tyas (N. A. V.), identical with the

weak theme,
is

corresponds the Latin

ius

(. 22.).

The Greek, however,

s,

cannot become repossessed of the

which

abandoned

in Sanskrit in the nominative and vocative masculine for

legitimate reasons,
since
it

declines

its

comparative as
with v\ hence

though
ioT-em

its

theme terminated from the

first

accusative lov-a for the

(

Sanskrit ^irf^ lydns-am,

genitive lov-o^ for lyas-as,

Latin
ior-is.

ids-em,

22.),

However, one might, as Pott has already, I believe, noticed somewhere, reduce the contracted forms like fieKrloi,
^eXriov^, to an original io<ra^to<reg, toa-a^, corresponding to
ttjahsam, iydnsi

(neuter plural), tydns-as, lyas-as, the a of

which, as is so
rejected.*

common between two

v,

vowels, would
[G. Ed.

be

On

the other hand,

except in

p. 412.]

comparatives, on the presupposition that the contracted forms

have rejected an
isolated
others), which,

and not

a;

is

suppressed only in a few

eiKO), at]Sov^,

words (A.it6Wu>, HoaetSu),

and a few

however, the theoretic derivation of the com-

parative

2 renders very embarrasing.

i.e.

We

would therefore

prefer giving up this, and assuming, that while the Sanskrit

in the weak, in the majority of cases, has
iis,

abandoned
still

the former consonant of

less favourable to the

the Greek, which was

v<r-,

has given up the

it

latter,

as

perhaps one

may
that

suppose in the oldest, as

like
all

were, pre-

Grecian period, forms

roniarkable,

^e\Ttovaa. other

It

is,

however,
lan-

while

European

sister

* Comp.

p.

325 G. ed.

400
guages have
comparative
only

ADJECTIVES.
preserved
the
last

element

of

the

ns the
the
the

Latin in the form of r

and
the

while

the Sanskrit also shews

for the so
that
all

more indulgence
alone has
it
diflPers

for the s

than
nasal;

n,

Greek

preserved
in

in

comparative

this

respect

from

the other languages.

Without the intervention

would be hardly possible to
sister
;

of the Sanskrit and

Zend

it

adduce

from

the

European

languages a cognate
if ior

termination to the Greek

7wi/, lov

or

and

Jtxiv

should

be compared, one would think rather of a permutation of

liquids,*

than that after the Greek v the prototype of the

Latin

r,

namely

a,

has originally existed.

ista

300.

In Zend, the superlatives in as^^OJ

are

more

numerous than the corresponding ones in Sanskrit, and require no authentication. With regard to their theory, Burnouf has rendered important service, by his excellent
[G. Ed,
p. 413.]

treatise

on the Vahista; and his remarks are

also useful to us in
ista

Sanskrit

Grammar.

In form

ajjoo-*

stands nearer to the Greek ktto-^ than the Indian ishthat

is

and
(.

completely identical with the Gothic

ista,

nom,

ist'-s

135.), as the

Zend frequently

exhibits

for the Sanskrit

to ista is

aspirates.

The comparative form which belongs

rare, but
its

much more
occasion for

perhaps only on account of the want of

appearance in the authorities which have been

to us, in which, also, the

handed down

form in tara can

only scantily be *ited.

An example
I

of the comparative

under discussion

is

the feminine ^waj^^.maj^ masySht, which

occurs repeatedly, and to which

have already elsewhere

drawn

attention.f

It

springs

from

the

positive

base

Comp.

(^.20.
I. o.
.'?7i2.

t Berl. Jahrb. 1831.

arrived
at,

then conceived this form to be thn8

it/nd

that

they of the Sanskrit

from

had disappeared, as
?

in the geni-

tive termination h6,

Still the

^sya
case,

after wirr.h the

musi have passed intc y,

one chosen by Burnouf.

above view of tlie

which

is

also the

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
MAyUAi^ masas, " great " {maso, masah, masanh,
.

401
56
.

56

.),

and confirms,

like other

good for the Sanskrit,

Zend forms, the theory which holds that other suffixes fall away before
compared with the Sanskrit
the
t

the exponents of the comparative and superlative relation

under discussion.
feminine base

If yehi is

tyast, the loss of

shews

itself,

and then
(. 42.),

the a has, through the power of assimilation of the y become ^ and s has, according to . 53., become
the loss of the
like srS-yas,
t

h.

In

the

Zend coincides with the Sanskrit forms

p. 397,

mentioned at

with which,

also, bliu-yas,

" more,"

and jyd-yast " older," agree.

<r

Greek comparatives
?\^(r(TuiVf

with a doubled

before
;

tav,

as Kpeha-ojv, fipdaffuiv,

are based on this

which, according to a law of euphony

tlie

very universally followed in Prakrit, have assimilated

the preceding consonant, as elsewhere oAAos[G. Ed.

y to

p. 414.3

from a\yo^, Gothic

alya-, Latin

alius, Sanskrit anyn, are

p. 20).

explained (Demonstrative Bases,

In Prakrit, in the
in this dialect,

assimilations which are extremely

common
itself to

the weaker

consonant assimilates
precedes
or

the

stronger,

whether
other,"

this

follows

it;

thus

anna, "the
;

from anya, corresponds to the Greek oAXoj

becomes
tassa
;

the San"

skrit f<isyo, " hujus,"

bhavishyali,

he

will

be,"

becomes

bhavissadi,* divya, "heavenly," ditwa;

from

is

simpler, and closer at hand, althongh the other cannot be

;

shewn

to be

impossible
it

for

it is

certain that if the

of lyas had disappeared in Zend,

would

fall to

the turn of the preceding

to

become y.

* Comp.

taa-oficu,

from
It

(o-yofuu,

with fJ^ifH sydmi, in composition with

attributive verbs.

may

be allowed here preliminarily to mention

this, that
t,

another interesting Prakrit form of the future, which consists in

the Sanskrit s passes into A, but the syllable

H ya m

contracted to
;

herein agreeing with the Latin

karihigi,

in eris, erit, amabis, amabit, &c.

;

as,

" thou wiUst make," from karishyasi

sahihimi, "

will endure,"

from sahidiydmi, instead of the medial form

p. 50).

saJtishye (Urvasi,

by Lenz.

D D

402
which
it

ADJECTIVES.
is

clear that
r;

t;

is

stronger than

y, as

it

also is

more powerful than

one."
It is

hence sanva from sarvc, "everyi

remarkable that the

t
;

also of
tti,

ifi

" thus " as-

similates itself to the following

hence,
the

which, in propreceding.

nunciation,

naturally leans

upon
also,

word
Jiav.

Therefore one might thus

a form
i/cov,

without presupposition of

establish the assimilation

from

As
o-

to the {Kpeur-

transition of the consonant of the positive base into

'(xutv, l3pa<T-(rci>v, I3d<r-<rciv, fi6.(r-aitiVj \a(r-(ra)v,

&c.), to
<r

which
need

the

y has assimilated, the transition of

.

t, 5, 6, into

least of all surprise us (see

99.);

but with regard to the

gutturals, the sides

Old Sclavonic

may

be noticed, in which, bei,

what has been remarked

is

in . 255. (m.), ,

and

which latter
y,

comes very near the vowel combined with a

remainder of the syllable

and

frequently the

ye

exert an influence on a guttural preceding them, similar

[G. Ed.
p. 415.]

to that which the comparative

i,

y or produces
i

in Greek.

Before the

namely, of the nominative plural,

and before ye

in the dative

and

locative singular, as before

and ye of the imperative, ch becomes ; e.g. gryes-i hoiu. yryech, as <9a<r-<ra)v from daa-yuiv, from ray^; g becomes ^ e.g. prti^i from prAg, as fxeilQuiv, oKl^oiv, from fj-ei^yoiv, oTui^yoav,

from

fJ.ey-,

6\ty-;

k becomes
as

ch,

while in Greek k

is

modified

in the

same way

^^

account of the contracted nature

of the C (^^f^) ^o assimilation takes place after it, but the y entirely disappears, or, in [Jiei^uiv, is pressed into the interior
of the

word (comp.

. 119.),

as in

d/ue/vioi/, 'xeipttiv,

which

lat-

ter

may

be akin to the Sanskrit WUT: adhara,

"

the under
.

(m)," consequently with aphaeresis of the

a (comp.

401.).

With the superlative fxeyia-To^ compare the Zend A5^e;o^-w^ maz'ista, where j x, according to . 57., answers to the Sanskrit h oiw^mahat, "great"; while in the above ^wie^^MM^
maHy&hi, as in
the
positive
z,

mams

(euphonical ly mas6),
its

stands irregularly for

as if the Zend, by

permutation

of consonants in this word, would vie with the

Greek

but

DFREES OF COMPARISON.
we
find,

483
z,

Vend.

S. p. 214, ^'^^'^9
;

mazyo, with
thus,

which

hold

to be a neuter comparative
vidvdo, " the

^^9

"^-i-JJ-^^

mazyS

more
in the

(literally greater) wise."

3U1.

As

Latin comparative a

suffix

has raised

itself to universal currency, which in Sanskrit and Greek

is

only sparingly applied, but

was,

perhaps,

originally,
;

similarly with the form in tara, repo-^, in universal use

so

the German, the Sclavonic, and Lithuanian, in their degrees

of comparison everywhere attach themselves to the

more
short-

rare forms in Sanskrit and Greek; and indeed iu the Gothic

the suffix of the comparative shews
itself in

the

same

ened form in which

it

appears in the Sanskrit, Zend, Greek,

suffix

and Latin, in
(see
.

its

combination with the superlative

298. p. 395 &c.), namely, as is;

'*

and

this

most plainly
p.

in adverbs like mais,

more," whose con-

[G. Ed.

416.J

nection with comparatives in the Sanskrit, &c.,

I first

pointed
divide,

out in the Berl. Jahrb. (May 1827,

therefore, thus, ma-is
;

p.

742).

We

must

and

this word, as well in the base as

in the termination,
fieyt<r-To^, p.

is identical

with the Latin mug-is (coinp.

clear that the Gothic

402)

whence

it is

form

has

lost

mikils,

a guttural (compare ma-jor and mag-ior), which, in "great" which has weakened the old a to i appears,

according to the rule for the removal of letters

Mais, therefore, far
it, is,

(. 87.),

as k.

as

it

seems

to

be

separated

from

in base and formation, related to the Zend maz-yS (from maz-yas), which we have become acquainted with above (p. 415 G. ed.) in the sense of " more."

"Remark.
in
is,

There

are some other comparative adverbs

of which, the first

time
and

treated of this subject, I

was

not

in

possession,

which

Grimm

has

since

(IIL 5S9, &c.)

represented as analogous to mais.

1.

He

has

however, afterwards,

c. p.

88, agreed, with Fulda, in

viewing

hauhis, avcarepov, as the genitive of the positive hauhs, " high."

Yet hauhis stands

hiza,
"

in

exactly the

same
to

relation to

hau-

the higher," that

mais

does

maiza,

" major."

Do2

-^4

ADJECTIVES.

'

Compared with the Zend maz-y6 and Greek /xe/^-wi', one might believe the z in maiza belonged to the positive base, particularly as the Old High German adds a second comparative suliix to its
{m^riro,
'

adverb mer, answering to the Gothic mais

nrnjor ") because in

mSr no formal expression of the

felt.

comparative relation was any longer

Raihtis,

which

Grimm

wishes to leave under the forms which,

III. p. 88,

are considered as genitive, seems to

potius, or

me
it,

properly to signify
therefore, as a

our

rechter

and

consider

com-

parative, although the Old

from the point of view of

comparative ga-raihtSza,

High German rehtes, examined the Old High German, can only
is

be a genitive, and the comparative adverb

'jusfior,"

r'ehidr.

The

which

may
in
all

be cited in

Gothic, does not prevent the assumption that there

may

have been also

iza

in

use a raihfiza,

as

adjectives

may

just as

well be

expected as oza;

for,

together

,with the comparative adxerh frum/izd, *at

first'

(R. xi. 35),

occurs the superlative frumists.

Perhaps, however, the

genius of the Old High

to

German language
;

has allowed

itself

be deceived through the identity of the comparative

with the genitive termination is

suffix is

and taking some

it

.obsolete comparatives,
[G. Ed.
p, 417.]

which have been transmitted to

for genitives, left

them the

s,

which, in
.

evident comparatives, must pass into r; but

tained as s in wirs,
' '

is also still reallis,

pejus.'

prefer to consider, also,

omnino' as a comparative, in order entirely to exclude the

Gothic apparent genitive adverbs from the class of adjectives.

In the Old

High German, together with

which, according to

alles, 'omnino,''

exists

ul/es, Uiliier,'

its origin, is

an essentially

different
(p.

word
ed.)

through

assimilation from alyes, as above

414 G.

aKKo

in which the comparative termination,

is to

in the Latin ali-ter and similar adverbs,

be observed. The

probability that these forms, which, to use the expression,

are clothed as genitives, are, by their origin, comparatives,

is
still

further increased thereby, that together with

eirteSt

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
temel* and anderes,
'

405
the

aliter,''

there occur, also, forms in

eineaf,

guise

of superlatives,

namely,
again.'
Grothic,

'once' (see Graff,

p. 329),

and anderesf,
sort

Some comparative adverbs

the
i

of this
*

omit,

in

of is;

thus

miu'S,

less'

(compare minor, minus, for minior, minius), perhaps

is

vak'Sy 'worse,' which

raised

anew

into

vairsiza, 'pejor,

and

may

be connected with the Sanskrit avara, 'posterusr

as above yeipoiv

'amplius* (from
*

was compared with ^nrc adhara seith-r, seifhu. Mate'); and probably, also, suns,
;

statini,*

and anaks,

"
suhito.^
is

302.

The comparative-suffix
s is

required in Gothic, where

the consonant

no longer capable of declension,* an un-

organic addition, or otherwise the sibilant would have been

necessarily suppressed.
this
letter,

as its

The language, however, preserved meaning was still too powerfully peran,

ceived,

by the favourite addition

which we have seen

Above, though without the same urgent necessity, joined to

participial bases in
-then, s

nd

in their adjective state

(.

289.).
p.

As,

comes
it

to be inserted
. 86. (5.),

between two

[G. Ed.
:

418.}

vowels,

must, by

be changed into z

hence the

modem theme MAIZAN,

from the original MAIS, which

has remained unaltered in the adverb.

The nominative mas-

culine and neuter are, according to . 140. 141., maiza, maiz6.

On

the other hand the feminine base does not develope itself from the masculine and neuter base MAIZAN as in general

from the unorganic bases

*

in

an of the indefinite adjectives

wotdd not be distinguished
and

base in

as the aborementioned mats,

from the theme

drug,

in all the cases of the singular, as also in the nominative

*,

accusative plural, as, of final double

the latter must be rejected (comp.

" fall," for drus-9 from drusa-s, 5. 292. 1st Note). In the nominative and genitive singular, therefore, the form maiss must have become mais ;
ahman-s comes
the accusative,

just as, in the nominative and accusative plural, wliere

from the theme ahman.

The

dative singular

is,
;

in bases ending in a conis

sonant, without exception devoid of inflection

in substantives of every kind.

and so

40d
no feminines
which
arise

ADJECTIVES.

but to
;

the original feminine base in

i,

exists in the Sanskrit

and Zend, an n

is
i,

added, as in

the participle present

. 70.), from mats + ein, answers to the Zend feminine base of the same

thus

MAIZEIN (ei =

gariyas-i,

import, ^>A)^^J4A)9 masyShh and Sanskrit forms like jiO<<m1 from gariyas. The nominative maizei may then,

according to . 142., be deduced from MAIZEIN, or may be viewed as a continuation of the form in Zend and Sanskrit which, in the
(. (.

nominative,

is

identical with the

theme

137.);
290.) is

in

which respect again the participle present to be compared. These two kinds of feminines,
but the ground of their peculiarity,
566, calls
still

namely, of the said participle and the comparative, stand

in Gothic very isolated
;

which Jacob Grimm,

pare
I.

III.

undiscovered (comsaid, to

756), appears to
;

me, through what has been

I

be

completely disclosed
[G. Ed.
p. 419.]

and

have already declared

my opinion

in this sense before.*

The Old High German

Grimm
had not yet,
review of the

two

Berl, Jahrb,

May

1827, p. 743, &c.

Perhaps

in the passage quoted above,

first

become acquainted with

;

my

parts of his

Grammar

since he afterwards

II. 650.) agrees

with

my view of the
sible, as the

matter.

I find,

however, the comparison of the transition

ir s into

of the Gothic * into z with that of the Indian

sh inadmis-

two

transitions rest

upon euphonic laws which are entirely

in the Gothic {. 86. 6.),
is

distinct; of

which the one, which obtains

It is further to

just

as foreign to the Sanskrit, as the Sanskrit {. 21. and

is

Gramm. Crit.
tlie

101".)

to the Gothic.

be observed,

tliat,

on account of the
superlative,
it

difference of these laws, the Sanskrit

sfi

remains also in

where the Gothic has always

here be further remarked, that

st,

not

zt.
1.

In respect
c.
;

to

Greek,

may

Grimm,

p. 651, in that language, also,

admits an original

s in the

comparative

which he, however, does not

jj.

look for after the y of lav, as appears from

299., but before

it

so that

he wishes

to divide thus /xct'-fwv, as

an abbreviation offity[(a>v ; and regards

the f not as a corruption of the y, as Buttmann also assumes, but as a comparative character, as in the kindred Gothic ma-iza. The Greek
ew, ov, would, according to this, appear identical with the unorganic Gothic

an

in

MAIZAN;
by

while
it

we have

assigned

it,

in ^.299., a legitimate

foundation,

tracing

back

to the Sanskrit dhs.

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
has brought
its

407

feminine comparatives into the more usual

path, and gives, as corresponding to the Gothic minnizeU

"the lesser"
sibilant,

(fem.),

not minniri but minnira.

The Gothic

however, was, in the High

German
r,

comparatives, in

the earliest period transmuted into

minniro, minnira, has

whence, in this respect,

to the Latin minor

more resemblance
suffix

than to the Gothic minniza, minnizei.

303.
iz-an,

The comparative
exhibits
also

in
6s,

the Gothic, besides

is,

the form

dz-an

it

is,

however
in oro

more

rare;
that

but in the Old High

there are
masculine),
in
iro, ira,

German

has become so
in
it

current,

more comparatives
6ra
or

(nominative
neuter), than

(nominative

feminine

and
in

ero, era.

The few forms

are,

OZAN

which can be adduced

(nominative

in Gothic

svintkdzcL,

**fortior'"'

masculine),

frodoza,

" prudent ior,"

frumoza, "priori h/asdza, "hilarior^ garaihtdzaf "jusfior"

framaldrozaj
" provectior
cetate"

usdavdozaf

" soUicitior,'*

unsvikunthdza, "inclarior" (Massmann, p. 47), and the ad-

verbs sniumundSs, " cnrouJa/oTejOcof," and alyaleikds,

" erepm^.**

How,

then,

is

the 6

in
i

these

forms

to
I

be

explained,

contrasted

with

the

of IS,

IZAN?
6,

believe

only

as coming from the long a

iyAns or yahs
(.

of the Sanskrit strong themes

299. 300.), with

starts

according to rule, for

latter

Wa

(. 69.).

If

one

from the
is

[G. Ed.

p. 420.]

form, which, in the Zend,

the only one that can

is lost

be

adduced, then, beside the nasal, which

also in the Latin

lost

and in the weak cases in the Sanskrit, y&hs has

in

the Gothic either the A or the y (=J), which, when the A is suppressed, must be changed into a vowel. The

Gothic

d,

6z,

and

still

more
is

the Old

High German
&r

dr^

correspond,

therefore,

exactly to the Latin

in

minor,

nrindr-is, for minior.

There

reason to assume that, in

the Gothic, originally y and d existed in juxta-position to one another and that for minniza, " the lesser," was used
;

minnyoza, and ior frodoza,

" tlie

more

intelligeut,"/rdrfvdza

408

ADJECTIVES.
lost the

The forms which have

by minor, minus, and
mag-is.

y are represented

in Latin

plus,

and those with 6 suppressed by

corresponding to the

One

cannot, however, in Gothic, properly require

in
6s,

any superlatives
comparatives in
skrit,

OSTA, nom.
6z;

6s{-s,

because this degree in the San-

Zend, Greek, and Latin always springs from the

to
is,

form of the comparative, contracted

a frumists,
"primus,"'''

ish.

It

is,

how-

ever, quite regular, that, to ihefrumdza, "prior," corresponds

not frumdsts.

To
is

the

remaining

comparatives in oza the superlative

but in
the

not yet adduced;

more recent

dialects
6,

the comparatives have

;

formed superlatives with

in the
lative,

after their fashion

and thus,

Old High German, 6st usually stands in the superwhere the comparative has 6r the Gothic furnishes two examples of this confusion of the use of language, in lasivdsts, " infirmissimus " (1 Cor. xii. 22.), and armdsfs, " miser^
:

rimus"

(1 Cor. xv. 19.).

304. In the rejection of the final vowel of the positive base

before the suffixes of intensity the

German
from

agrees with the

"sweei*^;
seith-a

cognate languages;
[G.Ed.
p. 421.]

hence

sut'-iza,

SUTU*,
"late";

hardUza, from

HARDU,

"hard";

{thana-seiihs, "amplius"),

from

SEITHU,

as in the

Greek

Yj^iutv

from 'HAY, and in the Sanskrit laghiyas from

J^a is also rejected;

layhu, "light."

hence spM*-iza, from

7.);

SPEDJA,

"late"

(see

p.

358,

Note

reik'-iza,

from
6,

REIK YA, " rich." One

(. 69,),

could not therefore regard the

in

forms ]ikefrdd6za, as merely a lengthening of the a in FRO DA

as
it

would be completely contrary to the principle

of these formations, not only not to suppress the final vowel

of the positive base, but even to lengthen

it.

The

expla-

nation of the comparative 6 given at

303.

remains therefore

the only one that can be relied upon.

* The positive does not occur, but the Sanskrit sicddu-s and Greek
)eftd

tjiv-t

us to expect a

final y.

DEGREES or COMPARISON.

409

305. In the Old Sclavonic, according to Dobrowsky, p. 332,

&c., the comparative is formed in three ways, namely,
(1)

By masculine

;7,

feminine

shi,

neuter yee;
(f.) ";

as, iJnii,

" the better (m.j "; unshi,

(n.), "

" the better

unype, " the best

as b'ltizn, melior,
its

from a positive which has been

and
it is

lost,

and
the

dfjLetvuu;

perhaps connected in

base with
/x,

latter, so that

a may have become

;

o (. 255. a.), but

u,

as frequently occurs with n

0,

and

this u,
lesser,

with the preceding

(m.) " fem. mensh'u

has become u ().*

MniU "the

neuter mnyee, spring, in like manner, from a positive which

has been
lost.

Bolii, " the greater," fem.

Mshi, neuter
[G. Ed.

bolyee,

may

be compared with the Sanskrit baHydn, "the stronger**

fem. baliyasit neuter baliyas.-f

(p. 396),
bolii is

For

p.

422.]

also used bolyei;

and

all

the remaining comparatives

ii,

which belong

to this class

have yei for

If,

and thus answer

better to the neuter form yee.

as appears to be the case, the

form

yei is the genuine one, then ye

(.

answers to the Sanskrit

300.),
i

yax of jyd-yas, bhA-yas, srS-yas, &c.

s is

and the

loss of the
is

explained by .255.

(/.)

the final

ofye-i,

however,

the

definitive

pronoun

(.

284.), for

comparatives always follow,

definite declension.
si

in the masculine

and neuter, the

In the
of lyas-i,

feminine in
oryas-i^

shi it is

easy to recognise the Sanskrit

and herewith also the Gothic rei (oblique XheuxeZEIN,

The a in

ifitivrnv

appears to

me

to

be privative

so that fulvav

would

seem

to be a sister

form to the Latin minor, Gothic minniza, Sclavonic

lesser,"

mnii ; and dfieivav would properly signify " the not

" the not

tliat

more
for

trifling."

Perhaps

this

word

is

also inherent in

omnit ; so
;

o
it

a would be the negation, which,

in Latia, appears as in

where

may be observed, that,

+ The
finite

in Sanskrit, a-sakrit, literally

" not once," has taken

the representation of the meaning "several times."

positive velii, with v for b and e for o, occurs only in this dep.

form (Dobr.

320)

the primitive and indefinite form must be veL

With
(.

respect to the stronger o corresponding to the

weaker
in

letter e

256. a.), bolu, in the positive, answers to the

'j.

manner
208.

which vowels

are strengthened in Sanskrit, as mentioned at

310
p. 4

ADJECTIVES.
is

18 G. ed.); that

to say, hol-shi, "the greater (fem.),"

corresponds to the Sanskrit ^grhral baliyasi, " the stronger (f.)," and menshi, " the lesser," to the Gothic minn-izei. While,
therefore, the Sclavonic masculine and neuter have lost the *

of the Sanskrit yas, the feminine has lost the ya oiyas-t*

This

feminine

shi, also,

in departure

from

(2)

and

(3),

keeps free

from the
adverbs in
like

definite pronoun.
e,

There are some comparative

(.

as the abbreviation of ye

256.

w.),
;

which

in

manner dispense with

bole,

the definite pronoun

thus, wn^,

better";

"greater"

in

Servian

MSS.

Anye, bolyef

[G. Ed. p. 423.]

Trao-o-coi/
;

pache, " more," probably related to -nayv^i

(

so that

which

is

very obscure ) the

final

vowel of

pache for pach-ye, for reasons which have been given before,
is,

in fact, identical with the

Greek ao

of Trdar-aov, for trair-yov.

The eh
itself

of pache may, according to p. 415 G. ed., be regarded

k,

as a modification of

as the first

<r

of irdaraov has developed

from

x-

Thus the C of
a,

doll^-vee, "

longer " (neuter and

adverbial), as euphonic representative of the y of dofg, dolga,

dolgo {longus,
in
/ne/^cdv,

um), answers remarkably to the Greek f oKli^civ, for fxetydov, oKtyav, That, however, the

positive dolg is connected with the

Greek

SoXt-xp^

needs

scarce to be mentioned.

Somewhat more

distant is the

Sanskrit ^fHw dirgha-s, of the same meaning, in which the frequently-occurring interchange between r and I is

It

may

bo proper here to call remembrance to the past gerund,

properly a participle, which in the strong cases vdns, nom. masc. van for
van*, fern, ushi, neuter vat (for vas), corresponds to the Sanskrit of the

wduplioated preterite in ra*.

The Old Sclavonic has

'''

here, in the nomitlxis

native masculine, where the s should stand at the end, lost

letter,

according to .255.(1.), as by-v,

qui fuit," but by-vshi, " quee

/uW f'

end in the masculine

also, in preference to

the comparative, the again

appears in the oblique cases, because there, in the Sanskrit, after the t
follow terminations beginning with a vowel
;

so in rek-sh,

the th corresponds to the Sanskrit vdn-am, as rurud-vdiu-am,

ploravit."

"eum qui dixit," '^ eum qui

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
to be noticed
kself,
(. 20.).

411

The

of Bo}nxoif however,

shews

by the evidence of the Sclavonic and Sanskrit, to be

addition.

an organic

Let garyee, " pejti.t,'"' be compared with the Sanskrit gariyas, " gravius,"' from guru, " heavy "
according to Burnoufs correct remark from garu, as this
adjective is pronounced in Pali

through

the assimilating

influence of the final

u, to

which the kindred Greek jSapv^ has

permitted no euphonic reaction.

(2)

The

second,

by

far the
is

most prevalent form of the

nominative masculine
i

Old Sclavonic comparative,

feminine shaya, neuter
shee.

shit,

The

of shii

is

the definitive
e

pronoun, which, in the feminine,

for ye (. 282. 284.).

is ya,

and in the neuter

After the
she
;

loss, then,

of this pronoun,

there remains

shi, sha,

and

tiiese

are abbreviations of

hhyo, shyc, shye, as

we have

seen, p. 332, G. ed., the adjective

its

base

SINYO
i,

(nominative siny), before

(sini-T,

union with the

defining

contracted to sini

neuter sine-e for sinye-yp.

is

The
rests

definite

feminine of

SINYO

sinyn-ya; and as to the

feminine comparatives not being shya-ya but sha-ya, this

on

the

special

ground

that

sibilants

gladly free
p. 424.]

themselves from a following

y, especially

[G. Ed.

before a (Dobrowsky, p. 12);

so in the feminine nomi-

natives dusha, suaha^ chasha, for stksya,

&c

(Dobr.

p. 279).

The
to
is

relation

of the
ttR

comparative form under discussion

ya*

the Sanskrit

and

Zend

o9A)^^

yas

(p. 40l)

therefore to be taken thus, that the ya which precedes

is

the sibilant
shi;

suppressed, as in the above feminines in

at

but for

it,

the end,
to

is

added an unorganic yO,

which

corresponds

the

Gothic-Lithuanian

Y^

^^ ^he
naxxt,

themes NIUY-^,

NAUY^i

" new,^ answering to

tn

NOW,
the

NEO,
the

Sclavonic

NOVO.
first
(7.)
-'

This adjunct
in

YO

has

preserved

comparative

sibilant

the

masculine

and neuter, which, in the

euphonic
law,

formation, must yield to

.255.

Examples
tlie

of
(m.),**

this

se-

cond formation are, un-shu,

better

feminine

; :

412
iin-shaya, neuter Hn-shee
*

ADJECTIVES.
;

jydst-shii

from

piist,

theme

PUSTOt
of the

desert."

Hence
difficult

it is

clear

that the final vowel

positive base is rejected, as in all the cognate languages,-

however
whole
gluh-shii

the combination of the

with

sh.
.

Even
;

suffixes are rejected, in

accordance with

298.

as,

from

ylUbok,

deep "

(definite, gluboky-i),

sladshii

from
(3)

sladok, " sweet."*

Masculine
sch, sh,

yeishii,
ch, ai

feminine yeishaya, neuter yeishee

stands for yei: and this ai evidently

but after

and

stands only euphonically for ydi, since the said sibilants, as

[G. Ed.
p. 425.]

has been already remarked, gladly divest

themselves

of

following

y:

hence

blasch-ai'ihn,
"

"the

better" (masculine), from blag (theme

since g, through

BLAGO),

good,"t

the influence of the y following, gives

way
so

to

sibilant,

which

has

subsequently absorbed
(p.

the y;

compare

oA/^-tov, for
tick

6\ty-iu)v, 6?uy-yuiv

402):
as

tish-aishu,

from

(theme TICHO),

"still,"t

in

the Greek

d&<y-(Titiv

from ra^vS'

As example

of the

form

hold ko, whence in the nom. masc. A, for the suffix of the positive
for the final

base, but the preceding

this

vowel of the

lost primitive
.

and
an

corresponds either to a Sanskrit a, according to

255. (a.), or to

u,

according to $.255. (c);

for

example, tano-k^ "thin," theme

TANOKO,

corresponds to the Sanskrit tanu-s, "thin," Greek

raw; and
i,

slado-k to the Sanskrit swddu-s, "sweet," with excliange of the r for

according to 9. 20.

Thus the above

sladshii shews itself to be originally

identical, as well in the suffix of the positive as of the other degrees

with

the Greek fjS-iav and Gothic sut-iza {. 304.), far as the external diffe-

rence

may

separate

them

and

to the Sclavonic is due, as to the truer

preservation of the fundamental word, the preference above the

Greek

and Gothic, althougli, on account of the unexpected

V into
I,

transition of the

the origin of the Sclavonic word

(p.

is

more
is

difficult to recognise.

t Dobrowsky says
it is,

334) from blagyi{x\iv6

the definite, see

$. 284.'^

however, evident that the comparative has not arisen from the adjec-

tive
X

compounded with a pronoun, but from the simple indefinite one. Compare the Sanskrit adverb t&shmm, *' still, silent," and refer

to

^.265. (m.).

DEGRBES OF COMPARISON.
"wdth
yei,

^4W
may
serve.

yun-ynshii,

"junior,"

from

yun,

Whence comes, then, the yei or at (for yai), which distinguishes this formation from the second ? It might be supposed that to the
also
first

formation in

yet,

where, for example,

yun-yet,

"the

second

has

also

been

younger (m.)," occurs, that of the added, as in Old High German

and in Gothic, probably, are raised twice to the com-

^ (masculine), mSrero, " the greater

vairsha, "the worse"
(p. 405),

parative degree
in

and

as, in

Persian, the superlatives in tertn,

my

opinion, contain, as their last element, the comparaiydiis,

tive f^jTO
tydru,

which forms, in the nominative masculine,

in.

and from this could be easily contracted to

;

In

Persian the comparative is formed through ter " the better," whence behterin, " the best." Now

as. behter,
it

deserves

remark, that in Old Sclavonic the formation before us frequently occurs with a superlative meaning, while in the

more modem

dialects the superlative relation is expressed

nai,

through the comparative with

bably from mai

" more," prefixed (pro

.

= Gothic mais,
mode

according to

225. L).

The

only objection to this

is this,

of explanation

[G. Ed.

p. 4-26.]

that the element of the first formation ye-t has not

f,

once laid aside the definitive pronoun

to

which

is

foreign

the comparative

so that therefore in yun-yet-shii the

said

pronoun would be contained twice.

There

is,

how-

ever, another way namely, as an exact transmission of the Sanskrit lyas or yas, from which the second formation has only presened the
sibilant
;

of explaining this yetshit or (y)auku,

but the third, together with this

Still,

letter,

may have
method,

detained also that which preceded. the

it
i

even in

this

of yei,
its

(i/)a", is

embarrassing,

if it

be not assumed that

i

owes
306.

origin to a transposition of the

to the

of iya.

remark made at p. 400, that among the European languages the Greek only has preserved the

As

nasal,

which the Sanskrit shews in the strong cases of the comparative suffix iydns, I must here admit a limitation iu

fl4

ADJECTIVES.

favour of the Lithuanian, which, exceeding in this point

the Greek, continues not only the nasal,* but also the comparative sibilant through
geresnis,
all

the cases.

For an example,

"the better"

(m.),

may serve,

with which we would

compare the Sanskrit gariydhsam,

gariydn).
It

" graviorem'' (nominative

may

be, but it is not of

to us, that gerSsnis

much consequence and gariydns (strong theme) are also

;

connected in the positive base

p. 398, in

so that, as according to

in Lithuanian

Greek and Gothic goodness is measured by depth, The Sanskrit com* it is measured by weight.
also,

parative under discussion means, also, not only "heavier,"

or " very heavy," but

venerable."
gerhnis,

according to Wilson, " highly

In order, however, to analyze the Lithuanian

that geresnis stands for geresniae,

we must observe
is

and the theme

geresnio,

clearly
;

GERESNIA;
as
gero,

hence genitive

dative geresniam
p. 427."]

gerdm, from gera-s.

therefore
it

[G. Ed.

The termination m,

for which
appears for
addi-

ya might

])e

expected, the

y of which, as

the avoiding of a great accumulation of consonants, has

been resolved into

tion

corresponds

to the unorganio

which we,

p. 411,

have observed in Sclavonic comparaI

tives.

We

have now geresn remaining, which

regard

as a metathesis from gerens,f through which we come But we come still very near the Sanskrit gariydns.

nearer to
is often

it

through the observation,

that, in Lithuanian, e

produced by the euphonic influence of a preceding^

193.).

y or

i (.

We

believe, therefore, that here also

we

may

explain geresn as from geryasn (geryans), and further

recall attention to the

Zend

^^;c^^j4a>^ magyihi

(. 300.).

* In the Lith. comparative adverbs like daugiaus, " more," maxaua,

**le8s,"
I

regard the

as the vocalization of the n;

cases.

thus daugiaus from

dautjians,

where ians=Skr. tydns of the strong

to

t This has been already alluded

by Grimm

(III. 636,

Note

),

who

has. liowever, given the preference to another explanation,by

18

which etni$

similarly arrived at with the Latin issimtu.

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
The emphasis upon
the e of geresnis

415
be attibutable

may

to the original length in the Sanskrit strong

theme gariydns.

Hence the astonishing accuracy may justly be celebrated with which the Lithuanian, even to the present day, continues
to
its

use

the Sanskrit comparative

suffix iyQ,ni,

or

more rare form preferred in Zend y&hs. 3ff7. The Lithuanian superlative suffix is only another The nasal, that is to modification of the comparative.
rather
say,
left

which in the

latter is transposed,
:

is,

in the superlative,

in its original place

it is,

however, as often happens,

resolved into u,* and to the which ends the

theme in
(. 128.),

the Sanskrit, which, in Lithuanian,

is

is

not declinable

added ia

hence

GERAUSIA,

the nominative of which,

however, in departure from

a,

geresnis,

has dropped, not the

but the

thus gerausa-a, gen. gerausio, and, in the femi;

nine, geraiisa, gerausios

in

which forms,
is

[G. Ed. p. 428.]

contrary to the principle which

very generally followed

i

in the comparative and elsewhere, the

has exercised no

euphonic influence.
"

Remark.

With

respect to

the

Sanskrit gradation-

suffixes tara, lama, I

have further to add, that they also oc"nr ut

;

cur in combination with the inseparable preposition

hence
ut-tara, 'the higher," ut-tama, 'the highest,' as

above
think,

(. 295.)

af-tuma, and in Latin ex-timus, in-iimus.

I

however,

recognise the base of utiara, ut-tama, in the

Greek
with
0-

vg of wr-repog, va-raro^t with the unorganic spir. asp.,

as in EKarepog, corresponding to the Sanskiit Skatura-s, and

from t (compare

. 99.),

in which

it is

to be

remarked
to

that also in the

. 102., us-tara,

Zend

for ut-tara, ut-tama, according

us-tema,

might be expected.
which

* Corap.

255. (p.)
all
is

in addition to

it

may

be here further

remarked, that in

probability the

also in

Gothic coDJunctives like

haitau^ haiJiaityau,

of nasal origin.

ri^

.^;o':3:

416

NUMERALS.
CABDINAL NUMBERS.
308.
I.

In the designation of the

prevails

number
is

one great dif-

ference

among
this,

the

Indo-European

languages,
by-

which springs from

pronouns
affords

that this

number

expressed

of the

3d

person,

whose original

abundance

satisfactory explanation

regarding the multiplicity

The Sanskrit eka, whose comparative we have recognised in the Greek eKctrepoj, is, in
of expressions for one.

piy opinion, the combination of the demonstrative base

S,

of which hereafter, with the interrogative base ka, which

also, in

combination with api, "also" (nom. masc.

**

ko'pi),

signifies

whoever";

and even without

this api, if

an in11.

terrogative expression

precedes, as Bhagavad-Gita,

21,

wit Ti ^n^ TT^ c|r3r tiirivrri ?f5iT 'W^ kaihan sa purushaH Partha kan ghatayati hanti kam, " How can this person, O Partha, cause one to be slain, (or) slay one ?" The Zend aj;oa5
[G. Ed.
p.

429.]

aSva, is connected with the Sanskrit pro-

nominal adverbs ha, "also," "only," &c., and ivam, "so," of

which the

latter is

an accusative, and the former, perhaps,

an instrumental, according to the principle of the Zend lan-

guage
is

(.

158.).

The Gothic

ain-s,

theme AINA, oureiner,

based on the Sanskrit defective pronoun

^a

(.

72.)

whence,

among others, comes the accusative masculine To this pronominal base belongs, perhaps, also
oinos,

Sna-m, " this."

the Old Latin

which occurs in the Scipionian epitaphs, from which

the usual

the

more modern 4nus may be deduced, through

which
Still

transition of the old o into u,

to

latter is

lengthened

make up
means

for the

suppressed.

tinus shews, also,

surprising resemblance to the Sanskrit Unas, which pro-

perly

" less,"

and

is

prefixed to the higher numerals

as,

in order to express
**

diminution by one;
"

Htnavinshali,

uufJeviyinti," Unatrinshat,

undetrujinia"

This unas could

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
not liave appeared in Latin,

417

under the form of unu-s,

or,

more accurately retained than more anciently, uno-s. The

lost
its

Greek 'EN

is

founded,

it is

highly probable, in like manner,

final

on the demonstrative base ^ff hia, and has

vowel, as the Gothic
ains
:

AINA,

in the masculine nominative

with respect to the e for i compare eKarepo^,

On

the

other hand, oto^, " unicus," if it

oinos), as jue/^o

has arisen from olvo^ compare

has retained the Indian diph-

from

/xe/^ova,

thong more
of
its
X[%j

truly,

and has
the
the

also preserved the final

vowel

ena.

If ovog,

number one
of
unity,

in dice, really has

name
word
the

from
to

idea

one

might

refer

this

the

demonstrative base

v^

ana, Sclavonic

ONO
in

(nominative on, "that"), which also plays a part

formation
of words,

where
be

ovt]

corresponds

to

the

Sanskrit suflBx
if
it

and (feminine of the masculine

is

and

neuter ana),
" one,"
first,"

not to

referred

to

the

medial

participle in ana, as
is

/zoij;

to mdna.

The Old

Sclavonic, yedin,

clearly connected with the Sanskrit ^rf^ ddi, " the

.

with y which has been prefixed according to

255. (n.):
p.

on the other hand, in the Lithuanian wiena-s,

if it is

[G. Ed.

430.]

connected with the Gothic

AINA

and Sanskrit
In

^t\

ina,

an un organic
ie

has been

prefixed.

regard to

to the

for

compare,

also, icies-te, "

knowledge," with

^fi^ vedmi, " I

know."

"Remark.
sions, in

The

German

has some remarkable expreslies

which the number one

"one-eyed,"

very
its

much
:

concealed

as to

its

form, and partly, too, as to

haihs,

idea

they are, in
halts,

Gothic,

hanfs,

"one-handed,"
these words the

"lame," and
ber one
is

halbs, "half."
;

In

all

numka for
rule

expressed by ha

and

in this syllable I recogcS

nise a corruption of the abovementioned Sanskrit

ir ika,

" one,"

which

is

founded on the
(.

universal
It

for

the

mutiition

of consonants

87

).

would

bo

erroneous to refer here to the Zend asw ha of

ha-fairet, "

rw^^^^AiO*

once " (Sanskrit

thBtT

sakrit), as

the

Zend

418

NUMERALS.
the Sanskrit
J,
is
,

Stands, without exception, for

to

which

the h in Gothic never corresponds.*

Grimm compares

haihs with c(Bcus (II. 316), not with the purpose of following

out the origin of these cognate words, but in order to

prove the transition of the tenuis into the aspirate

simple
is

for the

aspiration

stands

in Gothic
are,
is

instead of kh, which

wanting.

These words

however, so far connected,

contained.
It is

that, in

both, the

word eye

only the

question whether the one-eyed in Latin has also lost the

other eye, and

if

the blind

(ccecus), in

regard to etymology,
This appears
to

has

not

preserved one

eye

left.

me
of

more probable than

haihs
is

that the blind in Gothic should reco-

ver his sight, though but with one eye.

The theme

HAIHA
or into

one

may,
;

then,

divide

HAIHA

into

HA-IHA

H-AIHA
is

thus the latter portion of this

compound word
compounds
portion
like

assuredly connected with the word

^^
first

aksha, "eye," in Sanskrit, which only occurs at the end of

;

so that of the

compounded
..seyAs

y^

ksh only the

is left,
I

while the Zend

ashi,

"eye"

which, in

manner.

have found only at the end of compound words,

" as ^^i^A5jtoA5jiwc3:^ csvas-mhim, " the six-eyed

has

pre-

served the last element

the Latin ocus, however (the primiIf

tive base ofoculus), preserves only the first like the Gothic.
in

HAIHA the diphthong ai is left entirely to the share

we must assume
p. 431.]

of the

eye,

that the a
(. 82.),

is

introduced through the

euphonic influence, of the h

[G. Ed.

and that

IHA, and

this for

ATHA stands for AHA; as /imf from

"^^pancha ; fidv6r from ^rtlTT chaUvdr. But if the a of HAIHA is allotted to the numeral, which appears to me more correct,
then the h in this word has not introduced any euphonic
because, with the aid of the
first
a,

member

of the compound, the

Connected, however, with this designation of "one," which

6),

is

taken

from the pronominal base sa (Greek

may

be the Greek d in i-ir\ovs.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
disposition of the h to at

4i9

was already
to

satisfied.

We
in

must

further

recall

attention

the
is

Latin

codes,

which,

however, the notion of unity

evidently represented only

by the

c,

for the c
:

must be

left to

the odes as a derivative

the correct

from oculus

caucus,
if

however,

if ce is

way

of

w riting, and

the

number one
i,

is

contained therein, would

a,

spring from ca-icus; and the Indian

ened, as in Gothic, to usual

therefore, is weakis

which, in Latin compounds,

(. 6.).
is,

the

representative of an a of the base

the one-handed.
Its

Let us
Gothic,

now examine
skein,
lie

theme
;

in

HA UFA, nominative abbreviated haufs

ment:
it is

so that here, as in a two bases and a pronominal remnant, as mark of case, together. The numeral is here the most palpable ele-

more

difficult

to search out the hand.

;

In the

isolated state

no theme vfa could be expected

prefixed
syllables
as,

but in com-

pounds, and also in

of
in

reduplication,

a radical vowel
"wffrvmjagmima, "
left
;

is

often

rejected;

the

Sanskrit

we went,"

of the root jtt gam, only

for irnteTu), IlET,

gm

is

and in the Greek,

tt/tttco

which correa vowel

sponds to the Sanskrit

TTT.

tnr pat,

"to

fall," is

abbreviated to

We shall, therefore, be compelled to assume that

If it

has fallen out between the n and /of HA-NFA.

was an

which was displaced, then

tion of the Sanskrit
tnfxST

NIFA

might pass

as a transposi-

pdwi, "hand,"

with/

ing to

87.

ha again

HA-LTA, " lame " nominative halts must pass for a numeral, and ha-Ita may originally signify
In
it is

for p, accord-

"one-footed," for

(Mark

ix. 45.)

opposed to the Gothic

feet,"

Ivans fdluns habandin, "having

*

two

where

it is

said

it is

better for thee to enter into life with one foot, than
feet to

having two
very

be cast into

hell.'

It is at least

certain,

that a language which had

fitly

a word for one-footed would

If the last

have applied

it

in this passage.
foot,

element,

however, in

HA-LTA

means the

we must remember

that, in Sanskrit, several appellations of this

member

are
id

derived from roots which

mean

" to go."

Now, there

is,

E E 3

420
Gothic, a root

NUMERALS.

LITH,

"to go," with an aspirated

/,

indeed;

but in compounds the consonants do not always remain

on the same grade which they adopt in the simple word

[G. Ed.
p. 432.]

e.g. the

of quatuor appears as

in

many

derivatives and compounds, without this ^thereby dissembling

its

original

identity with the

of quatuor and ^Tf^ chatur.

So, then,

HA-LTA may
that

stand for

HA-LITHA
comes, Before

and

it

may
"the

be remarked, that from the root

limb," as
the

LIT

also, ^if/jus,
I

which

is

moveable.
I

pass on to

explanation of hulb,

must mention
it

that J.

Grimm
of

divides the pronoun selher, as

perly,
into
.'iilbn

appears to
the

me

very prosi

two parts;
to

so

that

syllable

the
si-k).

Gothic

devolves on the reciprocal {sci-na, sis,

the
last

With respect
a verb kiban,
perhaps,
itself,

portion,

he betakes himself to
silba

" to

remain," and believes that

may,

have the meaning of "that

which remains in
clear that halbs

enduring."
is

Be
and

this as it

may,
be,

it is

the theme HALBA might

into

with equal right, divided

its

two parts

it

appears to me, that, according to

origin, this

word can have no better meaning

something
similar,

than, per-

haps,

"containing a part";

so that the ideas one

and a

fart, remnant, or

may

be therein ex-

pressed, and,

according to the principle of the Sanskrit

possessive compounds, the notion of the possessor

supplied, as in

must be
It

the

already explained haihs,

also,

"having one

eye."

In

the

Gothic,

laiba
is

means
word
half
is

"

remnant."

scarcely needs remark, that holb

idea,

no original and simple

for

which a

peculiar
it.

simple

might

be

ex-

pected,

framed

to express

The

one part of the

whole, and, in fact, equal

to the absent part.

The Latin
for halb,

dimidivs

is

named

after the middle through

which the division

went.

The Zend has the expression m^immj na^mn,

other meanings, signifies " part
":

according to a euphonic law for nemo, wliich in Sanskrit,

among

this is probably

the secondary meaning, and the hal^ as part of the wliole.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
the origiual.
If
it is so,

421
to

^ nema appears
half, for it is

me

a very and the

ingenious designation for a

tion of
ff

a regular contrac-

na, " not,''

and

^ ima,

" this or that ";

demonstrative therefore points at the "this or that" portion

of the whole excluded

by the negative

na.

In Sanskrit,
^rrf*!

halh is

termed,

among

other appellations,

sdmi, in
rffxt,

which one recognises both the Latin semi and the Greek

and the three languages agree in

this

this also, that they use

word only without

inflection at the

beginning of comas a

pounds.

As

to its origin,

W[^ sdmi may be viewed

sama, "
equal,""*

regular derivative from

suffix
i,

Wi

" similar,"
final

by a

by which the suppression of the

vowel, and

widening of the initial vowel of the primitive,

sary.
If this explanation is well founded,

become necesp. 433.]

[G. Ed.

then in this designation of halb only one part of the whole,

and, indeed, one equal to the deficient part, would be expressed, and the W^tr sdmi

against the deficient erepov

would be placed as erepov over and the Sanskrit and German

each of

supply each other's deficiencies, so that the former expresses

the equality, the latter the unity, of the part
the two languages only semi-expresses the
;

i.

e.

half.
^fjLi,

As

to

the relation, however, of the Greek ^fiiav^ to

it

follows

from what has been already said

from the
latter;

that the

latter is not
is

an

abbreviation of the former, but the former

a derivation

and indeed

recognise in av the Sanskrit

possessive swa, "

suus^ which, remarkably enough, in Zend

enters into combinations with numerals with the

" part";
e.g. xs'C^^')<^ thri-shva,

meaning
these

"a

third part," xst^>)(^xi^

chathru-shva,

"a

fourth part."
. 42.,

In the

accusative

words, according to

are written 9^^t)->^^ ihri-shu-m,

9^ia)>^<3Ai^ chathru-shum, of

which the
part,"

last

member comes
"Hfn-o-us-

very near to the Greek

therefore,
"

aw

of rj^iavv.

means
of "the

having one equal

equal.

and the simple r^u

means only the

The Sanskrit designation

whole " deserves further to be mentioned,

^*5^ sa-kala-s


422

NUMERALS.

which, as signifying that which joins the parts and unites them,
is

opposed to the

German

halb as applying to one part, and

for the

in a

measure furnishes a commentary and guarantee

correctness of
consists,

my view of the
" part,"

latter.

The word
the latter

^ERir^ salcala

though

this is scarcely perceptible, of

^ sa,
is

" with,"

and

"Sft^ kald,

so that,

if

regarded

in the dual relation

and

the last

member

of a

compound
Thus the

may

express each of the three numbers

wsfi^ sakala ex-

presses that in which the

two parts are together.

word WK^ sam-agra, " full,*" is used especially in regard to the moon, as a body with points, i. e. that in which the two
points touch one another.

Transposed into Greek relations of

sound sakala-s would give, perhaps, okoKo^, or oKeKo^, or

oAcoAoj;

but from this the present o\o^ has rejected the middle
in Kopos, Kovpo,

syllallable, as is the case

compared with

oPTT^ kumdra-s, "a boy." 309. II. The theme of the declension which
is

is,

in Sanskrit, dwa,
:

naturally inflected with dual

it tva,

terminations

the
it,

Gothic gives for

according to

. 87.,

and

inflects

in

the want of a dual, as plural, but after the

[G. Ed. p. 434.]

manner of pronouns:
;

nominative

tvai, tvds, tva

dative tvaim; ac-

cusative ivans, thv6s, tva.*

The

Sanskrit displays in the dual

* One would expect

{. 231.).

tvo,

on account of the form being monosyllabic

I

In the genitive masculine and neuter

should look for tvt-z4,

after the analogy ofthi-zS,

" horum" from

THA, or tvaize, according to the

ed.),

analogy of the definite adjectives ($.287. p. 374 G.

and according to the

common declension
base

tv'-S (p. 276).

;

However, the form tvaddy^ occurs thrcij

it is

times in the sense of duorum

whence

clear that the genitive of the

TFA

was no longer

in use in the time of Ulfila,

The form tvaddy'-i

belongs to a theme

TVADDfA (as hary'-^ from HARTA), and appears,

in Sanskrit is dwi-tiya for dwa-tiya, to

from the ordinal number, which

have introduced
rejecting both
itself into

the cardinal number.

is,

From

tvaddt/6,

the

d of

which one

besides,

superfluous

and

by by

changing the p into a vowel,

in Gothic,

we

arrive at the

Old High German

zueio,

according to Isid. zueiy6, aafior from fidvor; also definite, zuei^o, which,

would be tvaddyaizL

Grimm

appears, ou the other hand, to

have

CA5J)INAL NUMBERS.

423

no difference between the pronominal declension and the ordinary one, and dwau is declined like vrikdu (p. 274), due feminine like dhdre (p. 2S5), and dwe neuter like ddne
(p. 276).

As, however, the notions of

;

number are much

alpa, " a little,"

akin to those of the pronouns

and as

^^
if
it

forms, in the nominative plural masculine, ^r^alpi{^. 228.);

so

from the masculine theme dwa,

tvai

had a

plural,

might be expected dwe,

Gothic

to which, according to .78., the

it

would

correspond, which

is

not requisite
if

to regard like adjectives terminating similarly, as

comlatter

pounded with a
cially as

definite

pronoun, espe-

[G. Ed.

p. 435.]

a genitive

tvaizS,

which would make the

view necessary, does not occur.

bai, " both,"

To
is

tvai corresponds, also,

ba,

from the theme BA, neuter

to

dative bairn, accu-

sative

masculine bans, which

be

deduced through

aphaeresis

from the Sanskrit base vbha, Old Sclavonic oba

(nominative and accusative dual), from the base

OEO.

In

Zend the masculine

.

of the

number two

is

aj^ dva (for dv&,

208.),

with which the Old Sclavonic dva

c?i"ye

is identical,

while the
255.
e.).

feminine neuter

answers to the Sanskrit dic^

(.

The Zend neuter

resolved into .

is

y In the Greek and Latin

duye, with euphonic

(. 43.),

and the v
the

JJo), Zvo, duo,

Lave taken occasion, from the Old High German forms,

Gothic tvaiyi and tvaiaize, in which
I

to

suppose a

cannot agree with him.

The Old
found, in

Northern, by exchanging the dental medials with gutturals, gives tvaggya

for the Gothic tvaddyS.

In the accusative plural feminine

is

Gothic, together with tvos also tveihnos, which presupposes a masculine and

neuter base

TVEIHNA.

fern.

TVEIUXO;

and in which the an-

nexed

HNA

reminds us of the appended pronoun

^ sma,
').

discussed
s into

at . 165. &c.,

which, by metathesis, and with the alteration of the

h, has in Prakrit

and Pall taken the form mha (comp.

is

169.)-

On

this

Gothic

TVEIHNA

based the Old High

aocnsative masculine zuene with loss of the h.

German nominative and The feminine, however,

is

appears in Old High

German

free

from this addition, and

in the nomt-

native and accusative zuo, also abbreviated

zua (comp.

^. 69.).

424
old V
is,

NUMERALS.
in the

same way, resolved

is

into the u, but the final

:

vowel of the base

not abandoned
(.

5ua)

answers

to the

Vedie masculine dwd

genders the Greek

208.);

but in distinguishing the

is

surpassed

by the Latin

and

the

other European sister languages.

The Lithuanian
of

has du

in the nominative masculir*?, and dwi in the nominative

feminine;

with

the

closer

explanation

which,

and

their dual declension, further.

It is,

we
is,

will

not here occupy ourselves

however, to be remarked of the Sanskrit nu-

meral, that the a of

dwa

in the beginning of compounds,

weakened
(comp.

to

(compare

. 6.):

hence dwi, which

is

repre-

sented by the native grammarians as the proper theme

p. 102). its

The Greek,
5/
;

in

which 8Ft

is

inadmissible,

gives in

stead

hence,

^i^jLrjriap

= fs^TlT dwimutri (theme),

in

"having two mothers."

The Zend and Latin agree

the corruption of this dwi very remarkably, in this point,

that they have both dropped the

d and have both hardened

"with two
this abbre6/.v,

the V to b; hence

AsyAj^en^.^C^-'-^'^ hipaitistnna,

nipples," like biceps, bideps,

and
the

others.

From
dwis

viated

bif

comes, in both languages, also the adverb

in

"twice,"
S/j:

contrast
i,

to

Sanskrit

and

Greek
re-

the

Greek

however, in compounds, cannot be

8tg,

garded as an abbreviation of

as is

wont

to be done.

The German
[G. Ed.
p.

dialects,

with exception of the Old High Ger.

436.]

man, require, according to

;

87., ivi for dvi,

as the initial

member of compounds
ivi-hive,

this is furnished

by the

Anglo-Saxon in compound words like ivi-fite, "bipes" ivi-finger,

"duos digitos longus,"
"bicolor."

The Old High

zuiro,

German
qui-falt,

gives zui {=zwi) or qui;

e.g. zui-beine, "blpes,*'

"duplex" (Grimm HI.

956.).

The adverb

more
its

fully zuiror, also quiro, " twice," belongs,

according to

formation, but not without the intervention of another

5/y, bis ;

word, to the above dwis,

but

it is clear,

from the by

Old Northern

tvis-var,

that

ro

has arisen from sva

v,

apocope of the a and vocalization of the

perhaps more

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
anciently to
u,

425

and thence to

(.

77.) as in deo (also diu),

"a servant," genitive diwe-s, from the base DIWA. Whence comes, however, the Old Northern svar, which
occurs also in thrisvar, "thrice," and with which the English
ce

in

twice,

ihrice

is

connected.

believe

that

the

s,

which precedes the

var, is

certainly identical with

Tpi\,

the

s of

%F

divis,

/?,

and

f^TT iris,

but the an-

nexed var corresponds to the Sanskrit substantive vdra, which signifies period and time; hence ekaidra, "once"
(see

Haughton), and

varamvdram, "repeatedly."
^-d-

Hence

comes the Persian

original

baVi
tliis

bdr-i,
is

"once";

and as the

meaning of

word

"time," and

already seen, in Persian, the transition of the v into

we have b, we
ber
in

may
the

hence very satisfactorily explain

the

Latin

names of months
i.e.

and Septem-ber, therefore,

is literally

the seven-time,

the seventh time-segment of the year.

But

to return to the

Old Northern

svar, in trisvar, thrisvar,

which we must now divide into

time, is expressed therein twice,

tris-var, thris-var,

accord-

ing to the explanation which has been given, the idea of

which

is

not surprising,

as in the Old

High German
suffix is
first

m^riro, also

mentioned above,
it is

the comparative

twice contained, because

no

longer

felt

the

time,

by the genius of the language,

with sufficient clearness.

first

As

then, in

Old High German,

v),

the

r,

and more
from

lately also the o (from

of s-var has
p. 437.]

been dropped, we

see, in the
dris,

Middle High

[G. Ed.

German

drir,

the form again returned into the

tris.

original limits of the Sanskrit- Greek

The theme Lithuanian, and Old

310. HI.

is,

in

the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin.

Sclavonic,

TMI, whence
exactly the
(.

in

the

Gothic, according to

. 87.,

THRI, and
is,

Zend, according to another law of sound

declension
of
this

same in The 47.).

languages

base

in
it

most
is
all

of the

mentioned, perfectly regular:

only to be remarked
the cases cannot be

of the Gothic, in which, however,

426

NUMERALS.

adduced, that on account of the word being monosyllabic,

the
i

is

not
iy

suppressed

before vowel
.

terminations, but

becomes
thriy-e,

(compare the

Pali,

226.)

hence the genitive

(. 233.).

and nominative

neuter thriy-a

Besides

these, the dative ihri-m

cited.

and the accusative

thri-ns

may

be

The Sanskrit forms the genitive from an extended theme traya, hence traya-n-dm ; while the Zend thry-anm or thray-anm comes from the original base. Both languages, however, agree in
according to
this, that f% only a theme of the masculine and neuter
its
tri,
;

jpQ> thri,

is

and although,

termination,

it

might quite as well be

assigned to the feminine, nevertheless the feminine

numrather

ber

has

an

appellation
iri,

peculiar to

it,

which
is

is

different
tisri,

from
the

thri,

of which the

theme
Sanskrit

timr {ffm

. 1.),

a of which, in the

nominative,
;

accusative, and vocative, is irregularly suppressed

fif^HV tisras'\

hence

for tisaras,

[G. Ed.

p. 438.]

311.

Zend ^/ASMiJ^ tisaro. IV. The Sanskrit feminine theme

tigar
is

^IT^T chatasar (chatasri) follows the analogy of the

just mentioned
;

and the similarity between the two forms

appears, which
is

so great that

it

is

perhaps the

fact, that

the so

number
the

three

contained in the fourth numeral;

that tisr-as would

be a weakened
the

form of

tasr-as,

and

cha prefixed to

with the particle,

number four would be identical which means " and," and which, in other
end of the word.
If

places, is attached to the

one wished

to press

still

farther into the deep mystery of the appel-

lations of

numbers, one might moot the question whether

* With this extended theme one

nominative masculine
rfrie in

may compare
drio,

the Old
to a

High German
theme DlilA,

Isidor,

which belongs

with pronominal declension.

The feminine

from the base

DRIO,

of the same sound, presupposes in like

manner a masculine and neuter

tisris,

theme

DRIA.
tisras is

t In the accusative,
staad according to the

more organic than ffHCH

rule (comp. $. 242.).

as

it

must

common

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
the syllables tasa io
the

427
might not be
any language
for

theme

cha-ta-sar,

considered as identical with the demonstrative bases of the

same sound.
whatever
particular

do not think, at
special

least, that

has

produced
of

original

words

the

designation

such
;

compound

and

peculiar

ideas as three, four, five, &c.

and as the appellations of

only

numbers
explain
culties

resist all

comparison with the verbal roots,* the

pronominal roots remain the

them.
in

means by which
will

to

Without attempting to resolve the

individual

diffi

the
that

numbers, we
of speech

express the

conjecture,

the operation

with regard to

the
this

numbers

might
&c.

originally be

expounded nearly in
"it, this, that,

manner
it,

that
this,"
lie

one might perhaps say,

:

and

and

thus the pronouns might actually

to

suffice

better than they appear

do

in

the forms of

numerals which

before us.

But

an

obscuration

of

the original clearness of this

method, which would occur

in the course of time, would be

to this, that a simple or

owing also [G. Ed. p. 439.] compound word might undertake imit.

mediately to designate this or that number, and no otlier

one, though equally adapted to denote

312.

The masculine and neuter

weakt

of the

number

four have,

in Sanskrit, -MHIT. chatudr as the strong theme,

as the
;

and WWT. chatur

hence, nom. masc. chatudr-as, accus. chatur-as,

:

noQi. accus. voc. neut. chatwdr-i

IS

the gen. masc. and neut.

chatur-dm, since, according

irregularly chatur-n-dm

for

to the analogy of bases terminating with a vowel, a nasal

Only
"

in three

might one perhaps think of the Sanskrit root

w iri,

trans-ffredi"

and consider three, therefore, as the more (than two).

is,

This rerbal notion of passing over, adding,

sible

however, also the only pos-

one which conld be blended with the names of numbers.

To

129.

is

further to be added, that from the strong theme springs

voc. plural of the neuter; while this

also the

form of the nom., ace, and

kind forms the whole singular and dual from the weak theme.

428
is

NUMERALS.
(.

introduced

246.).

In the

Zend the strong theme

. 47.
;

is

7juj(i)doA}^

chathwdr, according to

hence, nom. masc.

is,

<^7au(m5oa3^ chatftwdrd ;

and the weak theme

;

by trans-

w<^M^ chathru (accus. sing.), Vend. S.

position,
^TTtOT'i^

as,
p.

chathru-mdhim, "four months"

248.

For the Sanskrit genitive

(1. c.

chaturndm,

we

find

^'^f^M>/(3M^ chathrusnanm

pp. 204

and

nanm);

with a inserted, i}'^)MMi>7(^xi^ chathrusabut in the beginning of compound words it is

206,
^7^^<i^(sxi^

more frequently found

according to .44., an

chathware

so that the
d,

weakening consists merely

e is

in the shortening of the

and,

added to the r; as cl,alware-

priHistanydo, " of her with four teats " (gen. fem.,

p. 83).

Vend.

S.

As

to

the European
to
.

sister languages,
c//,

one must
labials,

expect, according

14.,

for

gutturals and

hence, in Gothic fidvdr, and aspirates for smooth letters,

according to

87.

This j^c/wlr

is

based on the strong theme

'5W1T chatudr, but in the state of declension extends the

theme by an unorganic
adduceable case.
[G. Ed.
p. 440.]

i,

hence dative fidv6ri-m, the only

In Old Northern the nom. masc. \sji6ri-r.

The
"

original

theme fidvdr appears

(accus.):
is

in the

compound ^c/udr-f?^M??s, "forty"

Jidur in Jidur-dogs,

on the other hand,

should not be

four days,"

referable to the Indian

it

weak theme
said that the

chatur;

whence, however,

weak theme of the German, Lithuanian, and

last

Sclavonic has been brought from an Asiatic original site,

for it

was as easy for the Gothic, by suppressing the

its

vowel but one, to contract

" servant,"

fidvdr to fidur

like

Ihiu-s

from

ihiva-s,

gen. thivi-s

as
in

for the Sanskrit to

fol-

abbreviate chatwdr to chatur.

The Lithuanian theme

its

lows

the

example

of abbreviation

interior,
is

but

extends the theme at the end;

the masc. nom.

kefuri,

and the feminine keturios

KETURIA
is

serves the latter as

"

theme good"

the masculine keturi

/'see

analogous with yen,

the

p. 251, Note

;):),

and therefore has

as its base.

KETURIE,
genitive "-'

euphonic for

KETURIA,

The

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
accusative masculine
ketuTi-Ht, keturi-s,

429

proceed from the base

the mas-

KETURI. The
GOSTI, and

Old Sclavonic gives

CHETYBT as
;

culine and feminine theme, and

inflects the

masculine like

the feminine like

KOSTI (p. 349)

numeral

hence nom.

chetyry-e, chelyri, just as in the third

triy-e, "tri ";

and

the feminine form may, in both, represent also the masculine,

and always supplies the neuter.

vero,

But the

collective chet-

and the ordinal number

cheiverty-X, stand in

closer

agreement with the Indian strong theme '^RTT chahcdr : the Latin guatuor, also, which, in disadvantageous comparison
with the cognate languages, has lost the capability of declension,

and the Greek

chatndras
;

Teo-cra/o-er, re-rrap-eg,

rest

on the strong

-<<r<4K^

^WT^

chattdrd,

semi-vowel.

form by assimilatson of the The Prakrit form, also, which I am not able
so that re-nape^, just like the Pali
its last
t

has gained

to quote, will scarcely be other than chaffdro (comp.

p.

300

414 G.

ed.).

With regard
by which
this

to the initial t let reference be

is

made to

. 14.,

accommo-

[G. Ed.
itself to

p. 441

dated with the JEoVic

irt'avpeg,

which refers

the weak

theme ^THT chatur. With the Zend transposition of the weak theme to chufhru(p. 439 G.ed.),atthe beginning of compounds,
agrees surprisingly the Latin quadru, in quadrupes and other
words.

fWR
in

tris,

The adverbial s, by which fs^ divh, " twice," and Zend thrvi, " ihrice,'' are formed, is, in the Sanby the rule of sound mentioned
" four times," for chaturs.
;

skrit chatur, suppressed

.

94.

hence chalur,

That

the latter has originally existed one learns from the

Zend

transposed form
in the

jjo>7oaj^ chatl.rus.

The Latin has

already,

number

three, without being forced

s,

by a compulsory

law, dropped the

and hence

fer

and quater appear only

as internal raodi6cations of the cardinal numbers.

313.

V. Sanskrit ti^h panchan, Zend yAs^^AJo) panchan,

Lithuanian

penki* Greek

-nivre,

iEolic

iteyi-ne,

Gothic

* This

is

the nomioatiTe masculine ; the feioiiiinc

is

penldo*t and holds

the

430

NUMERALS
The Sanskri^

fimjy* Latin t/uinque, Old Sclavonic p-t/atyA

Zend panchan
I

is

the theme, and the genders are not dlstint^uished in this and the following

G. Ed. p. 442.J
;

num-

bers

hence the nominative, accusative, and vocative have

the other cases shew plural terminations; as, geni-

always singular neuter forms (therefore ^anc/m, according to

.

139.)

tive

Mis||lR

panchdndm,

Zend

^-^yAi^^AJo)

panchananm

(Vend.

S. p. 52).

By

this irregularity in the declension the

Sanskrit and Zend prepare us in a measure for complete want

of inflection in

Greek and

Latin.

Moreover,

it is

remarkrecog-

able that not one of the European languages will at

all

nise

the

final

nasal, while,
is

nevertheless,

that

of saptan.

nnvnv, and rJasan

found also in Gothic and Lithuanian;

also,

and

in

Lithuanian,

that

of ^tf^

ashtan,

"eight"
old

{aszld,ni).

The Greek has frequently preserved an

the

same

relation to

it

that keturios does to A:e;ur/(p. 428).

obtains with the appellations of the

numbers

6, 7, 8, 9,

of which

The same we give

only the masculine.

* Occurs only uninflected:

tion of an
i

in the declined

theme, the iinorganic addi-

must be expected,

as in

FIDVORT;

and as

is

also actually
for the

the case in Old

High German

in this

number, and the appellations

six to ten inclusive.

In Gothic, however, occur also saihs, "six," sibun^

fore without the unorganic i; but

"seven," ahtau, "eight," and taihun, "ten," only uninflected, and therefrom nmn, " nine," comes the genitive

niwx-6y

which indeed might

but which
is

also

have proceeded from a theme

NIUN or
348), and

NIUNA,

doubt not comes from

NIUNI.

t The theme
ral as

PYATI,

and

is

inflected like

KOSTJ

(p.

with singular terminations;

so that one has to look

upon

this

nume-

a feminine collective, beside which the object numbered stands

in apposition in like cases.

the numbers 6 to 10 inclusive.

to

The same obtains with the appellations for As to the formal relation of PYA TI

panchan,

we must
is

observe, that of the latter, in Sclavonic, only the

syllable

pa

represented

hy pya ($.225. n); but

"six,"

TI

is

a derivational

suffix, as in

SHESHTI,

DEVfATI,
ti

"nine," and

Z)5?4Tf,
numbers

"ten," and corresponds to tbe Sanskrit suffix vihaati, " twenty," ahashti, " sixty," &c.

in the multiplied

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
before

431
it

a nasal origiually there,

while

has

preferred

weakening the same

iTV^a(ji,
v),

to e before other consonants;

Tux/re(T); TeTv<f>a{fjii)
:

hence
;

ervyp-av,

but

but r&rv<pe{Tt
"nkvre.

and so eina, ewea, deKa

not -nevra, however, but

It

might therefore well be assumed, that the nasal in IndoZend numerals is a later addition, but that cha is the particle

signifying

"

and," which, in the

(.311.).

number

four,

we have
is,

taken for the prefix

In Latin, also, guinque

in

regard to

its

termination, similar to words connected with

is

the particle que, as in irevre the enclitic re, which

to que and cha
(see
I
. 14.)

akin

appears to be contained.

This

would prefer regarding pan in xj^ pancha as euphonic for pam, and the m as a neuter case-sign but the pa which remains over as a pronoun, and indeed as
the case,
;

Lemg

identical with the ka

in regard to

which occurs in the number one

[G. Ed.

(.

308),
]

which one might advert to the

p.

443

old Latin pidpid for quidquid, ttoio^ for Koiog, &c.

Five would,

therefore, literally

mean "and ^m
shash,

one," and in fact that one

which
anian

is to

be added to four.*
Sanskrit

314.

VI.

Zend

avajjiccJ^ csvas,

Lithup.

szpszi.
t),

Old Sclavonic shesiy (theme

. 82.),

SHESHTI,
Greek
e^.

430.

Note

Gothic saiha (see

that

Latin

sex,

One
the
"cju

may

justly suppose

the guttural

which begins

Zend word has

also

existed in Sanskrit, for instance,

* Ag. Senary, who likewise recognises

in pancJia the particle

"and,"

seeks to compare the preceding syllable with /wzni,

1833. II. p. 49).
If,

"hand"

(Berl. Jahrb-

however, a connection exists between the appellations

the former word might be

of the hand and

five,

named from the number

to explain digitus

of the fingers

as one

might also venture an attempt

and baKTvKos with the number "ten," and our "finger," Gothic /^yr so that in this word no ( =f.ngrs), theme FJGGRA, mth.Junf {fimf)
;

transition of the guttural organ into the labial has taken place.

do not
also, as

think

it

probable

iha.tjinffer in

named from fanpen, "to seize";

total

far as regards the

is

Greek and

Latin, the appellation of each single finger

more

likely to be derived

from the

number

tlian

from pointing

(dcucw/u).

432
ks'hnsh, for sh is

NUMERALS.
otherwise not an
initial syllable in Sanskrit,

and also no original sound, but that

admissible with a preceding k

sibilant

which

is

only

(. 21.).

In Latin, Greek,

and German the guttural appears to be transposed, for

sex is the transposition of xes. 315.

VII. Sanskrit

^httT sojstan,

Zend

yA5^Q>A5'

/mpZon, no. 313.),

minative and accusative

"mt sapta, aj^q)a5' hapta (see

Greek

eTrra,

Latin Hcptcm, Lithuanian spptyni, Old Sclavonic

sedmy (theme

SEDMI). The m of septem and sedmy seems to

nom. masc. saptama-s, and
in Scla-

me
is,

to

have been introduced from the ordinal number, which

in Sanskrit, saptama,

vonic sedmyL
osmy^
" eight,"
p.

The same

holds good of the termination of

decern, Sanskrit navama-s,

and the Latin novem,

[G. Ed.
IS

444.]

" the ninth," das'nma-s, " the tenth "; for it

not probable that the n of the Sanskrit cardinal

number

has become

in

the abovementioned languages, as

to??,

is

very frequently corrupted

especially at the '^nd of words,

is

where, in Greek, this transition

verse method of the n to
316.

necessary

\'hile

the re-

m scarcely

occurs anywhere.

VIII. Sanskrit

^^ as^ (on or ^!T^os/((lu;

nsfita,
o/ctco,

from the
latter
asta,
octo.

former the nominative and accusative

again ashtdu
;

from the
Latin

Zend

fxs^j^xs astan,

nominative m^x^m

Lithuanian aszl&n?, Gothic ahtau, Greek

Old Sclavonic osmy (theme OSMl).

and the analogous
(see
.

The Sanskrit
in

ashtdu

okto) appear, as it were, in a dual dress

is,

206.)

nevertheless, ashtdu

my

opinion, just as

much

as ashtan, a bare theme, and has perhaps proceeded

latter form,

from the

which occurs only in Zend, by the

resolution of the n to u, which is so common (comp. p. 415, Note ), and the lengthening of the a if it is not preferred
;

to
.

develope
206.

it

from

oshtas,

according to the analogy of

last

From

^'ti ashtdu

comes, by suppression of the

"

element of the diphthong, ashld-bhin, asUd-bhyas, ashtd-su,

as rd-bhiSf &c., from
rdi,

thing,"

" riches,"

while ashtdu,
ashto.'

in the cases mentioned, forms

regularly ashtabhh,

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
bhyas. ashtAsu (comp. p. 304).

433

The genitive has only one

form, namely, ^lYTtTP^ ashtdndm.

of ashtdu
is

The strength

of the du

preserved, also, in the cognate languages, and

indeed in the Latin octav-us, Greek oySoo^ for oyoF-o^, and

in

German forms as ahtoice-n, dative, according to Notker the cardinal number from ahtowi-rriy from the theme

AHTO WL

But

if

nshtdu were connected in

its

base with

^JiTT chufur, " four," there

would be

strong: reason for con-

sidering the former form as the dual, expressing four twice,

and for assuming that an unorganic corruption of a dual

termination,
antiquity, has
317.

which made
Sanskrit

its

appearance in

the

earliest

grown up with
TT'I

the theme.

IX.

navan, Zend

[G. Ed.

p.

445.3

AiM) navan (nominative and

ac<,'usative nava),

Gothic niun
i,

by contracting
so

the va to u and weakening the a to

as is
evveoc,

common,
last

66.

Latin

novem (see

315.),

Greek

Lithuanian dewyni^ Old Sclavonic devyaty {ihexne

DEVY^TI)
system of
I

The

two appellations appear foreign

:

to the

the other sister langunges

they are based, however, as

the

have already remarked in another place,* on

medial on which,
yS/ooTo^

facile

interchange of a nasal with the organically corresponding

among

others, rests the relation

between

and

WWT^ mriias, " mortuus^

As regards

the origin

of this numeral term, there exists a close connection in re-

spect of form with the expression for "new** (Sanskrit nova).

That, however, a relation of ideas actually exists between

the two designations, as Ag. Benary
first

acutely conjec-

tured (Berl. Jahrb. 1832. iL p. probable;

for without

50),

appears to

me

likewise

recognisng a dual in

a^htAu,

and

without excluding the thumbs in reckoning by the fingers,

the number, nine can
still

only be thought of with refe-

rence to the earlier numbers, and as next to eight,

and

Historical and Philological Transactions of the

Academy of letters for

the year 1833, p. 168.

434

NUMERALS.
all

nine, in contrast with eight or

is

the preceding' number?,

is

just as

much a new number,

that.

as that which

new

itself

is

always a something later and

successive, a this corre-

As a case in poiut, observe One must also admit that it would not be surprising if any former number whatever, excluding one, were named after the idea of that
sponding to the old
the Latin secundus from sequor.

which

is

new, and that

this origin is

most intimately con-

nected with the pronominal origin of other numerals.

LG. Ed.
^A5J3A3^
p.

446.]

318.

X.

Sanskrit

^^^

dasan,

Zend

dasan (nominative and accusative dam), Greek ^e/ca Latin decern, Lithuanian deszimt, deszimt'-s and deszimtis (the
313.

two first indeclinable), Old Sclavonic desynfy (theme DES YA TI

see
.

Note

f),

Gothic taihun.
82.
:

Concerning the

ai

and u of

taihun, see . 66.

and

the consonants have obeyed the law

the Sanskrit,
iu

of removal

(. 87.).

The Greek, rather than

prototype to
;

therefore serves
to

as

the Gothic

regard
in

the

second

consonant

and we

have

laid

down

. 21. the Sanskrit "^ s as

If,

then, in this

a proportionably modern sound. corruption, the Lithuanian and Sclavonic

agree with the Sanskrit, this

may

be so explained, that

these languages, guided independently

by the Sanskrit and

have transformed

Zend, but with the same euphonic

feeling,

an old guttural

to a sibilant;* in

which change of sound, howhowever, we desire to base

ever, the Sclavonic, in other cases, goes farther than the

Sanskrit (comp.

p.

415 G.

ed.).

If,

on

historical tradition the peculiar coincidence with the San-

skrit and Zend in the case before us, and some others, we must arrive at this through the assumption that the Li^

thuanian

and Sclavonic races at some period wandered

in Asia,

from their original settlement

when corruption

But not

univeTsally, where, in Sanskrit,

is,

is

found

for

aiman

"a

stone," nom, asmd,

in Lithuanian,

AKMEN,nova. akmu
(. 264.).

(^. 189.)

and in Old Sclavonic

KAMEN,

nom. kamy

CARDINAL NUMBERS.

43S

had already entered into the language, which did not exist at the time when the Greeks and Romans transplanted the
Asiatic original language to Europe.

319.

XI XX. The

smaller numbers are combined with

:

the expression for ten

dwAdasan.,

Sanskrit F^rr^^P^ e/cddasan^

'4A^\H^

ITK^R
&c.
;

^^^m^

trayddaiian,

chaturdasan,

Zend yAj3A5^^AjA>A5 aevandasan (?), yAjj3Ai^^ dvadasan ;* Greek evJexa, So^eKO, rpia-KaideKa, reaaapea- [G. Ed. p. 447.]
Kai^eKa; Latin undecim, duodecim, tredecim, quatuordecim

Lithuanian wienolika, dwylika,

ainllf{i C. XV.

irylika,

keturdlika;
";

Gothic

5.), tvalif,] Jimfiaihun,

"fifteen

Old Sclavonic

chetyrinadesyafy, " fourteen," puaiynadesyafy, " fifteen,"

"

&c

Remark.

Before the

simple dasan (from dakan) had

been changed in the Gothic into taihun, according to the

These
S. p. 120).

may be deduced from

So

the ordinals aivandasa, dvadaJa (Vend.

also chathrudasan, "fourteen,"

panchadagan, "fifteen,"

{roxDchathrudasa, " thefonrteenth,"7?ancAarfa.'a, "the fifteenth."

in aevandaia appears to have proceeded from
sign, for the

The nasal

m, and

to be

an accusative

whole stands

1. c.

in the accusative {ah-andasem).

By this

doubt
or,

thrown on the a&vandasan given above, and perhaps aSvodagan, according to the original principle of the compound, aevadasan might
is

be expected.

In one other passage, indeed, occurs the nominative of the

(1. c.

ordinal aivandaio

p.

230)

it

is,

however, clearly a

false

reading

and the sense requires the accusative, as governed by j^j<^aj^j.V3AUuA

4rdsnaditi,

which Anquetil renders by a

atteint ; thus,
'*

^?ojaj4^A5A5a
attingit

j^ji^AJjjjeJUJoo aivandcUem frdsnaoUi,

decimum

" ; and ia
also

the following analogous constructions the ordinal

number

stands
is

always in the accusative.

The form aivandasem, from aevamdasem,

letter.

remarkable, also, in a phonetic respect, because elsewhere in Zend a final

is

not governed
I

by the organ of the following

do not take the tva here, with

Grimm

(II. 947.), for the neuter, bat,

according to the principle of genuine compounds, for the theme (compare

.112.),
to

whence the nom. masc.

correct

tvai.

Tva may

also

and

this appears

me more

be

regarded, without the Gothic being conscious of

is

the formation, precisely as the abbreviation of the Sanskrit died, which

a lengthening of the theme dwa, as ikd

froci ika.

F F 2

436
comparatively recent

NUMERALS,
law for
the
alceration
that,

of sounds

(compare

. 82.),

it

may

have happened

through the

very widely-diffused disposition for exchanging the d with the not less common permutation between /, and through
gutturals and
labials

through
damn
"

which,

among
in

others, the

relation oi fidv6r to the Lithuanian keturi and Latin quatuor

becomes explicable
" eleven,"

the

contained

ekd-dasan

and dwd-damn,

twelve " (from dakan)^

may

have

passed, in Gothic, into

LIBI.
is

Through
is

the dative tva-libi-nif

genitive tva-Ub'-S,

LIBI

preserved, in fact, as the true

theme; so that each a oi dasan

[G. Ed.
p. 448.]

weakened

to

i.

The /of
and
if

the uninflected tvalifis, therefore, not to be

. 87.,

explained according to
the

but according to

93".;

theme

libi

has not obeyed the law for the mutation of

sounds,

the

objection,

which

has

been

raised

by Graff

High German Thesaurus, p. 317) against my explanation, is removed by what has been remarked in
(Old
. 99.,

for

we

refer

to fidv6r,

not

fithvdr,-

The Latin
for

quadraginta, also, for quatraginki, and the

oKToog,
e^BoiJLos

Greek oydoos
that

for

eTiTOfxos,

and several others,

proposition

may be
nume-

noticed,

in

support

of the

the

ral formations in the choice of the degree of the organ of

the consonants have

not always remained in the custo-

mary more

path;

and in cumbrous compounds the medials are admissible than the smooth letters and aspi-

rates.*

To remove
ground
of
that
taihuti,

the

objection which
is

may

be

taken

on the
the

LIBI

so

very different
that,

from

form

we may remark,

in

French
and

* The Anglo-Saxon endleqfan, endlufan, compared with

the Old Friesian andlova with
twilif,

tvelf,

should not

make

us doubt, since
t

the Anglo-Saxon eo corresponds to the Sanskrit a of dasan and Gothic

of Nf, as in the relation of sen/on (Old Friesian siugon) to the Sanskrit

saptan, Gothic sibun.
like that of siugon.

Let, then, the Old F'riesian o of lova be regarded

To

the Sanskrit chatiodr, Gothic ^</u(5r, correspond

the Anglo-Saxon /eoye/', Old Friesian fiuwer.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
also,

437
like on-zey

the
is

number

ten,

in

compounds

dou-ze,

trei-ze,

so remote from the expression of the simple

one would hardly venture to pronounce the syllable ze to be akin, or originally identical with dix^ if it were not historically certain that onze, douze, &c., have
ten, that

arisen from undecim, duodecim, and that therefore ze

is

corruption of decim, as dix

If,

is

a less vitiated form of decern.

then, onze, douze, &c., have

assumed the appearance of un-

compounded words through the great alteration of the expression for the number ten contained in them, the same holds good
with regard to our
ei/f

and

ztcolf,

in which,

perhaps, as in

onze and douze, a connection with ein and zwei

recognised, but none with zehn
also, the relation
;

may be

and in the English eleven,

to

one

is

entirely obliterated.

But with
dreilf,

regard to our using for thirteen, fourteen, &c., not

vierif,

or similar forms in
is

If,

but dreizehn, tierzehn, &c^

in which zehn
this arises

just as unaltered as the drei

and

vier,

from the Germans having forgotten the old Indofor these

European compounds
as they exist

numbers, and then having

compacted the necessary expressions anew from the elements

uncom pounded.

Nay, even

[G. Ed.
it

p. 449.]

the Greek has reconstructed afresh, as well as

could, its

numerals from thirteen upwards, after that the old more

genuine compounds had
done,
I

fallen into disuse

but this has been

must

say, in a clumsy,

awkward

fashion,

by which the

addition of a particle signifying and was found requisite in

an attempt at extreme perspicuity, while ev^cKa, ScidcKo,

move more
compounds.
rpt^cKa)
is

freely,

and are suited to the

literal

spirit of the ancient

The

meaning,

too, of rpia-KaiBeKa

(for
rp/V,

"thrice and ten," and the numeral adverb

rpi, is

instead of the bare theme

here just as

much

a mistake

as the masculine plural nominative serves as a reproach to

the Te<Taape<7KaidKa, and

is

inferior in purity to the Sanskrit

chatur-dasan, not chalvdras-daian {chatvdro-dasan).

On

the

ther hand, the Sanskrit, in the designation of the

number

438
thirteen,

NUMERALS.
commits a similar
error,

and awkwardly gives

iri*

stead of tri-dasan, tray6-dasan

euphonic
is

for irayas-daaan

where the masculine

which
is

plural nominative instead of the theme,

all

adapted for
is

genders,

not well selected.

Tlie

Latin tre-decim

therefore a

more pure formation,

the
first

as it

dispenses with a case-sign in

member
all

of the

compound
This
lika,

just so the Lithuanian try-lika, not irys-lika.

which concludes the form, in

Lithuanian

adding numerals (eleven to nineteen), exchanges the old d

for
I, as in German, and is therefore as far estranged from the simple deszimfs as the Gothic libi from taihun

partly,

as the second

consonant in lika has maintained

itself in its oldest

form received from the Greek, and has

;

not become a sibilant

other very closely.
rived, like the Gothic
&c.,

so that lika

and Se^a resemble each

lika, therefore, is

The Lithuanian
libi

de-

and the French ze in

onze, douze

from the old compound which has been handed down

therefore, be censured for its

and cannot,

ment with

the

simple

number

ten:

it is

want of agreeno longer conis

scious of its meaning, and, like an inanimate corpse,

ried by the living inferior

car-

number.

As, however, the smaller

number
feeling

compounds is still living, so that in the of the speaker the numbers wieno-lika, dwy-lika, &c.
in these

do not appear as independent simple designations of numbers

as,

perhaps, septyni

is felt to

be independent of each of
in these

the earlier
first
it

numbers

so, naturally,

compounds the

member has kept tolerably

in its isolated state
;

equal pace with the form which

shews

on which account wienwlika, if it

is

regarded as an ancient compound from the time of the unity

of language, or perhaps as derived from ^UTT^Tjn^ 4kd-datan,

[G. Ed.
p. 450.]

has nevertheless undergone, in

;

its initial

member, a renovation
to the

as also in Gothic amlif, in

Greek evScKu,
one.

in Latin undecim, have regulated their first

member according
number

form which

is

in force for the isolated

is

On

the other hand, Jw^exa

almost entirely the Sauskj'it

dwd'dam

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
(b)
i;

439
it

for A, according to

. 4.),

and

is

as similar to

as possible, as

(f)

in

Greek cannot be pronounced

after consonants,

and iu

the

first syllable, also,

could not assimilate itself to the prece-

ding consonant (compare Terrapes from rerFape^), for 5td5e/ca could not be uttered. In Latin, duodecim has formed its first

member

exactly after the simple form

on the other hand,

but has
left

the French has paid no regard to the form in which the prece-

ding number appears in

its isolated state,

the

composition entirely in the old form, only with the abbreviations which time has by degrees introduced.

With
it

refe-

rence to the isolated state of the smaller number,

would

have been, perhaps, necessary in French to have said uvze, After what has been stated, I think no deuze, iroize, &c.
one can any longer doubt, that in our
strange as
it

eilf {elf)

and

zw'dlf,
is

at the first glance

may

appear, a word
its

con-

tained expressing the

number

ten,
If,

and identical in

origin

with damn, SeKa, and zehn.

lif,

however, the older LIBI,

and Lithuanian

lika,

be regarded without the suspicion

preceded, then one would propose

arising, that in

them corrupt though very common permu-

tations of sounds

may have
lik,

in Lithuanian a root

and in Gothic

lif

or

lib

(Gothic

" reliquia''^), af-lifnan, "relinqui, superesse,"" laibds,

which both
recog-

signify " to remain," and are also connected with each other

and with the Greek

nised
(II.

\ei7:o)

(Ain).

Grimm, who has

lif

946) the original identity of our

and the Lithu-

anian

lika,

has perhaps allowed himself to be led astray by

Ruhig
latter

in the

meaning of these

expressions, and deduces the

leiban,

from

likfi, " linqui,

remanere" the former from

p. 58,

^^manere."

Ruhig, according to Mielcke,

"

holds lika for

the 3d person plural, since he says,

dinal

Composition in the carw

numbers from ten

liekmi)
scil.,

to

twenty takes place by adding

indicative lika (from

the 3d person plural

liku
s.
;

number present
one, two, &c.

the tenth remains undisturbed with the

;

simple number,

e.g.

which addition, how-

ever, in composition degenerates into a declinable

noun of

the feminiae gender, according to which,

also, the

preceding

440
[G. Ed.
p. 451.]

NUMERALS.
simple number must be regulated."*
;

The
if

languages, however, do not proceed so pedantically

and

they hold any thing understood, as very commonly happens,

they do not expressly state that any thing remains over to
be expressed.
It is certain,

however, that the Sclavonic lan-

guages, in their expressions for eleven to twenty, do not keep

back any thing to be understood, but form those expressions,

after the loss of the old,

no longer

intelligible

compounds,
e.g. in

anew, with the annexed preposition na, "over";

Sclavonic, where the

Old

numbers

eleven, twelve, thirteen, no

longer occur, chetyrir-na-desvaty, "four over ten."

nal

The

ordi-

numbers

for eleven and twelve are yedinyt-na-deityaty,

" the first

over ten," vtoryt-na-desydty, "the second over ten."

In the

same manner proceeds the twin sister of the Lithuanian accompanying it, but corrupted the Lettish, in which
signifies " eleven," as it appears to
d{e)!t

weenpazmit

me, with conc.

traction of the

of desm'it, " ten," to

z,

and overleaping tho

This procedure in Lettish has no doubt originated from

older

tlie

Hka being no longer intelligible. If it was to be so Ruhig has taken it, its form would be palpable, and the Lettians might have been satisfied with it. With reunderstood, as
ference to the composition of the numerals under discussion,

there remains to be noticed a most remarkable coincidence

of the

Lithuanian

and German with a Prakrit

I

dialect,

which coincidence, when

formerly touched

upon

this

Grimm's view is certainly much more natural, "ten and one over, Only it would be to he expected, if the language wished to designate the numbers eleven and twelve as that which they coBtain more
two over."
than
ten, that

they would have selected for combination with one and

signifies

two a word which

to the genius

"and

over, or more,"
It

and not an exponent of

the idea "to leave," " to remain."

would, moreover, be more adapted

to

and custom of the later periods of the language, not

forget the

number
J.

ten in the newly-formed compounds, like the Lettish

and

Sclrtvonic.

Grimm,

in his

"History of the German Language,"

p. 246, agrees

with uiy explanation of ctj^ zwolf, and analogous forms in

Lith. and Svilavonic.


CARDINAL NUMBERS.
subject,*

441

was not yet kDown

to

me, and which has been

ten

since then observed

by Lenz in
closely

his edition of Urvasi (p. 219).

is

In this dialect, then, the

number
to

pronounced simply

^ dahaapproaching
at the end of the

the Gothic taV,un

hut
/,

compounds under notice raha:

. 17.,

r and

however, are, according to

most intimately connected.

Hitherto only, ^TC5 vdraha, "twelve," from iTT^ dwddasay

and

"^r^SJJ^

attMraha, "eighteen," from ^;^l^ asjitddasa^

but
still

can be

cited,

from them
fall

it is

probable that the other

[G. Ed.
p. 452.]

numerals

too,

which
d,

under

this cate-

gory, have an r for

apparently to lighten the word loaded

by the prefixing of
that
if

lesser

numbers, by exchanging the d for

it is

a weak semi-vowel.

Now

a remarkable coincidence
seeing a mutation of

we were
which
is

desirous

of not

letters in this

raha we should be led to the root rah, "to

probably identical with the verb, to which

leave,"

recourse has been had for the explanation of the corre-

sponding
thought
I

Lithuanian and

had exhausted

German numeral this subject, when I

forms.f
-vas led
I

other reasons to the Hindustani grammar, where

agreeably surprised

by was
the

by perceiving

that here,

also,

number
which

ten, in the designation of eleven, twelve, &c.,

its

has

taken another lighter form than in

it is

simple

state, in

pronounced dm.%
this

But

in the

compounds under
example,
p.

discussion

becomes rah,X and,

for

bdrah,
27; and

* Influence of the Pronoun on the fonnation of Words,

Histor. Philol. Trans, of the

Academy
Greek

for the

year 1833, p. 178, &c.

to t:

t The a of rah has been weakened in the cognate languages

hence Unquo, Lithuanian

likit,

XetVta (cXittoj'),

Gothic
:

af-lif-na.

In respect to the consonants,

also,

we

refer the reader to ^^ 20. 23.

laku.,

remark,

the connection of the Lithnanian

lib,,

"
I

I lick,"

with the Sanskrit

to the conclu-

root

" to lick."
it is

Since writing this note,

have come

sion that

better to concur with Benfey, in assigning the Latin Unquo,

Greek XeiVw. Gothic qf-lif-nu, to the Skr. root rich, from rik, "to leave." des and reh but as these sounds are incorrect, I have J The text has altered them, a.s well as some other inaccuracies in the Hindustani numerals

which

follow.

Translator.

442
**'twelve,"

NUMERALS.
answers to the abovementioned
like
this,

Prakrit

inrtf

bdraha,

and,

has

proceeded

directly

from the

Sanskrit

original

form

the form of the simple

?rT^ dwddasa, without heeding do, " two," and das, " ten." It
all

may

be proper here to quote

the Hindustani

compounds

which

belong to

this

subject,

together with the corre-

sponding Sanskrit words of which they are the corruptions.

We

annex,
is

also,

the
it

number twenty, and

nineas

teen which

related to

as being twenty less one,

also the simple

lower numbers in Hindustani.

SANSKRIT, NOMINATIVE.

[G. Ed. p. 453.]

^

HINDUSTANI.

ik

1.

iyd-rah,

11,
12, 13,

Skddasa
dwada'sa
frayOdasa
chaturdasa

11.
12.
13.
14.

do

2,
3,

hd-rah

H
chdr

Urah
pand-rah
s6-lah

4,
5, 6,

chau-dah 14,*
15.

pdnch
chhah

panchddasa
shodasa
snptadasa
aj}tddas'a
tinav'insati

15.
1 6.
1 7.

I6,t
17, 18,

sU
dth

7,
8,

sat-rah

athd-rah

18.

nau
das
320.

9,
10,

unnis
bis

19,

{" undevigini^) 19.

20.

20,

vinsati
<

XX--C. The
Z(riT^

idea

ten is

expressed in Sanskrit
saiti,

by

^H sati,
or j^

sat or

fiT ti ;

in

Zend by J^J^^M

m^mm

sata,

ti

and the words therewith compounded are

thing numbered agrees in case,
put,

substantives
Sanskrit, the

with singular terminations, with which, iu

as in ap-

position, or is

as in the Zend, in the genitive, as

is

* The retention of the d

stance that the lesser

here clearly to be ascribed to the circnra-

corruption this

is

number ends with r, althongh in the Hindttstdn! no longer present.' The Bengali has assimilated the r
chduddo ; but, as a general
rule, the Bengali in

to the following d, hence

these

compounds changes the d into r, and in all cases suppresses the Hindustani A ; as &gdro, " eleven," bdro, " twelve," th-o, " thirteen."
+ This form merits particular notice,
as,

through

its / for

the r found
lif.

elsewhere,

it

comes

so near to the Lithuanian

and German

lika^

The

Bengali

is

sholo.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
dependent upon
numerals
it.

443
finds

Occasionally, too, one

these

in Sanskrit used adjectively, with plural endings.

Compare,
SANSERTT.
20, fij^ifH vihsali,

[G. Ed.
ZEND.

p.

454.]
LATIlf.

GREEK.
visaiti,

j^jasjj^

eiKari,

vigind,
tr'ig'mta.

30,

N^nr

trin'sat,

j<i^j^x j7(^ thr'iscUa,

TpiaKovra,

40, chaticdrinsaf, chathicaresata, reacrapaKovra, quadraginta.

50, panchdsat,

panchdsata,
csvasti,

TtevTrjKovra,

quinquaginta.
sexaginta.

60, shashti. 70, saptatU

e^rjKovra,

haptditi.

e^^oyJiKOiTa,\ spptuaginta.
oySojJKovTO,
octoginta.

80, asitU

....
navaiti.
iate-nif

90, navatU
100, sata-m.
"

evev^Kovra,
e-KaTo-v,
ti,

nonaginta.
centu-m,

Remark.

I hold sati, sat, safa^

to

be abbreviations
derivations

of dasati, dasat, dasata, and

dasan, "ten,"

therefore
ta,

from
is

by a

suffix

ti,

or

t:

the

former

The numerals

in sata, answering to the Sanskrit fonns in sat, are

neuters, and occur, like the fonns in H, very frequently in the 6th and 12th Fargard of the Vendidad, but only in the accusative singular, in

which satem might

also belong to a
is

theme
clear

sai.

That, however, sata

is

from Vend. S. p. 230. (in the 7th Fargard}, where pncAa satem (panchdiatem), " fifty," stands as nominative. Fromc*ffl*/i, " sixty," haptditi, " seventy," and navaiti, "ninety,"
the theme and the neuter form

we

find the accusative csvastxm, hapiditim, navaitim

on the other hand,

in the 12th Fargard, occurs several times visaiti (also written visati and
viiati) as accusative of vtsaiti,

which perhaps
form
i,

is

a dual neuter form (two

decades), and according to this would stand for visaiti {. 210.).

But

if

the final vowel

is,

is

retained in

its

original

it is

a singular neuter.
is

It

however, remarkable, that only this

final

and no other,

again found

in the cognate Latin and Greek forms.

t This and the following

first

number

are renovated forms, in which th

member

proceeds unorganically from the ordinal ntrmber.

iirn^Kovra, oKriiKovTa, for

We might
In

have expected
ivfvrjKovra the

the latter Ion. oy5Koin-a.

:

two v are separated from each other

iha epic form cVi^-

Kovra

is

more genuine.

444
in Lithuanian and

NUMERALS.
Sclavonic, already

contained

in

the*

simple deszimCs,- deszimtis, Old Sclavonic desyatv.

regard,

With
without

however,

to

the

ten

being

expressed

abbreviation in the languages mentioned, in compounds,

also

as

in

Lithuanian

dwideszimii

(or

tis),

"twenty,"

trysdeszimli (or tis), "thirty,"

and in Old Sclavonic che-

tyridesynty, " forty,"* pyfiiydesvofy, " fifty "

[G. Ed.
p. 465.]

do not consider

more true retention of the original form, but as a new formation. The Lithuanian, too, from forty upwards, separates the two numbers, and puts the
this as a

former in the feminine

plural, e.g. keturios deszimtis, " forty,"

penkios deszimtis, "fifty";

in

which

it

is

surprising that

deszimtis, also, does not stand in

the plural.
is

The Gothic
comparatively
the ancient

method

in

this
it

numeral
has
lost,

category
as in

of

recent date:

thirteen, &c.,

compound,
for ten,

and

gives,

in

the

numbers under seventy

thirty, the lesser

(sixty docs not occur), tigus, masculine, as the expression

and declines
also,

this,

and in twenty,

number

with regular plural terminations: hence the

accusatives tvanstiguns, thrinstiguns, Jidvdrtigwis, fimftigunsy

genitive thriyHigvL

The

substantive

tigus,

however,
it is

is

the etymological quaver to taihun, and

LIBI
a,

related

to the former essentially, the aspirate having become a

medial (see
is

. 89.),

thus rendering the

which, in taihun,
.

brought in by the rule of sound mentioned in

Advert, also, to the Latin medials in

82.,

superfluous.

ginli,

ginia, contrasted with the

Greek

kuti, kovtu,

which answer

better to Ssko.

Tigu-s

may

be identical with the San-

skrit ordinal dasa,

nominative

masculine

dasa-s,

which

occurs only in compounds, as duddam-s, "the twelfth."

To
its

this
M,

dasa-s,

therefore,
to pdda-St

is

related
foot."
is

tiyu-s in

regard to

as fdtu-s

"a

In

the

numbers

seventy, eighty, and ninety, ten

denoted by the neuter

Twenty and

thirty do not occur.


CARDINAL NUMBERS.
substantive t&iund (theme

445

TEHUNDA,
i

genitive tikundis)
" eighty,"

hence

sibun-tehund,

" seventy,"

ahtau-tihund,

niun-tehund, "ninety."

The

of this

TEHUNDA
I

stands

as the representative of the ai of taihun, and

hold

DA to

be the ordinal

suffix,

which has introduced into the com-

mon

ordinals another unorganic N, or, according to

Grimm,
still

follows the

weak declension
that

hence

TAIHUNDAN, nomiit

native taihunda, " decimus."

Hereby, then,

becomes
tigus

more

probable

the

abovementioned
In our
zig

also

is

originally an ordinal

number.
itself to

New German
{dreissig),

this

word has transformed

is

or ssig

and

found

also

in

siehenzig,

achtzig,

neunzig,

Old High
zehanzog
Sanskrit-

German
{zoc\

sihunzog, ahtozog, niunzog,

or ~zoc, and

Gothic taihuntehund, "a hundred."

iata,

The

Zeud
its

"a hundred," which

is

a neuter substantive

nominative ^nni satam, ^^^a}^ satem

designation to the
suffix ta

in

my

opinion owes

number

ten (dasan),

whence

it

is

formed by the
is

the
to

suppression of the

final nasal

regular

so that

it is

be regarded as an abbreviation

of da'sata, as alx)ve,

^rftT sati,

sat,

iata for dasati, &c.

This

abbreviation,

and the Zend m^mm however, which

[G. Ed.
p. 456.]

has given to the word the stamp of a primitive expression specially created for the idea

"a hundred," is

proved to be of the highest antiquity by the consentaneous

the cognate languages, Greek Karov {eKarov "one hundred"), Latin centum, Lithuanian szimta-s (masculine). Old Sclavonic sto (at once theme and nominative and accusative neuter}.* The Gothic hund and Old High German hunt (theme HUNDA, HUNTA) occur

testimony of

all

is,

verbatim,

only in
driu-kunt,

compounds, as tva-hunda, thria-hunda, zuei-hunt, where the lesser number is likewise inflected.
sati,
jjTiT

That

also ^rfn

sat,

and the corresponding words

* In Zend sta occurs oompoonded therewith.

fireqaently for saicL,

and jast so in the nn rubers

446

NUMERALS.

in the cognate languages, have in the earliest periods lost the

initial syllable of

the

number
viginti,

ten,

and with

it

the lingual

remembrance of the same; and

visaiti, eiKaTi,
eiiKo<rt,

that in fj^i Frf vinsati, j^jajjj^^

the single elements have lain

together undisturbed for thousands of years, affords a fresh

proof of the agreement of the languages which have most

faithfully

preserved their ancient construction.

would

not,

however, wish to maintain that the

loss of the

of

the

number two

in the above forms

;

falls
it

under the period

not have hap-

of the unity of languages

and that

may

pened that each of the four individual languages, having

become weary of the initial double consonant in a word already encumbered by composition, may have disburthened
itself of the initial sound, as

we have above
as,

seen

the Latin and Zend, independently of each other, produce

bis

from dwis, and

bi

from dwi, and

in

agreement with
in the

the abbreviation of
tioned at
p.

f^^lfff vinsati,

the Prakrit dialect

c?

45lG. ed. has

laid aside the

It is

mennumber

twelve also (vdraha for dwdraha).

remarkable that the

four oldest and most perfect languages of the Indo-European

family in the category of numerals before us, have lost

exactly as

much

of the

number ten
;

as the

French in the
is

forms for eleven, twelve, &c.

and

the ze of douze
fei^ifrf

therefore identical with the Sanskrit sa of

vinsati.

The Sanskrit and Zend, however, in a later corruption which is unsupported by the Greek and Latin, have caused the word dasati to be melted down to the derivation suffix
of Ircnte,
fi,

and this

ti

corresponds to the French

te

quarante, &c.

The numbers which have been

ti\ Jte;o-w-*w^ csvasti.

thus far abbreviated begin, in Sanskrit and Zend, with

sixty, "^fw shashti (ti

euphonic for

To

the

sati of f^^fiT vinsati

j^mm^I^ visatU regularly corresponds

while in the Latin ginti the smooth

the Doric

Kan

of

e^iKart,

CG. Ed. p. 467.]

letter has

sunk
In

to a medial, as in

gintaKovTa

of the higher

numbers.

Sanskrit

the n of vimcUU

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
trinsat, chaticdrinsaf, is

447
might imagine
ginti,

surprising, and one

a transposition of the nasal, so that in the Latin

ginta, centum,
it

and in the Gothic

its

HUN DA,

"one hundred,"
rest,

would stand in

proper place.

For the

chatwd.

rimat shews

its relation to

the neuter chafwdri (see

312.);

as also rpia, Tecaapa, in rptaKovra, Teaa-apaKovTa, are, in

my

opinion, plural neuter forms, with the termination length-

ened in

Tpta,

and originally,

also, in

reacapa, as the Ionic

reaaaprJKOvra, Doric rerpuKovTa,* Latin quadraginto, prove.

These forms excite the conjecture,

that,

in

Sanskrit, the

introduction of the nasal may, contrary to the explanation

attempted above, have the same object

that, in

Greek, the

lengthening of the termination has, namely, an emphatic

repetition of the prefixed
tible in the long
M*JI5Ji^^
(.
i

number, wliich

is

also percep-

of the

Zend

visaiti, as in

the long a of

panchdsaU ^^^^i-UMi^^J^ii panchdsatem from panchan 319.), and to which again the length of TrevTr^Kovra,
runs
parallel.

guinquaginta,

The
"^

Zend

chathirare,

iu

A5^A5jijg^Ajf<jA)^ chathuaresaia, " forty

(Vend.

S. p. 3So), is

likewise

stronger

than
.

cha-thru-sata,

which might havie

lata
is

been expected from

312.

As as^mm

a neuter, to

which, in Greek, kotov or kovtov would correspond, Kovra

therefore, and the Latin ginta, are best explained as neuters

in the plural, by which the neuter nature of rpta and Te<T<Tapa

is
still

more

authenticated.

An

auxiliary vowel, which

merely

facilitated

the combination, and which

might be

assumed in
the theme
is

i^y]KovTa,
;

would at

least

be very superfluous in

TPI

and

it is

a lengthened plural

much more probable that e^rj, too, neuter. Compare e^a-K/j, e|a7rXoGc,
7ro7\Xd, p.

and the remarks on irdvTa and

401, G. ed.

The
manner

IP

for a is

explained

by

$. 4.

As

to the snppression of the

vowel

before the p, rtrpio answers to rtrpa in rrrpoKiSy TfrpaTfKois, which in like

are based on plural neater forms instead of the theme.

448

NUMERALS.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.
321. While, in designating the

number

one, the greatest

variety obtains amongst the Indo-European languages, they are

[G. Ed.
first,
p. 468.]

almost unanimous in their designation of <Ae

which idea none of the languages here treated of derives

:

from the corresponding cardinal number

prathama-s (nom
),

Sanskrit Tniin^^

Zend

^9g(3AjO*/raf/iewjd (. 56^), Latiu

(for fruma-s,
.

primus. Lithuanian prima-s, Gothic frurn-s

. 135.;,

or indefinite fruma (theme

suffix,

FRUMAN,

140.), or,

with newly-added superlative

frumisf-s. Old

High Ger^r,

man SristSr,
fore")*

usually indefinite

Msto (from the adverb

" be-

Greek TTjooTOf, Old Sclavonic pervyi. TT^ff prathama, from the preposition pra, has been already discussed (p. 393
G.
ed.)
;

so the

Greek
irpo,

-npoiTOi is

derived from the correspondirpoi

ing preposition

the lengthening of which to

accords

with the Sanskrit prd in prdtar, "in the morning" (see p. 392

G.

ed.).

The

suffix

TO

is

an abbreviation of the Sanskrit

in

tarna or thama,

which occurs even in Sanskrit

W^

and as also in Latin in the form of TU in quartus, quintus, Kcxlust while in Greek this abbreviation extends to all the
ordinal numbers, exclusive of Sevrepog, e^Bofxog, and oy$oog.

chatur-tha-s, " the fourth,"

"^WfS sha$h-tha-s, " the sixth,"

In Lithuanian the corresponding

all,

TA

of four runs through

but in such wise, that together with septinias, asztuntas,

occur also sSkmns, dszmas, which correspond to the Sanskrit

TS^nm saptama-s, ^rera ashtama-s, in which the last portion of of the superlative suffix tarna or thama has remained
;

which kind of

division,

also,

yt^^IT

pancham^-s,

RTTT

navama-s, and 55R*{[ damma-s, partake, which therefore complete, by their suffix, the iha of chaturtha, so tliat both united
present
tlie

perfect word.
its

Tiie

Zend agrees herein with the

agrees more
;

Sanskrit,

only that

i^Gaj^q)ajv haptatli6

with sepiintaa than with ^nni^ saptama-s and scptimu-s

and

ORDINAL ^^JMBERS.
that
also
4'(o^><^ pug-dho, "

449
belongs
it

the

fifth,"

more

to

the European cognate languages, in which

to the Lithuanian penk-ta-s.

comes nearest
is

The Lithuanian, however,

its

more

true to the original form, as

sister,

the Zend, has

p. 459.]

softened two original smooth letters, as in Greek, oySoos for oktoo^

;

[G. Ed.

and, besides this, has aspirated

the

last,

rejected the nasal (comp. p. 94, basta

to w,

from bandh),
corre-

and irregularly changed the a

sponding to
the

as in

"ONYX,

Sanskrit Tf^ nakha,

" a nail."

In the

numbers from eleven to twenty the superlative suffix, in Sanskrit and Zend, is abbreviated still more than in the
simple

^^

dasama, Aj^gjj^ dasema, and of

is left,

all

the deri-

vational suffix only the a

before which the a of the

primitive word must

principle
for

fall

away, according to a universal

of words
;
;

the

derivation

as,

^TT^ dwd-

dada, ajj3aj^^ dvadasa, " the twelfth "

^R^^f chaturdasa^

MMXi^>?<3M^

chathrudasa,

*'

the

fourteenth."
is

The Latin

appears to prove that this abbreviation

recent date, and
its
it

comparatively of

goes beyond both the Asiatic sisters by

it

undecimus, duodecimus, not undecus, duodecus ; but has, as

itself in

were, exhausted

the

effiart

which the continuance of

these heavier forms has cost it; and has given up the ana-

logous formations in the very place in which the

cardinal
iertius

German
hence,

numbers have

lost the old

compound

in

lif:

decimus for the lost tredecimxis, &c.

An

imitation,

how-

ever, of the abbreviation which

we have just remarked

in the

Sanskrit-Zend dasa

is

supplied by the Greek and Latin in the

forms

octav-us, oyBo{F)-o, where, of the ordinal suffix, in like

final

manner, only the

oydofio^, octomus.

vowel

is left

we might have expected

it

In the very remarkable coincidence which

here exists between the said languages,

that, in the

must seem strange

its

remaining designations of the ordinal numbers,

a

the Latin

is

much
;

truer colleague to

Asiatic sisters

than to the Greek

and

it

preserves this character, also, in

full

annexing, from twenty upwards, the

simu-s (from <imu-i=nim tama-s)
;

superlative suffix

thus vicesimus or vige^

G G

NUMERALS.

450
[G. Ed.
p. 460.]

simus, trigesimus, as in Sanskrit vinsatitama-Sf

trinsattama-s.*

In Latin, however, the termination nti or nta

of the primitives is rejected, and in compensation the pre-

ceding vowel

is

lengthened in the form of

e.

Compare, in
.

this respect, the

comparative formations discussed in

its

298.

The Greek shews

more rare
i^Tj

superlative

suffix,

correspond-

ing to the Sanskrit

ishtha, in

the ordinal numbers like

i

e/KooTof, rpiaKocTTog, with the loss of the

TToo-Toj.

of icrroq, as in sKuaTog,

Here

also, therefore, as in Latin,

the

t/, at,

and vra

number are rejected. The German languages employ in like manner the superlative suffix in numbers from twenty upwards hence, Old High German dri-zugCsto, " the
of the cardinal
:

thirtieth,^ fior-zugdsto,

"the fortieth": but in the numbers from

four to nineteen the

TuiN or DAN,

in Gothic, corresponds,
(. 91.),

according to the measure of the preceding letter

to

the suffix of the cognate languages, as in ^Tir^ chaiurtha-s,

rerapTo-s, quartu-s, ketwir-ta-s.

The N, however, is an unor-

ganic addition, after the principle of the indefinite adjective

declension
(.

285.),

which
1

is

followed by the ordinal numbers,

dialects; while
vierter,

with the exception of

the

and 2 in the older

New German

has also introduced the definite

"fifth,"

" ionrth,'' fiivfter,

&e.; hence, Gothic

FIMFTAN,

nom. masc. firnjta.]

[G. Ed.
(p. 424),
p. 461.]

322.

From the weakened

base f^dwi " two**

and from the

This

f^tri, "three," contracted to

tri,

the

Sanskrit forms the ordinal

tiya-s, tritiya-s.

numbers bya suffix

iiya;

hence dwi'
ter-

suffix is easily

recognised iu the Latin

this and the higher numbers may follow the analogy of In Zend "the eleventh"; hence, also, vinsa, trihs-a, &c. I am unable to quote the ordinal numbers from twenty upwards, t In compounds like/m/?atoi^wn</a, "the fifteenth," the lesser number has either preserved the original theme while still free from the n, which

* However,

ekuda'sa-s,

was added more

the theme

lately,

for

the lesser

number

in these

compounds does
remarked

not partake of declension,

oxjiwfta

is

here the regular abbreviation of

FIMFTAN^
May

since,

as I have already elsewhere

(Borl. Ann.

1827. p. 759), bases in n, in strict accordance with the

Saoskrit, drop tbe n in the beginning of compounds.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.
fius,
all

451
ireViya,

as also in the

Old Sclavonic fretii, fem.

which, like

the ordinal numbers, has only a definite declension, in which,

however, the particular cAse occurs, that the defining element is brought with it direct from the East, while the iyi of
cheiicerfyi

and others, in

wliich, in like

manner, a connection

with ttH tiya might be easily conjectured, is, in fact, conof ^w^ chaturtha, reraprog, nected with the -^I tha, TO,

TU
.

quartus,

and has arisen from the indefinite theme in

312.),

TO

(comp. the collective chetvero,

according to

255. {d.\

although the simple word in most of the formations falling

no longer exists. The same relation, then, that chetiertyt, shesfyl, have to chaturtha-s, shashtha-Sf sedmyt, osmyt, have to "mm saptama, ^TPH ashtama ; and
under
this category
pertn/h " the first," to

pressions, in

Sclavonic,

purva, ^ remain
(.

" the

former

which exrejected
;

only in combination with

the pronominal base the

I

Y^

282.).

The Zend has

of the suffix ttyu, and abbreviated dici to bi

hence

M^i^jl bitya, xi^^^J)<^thriiya^ in which it is to be remarked that the y, which is thus by syncope united with the < at a
comparatively later period, has gained no aspirating influence To this Zend tya corresponds, by similar suppression (. 47.).
of the middle
i,

the Gothic

DJAN

(from dya,

285.) in

THRIDYAN,
Hit'h

nom.
dritto,

masc. thridya, the

of

which in the Old

f,

German

has assimilated itself to the preceding

in analogy with the Prakrit forms

like dda-auiv, Kpelacruiv,
closer,

and Greek comparatives,

p.

Kpetnuv, mentioned at
the

402.

Still

however,

lies

comparison with

Sittos, Tpirros

(5<(ro-of, Tp/o-o-oj),

which are evidently, in

[G. E<L

p. 462.]

their origin,

one with the corresponding Sanskrit-Zend ordinal and, in respect of their reduplicated consonant, have numbers; the same relation thereto that the Old High German dritto has
to

the Gothic

thriyda.

Regarding

seep. 422, Note *: the place of the ordinal

by the pronoun anthar

nnorganic formation.

(see p.

Middle High German ander. The Old Sclavonic

"duorum* number is supplied 377), Old High German andar. Our zweiter, however, is a new
tvaddyi,
ttoryi (see
.

297.J

452
answers, in respect to

NUMERALS.
its

derivation, to the

Greek

SevTcpo^,

and, in abbreviation of the base, to the Zend bitya, only that

it

has lost also the

of the Sanskrit dwi-tiya, in regard

. 297.,

to

which we have, in

adverted to the Zend ^7jui,^

b ydre*,
323.

"two

years."

We

give here a general view of the ordinal numbers

in the feminine nominative singular, since in this case the

agreement of
not occur

all

the languages strikes the eye

in the nominative masculine.

more than The Gothic forms which do

we

give in parentheses, formed theoretically, and

according to the Old High German.

[G. Ed.
SANSKRIT.
p. 463.1

NOMINATIVE FEMININE.
OR. DOR. LATIN.
TTpOiTa,

ZEND.

GOTHIC.

LITHTJANIAIf.

OLD SCLAVONIC.
perva-pa.
vtora-ya.
treti-ya.

prathama.
dwitiya.
trittyd.

frathema.
bitya.

prima.

fruma.
anthara. thridy6\

pirmuf
anlrd.
irechii.

^evTtpa, altera.
Tpira,
tertia.

thritya.

chaturtha^

tuirya.

Ttrapra, quarta.
TTfuirra,

ifidvdrdff). hetunrtcLt

cheiverta-ya.

panchama.
shashtha.

pugdha.
cstvd*
haptatha.

quintOf
$exta.

fimfio\
saihttff.

penkth.
sziszta.

pyala-ya.s
sitesla-ya.

KTa,
e/3$o/xa.

taptamd.
Mshlamdy

septima.
octava.

(^sibund6*)f sekma.

sedma-ya.

asiema.

oySod,
evvdra.

ahtudo.

aszma.
dewinta.
deszimth.
toienolikta.

osma-ya.
devyata-ya.^
desyata-ya*

navamaf
dasamd.
ikadasa.
vintati tamd.

nduma.
das6ma.

nana.
decima.
,

niund6\
taihund6\

SfKora,

aSvandaia,^ (vbeKara , undecimai {ainli/to'}.

vtsaititema
?

yedina-ya-naderyat
vtoraya-na-desyaty

et/coora.

vtcesima.

dwideszimti.

We should
'

read thus

297. for byare, as accusative singular (se

Olshausen, Vend. S.43).

More nauaWy paoirya, maac. paoiryd, by which the

is,

Sclavonic jjctt?^,

pervaya,
*

as

it

were, prepared.
masc. turiya-s, on which
is

Also turiydf

based the Zend

tiiirya,

masc. tuiryo.

The

suppression of the syllable cha might announce the

looser connection of the

same with the remaining portion of the word, and thereby support the conjecture expressed at $.311. The t ofpyataya, vas&c. pyatyiy has nothing in common with the t of the cardinal numberpi/a^i/; the proper primitive \ipya (see p. 430 Note f), whence FYATI by the suffix TI, and PfATO, fem. PYATA, by the The same holds good with regard to uffix TO, fem. TA (see $. 322.).
'^

shestaya in relation to shesty, &c.

By

transposition and syncope from csvasta, ns

must b expected from

319, Note *,
43o.

the cardinal number

6

MiMMi^

cuvas.

Regarding the d for

n, see . 317.

See

p.


ORDINAL NUMBERS.
" Remark.

453

been weakened to

the
pro,
is,

As the as
i

old

a of the preposition

U pra has
to

in quinque,

answering

pavchan
but

Latin prima appears distinct from the preposition

is

and
it

decidedly not derived from a

Roman

soil,

as

were, the continuance of the Indian prathamd, the

middle syllable being cast oat.

the vowel
is

similar weakening of
irpi'v,

exhibited in the Greek adverb

which

is

hereby, in like
preposition
tt/do.

manner, brought into connection with the

In the comparative prior only the pr of
is left,

the preposition, which forms the base,

as the

be-

longs to the comparative

suffix.

In Lithuanian the
itself

of

the superlative formation has introduced

the preposition pirm,
as prefix.
'

also

into

before

'

but the unaltered pra stands

'

To

the

same

base, however, belongs also pri,

by,

before,' as well isolated as prefixed.

The Gothic/r u ma shews

[G. Ed.
p. 464.]

the

same

relation to prathamd that the Latin

:

and Lithuanian do
from, and in
tive
'

the of /ru has arisen from a through

(. 66.).

the influence of the liquid

before,
by,'

In the cognate preposition

&c, the

original vowel

has remained,

this form,

as in the Lithuanian pirm^ the superla-

m is

contained.

On Upra

is

based, also, /aur,

'

before,'

with transposition of the u oi fru-ma, and with a prefixed,

according to
.

82.

NUMERAL ADVERBS.
324,

The adverbs
"four
ed.).
:

which

express

the

ideas

"twice,'
discussed

"thrice,"
(p.

times,"

have

been

already

435 G.

Let

the following serve for a general

iew of them
SAXSKRIT.

XXSD.
bis,

GSEEE.
Or?*

lATtW.
his.
ier.

OLD KORTHERir.
ivis-var (p.
ihris-var.

dwis.
tris.

436 G. ed.l

thris.

To/f,

chatur,*

chaihrus.

quater.

Acawding

to . 94. for chaturt.

45l
The Greek forms
gard to their
to the

NUMERAL ADVERBS.
in k/j like rerpaKis, irevraKt^, &c., in re-

suffix,

do not belong to this

(. 21.).

class,

but

Ktq

answers

a being weakened to i ; this sas, however, forms adverbs from words which express a great number, multitude or number, as katasast
Sanskrit sas

the

"by hundreds," sahasrasas, "by thousands," bahusast "of many kinds," ganasas, " in swarms." The original idea of
the suffix in both languages
satasas is
is that of repetition,

but

e.g,

an

indefinite repetition of a hundred, while in

CKaTovTctK/f the repetition is strictly defined

by the numeral.
like quinquies,

How
sexies,

stands

it,

then, with the Latin

forms

&c. ?

believe that in respect to their suffix they are

Big,

connected neither with the forms in s like dwis,

[G. Ed. p. 465.]

nor with
of the

those in Ktg
toties, quofies,

(sas),

by suppression

guttural

but as

evidently belong to this class,

which are also pronounced

quotiens, iotiens, this

probably

being the more genuine form, as in Greek, in a similar case,

rtdevs is

more genuine than

suffix

Tideig

(.

138.),

therefore

prefer bringing these forms in ens,

es,

into conjunction

with

the Sanskrit
signifies,
'*

vant (in

the weak

cases vat),

which
where,

in

pronominal bases, " much," but else-

gifted with,"

and the nominative of which

is,

in

Zend, vans, e.g. chvans,

suffix has, in Sanskrit, in

"how much,"

for

chivans,

Thi3

combination with the interrogai,

tive base

ki,

and the demonstrative base

laid aside the

v; hence kiy-ant, iy-ant

weak
;

form

kiyat, iyat

nominae.g. in

tive masculine kiydn, iydn

this ant for vant

answers theree/y),

fore to the
/ueA/Toe/f,

Greek

ENT

(nominative masculine

and also to the Latin

ens, in iotiens, quotiens,

which
the

indeed are, in form, masculine nominatives, but must also be

considered as neuters, as in the participles, too, in
nf,

masculine nominative has forced

its

way

into the neuter.

toti-ens
tot,
i

Now
quot,

comes

the question
tot-tens,

whether we ought to divide

quoti-ens,

or

quot-iens?

In the former case

this

would have

preserved, in

combination, the

NUMERAL ADVERBS.
which
skrit

455

belono^s to theai, for they are

tati,

based on the San";*

?ffTf

" so much," wfir

kati,

**

how much

and the
however,

ens in ioti-ens would, according to that, express the " time,'*

and

ioti,

" so much."

In

the division
tens,

toi-iens,

we

should have to assume that in

**

the abovementioned
is

demonstrative jrrn iyant,

ceived.

so much,''

contained, but in
suffix is still

such wise, that only the meaning of the

per-

Under
case,

this supposition quinqu-ies

[G. Ed.

p. 466.]

would, accordingly, express " five-somuch " (times); in the

former

however, the

i,

as quinqxii-es,

ocii-es,

would have

to pass as representative of the e

and o of qtdnque, odo,

In any case, howes,

and that of

sexies as

a conjunctive vowel, or as an accom-

modation to the prevailing analogy.

ever, the identity of the suffix ens,
anf,

with the Sanskrit

from

vant, is highly probable.

The Sanskrit expresses

;

the idea " times "* from five upwards by hpiwa*

panchakritwas, " five times."

as,

^^ch^KI
krit,

This kritwas comes from

"once,"
is

"making,** which in
the annexed vas,
for s (compare
.

sakrit,

sufficient of itself:
t

however, might, by exchange of the

156.

Note ), have arisen from

vat,

which

should be given above as the weak theme for vant ; as, idvatf

"so
kart

much," ydvat,
(. 1.)

"how much"
connected

(rel.)*

With

krit

from

is

clearly

the Lithuanian karta-s,

"time," a masculine substantive, which, like the defining

number,

is

put in the accusative, in order to

e.g.

make up

for

the adverbs under discussion;

wienan kartaUf "once,**

iris

du
is

kartu,

"twice"

(accusative

du),

kartus,

"three

times."

In Old Sclavonic the corresponding krat or kraty

not declined, and the former appears to be an abbrevia-

* These are neuters, which, in

common with

the nnmerals

l|<di

panchan, "five," &c.

(5. 313.),
;

have, in the nominative, accusative, and

;

vocative, a s-ingular form

in

in the other cases, plural terminations

while

Latin quot,

tot,

like quinque,

&c.,

have become completely inde-

clinable.

456

NUMERAL ADVERBS.
it

tion of the latter, for

cannot be brought into direct

comparison with the Sanskrit

kraiy,

krit

on account of .

255. (L):

however,

is to
V.

be deduced from

"^f^

krUwas, by sup-

pression of the
.271.
325.

With regard
suffix VT

to the

y for as compare

Through the

dha the Sanskrit forms ad-

verbs in sense and in form, corresponding to the Greek

in
5(;a,

which, therefore, have altered the

sound of the

suflix into

a corresponding guttural, by the usual exchange

of organ in aspirates, as in

OPNIX

for

OPNI0, and

in the

forms mentioned at
[G. Ed,
p. 467.]

p.

401 G. ed.

Compare,
^''"XO.

flW

dwi-dhd,*

ftnn iri-dhd,
^iT^T chatur-dhd,

t/oZ-^o.

rerpa-xo^
aevra-^a.

XRWT pancha-dhd,

Divided into two parts," Sav. V. lOa

SN1> OF VOIb

1.

14,

Hkkriktta Street, Covent Garden, London 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
;

)ATALOGUE

OF

SOME WORKS
NORGATE.
to the

PUBLISHED BY

WILLIAMS AND
gnostic's Progress,

An, from the Known

Unknown.

268 pp.
^s

Crown
tlantis,

8vo. cloth

Emanating from the or. Ideals Old and New. ; belonging to the Great Races, who conducted the past Course By a Disciple of of the Civilization, Culture and Education of Humanity.
the
Masters of
Buckle.

New

Man

Crown

8vo. cloth

4s 6d

lur (F. C.)

lated 2 vols. 8vo.

Church History of the

third

First

from the

German

Edition.

Edited by the Rev.

Libi-ary.

Three Centuries. TransAllan AIenzibs.

2 IS

Vide Theological Translation Fund

lur

(F. C.) Paul

the Apostle of Jesus Christ, his Life and

Work,

his Epistles and his Doctrine. Edited Primitive Christianity.

Contribution to the Critical History of by E. Zeller. Translated by Rev. Allan

Vide Theological Translation Fund

Menzies.

2 vols. Svo. cloth

an
Library,

eard (Rev. Chas.) Lectures on the Reformation of the Sixteenth Century in its Relation to Modem Thought and Knowledge. Hibbert (Cheap Edition, 4? 6rf) 8 vo. cloth. Lectures, 1883. 10 s 6d
sard

(Rev. Chas.)

Religion and Literature in France.

Port Royal, a Contribution to the History of Cheaper Edition. 2 vols. Crown Svo. i2s

2ard

(Rev. Dr.

J.

R.)

The Autobiography

of Satan.

Crown

cloth
ible for

75

Svo. 6d

to the

People. Critical, Historical, and Moral Hand-book Old and New Testaments. By Dr. H. Oort and Dr. J, Hooykaas, with the assistance of Dr. Kuenen. Translated from the Dutch by the Rev. Vols. L to IV., Old Testament, igs; V. VI., New P. H. Wicksteed. Testament, 1 2.y. Maps. 6 vols. Crown Svo. cloth 31J

Young

Edited leek (F.) Lectures on the Apocalypse. Svo. cloth Edited by the Rev. Dr. S. Davidson. Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

by T. Hossbach.
los 6d

Catalogue of some Works

Cobbe

(Miss F. P.)

The Hopes

of the

Human
With
a

Race, Hereafter and

Preface having special Crown 8vo.
5*

Here. Essays on the Life after Death. reference to Mr. Mills' Essay on Religion.
cloth

Second Edition.

Cobbe

(Miss F. P.)

Darwinism

in

Morals, and (13) other Essays.

Cerebration, 8vo. cloth

(Religion in Childhood, Unconscious Auricular Confession, etc. etc.) 400 pp.

Dreams, the

Devil, (pub. at los) 55

Cobbe (Miss
delivered in

F. P.)

The

Duties of
Clifton.

Women.

London and

Second Edition.
in

Course of Lectures Crown 8vo. cloth 5^

6d

Cobbe (Miss
and Death.

F. P.)

The Peak
Svo. cloth

Darien, and other Riddles of Life

7^

Crown
F. P.)

Cobbe (Miss
Svo. cloth

Broken Lights.

An

Inquiry into the Present

Third Edition.

Condition and Future Prospects of Religious Faith.

Crown
e^s

Cobbe (Miss

F. P.)

Dawning

Secular Results of the

New

Lights. Reformation.

An

Inquiry concerning the

5,v

Svo. cloth

Cobbe (Miss

F. P.)

Alone

to the Alone.

Prayers for Theists, by

Svo. cloth, gilt edges

several Contributors.

'Ihird Edition.

Crown

^s

Corvichen (R.)
Svo. cloth

The Philosophy

of

all

Possible Revelation, &c.

Post
7o

6d

Davids (T.

W.

Rhys) Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religionj

some Points
Svo. cloth
:

as illustrated by Lectures, iSSi.

in the History of Indian

Buddhism.

Hibbert 10s 6d

arranged as Private Meditations before a Echoes of Holy Thoughts First Communion. Second Edition, with a Preface by the Rev. J. Hamilton Thom, of Liverpool. Printed with red lines. Crown Svo. cloth 2s 6d
Evolution of Christianity, The.
with Dissertations
in

By Charles

Gill.

Second Edition,
12s

answer

to Criticism.

Svo. cloth

Ewald (Professor H.) Commentary on the Prophets of the Old TesTranslated by the Rev. J. Fred. Smith. Vol. L Yoel, Amos, Hozea, and Zakharya, 9-11. Vol. IL Yesayah, Obadya, Micha. Vol. IIL Nahum, Sephanya, Habaqquq, Zakharya, (12-14) Yeremiah. Vol. IV. Hezekiel, Yesaya (40-46) with Translation. Vol. V. Haggai, Zakharya, Malaki, Jona, Baruch, Appendix and Index. Complete in 5 vols. Svo. each 10s 6d cloth Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

tament.

Ewald (Professor H.) Commentary on the Psalms.

of the

(Poetical

Books

Old Testament.
Svo. cloth

Part

i.)

2 vols.

Translated by the Rev. E. Johnson, M.A. each los 6d

Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Published by Williams and Norgate.

Ewald (Professor H.) Commentary on the Book of Job.

Books,
cloth

(Poetical
8vo. 10s 6d

Part

2.)

Translated

by the Rev,

J,

Frederick Smith.

Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Gould (S. Baring) Lost and Hostile Gospels.

An

Account of the

Toledoth Jesher, tvvo Hebrew Gospels circulating in the Middle Ages, and extant fragments of the Gospels of the first three Centuries of Petrine and Pauline origin. By the Rev. S. Baring Gould. Crown 8vo. cloth. 7^ 6d

Hanson

(Sir

Richard)

The

Apostle Paul
Church.

and

the

Preaching of

Sir Richard Davis Hanson, Chief Justice of South Australia, Author of " The Jesus of History," " Letters to and from Rome," etc. 8vo. cloth (pub. at 12^) ys 6d
Christianit)^ in the Primitive

By

Hausrath.

History of the

New

Testament Times.

The Time

of

Jesus, by Dr. A. Hausr.\th, Professor of Theology, Heidelberg. Translated, with the Author's sanction, from the second German edition by the Revs. C. T. PoYNTiNG and P. Quexzer. 2 vols. Svo. cloth 21* Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Hibbert Lectures, vide Beard, Davids, Kuenen, Miiller, Pfleiderer,

Renan, Renouf,
Reville.

Home

(Rev. W.) Religious Life and Thought. By William Horne, ^LA., Dundee, Examiner in Philosophy in the University of St. Andrews Author of " Reason and Revelation." Crown Svo. cloth 35 6d

Jones (Rev. R. Crompton) Psalms and Canticles, selected and pointed

for Chanting.

i8mo. cloth
to the Music.

i^

5^ ^d 6d 6d
oj

Anthems, with Indexes and References

i8mo. cloth

is

The Chants and Anthems,

together in one vol.

2s

Book

of Prayer in 30 orders of

Worship,

for public or private Devotions.

i2mo. cloth

2s

The same with

'

the Chants.

i8mo. cloth
in its

Keim's History of Jesus of Nazara, considered

connection with

the National Life of Israel, and related in detail. Translated from the German by A. Ransom and the Rev. E. M. Geldart. In 6 vols. Svo. cloth each los 6d Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
) The Religion of Israel to the Fall of the Jewish Dr. A. Kuenen, Professor of Theology at the University, Leyden. Translated from the Dutch by A. H. May. 3 vols. Svo. cloth 31s 6d Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
State.

Kuenen (Dr.
By

Kuenen (Professor A.) Lectures on National

Rehgions.

Religions and Universal

6rf

Delivered in Oxford and London. By A. Kuenen, LL.D., D.D. 6' Professor of Theology at Leyden. Hibbert Lectures, 1882 loj

Catalogue of some Works

Macan (Reg. W.) The

in

Resurrection of Jesus Christ.

An

Essay
i,s

Three Chapters.
(R.

Published for the Hibbert Trustees.

8vo. cloth

Mackay

W.)

Sketch of the Rise and Progress of Christianity.

(pub. at los 6d) 6s

8vo. cloth

Martineau (Rev. Dr. James) Religion as Affected by Modern Materialism and Modern Materialism its Attitude towards Theology. A Critique
;
:

and Defence.

8vo.

is

6d
15 i*

The

Relation between Ethics and Religion.

Svo.

Ideal Substitutes for

God

considered.

Svo.

Mind

a Quarterly

Review of Psychology and Philosophy.

Contri-

butions by Mr. Herbert Spencer, Professor Bain, Mr. Henry Sidgwick, Mr. Shadworth H. Hodgson, Professor Flint, Mr. James Sully^ the Rev. John Venn, the Editor (Professor Croom Robertson), and others. Vols. I. to X., 1876-85, each 125. Cloth, 135 6d 12s per annum, post free

Miiller (Professor Max) Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religion, as illustrated by the Religions of India. Hibbert Lectures, 1878. Svo. cloth 10s 6d

Oldenberg (Prof. H.) Buddha: his Translated by William Hoey, M.A.,

gilt

Life, his Doctrine, his

D.Lit.,

Order.
Asiatic Cloth,
i8s

Society, Asiatic Society of Bengal, &c., of

Member of the Royal H.M. Bengal Civil Service.

of Universal

Peill

(Rev.

G.)

The

Three-fold
Svo. cloth

Basis

Restitution.
3*

Second Edition.

Crown

Perrin (R. S.) Knowledge

Religion of Philosophy ; or. The Unification of A Comparison of the Chief Philosophical and Religious Systems of the World, made with a view to reducing the Categories of Thought, or the most general terms of existence, to a single principle, thereby establishing i6s a true conception of God. Svo. cloth

The

Pfleiderer (O.) Paulinism. Essay towards the History of the Theology of Primitive Christianity. Translated by E. Peters, Esq. 2 vols.
Svo. cloth

An

21*

Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Pfleiderer (Professor O.) Lectures on

the Influence of the Apostle

Paul on the Development of Christianity. Translated by the Rev. J. Smith. Hibbert Lectures, 1885. Svo. cloth

Frederick
10* 6d

Poole (Reg. Lane)

in the

Illustrations of the History of

Medieval Thought,
10* 6d

Departments of Theology and

Ecclesiastical Politics. Svo. cloth

Protestant

Commentary,

Short,

on

the

New

Testament, with

From the German of Hilgenfeld, HoltzGeneral and Special Introductions. mann, Lang, Pfleiderer, Lipsius, and others. Translated by the Rev. F. H. each 10^ 6d Jones, of Oldham. 3 vols. Svo. cloth Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Published by Williams and Norgate.

Renan
of

the Influence ot the Institutions, Christianity, and the Development Translated by the Rev. C. Bearx>, of Liverpool. (Cheap Edition, 25 6d) 8vo. cloth
(E.)

On

Thought and Culture

of the

Rome on

Cathohc Church. Hibbert Lectures, 1880.

los

6d

Renouf (P. Le Page) Lectures on the Origin and Growth of

as illustrated by the Religion of Ancient Egypt. Second Edition. 8vo. cloth

Religion,
10s

Hibbert Lectures, 1879.

6d

Reville

(Prof. Albert) Prolegomena of the History of Religions. By Albert Reville, D.D., Professor in the College de France, and Hibbert Lecturer, 1884. Translated from the French. With an Introduclos 6d 8vo. cloth tion by Professor F. Max Muller.

Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.

Reville (Prof. Albert) Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religion, Translated by the as illustrated by the Native Religions of Mexico and Peru. Rev. P. H. WicKSTEED, M.A. Hibbert Lectures, 1884. 8vo. cloth 105 6d

Samuelson

(Jas.) Views of the Deity, Traditional and Scientific ; a By James Samuelson, Contribution to the Study of Theological Science. Esq., of the Middle Temple, Barrister-at-Law, Founder and Former Editor of 4s 6d Crown 8vo. cloth the Quarterly Journal of Science.

Savage (Rev.

M. J.) Beliefs about the Bible. By the Rev. M. J. Savage, of the IJnity Church, Boston, Mass., Author of " Belief in God," " Beliefs about Man," &c., &c. 8vo. cloth 7* 6d
The Cuneiform
Inscriptions

Schrader (Prof. E.)

ment.

Translated with Additions by the Author, by the Rev. O. C. house. Vol. I. with a Map. 8vo. cloth

and the Old TestaWhitelos

6d

Schurman

Kantian Ethics and the Ethics of Evolution. by J. Gould Schurman, M.A., D.Sc, Professor of Logic and Metaphysics in Acadia CoUege, Nova Scotia. Published by the Hibbert
(J. G.) Critical Study,

Trustees.

8vo. cloth

jS

Seth (A.)

The

Development from Kant to Hegel, with Chapters on

the Philosophy of Religion.

of Logic

By Andrew Seth, Assistant to the Professor and Metaphysics, Edinburgh University. Published by the Hibbert
8vo. cloth

Trustees.

55

Sharpe

(S.) History of the

Hebrew Nation and

its

Literature, with

an Appendix on the Hebrew Chronology.

cloth

Fourth Edition.

487 pp.

8vo.
ys

6d

Sharpe

(S.) Bible.

The Holy
;

Bible, translated

by Samuel Sharpe,

Fourth Edition of the being a Revision of the Authorized English Version. 4J 6d Old Testament Eighth Edition of the New Testament. 8vo. roan

Sharpe

Testament. (S.) The 14th Thousand, fcap. 8vo. cloth Text.

New

Translated

from Griesbach's
is

6d

Catalogue of some Works

Smith (Rev.

J.

Fred.)

Studies in Religion under

German
By

Masters.
<^s

Essays on Herder, Goethe, Lessing, Franck, and Lang.

the Rev. J.

Frederick Smith,

of Mansfield.

Crown

8 vo. cloth

Spencer (Herbert) Works. The Doctrine of Evolution. First Principles. Sixth Thousand
Principles of Biology.
Principles of Sociology. 2 vols,
Principles of Psychology.

8vo. cloth
i6s

Fourth Thousand. 2 Third Edition. Vol. I.

vols.

34^ ^6s 21s

7^ lis 5s Ss

Principles of Sociology. Vol. II. Part r Principles of Sociology. Part 2 Vol. II, Ecclesiastical Institutions. Principles of Sociology. Vol. II. Part 3 The Data of Ethics. Principles of Morality. Fourth Thousand. Part
Political Institutions.

Ceremonial Institutions.

Spencer (Herbert)

The Study

of Sociology.

the Ninth), with a Postscript. 8vo. cloth Education (Cheap Edition, Seventh Thousand, 2s 6d) Third Edition Essays. 2 vols. Essays (Third Series). Third Edition

Library Edition (being 105 6d

6s i6s
85

Spencer (Herbert)
paper, in cloth

The Man

versus

the State,

Spencer

Dissenting

(Herbert) from

The Philosophy
it.

(Republished

of from

M. Comte
" The

Reasons

or on better 25 6d
for
the
of

Classification

Spinoza.

6d Essays, by Professors J. Land, Kuno Fischer, Van Vloten, and Ernest Renan. Edited, with an Introduction, by 8vo. cloth Professor W. Knight, of St. Andrews. 55
Sciences," &c., 1864)

Four

Stokes (G. J.)

The

Objectivity of Truth.

By George

J.

Stokes,
;

late B. A., Senior Moderator and Gold Medallist, Trinity College, Dublin Hibbert Travelling Scholar. Published by the Hibbert Trustees. 8vo. cloth ^s

Strauss

(Dr.

D. F.)

New

Life of Jesus,
2 vols. 8vo. cloth

for

the

People.

The
24J

Authorized English Edition.

Taine

(H.)

English Positivism.

Translated by T, D. Haye.'

Second Edition.

Study of John Stuart Crown 8vo. cloth

first

Mill.
35

Talmud of Jerusalem.

Translated for the

time into English by

Vol.
I,

Dr. Moses Schwab, of the Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris. Foolscap 4to. Treatise of Berakhoth (Blessings).

The
gs

Tayler (Rev.
8vo, cloth

J. J.) Fourth Gospel, especially in

An

Attempt
its

to Ascertain the Character of the

the
first

relation to

three.

New

Edition.
55

Ten

Services of Public Prayer, taken in Substance from the " Common Prayer for Christian Worship," with a few additional Prayers for particular Days. Crown 8vo. cloth, 2s 6d; with Special Collects 3s 32mo. IS; with Special Collects i* 6d Psalms and Canticles. (To accompany the same.) Crown 8vo. is 6d With Anthems 2d

Published by Williams and Norgate.

Thoughts

for every

day

in

the Year.

Selected from the Writings of

"Visiting

By the author of Spiritually-minded Persons. Crown 8vo. cloth Printed within red lines.
Theological Translation Fund.

my

Relations."
2s

6d

Series of Translations,

by which

the best results of recent Theological investigations on the Continent, conducted without reference to doctrinal considerations, and with the sole purpose of arriving at truth, will be placed within reach of English readers. literature which is represented by such works as those of Ewald, F. C. y Baur, Zeller, Roth, Keim, Noldeke, &c. in Germany, and by those of Kuenen, Scholten, and others in Holland.

The Prospectus, Three Volumes annually, for a Guinea Subscription. bearing the signatures of Principal Tulloch, Dean Stanley, Professors Jowett, H. J. Smith, Henry Sidgwick, the Rev. Dr. Martineau, Mr. W. G. Clark, the Rev. T. K. Cheyne, Principal Caird, and others, may be had.
23 Volumes published (1873 to 1%%^) for ii. lis. Protestant Commentary, a Short, on the New Testament. 3 vols. Keim's History of Jesus of Nazara. 6 vols. 2 vols. Baur's Paul, his Life and Work. 2 vols. Baur's Church History of the First Three Centuries. Kuenen. The Religion of Israel. 3 vols. Ewald. Prophets of the Old Testament. 5 vols. Ewald's Commentary on the Psalms. 2 vols. Book of Job. Ewald. Bleek, on the Apocalypse. Zeller, on the Acts of the Apostles. 2 vols. Hausrath's History of the New Testament Times. 2 vols.
Pfleiderer's Paulinism.

2 vols.
2 vols.

Reville's

Prolegomena of the History of Religions. Schrader's The Cuneiform Inscriptions and the Old Testament.-

[n the Press.
Pfleiderer's Philosophy of Religion. 2 vols. All new Subscribers may purchase any of the previous volumes at "js instead of selection of six or more volumes from the list may also be 10s 6d per volume. had at the Subscribers' price, or 7^ per volume.

Vickers (J.) The History of Herod or, Anothef- Look at a Emerging from Twenty Centuries of Calumny. Crown 8vo. cloth
;

Man
6s

Williams (Dr. Rowland)

and
illustrated for

The Hebrew Prophets. English Readers. Two vols. Svo.

Translated afresh
cloth

22s 6d

Wright (Rev.
cloth

J.)

Grounds and Principles of Religion.

Crown

Svo.
3s

Zeller (Dr. E.)

The Contents and

Origin of the Acts of the Apostles,

Preceded by Dr. Fr. Overbeck's Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles from De Wette's Handbook. Translated by Joseph Dare. 2 vols. Svo. cloth 21s Vide Theological Translation Fund Library.
critically investigated.

Catalogue of some Works published by Williams

and Norgate.

PAMPHLETS.
Athanasian Creed. Two Prize Essays. By C. Peabody and C. S. Kenny Bastard (T. H.) Scepticism and Social Justice Beaumont (Rev. G.) Science and Faith. Discourse Beard (C.) William Ellery Channing. In Memoriam. Sermon. i2mo.
\s

is is

Beard (C.) The Kingdom of God. A Sermon Beard (C.) The House of God, and two Sermons by Rev. R. A. Armstrong i^ Bennett (W.) Popular Contributions towards a Rational Theology is 6d Butler's Analogy A Lay Argument. By a Lancashire Manufacturer is Carpenter (Prof. J. Estlin) The Church of England during the Middle Ages i^ Drummond (Prof. J.) Philo and the Principles of the Jewish- Alexandrine Philosophy i^ Drummond (Prof. J.) Religion and Liberty is Gordon (Rev. A.) Gospel Freedom. A Sermon 6d Hopgood (Jas.) Disestablishment and Disendowment of the Church of
:

6d 6d

England

Hopgood

(Jas.)

An

Attempt

to Define Unitarian Christianity

6d 6d
is is
is

Infinite Love.

Creed. Two Discourses Meditation Jesus of Nazareth and his Contemporaries

Howe

(Rev. C.)

The Athanasian

Journey to Emmaus.
Lisle (L.)
of
its

By

a
:

Modern

The Two Tests own Rules. Cloth

Traveller the Supernatural Claims of Christianity tried by

2*

two
6d 6d
i^ is

i^

Marriage of Cana, as read by a Layman Martineau (Rev. Dr. James) New Affinities of Faith Union. 1 2mo.

a Plea for free Christian

Must God

Annihilate the

Wicked

A
:

Reply

to Dr. Jos. Parker

Odgers (J. Edwin) Our Church Life its Significance and Value Reasonable Faith, A, the Want of our Age Sharpe (S.) Journeys and Epistles of the Apostle Paul Sidgwick (H.) The Ethics of Conformity and Subscription Tayler (Rev. J. J.) Christianity: What is it? and What has it done? The Recent Prosecutions for Blasphemy Who was Jesus Christ ? 8vo. sewed Wicksteed (Rev. P. H.) The Ecclesiastical Institutions of Holland. 8vo.

6d
i.y

is

6d
i^

is
is

6d
i*

WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,

14,

HENRIETTA STREET, CO VENT GARDEN, LONDON; AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.

Oniversity of Toronto

Library

DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD FROM

THIS

POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. "Ref. Index FOe"

Made by LIBRARY BUREAU